Skip to main content

Full text of "Encyclopaedia Britannica Dict.A.S.L.G.I.11thEd.Chisholm.1910-1911-1922.33vols."

See other formats

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 
to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 
publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 

We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 

at http : //books . google . com/| 





•dition, pobUihad 

in thrat tdorncs, 

1768— 1771. 




ten „ 

1777— «784. 









ivrmty „ 

xSox— i8xa 




twttitjr „ 





tWttltf M 

1833— 1834. 




twttity-oot u 





tmnty-tito n 





twttit]r«nvv 11 




ninth fldiuoo snd cwrcn 





19x0— X9X I. 












Copyright, in the United Sutet of America, 191 1, 


TheEocydoiMBdie Briteaaka Compeay. 




rttxD Bradley Gouob. M.A.. P9.D. ( 

Sometime CaUxrd Scholar of St John's CoUefe. Oifofd. English Lector at thel 
UnivenUyof Kid, 1896-1905. ^^ I 


See the tnogiaphical article: Swimbuuib, Algbbmom Cbablbs. I 

CU8TX7S Edwabd Houoh Lovb, M.A., D.Sc.. F.R.S. f 

Sedleian Profesaor of Natural Philo«>phy in the University of Oxford. Secretary J 
to the London Mathematical Society. Hon. Fellow of Qjueen's CoUc«. Oxforcl ; | 
formerly Fellow of St John's CoUeoe. Cambridge. (. 

IL C. 8. Alcerkon Crables Swinbubne. / 

See the tnogiaphical article: Swimbubmb, Algbbmom Cbablbs. I 

A. ■. S. Ifc AucusTps Edwabd Hough LovBj^M.A., D.Sc.( F^R.S. 

'_L\__ _ . SLi - "-—"-- " _.. ViftoftoM, Cilailiii 4L 

formeriy Feliow'<rf St John's CoUegeVCambi^^ 

IL F. Ite Abtbub Fbancis Leach. M.A. f 

Barrister-at-Law, Middle Temple. Charity Commissioner for England and Wales. J mui muHaIm 
Formerly AssisUnt Secretary to the Board of Education. Fellow of All Souls 1 ""^ »iww«fc 
College, Oxford, 1874-1881. Author of Bn^h Schools ai Iht BtiformtUioni &c. «• 

IL F. P. AiBEBT Fbedebick Pollabd, M.A.. F.R.H1ST.S. r 

P r ofe s sor of English History in tne University of London. Fellow of All Souls J _ ._..«. ^ , 
College, Oxford. Assistant Editor of the DuHcnary rf National Bioirapky, i893~i Vtmugli, PIttro 1 
IQOI. Lothian Priseman, Oxford, xtea; Arnold Priaeman, 1898. Author of 
Aifbml flMdcr Iho FroUUor Somenot; Honry VJJI.; UJeof Thomas Cranawr; Ac ^ 

A. Gb. Sib Abchibald Geiqe, 1LC.B. /vMnvfiM tim a.i»a 

See the biographical article: GsxEa. Sib Abchibald. L ^•»^" ^ f^'- 

A. Ga* Rev. Auxamdeb Gobdon, M.A. f UnitetlMilnB; 

Lecturer on Church History in the University of Manchester. I VaMM* iUB de. 


Augustus Hemby Keame, LL.D., F.R.6.S.. F.R.Antbbop.Inst. fm^^n. «r_,t aa^ #• *--a 

Emeritus Professor of Hindustani at Univenity College, London. Author of 4 Tnvmi North AJrkaUft parOi 
Blkaohgy; Mam Past amd FruttU; Tho World's FtopUs; Ac I Unl-Altato. 

Snt A. Houtum-Schzmdleb, CLE. J »•»!• r^bA »§ 

General in the Penian Army. Author of Eulcni PsfnM /niJk. -J^ unnia, LBM oi. 

See the bM^^Si^ article: JOHM8TOM,ALBZAM]nB. {VvU^SMm: History (imparO. 

A. J. O. Rev. Alexamdeb Jahes Grieve, M.A., B.D. r 

Professor of New Testament and Church History. Yorkshire United Independent J n^Hi. e* tj^ a>..a 
College. Bradford. Sometime Registrar of Madras University, and Member of 1 unwa> St (m part), 
Mysore F^ucational Service. L 

A. J. L. Amdbew Jackson Lamoubeue. r -^^-^,.. /i.«^^ai« 

Ubnrian, College of Agriculture. ComeU University. Editor of the JUo Nomi ▼•"•«?^5 Geography 

(|Uo de Janeiro), X879-1901. \ Statistics. 

BEW Lang. 

See the biographical article: Lamg, Amdbew. -j^TOitniiiiiL 

Ttoyvs: Counts of Troyts; 

Auguste Longnon. 

Professor at the ColMge de France, P^ris. Director of the ficole des Hautes Etudes. 
Chevalier of the Lejoon of Honour. Author of Liore des oassaux du Comti de Cham' . 
pagite et de Brie; Ciotrapkie de la Gaede on VI sikle; Alias hislorique de la France 
depmis dsarjusqn'A nosjonrsi Ac 

Rev. Allan Mensies, M.A.. D.D. 

. Allan Mensies, M.A., D.D. r 

Professor of Divinity and BibUcal Criticism. St Mary's College, St Andrews. AuthorJ UBltedltMChlffthOfSeotlBlll. 

U History of ReKgioniac. Editor <it Ratiew ef Theoloiy and Philosophy. [ 

AuTB^ MoBsi^FAno. 

Ptofessor of Romance Languages at the ColUge de France, Paris. Member of the J v.^* Csnio (m ^arii. 
InstHute of France; Chevalier of the Legion of Honour. Secretary of the Ecole 1 "^ ^^^ ^ ' 
des Chartes, 188S-1906. Author of L'£f^sgiMaiiXK/«e<a«XK/^f«k<M. ' 


' A complete list, showing all individual contributors, appears in the final volume. 





Sm dM bioimpyatl wtkk: Newtoh. ALrsBA. 

A«» Pmt RiLun. MJ)., If .P. 

Author of SMiil ASrtam Stmkim\ Tim C»mmommuX\ Ac Served in Kaifir War, 
i87S-i979> PutuBt witli Dr L. S. Jameson in South Africa till 1896. Member of 
RdTorm GMamittcei JokaBnesburK. and political prisoner at Pretoria, 1895-1896. 
M.P. (or the Hitchin Diviaoa of Herts, 191a 

Ite Rxv. Aucusns RomuiT Bocuand, M.A. 

Secreury of the Reltg«otts Tract Society, London. Morning Preacher, Foundling 
UoipitaC LoMkm. AaOMtUThtHmciM^Uissumsiac 


Consnhing EagiaMr and Chacteitd JPMent Agent. 

Abtbvi Symoms. 

Sat the biocraphkal article: 

Symoms, AmrnuB. 

jlhet: Trod SodiHa. 




Formerly Scholar of St John's College, Oxford. Bacon Scholar of Gray's Inn, 190a 

AuzAMDCt Wood Rutton, M.A., LL.B. 

Puisne Judge of the Supreme Court of Ceylon. Editor dl Bmeydcpatdia of tk$ Laws 

Bbanosk BCatthews, A.M., LL.D., Lm.D., D.C.L. 

Profeaaor of Dramatic Literature. Columbia Univenity, New York. President of , 
the Modem Language Asso ci a t io n of America (1910). Author of French DramatuU 
^ tk$ tgtk C$nUtry;ac 

Sn BovEKTON Redwood, D.Sc, F.R.S. (Edin.), F.I.C., AssocInst.CE., 
Adviser on Petrdeom to the Admiralty, Home Office, India Office, Corporation of 
London, and Port of London Authority. President of the Society of Chemical 
Industry. Member of the Council of the Chemical Society. Member of Council of 
the Institute of Chemistry. Author of Cantor LoOurts on FtlroUumi PetroUum 
and fO Produds; Cktmical Teckmology; &c 


St Catharine's College, Cambridge. Barrister-at-Law of the Inner Temple. J Tonnm. 
Formeriy Editor of The Navy, and Secretary of the Royal Statistical Society. ' * 

Author of Hints on th* Legal Duties of Shipmastetsi &c 

Okailes Aethue Conakt. 

Member of Commission on International Exchange of U.S.. toot. Treasurer. 
Morton Trust Co.. New York. 1902-IQ06. Author of History of Modem Bonhs 
cf Issue; The Principles of Money and Banhtng; &c 

Rxv. Chaeles Andeeson Scott. M.A. 

Dunn Professor of the New Tesument. Theological College of the Presbyterian 
Church of England. Cambridge. Author of U^fUas, Apostle of the Cothsi Ac 

Catbbbine Beatbice Philups (Mes W. Auson Pbilups). 
Associate of Bedford College. London. 

Cbaeles Ceawfoed Wbimeey, A.m. 

Cornell University. Assistant Editor I ith Edition of the Encyclopaedia Brilannka, 

Hon. Caeeoll Davidson Weight. 

See the biographical article: Wright, Caeeoll Davidson. 
Sn Chaeles Noeton Edgcumbe Euot, K.C.M.G.. LL.D., D.CL. 

Vice-chancellor of Sheffield University. Formerly Fellow of Trinity College. 

Oxford. H.M.'s Commissioner and Commander-in-Chief for the Bntish Etut 

Africa Protectorate; Agent and Consul-General at Zanzibar; Consul-Geoeral for 

German East Africa. 1900-1904. 

Chaeles Feanos Atkinson. 

Formeriy Scholar of Queen's College. Oxford. Captain. 1st City of London (Royal 

Fusiliers). Aaxbot U The Wilderness and Cold Harbor. 
Caelton Huntley Hayes, A.M., Ph.D. 

Asnstant Professor of History in Columbia University. New York. Member of the 

American Historical Association. 

Sot Chaeles James Lyall, K.C.S.L, C.I.E., LL.D. (Edin.). 

Secretary. Judicial and Public Department. India Office. London. Fellow of 
King's College, London. Secretary to Government of India in Home Department, 
188^1894. Chief Commissioner. Ontral Provinces, India, 1895-1898. Author of 
Translations of Ancient Arabic Poetry; Ac 

Gael Theodoe Miebt, D.Th. 

Professor of Church History in the University of Marburg. Author of PuUiiistik 
im Zeitalter Gregor VIL ; QueUen anr GeschichU das Papsttkums; &c 

Chaeles Raymond Beazley, M.A., D.Lrrr., F.R.G.S., F.R.Hist.S. 

Professor of Modem History in the University of Birmingham. Formeriy Frilow 
of Merton College. Oxford, and University Lecturer in the History of (Geography. 
Lothian Prixeroan, Oxford. 1880. Lowell Lecturer. Boston, lipi. Author of 
Henry the Navigator; The Damn of Modem Ceogjraphy; Ac. 

Itoit Compaaj . 

-{ UDleon. 

/ United 
I part), 

Itadt UDloat: 


Eiatary (M 

TnuiSYial: History iin par^y, 
TunniM, Vleomto de; 
ItQM of God; 
Urban IL-VL 


Trtnt, Coimea ot; 
Vatiean Coonoll^ TIm 

VarOMma, Lndovloo dis 
VispiMd, Amtrlgo. 



Sn Chakles Wiluax Whson, K.C.B., K.C.M.G.. F.R.S. (1836-1907). 

Major-General, Royal Engineers. Secretary to tne North American Boundary 
Commission. Diiector-General of the Ordnance Survey, 1686-1894. Director- 
General of Military Education, 1895-1898. Author of Frvm KorH tQ Khartoum 


Commission. Diiector-General of the Ordnance Survey, 1886-1894. Director- 1 Van: Twkty (m fori). 
General of Military Ed • - - "- . . , t. - !^ -. . I ^ 

Lije oS Lard Oim\ Ac 
D. B. Ma. DrmcAN Black Macoonaio, M.A.. D.D. f 

Professor of Semitic Languages, Hartford Theological Seminary, Hartford, Conn. J ttubm. 
Author of Dewetopment of Muslim Tkeoloty, JuHsprudgnu and CatuHiutioHal] 


Thtory; SeUctions'from l6n KkaUun; Rdipous'Aui&de Md Life tu'lstami Sec, I 

D. C B. DiUETRius Cbailes Boxtlgek. f 

Author of England and Russia tn Central Asia' History 0/ Chsna; Life of Cordon; J T n , i.,..i 
India imtkeigtk Centuryi History of Belgium; Belgiats Ufe i» Town Md Country;] ^"™X- 

n. C & DaKIZL COIT CXIICAN. f flntmnrmitUM TTs^t^ Ci , 

See the biognphical article: GnJCAM. Daxibl Coit. -J^ UntlWiMw: Umttd Stales, 

n. 0. T. David Cxoal TBomson. f 

Formerly Editor of the ilrf Journal. Author of The Brothers Maris; The Barhiaon i TtOJW, ComteBt 
School (iPttimters; Ufe of **Pkia"; Life of BewUh;9uu I 

n. F. T. Donald Francis Tovey. f 

Author of Essays in Musical Analysis', comprising The Classical Concerto, The\ VarilflODi. 
Goldberg Variationst and analyses of many other clstsicil works. t 

n. O. H. David Geoige Hogaitb, M.A. 

Keeper of the Ashmolean Mnaeum, Oxford, and Fdlow of Magdalen College. 
Fellow of the British Academy. Excavated at Faphos, 188^; Naucratis, 1899 and 


TrlpoU: Syria; 

Tny and Ttoa4 (m part). 


Tonrrffle, Comte dt; 

Ikafalgar, Battli oL 


1903: Ephesus, 1904-1905: Assiut, 1906-1907. Director, Brhish School at 
Atteiis, 1897-1900. Director, Cretan Explocatioa Fund, 1899. 

D. H. David Hannay. 

Formerly British Vice-Consul at Barcelona. Author of Short History of the Royal 
Naoy; Ufe of EmUio Caslelar; &c 

BLBL* Esnest Chasles Fiancois Babelon. 

Professor at the Colftee de France. Keeper of the Department of Medals and 
Antiquities at the Bibiiothkiue NationaJe. Member of the Acad^mie des In- 
scriptions et Belles Lettres, Paris. Chevalier of the Legion of Honour. Author of 
Description* Historiques des Monnaies de la lUpublioue Romaine; Traitis des 

K. CL BL Rt. Rev. Edwaso Cuthbert Butler, O.S.B., M.A.. D.Litt. J i!S5ll!Sll.L-. 

Abbot of Downside Abbey, Bath. Author of '' The Lausiac History of PWUdlus." 1 j™"?"?' 
in CasnbridgisTesU and Studies, v6L.\u i. Vallomhnwiaw. 

B:K.A. Ernest E. Axtstem. /-,_^ . 

Assisunt in the Department of Zoology, Natural History Mnsenin, South 1 iMlM-flj. 
Kensington. ^ 

BL F. B. Edward Fairbrother Strange. f 

Assisunt Keeper, Victoria and Albert Museum, South Kensington. Member of •{ UtaniafO. 

Council, Japan Society. Author of numerous works on art subjects. Joint-editor I 
of BcU's ^' Cathedral '^ Series. ^ 

BL O. EouuND GossE. LL.D., D.C.L. 

See the biographical article: Gosss, Edmund. 

TopeUns, Zakrli; Triotot; 
Troabadow; nonvAn; 
Usk, Thomas; 

BLfla. Ehile Garckb. M.Inst.E.E. 

Managing Director of the F 
EU^tcal Undertakings; &c 

BL S. M. Euis HovBLL Minns, M.A. 

IE Garckb. m.Inst.E.E. r 

Mana^g Director of the British Electric Traction Co., Ltd. Author of JImmI of} Itamvaj. 

is Hovbll Minns, M.A. f 

University Lecturer in Palaeography, Cambridge. Lecturer and Assistant Librarian < 1 

at Pembroke College, Cambridge. Formeriy Pellow of Pembroke College. [ 


B: J. W. 0^ EiiAS John Wildnson Gibb. /Tnrtaiw- FiL»^am^ 

Trinslator of several Turkish books. |Tlirk»y. UUratMn, 

BL K. 0. Edhund Kercbever Chavbers. f 

Assisunt Secretary, Board of Education. Sometime Scholar of Corpus Christi | 
College. Oxford. Chancellor's English Essayist, 1891. Author of The Medieval -i Van^han. Thomaa. 
Stage. Editor of the " Red Letter " Shakespeare; Donne's Poems; Vaughan's '•"•'"^ *»wii«fc 

VER, Ph.D.,D.Litt., LL.D. f 

r of Ancient History in the University of Beriin. Author of Ceschichte des<\ 
nr; Ceschichte des alten Aegyplens; D%e Israeliten und ihre Nachharstdmme. {_ 

BLa* Edmund Owen. F.R.C.S., LL.D.. D.Sc. [Tongue: Smgffr, 

Consulting Surgeon to St Mary^s Hospital. London, and to the Children's Hospiul, J ToDSlOitls; Utow; 
Great Ormond Street, London. Chevalier of the Legion of Honour. Author of X | VarlMna Veins: 
Mammal of Anatomy for Senior Students. I y^ngi^ DIseeiea. 

BLI^ Rsv Etbxlred Luke Taxtnton, (d. X907). /Tteniianiaida.Tboniaa. 

Aatbaroi The BngfishBlachMonhs of St Benedict; History of the Jesmits in Engfand,\ * ' 





F. G. IL B. 
















EiMEST WiLUAic HOBSON, M.A.. D.Sc.. F.R.S., F.R.A.S. 

Fellow and Tutor in Mathematict,Chnst'«Colkffe,CAfflbridl«e. Stokes Lecturer in 
Mathenatke io the Unavenity. 


Fellow of the British Academy. Formerly Fellow of Univenity College, Oxford. 

Editor of Th$ AncutU Armtman Ttxts cjAristotU, Author ci.Mylkt Matic and 

Morals; Ac 
FiANK Dawson Adams, Ph.D.. D.Sc., F.G.S.. F.R.S. 

Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science and Lo^n Profenor of Geology, McGill 

Univernty. Montreal. President of the Canadian Mining Institute. Author of 

Fipcrs daJing with problems of Metamorphism ; &c 

FuDECiCK Geoicb Meeson Bece, M.A. 

Fellow and Lecturer of Clare College, Cambridge. 

Fkederxck Gymee Paxsons, F.R.C.S., F.Z.S., F.R.AinHEOP.lNST. 

Vioe-PKiident, Anatomical Society of Great Britain and Ireland. LeAurer on 
Anatomy at St Thomas's Hospital, London, and the London School of Medicine for 
Women. Formerly Hunterian Pirofessor at the Royal CoUege of Surgeons. 

Fbancb John Haveetielo, M.A.. LL.D.. F.S.A. 

Camden Professor of Ancient History m the University of Oxford. Fellow of 
Brasenoae College. Fellow of the British Academy. Forroeriy Censor, Student. 
Tutor and Libcarian of Christ Church, Oxford. Ford's Lecturer, 1906-1907. 
Author of Monographs on Roman History, especially Roman Britain ; ftc 

FkEOEBicK Jaceson Tubmee, M.A., LL.D., Litt.D., Ph.D. 

Professor of History. Harvard University. Formerly Professor of American 
History at the University of Wisconsin. Anthoi cl Riu €f tki Ntm Wost; Ac 

Sol FkEDEBxcK Polloce, Bart., LL.D., D.C.L. 
See the biographical article: Polloce (Family). 

Fbank R. Cana. 

Author of Soulk Africa from Ike Great T>ek la Ike VnioiL 

FkANcn RiCBAED Maunsell, C.M.G. 

Lieut.-Col.. Royal Artillery. Military Vice-Consul. Sivas, Trebiaood. Van (Kurd- 
istan), 1897-1898. Military Attach^ British Embassy, ConsUntinopIe, I90I>I90S. 
Author of Central Kurdistan ; &c 

FkANCis Samuel Phzlbbick, A.M., Ph.D. 

Formerly Fellow of Nebraska Sute UniverBty and Schobr and Resident Fellow 
of Harvard University. Member of the American Historical Associatioo. 

FkAMCB Watt, M.A. 

Barrister-at-Law, Middle Temple. 

FkEOEBicK William Gamble^ D.Sc., F.R.S. 
Professor <^ Zoology, Birmingham University. 

Zoological Laboratories and Lecturer in Zoology. University of Manchester, 
of Awtmal Ufe. Editor of Marshall and Hurst's PracHeal Zooloty\ Ac 

Formerly AssisUnt Director of the 

FiiDEBiCK Wiluam Rtjdleb, LS.O., F.G.S. 

.Curator and Librarian of the Museum of Practical Oology, 
Prtsident of the GeologisU' Associatioo, 1887-1889. 

London. 1897-1903. 

Gboboe a. Boulenoeb, D.Sc.. F.R.S. 

In charge of the Collections of Reptiles and Fishes, Department of Zoology, British 
Museuou Vice-President of the Zoological Sobety of London. 

Rsv. Gbobce Aibeet Cooee, M.A., D.D. 

Oriel Professor of the Interpreution of Holy Scripture, Oxford, and Fellow of Oriel 
College. Canon of Rochester. Hon. Canon of St Mary's Cathedral, Edinbuiyh. 
Author of Text-Book of North Semitic Inscriptions: Ac 

Rev. Geoeoe Edmundson, M.A., F.R.Hist.S. 

Formeriy Fellow and Tutor of Brasenose College, Oxford. Ford's Lecturer, 1909. 
Hon. Member Dutch Historical Society, and Foreign Member, Netherlands Associa- 
tionof Literature. 

Geobgb Edwabd Dobson, M.A., M.B., F.Z.S., F.R.S. (1848-1895). 

Army Medical Department, 186S-1888. Formeriy Curator of the Royal Victoria 
Museu m, Ne tlcjT. Author of Monograph of Ike Asiatic Chiroptera; A Monograph of 

Rsv. Geobce Hebbeet Box, M.A. 

Rector of Sutton Sandy, Beds. Formeriy Hebrew Master, Merchant Taylocs' 
School, London. Author of Tramstatian of the Book of Isaiah; Ac 

GeoEgb James Tdenee. 

Barrister^-Law. Lincoln's Inn. Editor of SeUa Pleas ef the Forests tot the Sdden 

Sib Geoeoe Reid, LL.D. 

See the biographical article: Reid, Sie Gboegb. 



VEDdAli (m part). 


Vtsenkr System: Anatomy; 

Veins: Anatomy. 


United fltetes: History {in 


Ttansfial: Geography ami 
SlaUsHcs and History (m 

THpon: North Africa {in part^-, 

Thuib(mi parDiTnlL 

Van: Twhey (in part). 

United States: Population 
and Social Conditions; 

Pinanea and Army. 

TtMSon ItOTS. 



Tyn Un part). 

Umeht: Proeina {in pari). 















cal Study of] 

Rev. Geoecb Wxlus Cooke. 

Lecturer at Rand School of Social Sdenoe, New York. Author of CnOcal 
Bmnson't History of Unitariamsm mi Amtrica', Womam mi tko Progrou 

HowABD Adams Casson, A.M. f 

Civil Engineer. Past Preddent of the Boston Society of Civil Engioeeri. Formerly J 
Chief Engineer of the Boctoa Transit Commiaaion. In chaife of designing and con- 1 
structing the Boston Subway, the East Boston Tunnel; Ac I 

Hugh Chisholm, M.A. f 

Formerly Scholar of Corpus Christi CoUen. Oxford. Editor of the I ith edition of < 
the Encyclopaedia Britanuica; Co-editor of the loth editioo. L 

Rev. HiFPOiYTE Delehaye, S.J. 

BoUandist. Joint-editor of the Ada Sametonm and the Analtcta Bo tt o Mdian a. 

Hmv Edwaxd AxiiSTRdNO, Pe.D., LL.D., F.R.S. 

Professor of Chemistry at the City and Guilds of London Central Institute. South * 
V — : — ._ Author of Introdfuhon to tki Sttidy of Orgflmc Chemistry. 

UnlteifiBlmi: UmUtd States. 

I: Hitlery (M pari^. 



Horatio Robeet Fobbes Brown, LL.D. 

Editor of the Calendar ^ Venetian State Papers^ for the Public Record Office. 
Author of Life on the Lanoons; Venettan Slmdusi John Adding^ Symends, a 
Biogtapkyi Ac 

Hans FrieDrich Gadow, F.R.S,, Ph.D. f 

Strickland Curator aind Lecturer on Zoology in the University of Cambridge. •{ 
Author of "AmphibU and Reptiles ''in the OuHlhruiif Natural Htstory. { 

Rsv. Hemrv Fansbawe Tozer, M.A., F.R.G.9. 


Hon. FeOow. formerly Fellow and Tutor of Eiceter College. Oxford. Felkm of the 

British Academy. Corresponding Member of the Historical Society of Greece. << 

Author of History t^ Ancient Geography; C la ssic al Geography: Ltetmres on the I 

Geography efCrtecei &c. 

Hehri Smow Hyxans, Pe.D. 

Keeper of the Biblkithdque Royale de Bdgiqve. Bnusela. Author of RsAens: ta 
wie ot son mnore. 

Rbbex Leomidas Hast, LL.D. 

R Haxxltoii Fyfb. 

Special Correspondent of the Daily MaH; Dramatic Critic of The World. Author 
el A Modem Aspasia; The Nem Spirit in Egypt: Ac 

Sir Harry Haxhton Jobmston, G.C.M.G., K.C.B., D.Sc., LL.D. 
See the Uographkal anide: Jobmstom, Sir H. H. 

Horace Lamb. M.A., LL.D.. DSc. F.R.S. 

Pkofessorof Mathematics. University of Manchester. Formeriy Fellow and Assistant 
Tutor of Trinity College. Cambridge. Member of Council of the Royal Society. • 
1894-1896. Royal Medallist. 1903. President of the London Mathematical 
Society, 1909-1904. Author of Hydrodynamics; Ac. 

Hugh Lohgbourne CAxxEia>AR, F.R.S., LL.D. 

r iro f es s oi' of Physks. Royal College of Sdenoe. London. Formeriy Pftifessor of 
Pbyska in McGm College, Montreal, and in University CoUege. London. 

Harriet L. Hbmnessy, M.D. (Brux.), LJLC.PX. L.R.C.S.L 

Herbert Levi Osoboo; A.M., Ph.D. 

Professor of History at Columbia Unsvcnity. New York. Author of The American 
Celonits in the ^ttuMtmnth Cenlnryi Ac 

Hector Mukro Chaowick, M.A. 

Fellow and librarian of Clare College, Cambridge. Author of Studies on Angfo-. 
Sanon InsHHOiens. 

Hugh Mumo Ross. 

Formeriy Exhibitioner of Lincdn College. Oxford. Editor of The Times Eiiglneer' 
ing SnpplemenL AaOm <d British RaOieays. 

Harold Mellor Woodcock, D.Sc. 

Assistant to the Professor of Proto-Zoology. London University. Fellow of Uni- . 
venity College. London. Anthor of " Haemoaagellates *' in Sic E. Ray Lankester's 
Treatue on Zoology, and of various scimtific papers. 

Hemrt Sturt. M.A. 

Author of Idota Theatri; The Idea of a Free Ckarch; Personal IdeeUsm. 

Hemry Sweet, M.A., Pb.D., LL.D. 

Uaiverrity Reader in Phonetics. Oxford. Member of the Academies of Munich. 
Bcriin. Copenhagen and Helsingfora. Author of A History ef En^ish Sounds since 
the BarUett Period; A Handbooh of PhonoHes; Ac 

Rzv. Isaac Morgan Atwood, M.A., D.D., LL.D. 

Secretary of the Universalist Geneial Convention. Asaodate-editor of the I^m- 
eerseUst Leader, Boston. General Superintendent of the Univeraalist Church, 
1898-1906. Anthor of Lates<H^ortfi»fl7MMriaMnn: Ac 

Joseph Amdersow. LL.D. 

Keeper of the National Museum of Antiquities, Edinburrii. and Assistant 

of the Society of Antiquaries of Scotland. Honorary Professor of Antiquiti 
the Royal Scottish Academy. Author of Scotland m Early Christian —' ' 



Ufuda; mvfora. 

Vsetor ABslnik 


UtaltodStetM: iriHsrylMi parO-^ 


lypopapliy: Modem PraOieal 
Typogra^ (in parti. 


t Secretary [ 
Ciquities to J 
and Pagan I 


J. A* R JOBK Ambsosb FLEHfifO, M.A., F.R.S.» D.Sa f 

Fender PkofcMor of Electrical Engineerinff in the Uoivcnity of London. Fellow of J Tramtarmmrm* 
Univenity CoUece. London. Fonneriy Fdlow of St John'* CoUese, Cambridge, and 1 triSfcr mI-!Si 
Lectttzer on Applied Medianict in the Univenity. Author of iTagncte amd EUctric ""■» "^«- 
Cmnmtu ^ 

J. A. & John Aixkn Howe. rTAnMAniMii- 

Curator and Ubcarian of the Mnaeum of Pkactical Geology, London. Author of i ii™.'^' 
7Th« Gtobgy of Bmidimg Stones, L TTM«te SjsteBL 

J. Br. RiCBT Hon. James Biyce, D.C.L., D.Lrt. 

See the biographical article: Betcb, Jamis. 

i. 0. IL JOHH GiAY M'Kendmck, M.D.. LL.D.. F.R.S., F.R.S. (Edin.). (l^^^l ._, „. 

Emeritw Profeaor of Phynologv in the University of Glassow. PhjfeMor of •{ Vaseokr fiyftom: Htstcry 
Phynology, 1 876-1906. Author ol Life i» MoHou; Ltft of HdmkottM; &c I '-^ Discotery, 

1. Bt James Baxtlett. 

Lecturer on Construction. Architecture, Sanitation. Quantities, Ac., at King's. 
CoUege. London. Member of the Society of Architects. Member of the Institute 
of Junior EngineerB. 

J. B. ■• James Bass Mulunger. M»A. 

Lecturer in History, St John's ^ , 

in History and President of the CamGridge Antiquarian Society. Birld)ec1c Lecturer i UlltVUSitflB. 
in Eodenastical History at Trinity Collc»e, Cambridge. 1890-1894. Aut" ' ' 
History of the Unmrsiiy ef Cambridiei ThoSckooU of cSuioslke Gnat; &c 

91. 0. B. RXGBT Rev. John Cutkbert Hedley, O.S.B., D.D. 

R.C Biskiop of Newport. Author of The Holy Eaukarist; dac (. 

l.Fw-K. James FtTZMAUiiCE-KELLY, LiTT.D., F.R.H1ST.S. r 

Gihnour Pro f ea s or of Spanish Language and Lheratnre, Liverpool Univernty. I TrUSliaoB; 

Norman McCoU Lecturer. Cambridge University. Fellow of the British Academy. ^ Valum y Aklli GsUsBO^ Juaa; 

Member of the Royal Spanish Academy. Kmght Commander of the Order of I Veta CBnio (in tart) 

Alphonso Xn. Audior oTl History of Spamsh literatun; Ac L ''■"■ **^" ^'" '^'' 

l.F.W. John Fobbes White, M.A., LL.D. (d. 1904). JveluoiMS (iu tarii 

Joint-author of the Life and Art ofG, pTOukun, RSA.x Ac \ ''•"V" ^«» r^"'* 

J.O. H. Joseph G. HoxNEB, A.M.LMECR.E. J.^. 

Author of PlaHng amd BoiUr-Makiugi PraOieal Metal-Tunnui; Ac \ '^■- 

^I.D.. LL.D.. F.R.S., F.R.S. (Edin.). f J""* 

hyriology in the Umversity of GlaMow. P lrofesso r of < "■■®' 
\uthariA Life in MotioniUft of HdmkottM; atu [ of 

J. B. H. John HeNXY HeSSEU, M.A. /Trannmiihv WiMl^i^ 

Author of Cnlenberg: on Historical InwesUgflUom, -j^Hrpofimphy. Htstory, 

J. H. IL Jomr Henxy Midoleton, M.A., Litt.D., F.S.A., D.C.L. (1846-1896). f „ /. _* 

Slade Professor of Fine Art in the University of^ Cambridge, 1886-189X. Director VtrOBB (tn part), 
of the FitxwilUam Museum. Cambridge, 1889-1892. Art Director of the South i Veiroeehto, Andnt dal; 
Kensington Museum, 1893-1896. Author of Tke Engraved Gems of Classical VestB (in tart). 
Times; lUnmimatod iiamucriptson Classical and UediaeoJ Times, I ''"" ^"^ ^^'' 

J.B.R. Jom HOBACB Round. M.A., LL.D. r_ ._ ^. 

Balliol College. Odord. Author of Fendal EmgfoMd; Stndies m i>Mrafs and Famayi Van (Pamay), 
History; Peeragjt and Pedigrm, I 

1. J. T. SkB Joseph John Thomson, F.Sc., LL.D., Ph.D., F.R.S. r 

Cavendish Professor of Experimenul Physics and FeOow of Trinity College, | 
Cambridge. Pkesident of the British Association, I909-I9ia Author of it Treatue< Vaennm TObt. 
on tke Motion ef Vortex Rhus; Application of Dynamks to Pkyiks amd Ckemistry; 
Recent Rssearckes in ElectrieUy and Magnetism; Ac I 

1. !..• Sn Joseph Labmob, M.A.. D.Sc., LL.D.. F.R.S. _ ^ f 

Fdlow of St John's College. Cambridge, and Locasan Pkofessor of Mathematics J „ ,^ 
in the University. Secretary of the Royal Society. Pkofesrar of Natural Philo--^ "™"» 
•ophy. Queen's College. Galway. 1880-1885. Author of Ether and Matter, and 
various memoirs on Mathematics and Physics. ^ 

J. L. BL D. JoBN Louis Emil Dbeyeb. f 

Director of Armagh Observatory, hathoi <d Planetary Systems from TiaUs to <TnJUliQttkb, 
Kepler; Sac I 

J.L.W. Jessie Laidlay Weston. /i 

Author of Artknrian Romances wwepresenied in Malory \ 

h 0- JOBAH OunxELD, M.A., D.CL., M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P. f , 

Barriscer-at-law. Senior Physician of the Lady Marnret Fruitarian Hospital, •{ ^ 
Brooley. Authur of Myrrh and Amaranth; The Voice of Nature; Ac t 

J. 0. B. John Ouveb Boblsy, M. A. / ikivUng. Butniwy ud BstftBi. 

Gonville and Caius CoUege. Cambridge. \ iu*, «««uii •« -.mi^ 

J. P^B. James Geobge Joseph Pendebel-Bboobubst. f Vsmls. 1 

Editor of the Cmardian, London. \ 

1. F. fi. Rev. John Punnett Petebs, Pb.D., D.D. 

Canon Residentiary. Pirotestant Episcopal Cathedrsl of St John the Divine in New 
YorkCty. Fonneriy Professor 01 Hebrew. Univenity of Pennsylvania. In charge, nw 
of the Expedition of the Univernty of Pennsylvania to Nippur. 1888-1895. Author ^ 
of Scriptures, Hebrem and Christian; Nippur, or Explorations and Adventures on 


Authoc 6i A DiOtmury €f Typoimpky OMd 4i$ Aceet$9ry ArU; PraOkal P^^ 

J, S. P. John Smitb Flxtt, D.Sc, F.G.S'. fl^oaUte: ThMlvte: 

Pietrogimpher to the Geological SarVey. Formcriy Lecturer on Petrdogy in J tm„m, v.haIi^T 
Edinbttrgfa Univenity. NSfMedaUirt c^ the Royml Society of Edinburgh. 1 i™» Y*?*?*"^ 
Medallist of the GeoloiM Society of Undon. •- -• ' {Vtim {Geology)' 

X 8w K. Joseph Sbzeid Nicholson, M.A., Sc.D. r 

Profeaor of Political Economy at Edinbuigh UoiverKty. Fellow of the British J TJinrv 

1. 8. B. James Smith Reid, M.A., LL.D., Litt.D. r ..^^ 

Pnofeamr of Aadeiit Hutory and Fellow and Tutor of Gonville and Caiua College, f Tnjsa; 
Cambridge. Hon. Fellow, fonneriy Fellow and Lecturer of Christ's CoUem. < TMhnM; 
Browne's and Chancellor's Medals. Editor of editions of Cicero's Aeadoaria; De Varm If 

J. T. Bt. JOBM TMOMAS Bealbt. 

Joint-author of Stanford's Europe. Formeriy Editor of the SeoMirJI GsMm^klcel 
MagaMuu. Translator of SvenjHedin's Tkroutlk Asia, Central Asia and Ttbet; Ac 

Begiop (tit fori); 
Tngal (m part); 
Turkasteii {in part); 
UfA {Gotemment) {in part); 
Unl Mountalni (in part). 

h W. James Wiuiams, M.A;. D.C.L., LL.D. 

ES WiuiAMS, M.A^ D.C.L., LL.D. f 

All Souls Reader in Roman Law in the Uuversity of Oxford, and Fellow of Lincoln i Torton. 

College. Author of Wills and Snceession; &c I 

IMtMbk^p HslBildi von. 

i. W. Hik James Wycuytb Headlam, M.A. 

Suff Inspector of Secondary Schoob under the Board of Education, London. 
Formerly Fellow of King's College, Cambridge. Professor of Greek and Ancient 
History at Queen's College, London. Author of Bismarck and Ike Foundation of Ike 
German Empire I dtc 

i. W. !• Jeremiah Whipple Jenks. / lynaia. 

See the biographioa article : JBICES, Jbibmiab Whipple. \ ««■»•» 

{TMgoBoii; Itomte , 
IVomboiis (m Part); 
Tnunpet (m part); 
Tote; VsIVM. 

L C.* Louis CouKTAXTLD, M.A., M.R.C.S.. L.R.C.P. f ^ 

Formeriy Research Scholar. Middlesex Hospital Cancer Laboiatories. Author of < Tumoiir. 
Life-History of Pnenmocouns ; Ac. I 

L Do- Louis Duncan, Ph.D., M.Am.Inst.E.E. f 

Late Associate Professor of Applied Electricity at the Johns Hopldns University. J TMetloii. 
Baltimore. Md. Head of the Department of Electrical Engineering. Massachusetu | **^*»*^ 
Institute of Techndogy. I 

L 1. H. Leonaxo Erseine Hill, F.R.S.. M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P. f 

Lecturer on Physiology at the London Hospiul. Formerly Drmonstrator of J VMMiter «M«Am> PI^c^mLmw 
Physiology in the University of Oxford: and Assistant Professor of Physiology,] VtlSllltr Sysism. FMysMogy, 
Umvernty College, London. Author of Manual of Physiology i &c. I 

L J.* Lionel James, F.R.G.S. f 

The Tinus Special Correspondent in South Africa, 1899-1901. Renter's Special J t>.-.,..i. rr;,*.,^ /.•- ju»^\ 
Correspondent in the Chitral Campaign. 1894-1895. Author of With the Ckitral-] XSHBSfial. History {tn part). 
Bdi^ Forcei On the Heels of De Wet; Ac. Ac. L 

L. J. 8. Leonako James Spencex, M.A. r Torhemlta* Tramolita* 

Assistant in the Department of Mineralogy. British 'Museum. Formerly Scholar I i^^-lw^.u-V^i^Ml*. 
of Sidney Sussex College. Cambridge, and Harkness Scholar. Editor of the ^ TlWymlli, Vaoadllllti, 
Mineralogieal Uataxine. L V«ll?laiUte. 


Italian Foreign Office (Emigration Departhient). Formeriy Newspaper Corre- I TiMMnv l7/(«orv 
spondent in the east of Europe. Italian Vice-Consul in New Orleans. 1906; Phila- \ i~^ b.^.tJT''' 
delphia. 1007: and Boston, 1907-1910. Author of Itoltan Life in Town and vssptn, BieuiED. 
Country; &C, I 

■.Bfc. Uargaxet Bkyamt. /Tonrneiir, Cyril: Introditctiom 

\ and Bibliography. 
1. Q. Moses Gastei, Ph.D. 

Chief Rabbi of the Sephardic Communities of Ensland. Vice-President, Zionist 

Omgress, i8(>8. 1899. 1900. Ilchester Lecturer at GKaord on Slavonic and B^ntine . 


Literature. 1886 and 1891. Author of A New Hehrew Fragment of BeU'Sira; The 
Hebrew Version of the Seerelum Secretorum of Aristotle. 

%, I. T, Marcus Niebuhr Tod, M.A. ^ f 

Fellow and Tutor of Oriel College. Oxford. University Lecturer in Epigrapny. i VipUo. 
Joint-author of Catalogue of the Sparta Museum. { 

1.0. B.C. Maximiuan Otto Bismarck Caspari, M.A. . fTnehis: 

Reader in Ancient History at London University. , Lecturer in Greek at Buraingham i nmKrf^ {AncieiU). 
Umvernty, 1909-1908. t 

I.D.B; Newton DENNisoN meremess. A.M.. Ph.D. fUnltod Statos: Pasuut 

Author of Moryhnd as « proprietory Praoinee I ^f^^ 




















O^ALO Bauok, F.S.A. 

Editor of the Aniestor, I90»-I905. Hoa. 
Honourable Society of the Baronetage. 

Genraloght to Standing Council of the 


See the Uographical article: KaoroTiiK. PimcB P. A. 

Piter Chaimzss Mitchsll. M.A., F.ILS., F.Z.S.. D.Sc., LL.D. 

Secietaryof the Zoological Society of London. Univernty Demonstrator in Com- 
parative Anatomy and Assistant to Linacre ProfesMN' at Oxford, l888>i89i. 
Author of Outlines ofBiohoi ^^ 

Pmup Chzsney Yosuc. M.A. 

Magdalen CoUege. (Mord. Editor cl LttUrs tf Primuss EUaabttk of EnifoMd. 
Pbtxk GUIS, M.A., LL.D., Litt.D. 

Fellow and Claancal Lecturer of Emmanuel CoUege, Cambridge, and University 

Reader in Comparative Philology. Formerly Secretary of the Cambridge Philo- 

logictft Societ)^ 

Paul Geokgb Konodt. 

Art Critic of the Obstntr and the DaUy Mail. Formerly Editor of the Artist. 
Author dlTlfArtef Walttr Ovu\ VOaiquet: L«/e omf Work\ &c 

Pbdjp Lake, M.A., F.G.S. 

Lecturer on Physical and Regional Geography in Cambridge Univerwty. Formerly 
of the Geological Survey ol India. Author of MMotraph of British Cambrian- 
Tritobitos. Translator and Editor of Kayaer's Comparulmo Coology. 

Robert Ancbel. 

Archivist of the Department de TEure. 

Ricbard Alexander Streatfeild. 

Assisunt in the Department of Printed Booka, British Museum. Musical Critic of 
the Paily Graphic, Author of Masters of Italiam Music \ The Optra ; 9k, 

Tndor {FamUyX 


Tnrgil (m part); 
TurkattMi (m pari); 
Ufa {GoHmmen^ (mi part); 
Unl MooBtalBi (mi part). 




▼u PfSk (m part)} 
{in part). 

Sir Ricsard ClavErrouse JtSB, LL-D^ D.C.L., Lrrr.D. 
See the biographical article: Jbbb. Sir Richard C. 

ipby in the Oaiverstty of 1 

RoLLnr D. Salisbury, A.M., LL.D. 

Geologist in charge of Pleistocene Geology of New 
School of Science and Head of the Department of 

Reginald Innes Pocock, F.Z.S. 

Superintendent of the Zoological Gardena, London. 

Ronald Jobn McNeill, M.A. 

Christ Church, Oxford. Barrister^at-law. Formerly Editor of the S( James's 
Goarttc (London). 

Sir Robert Kennawat Douclas. 

Formeriy Keeper of Oriental Printed Bookaand MSS. at the British Museum : and 
Professor of Cnineee, King's College, London. Author of The Lamptat/t and Litera- 
ture pf China; doc 

RiCBARD Lydekker. M.A.. F.R.S., F.G.S., F.Z.S. 

Member of the Staff of the Geological Survey of India. 1874-1883. Author of 
Catalogues of Fossil MammaU, Rep&es and Birds im the BriHsk Museum; The Deer 
of AU Lands; The. Game Animals of Africa; 9au 

\l Geology, 


Vwdl, Gnlwppt. 
Vti9$ and T^tnd {in part). 


United Stetat: Cedcgy (m 


Tfht, Wat; 

IMBg Kno-faa. 


Robert Nisbet BaIn (d. 1909). 

Assisunt Librarian. British Museum, 

1885-1909. Author of ScandiiMna: the 

PolHical History of benmarh, Norway and Sweden, iSi3-i900; The First Ramanoos, 
i6i3-i7i< ; Slaoonie Europe: the Political History of Poland and Russia from 1469 
to ijgOi &c. 

R. PRENi Spiers, F.S.A., F.R.LB.A. 

Formerly Master of the Architectural School. Royal Academy. London. Past 
President of Architectural Association. Associate and Fellow of King's College. 
London. Corresponding Member of the Institute of France. Editor of Feriusson's 
History of Architeelure. Author of Architecture: East and West; Ac 

Robert Seymour Conway, M.A.. D.Lirr. (Cantab.). 

Professor of Latin and Indo-European Philology in the University of Manchester. 
Formeriy Professor of Latin in University College. Cardiff; and Fellow of Gonville 
and Caius CoUege, Cambridge. Author of The Italic Dialects. 

Roland Trusiove, M.A. _ , ^, ^ „ ^ ^ ^ 

Fellow, Dean and Lecturer in ClassKS at Worcester College. Oxford. 

Stanley Arthur Cook, M.A. _ , ,, , ^ ^ , 

Editor for the Palestine Exploration Fund. Lecturer in Hebrew and Syriac. and 
formeriy Fellow, Gonville and Caius College. Cambridge. Examiner in Hebrew, 
and Aramaic. London University. lOor-iooS. Author of Gloswy of Aramaic 
Jnsenptions; The hams Of Moses and the Code of Hammurabt; Cr&cal Notes on 
Old Testament History; ReHpon of Ancient PaUstinei 9t»: 


TordanshJoM, PMw; 
Tontoiwon, Coiut; 
VaMemar U U. u< IV. oC 

. VarbMEy, Istvsi. 


Trfnmphal Areh; 

















Stomit Monckton Copsman, M.A., M.D., F.R.C.P.. M.R.C.S., F.R.S. 

Medical Inspector to H.M. Local Ckyvemment Board, London. Medical Lecturer 
on Public Health at Westminster Hospital. Lt.-Col. and Divisional Saniury 
Officer. 1st London Division, Territorial Force Milroy Lecturer. Royal College of ' 
Physidaiis, London, 1898. Author of VacamahOH, its Natural History and PathO' 

Sot Sydmey Maiow Eakolky-Wilmot. 

Rear-Admiral (retired). Commanded H.M.S. " Dolphin " in Red Sea. 1885-1886. 
and assisted in the defence of Sualdn. Superintendent of Ordnance Stores, 
1900-1909. Author of Life of Viu-Admiral Lord Lyons; Our Naoyfor a Thousand 

SwoN Newcomb, LL.D., D.Sc. 

Set the biosraphical article: NtwcoMB, SmON. 


Tbomas Ashby, M.A., D.Lnr. 

Director of the British School of Archaeology at Rome. Formeriy Scholar of 
Christ Church. Oxford. Craven Fellow, 1897. Conington Priaeman. u)o6. Member' 
of the Imperial German Archaeological Institute. Author of Tko Classical Topo- 
t^f^y ^S ^ Roman Campagna, 

Tbouas Amdbkw Axcbeb, M.A. 

Author of The Cmsado of Richard /.; Ac. 

TtoOMAS Allan Inciam. M.A., LL.D. 
Trinity College, Dublin. 

Tbomas Ch&owdek Chambebliw, A.M., Pe.D., LL.D., ScD., F.G.S., 
F.A.A.S., && 
P f of cssor and Head of Department of Geology and Director of the Walker Museum. 
Uluversity of Chicago, investintor of Fundamental Problems of Geolosy at the 
Carnegie institute. Consulting Geologist. United States and Wisconsin Geological 
Survey. Author of Ctolofy of Wis€onsin\ Central Treatise on Geology (yrith R. D. 
Salisbury) ;&c 


Fellow of the British Academy. Fellow of All Souls College. Oxford. Professor of 
International Law and Diplomacy in the University of Oxford. 1 874-1910. Bencher . 
of Lincoln's Inn. Author of ^udies in International Law; The Elements of Juris- 
prudence; Alberici Gentilis de jure belli; The Lam of War on Land; Neutral Duties 
tu a Maritime War; Ac 


Aaastant Profeisor of History, WaUams College, Williamstown, Mass. 

Tbohas Hoogkin, D.C.L., Litt.D. 

See the biographical article: Hoocbin, Thomas. 

Ite RiGBT Honourable Lord Shaw or Dunfeimune. 

LordofAppeaL M.P. for Hawick District, 1893-1909. Lord Advocate for Scotland. 

lte>i(Aa Seocombb, M.A. 

BaUiol College. Oxford. Lecturer in History. East London and Birkbcck Colleges. 
University 01 London. Sunhope Prizeman, Oxford; 1887. Assistant Edit<M' of 
Dictionary of National Biography, 1891-1901. Author of The Age of Johnson; &c. 

Stt Vincent Henry Penalver Caillaro. 

Director of Vickers, Sons & Maxim. Ltd.; and the London, Chatham & Dover 
Railway. Formerly President of the Ottoman Public Debt Council, and Financial 
Representative of England. Holland and Belgium in Constantinople. Author of 
Imperial Fiscal Reform. 

Victor Charles Mabillon. 

Principal of the Conservatoire Royal de Muaque at Brusiels. Chevalier of the Legion ' 
of Honour. 

Rev. Willzak Augustus Brbvoort Coolidge, M.A.. F.R.G.S. 

FeUow of Magdalen College, Oxford. Professor of English History. St David's < 
College, Lampeter, 1880-1881. Author of Guide to Switterland; The Alps in Natute 
and us History; Ac. Editor of the Alpine Journal, 1 880-1889. 

WiLUAX Abbot Herdkan, D.Sc., F.ILS. 

Professor of Natural History in the University of Liverpool. President of the 
Linnean Society, 1004. Author of Report upon the TunuQta collected during the 


UrftBOS (Astrommy)', 
Vsnns {Astronomy), 
Tortona; TniMiil; 
TrailBMiM, Laks; Trebnla: 
Turin; Tuirfi Llblsoiiis; 
Tttsauy: Geography; 
Tnsottlnm; l^ndaris; 
Udina; Umbrla (Modern); 
Valeria, Via; Varia; Vasto; 
VeU; VeMa; VeUa; 
Veltotrl; Venaflrum; Venusla; 
VwMlIi; Verooa (m part); 
Vtsuvliis (in part), 

[vtvOktBt (in part), 

I UnemplQyiiMiit; VafiiiMf> 

United StataK Geology 
(in part). 



Walter Auson Phillips, M.A. 

Formerly Exhibitioner of Merton College and Senior Scbobr of St John's College, 
Oxford. Author of Modem Europe; &c 

Wilhelm Boussbt, D.Tb. 

Professor of New Testament ExeBesis in the University of Gdttlngen. Author of 
Das Wesen dor ReUgiion; The Antichrist Legend; Ac. 

Urban VH. and VIII, 

Vandab (in part), 

Vtrgniaad, Pfom. 
Vanbnifh, Sir John. 

Turkqr: Geography and 

Trombone (in part); 
lYumpet (in part). 

TSsffer, RodolplM; IVsnt; 
TMiudl; Unterwalden; 
Uri; Valali; Var; Vand. 

Utrseht: Prooineo (in part)i 
Valtt; Vavanor; 
Verona, CongrMS of; 

Valtnttniis and tbe 












Sift WiLUAM Edmund Gasstin, G.C.M.G. 

Governing Director. Suez Canal Ca Formerly Inspector-General of Irriffation, 
Egypt, and Adviser to the Ministry of Public Works m Egypt. 


Barriftter-at-Law, Inner Temple. Lecturer on Criminal Law, King's CoOege, 

London. Editor of Archbold's CrimiHal Pleading (93rd edition). 
Walcot Gibson, D Sc^ F.G.S. 

Geologist on H.M. Geological Survey. Author of Ths CM-heannt Rocks of Ou S. 

Transvaal; Minoral WealA of Africa; The Gooioty of Coal and Coat Miming; &c 
Walter Lynwood Fleiono, A.M., Ph.D. 

Professor of History in Louisiana Sute University. Editor of Documentary History 

of RuoHstmcHon ; &c 

WlLUAlf McDouGAiL, M.A. 

Wilde Reader in Mental Philosophy in the University of Oxford. Formerly Fellow • 
of St John's CoUegCi, Cambridge. 

WiLLXAH MacDonalo, LL.D. 

Professor of American History in Brown University. Providence. R.I. Professor of 
History and Political Science at Bowdoin, 1893-1901. Author of History and 
Cooemnunt of Maine; &c Editor of SeleU DocumenU illnstratiot of the History of 
tko United Stales; Ac j ^ j 

William Morus Davis, D.Sc., Ph.D. 

Professor of Geology in Harvard University. 
Geography. Author 61 Physical Geography; iK» 

Formeriy Professor of Physical 

William Prideaux Courtney. 

See the biographical article: CouiTMftY, L. H. Baiom. 

WiLUAM Richard Morfill, M.A. fd. 1910). 

Formerly Professor of Russian and the other Slavonic Languages in the University 
of Oxford. Curator of the Taylorian Institution, Oxford. Author of Russia: 
Slaoonic Literature; ftc 

William Robertson Smith, LL.D. 

.See the biographical article: Smith, William Robbrtson. 



Iteoa iim parO. 

Xtadt Htrki {in part); 
Tttuoii; TtiMl; VeniM. 

ItlOSTMl: Geology. 
UbIob LMfm of Amnfei, 



Van BvM^ MarttB. 

United Stetet: Physical 
Geography and CiMMle. 

TDokBb John HonM. 
TmcmiileY, Ifaa. 
Tyn (m part). 



TtoBope, Anthony. 

UUeMt, Korllti. 

Valeneia (Pravinu). 




Valeneia {CUy), 






Ttof (II.Y.). 





United Kingdom of Great 




Britain and Ireland. 

VaUa, Lorpnio. 


Ttehalkovsky. Poter. 




United Provinees of Agra and 


Townshond, VIseonnt 

Tuke {PamUy). 



Trade, Board of. 


United States Haval Aeade- 

VanderbUt, GonmiBS. 

Trade GrgaBlzaUon. 



Vane, Sir Heniy. 

Trade Unions (m part). 





Torgot, Anne Robert 







Turkey: HUtory. 


I^nek, Ftani. 


Urinary 9ntOBi. 

Venesuela: History. 

Tweeddale, MarqneiMfl of. 


Venue's F^trap. 

.Trenton (1I.J.). 

Xyndale, wmiam. 



Itesham, Ftendi. 

lyndall, John. 





Usher, James. 

Vemet {Family). 




Vemey (FamUy). 


Typhoid Fbfer. 


Vernon. Edward. 


Typhus Ftofer. 

Utiea (H.T.). 









TONAUTB, in petrology, a rock of the diorite class, first 
described from Monte Adamello near Tonale in the Eastern 
Alps. It may be described as a quartz-diorite containing 
biotite and hornblende in nearly equal proportions. The prin- 
cipal felspar is plagiodase, but orthodase occurs also, usually 
in small amoimt. Those varieties which are rich in orthoclase, 
in addition to plagiodase, have been called quartx-monzonites 
or adamellitcs, but a better term is grano-diorite, which has 
been very generally adopted in America for rocks which are 
intermediate in character between the granites and the diorites. 
The hornblende of the diorites is green, sometimes with a tinge 
of brown; the biotite is always brown and strongly pleochroic. 
Often these two minerals are clustered together irregularly or in 
parallel growths. They have generally a fairly strong tendency 
to idiomorphism, but may sometimes enclose plagiodase fel- 
spar in ophiUc manner. Both of them decompose to chlorite, 
epidote and carbonates. The plagiodase felspar, which may 
form more than one-half of the rock, is andesine or oligoclase; 
simple crystals are rare, the majority being complex growths 
with centres of felspar rich in lime, while in the external zones the 
proportion of soda felspar increases greatly. The inner portions 
have often well-defined, but very irregular, boundaries, and are 
sometimes sponge-like, with the cavities filled up with a later, 
more add deposit. This seems to indicate that growth has 
taken place in stages, alternating with periods when the 
crystallized felspar was eroded or partly dissolved. The ortho- 
dase sometimes forms irregular plates endosing individuals 
of plagioclase. Quaru occurs both in irreguUr simple grains 
and as micropegmatite. Occasionally pale green pyroxene is 
visible in the centre of crysuls of dark green hornblende. The 
accessory minerals apatite, magnetite and zircon are always 
present, and very common also are orthite in coffee-coloured 
zonal prisms practically always endrded by yellow epidote, 
and reddish-brown crystals of sphene, simple or twinned. 

In external appearance the tonalites are very like the granites 
bat usually darker in colour. Tonalite-porphyritet often accom- 
pany them, having the same composition out with phenocrystt 
of feUpar. quartz, hornblende and biotite in a fine-grained ground- 
oiasa. Veins and threads of fine grey rock, mainly composed of 
quartz and felspar, often intersect tonalite- masses and have been 
called tonalite-aplites. seeing that they bear the same relations to 
aplitcs as the aplites do to the granites. They contain more soda- 
lime felspar than the normal aplites. Towards their margins 
the larger alpine masses of tonalite often assume banded or gneissic 
fades, due apparently to movement during intrusion. 

In eastern Urol another tonalite occurs at Rieserferner; there 
is also a well-known mass of this rock near Traversella. In the south 
of Scotland (Galloway district) tonalites accom^ny bomblende- 
and biotite-granites, hornblende- and augite-diorites. The newer 
granites of the Highlands of Scotland in many places pass into 
tonalites. especially near their margins, and similar rocks occur in 
Ireland in a few places. Grano-diorites have been described from 
California, and rocks of very similar character occur in the Andes, 
Paugonia and the lesser Antilles. Tonalites are also said to be 
frequent among the igneous rocks of Alaska. (J* ^ ^•) 

TONAWANDA, a dty of Erie county. New York, U.S.A., 
about IX m. by rail N. of Buffalo on the Niagara River at the 
mouth of Tonawanda Creek (opposite North Tonawanda), 
and on the Erie Canal. Pop. (1900), 7421, of whom 1834 were 
foreign-bom; (1910 census), 829a Tonawanda is served 
by the New York Central & Hudson River and the Erie railways, 
and is connected with Buffalo, Niagara Falls and Lockport by 
electric lines. The industries depend chiefly on electric power 
generated by the Niagara Falls, z z m. distant. There are rolling- 
mills, planing-mills, ship-yards, and blast-furnaces, and among 
the manufactures are wooden ware, flour and paper. The 
surrounding region was the scene of hostilities during the Seven 
Years' War, and the War of 1812. The first permanent white 
settlement was made about 1809, and Tonawanda was in- 
corporated as a village in 1854 and was chartered as a dty in 
1903. The name of the dty is an Indian word said to mean 
" swift water " 

TONBRIDOE [Tunbkidge], a market town in i.he Tanbridge 
or south-western parliamentary division of Kedt, EcigLAiid, 
29I m. S.S.E. of London by the South Eajstern lie Chaiham 
railway. Pop. of urban district (1901), ii,7jA. It is sjtuaied 
on rising ground above the river Medway, which u crossed by a 
stone bridge erected in 1775. The church of St Feier ind St 
Paul, chiefly Decorated and Perpendicular, with ume ponions 
of earlier date, was completdy restored in i87g> There are 
remains of an andent castle, consisting rhicfly oF a finely pre- 
served gateway, of the Eariy Decorated period, Banked by two 
round towers. The castle was formerly defended by three 
moats, one of them formed by the Med way. Tonbridgc School 
was founded by Sir Andrew Judd, lord mayor of London in 
the time of Ednrard VI., and was rebuilt in 1B65, remodeUi^d 
in 1880, and extended subsequently. Omamentd ariitlca of 
inlaid wood, called Tonbridge ware, chk&y sold at Tonbridge 
Wells, are largely manufactured. There are guupovidef mills 
on the banks of the Medway, and wooL-sUpling, brewing 



tanning axe carried on. Thexe is some traffic on the Medway, 
which is navigable for barges. 

Tonbridge owed its early importance to the castle built by 
Richard, earl of Clare, in the reign of Henry L The castle 
was besieged by William Ruf us, was taken by John in the wars 
with the barons, and again by Prince Edward, son of Henry III. 
After being in the possession of the earls of Clare and Hert- 
ford, and of the earls of Gloucester, it became the property of 
the Staffords, and on the attainder of the duke of Bucking- 
ham in the reign of Henry VIII. was taken by the Crown. It 
was dismantled during the Qvil War. The lords of the castle 
had the right of attending the archbishops of Canterbury on 
state occasions as chief butlers. 

TONDBRlf, a town of Germany, in the Prussian province of 
Schleswig-Holstein, on the Widane, 8 m. from the North Sea at 
Hoyer, opposite the island of Sylt, and 42 m. by rail N. W. from 
Flensburg. Pop. (1900), 4244. Tondem was in early days a 
seaport, but since the reclamation of the marshes and the dredg- 
ing of the Widane navigation has ceased, and vessels load and 
unload at Hoyer, with which the place has direct railway com- 
munication. The trade consists chiefly in agricultural produce 
and cattle, and there is an important horse market. 

In the village of Galhus, lying about 4 m. N., were discovered, 
in 1639 &n<l >734 respectively, two golden horns of the Scandi- 
navian period; these were stolen in 1802 from the Museum of 
Northern Antiquities in Copenhagen, where they had been 
treasured, and have never been recovered. • 

See Kantens. DU Stadl Tondem (Tondem, 1861). 

TONB, THIOBALD WOLFE (1763-1798). Irish rebel, the 
son of Peter Tone, a Dublin coachmaker, was bom in Dublin 
on the aoth of June 2763. His grandfather was a small 
farmer in county Kildare, and his mother was the daughter of 
a captain in the merchant service. Though entered as a student 
at Trinity College, Dublin, Tone gave little attention to study, 
his inclination being for a military career; but after eloping 
with Matilda Witherington, a giri of sixteen, he took his degree 
in X786, and read law in London at the Middle Temple and after- 
wards in Dublin, being called to the Irish bar in 1789. Though 
Idle, Tone had considerable ability. Chagrined at finding no 
notice taken of a wild scheme for founding a military colony 
in the South Seas which he had submitted to Pitt, he turned to 
Irish politics. An able pamphlet attacking the administration 
of the marquess of Buckingham in 1790 brought him to the 
notice of the Whig club; and in September 1791 he wrote a 
remarkable essay over the signature " A Northern Whig," of 
which 10,000 copies are said to have been sold. The principles 
of the French Revolution were at this time being eagerly em- 
braced in Ireland, especially among the Presbyterians of Ulster, 
and two months before the appearance of Tone's essay a great 
meeting had been held in Belfast, where republican toasts 
had bMn dnink with enthusiasm, and a resolution in favour 
of the abolition of religious disqualifications had given the first 
sign of political sympathy between the Roman Catholics and 
the Protestant dissenters of the north. The essay of " A 
Northern Whig " emphasized the growing breach between the 
Whig patriots like Flood and Grattan, who aimed at Catholic 
emancipation and parliamentary reform without disloyalty 
to the connexion with England, and the men who desired to 
establish a separate Irish republic. Tone expressed in his 
pamphlet unqualified contempt for the constitution which 
Grattan had so triumphantly extorted from the English govern- 
ment in 1783; and, himself a Protestant, he urged co-operation 
between the different religious sects in Ireland as the only 
means of obtaining complete redress of Irish grievances. 

In October 1791 Tone converted these ideas into practical 
policy by founding, in conjunction with Thomas Russell (1767- 
X803), Napper Tandy (9.V.) and others, the society of the " United 
Irishmen." The original purpose of this society was no more 
than the formation of a political union between Roman Catholics 
and Protestants, with a view to obtaining a liberal measure of 
parliamentary reform; it was only when that object appeared 
to be unattainable by constitutional methods that the majority 

of the members adopted the more uncompromising opinions which 
Wolfe Tone held from the first, and conspired to establish an 
Irish republic by armed rebellion. Tone himself admitted 
that with him hatred of England had always been '* rather an 
instinct than a principle," though until his views should become 
more generally accepted in Ireland he was prepared to work 
for reform as distinguished from revolution. But he desired 
ta root out the popular respect for the names of Charlemont 
and Grattan, and to transfer to more violent leaders the conduct 
of the national movement. Grattan was a reformer and a 
patriot without a tincture of democratic ideas; Wolfe Tone was 
a revolutionary whose principles were drawn from the French 
Convention. Grattan's political philosophy was allied to that 
of Edmund Burke; Tone was a disciple of Danton and Thomas 

Democratic principles were gaining ground among the Roman 
Catholics as well as the Presbyterians. A quarrel between the 
moderate and the more advanced sections of. the Roman Catholic 
Committee led, in December 1791, to the secession of sixty-eight 
of the former, led by Lord Kenmare; and the direction of the 
committee then passed to more violent leaders, of whom the 
most prominent was John Keogh, a Dublin tradesman. The 
active participation of the Roman Catholics in the movement 
of the United Irishmen was strengthened by the appointment 
of Tone as paid secretary of the Roman Catholic Committee in 
the spring of 1792. When the legality of the Roman Catholic 
Convention in 1792 was called in question by the government. 
Tone drew up for the committee a statement of the case on which 
a favourable opinion of counsel was obtained; and a sum of 
£1500 with a gold medal was voted to Tone by the Convention 
when it dissolved itself in April 1793. Burke and Grattan were 
anxious that provision should be made for the education of 
Irish Roman Catholic priests at home, to preserve them from 
the contagion of Jacobinism in France; Wolfe Tone, " with an 
incomparably juster forecast," as Lecky observes, " advocated 
the same measure for exactly opposite reasons." He rejoiced 
that the breaking up of the French schools by the revolution 
had rendered necessary the foundation of Maynooth College, 
which he foresaw would draw the sympathies of the clergy into 
more democratic chaimels. In 1794 the United Irishmen, 
persuaded that their scheme of universal suffrage and equal 
electoral districts was not likely to be accepted by any party in 
the Irish parliament, began to found their hopes on a French 
invasion. An English clergyman named William Jackson, a 
man of infamous notoriety who had long lived in France, where 
he had imbibed revolutionary opinions, came to Ireland to 
nogotiate between the French committee of public safety and 
the United Irishmen. For this emissary Tone drew up a 
memorandum on the state of Ireland, which he described as 
ripe for revolution; the paper was betrayed to the government 
by an attorney named Cockayne to whom Jackson had impru- 
dently disclosed his mission; and in April 1794 Jackson was 
arrested on a charge of treason. Several of the leading United 
Irishmen, including Reynolds and Hamilton Rowan, immediately 
fled the country; the papers of the United Irishmen were seized; 
and for a time the organization was broken up. Tone, who had 
not attended meetings of the society since May 1793, remained 
in Ireland till after the trial and suicide of Jackson in April 
1795. Having friends among the government party, including 
members of the Beresford family, he was enabled to make terms 
with the government, and in return for information as to what 
had passed between Jackson, Rowan and himself he was per- 
mitted to emigrate to America, where he arrived in May 1795. 
Taking up his residence at Philadelphia, he wrote a few months 
later to Thomas Russell expressing unqualified dislike of the 
American people, whom he was disappointed to find no more 
truly democratic in sentiment and no less attached to order and 
authority than the English; he described George Washington 
as a " high-flying aristocrat," and he found the aristocracy of 
money in America still less to his liking than the European 
aristocracy of birth. 

Tone did not feel himself bound in honour by his compact 


With the government mt homt to abstain Irom further conspiracy ; 
and finding himself at Philadelphia in the congenial company 
of Rejmolds, Rowan and Napper Tandy, he undertook a mission 
to Paris to persuade the French government to send an expedi- 
tion to invade Ireland. In February 1796 he arrived in Paris 
and had interviews with De La Croix and L. N. M. Camot, who 
were greatly impressed by his energy, sincerity and ability. A 
commission was given him as adjutant-general in the French 
army, which he hoped might protect him from the penalty of 
treason in the event of capture by the English; though he hiinself 
daimed the authorship of a proclamation said to have been issued 
by the United Irishmen, enjoining that sdl Irishmen taken with 
arms in their hands in the British service should be instantly 
shot ; and he supported a project for landing a thousand criminals 
in En^and, who were to be commissioned to bum Bristol and 
commit any other atrodty in their power. He drew up two 
memorials representing that the landing of a considerable 
French force in Irdand would be followed by a general rising 
of the people, and giving a detailed account of the condition of 
the country. The French directory, which possessed informa- 
tion from Lord Edward Fitxgerald (q.v.) and Arthur O'Connor 
confirming Tone, prepared to despatch an expedition under 
Hoche. On the X 5th of December 1796 the expedition, consist- 
ing of fmty-three sail and carrying about 15,000 men with a 
large supply of war material for distribution in Ireland, sailed 
from Brest. Tone, who accompanied it as " Adjutant-general 
Smith,** had the greatest contempt for the seamanship of the 
French sailors, which was amply justified by the disastrous 
result of the invasion. Returning to France ^thout having 
effected anything, Tone served for some months in the French 
army under Hoche; and in June 1797 he took part in prepara- 
tions for a Dutch expedition to Irdand, which was to be sup- 
ported by the French. But the Dutch fleet- was detained in the 
Texel for many weeks by unfavourable weather, and before it 
cventuaUy put to sea in October, only to be crushed by Duncan, 
in the battle of Camperdown, Tone had returned to Paris; and 
Hoche, the chief hope of the United Irishmen, was dead. Bona- 
parte, with whom Tone had several interviews about this time, 
was much less disposed than Hoche had been to undertake in 
earnest an Irish expedition; and when the rebellion broke out 
in Ireland in 1798 he had started for Egypt. When, therefore. 
Tone urged the directory to send effective assistance to the Irish 
rebeb, il that oouM be promised was a number of small raids 
to descend simultaneously on different points of the Irish coast. 
One of these under Humbert succeeded in landing a force in 
KiUala Bay, and gained some success in Connaught before it was 
subdued by Lake and Comwallls, Wolfe Tone's brother Matthew 
being captured, tried by court-martial, and hanged; a second, 
accompanied by Napper Tandy {q.v.)^ came to disaster on the 
coast of Donegal; while Wolfe Tone took part in a third, under 
Admiral Bompard, with General Hardy in command of a force 
of about 3000 men, which encountered an English squadron 
near Lough Swilly on the x 2th of October X798. Tone, who was 
on board the " Hoche," refused Bompard's offer of escape in a 
frigate before the action, and was taken prisoner when the 
" Hoche " was forced to surrender. When the prisoners were 
landed a fortnight later Sir George Hill recognized Tone in the 
French adjutant-general's uniform. At his trial by court-martial 
in Dublin, Tone made a manly straightforward speech^ avowing 
hb detennined hostility to England and his design " by fair and 
open war to procure the separation of the two countries," and 
pleading in virtue of his status as a French officer to die by the 
musket instead of the rope. He was, however, sentenced to be 
hanged on the x 2th of November; but on the xith he cut his 
throat with a penknife, and on the X9th of November 1798 he 
died of the wound. 

Although Wolfe Tone had none of the attributes of greatness, 
" be rises," says Lecky, "far above the dreary level of common- 
place which Irish conspiracy in general presents. The tawdry 
and exaggerated rhetoric; the petty vanity and jealousies; the 
weak sentimentalism; the utter incapacity for proportioning 
means to ends, and for grasping the stem realities of things. 

which so commonly disfigure the lives and conduct even of the 
more honest members of his class, were wholly alien to his nature. 
His judgment of men and things was keen, ludd and masculine, 
and he was alike prompt in decision and brave in action." In 
his later years he overcame the drunkexmess that was habitual 
to him in youth ; he developed seriousness of character and unsel- 
fish devotion to what he believed was the cause of patriotism; 
and he won the respect of men of high character and capacity 
in France and Holland. His journals, which were written for 
his family and intimate friends, give a singularly interesting 
and vivid picture of life in Paris in the time of the directory. 
They were published after his death by his son, William Theobald 
Wolfe Tone (X79X-X828), who was educated by the French 
gn%'cmmcnt and Krved with some distinctLOQ in the armies of 
N.ipolcon, em{graLlng after Waterloo to America, where he died^ 
ifi New York City, on the lolh oJ October 1818. 

Set! Liff of Theobsid Wolft Ttftu by UmsrlJ, anUinutd by his SOH, 
wtik hi J pottiifal uvilingt, i^lU«l by W. T. VVolfe Tohe (a vols., 
Wa&hingtaD. i8j6}« another cditLoii of whkh is entitled AutO' 
hioirapky cj Tfu^fhald Woife lent, edited with introduction by 
R. Earr>- O Bricn. fa voli, London, iSqS): R. R. Madden, Lhes of 
Ikf United IHikmfn (7 vote.. London* 1^43): Alfred Webb, Cmm- 
pendiam t^ Iruh Bic^apky (Dublin, 1S7S); W. E. H. Lecky, 
Jiiikiry of irdand i> iht Liihttnik Century, voLg. iiL, iv.. v. (cabinet 
erJ., 5 vck, LundQR, 1&92J. (R. J. M.) > 

TONGA* or FauNDLV Islands (so call^xl by Captain Cook), 
an archipelago in the South Pacific Ocean, about 350 m. S.S.W. 
of Samoa and 250 m. E.S.E. of FijL The long chain of islands, 
numbering about X50, though with a collective land area of 
only 385 sq. m., extends from x8^ 5' to 22* 29' S. and X74* to 
176" i</ W., and is broken into three groups, vis. the Tonga to 
the south, Hapai (which again is divided into three clusters) in 
the centre and Vavau to the north. The largest island is 
Tongaubu (the Sacred Tonga, Tasman's Amsterdam) in the 
southern group, measuring about 25 by xo m., and X65 sq. m. 
in area, which contains the capital, Nukualofa. The vegetation 
is rich and beautiful, but the scenery tame, the land seldom rising 
above 60 ft.; Eua (Tasman's Middelbtirg), 9 m. south-east and 
67 sq. m. in area, is 1078 ft. in extreme hei^t, and much more 
picturesque, being diversified by rocks and woods. Vavau,' 
in the northern group, is 55 sq. m. in extent and 300 ft. high. 
Next to these come the coral islands Nomuka and Lifuka in 
the Hapai group; Tofua, 2846 ft.. Late or Lette, x8oo ft. and Kao, 
3020 ft. high, which are volcanic and smaller. The numerous 
islets of the central group are very fertile. It is along the western 
side of the northern half of the chain that the line of volcanic 
action is apparent; the islands here (of which some are active 
volcanoes) are lofty. To the east the whole chain is bounded 
by a profound trough in the ocean bed, which extends south- 
westward, east of the Kermadec Islands, towards New Zealand. 
The majority of the Tonga Islands, however are level, averaging 
40 ft. high, with hills rising to 600 ft.; their sides are generally 
steep. The surface is covered with a rich mould unusual in 
coral islands, mixed towards the sea with sand, and having a 
substratum of red or blue clay. The soil is thus very productive, 
although water is scarce and bad. Barrier reefs are rare; 
fringing reefs are numerous, except on the east side, which is 
nearly free, and there are many small isolated reefs and volcanic 
banks among the islands. If the reefs impede navigation they 
form some good harbours. The best is on the south-western side 
of Vavau; another is on the north of Tongatabu. Earthquakes 
are not infrequent. From X845 to 1857 volcanic eruptions were 
very violent, and islands once fertile were devasUted and nearly 
destroyed. A new island rose from the sea, and was at once 
named " Wesley," but disappeared again. In x886 there was 
a serious volcanic eruption in the outlying island of Niuafoou, 
and at the same time Falcon Reef, normally awash at high water, 
discharged sufficient scoriae and pimaice to form a new island 
50 ft. high. In 1898 the island had been washed away, but in 
1900 H.M.S. " Porpoise " found that a solid core of black rock 
had been extruded 6 ft. above high water. All the volcanoes 
in the group were then quiescent. 

Ceoloty. —Tht line of volcanic action extends along the western side 
of the northern half of the chaio. Some of the islands are ^'"^ ** 


volcanic rocks alone; foch are Hongu-tonfa and Honsu-hapai. which 
appear to be fragments of a single ancient crater, Toiua. Kao, Late. 
Metis, Amargua and Falcon Island. The lava is a basic augite- 
andesite. Another zmup of islands consists of elevated niasses of 
submarine volcanic deposits, upon some of which coral-reef limestone 
forms a more or less complete covering: such are Tonuroeia and the 
Nomuka group (Mango. Tonua. NomuTca-iki). All the volcanic rocks 
of these islands are submarine stratiSed tuRs which are penetrated 
here and there by andesite or diabase dikes. The Vavau group 
consists entirely of coral limestone, which is occasionally crystalline, 
and contains sulactitic caves of great beauty. 

Oimatt, Flora, Fauna.—Tht climate is healthy for Europeans, 

east trade winds blow, sometimes with great violence, from Apnl 
to December. During the rest of the year the winds blow from 
west-north-west and north, with rain and occasional destructive 
hurricanes. A cyclone which devastated Vavau in April 1900 was the 
most destruaive ever recorded in the group, but hurricanes are rare. 
The average rainfall for the year is about 80 ins. The vegetation 
is similar to that of Fiji, but more definitely Indo-Malayan in 
character: it embraces all the plants of the groups to the east with 
many that are absent there. Ferns abound, some of them peculiar, 
and tree ferns on the higher islands, and all the usual fruit trees 
and cultivated plants of the Pacific are found. There are several 
kinds of valuable timber trees. The only indigenous land mammalia 
are a small rat and a few curious species of bats. The dog and the 
pig were no doubt introduced by man. Of birds some 30 kinds 
are known, an owl being the only bird of prey; parrots, piseons, 
kingfishers, honey-sucken. rails, ducks, and other water birds are 
numerous. There are snakes and small lizards, but no frogs or 
toads. Of insects there are relatively few kinds; but ants, beetles 
and mosquitoes abound. The fishes, of an Indo-Malay type, are 
varied and numerous. Turtle and sea-snakes abound, as do moUusca, 
of which a few are peculiar, and zoophytes. 

InhdntarUs.—Tht population of the archipelago is about 
X9,ooo, of whom about 370 are whites or half-castes. The 
natives, a branch of the Polynesian race, are the most progressive 
and most intellectual in the Pacific Islands, except the 
Hawaiians. They have exercised an influence over distant 
neighbours, especially in Fiji, quite out of proportion to their 
numbers. Their conquests have extended as far as Niu6, or 
Savage Island, 300 m. east, and to various other islands to the 
north. In Captain Cook's time Potilaho, the principal chief, 
considered Samoa to be within his dominions. This pre- 
eminence may perhaps be due to an early infusion of Fijian 
blood: it has been observed that such crosses are always more 
vigorous than the pure races in these islands; and this influence 
seems also traceable in the Tongan dialect, and appears to have 
been partially transmitted thence to the Samoan. Various 
customs, traditions and names of places also point to a former 
relation with Fiji. Their prior conversion to Christianity gave 
the Tongans material as well as moral advantages over their 
neighbours. Crime is infrequent, and morality, always above 
the Polynesian average, has improved. The people have strict 
notions of etiquette and gradations of rank. In disposition 
they are amiable and courteous, but arrogant, lively, inquisitive 
and inclined to steal— their attacks in earlier days on Europeans, 
when not caused by misunderstandings, being due probably 
to their coveting property which to them was of immense value^ 
They are brave and not unenergetlc, though the soft climate 
and the abimdance of food discourage industry. They value 
children, and seldom practised infanticide, and cannibalism was 
rare. Tbdr women are kindly treated, and only do the lighter 
work. Ag^culture, which is well understood, is the chief 
industry. They are bold and skilful sailors and fishermen; 
other trades, as boat and house building, carving, cooking, net 
and mat making, are usually hereditary. Their houses are 
slightly built, but the surrounding ground and roads are laid 
out with great care and taste. 

There were formerly (till the eariy i8th century) two sovereigns; 

also the wife of the Tui Tonga was always chosen, whose descendants 
through the female line had special honours and privileges, under 
the title of lamaka, recalling the vasu of Fiji. The explanation 
oif the dual kingship is probably thi»— ihe Tui Tonga were regarded 
as the direct dcsoendanu of the original head of the family from 
which the people sprang; regazded with reverence, and poaaessi ng 

unlimited power, they came to misuse this and discontent resaltcd. 
whereupon, to protect themselves, they appointed an executive 
deputy. Eelow these came the Eiki or chiefs, and next to them the 
class called Matabule. These were the hecediUry counsellors and 
companions of the chiefs, and conveyed to the people the decisions 
formed at their assemblies. They also directed the national cere- 
monies, and preserved the popular traditions. While, under the 
control of Europeans, the Tongans have shown some aptitude for 
administration, they fail when left to themselves. They pick up 
superficial acquiremenu with astonishing ease, but seem to be 
incapable of masteriiq; any subject. They write shorthand, but 
speak no English; they have a smattering of higher mathematics, 
yet are ignorant of book-keeping. Their government, effective 
enough when dealing with natives, breaks down in all departments 
concerned with Europeans, and becomes the prey of designing 
traders. Their ambition is to rank as a civilized state, and the 
flattery lavished on them by their teachers has spoiled them. 

There are some ancient stone remains in Tongaubu, burial places 
ifeitcka) built with great blocks, and a remarkable monument 
connsting of two laige upright blocks morticed to carry a transverse 
one, on which was formeriy a circular basin of stone. 

Administration and Trade.— In May 1900 the group became a 
British protectorate under the native flag, the appointment of 
the consul and agent being transferred to the government of 
New Zealand. In 1904 the financial and legal administration 
was put into the hands «f the British High Commissioner for 
the Western Pacific. The native king is assisted by a legislative 
assembly consisting, in equal nimibers, of hereditary nobles and 
popular (elected) representatives. The wisdom of King George 
Tubou in refusing to alienate an acre of land, except upon lease, 
has resulted in Tonga having been the last native state in the 
Padfic to lose its independence. There is a revenue of about 
£31,000 annually derived chiefly from a poll-tax, leases and 
customs. The principal exports are copra, bananas, oranges and 
fungus, and the annual values of exports and imports are £80,000 
and £70,000 respectively on an average, though both fluctuate 
considerably. British coin is legal tender (since 2905). There 
are five churches in Tonga — the Free Wesleyans, embracing the 
great majority of the inhabitants, Wesleyans, Roman Catholics, 
and Seventh Day Adventists. These last are few; a still smaller 
number of natives are nominally Anglicans. 

History. — ^In 1616 the vessels of Jacob Lemaire and Wmem 
Comelis Schouten reached the island of Niuatobutabu, and had 
a hostile encounter with the natives. In 1643 Abel Tasman 
arrived at Tongaubu and was more fortunate. The next visit 
was that of Samuel Wallis in 1767, followed in 1773 by that of 
Captain Cook. In 1777 Cook returned, and stayed seven weeks 
among the islands. In 1799 a revolution, having its oripn in 
jealousy between two natives of high rank, broke out. Civil 
war dragged on for many years— long after the deaths of the 
first leaders— but TaufaaJiau, who became king in 1845 under 
the name of George Tubou I., proved a strong ruler. In iSaa 
a Methodist missionary had arrived in the island, and others 
followed. The attempt to introduce a new faith led to renewed 
strife, this time between converts and pagans, but Ring George 
(who fuUy appreciated the value of intercourse with foreigners) 
supported the missionaries, and by 1853 the rebels were subdued. 
The missionaries, finding their position secure, presently began 
to take action in poh'tical affairs, and persuaded the king to 
grant a constitution to the Tongans, who welcomed it with 4 
kind of childish enthusiasm, but were far from fitted to receive 
it. A triennial parliament, a cabinet, a privy council, and an 
elaborate judicial system were established, and the cumbrous 
machinery was placed in the hands of a " prime minister,'* a 
retired Wesleyan missionary, Mr Shirley Baker. Treaties of 
friendship were concluded with Germany, Great Britain, and 
the United States of America. Baker Induced the king to break 
off his connexion with the Wesleyan body in Sydney, and to set 
up a state church. Persecution of members of the old church 
followed, and in 1890 the missionary-premier had to be removed 
from the group by the high commissioner. He afterwards 
returned to initiate a new sect called the " Free Church off 
England," which for a time created further divisions among the 

King George Tubou died in 1893 at the age of ninety-six, and 
was succeeded by his great-grandson under the same title. 


Ifr BbsQ TboBMB (who after B«kcr*i deportation had carried 
out reforms which the natives, when left alone, were incapable 
oC maintaining) w sent in igoo to conclude the treaty by 
which the king placed his kingdom under British protection. 

See Captain Cook's KtfjBf and other early narratives; Martin, 
Marimt/a uccamtU 9J Ikt Tont^ Idands (Edinbureh, 1827); Vaaon. 
P9Mr Yean im Tongatabu (London, 1815); A. Moniort, Les Tonga, ou 
AnUpd its Amis (Lyons, 189;!); B. H. Thomson, Thi Dimrnoma 
afa, Prima Mvaiatar (London. 1894). 

10V0KIV0/ a province of French Indo-China, and piotec- 
tofate of France, situated between ao* and 23}* N. and 102* and 
10^* £., and bounded N. by the Chinese provinces of Kwang- 
Tung, Kwang-Si and Yun-nan, W. by Laos, S. by Annam, and 
E. by the Gulf of Tongking. Area, about 46,000 sq. m. The 
population is estimated at 6,000,000, including 33,000 Chinese 
and about 4000 Europeans. Geographically, Tongking com- 
prises three regions: (i) the delu of the Song-Koi (Red river), 
which, beginning at Son-Tay and coalndng with the delta of 
the Tliai-Binh, widens out into the low-lying and fertile plain 
within which are situated the principal dties. (2) Two moun- 
tainous tracts, to the north and west of the delta, running 
approximately from north-west to south-east, one separating 
the basins of the Song-Koi and the Canton rivei, the other those 
of the Song-Koi and the Mekong. (3) A region of plateaus 
and low hills forming a transition between the delta and the 
mountains. The main geographical feature in the country is 
the Song-Koi, which, taking its rise near Tali Fu, in Yun-nan, 
enters Tongking at Lao-Kay (the Lao boundary), and flows 
thenc^ in a sonth-easteriy direction to the Gulf of Tongking. 
It was this river which mainly, in the first instance, attracted the 
French to Tongking, as it was believed by the explorers that, 
forming the shortest route by water to the' rich province of 
Yon-nan, it would prove also to be the most convenient and 
expeditions means of transporting the tin, copper, silver and 
9old which are known to abound there. This belief, however, 
has proved fallacious. The upper course of the stream is 
constantly impeded by rapids, the lowest being about thirty 
miles above Hung-Hoa. Beyond Lao-Kay navigation is 
impracticable during the dry season, and at all other times of 
the year goods have to be there transferred into light junks. 
B^ow Lao-Kay larger junks, and in the summer months steam 
launches of shallow draught use the river. Within the limits 
of Yun-nan the navigation is still more difficult Near Son-Tay 
the Song-Koi receives the waters of the Song-Bo (Black 
river) and the Song-Ka ((Hear river), parallel affluenU 
rising in Yun-nan, and from that point divides into a network of 
waterways which empty themselves by countless outlets into 
the sea. The Song-Cau rises in north-eastern Tongking and 
below the town of Sept Pagodes, where it is joined by the Song- 
Thuong to form the Thai-Binh, divides into numerous branches, 
communicating with the Song-Koi by the Canal dcs Rapides 
and the Canal des Bambous. 

The coast line of Tongking from Mon-Kay on the (Chinese 
ftontier to Thanh-Hoa, near that of Annam, has a length of 
375 m. From Mon-Kay as far as the estuary of the Song-Koi it 
ia broken, rugged and fringed with islands and rocky islets. The 
bay of Tien-Hien, to the south of which lies the bland of Ke-Bao, 
and the picturesque bay of Along, are the chief indentations. 
Beyond the island of (^c-Ba, south of the Bay of Along, the coast 
is low, flat and marshy, and tends to advance as the alluvial 
deposits of the delta accumulate. 

The dioute of Tongking is leas trying to Europeans than that 
of the rest of French fndo-China. During June, July and August, 
the temperature ran^ between 82* and 100* F., but from October 
to May the weather is cooL The country is subject to typhoons in 
Auptst and September. 

In the wooded regions of the roountuns the tiger, elephant 
and panther are found, and wQd buffalo, deer and monkeys are 
ooaunoo. The ddta is the home of ducks and many other varieties 
of aqaatic birds. Tea. cardamom, and mulberry grow wild, and 
ia enicxal the flora approxiniate to that of southern China. 

The Annamese (see Anmam). who form the bulk of the population 
of To(^{kii^, are of a aomewnat better physique than those of the 

* See also bcoo-CiUNA, Fbench, and Amnam. 

rest of liido-Chlna. Savage tribes inhabit the northern distrkrts— 
the Muongs the mountains bordering the Black river, the Thds the 
regions bordering the Clear river and the Thai-Binh. The Muongs 
are bigger and stronger than the Annamese. They have square 
fordieads, large faces and prominent cheek-bones, and their eyes are 
often almost straight. 

Rice, which in some places furnishes two crops annually, is inoom- 
paraUy the most imnxtant product of the delta. Elsewhere there 
are plantations of coffee, tobacco, ramie, paper-tree {Dapkna adora), 
cotton, jute, auear-cane, pepper and multieny. The cukivation 
of silkworms is 01 growing tmportanoe. 

(k>ld, copper, tin, lead and other metab are found in the higher 
regions of Tongking, but only gold and tin are exfrioited, and these 
oiuy to a very limited extent. There is a larae output of coal of 
inferior quality from Hon-Gay on the bay of Along and there are 
ooal-workings on the island of Ke-Bao. 

Hanoi, Hai-phong and Nam-Dinh carry on cotton-spinning, and 
Hanoi and Nam-Dinh are well known for the manufacture of carved 
and inlaid furniture. The natives are skilful at enamelling and the 
chasing and ornamentation of gold and other metals. The manu- 
facture of paper from the fibrous bark of the paper-tree is a wide- 
spread industry and there are numerous distilkaries of rice-spirit. 

The imports of Tonsking, which in 1905 reached a value of 
£3.501422, comprise railway material, cereals, flour, liquors, woven 
goods, petroleum, glassware, paper, orepared skins, ckxks and 
watches, arms and ammunition, Ac. Exports (valued at £1.393.674 
in 1905) comprise rice, rubber, manila hemp, ramie, lacquer and 
badian mis, raw skins, silk-waste, coal, Chinese drugs, rattan, mats, 

The tranrit trade via Toi^ldn^ be t w > ec n Hong-Kong and the 
province of Yun-nan in southern China b of considerable importance, 
reaching in 190c a value of £1,146,000. This trade is entirely in 
the hands of Chinese houses, the tin of the Yun-nan mines and 
cotton yams from Hon^-Kong constituting its most important 
elements. Goods in transit enjoy a rebate oT 80% of the customs 
duties. Goods are carried on the Song-Koi to Lao-Kay or Man-Hao, 
thence on mules. The waterways ol the delta are lined with em- 
bankments, the causeways ak)ng which form the chief means of hind 
communication of the region. (For railways, see Inoo-Chika, 


The protectorate of Tongking approaches nearer to direct admin- 
istratbn than that ot Annam. where the conditions of the protector- 
ate are more closely observed. Till 1897 the emperor of Annam 
was represented in Tongking by a viceroy {kinhAuoc), but now the 
native officials are appomted by and are directly under the control 
of the reaident-supervM-. who resides at Hanoi, preades over the pro- 
tectorate council, and is the chief territorial representative 01 France. 
Tongking is divided into nineteen provinces, in each of which 
there is a rendent or a vice-resident, and four military territories, 
the latter administered by commandants. In each province there 
is a council of native " notables." elected by natives and occupied 
with the discussion of the provincial budget and public workSi 
There is also a deliberative council of natives (instituted 1907) for 
the whole of Tongking. The provincial administration, local 
govern m e nt and educational system are analogous to those of Annam 
(9.S.)* Two chamben of the court of appeal of Indo-CThina and a 
criminal court sit at Hanoi; there are tribunals of first instance and 
tribunals of commerce at Hanoi and Hai-Phong. When both 
parties to a suit are Annamese, it comes within the jurisdiction of 
the An-Sat or native judge of the province. 

The following is a summary of the budgeu of 1899 and 1904; — 






The chief spurce of revenue is the direct taxes (including especially 
the poll-tax and land-tax), which amounted in 1904 to £417.723. 
while the chief items of expenditure are the cost of the roidendes 
and general staff, public works and the civil guard. 

For the early history of Tongking, see Aknav and Indo-Chxna, 
French. Tongking was loosely united to Annam until xSoi, 
when Gia-Iong, king of Annam, brou^t it definitely under his 
sway. Having, by the treaty of i86a and the annexation of 
Cochin China, ^mly established themselves in Annamese 
territory, the French began to turn their attention to Tongking, 
attracted by the reported richness of its mineral wealth. They 
found a pretext for interfering in its affairs in the disturbances 
arising from the invasion of its northern provinces by the 
disbanded followers of the Taiping zebeb. The Franco-German 
War of 1870-71 put an end to the project for a time, but the 
return of peace in Europe was the signal for the renewal of hos- 
tilities in the East. The appearance of Gamier's work on his 
expedition up the Mekong again aroused an interest inTongkingr 


and the repotted wealth of the countiy added the powerful 
motive of adf-intezest to the yeamings of patriotism. Already 
Jean Dupuis, a trader who in the pursuit of his calling had 
penetrated into Yun-nan, was attempting to negotiate for the 
passage up the Song-Koi of himself aild a cargoof military stores 
for the Chinese authorities in Yun-nan. Meanwhile Captain 
Senes appeared from Saigon, having received instructions to 
open the route to French commerce. But to neither the trader 
nor the naval officer would the Tongkingcse lend a favourable 
ear, and in default of official permission Dupuis determined to 
force his way up the river. This he succeeded in doing, but 
arrived too late, for he found the Taiping rebellion crushed and 
the stores no longer wanted. 

On the return of Dupuis to Hanoi, the Tongkingcse general 
at that place wrote to the king of Annam, begging him to induce 
the governor of Cochin-China to remove the intruder. An order 
was thereupon issued calling upon Dupuis to leave the country. 
This he declined to do, and, after some negotiations, Francis 
Gamier with a detachment was sent to Hanoi to do the best 
he could in the difficult circumstances. Gamier threw himself 
heart and soul into Dupuis'i projects, and, when the Tongkin|p»e 
authorities refused to treat with him except on the subject of 
Dupuis's expulaon, he attacked the dtadel in November, r873, 
and carried it by assault. Having thus secured his position, 
he sent to Saigon for reinforcements, and meanwhile sent small 
detachments against the five other important fortresses in the 
delta (Hung-yen, Phu-Ly, Hai-Duong, Ninh-Binh and Nam- 
Dinh), and captured them all. The Tongkingcse now called in 
the help of Lu-Vinh-Phuoc, the leader of the " Black Flags," » 
who at once marched with a large force to the scene of action. 
Within a few days he recaptured several villages near Hanoi, 
and so threatening did his attitude appear that Gamier, who had 
hurried back after capturing Nam-Dinh, made a sortie from the 
dtadel. The movement proved a disastrous one, and resulted 
in the death of Gamier and of his second in conmiand, Bain/ 

Meanwhile the news of Gan&ier's hostilities had alarmed the 
governor of Saigon, who, having no desire to be plunged into a 
war, sent Philastre, an inspector of native affairs, to offer 
apologies to the king of Annam. When, however, on arriving 
in Tongking Philastre heard of Gamier's death, he took command 
of the French forces, and at once ordered the evacuation of 
Nam-Dinh, Ninh-Binh and Hai-Duong— a measure . which, 
however advantageous it may have been to the French at the 
moment, was most disastrous to the native Christian population, 
the withdrawal of the French being the signal for a general 
massacre of the convert*. In pursuance of the same policy 
Philastre made a convention with the authorities (March, 1874) 
by which he bound his countrymen to withdraw from the occu- 
pation of the country, retaining only the right to trade on the 
Song-Koi and at Hanoi and Hai-Phong, and agreed to put an 
end to Dupuis's aggressive action. 

For a time affairs remained in statu quo, but in 1882 Le Myre 
deVillers, the governor of Cochin-China, sent Henri Riviere with 
a small force to open up the route to Yun-nan by the Song-Koi. 
With a curious similarity the events of Gamier s campaign were 
r.peated. Finding the authorities intractable, Rivi&e stormed 
and carried the dtadd of Hanoi, and then, with very slight loss, 
he captured Nam-Dinh, Hai-Duong, and other towns in the delta. 
And once again these victories brought the Black Flags into 
the ndgfabourhood of HanoL As Gamier had done, so Rivi^ 
hurried back from Nam-Dinh on news of the threatened danger. 
Like Gamier also he headed a sortie against his enemies, and like 
Gamier he fell a victim to his own impetuosity (May, 2883). 

In the meantime the Annamese court had beoi seeking to 
enlist the hdp of the Chinese in their contest with the French. 
The tie which bound the tribuUry nation to the sovereign state 
had been for many generations slackened or drawn doser as 
circumstances .determined, but. it had never been entirely 
dissevered, and from the Annamese point of view this was one 

^ ^ Bands of Chinese lebeU who infested the mountainous region of 

of the occasions when it was of paramount importance that Et 
should be acknowledged and acted upon. With much more 
than usual regularity, therefore, the king despatched presenu 
and letters to the court of Peking, and in x88o he sent a special 
embassy, loaded with unusually costlv offerings, and bearing a 
letter in which his position of a tributary was emphatically 
asserted. Far from ignoring the responsibility thrust upon him, 
the emperor of China ordered the publication of the letter in the 
Peking GaseUe. 

The death of Rivi^ and the defeat of his troops had placed 
the French in a position of extreme difficulty. M. Jules Ferry, 
who had become premier of France in February 1883, determined 
on a vigorous forward policy. But for the moment the outlying 
garrisons, except those of Nam-Dinh and Hai-Phong, had to 
be withdrawn and Hanoi itself was besieged by the Black Flags. 
Reinforcements brought by Admiral Courbet and General Bouet 
were insuffident to do more than keep them at bay. So con- 
tinued was the pressure on the garrison that Bouet determined 
to make an adyance upon Son-Tay to relieve the blockade. He 
attacked Vong, a fortified village, but he met with such resistance 
that, after suffering considerable loss, he was obliged to retreat 
to Hanoi. In the bwer delta fortune sided with the French, 
and almost without a casualty Hai-Duong and Phu-Binh fell 
into their hands. Meanwhile, in order to put more effective 
pressure upon the court of Hu£, Dr Harmand, commissary- 
general, supported by Courbet, proceeded with a naval force to 
the Hu£ river. They found that, though King Tu Due was dead, 
his policy of resistance was maintained, and therefore stormed 
the dty. After a feeble defence it was taken, and Harmand 
conduded a treaty with the king (August 1883) in which the 
French protectorate was fully recognized, the king further 
binding himself to recall the Annamese troops serving in Tong- 
king, and to constmct a road from Saigon to HanoL 

Though this treaty was exacted from Annam under pressure, 
the French lost no time in carrying out that part of it which 
gave them the authority to protect Tong^dng, and Bouet again 
advanced in the direction of Son-Tay. But again the resistance 
he met with compelled him to retreat, after capturing the fortified 
post of Palan. Meanwhile, on the determination to attack 
Son-Tay becoming known in Paris, the Chinese ambassador 
wamed the ministry that, since Chinese troops formed part of 
the garrison, he should consider it as tantamount to a declaration 
of war. But his protest met with no consideration. On the 
arrival of reinforcements an advance was again made; and on the 
i6th of December 1883, after some desperate fighting, Son-Tay 

During 1884 the French made themsdves masters of the lower 
ddta. Throughout the campaign Chinese regulars fought 
against the French, who thus fotmd themsdves involved in war 
with China. While hostilities were in progress M. Foumier, the 
French consul at Tientsin, had been negotiating for peace, so 
far as China was concemed,. with Li Hung-chang, and in May 
X884 had signed and sealed a memorandum by which the 
Chinese {denipotentiary agreed that the Chinese troops should 
evacuate the northern provinces of Tongking " immidiatemcnt" 
In the following month another treaty, signed at Hu£, confirmed 
the French protectorate over Annam and Tongking. It was 
not, however, followed by a cessation of military operations. 
A misunderstanding arose between the French and the Chinese 
as to the exact date for the evacuation of their posU by the 
Chinese, and in June General Millot, then commander-in-chief of 
the French forces, dispatched Colonel Dugenne at the head of 
a strong force to occupy Lang-Son. The expedirion was badly 
arranged; the baggage train was far too unwieldy; and the pace 
at which the men were made to march was too quick for that 
scorching time of the year. They advanced, however, to Bac-Le, 
withm 25 m. of Lang-Son, when they suddenly came upon a 
Chinese camp. An irregular engagement began, and, in the 
pitched battle which ensued, the Chinese broke the French lines, 
and drove them away in headlong flight. This brought the 
military operations for the season to a close. 

During the rainy season fevers of all kinds became alarmingly 


pKViIent, and the number of deaths and of men invalided 
was very Urgt, In the meantime, however, an expedition, led 
by Colonel Donnier, against the Clunese garriton at Chu, about 
ID m. sooth-east from Lang-kep, was completely successful; a battle fought near Chu the Chinese were defeated, with 
a loss of 3000 killed, the French loss being only ao killed and 90 
wounded. In the skirmishes which followed the French were 
generally victorious, but not to such a degree as to wanant any 
cnlargemoit of the campaign. 

In January 2885 lazge reinforcements arrived and Bri^ 
de risle, who had succeeded Millot as commander-in-chief, 
ordered an advance towards Lang-Son. The difficulties of 
transport greatly impeded his movements, still the expedition 
was successful On the 6th of Februaxy three forts at Dong- 
Song, with laige supphes of stores and anununition, fell into the 
hands of the French. Three days' heavy fighting made them 
masters of a defile on the road, and on the i$ih Lang-Son was 
taken, the garrison having evacuated the town just before the 
entrance of the oonqueroxs. With his usual energy General 
N^grier, who commanded a division under Briire de I'lsle, 
pressed on in pursuit to Ki-Hea, and even captured the frontier 
town of Cua-Ai. But Bridre de ITsIe had now to hurry back 
to the relief of Tuyen-Kwan, which was doggedly resisting the 
attacks of an overwhelming Chinese force, and N^er was left 
in comrriand at Lang-Son. The withdrawal of Bridre de Tlsle's 
divisaoo gave the Chinese greater confidence, and, though for a 
time N^^ier was able to hold his own, on the 22nd and sjrd of 
Mardi he sustained a severe check between Lsng-Son and 
That-Ke, which was finally converted into a complete rout, 
hs troops being obliged to retreat predpitately through Lang- 
SoD to Than-Moi aiKl Dong-Song. Bri^re de lisle reached 
Toyen-Kwan, the garrison of which was commanded by Colonel 
Domini, on the 3rd of March, and effected its relief. The 
disaster at Lang-Son caused the downfall of the Ferry ministry 
(Mardi 30). Shortly afterwards Sir Robert Hart succeeded 
in negotiating peace with China. By the terms agreed on at 
Tientsin Qune, 1885), it was stipulated that France was to Uke 
Tongking and Annam under its protection and to evacuate 
Formosa and the Pescadores. (For further history, see Imoo- 

See J. DuDois, Ls Tpnt-kin a VintervaUion fran^ise (Paris, 
1898): C. B. Nonnan, TinUtin or France in Ike Far East (London, 
•*'4}: Prince Henri d'OrMana, AtOour du Tonkin (Paris, 1896)* 

Ferry. La Tonkin a la mhe-patria (Paris, 1890) ; J. Chaifley, 
Panl Bert an Tonkin (Paris. 1887); E. Lunet de Lajonqui^, 
Etknograpkie dn Tonkin Septentrional (Paris, 1906); A. Gaisman, 
VCEuore de la France an Tonkin (Paris, 1906) ; alco the bibliography 
under Imdo-Chxita, FaiwcH. 

10KBS (O. Eng. tangty M. Eng. tange, cf. Do. Afn; , Ger. Zange, 
from base iangt to bite, cf. Or. i&taw), a gripping and lifting 
instrument, of which there are many forms adapted to their 
specific use. Some are merely large pincers or nippers, but the 
greatest number fall into three classes: the first, as in the com- 
mon fire-tongs, used for picking up pieces of coal and placing 
them on a fire, which have long arms terminating in small flat 
circular grippers and are pivoted close to the handle; the second, 
as in the sugar-tongs, asparagus tongs, and the like, consisting 
of a single band of metal bent jound or of two bands joined at 
the head by a q>ring, and third, such as the bUcksmith's tongs 
or the cnidble-tongs, in which the pivot or joint is placed close 
to the gripping ends. A special form of tongs is that known as 
the " laay-tongs," consisting of a pair of grippers at the end of a 
aeries of levers pivoted together like scissors, the whole being 
closed or extended by the movement of the handles communi- 
cated to the first set of levers and thence to the grippers, the 
whole forming an extensible pair of tongs for gripping and lifting 
things at a distance. 

TOVOUB (O. Eng. hmge), in anatomy, a movable organ 
situated in the floor of the mouth, and serving for the sensation 
of taste besides helping, in the mastication of food, in articulate 
speech, and in feeling the exact positk>n of any structure 
within the mouth. 

The tongue is divided uto a main part or body, a base which 

looks backward toward the pharynx, a domim or upper surface,' 
a root by which it is attached to the hyoid bone and floor of the 
mouth, a tip which is free and an inferior free surface in contact 
with the front part of the floor of the mouth and with the lower 
indsor teeth. Owing to the large amount of muscle in its com- 
position the shape of the tongue varies considerably from time 
to time. The dorsum of the tongue is covered by stratified 
squamous epithelium, and, when at rest, is convex both antero- 
posteriorly and transversely; it is thickly studded with papiUae, 
of which four kinds are recognized. 

Filiform papHlaa are minute conical projections covering the 
whole of the dorsum, by which term the true upper surface is 
meant, as wdl as the tip and borders of the tongue. They are very 
numerous and contain a short core of •ubepitbelial mucous mem- 
brane covered by a thick coating of epithdul oelb, which coating 
may divide at iu tip into a number of thread-like processes. 

Fungiform papillae are less numerous than the last, and somewhat 
resemble •'• - • ... 

taste buds. 

button mushrooms"; they generally contain spedal 

CireumvaUate fapiUae are usually from seven to ten in number 
and are arranged in the form of a V, the apex of which pmnts down 
the throat. They lie <)uite at the back of the upper surface of the 
tongue and each consists of a little flat central mound surrounded 
by a deep moat, the outer wall of which is slightly raised above the 
surface, and it is to this that the papilUe owe their name. Both 
aides of the moat have taste buds embedded in them, while into the 
bottom small serous glands open. 

Foliate ^fillae are only vestigial in man and consist of a series 
of vertical ridges occupying a small oval area on each side of the 
tongue near iu base and just in front of the attadunent of the 
anterior pilUirs of the fauces. (See Phaxynx.) 

The Dosterior surface or base Of the tongue forms part of the anterior 
wall <M the pharynx and has a quite diserent appearance to that of 
the dorsum. On it are found numerous circular or oval etevations 
of the mucous membrane caused by lymphoid tissue (lymp^id 
follicles), on thejMimmit of the most 01 whk:h is a mucous cnrpt 


The division between the superior or oral l 

of the tongue and the posterior or pharyngeal is sharply marked by 
a V-sha(>^ shalk>w groove called the nuau terminalu which lies 
just behind and parallel to the V-shaped row of drcumvalUite 
papillae. At the apex of this V is a sinall blind pit, the foramen 

At the k>wer part of the pharyngeal surface three folds of mucous 
membrane, called gfosso-e^gfoUtc folds, run backward; the middle 
the centre of toe front of tf 


r the epiglottis, while the two 

lateral ones, in modem anatomy often called pharyngo-epiglottic 
folds, pass backward and outward to the fossa 01 the tonsU. 
On tne inferior free surface of the tongwe, that is to say, the surface 

whiclrls seen when the mouth is looked into and the tongue turned 
up, there is a median fold of mucous membrane called the fraennm 
linguae, which is attached bek>w to the floor of the mouth. On each 
side of this the blue outlines of the ranine veins are seen, while close 
to these a little fold on each side, known as a plica fimbnata, is often 
found. It must not, however, be confused' with the plica sublin- 
gualis described m the article Mouth and Salivaxy Glands. 

The substance of the ton^e is composed almost entirely of striped 
muscle fibres which run m different directions. Some of these 
bundles, such as the superficial, deep, transverse and oUigue linguaUs 
are confined to the tongue and are spoken of as intrinsic muscles. 
Other muscles, such as the hyo-glossus, stylo-glossus, Ac. come 
from elsewhere and are extrinsic; these are noticed under the head 
of MuscuLAX SvsTBM. The arteries of the tongue are derived 
from the lin^l. a branch of the external carotid 7see AxTBftiBs), 
while the vems from the tongue return the blood, oy one or more 
veins on each side, into the internal jugular vein (see vbins). 

The nerves to the tongue are the (i) lingual or gustatory, a branch 
of the fifth (see Nbxvbs: Cranial) which supplies the anterior two- 
thirds with ordinary sensation and also, by means of the chorda 
tymphani which is bound up with it, with taste sensation: (3) 
the glossopharyngeal which supplies the drcumvallate papiUae 
and posterior third of the tongue with taste and ordinary sensation; 
(3) a few twigs of the superior laryngeal branch of the vasus to the 
pharyngeal surface of the tongue; and (4) the hypoglossal which b 
the motor nerve to the muscles. 

The mucous membrane covering the second and third visceral 
arches fuses to form the furcuU (see REsnRATOXT Systbm). Just 
in front of this a rounded eminence appears at an early date in 
the ventral wall of the phaiynx to form the tuberculum impar 
which is separated from the turcula by the depression known as 
the sinus arcuatus. This tuberculum impar gradually grows to 
form the central part^ of the tongue m front of the foramen 
caecum, while the anterior part of the orxan is derived from two 
lateral swellings which appear in the floor <n the mouth and surround 
the tuberculum impar antero-laterally. The posterior third, or 
pharyngeal part, is developed from the anterior part of the furcula 



in the middle line, that is to aayrrom the thifdviacenltrch. The 
sinus arcuatus becomes gradually shallower as these two pan - of 
the tonsue grow together and eventually is indicated by tJii^' itacus 
lerminatis; in the raid line, however, the isthmus of the Ur, loid 
grows down from it, forming the tkyro-ilossal duct the re of 

which are seen in the foramen .caecum (lee Ductless C- ts). 
ft will be seen that the tongue is developed in connexion . the 
first, second and third visceral arches, and it w thereforr v^ be 
expected that the fifth, seventh and ninth nerves which '^tir^plv 
those arches would hel^ to supirfy it, but the vagus from tbc i-^'^irth 
arch reaches it in addition, while the fact that most of the iL^^iilar 
substance of the tongue is supplied by the hypoglossal nerve is 
explained on the theory that some of the cervical s£eletal muscula- 
ture has grown cephalad into the tongue and has carried its nerve 
with it. 

Comparalue Anatomy. 
The tonsue b present in fishes but it b an immovable swelling in 
the floor oi the mouth and b practically devoid of muscles. In the 
hag {Mysin*) among the Cyciostomata, and pike (£i«x) among the 

TnitrtM) iufuUr Win 

] »L^rnAt urot id ulcry 


Pli4D-fl|a4pijtaf I be 

■ fa Onnl^hui'^ rol Am! 4f ilMtomv-) 
Horizontal Section through Mouth and Pharyiu at the Level of the Tondls. 

Teleostd. teeth are developed on the tongue. In the Amphibia 
the t^Ued forms (Urodela) usually have tongues like fishes, though in 
the genus Spelerpes the organ is very free and can be protruded for 
a great distance. In the majority of the Anura the tongue b usually 
attached close to the front of tte floor of the mouth so that it can 
be flapped forward with great rapidity. There ate, however, two 
closely allied families of Irogs (Xenopodidae and Pipidae) which 
form the order of Aglossa, beotuse in them the tongue is suppressed. 

In the reptiles the tongue b generally vei^ movable, thoush 
this b not the case in the CrocodiUa and many oi the Chelonia. The 
forked tongues of snakes and many lizards and the highly specialized 
telescopic tongue of the chameleon are famiUar objects. 

In birds the tongue b usually covered with homy epithelium 
and b poorly supplied with muscles. When it is very protrusible, 
as ia the .woodpecker, the movement b due to the hyoid, with the 

kMse Of the tongue attached, movins forward. 

In the Mammalb the ton^e is always movable by means off well- 
developed extrinsic and intnnsic muscles, while papillae and glands 

are numerous. The filiform papillae reach their maximum in the 
feline family of the Camivora where they convert the tongue into 
a rasp by which bones can be licked clean of all flesh attached to 
Foliate papOlae are best seen in the rodents, and when tbey are 

well developed the drcumvallate pafnllae are few, often only one 
on each side. 

In the lemurs an under tongue or sub liniua is found, which b 
probably represented by the plicat fimbriatat under the human 
touKue, and by some morphologbts b regarded as the homologue 
of the whole tongue of the lower vertebrates, the greater part of 
the mammalian tongue being then looked upon as a new formation. 

For further details and literature lee R. Wicdersheim's Compara- 
tive Anatomy of Vertebrates, translated by W. N. Parker (London, 
1907); C. Gc^nbaur, VertUick, Anat. dor Wtrbeltkure (Leipzig, 
1001); A. Oppel, Lekrb. vertfeick. mikroskop. Anat. der Wtrbeltkieret 
Teil 3 (Jena. 1900); Parker and HasweU. Text Book of Zoolory 
(London. 1897}. (F. G. P.) 

Suriery of Ike Tongue, 
During infancy it b sometimes noticed that the little band off 
membrane {fraenum) which binds the under part of the tongue 
to the middle line of the floor of the mouth b unusually diort. The 
condition will probably right itself as the front part of the tongue 
takes on its natural growth. In some children the tongue is so 
large that it hangs out of the mouth, 
scratching itself upon the teeth. Thb 
condition b likely to be associated 
with weak intellect. 

AaUe inflammation of Ike tongue 
mav be caused by the sting of a wasp 
or by the entrance of septic germs 
through a wound, and the trouble may 
end in an abscess. 

Ckronic inflammation of Ike tongue 
may be caused by syphilb, by the 
irriution of decayed teeth or of a 
badly-fitting plate of artificial teeth, 
or by excessive smoking. The con- 
dition is one of danger in that it may 
lead eventually to the tongue beam- 
ing the seat of cancer. The treatment 
demands the removal of every source 
of irriution. The teeth must be made 
sound and smooth and must be kept 
so. Smoking must be absolutely and 
entirely given up. and salt, mustard, 
pickles, spirits, aerated waters, and 
everything else which b likely to be a 
cause of irriution must be avoided. 

Cancer of tke tongue is the result of 
chronic imution which produces an 
excessive growth of the scaly covering 
of the tongue and causes an invasion 
of the deeper i>arts of the tongue by 
the scales. It is more often found in 
men than women 4nd is usually asso- 
dated with a hard swelling at one side 
of the tongue — perhaps near a jagged 
tooth or at the spot where the eno of 
the pipe-stem approaches the tongue. 
The nerves of the tone ue being caught 
and compressed in the growth, pain 
b consunt and severe, and the move- 
ments during mastication cause great 
dbtress. Tlie swelling gradually in- 
creases in size and, spreading to the 
floor of the mouth, hinders the free 
movements of the tonjnie> In due 
course it breaks down in the middle 
and a hard-walled ulcer appears. All 
thb time the small scales of the cancer 
are finding their way along the lymph-channels and causing a 
secondary enlargement in the glands just below the jaw and along 
the side of the neck. Enlargement 01 the cervical glands b a very 
serious complication of cancer of jthe tongue. 

The only treatment for cancer of the tongue which b at present 
known in surgery b the earl]^ removal by operation. It not seldom 
happens that because there u a ceruincamount of doubt as to the 
exact nature of the growth in the early weeks delay in operating 
is reasonably permitted, but during this time there is the risk 01 
the ceUs of the disease tindinK their way to the lymphatic system. 
Still, inasmuch as there may be great difficulty in determining the 
diagnosb from tertiary syphilitic disease, a course of treatment by 
iodide of potasnum may well be recommended. Syphilb b often 
the precursor of lingual cancer, and it b impossible to say exactly 
when the syphilitic lesion becomes malignant. In the case of- a 
cancerous tumour of the tongue being so 6tep\y or so widely atuched 
that its Temoval cannot be recommended, relief may be afforded by 
the extraction of most, or all of the teeth, by limitinc the food to the 
most simple and unirritating kinds, and 'possibly by dividing the 
great sensory nerves of the tongue. 

Cancer of the tongue is now operated on in advanced cases such as in 
former years would not have been dealt with by a radical operation. 
An incisioa b made beneath the jaw and through the floor of th« 


mouth, by wfakfa the tongue is dmvn out and rendered tmnty 
B^^;,^^^^ the aneries being leisurely secured as the tissues are cut 
acHMs. The upper part of the gullet is plugsed by a sponge so that 
no bkxx! can enter the lungs, and unimpeded respiration is provided 
for by the preliminary introduction of a tube into the windpipe. 

TOHGUK GIFT OP, or Glossolaua (iXuaffo, tongae, 
XoXht, speak), a faculty of abnonnal and inarticulate vocal 
nttennce, under stress of religious excitement, which was 
widely developed in the early Christian circles, and has its 
parallHs in other lelipons. In the New Testament such 
experiences are recorded in Caesarea (AcU x. 44)* *^ Corinth 
(Acts xix- 6; i Cor. xiL, xiv.). Thessafonica (i Thess. v. 19), 
Ephesus (£ph. v. x8). and universally (Mark xvi. 17). From 
the epistles of Paul, who thanked God that he spake with tongues 
more than all or any of his Corinthian converts, we can gather a 
just idea of how he regatded this gift and of what it really was. 

Firstly, then, it was a grace (ckaritma) of the spirit, yet not 
of the bcdy or pure spirit only, but of evil spiriU also who on 
occasions had been known to take possession of the larynx of a 
saint and exclaim, "Jesus b Anathema." As no one could 
curse Jesus except under the influence of a devilish afflatus, so 
none could say ** Jesus is Lord " except he was inspired by the 
Holy Spirit. But, secondly, the pneumatic utterances techni- 
cally known as speaking with tongues failed to reach this level 
of intelligibility; for Paul compares " a tongue " to a material 
object which should iperely make a noise, to a pipe or harp 
twanged or blown at random without tune ov time, to a trumpet 
blaring idly and not according to a code of signal notes. Unless, 
therefore, he that has the |^t of tongues also possess the gift 
of interpreting his exclamations, or unless some one present can 
do 90 for him, he had not better exerdse it in church. He is 
a barbarian to others and they (o him, since they -cannot under- 
stand what is spoken by him. Paul discriminates between the 
Spirit which during these paroxysms both ulks and prays to God 
and the mmm or understanding which informs a believer's psalm, 
teaching, revelation or prophesy, and renders them intelligible, 
edifying and profitable to the assembly. Accordingly Paul 
lays down rules which he regarded as embodying the Lord's 
oommandiDent. A man " that speaketh in a tongue speaketh 
not onto men, but unto (jod; for no man understandeth;" and 
therefore it is expedient that he keep this gift for his private 
chamber and there pour out the mysteries. In church it is best 
that he should confine himself to prophesying, for that brings 
to others "edification and comfort and consolation." If, 
however, tongues must be heard in the public assembly, then let 
not more than three of the saints exhibit the gift, and they only 
in* succession. Nor let them exhibit it at all, unless there is 
some one present who can interpret the tongues and tell the 
rorrtipg what it all means. If the whole congregation be 
talking with tongues all at once, and an unbeliever or one with 
no experience of pneumatic gifts come in, what will he think, 
asks Paul. Surely that ** you are mad " So at Pentecost on 
the occasion of the first outpouring of the Spirit the saints were 
by the bystanders accused of being drunk (Acts H. 15). In 
the church meeting, says Paul, " I had rather speak five words 
with my understanding, that I might instruct others also, than 
ten thousand words in a tongue." 

Tbe writer of Acts ii., anxious to prove that Providence 
from the first included the Gentiles in the Messianic Kingdom, 
assumes that the gift of tongues was a miracutous faculty of 
talking strange languages without having previously learned 
them. Augustine accordingly held that each of the disciples 
talked all languages miraculously; Chrysostom that each talked 
one other than his own. The PeniecoAtal inspiration has been 
construed as a providential antithesis to the confusion of tongues 
—an idea which Grotius expressed in the words: " Poena 
linguarum dispersit homines; donum linguarum dispersos in 
nnum populum coDegit." Cdtoipetent critics today recognize 
that such a view is impossible; and it has been suggested with 

much probability thai in the second chapter of Acts the words 
in f. 5: '* Now there were dwelling . . . under heaven " as well as 
99. 6-1 1 : '* because that every man . . . mighty works of God " 
were interpolated by Luke in the document he transcribed.* 
The faithful talking with tongues were taken by bystanders 
for drunken men, but intoxicated men do not talk in languages 
of which they are normally ignorant.* 

Paul on the whole discouraised glossolaly. " Desire earnestly 
the greater gifts," he wrote to the Corinthians. The gift of 
tongues was suitable rather to chfldren in the faith than to the 
mature. Tongues were, he felt, to cease whenever the perfect 
should come; and the believer who spoke with the tongues of 
men and of angels, if he had not k>ve, was no better than the 
sounding brass and danging cymbal of the noisy heathen 
mysteries. It was clearly a gift productive of much disturbance 
in the Church (i Cor. xiv. 23). He would not, however, entirdy 
forbid and quench it (i Thess. v. 19), so k>ng as decency and order 
were preserved. 

It is not then sotprising that we hear little of it after the 
apostolic age. It faded away in the great Church, and probably 
Cebus was describing Montanist circles (though Origen assumed 
that they were ordinary believers) when he wrote ' of the many 
Christians of no repute who at the least provocation, whether 
Vrithin or without their temples, threw themselves about like 
inspired persons; while others did the same in dties or among 
armies in order to collect alms, roaming about cities or camps. 
They were wont to cry out, each of himself, " I am God; I am 
the Son of God; or I am the divine Spirit." They would indulge 
in prophecies of the last judgment, and back their threats with 
a string of strange, half-frantic and utterly unmeaning sounds, 
the sense of whidi no one with any intelligence could discover; 
for they were obscure gibberish, and merely furnished any fool 
or impostor with an occasion to twist the utterances as he chose 
to his own purposes. 

In the above we get a glimpse both of the gk>ssalist and of his 
interpreter as they appeared to the outside world; and the 
impression made on them is not unlike that which Paul appre- 
hended would be left on outsiders by an Indisciiminate use of 
the gift. Tertullian early in the 3nl century testifies that 
glossolaly still went on in the Montanist Church which he had 
joined; for we must so interpret the following passage in his 
D€ aruma, cap. ix.: " There is among us at the present time a 
sister who is endowed with the charismatic gift of revelations, 
which she suffers through ecstasy in the spirit during the Sunday, 
service in church. She converses with angek, sometimes even 
with the Lord, and both hears and see mysteries." The magical 
papyri teem with strings of senseless and barbaric words which 
probably answer to what certain of the Fathers called the 
language of demons. It has been suggested that we here have 
recorded the utterances of glossolallsts. 

The attitude of Paul toward glossolaly among his converts 
strikingly resembles Plato's opinion as expressed in the Timaeus, 
p 72, of the enthusiastic ecstasies of the andent /idvnt (sooth- 
sayer) . " C»od," he writes, " has given the art of divination not to 
the wisdom, but to the foolishness of man; for no man, when in 
his wits, attains prophetic truth and inspiration; but when he 
receives the inspired word dther his intelligence is enthralled 
by sleep, or he is demented by some distemper or possession. 
And he who would understand what he remembers to have been 
said, whether in a dream or when he was awake, by the prophetic 
and enthusiastic nature, or what he has seen, must first recover 
his wits; and then he will be able to explain rationally what all 

*This misunderstanding of Acts iL has influenced the official 
Roman doctrine of demoniacal possession. The SacerdolaU indi- 
cates as one of the symptoms of possession the ability of the possessed 
to talk other tongues than his own. Cf. the rusiis daemonum, 
cap. xi. Venetus (1606) : " Aliqui urmonem altenum a patria sua 
lomtMHtur tin nunquam e laribus patemis recesserint." 

' It is noteworthy that in Eph. v. 18 Paul contrasts the being filled 
with the Spirit with the foolishness of intoxication with wine, and 
remarks that those filled with the Spirit speak to themselves in 
psalms and hymns and spiritual songs and give thanks always for 
all things. 

* Origen, OnUra CtUum, vti. 9. 



such words and apparitions mean, and what mdications th<y 
afford to this man or that, of past, present or future good and 
evil. But, while he continues demented, he cannot judge of 
the visions which he sees or the words which he utters. . . . And 
for this reason it is cxistomary to appoint diviners or interpreters 
to be judges of the true inspiration."* From such passages 
as the above we iiifer that the gift of tongues and of their inter- 
pretation was not peculiar to the Christian Church, but was a 
repetition in it of a phase common in andent religions. The 
veiy phrase yXuaatut XaXeu^, " to speak with tongues," was 
not invented by the New Testament writers, but borrowed from 
ordinary speech. 

Virgil {Aen. vi. 46, 98) draws a life-like picture of the ancient 
prophetess "speaking with tongues." He depicts her quick 
changes of colour, her dishevelled hair, her panting breast, her 
apparent increase of stature as the god draws nigh and fills her 
with his divine afflatus. Then her voice loses its mortal's ring: 
" nee mortale sonans." The same morbid and abnormal trance 
utterances recur in Christian revivals in every age, e.g. among 
the mendicant friars of the 13th century, among the Jansenists, 
the early Quakers, the converts of Wesley and Whitefield, the 
persecuted protesUnts of the Ccvennes, the Irvingitea. 

Oracular possession of the kind above described is also common 
among savages and people of lower culture; and Dr Tylor, in 
his Primitive CfUture, n. 14, gives examples of ecsUtic utterance 
interpreted by the sane. Thus hi the Sandwich IsUnds the 
god Oro gave his oracles through a priest who " ceased to act 
or speak as a voluntary agent, but with his limbs convulsed, 
his features distorted and terrific, his eyes wild and strained, 
he wouM roll on the ground foaming at the mouth, and reveal 
the will of the god in shrill cries and sounds violent and indis- 
tinct, which the attendmg priesU duly mterpreted to the 

See E. B. Tylor. Primitive Ctdture; H. Weinel. Die Wirkungpt 
des Ceistes und der CeisUr (Freiburv, 1899); Shaftesbury's Letter en 
BHtkmiasm ; Mrs OUphant, Life of Iningj vol. tL {?. C. C.) 

. TOMK, a native state of India, m the Rajputana agency. It 
consists of six isohited tracts, some of which are under the Central 
India agency. Total area, 3553 sq. m.; total population (1901). 
373,201; estimated revenue £77,000. No tribute is payable. 
The chief, whose title b nawab, is a Mahommedan of Afghan 
descent The founder of the family was Amir Khan, the noto- 
rious Pindari leader at the beginning of the 19th centuiy, who 
received the present territory on submittmg to the British in 
181 7. The nawab Mahommed Ibrahim Ali Khan, G.C.I.E., 
succeeded in 1867, and was one of the few chiefs who attended 
both Lord Lytton's Durbar in 1877 and the Delhi Durbar of 1903 
as rulers of their states. The late minister, Sir Sahibzada 
Obeidullah Khan, was deputed on political duty to Peshawar 
during the Tirah campaign of 1897. Grain, cotton, opium and 
hides are the chief exports. Two of the outlying tracts of the 
state are served by two railways. Distress was caused by 
drought m i899-i9oa The town of Tonk b situated 1462 ft. 
above sea-Ievd, 60 m. by road south from Jaipur, near the right 
bank of the river Banas. Pop. (1901), 38,759. It is surrounded 
by a wall, with a mud fort. It has a high school, the Waller 
female hospital under a lady superintendent, and a hospital for 

There b another town in India called Tonk, or Tank, in Dera 
Ismail Khan dbtrict, North-West Frontier Provmce; pop. (1901), 
4402. It b the residence of a nawab, who formeriy exercised 
semi-independent powers. Here Sir Henry Durand, lieutenant- 
governor of the Punjab, was lulled in 1870 when passing on an 
dephant under a gateway. 

TONNAGB. The mode of ascertainmg the tonnage of mer- 
chant ships b settled by the Merchant Shipping Acts. But 
before explaining the method by which thb b computed, it b 
well to remark that there are several tonnages employed in 
different connexions. Displacement tannage b that which b 
invariably used in respect of warships, and b the actual weight 
of water displaced by the vessd whose tonnage b being d^t 
* Jowett'a tranilaticMi. 

with. Men-of-War are designed to carry all thdr weights, 
induding coal, guns, ammunition, stores and water in tanks and 
in boilers, at a certain draught, and the tonnage attributed to 
them b the weight of water which at that designed draught 
they actually dbplace. Thb dbpUcement tonnage b therefore 
a total made up of the actual weight of the ship's fabric and 
that of everythmg that b on board of her. It can be found by 
ascertainmg the exact cubic space occupied by the part of her 
body which b unmersed (induding her rudder, propellers and 
external shafting) at the draught under consideratk>n m cubic 
feet, and dividing thb by 35, smce 35 cubic feet of sea-water 
weigh one ton. Of course there b nothing to prevent displace- 
ment tonnage from being used in describing the size of merchant 
ships, and mdeed in regard to the performances of fast steam- 
ships on trial it b usual to give their draught on the occasion 
when they are tested, and to sute what was their actMal displace- 
ment under these trial conditions. But it b obvious, from what 
has been said as to the components which go to make up the 
dbplacement at load draught, that thb tonnage must, in respect 
of any individual ship, be the greatest figure which can be quoted 
hi regard to her size. It b usual for dues to be assessed against 
merchant vesseb in respect of thdr refu^ererftoniM^. Thb must 
therdore be fixed by authority, and at present vesseb are 
measured by the officer of customs according to the rules hud 
down hi the second schedule to the Merchant Shipping Act 
1894. As will be seen from the explanatwo of the method 
adopted, thb b a somewhat arbitrary process, and even the 
gross regbtered tonnage a^ords little indicatbn of the actual 
size of the ship, whibt the under-deck and net tonnages axe 
still less in accord with the extreme dimensions. 

As to tengjtk for tonnage, the measurements start with the 
tonnage deck, which in vesseb with less than three decks b the 
upper, and in vesseb of three or more decks b the second from 
below. The length for tonnage b measured b a straight line 
along thb deck from the inside of the inner plank at Uie bow 
to the inside of the inner plank at the stem, making allowance 
for the rake, if any, which the midship bow and stern timbers 
may have m the actual deck. When thb is measured it b 
apparent mto which of five dassea the ship's tonnage-length 
pUces her. If she be under 50 ft. in length she falb into the 
first class, while if she be over 225 ft. in length she falb into the 
fifth dass, the remaining three classes being intermedbte to 
these. Vesseb of the first dass are measured as in four equal 
sections, and vesseb of the larger dass as in twdve equal sections, 
according to theur length. Then at each of the points of divbion 
so marked off transverse areas are taken. Thb b done by 
measuring the depth in feet from a point at a dbtance of one* 
third of the round of the beam below the tonnage deck to the 
upper side of the floor timbers. Where the vessd has a ceiling 
and no water-balhut tanks at the pohit of measurement, 2I in. 
b allowed for ceiling. But where there are such tanks the 
measurement b taken from the top of the Unk and no allowance 
b made for ceilmg, whether there in fact be any or not. If the 
midship depth so found exceeds 16 ft., each depth b divided into 
six equal parts, and the horizontal breadths are measured at 
each point of division and also at the upper and lower points of 
the depth, extending each measurement to the average thickness 
of that part of the ceiling which b between the points of measure- 
ment They are then numbered from above, and the second, 
fourth and sixth multiplied by four, whibt the third and fifth 
are multiplied by two. The products are then added together. 
To the sum are added the first and the seventh breadths. Thb 
total having been multiplied by one-third the common interval 
between the breadths, the resultant b the transverse area. The 
transverse areas so obtained at each point of the vessd's length 
are numbered from the bow aft. Omitting the first and Ust. the 
second and every even area so obtained are multiplied by four, 
whibt the third and every odd area are multiplied by two. 
These products are added together, as are also those of the first 
and last areas if they yield anything, and the figure thus reached 
b multiplied by one-third of the common interval between the 
areas. Thb product b reckoned as the cubical capacity </ tka 



aMp in feet. ^Hien divided by xoo the result is the rtgistered 
wmier-dtck lotmage of the ship— subject to the additions and 
d ed u ctio ns ordexed by the act. Directions of a kind similar 
to those already set out are given whereby the tonnage in the 
space enclosed between the tonnage and upper decks may be 
ascertained, and also lor the measuring of any break, poop or 
other permanent dosed-in space on the upper deck available 
far stores, and the sum of thie capacity of these must be added 
to the under-deck tonnage to arrive at the gross regisiered tonnage. 
Bat an express proviso is enacted that no addition shall be made 
in respect of any building erected lor the shelter of deck paa- 
sc o g er s and approved by the board of trade. In the process of 
arriving at the nd tonnage the main deduction allowed from the 
gross tonnage is that of machinery space in steamships. The 
method of measurement here is similar to that by which the 
vnder-deck tonnage is reached. Where the engines and boilers 
are fitted in separate compartments, each compartment is 
measoxed separately, as is the screw shaft tunnel in the case 
of steamships propdled by screws. The tonnage of these spaces 
is reckoned, not from tl» tonnage deck, but from the crown of 
the space; whilst, if it has previously been reckoned in the gross 
tonnage, there may be an allowance for the space above the 
crown, k enclosed fw the machinery or for the admission of 
li^xt and air. Allowances are only made in respect of any 
maduncry space if it be devoted soldy to machinery or to 
li^t and air. It must not be used for cargo purposes or 
for cabins. Further, by the act itself in the case of paddle 
steamships,, where the machinery space is above 20% and 
under 30% of the gross tonnage* it i» allowed to be reckoned 
u 37% 0^ such gross tonnage; whilst similarly, in the case of 
screw steamships, where such machmezy space is over 13 % 
and under so% of the gross tonnage, it is allowed to be reckoned 
as 33%. Further deductions are a^ made in respect of space 
used solely for the accommodation of the master and the crew, 
and for the diart-room and signal-room, as well as for the whed- 
bouae and chun cable locker and for the donkey-engine and 
bailer, if connected with the main pumps of the ship, and in 
sailing veaseb for the sail locker. The space in the double 
bottom and in the water-ballast tanks, if these be not available 
for the cairiage of fod stores or cargo, is also deducted if it has 
been reckoned in the gross tonnage in the first instance. 

From the rules above laid down it follows that it is possible 
for vesads, if built with a full midship section, to have a gross 
v^tstered tonnagr considerably bdow what the actual cubical 
capacity of the ship would give, whilst in the case of steam 
tugs of hi^ power it is not unprecedented, owing to the large 
allowances for machinery and crew q»aoes, for a vtssd to 
have a registered net tonnage of niL 

Suez Onal dues being charged on what is practically the 
registered tonnage (though all deductions permitted by the 
British board of trade are not accepted), it is usual, at all events 
in the British navy, for warships to be measured for what would 
be their registered tonnage if they were merchant ships, so that 
incase they may wish to pass through the canal a scale of 
payment may be easfly reached. But such tonnage is never 
spoken of in considering their sise relative to other vessels. 

Two other tonnages are also made use of in connexion with 
merdiant ships, especially when spedfications for vessels are 
bdng made. The first of these is measurement capacity. This 
is found by measuring out the true cubic capadty of the holds, 
whereby it is found what amount of light measurement goods 
can be carried. The second is deadweight capacity. This is 
generaOy given as excluding what is carried in the coal bunkers, 
and it is therefore the amount of deadweight which can be carried 
in the holds at load draught when the vessd is fully charged 
with coab and stores. (B. W. G.) 

TOHVAOS AMD POUHDAOB, in England, customs duties 
andcntly imposed upon exports and imports, the former being a 
duty upon aQ wines imported in addition to prisage and butlerage, 
the latter a duty imposed ad valorem at the rate of twdve- 
penoe in the pound on all merchandise imported or exported. 
.Hie duties were levied at first by agreement with merchants 

(poundage in 1302, tonnage in 1347), then granted by parliament 
in X375» <^t first for a limited period only. They were considered 
to be imposed for the defence of the realm. From the reign 
of Henry VI. untO that of James I. they were usually granted 
for life. They were not granted to Charles I., and in i6a8 that 
king took the unconstitutional course of levying them on his 
own authority, a course denounced a few years later by 
x6 Car. I. c. x8 (1640), when the Long Parliament granted them 
for two months. After the Restoration they were granted to 
Charles II. and his two successors for life. By acts of Anne and 
George I. the duties were made perpetual, and mortgaged for the 
public debt. In 1 787 they were finally abolished, and other modes 
of obtaining revalue substituted, by 17 Geo. III. c 13 (1787). | 

Poundage also ngnifiet a fee pcud to an officer of a court for his 
services, e.g. to a •heriff's officer, who Is entitled by 39 Elis. c. 4 
(1586-1587) to a poundage of a shillinflf in the pound on an execution 
up to £100, and sucpence in the pound above that sum. 

TOMNERRE, a town of north-central France, capital of an 
arrondissement in the department of Yonne, $2 m. S.E. of Sens 
on the Paris-Lyon railway. Pop. (X906), 3974. It is situated 
on a slope of the vinedad hills on the left bank of the Axmanfion. 
At the foot of the hill rises the spring of Fosse-Dionne, endosed 
in a circular basin 49 ft. in diameter. The town has two interest- 
ing churches. That of St Pierre,, which crowns the hiU, possesses 
a fine lateral portal of the Renaissance period to which the church, 
with the exception of the choir (1351), belongs. The church of 
Notxe-Dame is mainly Gothic, but the facade is a fine sped^ien 
of Renaissance architecture. The Salle des Malades, a large 
timber-roofed apartment in the hospital, dates from the end of 
the X3th century and is used as a chapd. It is 330 ft. long and 
contains the tombs of Margaret of Burgux^dy, wife of Charles 
of Anjou, king of Sicily, and foundress of the hospital, and of 
Fransois-Michd Le Tdlier, marquis of Louvois, war minister 
of Louis XIV. The hospital itself was rebuilt in the X9th 
century. The Renaissance H6td d'Usds was built in the x6th 
century. Tonnerre is the seat of a sub-prefect and has a tribunal 
of first instance. The vineyards of the vicinity produce well- 
known wines. The trade of the town is chidSy in wine, in 
the good buUding-stone found in the neighbourhood and in 
Portland cement. Cooperage is carried on. 

Its ancient name of Tornodorum points to a Gallic or Gallo- 
Roman origin for Tonnerre. In the 6th century it became the 
capital of the region of Toxmerrois and in the xoth century of a 
coimtship. After passing into the possession of several noble 
families, it was bought from a count of Germont-Toxmerre by 
Louvois, by whose descendants it was hdd up to the time of 
the Revolution. 

TONQUA BBAir. The Tonqua, Tonka or Tonquin bean, 
also called the coumara nut. Is the seed of Dipterix odorata, a 
leguminous tree growing to a height of 80 ft., native of tropical 
South America. The drupe-like pod contains a single seed 
possessed of a fine sweet " new-mown hay " odour, due to the 
presence of coumarin (g.t.). Tonqua beans are used prindpally 
for scenting snuff and as an ingredient in perfume sachets and 
in perfumers' " bouquets." 

TONSBERO, a fortified seaport of ^iorway^ in Jarlsberg- 
Laurvik amt (county), situated on a bay on the south coast, 
near the entrance to Christiania Fjord, 7a m. S. by W. of Christ!- 
ania on the Skien railway. Pop. (X900), 86ao. It is one of 
the most andent towns in Norway. It is the headquarters of a 
sealing and whaling fleet. The prixxdpal Industxies are refineries 
for preparing whale and seal oil and saw-mills. An interesting 
collection of antiquities and whaling implements is preserved in 
the Slotstaam on Castle HOL 

TONSILLITIS, acute inflammation of the tonsils, or quixisy, 
due to the Invasion of the tonsil, or tonsils, by septic micro- 
organisms which may have gained access throu^^ the mouth or 
by the blood-stream. Sometimes the attack comes on as the 
result of direct exposure to sewer gas, and, it is not at all an 
uncommon affection of house surgeons, nurses and others 
who have to spend most of thdr time in a hospital. The 
association of quinsy with rheumatism may be the result of the 



infection of the tonsils by the microK>rgEnisnu or the toxins 
of that disease. Acute tonsillitis is very apt to run on to the 
formation of abscess. Quinsy may begin with a feeling of 
chilliness or with an attack of shivering. Then comes on a 
swelling in the throat with pain, tenderness and difficulty in 
swallowing. Indeed, if both tonsils are acutely inflamed it 
may be impossible to swallow even fluid and the breathing 
may be seriously embarrassed. The temperature may be raised 
several degrees. There b pain about the ear and about the 
jaw, and there is a swelling of the glands in the neck. The 
breath is offensive and the tongue is thickly coated. There 
may be some yellowish markings on the surface of the tonsil, 
but these differ from the patches of " false membrane " of 
diphtheria in that they can be easily brushed off by a swab, but 
often a true diagnosis can only be made by bacteriological 
examination. The treatment consists in giving a purgative, 
and in encouraging the patient to use an inhaler containing hot 
carbolized water. Hot compresses also may be apphed to the 
neck. As regards medicines, the most trustworthy are sahcylic 
acid, iron and quinine. As soon as abscess threatens, a 
slender-bladed knife should be thrust from before backward 
deeply into the swollen mass. And if, as most likely happens, 
matter then escapes, the patient's distress speedily ends. Con- 
valescence having set in, a change of air and course of tonic 
treatment will be advisable. 

Chronic tonsillitis is often associated' with adenmd vegetations 
at the back of the throat of tuberculous or delicate children, such 
children being spoken of as being " liable to sore throat." Chronic 
enlargement of the tonsils may seriously interfere with a child's 
general health and vigour and, should the condition not subside 
under general measures such as a stay at a bracing seaside place 
and the taking of cod-liver oil and iron, it will be w&\ to treat the 
tonsils by operation. (E. O.*) 

TONSON, the name of a family of London booksellers and 
publishers. Richard and Jacob Tonson (c. 1656- 1736), sons 
of a London barber-surgeon, started in 1676 and 1677 indepen- 
dently as booksellers and publishers in London. In 1670 Jacob, 
the better known of the two, bought and published Dryden's 
TroUus and Cressida, and from that time was closely associated 
with Dryden, and published most of his works. He published 
the Miscellany Poems (1684-1708) under Dryden's editorship, 
the collection being known indifferently as Dryden's or Tonsoh's 
Miscellany, and also Dryden's translation of Virgil (1697). 
Serious disagreements over the price paid, however, arose 
between poet and publisher, and in his Faction Displayed 
(1705) Dryden described Tonson as having " two left legs, and 
Judas-coloured hair." Subsequently the relations between the 
two men improved. The brothers jointly published Dryden's 
Spanish Friar (1683). Jacob Tonson also published Congreve's 
Double Dealer, Sir John Vanbrugh's The Faithful Friend and 
The Confederacy, and the pastorals of Pope, thus justifying 
Wycherly's description of him as "gentleman usncr to the 
Muses." He bought also the valuable rights of Paradise Lost, 
half in 1683 and half in 1690. This was his first profiuble 
venture in poetry. In 171 2 he became joint publisher with 
Samuel Buckley of the Spectator, and in the following year 
published Addison's Cato. He was the original secretary and 
a prominent member of the Kit-Cat Gub. About 1720 he gave 
up business and retired to Herefordshire, where he died on the 
2nd of April 1736. His business was carried on by his 
nephew, Jacob Tonson, jun. (d. 1735), and subsequently by 
his grand-nephew, also Jacob (d. 1767). 

TONSURE (Lat. tonsura, from tondere, to shave), a religious 
observance in the Roman Catholic and Orthodox Eastern 
Churches, consisting of the shaving or cutting part of the hair 
of the head as a sign of dedication to special service. The 
reception of the tonsure in these churches is the initial ceremony 
which marks admission to orders and to the rights and privileges 
of clerical standing. It is administered by the bishop with an 
appropriate ritual. Candidates for the rite must have been 
confirmed, be adequately instructed in the elements of the 
Christian faith, and be zblc to read and write. Those who have 
received it are bound (unless in exceptional circumstances) 
to renew the mark, consisUog »f a bare circle on the crown of 

the head, at least once a month, otherwise they forfeit the 
privileges it carries. The practice is not a primitive one, Ter- 
tullian simply advises Chriniians to avoid vanity in dressing 
their hair, and Jerome deprecates both long and closely cropped 
hair. According to Prudentius (tttpur. xiii. 30) it was customary 
for the hair to be cut short at ordination. Paulinus of Nola 
(c. 4Qo) alludes to the tonsure as in use among the (Western) 
monks, from them the practice quickly spread to the clergy. 
For Gaul about the year 500 we have the testimony of Sidonius 
Apollinaris (iv. 13), who says that Germanicus the bishop had 
his hair cut " in rotae speaem." 

The earliest instance of an eccle«astical precept on the subject 
occurs in can ^i of the Council of Toledo (a. D. 633)- " omncs cicrici. 
detonao supenus capite toio, inferius solam circuli coronam relin- 
quant." Can. 33 o( the Qumisext council (692) requires even singers 
and readers to be ton&ured. Since the 8ih century three ton&urcs 
have been more or less in use. known respectively as the Aoman, 
the Greek and the Celtic. The first two arc sometimes distinguished 
as the tonsure of Peter and the tonsure of Paul. The Roman or 
St Peter's tonsure prevailed in France. Spain and Italy. It consisted 
in shaving the whole head, leaving only a fringe of hair supposed 10 
symbolize the crown of thorns. Late in the middle ages this 
tonsure was lesbened for the clergy, but retained (or monks and 
friars. In the Eastern or St Paul's tonsure the whole head was 
shaven, but when now practised in the Eastern Church this tonsure 
is held to be adequately shown when the hair is shorn close. In 
the Celtic tonsure (tonsure of St John, or, in contempt, tonsure of 
Simon Magus) all the hair in front of a line drawn over the top of 
the head from ear to ear was shaven (a fashion common among the 
Hindus). The question of the Roman or Celtic tonsure wais one oS 
the points in dispute in the early British Church, settled in favour 
of the Roman fashion at the Council of Whitby (664). The tonsure 
at first was never given separately, and even children when so 
dedicated were appointed readbrs'. as no one could belong to the 
clerical state without at least a minor order. From the 7th century, 
however, children were tonsured without ordination, and later on 
adults anxious to escape secular jurisdiction were often tonsured 
without ordination. Till the loth century the tonsure could be 
given by priests or even by laymen, but its bestowal was gradually 
restricted to bishops and abbots. 

TONTINE, a system of life insurance owing its name to 
Lorenzo Tonti, an Italian banker, bom at Naples early in the 1 7th 
centuiy, who settled in France about 165a In 1653 he proposed 
to Cardinal Maxarin a new scheme for promoting a public loan. 
A total of i, livres was to be subscribed in ten portions 
of 102,500 livres each by ten classes of subscribers, the first class 
consisting of persons imder 7, the second of persons above 7 and 
under 14, and so on to the tenth, which consisted of persons 
between 63 and 7a The annual fund of each class was to be 
divided among the survivors of that class, and on the death of the 
last individual the capital was to fall to the state. This pUn of 
operations was authorized under the name of "tontine royale" 
by a royal edict, but this the parlement refused to register, and the 
idea remained in abeyance till 1689, when it was revived by 
Louis XIV., who established a tontine of 1,400,000 livres divided 
into fourteen classes of 100,000 each, the subscription being 300 
livres. This tontine was carried on till 1726, when the last bene- 
ficiaiy died — a widow who at the time of her decease was drawing 
an annual income of 73i50O livres. Several other government 
tontines were afterwards set on foot; but in 1763 restrictions 
were introduced, and in 1770 all tontines at the time in existence 
were wound up. Private tontines continued to Nourish in 
France for some years, the " tontine Lefarge," the most cele- 
brated of the kind, being opened in 1791 and closed in 1889. 

The tontine principle has often been applied in Great Britain, 
at one time in connexion with government life annuities. Many 
such tontines were set on foot between the years 1773 and 1789. 
those of 1773, 1775 and 1777 being commonly called the Irish 
tontines, as the money was borrowed under acts of the Irish parlia- 
ment. The most important English tontine was that of 1780, which 
was created by 29 Geo. 1 1 1, c. 4 1. Under this act over a million was 
raised in 10,000 shares of £100, 5s. It was also often applied to the 
purchase of estates or the erection of buildings. The investor 
staked his money on the chance of his own life or the life of his 
nominee enduring for a longer period than the other lives involved 
in the speculation, in which case he expected to win a large prize. It 
was occasionally introduced into life assurance, more particularly 
by American lite offices, but newer and more ingenious forms of 
contract have now made the tontine principle practically a thing 
of the pasc (See National Debt : Insurance.) 


TOOKB. JOmi ROBVB (1756-18x3), EngUsh politidan and 
philologist, thizd son of John Home, a poulterer in Newport 
Market, whose business the boy when at Eton happily veiled 
under the title of a " IHirkey merchant," was bom in Newport 
Sneet, Long Acre, Westminster, on the 3Sth of June 1756. 
After passing some time at school in Soho Square, and at a 
Kentish village, he went from 1744 to 1746 to Westminster 
School and for the next five or six years was at Eton. On the 
1 2th of January 1754 he was admitted as sizar at St John's 
College, Cambridge, and took his degree of B.A. hi 1758, as last 
but one of the senior optimes, Richard Beadon, his lifelong friend, 
afterwards bishop of Bath and Wells, being a wrangler in the 
same year. Home had been admitted on the 9th of November 
1756, as student at the Inner Temple, making the friendship of 
John Dunning and Lloyd Kenyon, but his father wished him to 
Uke orders in the EngUsh Church, and he was ordained deacon 
on the a^rd of September 1759 and priest on the sjrd of 
November 176a For a few months he was usher at a boarding 
school at Blackheath, but on the 36th of September 1760 he 
became perpetual cuxaU of New Brentford, the incumbency of 
which his father had purchased for him, and he retained its 
scanty profits until 1773. During a part of this time (1763-1764) 
he was absent on a tour in France, acting as the bear-leader of a 
son of the miser Elwes. Under the ezdtement created by the 
actions of Wilkes, Home plunged into politics, and in 1765 
brought out a scathing pamphlet on Lords Bute and Mansfield, 
entitled ".The Petition of an Englishman." In the autumn of 
1765 he escorted to Italy the son of a Mr Taylor. In Paris he 
made the acquaintance of Wilkes, and from Montpellier, in 
January 1766, addressed a letter to him which sowed the seeds 
of their personal antipathy. In the summer of 1767 Home 
landed again on English sofl, and in 1768 secured the retum of 
Wilkes to parliament for Middlesex. With inexhaustible energy 
be promoted the legal proceedings over the riot in St George's 
Fields, when a youth named Allen was killed, and exposed the 
irregularity in the judge's order for the execution of two Spital- 
fields weavers. His dispute with George Onslow, member for 
Surrey, who at first supported and then threw over Wilkes for 
place, culminated in a civil action, ultimately decided, after the 
reversal of a verdict which had been obtained through the charge 
of Lord Mansfield, in Home's favour, and in the loss by his 
opponent of his seat in parliament. An influential association, 
called " The Society for Supporting the Bill of Rights," was 
founded, mainly through the exertions of Home, in 1769, but 
the members were soon divided into two opposite camps, and 
in 177X Home and Wilkes, their respective leaders, broke out 
into open warfare, to the damage of their cause. On the xst 
of July 1 77 1 Home obtained at Cambridge, though not without 
some opposition from members of both the political parties, his 
degree of M.A. Earlier in that year he claimed for the public the 
right of printing an account of the debates in parliament, and 
after a protracted struggle between the ministerial majority and 
the civic authorities, the right was definitely esUblished. The 
enerigies of the indefatigable parson knew no botmds. In the 
same year (1771) be crossed swords with Junius, and ended in 
disarming his masked antagonist. Up to this time Home's fixed 
income consisted of those scanty emoluments attached to a 
position which gaDed him daily. He resigned his benefice in 
1773 and betook himself to the study of the law and philology. 
An accidental drcumsunce, however, occurred at this moment 
which largely affected his future. His friend Mr William Tooke 
lud purchased a considerable esUte, including Purley Lodge, 
south of the town of Crbydon in Surrey. The possession of 
this property brought about frequent disputes with an ad- 
joining landowner, Thomas de Grey, and, after many actions 
in the courts, his friends endeavoured to obtain, by a bill 
forced through the houses of parliament, the privileges which 
the law had not assigned to him (Febraary 1774)- Home, 
thereupon, by a bold libel on the Speaker^ drew public atten- 
tion to the case, and though he himself was placed for a 
time in the custody of the serjeant-at-arms, the dauses which 
vere injurious to the interest of Mr Tooke were eliminated from 

;txvii 1* 


the bin. Mr Tooke declared his intention of making Home 
the heir of his fortune, and, if the design was never carried 
into effect, during his lifetime he bestowed upon him large 
gifts of money. No sooner had this matter been happily 
settled than Home found himself involved in serious 
trouble. For his conduct in signing the advertisement soUdting 
subscriptions for the relief of the relatives of the Americans 
*' murdered by the king's troops at Lexington and Concord," 
he was tried at the Guildhall on the 4th of July 1777, before 
Lord Mansfield, found guilty, and committed to the King's Bench 
prison in St George's Fields, from which he only eme^ed after 
a year's durance, and after a loss in fines and costs amounting to 
£1 200. Soon after his deliverance he applied to be called to the 
bar, but his application was negatived on the ground that his 
orders in the Church were indelible. Home thereupon tried his 
fortune, but without success, on farming some land in Hunting- 
donshire. Two tracts about this time exercised great influence 
in the country. One of them, Pacts Addressed to LondkcUers, 
&C. (1780), written by Home in conjunction wi^ others, 
criticising the measures of Lord North's ministry, passed through 
numerous editions; the other, A Letter on ParliameiUary Rrform 
(1783), addressed by him to Dunning, set out a scheme 
of reform, which he afterwards withdrew fai favour of that 
advocated by Pitt On his retum from Huntingdonshire he 
became once mora a frequent guest at Mr Tooke's house at 
Purley, and in 1782 assximed the name <^ Home Tooke. In 
1786 Home Tooke conferred perpetual fame upon his bene- 
factor's cotmtry house by adopting, as a second title of. his 
elaborate philological treatise of ^«ca m^p6cyra, the more 
popular though misleading title of The Diversions of Purley. 
The treatise at once attracted attention in England and the 
Continent The first part was published in 1786, the second 
in 1805. The best edition is that which was published in 1839, 
under the editorship of Richard Ta^or, with the additions 
written in the author's interleaved copy. 

Between 1783 and 1790 Tooke gave his support to Pitt, and 
in the dection for Westminster, in 1784, threw all his energies 
into opposition to Fox. With Fox he was never on terms of 
friendship, and Samud Rogers, in his Table Talk, asserts that 
their antipathy was so pronotmced that at a dinner party given 
by a prominent Whig not the slightest notice was taken by Fox 
of the presence of Home Tooke. It was after the dection of 
Westminster in 1788 that Tooke depicted the rival statesmen 
(Lord Chatham and Lord Holland, William Pitt and C. J. Fox) 
in his cdebrated pamphlet of Two Pair of Portraits, At the 
general election of 1790 he came forward as a candidate for that 
distinguished constituency, in opposition to Fox and Lord Hood, 
but was ddeated; and, at a second trial in 1796, he was again 
at the bottom of the poll. Meantime the excesses of the French 
republicans had provoked reaction in England, and the Tory 
ministry adopted a policy of repression. Home Tooke was 
arrested early on the morning of the i6th of May 1794, and 
conveyed to the Tower. His trial for high treason lasted for six 
days (17th to 33nd of November) and ended in his acquittal, 
the jury only taking eight minutes to settle their verdict. His 
public life after this event was only distinguished by one act of 
importance. Through the influence of the second Lord Camd- 
foid, the fighting peer, he was retumed to parliament in z8ox 
for the pocket borough of Old Sarum. Lord Temple endeavoured 
to secure his exdusion on the ground that he had taken orders 
in the Church, and one of Gilray's caricatures delineates the two 
politicians. Temple and Camelford, playing at battledore and 
shuttlecock, with Home Tooke as the shuttlecock. The ndnistry 
of Addington would not support this suggestion, but a bill 
was at once introduced by them and carried into law, which 
rendered all persons in holy orders ineligible to sit in the House 
of Commons, and Home Tooke sat for that parliament only. 

The last years of Tooke's life wen spent in retirement in a 
house on the west side of Wimbledon Common. The traditions 
of his Sunday parties have lasted unimpaired to thb day, 
and the most pleasant pages penned by his biographer describe 
the politicians and the men of letters who gathered ro\md *<(■ 




bospiubk board. His conventUonal powen rivalled those of 
Dr Johnson; and, if more of his sr^ings have not been chronicled 
for the benefit of posterity, the defect is due to the absence of a 
Boswell. Throui^ the liberality of his friends, his last days 
were freed from the pressure of poverty, and he was enabled 
to place his illegitimate son in a position which soon brought 
him wealth, and to leave a competency to his two illegitimate 
daughters. Illness seised him early In z8xo, and for the next 
two years his sufferings were acute. He died in his house at 
Wimbledon on the x8th of March z8ia, and his body was buried 
with that of his mother at Ealing, the tomb which he had 
prepared in the garden attached to his house at Wimbledon 
being found unsuitable for the interment. An altar-tomb still 
stands to his memory in Ealing churchyanL A catalogue of 
his librarv was printed in i8it. 

The Uje of Home Tooke^ by Alexander Stephens, is written in an 
unattractive style and was the work of an admirer only admitted 
to hb acquainunce at the close of his days. The notice in the 
QuarU^y Review, June i8i3, of W. Hamilton Reid's compilation, 
u by J. W. Ward, Lord Dudley. The main facts of his life are set 
out by Mr J. E. Thorold Roffera, in hb Historical CieantHts, and 
series. Many of Home Tooke s wittiest sayings arc preserved in the 
TaUe Talk of Samuel Rogers and S. T. Coleridge. (W. P. C.) 

TOOKB, THOMAS (1774-1858), English economist, was bom 
at St Petersburg on the agth of February 1774. Entering a 
large Russian house in London at an early age, he acquired 
sound practical experience of commercial matters and became 
a recognised authority on finance and banking. He was one of 
the earliest advocates of free trade and drew up the Merchants* 
Petition presented to the House of Commons by Alexander 
Baring, afterwards Lord Ashburton. He gave evidence before 
several parliamentary committees, notably the committee of 
x82z, on foreign trade, and those of 1832, 1840 and 1848 on the 
Bank Acts. He was elected a fellow of the Royal Society in 
xSaz. He died in London on the 26th of February 1858. 

Tooke was the author of Thouikts and Details on the High and Low 
Prices of the last Thirty Years (1823). Considerations on the State of 
the Cnrrency (1826), in both of which he showed his hostility to the 
polkry afterwaids carried out in the Bank Act of 1844. but he b 
best known for hb History of Prices and of the State of the Circulation 
during Ihe Years tfov-tSso (6 vols., 1838-1857). In the first four 
volumes he treats w of the prices of com, and the circumstances 
affecting prices; (6) the prices of produce other than com; and (c) 
the state of the circulation. The two final volumes, written in 
coniunctbn with W. Newmarch (^.s.), deal with railways, free trade, 
banking in Europe and the effecu 01 new discoveries of gold. 

TOOL (0. Eng. M/, generally referred to a root seen in the 
Goth, laujan, to make, or in the English word " taw," to work or 
dress leather), an implement or appliance used by a worker 
in the treatment of the substances used in hb handicraft, 
whether in the preliminary operations of setting out and 
measuring the materiab, in reducing hb work to the reqtiired 
form by cutting or otherwise, in gauging it and testing its 
accuracy, or in duly securing it while thus being treated. 

For the toob of prehistoric man see such articles as Archaboloct ; 
Flint 1mplem£nts; and Egypt, ^Art and Archaeology, 

In beginning a survey of toob it b necessary to draw the 
dbtinction between hand and machine tools.- The former class 
includes any tool which u held and operated by the unaided 
hands, as a chisel, plane or saw. Attach one of these to some 
piece of operating mechanbm, and it, with the environment of 
whidi it b the central essential object, becomes a machine tooL 
A very simple example b the common power-driven hack saw 
for metal, or the small high-speed drill, or the wood-boring auger 
held in a frame and turned by a windi handle and bevel-gears. 
The difference between these and a big frame-saw cutting down a 
dozen boards simultaneously, or the immense machine boring the 
cylinders of an ocean liner, or the great gun lathe, or the hydraulic 
press, b so vast that the relation^ip b hardly apparent. Often 
the tool itself b absolutely dwarfed by the machine, of which 
nevertheless it b the central object and around which the machine 
b designed and built. A mlllLig machine weig^ng several tons 
will often be seen rotating a tool of but two or three dozen 
pounds' weight. Yet the machine b fitted with elaborate slides 
Aod self -acting movemcntSi and provision for taking up wear. 

and b worth some hundreds of pounds sterling, while the tool 
may not be worth two pounds. Such apparent anomalies are 
in constant evidence. We propose, therefore, first to take a 
survey of the principles that underlie the forms of tools, and 
then pursue the subjea of their embodiment in machine tools. 

Hand Tools 
The most casual observation reveab the fact that toob admit 
of certain broad classifications. It b apparent that by far the 
hrger number owe their value to their capacity for cutting or 
removing portions of material by an incbive or wedge-like 
action, leaving a smooth surface behind. An analysb of the 
essential methods of operation gives a broad grouping as 
follows: — 
I. The chisel group . . Typified by the chisel of the woodworker. 

n. The shearing group scissors. 

III. The acrapen ... „ „ cabinet-maker's scrape. 

V. The moulding group . „ „ troweL 

The first three are generally all regarded as cutting tools, 
notwithstanding that those in II. and III. do not operate as 
wedges, and therefore are not true chisels. But many occupy 
a border-line where the results obtained are practically those 
due to cutting, as in some of the shears, saws, milling cutters, 
files and grinding wheeb, where, if the action b not directly 
wedge-like, it b certainly more or less incisive in character. 

Cutting Tods.—'Tht cutting edge of a tool b the practical outcome 
of several conditions. Keenness of edge, equivalent to a small 
degree of anjsle between the tool faces, would appnir at first sight 
to oe the pnme dement in cutting, as indeed it b in the case <S a 
razor, or in that of a chisel for soft wood. But that b not the prime 
condition in a tool for cutting iron or steel. Strength b of far 
greater importance, and to it some keenness of edge must be sacri- 
ficed. All cutting tools are wedges: but a razor or a chisel edge, 
included between angles of is* or 20^ would be turned over at onoe 
if presented to iron or steel, Tor which angles of from 60* to 75* an^ 
required. Further, much greater rigidity in the latter, to resist 
spring and fracture, b necessary than in the former, because the 
resistance to cutting is much greater. A workman can operate a 
turning tool by hand, evenon heavy pieces of mctal-woi;k. Formerly 
all turning, no matter how brg^, was done by hand-operated tooU, 
and after great muscular exertion a few pounds of metal might be 
removed in an hour. But coerce a rimilarly formed tool in a rigid 
guide or test, and drive it by the power of ten or twenty men, and 
It becomes possible to remove say a hundredweight of chip* in an 
hour. Or. increase the size of the tool and its capacity for endurance,? 
and drive by the power of 40 or 60 horses, and hall a ton of chips 
may be removed in an hour. 

All machine toob of which the chisel is the type operate by cutting: 
that Is, they act on the same principle and by the same essential 
method as the knife, razor or chisel, and not by that of the grind- 
stone. A single tool, however, may act as a cuttins instrument at 
one time and as a scrape at another. The butcher's knife will 
afford a familbr illustration. It b used as a cutting tool when sever- 
ing a steak, but it becomes a scrape when used to clean the block. 
The difference b not therefore due to the form of the knife, but to the 
method of its application, a distinction which holds good in reference 
to the toob used by engineers. There b a very old hand tool once 
much used in the engineer's turnery, termed a graver." This was 
employed for cutting and for scraping indiscriminately, simply by 
varyiiqr the ang^le of its presentation. At that time the question 
of the best cutting angles was seldom raised or discussed, occause 
the manipubtive instinct of the turner settled it as the work pro- 
ceeded, and as the material operated on varied in texture and degree 
of hardness. But since the use of the slide rest holding toob rigidly 
fixed has become general, the question of the most suiuble tool 
formation has been the subject of much experiment and discussion. 
The almost unconscious experimenting which goes on every day 
in every workshop in the world proves that there may be a difference 
of several degrees of angle in toob doing similar work, without 
having any appredable effect upon results. So long as certain 
broad principles and reasonable limits are observed, that b sufiident 
forpracttcal purposes. 

Clearly, in order that a tool shall cut, it must possess an incisive 
form. In fig. i, A might be thrust over the surface of the plate of 
metal, but no cutting action could ujce place. It would amply 
grind and polish the surface. If it were formed like B, the grinding 
action would give place to scraping, by which some material would 
be removed. Many tools are formed thus, but there b still no 
incisive or knife-like action, and the tool b simply a scrape and not 
a cutting tool. But C is a cutting tool, possessing penetrative 
capacity. If now B were tilted backwards as at D, it would at 


once become a cutting tool But its bevelM face would rub and 
Rind on the surface of the work, producing friction and heat, and 
interfering with the penetrative action of the cutting edge. On 
the other hand, if C were tilted forwards as at £ its action would 
approximate to that of a scrape for the time being. But the high 
ar^e of the hinder bevdied face would not afford adequate support 
to the cutting edee, and the latter would therefore become worn 
off almost instantly, precisely as that of a raaor or wood-working 
chisel would crumble away if operated on hard metaL It is obvious 


Fig. I. 
il. Tool which voald burnish F, G, H, Presentations of tools 
* ' only. for planing, turning and 

B. Scrape. boring respwctively. 

C Cutting tool. /, JC, !>, Approxinoate angles of 

D aad £. Soaping and cutting tools; a, clearance angle, or 

nted. bottom rake: 6, ffont or top 

rake; c, tool angle. 

tools improperly presentt 

t he refore that the correct form for a cutting tool must depend upon 
a due Inlance being maintained between the angle of the front 
and of the bottom faces — " front " or *' top rake, ' and " bottom 
rake" or " dearance "^-considered in regard to their method of 

Ceseniatiou to the work. Since^ too, all tools used in machines are 
bl rigidly in one position, differing in this respect from hand- 
operated tools, it follows that a constant angle should be given to 
anstruroents which are used for operating on a given kind of metal 
or aOoy. It docs not matter whether a tool u driven in a lathe, 
or a plaaing machine, or a sharper or a slotter ; whether it is cutting 
o«k c at cm a lor internal surfaces, it is always maintained in a direction 
perpendicutarfy to the pojnt of af^ication as in fig. I, F, C, H, 
planing, turning and boring respiectivelv. It is consistent with 
reason and with fact that tne softer and more fibrous the metal, 
the keener must be the formation of the tool, and that, conversely, 
the harder and more crystalline the metal the more obtuse must be 
the cutting angles, as m the extremes of the nuor and the tools 
for cutting iron auid sted alres^dy instanced. The three figures 
J. K, L show tools suitably formed for wrought iron and mild steel, 
for cast iron and cast steel, and for brass respectively. Cast iron 
and cast sted oould not be cut properly with the first, nor wrought 
iron and fibrous steel with the second, nor dther with the third. 
The angles given are those which accord best with general practice, 
bat th^ are ffot constant, being varied by conditions, espedally 
by lubrication and rigidity of fastenings. The profiles of the first 
and second tools are given mainly with the view of having material 
for grinding away, without the need for frequent reforging. But 
there are many tools which are formed quite differently when used 
in toot-h<dders and in turrets, though the same essential prindples 
of angle are observed. 

The OMde of dgttrance, or rdief,-a^ in fig. I, is an important detail 
of a cutting tool. It is of greater importance than an exact angle 
of top rake But, given some sufficient angle of clearance, its 
cacact amount is not of much moment. Ndther need it be uniform 
for a given cutting edge. It may vary from say 3* to lO*, or even 
ao*. and under good conditions httle or no practical differences will 
result. Act ually it need never vary much from 5 * to 7 *. The object 
in giving a clearance angle is simply to prevent friction between 
the non-cutting face immediately adjacent to the edge and the 
surface of the work. The limit to this dearance is that at which 
insuSkicat support is afforded to the cutting edge. These are the 
t«ro facts, which if fulfilled permit of a considerable range in dear- 
ance angle. The softer the metal bdng cut the greater can be the 
clearance: the harder the material the less clearance is permissible 
because the edge requires greater support. 

The front, or top rake, 6 m fig. i, is the angle or slope of the front, 
or top face, of the tool : it is varied mainly according as materials 
are crystalline or fibrous. In the turnings and cuttings taken off 
the more crystalline metals and alloys, the oroken appearance of the 
chips is distirmiished from the shavings remo\'ed from the fibrous 
materials. This is a feature which always distinguishes cast iron 
asd usBannealed cast sted from mild sted, high carbon sted from 

that low in carbon, and cast Iron from wrought fatm. It Indicates 
too that extra work is put on the tool in breaking up £he chips, 
following immediatdy on thdr severance, and when the comminu- 
tions are very small they indicate insuffident top rake. This 
is a result that turnen try to avoid when possible, or at least to 
minimize. Now the greater the slope of the top rake the more 
easily will the cuttings come away, with the minimum of break in the 
crystalline materials and absolutely unbroken over lengths of many 
feet in the fibrous ones. The breaking up, or the continuity 
of the cuttings, therefore affords an indication of the suitability chT 
the amount of top rake to its work. But compromise often has 
to be made between the kleal and the actual. The amount of top 
rake has to be limited in the harder metals and alloys in order to 
secure a strong tod angfe, without which toob wouM lack the endur^ 
ance required to sustain them through several boura without 

The to0# aiiflff, e, is the angle induded between top and bottom 
faces, and its amount, or thickness e xp res s ed in degrees, k a measure 
of the strength and endurance of any tool. At extremes it varies 
from about 15* to 85*. It is traceable in all kinds of tools, having 
very diverse forms. It is difficult to place some groups in the 
cutting category; they are on the border-line between cutting and 
scraping instruments. 

Typical Tools. — ^A bare enumeration of. the diverse forms in which 
tods of the chisd type occur b not even possible here. The grouped 
illustrations ffigs. 3 to 6) show some 01 the types, but it will be 
understood that each b varied in dimensions, angles and outlines 
to suit all the varied kinds of metals and alloys and conditwns of 
operatwn. For, as every tool has to be gripped in a holder of some 
kind, as a slide-rest, tool-box, turret, toof-nolder, box, cr o cs slide, 
&C., thb often determines the choice of some one form in preference 
to another. A broad division b that into roughing and finishing 

Fig. a.—Metal-tuming Tools. 

A , Shape of tool used for scrap- £, Diamond or angular-edge tool 
ii^ brass. for cutting all metals. 

Bt Straightforward tool for turn- F, Plan of finishing tool, 

ing all metals. C, Spring tool for finishing. 

C, Right- and left-hand tools for H, Side or knife tool. 

all metals. J, Parting or cutting-off to<J. 

A A better form of same X, L, Round-nose tools. 
M, Radius tool. 

Fig. 3. — Croup of Planer Tools. 

A, Planer type of tool, cranked £, Parting or cutting-off or 

to avoid digging into the grooving tool 

metal. F, V tool for grooves. 

B. Face view of roughing tool. C, Right- and Idt-hand toob for 

C. Face view of finishing tool. V-slots. 

D, Right- and left-hand knife or H, Ditto for T-dota 

sidetoobk /. Radius tool hdd io holder. 


took. Generally though hot fflVBfbbly the tdgs of the fint ii 
narrow, of the lecond broad, corrt^F-^jnair^fi with tbr tierp cuiiitst 
mnd fiiie travene of the fint and the thaliow cyttlnjf an4 brW 




Fic. 4. — Croup or SJotler Tool*, 



^,G>mnion roughing tool, fl. Parti ng^ff or EFOOvifig 
C RoujKhing or finishing tool in a ttddei, D, DDublc-edgcd tool 
for cutting opposite sides of a t\ot* 


bar of sted. This is costly when the best tool steel is used, hence 
large numbers of toob comprise points only, which are gripped in 
permanent holders in which they interchange. Tool steel usually 
ranges from about } in. to 4 in. square; most engineers' work is done 
with bars of from \ in. to 1 1 in. square. It is in the smaller and 
medium sizes of tool* that holders prove of most value. Sobd tools, 
varying from 2| in. to a in. K^are, are used for the heaviest cutting 
done in the planing machine. Tool-holders are not employed for very 
heavy work, because the heat generated would not set away fait 
enqugh from small tool points. There are scores of holders ; per- 
haps a dozen n)od approved types are in common use. They are 
divisible into three great groups: those in which the top rake of 
the tool point is embodied in the holder, and is constant ; those in 
which the dearance is similarly embodied: and those in which 
nather b provided for. but in which the tool point is ground to any 
angle. Charles Babba^ designed the first tool-holder, ami the 
essential type survives in several modem forms. The best-known 
holders now are the Tangye, the Smith & Coventry, tlKe Armstrong, 
some by Mr C. Taykw, and the Bent. The Smith & Coventry (fig. 5), 
used more perhaps than any other single design, includes two forms. 
In one E the tool is a bit of round steel set at an angle which gives 
front rake, and having the top end ground to an angle of top rake. 
In the other A the tool has the section of a truncated weclge, set 
for constant top rake, or cutting anjgle, and having bottom rake 
or clearance angle ground. The Smith & Coventry round tool is 
not applicable for all cUsses of work. It will turn plain work, and 

K'ane level faces, but will not turn or plane into comers or angles.* 
ence the invention of the tool of V-section, and the swivel tool- 
holder. The round tool-holders are made right- and left-handed, 
the swivel tool-holder has a universal movement. The amount of 
projection of. the round tool points is very limited, which impairs 
their utility when some overhanging of the tool is necessary. The 
V-tools can be slid out in their holders to operate on faces and 
edges situated to some conakierable distance inwards from the end 
of the tool-holder. 

Box Tools. — In one feature the ^x tools of the turret lathes 
resemble tool-holders. The small pieces of steel used for tool 
points are gripped in the boxes, as in tool-holders, and all the 
advantages which are derived from this arrangement of separating 
the point from its hoUer are thus secured (fig. 7}. But in all other 

Fic. 5. — Cftiufi of Toot-holdLTL 
A, Smith & Coventry swivitjinR holdtr. B, HolUej- for squartr 
steel. C D, right- and left- hand form» of t^mc. £, Holder fur 
round sted. /'.Holder for narrow partin£-o(T tool 

travene of the second. The follcftiris are some of tKc principal 
forms. The round-nosed roui^liijig tuol (ftg. 1} B h d\ strdi^lit- 
fcjrward type, used for turning, 
planing and ehaplnKr Ai the 
correct torjl anolc can only occur 
on the mijtlle plani^of ihc tool, it 
is uiitial to etnploy era n he'd tnoh, 
C D^ jEh right- and left- handed, 
fiir hcavj^ if.nd tiKKJt."ratcly heavy 
dyty, I he dirtctian of tht crank- 
ine C(irrt;$pc>nc]ing with that in 
*hif|i ihc iopI is required to 
travrt^. Tw?h loT btiring are 
CTaofccd and many br pljnm^ 
(fiR. i). The*lcnting tools (fig i) 
tmtjpdy ibc eanie [jrincipk but 
their shanlcs arc in liist wiih 
the direction of cutting, M^fiy 
rougthing and finisihinf; loob aro 
of knife type H. F i n i ih i hr t na] s 
have broiii edEci, F, G. fi Tht-y 
o<r^ur in ttmij^htfonv'ard and 
richt- and left -hand type*- 
Trit>t Lit » rule remave Je^i inan 
^t in, in dcpih, while the rouRh- 
msi tool* may cut an inch or 
more into the mrtAl- But the 
traverse of the first oJ^Ttn tsccods 
jin inch, while in that of the 
w<:oTid t in !■* ^ very coar^ 
antoiitit of fcrfT. Spring tools, C, 
used less now than formeriyn. arc nnHy of v^ilue fnr hnpartine a *moot h 
finish to a surface. They are fTnuhin^ tcxiU only. Some tpting 
tools are formed with oonsklfr^Me top take, btit j^F^i^cTully th^y act 
by scraping only. 

Solid Tools V. Toat-koUeri—lt will be observed that «ht for4> 
foiof are solid tools; that ia» the cutting portion is forged from a solid 

Fic. 6.— Group of Chiseli, 

A, Paring chiseL 

B, Socket chisel for bcavy duty. 

C, Common chipping chiseL 

D, Narrow cross-cut or cape ch i m"] . 
£, Cow-mouth chisel, or gouic^ 

P, Straight chisel or sett. 
G, Hollow chisel or sett. 

Fig. 7.— Box Tool for Turret Lathe. (Alfred Herbert, Ltd., Coventry.) 
At Cutting tool. Bt Screw for adjusting radius of cut. C C, 
V-steadies supporting the work in opposition to ^4. D, Diameter 
of work. B, Body of holder. F, Stem which fiu in the turret. 

respects the two are dissimilar. Two or three tool-holders of different 
sixes take all the tool points used in a lathe, but a new box has to 
be devised in the case of almost every new job, with the exception 
of those the principal formation of which is the turning down of 
plain bars. The explanation is that, instead of a single point, 
several are commonly carried in a box. As complexity increases 
with the number of tools, new designs and dimensions of boxes 
become necessary, even though there may be family resemblances 
in groups. A result is that there u not, nor can there be, anything 
like finality in these designs. Turret work has become one of the 
most highly specialized departmenu of machine-shop practice, and 
the design of these boxes is already the work of specialists. More 
and more of the work of the common lathe u being constantly 
appropriated by the semi- and full-automatic machines, a result to 
which the magazine feeds for castings and forgings that cannot 
pass through a hollow spindle have contributed greatly. New 
work is constantly beins attacked in the automatic machines that 
was deemed impracticable a diort time before ; some of the commoner 
jobs are produced with greater economy, while heavier castings 
and forgings, Umgex and larger bars, are tooled in the turret lathes. 
A great deal of the efficiency of the box tools is due to the support 
which is afforded to the cutting edges in opposition to the stress 
of cutting. V-bk)cks are introduced in most cases as in fig. 7. and 
these not only resist the stress of the cutting, but gauge the diameter 

Shearint AaiotL—ln many tools a shearing operation ukes place, 
by which the stress of cutting w lessened. Though not very 
apparent, it is present in the round-nosed rou^hins tools, in the 
knue tools, in most milling cutters, as well as ui all the shearing 
tools proper— the scissors, shears. &c , , , ^ 

Planes,— \ye pass by the familiar great chisei group, used by wood- 
workers, with a brief notice. Generally the tool angles of these lie 
between I5* and 25*. They include the chisels proper, and the 
fouges in ounerouf shaper and proportipns, uicd by carpentcn» 


^k:»^ maken. tunien. stone-masons and allied tradesmen. These 
^^.^Sw^SiS^MtStolb^^ without any mechanical 
Sl^S^bStfdSu are used percussively. as the stout mortise 
SSS^«»«? Swuaes, the axes, adzes and stone-mason's tools. 
^^J&rS^^SSS^body chisel. coef«^ m^ch^lp^l 

2Si3^ thewooSScfig. 8) or metal stock, these also differ 



Fig. 8.— Section through Plane. 

il. Cottinff iron. B, Top or back iron. C, Clamping screw. 

2>, Wedge. £, Broken shaving. F, Mouth. 

from the chiseb proper in the fact that the face oC the cutting iron 

does vyt ooiackle with the face of the material being cut, but lies 

at an angle therewith, the stock of the plane eKercising the necessary 

We also meet with the f unction of the top or non-cutting 

Fic. 9.— Groop of Wood-boring Bits, 
il. Spoon bit. B, Ceotre-bit. C, ExpandiM centre-bit. D, 
Gupui or Gcdge auger. £, Jennings auger. /; Irwin auger. 

Fic. la— Croup of Drills for MetaL 

il. Common flat drilL B, Twist drill. C, Straight fluted drill. 
D, Fin drill for flat countersinking. £, Arboring or facing tool. 
^ Tool for boring sheet-netaL 

iron in breaking the shaving and conferring ri^dity upon the cutting 
iron. This rig;idity is of similar value in cuttmg wood as in cutting 
metal though in a less marked degree. 

DriUint and B^rint Tools.— MtUA and timber are bored with 
equal facility; the tools (figs. 9 and 10) embody similar differences 
to the cutting tools already instanced for wood and metal. All the 
wood- working biu are true cutting tools, and their angles, if analysed, 
will be found not to differ much from those of the raaor and common 
chiseL The drills for metal furnish examples both of scrapers and 
cutting tools. The common drill is only a scraper, but aU the twist 
drills cut with eood incisive action. An advantafe possessed by all 
drills b that the cutting forces are balanced 00 each side of^the 
centre of rotation. The same action u embodied in the best wood- 
boring bits and augers, as the Jennings, the Gilpin and the Irwin — 
much improved forms of the old centre-bit. But the balance is 
impaired if the lips are not absolutely symmetrical about the centre. 
This explains the necesuty for the substitution of machine grinding 
for hand grinding of the lips, and great developments of twist drill 
grinding machines. Allico to the drills are the D-bits. and the 
reamers (fig. 11). The first-named both initiate and finish a hole: 

Fig. II. 

il,D-bit. B. Solid reamer. C, Ad jusuble reamer, having six flat 
blades forced outward by the tapered plug. Two lock-nuu at the 
end fix the blades firmly after adjustment. 

the second are used only for smoothins and cnlai^ging drilled holes, 
Md for correcting holes which pass tnrough adjacent castings or 
dates. The reamers remove only a mere film, and their action 
IS that of scraping. The forgoing are examples of tools operated 
from one end and unsupported at the other, excejpt in so far as they 
receive support within the work. One of the objectionable features 
of tools operated in this way is that they tend to " follow the hole." 
and if thw is cored, or rough-drilled out of truth, there is risk of 
the boring tools following it to some extent at least. With the one 
exceptkMi of the D-tnt there b no tool which can be relied on to take 
out a lon^ bore with more than an approximation to concentricity 
throughout. Boring tools (fig. 12) held in the slide-rest will spring 
and bend and chatter, and unless the lathe is true, or careful com- 
pensation b made for its want of truth, they will bore bigger at one 
end than the other. -Boring toob thrust by the back centre are 
liable to wabble, and though they are variously coerced to prevent 
them from turning round, that does not check ttie to-and-fro wabbly 

Fig. la.— Group of Boring Tools. 

C, Square 
* cutters. 

A, Round boring tool hek! in V-blocks on slide-rest. B, C, 
and V-pointcd bonng tools. Z>, Boring bar with removable 
held straight, or angulariy. 
motion from following the core, or roush bore. In a purely reaming 
tool thb b permitted, but it b not good in toob that have to iniUate 
the hole. 

This brings us to the large class of boring tools which are su parted 
at each end by being held in ban carried between centres. There 
are two main varieties: in one the cuttere are fixed directly in 
the bar (fig. 13, it to £0, in the other in a head fitted on the bar. 




(fig. 13, £), hence termed a ** boring head." As hthe beads are 
nxed, the traverse cannot be tmoarted to the bars as in boring 
machines. The boring heads can be traversed, or the work can be 

Fic. 13. — Group of Supported Boring Tools. 

At Single^nded cutter in boring 

3, Double-ended ditto. 
C, Flat single-ended finishing 


D» Flat double-ended finiihing 

E, Boring head with three cutters 

and three steady blocks. 

traversed by the mechanism of the bthe saddle. The Utter must be 
done when cutters are fixed in bars. A great deal of difference 
exists in the deuils of the fittings both of bars and heads, but they 
are not so arbitrary as they might seem at first sight. The principal 
differences are those due to the number of cutters uied. their shapes, 
and their method of fastening. Bars receiving their cutters direct 
include one, two or four, cutting on opposite sides, and therefore 
balanced. Four give better balance than two, the cutters bemg 
set at right angles. If a rough hole runs out of truth, a single cutter 
w better than a double-ended one, provided a tool of the roughing 
shape w used. The shape of the tools varies from roughing to 
finishing, and their method of attachment is by screws, wedges or 
nuts, but we cannot illustrate the nume^us differences that are 
met with. 

Saws.—Tht saws are a natural connecting link between the chisels 
and the milling cutters. Saws are used for wood, meul and stone. 

Slabs of steel several inches 
9^ y\ .y^ y\ in thickness are sawn 
through as readily as, 
[ though more sk»wly than, 
1 timber planks. Circular 
J and band saws are common 
in the smithy and the 
boiler and machine shops 
for cutting off bars, forgings 
and rolled sections. But 
the tooth shapes are not 
those used for timber, nor is< 
thecuttinir TfT-l \\^ —-it. 
In their ' th 

both cuttiji^ J ml E^- raping 
actions arv kLIuatrjitnl (fig. 
14). Sa*4 which cut tim- 
ber oontinuuM^y yrUh the 
grain, a^ rip. hand, band, 
circular, ha ve i n t i ht\ c t i.t ih. 
Forthottjh cnj.:;-. • ti- 

tute of front rake, the 
method of sharpening at 
an angle imparts a true 
shearing cut. But all cross- 
cutting teeth scrape only, 
the teeth being either of 
triangular or of M-form, 
variously modified. Teeth 
for metal cutting also act 
strictly by scraping. The 
pitching of the teeth is 
related to the nature of 
the material and the 


Fic. I4.—Typkal Saw Teeth, 
if, Teeth of band and ripping saws. 
3, Teeth of circular saw for hard wood ; 
shows ut, 

C, Ditto for soft wood. 

D, Teeth of cross-cut saw. 
£, M-teeth for ditto. 

direction of cutting. It is coarser for timber than for metal, 
coarser for ripping or sawing with the nain than for cross cutting, 
coarser for soft than for nard woods. The uUxni of teeth, 
or the bending over to right and left, by which the clearance is 
provided for tne blade of the saw, is sub)ect to similar variations. 
It is greatest for soft woods and least for metals, where in 
fact the clearance is often secured without set, by merely thinning 
the blade backwarda. But it is greater for cross cutting than for 

ripping timber. GuHetinc follows similar rules. The softer the 
timber, the neater the gulleting, to permit the dust to escape freely. 
Milling Cutters. — Between a circular saw for cutting metal and 
a thin milling cutter there is no essential difference. Increase the 
thickness as if to produce a very wide saw. and the essential plain 
edge milling cutter for meul results. In iu simplest form the 
milling cutter is a cylinder with teeth lying across its periphery, or 
parallel with its axis — the edge miU (fig. 15). or else a disk with teeth 
radiating on its face, or at right angles with its axis — the end mill 
(fig. 16). Each u used indifferently for producing flat faces and 
edges, and for cut ting grooves which are rectangular in cross-section. 
These milling cutters mvade the province of tne single-edged tools 
of the planer, shaper and slotter. Of these two typical forms the 

Fio. 15.— Group of Milling Cutten. 

At Narrow edge miU, 

straight teeth. 
3, Wide edge mill with spiral 

C. Teeth on face and edges. 

with D, Cutter having teeth like C 
B, Flat teeth held in with screws 

and wedges. 
F, Large inserted tooth mill; with 
taper pins secure cutters. 

Fic. 16.— Group of End Mills. 

A, End mill with straight teeth. 3, Ditto with spiral teeth. 

nethod of hok 

T-stot cutter. 

CShoiring method of holding shell cutter 00 arbor, with screw 
and key. i>, *" ' 




dunces are rang in great variety, langiog ffom the narrow ditting 
toob whidi saw off Ear*, to the broad cutters of 24 in. or more in 
vidth, used on plano-miUen. 

When more than about an inch in width, surfacing cylindrical 
cotters are formed with spiral teeth (fig. 15. B), a device which is 

Fic 17. 

A^ Straddle Mill, cutting; faces and edges. 
B, Set of three milb cutting grooves. 

Fig. 18. — Groop of Angular Mills. 

if. Cutter with single slop«^ 

B, Ditto, pnxlucing tectn in another cutter. 

C Double Slope Mill, with unequal angles. 

essential to sweetness of operation, the action being that of shearing. 
These have their teeth cut on universal machines, using the dividing 
and spiral head and suiuble change wheels, and after hardening 
they are sharpened on universal grinders. When cutters exceed 
about 6 in. in length the difficulties (M hardening and grinding render 
the ** gang " arrangement more suiuble. Thus, two, three or more 
similar e(^;e mills are set end to end on an arbor, with the spiral 
teeth runmng in reverse directions, giving a broad face with balanced 
endlong cutting forces. From these are built up the numerous 
gang mills, comprising plane faces at right angles with each other, 
di which the straddle mills are the best known (fig. I7i A). A 
common element in these combinations u the key seat type B having 
teeth on the periphery and on both faces as in fig. 13. C, D. By 
these combinations hjuf a dozen faces or more can be tooled simuf' 
taneously. and all alike, as long as the mills retain their edge. The 
advantages over the work of the planer in this class of work are seen 
in tooling the faces and edges of machine tables, beds and slides, in 
sha^i^ the faces and edges of caps to fit their bearing blocks. In 
a single cutter of the face type, but having teeth on back and edge 
also. T-siots are readily mOled (fig. 16. D) ; thb if done on the planer 
would require re-setting of awlcwardly cranked tools, and more 
measurement and testing with templets than is required on a 
milling machine. 

When angles, curves and profile sections are introduced, the 
capacity of the milling cutter u infinitely increased. The making 
of the cutters is also more difficult. Angular cutters (fig. 18) are 
used for producing the teeth of the mills themselves, for shaping 
the teeth of ratchet wheels, and, in combination with straight cutters 
in gangs, for angular sections. With curves, or angles and curves 
in combination, taps, reamers and drilb can be fluted or grooved, 
the teeth of wheels shaped, and in 
fact any outlines imparted (fig. 19). 
Here tne work of the fitter, as well 
as that of the pUning and allied 
machines, b inioded, for much of 
thb work if prepared on these 
machines would have to be finished 
laboriously by the file. 

There are two ways in which 
milling cutters are used, by which 
their value b extended; one b to 
transfer some of their work proper 
to the bthe and boring machine, 
the other b by duplication. A 
good many light circular sections. 

Fic. ro. 

A , Convex Cutter. 

B, Concave Cutten 

C, Profile Cutter. 

as wheel rims, hitherto done in bthes, are regularly prepared in 
the milliiw machine, gang milb being used for tooling the peri- 
phery amfedges at once, and tnt wheel blank being rotated. 
Stmilariv. holes are bored by a rotating mill <^ the cylindrical type. 
Intemaf screw threads are done similarly. Duplicatbn occurs 
when milling sprocket wheeb in line, or side by side, in miUInjs nuts 
OR an arbor, in milling a number of narrow faces arranged side by 
side, in cutting the teeth of several spur-wheels on one arbor and 
in milling the teeth of racks several at a time. 

One of the neatest advances in the practice of milling was that 
of maldag badccd-off cutters. The sectional shape behind the tooth 

face b continued klentlcal in form with the profile of the edge, the 
outline being carried back as a curve equal m radius to that of the 
cuttinff edge (fig. 20). The 
result u that the cutter may 
be sharpened on the front 
faces of the teeth without 
interierinr with the shape 
which wilTbe milled, because 
the periphery b always con- 
stant in outline After re- 
peated sharpenings the teeth 
wouM assume the form indi- 
cated by the shaded portion 
on two of the teeth. The 
limit of grinding b reached 

when the tooth becomes too «. . ^ . 

thin and weak to sund up to its work. But such cutters win endure 
weeks or months of consunt service before becoming useless. The 

Fic. aa— Relieved Teeth of Milling 



Fia ax.— Group of Scrapes. 
i4, Meta]-worker*s scrape, pushed D, Diamond point u«ed by 
straightforward. wood-turners. 

B, Ditto, operated laterally. E, F, Cabinet-makers' scxapeSb 

C, Round-nosed tool used by 

chief advanta^ of backing-off or relieving b in its application to 
cutters of intricate curves, which would be difficult or uipossible to 
sharpen ak>ng thdr edges. Such cutters, moreover, if made with 




^^W ^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ 

I* Q K S T U V 

Fic. 22.— Cross-sectional Shapes of Files. 

i4. Warding. /, Topping. P, Round. 

B, Mill K, Reaper. Q, Pit-saw or 

C, Flat. L, Kniie. frame-saw. 

D, Pillar. i/. Three-square. R, Half-round. 

E, Square. N, Cant. S, T, Cabinet. 

F, (7. Swaged reapers. O, Slitting or £/. Tumbler, 
/f, MilL feather-edge. K, Crossing. 

ordinary teeth would soon be worn down, and be much weaker than 
the strong form of teeih represented in fie. 2a The relievingis usually 
done in q>ecial lathes, employing a proble tool which cuts the surface 



in ^ 


A, Parallel or blunt 

B, Taper bellied. 

C, Knife reaper. 

D, Tapered square. 
£, Parallel triangular. 

Fig. 23.— Longitudinal Shapes of Files. 

F, Tapered triangular. 
C. Parallel round. 
H, Taper or rat-tail. 
7. Parallel half- 

JC, Tapered half- 
L, Riifler. 




-^ <%* 31) Include 

-T ■« VQOd AMt (Mtal 

[*^ tht fiitet. The 
—'--- pUL«9k nuthine 

^^,„^^ of pFir>diii£ lo 4 
K the f.rjcdrt of finnding 

E cnu«i pedc^T contact 

I arc cut 

II cb!i<« 

I,,, .-, K^^.i L^Tiy aoscniH though in some i 

.W"**.'"i^li l^^.^'vu"' \"^ '^oTitxT.L.cs in detail 
gfut itritUy the iJiciift, hke the punches, «t l»y a 

p^caS-Sbear Blades. 

Fic. 26.— Punching. 
«, Punch. 6, Bolster. 
e, Plate being punched. 


'-i.tru»ive effort: for the punch, with it» boUter (fig. 26). 
•-'-- ° rlirof cylindrical shears. Hence a shorn or punched 
forms, a PJi^ rough, ragged, and covered with minute, shallow 
edge *• Rnih proc^ses are therefore dangerous to iron and steel, 
cracks- ^ *, u^ing unequally stressed, fracture surts in the annulus 
•pie meta* u^^ ^|^ advantage of the practice oi rearoering out 
«f ,"^*?nulu8. which is completely removed by enlargement by 
this •"""{:„ diameter, so that homogeneous metal is left throughout 
»bo"Jj;?J unpunched section. The same results follow reamering 
L**!i. r« iron and steel. Anneahng, according to many expenments, 
?**M2 «me effect as reamenng, due to the rearrangement of the 
bHlUfiJ; of metal. The perfect practice with ounched plates 
irSTpJih: «^ and fi«lly to anneal. The e(Kt of rfiearinj 
^ iStoliy identical with that of punching, and plamng and 
nSling •horn edges has the same influence as reamenng and 

hi^'Sef:^-^.^^ an immense gpup. termfd^peroisdve, 
f Jm the manner of their use (fiff. 27). Every trade has its own 
SSliar shapes, the total of which number mapy scores, each with 
RVown appropriate name, and ranging in siie from the minute 
fSiSTof th? jeweler to the sledges of the smith and boiler maker 
Lndthe planishing hammers of the coppersmith. Wooden hammen 
JJ^temHTmallets. their purpose being to avoid Rising toob or 
the surfaces of work. Most trades use mallets of some form or 
I^her. Hammer handles are najd »« all «scs except certain 
Mreussive toob of the smithy, which are handled with withy rods, 
SrSrSd?8So?ly atSchJto the tools, so that when struck by 
Se Jedge they shiU not jar the hands. The fullenng tools^nd 
itls, though not hammen sinctly. are actuated by 

percussion. The dies of the die fofgen are actuated p erc usrivdy , 
being ctosed by powerful hammen. The action of cauUdng toob 
u percusnve. and io b that of mouklen* rumncn. 

H» Ditto, double-faced. 

7, JC, L, J/, BoQer naken' haa- 

FlC. 37.— Hammerk 

A, Exeter type. F, Ditto, straight pane. 

B, Joiner's hammer. _ C, Sledge hammer, straight 

C, Canterbury cbw hammer 

(these are wood-wodten' 

D, Engineer's hammer, ball pane. 

£, Ditto, cross-pane. N, Scaling t 

MionUiug Toois.—Thu b a jpoup of toob whkh. actuated either 
by simple pressure or percussivdy, mould, shape and modd forma 
in the sand of the moulder, in the metal ci the smith, and in press 
work. All the tools of the moukler (fig. 28) with the exceptk>n of 
the rammen and vent wires act by moulding the sand into ihapee 


Fig. 28.— Moulding Toob. 

At Square troweU E, Fbnge heed. 

B, Heart trowel, f. Hollow bead. 

C. D, Cleaners. C, £f, Square comer sleekers. 

/, Button sleeker. 
JC, Kpe smoother. 

by pressure. Their contoura correspond with the pbne and curved 
surfaces of moukls, and with the rrauirements of shallow and deep 
work. They are made in iron and brass. The fullers, swages and 

fbttffv of the smith, and the dies used with hammer and presses, 
M mtjuitdl hy pcTcussion or by pressure, the woilc taking the counter- 
pjri ci ihc iiiti, ur of some portion of them. The practice of ^ 
iotzT-n-jt tf^nihi^ utmost wholly of moulding p r oce ss e s . 

fc(J 57rr/j,— These now include three kinds. The common 
«i«.1. Tfip controlling element in which b carbon, requires to be 
hardened and letnpered, and must not be overheated, about 500* F. 
toting *he hiehc*t temperature permissible— the critical tempera- 
tiirc Actu-iily tills is seldom aJk>wed to be reached. The dis- 
adva.ntai;e of ihi^ ^teel is that its capabilities are limited, because the 
heal genenit<>d by heavy cutting soon spoib the tods. The second 
h the MiJiN^hift ^H-e\, invented by R. F. Mushet in 1868. a carboa 
vtc^l. in "which tl^ controlltng element is tungsten, of which it containa 
from about ^ to 8%. It b termed setf-kardeniug, because it b 
cooled in air instead of being quenched in water. Its value consists 
in its endurance at high temperatures, even at a low red heat. 
Until the advent of the high-speed steels, Mushet steel was 
reserved for aJl heavy cutting, and for tooling hard tough 
steels. It b made. in six different tempera suitable for various 
kinds of duty. Toob of Mushet steel must not be forved below 
a red heat. It is hardened by reheating the end to a white heat, 
and bk>wing cold in an air bbst. The third kind of steel b termed 
kigk'Spetd, because much higher cutting speeds are practicable 
with th«e than with other steels. Tools made of them are hardened 
in a blast of cold air. The controlling elements are numerous and 
vary in the practice of different manufacturers, to render the 


looli afdaptabfe to cattlaK' various cliiMi of mcCak ami allfyt. 
Taogtfrn is the principal oootiolltng dement, but chromiuai it 
Bif ntiil and molybdenum and vanadium are often found of 
value. The steels are forged at $, yellow tint. CKiual to about 
1830* F. They an raised to a white heat for hardening, and cooled 
to an air blast to a bright red. They are then often quenched ia a 
bachofoiL 77 

The first p u blic demonstratioB of the capacities of high speed 
steeb was made at the P^ris Exhibition of 1000. Since that time 
great advances have been made. It has been found that the 
SBCtioa of the shaving limits the practicable speeds, so that, although 
cutting speeds of 300 and 400 ft. a minute are practicable with 
light cats, it is more economical to limit speeds to less than 100 ft. 


per flBtBiite with much heavier cuts. The use of water is not 
absolutely tssentisl as in using tools of carbon steel. The new 
Btrds show to mudi greater advantage on mild steel than on cast 
iron. They are more useful for rouf^ing down tiian for finishing. 
The removal of ap lb of cuttings per minute with a sin^^ tool 
is common, and that amount is often eaoeeded, so that a lathe 
soon b e com es half buried in turnings unless they are carted away. 
The horse-power absorbed is proportionatdy large. Ordinary 
heavy lathes will tahe from 40 to 60 h.p. to dnve tMm, or from 
four to six times more than is required by lathee of the same centres 
■sing carbon steel .tools. Many remarkable records have been 
given of the capacities of the new steels. Not only turning and 
planing tools but drills and milling cuttfnars now regularly made 
of tliew. It is a revdation to ' 

1 drills hi their rapid deeeent 
throusii omtaL A drill of I in. hi duimrTer will easQy go through 
$ hk thickaessof sted in one minuta. 

Machxhx Toots 

Hie marWiw tools employed in modem engineering factories 
number many hundreds of wdl-delined And separate types. 
Besides these, there are hundreds more designed for tpedal 
fiinctk>na» and adapted only to the work of firms who handle 
sporialitifa. Most of the first named and many of the latter admit 
of gtonping in dasses. The following is a natural classification: 

L Tmnmg loffccr.— These, by common consent, stand aa a 
dasB alone. Hie caxdinal feature by which they are distin- 
gushed is that the worii being operated on rotates agsinit a 
tool which it held In a rigid fixturfr— the rest. Hw azia of 
rotatkn nay be boriaontal Of verticaL 

IL EaUprocaimi Jf odbMer.— The feature by which these 
are rharart wised is that the relative movements of tool and 
worii take place in stnight lines, to and fro. The recipro- 
cations may occur in boriaontal or vertical planes. 

nL Madtma wUA DriU amd Bon HoUs.—Theab have some 
fealiiRS In oommon with the lathf t^ jnasinurh as drilling ^^v^ 
boring are often done in the lathes, and some facing and turning 
in the drilling and boring marhinft, but they have become 
higUy differentiated. In the foregoing groups tods having 
cither single or double cutting, edges are used. 
• IV. if sBmc JfoeUMi.— TUs group uses cutters having 
teeth amnged eqwidistsntly round a cylindrical body, and 
may therefore be likened to saws of considerable thickness. 
The cnttcES rotate over or sgsinat work, between which and the 
cntteiB a rdative movement of travd takes place, and they may 
therefore be likened to reciprocating machines, in which a 
revolving cotter takes the place of a single-edged one. 
' V. MackSnet far CuUmt the Teeth of Geor-wibeeb.— These 
co m pri se two sub-groups, the oMer type in which rotary milling 
cutters are used, and the later type in which reciprocating 
singie-edeBd tools are employed. Sub-classes are dwdgned for 
one kind of gear only, as spur-wheels, bevels, worms, racks, 

VL Grimiing Maekinery.—Thaa is a large and constantly 
extending groiq>, largely the development of recent yean. 
Though cnecy grinding baa been practised in crude fashion for 
a centay, the difference in the old and the new methods lies 
in the embodiment of the grinding whed in machines of high 
•predskm, and In the rivalry of the wheels of corundum, car- 
borandum and alundum, paputd in the dectxic furnace with 
thoae^of emeiy. 

Vn. Scmmg Maekimes.—1n modem practice these take an 
important part in cutting iron, sted and brsss. Few shops 
are without them, and they are numbered by dosens in some 
wrshKshments. They indude drcular saws for hot and cold 
metal, band sawi and hack saws. 

VnL Shearimi and Pimeki$ig J/adbsMi.— These occnpy a* 
border line hetween the cutting and non-€;utting tools. Some 
must be dassed with the first, others with the second. The 
detrusive action also is an important element, more eqierially 
in the punches. 

DC. Hammeri oanA Fretset.—Ben there is a percusdve action 
in the hammen, and a pordy squeesing one in the presses. 
Both are made capable of exerting imm<mw» pressures, but the 
latter are far more powerful than the former. 

X. Pertdbie Ttfob.— This krge group can best be dsasified 
by the oommon feature of bdng readily removable for opention 
on large pieces of erection that cannot be taken to the regular 
msrhines. Hence they are all compantivdy small and light. 
Broadly they indude diverse took, capable of performing 
neariy the whde of the operations summarised in the pre- 
ceding paragraphs. 

XL ApplioMcet. — There Is a vety large number of aitidcs 
which are ndther tools nor msrhlne tods, but which are in- 
dispensable to the work of these; that is, they do not cut, or 
shape, or mould, but they hold, or grip, or contrd, or aid in 
some way or other the carrying throtagh of the work. Thus 
a screw wrench, an an^ plate, a wedge, a piece of packing, a 
bdt, an appliances. In modem pnctioe the appliance in 
the form of a templet or jig is one of the prindpid dements 
in the interchangeable system. 

XIL Woed^werking Jf odUiMf .-^TUs group does for the 
conversion of timber what the foregoing aooomplish for metsL 
There is therefore much underiying simflarity in many msrhinrs 
for wood and metal, but still greater differences, due to the 
conditions imposed on the one hud by the very soft, and on the 
other by the intensdy hard, matfrisls operated on In the two 
great groups. 

XnL Measuremeni,— To the "adcntific engineer, equally 
with the astronomer, the need for accurete measurement is of 
paramount importance. Ndther good fitting nor interchange- 
ability of parts is possible without a system of measurement, 
at once accunte and of ready and rapid application. Great 
advances have been made in this direction latdy. 
I.— Latbbs 

The popular conoepdon of a lathe, derived from the familiar 
mafhine 01 the wood turner, would not give a correct idea of the 
lathe which has been devdoped as the endneer's machine tool. 
This has become differentiated into nearly fifty wdl-marked types, 
until in some cases even the term lathe has been dropped for more 
predie definitions, as verticd boring machine, automatic machine, 
while in others prefixes are necenary, as axle lathe, chucking Uthe. 
cuttine-off Uthe, whed lathe, and so on. With rq^ard to size and 
mass the height of centres may range from 3 in. in the bench lathes 
to 9 or to ft. in gun lathes, and weights v^ ^*^ff^. 'n>m say 50 lb 
to 300 tons, or more in exoeptmnal cases, while in some the 

anse from say 50 lb 

. While hi some the 

mechanism it the nmplest sosdble, in others it is so complicated 
that ody the speddist is able to grasp iu details. 

Earty Latket. — Space will not permit us to trace the evolution 
of the lathe from the andent bow and card lathe and the pole 
lathe, in eadi of which the rotary movement was dtemately for- 
ward, for cuttinc, and backward. The curious thing is that the 
whed-driven btne was a novdty so late as the i^th and 15th 
centuries, and had not wholly diq>Iaced the ancient forms even in 

the West in the 19th century, and the cord lathe stiU survives in 
Another thing is that all the old lathes were of dead 

the East. 

Cfiilrs. instead of runnine mamdrd type; and not until 1794 did the 
use of metd b^in to take the place of wood in lathe construction. 
Henry Maudalay (1771-1831) did more than any other man to 
devdop the engineer's self-acting lathe in r^ard to its essentid 

but it was, like its immediate successors for fifty 
years sfter, a skeleton-like, inefficient weakling by comparison 
with the lathes of the present time. 

Broad Types, — ^A ready appreciation of the broad differences in 
hthe types may be obumed by considering the differences in the 
grest groups cl work on whioh lathes are deseed to operate. 
Castings and forgings that are turned in lathes vaiy not only in 

siae. but also in relative dimensions. 

shafting, or a 

and dkmeter from a rsilway whed or a whed ure. f urtber, wbtie 

the shaft has to be turned only, the whed or the tire has to be 

ThiM a long ineoe of driving 

ting, or a railway axle, is very differently oroportiooed in length 
' er from a rsilway whed or a whed tire. Further, while 

Here then we have the first cardind distinctk>n 

between lathes, vht. those admitting work ftchMsn centre* (fig. S9) 
and /see and Aofiiic lathes. In the first the piece of work is pivoted 
and drivsn between the centres of head-stock and tail-stock or loose 
poppet; in the second, it is held and gripped only by thejlogs 


pMocct twi^ omitted, 

T%ae,iKi*rvcr,*f¥ broad trpBtvalTr . . 
of ici^th to diaowtcr difl«r, aad villi cbos [mtht 

fif <HK da* t0 jmcily the kyi£| dQvn of A ipKKt 
or nachim to deal vilfe i(, tWh" 
ease dajf u, la «1k«^ for eonpl , , 
one toibe for cnraiAff tm> or llu» loof ifc^is 
cHuly, or (or hinii«c >sd bori^ two vteds or tirv at 
iMce. Fttirlicr, tW paction of tlw axil of s facm bE&e 
B^ed Mt be henxoAut. u li imoaarf ^^tn the turmBc 
cf Vjof p>i«ces hai lo be done bmsn ccotm. Thefc vm 
otivkM^ advuniaf Q ill vTSflDDf it vntkaUir^ ^ princi- 
p4t bdiif; tJu^t «astin£i and T«zjiv> c^b be wot eutty 
•et Kod wtmed to a. borlmital cBvck tfavi ta dw t^ fan 
of which Ikd tvikaJly. Tlw c!i4i^ b aka txticr mp- 
pctr(«dH and hii^xi mm of turnUif an jmctB^Je, fa 
mcni yvan thoe nerUc^ IsiJum or vertiul turnioff and 
bofiAg milU {6f . 30) havE b«* grcazly Jntfieasjar in nnia- 
btrn they aLw occur in k^«^ da^;:ru to mk vdtr 
certeral or tpedal dutin, some of cli^ beinr uisi (or 
borioK only, u ^Auf^^nf t&tka. Some are of immense 
Hue. capable of Wriof liie field laafocta of els^ne 
^neraton 40 ft- in diamcto^ 

5yfatiKl(iri LpiAo-— Biit for doing »la± b tMined 
the JBBMtrt} wxk of tht enfuwa-'s turaery. th* ■»»» 

I C5t 39> predonunite^ i.t idf-vtiiif . i&duie 

_, iflf lathe» mth beuiktock. IcKjee pnppM and 

wiidfrat^ cenhvs, Taoe pCitse* arud chucki. and an equip- 
(nent by wfaicit lojif fueco art titnicd. titlicr b tc ine tii 
cenirea of on the f»te chycki. and bocvd- One pf 
the rreatot objcctioai to {hi onployment of the* 
ttaniurd rypi^ of Utha f'^r indbcnctunate duly u dan 
10 tJie limited height of the cenirc* gt atit <il t« bead- 
•tqck. atovx the face of tJw bed Thi* U met ^aeiaEIr 
by providiftg 2 pj^ of deep reoes* tn ih* bed ntrt 
the fast beadi^tock, deep enough to take Ua work of 
Uwigje d kamcbcr. The de^ i-:* U very old a JvJ v^y ccm moo, 
but when the voJunw of wcrfe viff^nt* t-he ern6.lo>ment 
of vp^rate lathes for lairen'oHc and for tnat done 
txrttnen cenirti it ia better to have tbenu 

S£T«Nf kUiiijj.— A morti imporunt HctiptL of the »odc 
of the enjfineer'a turnery ia that of cutting Kzmri (tee 
SCPiL^w). Thti ha.1 resulted in ditTerentiation fully al 
great 41 that eKtitlnff bet «icen centres and face- work. 
Tine t]jde-ie3rt iraa dciigned ^with this object, thoneb 
it b aUo ti«cd for plain tuming. The ttafjdard *' saU 
mttmg kUdinjt, milatJnK and^ fct^w -cut ting lathe " ia 
ttaeadally the ttandarj tumln^ lathc^ wtui the addi- 
tinn flf toe icrcw^utting mec}iai:it>m. T^ii inctudes a 
maater icrew^he iaid or euidt KTfw^ which is 
gripped irith a ciaip nut, fastened to the trivelline 
--^^'— t (jf the dxde-rest. The lisad-4crew ji connecica 



tfi tJie hcadstcKk epindle by f^iff? icAwli, which are 
die v^ariable* thrt^ugh which the relative rate* of move- 
iTKiti fil the ipiftidjc arid the Jtid-htnew, and thcttfore 
of the icrew-ctitLing tooln held and traveru4 in the 
ilide-rest, are elTocted. By thii beautUtil pwoe of 
mechacuini a guide screw, the pitch of which b per- 
maj>ent, h made to cut Krew-thfcacia of an almoitt 
inhnite number of po*ftibte pitches, btjih in whok afvd 
fractioiul numbers, by virtue of iearTaii£emcnci of 
the variab!e«p the change whceli- The oblcctbrt to 
thii mct^^i I'l iJiir rhe trains of cban|e wheels hj^ie 
to tKif rr ! rtarranged aa ofti rj a* a schew 

of a fhtitiuu jhUm La» to be cut. wi operation which 
ukes aome Uttie time. To avoid this, the nest or 
duster system of gean haa been lais^ely adopted, iu 
nuMt MiooeMful embodiment being m the Hendey- 
Norton lathe. Here all the change wheels are arranged 
in a tenea permanently on one shaft underneath the 
headstock, aibd any one of them is out into engagement 
by a sUdinf pinion operated by the simple movement 
of a lever. Thus the lead-screw is driven at different 
rates without removing any wheel from its spindle. 
This has been extennvely applied to both small and 
large lathes. But a momeurs thought will show that 
even this device is too cumbrous when large numbers of 
small screws are required. There is, for example, little 
in common between the screw, sav of 5 or 6 ft. in 
length, for a massive penstock or valve, and i-in. bolts, 
or the small screws required in thousands for electrical 
fittings. Oeariy while the self-acting screw-cutting 
lathe is the best possible machine to use for the first, 
it b unsuiuble for the last. So here at once, from (he 
point of view of screw cutting only, an important diver- 
gence talcci place, and one which has ultimately led 
to very high spedaliiation. 
SmaU jcfAM.— When small screws and bolts are cut ia 

g^^^SlLiLi l^^i -i I ill B» 




hrfe quantities, the Kukle-Kt«w and clumge wbeelt give place to other 
devioes. one oC which involves the use of a separate nuster-soew 
for every diffeient pitch, the other that of encircling cuttinc in- 
stnimencs or dies: The first are represented by the chasing Jatke, 
the second by the screwing lathes and automatics. Though the 
principles of operation are thus stated in brief, the details in design 
are roost extensive and varied. 

In a chasing bthe the master-sciew or hcb, which may be either 
at the rear 01 the headstock or in front of the slide-rest, receives 
a hollow clasp-nut or a half-nut, or a star-nut containing several 
pitches, which, partaking of the traverse movement of the screw- 
thread, imparts the same horizontal movement to the cutting tool. 
The latter b sometimes carried in a hinged holder, sometimes in 
a common slide-rest. The attendant throws it into engagement 
at the beginning of a traverse, and out when completed, and also 

thi« ii an econofnjcal system, but in others not. It cannot be 
coEnsLdejrcd » when bolts, screws and allied forms are of small 

athts. — It has been the growing practice since 
th he 19th century to proauce short articles, re- 

qti ^ itities, from a long bar. This involves making 

the LlLiIic wLth a h.ltow mandrel; that b, the mandrel of the head- 
stock hasi a hole r] rilled risht through it, lar^ enough to permit 
of the pa^-^-^gf through it olthr largest bar which the class <n work 
nsi^u^m. Thus, U ihe largest section of the finished pieces should 
require a bar of i| in. dumeter, the hole in the mandrel would be 
made if in. Then the bar, inserted from the rear-end, b gripped 
by a chuck or ccUet at the front, the operations of turning, screwiiw 
and cutting off done, and the bar then thrust farther through 
to the exact length for the next set of i d entic al opentk>os to Be 




Fig. 30.~Boring and Turning Mill, vertical lathe. (Webster Bennett, Ltd., Coventry.) 

A , Table, ronning with stem in vertical bearing. 

B. Frame of machine. 

C, Driving 1 

i>. Handle giving the choice of two rates, through concealed 

sliding gears, shown dotted, 
fi, Bevd-cears driving up to pinion gearing with ring of teeth 

on the ubie. 
F, Saddle moved on cross-rail C. 

dianges the hobe for threads of different sections. The screwed 
Slavs of k}comotive fire-boxes are almost invariably cut on chasing 
bthes of thb class. 

In the screwing machines the thread b cut with dies, which 
encircle the rotating bar; or altemativelv the dies rotate round a 
fixed pipe, and generally the angular lead or advance of the thread 
draws the dies along. These dies differ in no essentiab from similar 
toob operated by a hand lever at the bench. There are manv 
oMdifications of these bthes, because the work b so highly spedal- 
ixed that they are seklom used for anythinjg except the work of 
cnttinff screws varying but little In dimensions. Such being the 
case tney can hardly be classed as lathes, and are often termed 
screwing machines, because ik> provbion exists for preliminary 
turning work, whkh b then done elsewhere, the task of turning 
«ad threading being divided between two bthes. In 

H, Vertical slide, carrying turret /. 

Jk , Screw feeding F across. 

L, Splined shaft connecting to H for feeding the btter up or < 

M, lit Worro-gears throwing out clutches N, N at predeter- 
mined points. 

0, Cone pulley belted up to P, for driving the feeds of saddle 
aiM down-slide. 

performed, and so on. Thb mechanism b termed a sptW/retf. because 
the first bthes which were built of thb type only operated on brge 
wires; the heavy bar bthes have been subsec^uentlv developed 
from it. In the more advanced types of bthes this feeding through 
the hollow spindle does not require the intervention of the attendant, 
but b performed automatically. 

The amount of preliminary work which has to be done upon a 
portion of a bar before it b ready for screwing varies. The simplest 
object b a stud, which is a parallel piece screwed up from each end. 
A bolt b a screw with a head of hex^onal, square or circubr 
form, and the productu>n of this involves turning the shank and 
shoulder and imparting convexity to the end, as well as screwing. 
But screw-threads have often to be cut on objects which are not 
primarily bolts, but which are spindles of various kinds used on 
mechanisnis and machine tools, and in which reductions in the '"'*** 




other fefttnrts 
tke givBt groop oi 


rWrc(£a<k«f.— Tlie turret or capstan (fie. 3a) ba device for grip- 
pioff as many teparate toob as there are d&inct cmratioas to be 
performed on a piece of work; the number ranges from four to as 

of the toncc lathes. 

many as twenty in some highly elaborated machines, but five c. 
six is the usual number of holes. These toob are brought round 

ITbM^tn ^^% acAoated by tube O. 


tgh filcwe on bar JL 

cbuck. moving bearing it forward. 

Fig. 3i.~Tunet^ Lathe. V (Webster ft Bennett, Ltd.. Coventr>'.) 

^„ mandrel (constituting the 
I clamped on the vorfct iukI b 
^ , . t each time of feeding. 

0, Cros s s lide. 

P, Hand-wheel operating screw to travel O. 

N, Bearing to feed the work through 
win or bar fetdy. A collar b cU 
pushed by the bearing N at each 

O. Tunet-slide. 

01 uie macnme. inis ano 
' by which b meant the shap- 
ict of irregular outline, by a 
terpart of the profik required. 

^i^ jj^r-Plan of Set of Turret Tools, (A, TIcfbrrt. Ltd.) 

m^fl^ P, BoK too] carT>'inK two cutters 

I # IhI ^or tnt operalbn or (or third opi;mtiuD* rough 

V iJoddnff^ turning. 

^jS£« toob for KcoTid £, Simibr tooffof fpurthopera- 

^^jpKtfpo, ttaiting orpoiQ(- tion, hnuk turning. 

'K F, Screwing tnula in liead for 
(iTml apetBtton of screwing. 

, Crosshandte moving Q to and fro. 

5, Turret or capstan. 

Tj XL Sets of fast and loose pulleys, for open and crossed bdta. 

'V, (u>ne belted down to £ on Utbe. 

in due su ccessi on, each one doing its littk share of work, until the 
cvde of opnations required to produce the object b conpfete. 
the cycle including such operations as turning ana screwing, rough- 
ing and finishing cuts, drilling and borinff. Severance of the finisbed 
piece b generally done by a tool or toob ndd by a ent t -dii t between 
the headstock and turret, so termed because its movements take 
pbce at right angles with the azb of the machine. Thb abo 

often oerforms the duty of " formii 

ing 01 the exterior oortion of an object < 

tool the edge of which b an exact counterpart of the profik required. 
The exterior of a cyde hub b shaped thus, as abo are numerona 
handles and other objects involving various curves and shoulders, 
ftc The tool b fed perpendicularly to the axb of the rotat- 
ing work and comoletes outlines at once: if thb were done in 
ordinary Uthes much tedious manipubtion of separate toob would 
be involved. 

A M tmn aHcs . — But the marvd of the modem automatics (fig. 
lies in the mechanism by which the cyck of operations b rendc 
absolutely independent of attendance, beyond the first adjustments 
and the insertion of a fresh bar as oftenas the previous one becomes 
used up. The movements of the rotating turret and of the cross- 
slide, iJid the feedina of the bar through the hollow spindle, take 
pbce within a second, at the conclusion Of the operatkw preceding. 
These movements are effected by a set of mechanism independent 
of that by which the headstock spindk b rotated, vis. bjr cama 
or cam drums on a horiaontal cam shaft, or other equivalent 
device, differing much in arrangement, but not principle. Move- 
ments are hastened or retardedT or pauses of some moments may 
ensue, according to the cam arrangements devised, which of course 
have to be varied for pieces of different proportions and di mens ions. 
But when the machines with their toob are once set up, they wfll 
run for dkys or weeks, repeating precbdy the same cyde of opera- 
tions; they are sdf •lubricating, and only require to be fed with 
fresh bngths of bar and to have their toob resharpened o cca sio n a lly . 
Of these automatks ak>ne there are somethiitg like a dooen distinct 
types, some with their turrets vertical, others horiaontaL N^ 

xkay so but the use of a single qnndle b not always deemed sum-^ 
ciently economical, and some of these designs now nave two* three 
and four separate work spindles grouped in one head. 




SpecicHud lolftes.— Outside of these main types of lathes there 
are a large number which do not admit of group classification. 
They are designed for special duties, and only a representative list 
can be g^veo. Lathes for turning tapered work form a limited 

FkG. 33^— Automatic Lathe or Screw Machine. CA. Herbert, Ltd.) 

A, Main body. 

B, Waste oil tray. 

C, Headstock. 

D, Wire-feed tube. 
£, Slide for closing chuck. 
r. Shaft for ditto. 
C, Feed-slide. 
H, Piece of work. 
J. Turret wich box tools. 
K, Turret slide. 
X, Saddle for ditto, adjustable 

a, a, a. Cams for actuating chuck 

through pins 
am which 

aloK bed. 

M, Screw Tor locating adjustable 

if, Cot-cff and forming crosa- 

0» O. Backand front tool-holders 

P, Cam shaft. 

Q, Cam drum for operating 

R, Cam drum for operating 

bt b. The cam 

turns D u adjustable but 

isnot in view. 

e. Feeding cam for turret. 
d.d.Retum cams for turret, 
tf, c.Cams on cam disk for ooer- 

ating the lever /, which 
actuates the cut-off and 
forming sUde. 

7*, Worm-wheel whkh drives 
cam shaft by a worm on 
the same shaft as the 
feed-pulley U. 

Vt Handwheel on worm shaft for 
making first adjustments. 

IT, Change feed disk. 

f . f .Change feed dogs adjustable 
round disk. 

X, Change feed lever. 
K, Oil tube and spreader for 
lubricating tools and work. 
5, Cam disk for actuating Z, Tray for tools, &c 

anmber, and they include the usual provbions for ordinary turning. 
In some designs change wheels are made use of for imfMuting a 
definite movement of cross traverse to the tool, which being com- 
poanded with the parallel sliding movements produces the taper 
In others an upper bed carrying the heads ana work swivels on a 
lower bed, which carries the dide rest. More often tapers are 
turned by a cross adjustment of the loose poppet, or by a taper 
attachment at the rear of the lathe, which coerces the movement 
of the top or tool-carryine slide of the rest. Or, as in short tapers, 
the slide-rest is set to tne required angle on its carriage. Balls 
are sometimes turned by a spherical attachment to the slide-rest 
of an ordinanr lathe. Copying lathes are those in which an object 
is reproducea from a pattern precisely like the objects required. 
The commonest example b that in which gun-stocks and the spokes 
of wheels are turned, but these are used for timber, and the engineer's 
copyiag lathe uses a form or cam and a milling cutter. Tnie form 
taSho^ machine is the copying machine for mctal-work. The 
manufacture of boilers has given birth to two kinds of lathes, one 
for turning the hotter ends, the other the boiler flue flanges, the 
edges of which have to be caulked. Shaft pulleys have appropriated 
a spedal lathe containing provision for turmng the convexity of 
the faces. Lathes are duplicated in two or three ways. Two, 
four, sax or eight tools sometimes operate simultaneously on a jnece 
of work. Two lathes are mounted on one bed. A tool will be boring 
a 1k^ while another is turning the edges of the same wheel. One 
win be boring, another turning a wheel tire, and so on. The rolls 
for iroQ and steel mills have special lathes for trueins them up. 
The thin sheet metal-work produced by sjMnning has given rise to 
a special kind of s|Mnning lathe where pressure, and not cutting, 
ia the method adopted. 

Methods of HMxnt and Rotating Work, Chucks.— The term chuck 
sigoifiea an appliance used in the lathe to hold and rotate work. 
As the dimensions and shapes of the latter vary extensively, so 
also do those of the chucks. Broadly, however, the latter corre- 
spond with the two principal classes of work done in the lathe, 
that between unires, and that held at one end only or fau worh. 

This of course Is an extremely comprehendve classification, because 
chucks of the same name differ vastly when used in small and large 
lathes. The chucks, again, used in turret work, though they gnp 
the work by one end only, differ entirely in design from the face 
chucks proper. 

Chucking between Centres.— -The simplest and by far the commonest 
method adopted is to drill countersunk centres at the ends of the 
work to be turned, in the centre or longitudinal axis (fig. 34, >t), 
and supoort these on the point centres of headstock and poppet. 
The angle included by the centres is usually 60", and the points 
may enter the work to depths ran|pnff from as little as A in. in very 
Iip;ht pieces to i in.. } in. or i in. In the heaviest. Obviously a 
piece centred thus cannot be rotated by the mere revolutbn of the 
lathe, but it has to be driven by some other agent making con- 


Fio. 34.. 

At Centring and driving; a, point B, Face-plate driver or catch- 
centre; 6. carrier: e, driver plate; a, centre; b, driver, 
fixed in slot in body of point C, Common heart-shaped carrier, 
centre; d, IjMck centre; s, D, Clementdoubledriver; a, face- 
work, plate; 5, b, drivers; e, loose 
plate carrying drivers. 

nexion between it and the mandrd. The wood turner uses a forked 
or prong centre to obtain the necessary leverage at the headstock 
ena, but that would be useless in metal. A driver is therefore used, 
of which there are several forms (fig. 34), the essential element 
being a short stiff prong of metal set away from the centre, and rotat- 
ing the work directly, or against a carrier whkJi encircles and 
pinches the work. As this method of driving sets up an unbalanced 
force, the " Clement " or double driver (fig. 34, D), was invented, 
and is fre<]uently made use of, thouch not neariv so much as the 
common single driver. In large and heavy work it is frequently 
the practice to drive in another way, by the dogs of the face-plate. 
Steadies. — Pieces of work which are rigid enough to withstand 
the stress of cutting do not require any support except the centres. 

Fio. 35. 

A, Travelling steady with adjust- 

able studs a, o; b, work; 
c, tool; d, slide-rest. C, 

B, Steady with horiaootal and 

vertical adjustment through 

"slotted bolt holes a, a; (, (, 
brass or steel facings. 

Fixed steady with hinged top 
and three setting pieces. 

But long and comparatively slender pieces have to be steadied at 
intermediate poinU (fig. 35). Of devices for thb purpose there 
are many designs; some are fixed or bolted to the bed and are 
shifted when necessary to new positions, and others are bolted to 
the carriage of the slide-rest and move along with tt—travdltng 


S^I«S^ iSjM^^te rt,r^i .'^^^ In a vee. or a rigfit angle. 

*4M >Uli4VthriSik*";w*»"'* *" "P^^** a. well a. back- 
m^^^h^ a»f*i*t ilTm^Lr'in ^^^"^ movemenu are invariably 

S« lak#rS X" U^Ut7:t^Tfl! "" V ^•«*' • H^^ cut has to 
? rviKler tC *^k ifu? i^'^^w "f*"*" ^^ tale iu bearing. 
!>*■** ImmSiciTrTv lll^iJ'li.*^' P****-. The travelling stea/y 
^^iJil*:^^^''^ ^ ^* *° contaS:ih«efa,J 


the jaws bdiy independent, there it no telf-centring capi 
thus much time is lost. A large group, therefore, are 
•ell-centring by the turning of a ring which actuates a f 


*>.f*u>^ ,*. K'+'-cys^ oLisnes ana similar articles arc bored 

^^Vi^ ^ tZu' "^''^"^ iuSticnUy tightly to 
Vfii''^ tu ^rK= n"n^t>« o( bora possible 11 

point centres 
resist the stress 
s possible involves stocking 
ndrcb of diflefent diametera. As it 
often as a piece of work requires 
the use of slippti mandrels, which 
'rmd three to a doaea. A better 

^V,tt*^V i* ^^i'^;'^?'.'^*'^^^' ^ '^ich there are several forms. 


?'*^f**'*'" ^°*^*^ '" *" ■* ^^ capKity for slight 
h<^ -^etcr. *«'Ountin» t^ fri,m t in. to ( ia.. by tt 




the utiliation 

i^ '^'_* L_ J ''"■"' ^"'■^*'^j '^/•••wja «naj 4^ mo\Td endwise 

i^pertd body, or icpante saogte keys or blades may be 

d**i^*'l*'^'* 7^* Jrird of wwk ia whkli sappoft b given at the 

f^^ac^ ^'T '^^^ the evntre of the movable poppet not being 

t****?^, ^ ^"?*" ** fjft-«vrt It iachides pieces the length of 

ce^J^'tran*** *"^^ *on»ethm£ lew thaa the diameter to about 

Attal condition being that 

lb*** -*upp^^*^ ^^ **^^l H Hiiliiiently stasdy to roMt the stress 
tb* "tipg. Work which K»* lo lie Wed. e\m though k>ng, cannot 
d ^Jidpy oniht back twire. *tni if kM« b often supported on 
1**2*?**^ ^"* ^ ^T«^1 *pf^u iK-T used for face- work b the common 
*'^§ii (%' ^^^' ^^ *^ *■ i^^^ ^'^ screwed 






t^yOv t^* *i rt^jii^^^*-! '•^*-<^ *•> ^^« for 

^; t^V klvH* ^1 ux^h*«U Mt*. 
ul lsiv*i« A^ h>J»r* »^^ ***»^*^ Mt« sre inserted for the pur^ 

i4v iW 1*1 ^v Iv* i*vviiw Au inu*MiK\lwir>', the amtft-fitcu, 

i,V* *^^^ »**^^ ^* *''**'*^' ^^**** **• ****** *• •***^ •• *^ 

J»|!; \S K** i u.v *^i* IM» hiitd to it permanent i»gs 

\\ it i»«»«H^I 4 A% ^M Mw . **.* vfv* s^**)- t" the commonest 

M*! *>v ws'*«^* *u.^a1^ *ml imW'tiemWnily. each by 

i%v t** «n|* wo*^ tf*kK. e«\ur«*IK' or intemally. In 

-^ iW iK«. -itv UwK hM,\» to the hi4w in a plain face- 

\m att thf«> Dt"*^ t*>^ «^'^'^^ settitvi b tenutt\^« that is. 

there b no sdf •centring capacity, and 

kirv» irmiin. thmrmtnrm mw^ rendered 

face scroll 

Ftc. 38.~Independent Jaw Chuck. 

A. Body. ^ b. Square beads of screws Cor 
«, Recess to receive lace-plate. key. 

B. laws or dogs. c, Tee-grooves for boha. 

C. Screws for operating jaws. 

Fig. 39.— Scroll Chuck, ungeared. 
A, Face-plate screwed to man- £, Jaws |n chuck face, having 

drel nose. 

B. Back of chuck screwed to 


C. Knuried chuck body with 

scroll « on face. 

D. Chuck face. 

sectional scroll teeth en- 
gaging with scroll o. and 
moved inwards or outwarda 
by the scn^ when C ia 

bt Tommy or lever hole in C. 

P, Piece of work outlined. 

Fic. 4a — Combination Geared 

Scroll Chuck. 
At Back plate; a, recess for face- 
0, Pinions. 

C, Circular rack with scroll b on 

D, Chuck body. 

£, Jaws fitting on intermedbte 
pieces e that engage with 
the scroll b. 

tf. Screws for operating jaws 

Fic. 41 .—Spiral Geared Chuck, 
concentric movement. (CTaylor, 

A, Back. 

B, Body. 

C, Spiral plate with teeth engag- 

ing in jaws D. 
B, Bevel pinions gearing with 
teeth on back of C 


(Sf . 39) or ft drcolarrack with 

piniocH (fyi. 40), tumrd with 

ft key which operateb <iJJ \ht 

jaws smultaneously en wands 

or outwards. But as some 

dasscs of jobs hav«- 10 be 

adjusted eccentricall: — i-v 

chucks are of the com 1 

type (fig. 40). capable ^ 

i»ed iiuiepcndently ^ ^...i- 

centrically. hence tensitnJ uni- 

tersal chucks. The rh^^ngc 

from one to the other ^imjily 

means throwing the rine ^ 

teeth out of or into rng^e?- 

ment with the ptniuns by 

means of cams or equivalent 

devices. Each type of chuck 

occurs ia a la^ mn^ cf 

dimensions to suit bthts of ^tl 

centres, besides which c\cty ; 

lathe indudes several <: hutka, 

large and small, in it-^ i-m^ipr 

ment. The range of dU- 

Bcters which can be^ t^kcn, 

by anv one chuck u liniitnl,, 

thougn the^ j^ws arc m^de 

with steps, in addition id the 

ranj^ atfwled by the ope^ 

ratinz screws. The " Taylor '* 

spiral chucks (fig. 41) dilTn' 

essentially from the fcroJI t^pei in having tSe actuating threads set spimWy 

on the sloping interidr of a cone, Thr ri-suU is iK.1t the outward pir^iurc 

of each jaw is receivt d behind the Liody. becauic the spiral rises up at the 

lack. In the ordinarv v:rotl chucks the prcssyre i* taken only at the bottom 

of each jaw, and the itndcricy 10 tilt and pull the teeth out of ahapc b very 

Boticeable. The spiral, rnoreover, enablci a itrongcr form of tooth to b<' usca, 

together with a finer pitch of ihrcadi, 10 that the wearing area can be 


The forqioing may he termed the Atanrfard chucks. But in addition there 
are large numMrs for dealine with Kpeetal da&f.eA of mork. Brass finlEhers 
have several. Most cf the hoTtow ipinrile blhes and automatic have dmu-in 
or ^ush-OMt chucks, in whkh the jaws are operated EimultanrouUj^ hy the 
conical bore of the eii jrrljn? ncise^ h> that thctr acticn is instantaneous and 
self-centring. They a r operated by hand, as in %. 31, or autnjmaueally, 

as in fig- 33. There k I irge group uwd for drills a^d reamers — ibc 1^1^ 

titmcks employed in la — -^ uefj a^ in drilling machines. 

This is the only con^tnicnl head under which to etoup three great classes of 

machine tools which possess the Icature of reciprocation in common. It 

indudes the planing. ».!i.ipin;^ and slotting noschincs. The feature of n:^i|.'<roca- 

tion b that the cutting tool h oper^itivf only in one dSrection; that is. ir cuts 

dorinff one stroke or movement and Is idle during the rctum stroke, ft is^ 

therefore, in precisely [he same cDndiUoa m a hand tool such as a dii«cj» a 

carpenter's plane or ^ hand 

saw. We snail return n^Ain 

to this feature of <^n idle 

Rroke aad discuss the devices 

that eadst to avoid it. 
Planing liaekints. — In the 

ttandard planer for general 

shop purposes (fig. 4^) the 

piece of work to be ori«ra,ted 

on is attached to a hori/dntalu^ 

table moving to and Iro on a 

ri|^ bed, ami pftssin^ u uder- 

B»th the fixed cuttih^ tool. 

Tike to(^ is ^pped in a box 

having certain necessary ad- 
justments and movements, to 

that the tool can be c^ried 

vfed transveredy ftcrt^^s the 

work, or ftt right angica with 

the direction of its travel, to 

take successive cuts, and also 

downwards or in a vertical 

direct km. The tooNbojc is 

carried on a cross-slide which 

has capadty for several feet 

of vertical adjustment uci up- 
right members to suit work 

of varying depths. Tht-^e up-ij 

rights or housings arc bolted 

to the sides of the bid. and 

the whole framing is so rigidly 

designed that no pemprihle 

tremor or yielding takr^ place 

■ader the heaviest duty im- 
posed by the stress of cuttinf. 





ii o Jh -9 tj C 


TOOL P^afwcATrncMxcHWEs 

f|l» Uf > >W^ adluflliMfiU haw been nude and the I To andi a dea^gn there are objectiom, which, thmmk *v • • 
, ^ H«vfl and the return o( the work-table and | portaace haa often been exanerated. aityttiS ^ tv ^^ 

fW «| — ** S»Jfi i ^ M«W»e. 

fCi«ti*t A Croom. Ltd.* Minchcsitf .) 

J, Dri*ifl« c«» pulky «iuaiiiig pinion i, disk wh*d *. with ilotte^ 
ilt^Jt. and adjttrtiblc nut moving in ihc *l*Jt o( the c«nk y. 
m^icli ariiMTc^ the Icvrr r connect m1 to the tool fim G, tn^ 

Mi^VHM^ »1l% *»4 t*^ l«aA«l 

mvUtcA ftiflttiiuUng ihtr \\hii; worth qukk return; tis pivijte^d 
lo 1 b4ftrk wtj^K 1* ftdiuttabic alotiK * *\ot in t. artit th^ 
*.Uin!*n.ri(t d TSi5 t>t.jck in the ^tot rtxuTatc* the powtion oi th«- 
rsjT* ir. tL> *iui Thf position o( M>r work qxx rh^ tkblc- 

*, Fml J"k Jrivf ft hv *tnjiU scars fn>tn cone pulley. 

i P#»i Jr\\Tfl lr»jm Jt^k ttiroins,h Icicr* iit various ratta, and i 
iTvJUnfi %he jiTiL-int t-* million af the feed icrew F. 

|C^Cc«*k.*l iMiuifvl 1^ orciiUr th^pins* driven l>y worm 




objectioa has ariKn a new dengn, the side planer (fig. 4^), ta which 
the tool-bos w carried by an ann movable aloac a fixed bed or bate, 
and tfvcrhangins the work, which U fastened to the aide of the 
base, or on angle brackets, or in a deep pit alongnde. Here the 
important difference b that the work is not traversed under the 
tool as ta the ordinary planer, but the tool moves over the work. 
But an evil results, due to the overhang of the tool arm, which being 
a cantilever suMwrted at one end only u not io rigid when cutting 
as the CRMs-iau of the ordinary martiinr, supported at both ends 
on housings. The same idea is embodied in machines built in other 
re sp ec ts on the reciprocating taMe modeL Sometimes one housing 
is omitted, and the tool arm is carried on the other, being therefore 
unsupported at one end. Sometimes a housing Is made to be 
removable at pleasure, to be temjMrsrily taken aWay only when a 
piece of work of unusual dimeniaons has to be fixed on Uie table. 
Another objectUm to the common planer is this. It seems 
unmecfaanical in this machine to reciprocate a heavy table and 
pieoe of work which often weighs seineral tons, and let the tool 
and its holder of a few hundredweights only remain stationary. 
The mere reversal of the table abeorbs much greater horsfr*power 

there Is no limitation whatever to the length of the work, since it 
may extend to any disUnoe beyond the base-plate. 

Shaping MaejUnes.—The abaping machine (fig. 44) doM for com- 

J planer, being one c 

inventions, and beyond the tact that it has a reciprocating non- 

paratively small pieces that ^ 
It came later in time than thej 

the planer does for long ones. 
>laner. being one of James Nasmyth's 

cutting return stroke it bcari 00 resemblance to the older machine. 
Its dnisn is briefly as follows: The piece of work to be dhaped is 
attached to the top, or one of the vertkal side faces, of a right- 
an|^ bracket or brackets. These are carried upon the face of a 
main standard and are adjusUble thereon in horizontal and vertical 
directions. In small machines the ram or reciprocating arm (see 
fig. 44, G) slides in fixed guides on the top of the pillar, and the 
necessary side traverse is imparted to the work table a. To the top 
of the main sundard, in one design, a carriase is fitted with hon- 
sontal traverse to cover the whole brndth, witnin the capacity of the 
machine, of any work to be operated on. la the largest machines 
two sundards support a long bed, on which the carnage, with its 
ram. traverses past the work. These machines are frequently made 
double-headed, that is carriages, rams and work tables hre dupli- 

FiG. 45.— i3-in. Stroke Stotting Machine. 
A, Main framing. 
3. Driving cone. . 
C, l>. Gears driven by cones. 
£; Shaft of L. 
P, Tool Fsm driven from shaft E through disk G and rod ff, with 

quick return mechanism D. 
/, Coonter-balance lever to ram. 

than the actual work of cuttiiw. Hence a strong case is often 
stated for the abandonment of the common practice. But. on the 
other hand, the centre of eravity of the moving table and work 
ties low down, while when tne cross-rail and housings with the Cut- 
ting tool are travelled and reversed, their centre of gravity is high, 
aaa great precautions have to be Uken to ensure steadiness of 
■wvement. Several planers are .made thus, but they are neariy 
an of extremely massive type— the pit planers. The device is 
sddom applied to those of small and miedium dimen«ons. 

But there is a great group ofplaners in which the work is always 
fixed, the tools travelling. These are the wall planers, vertical 
^antrs -or waU creepers, used chiefly by marine engine builders. 
They are necessary, because many of the castings and forgings 
are too massive to be put on the tables of the largest standard 

ling independently, and so makes vertical cutting 

In some dengns horixontal stroltts are provided for, or 

cither vertical or horizontal as required. Here, as in the side planer. 

(Greenwood ft Batley, Ltd., Leeds.) 
JC, Flywheel. 
L, Dnving-disk. 

if, N,-Feed leven and shaft operated from disk, actuating linear 
movements of slides 0, P, and circular movement of table 

. Q, through gean R. 

S, Jbod-feed motions to table.* 
r. Countershaft. 

cated, and the operator can set one piece of work while the other 
is being shaped. In all cases the inovement of the reciprocating 
arm, to the outer ^nd of which the tool is attached, takes place in a 
direction transversely to the direction of movement of the carriage, 
and the tool receives no support beyond that which it receives from 
the arm which overhangs the work. Hence the shaper laboura 
under the same disadvantages as the side planer — it cannot operate 
over a great breadth. A shaper with a 24-in. stroke is one 01 large 
capacity, 16 in. being &n average limit. . Although the non-cutting 
stroke exists, as in Uie planer, the objection due to the mass of a 
reciprocating table does not exist, so that the problem does not 
assume the same magnitude as in the planer. The weak point in 
the shaper is the overhang of the arm. which renders it liable to 
spring, and rendere heavy cutting difficult. Recently a novel 
(Msign has been introduced to fiivoid this, the draw-cnt shaper, in 
which the cutting is done on the inward or return stroke, instead of 
on the outward one. 

Slotting Machines.— In the slotting machine (fig. 4S) the cutting 
Ukes place vertically and there, is a lost return stroke. All the 




necemry movements save the simple reciprocating stroke are mi- 
parted to the compound table on which the work is carried. These 
mclude two linear movements at right angles with each other and 
a ctrcuUir motion capable of making a complete drde. Frequently 
a tilting adjustment is included to permit of slotting at an angle. 
The slotting machine has the disadvantage of an arm unsupported 
beyond the guides in which it moves. But the compound movements 
of the table permit of the production ol shapes which cannot be done 
on planers and shapers, as circular parts and circular arcs, in com- 
bination with straight portions. Narrow key grooves in the bores 
of wheels are aUo reaclily cut. the wheels lying on the horizontal 
tabic, which would only be possible on planer and shapcr by the use 
of awkward angle brackets, and of specially projecting tools. 

Quick return in planers is accomplished by havmg two distinct 
sets of gearing — a slow set for cutting and a quick train for return, 
each opcratecf from the same group of driving pulleys. The return 
travel b thus accomplished usually three, oTten four, times more 
quickly than the forward rate; sometimes even higher rates are 
arrantred for. In the shaper 
and slotter such acceleration 
Is not practicable, a rate of 
two to one being about the 
limit, and this is obtained not 
by gears, but by the slotted 
crank, the Wkitwortk rttMrn, 
on shapers and sbtters, or by 
elliptical toothed wheeb oa 
sbtters. The small machines 
are generally unprovided with 
thb acceleration. 

The double-cutting device 
seems at first sight the best 
solution, and it b adopted on 
a number of machines, though 
still in a great minority. The 
pkmeer device of this kind, 
the rotating' tool-box of 
Whitworth, simply turns the 
tool round through an angle 
of i8o" at the termination off 
each stroke, the movement 
being self-acting. In some 
later designs, instead of the 
box being rotated to reverse 
the tool, two toob are used 
set back to back, and the one 
that b not cutting b rdieved 
for the time beine, that b 
tilted to dear the work. 
Neither of these tools will 
plane up to a shoulder as will 
the ordinary ones. 

Allied Mackines.^Tht re- 
ciprocation of the tool or the 
work, generally the former, b 
adopted in several machines 
besides the standard types 
named. The plate-edge planer 
b used by platers and boiler 
makers. It b a side planer, 
the plates being bolted to a 
bed, and the tool traversing 
and cutting on one or both 
strokes. Proviuon b often' 
included for planii^ edges at 
right angles. The key-seaters 
are a special type, designed 

the speed of the tools, and thb cootrob the demni of the drivinf 
and feeding mechanism. Another important diflTerence b that 
b e t wee n druling or boring one or more holes simultaneously. With 
few exceptions the tool rotates and the work is stationary. The 
notable exceptions are the venical boring lathes already mentioned. 
Obviously the demands made upon drilRng; machines are nearly as 
varied as those on bthes. There b little in common between the 
machines which are serviceable for the odd jobs done in the general 
ttkop and those which arc required for the repetitive work of the 
shops which handle spedalities. Provision often has to be made 
for drilling simultaneously several holes at ceruin centres or 
holes at various angles or to definite depths, while the mass of 
the spindles of the heavier machines renders counter-balancing 

Bench Machines are the simplest and smallest of the group. They 
are operated cither by hand or by power. In the power machines 
generally, except in the smallest, the drill b also fed downwaida 
by power, by means of toothed gears. The upper part of the drilling 

i4, ILLso^pklb 

C, HiiclL.1! a,rFn, 

D, Spindk cirriagR 
£, DrOI Bplndlc 
Ft Wiin driving cotKs <J riving vertical shaft G 

J, 5pur'ft'h«l;i, driving from £7 to vertical shaft K. 
L, Mitre-wheck, driving frDm K to horisontal 

ah^lt M, having icslK^f if^^i in the radial arm. 
Nt Nest dI mitrewtietLi deivifi;; the wheel spindle 

£ from M. 
O, Fcvd^^eors to dnll spindlr, actuated by hand- 

Fig. 46.~Pillar Radial Drilling Machine, 5 ft. radius. 

J?, Rt Feed cones driving from shaft M to y 

shaft S, for self-acting feed off driU. 
r. Change-speed gears. 
Ut Hand-wheel for racking carriage D along radial 

arm C 
K, Clutch and lever for reversing directioQ of 

rotation of spindle. 
W, Worm-gear for turning pillar B. 
d. Handle for turning worm. 
X, Screw for adjustmg the height off the radial 

y. Gears for actuating ditto from shaft C. 
Z, Rod with handle for operating devatinj^ | 

mainly to remove the work off cutting key grooves in the bores 
of wheeb and pulleys from the slotung machine. The work is 
fixed on a table and the keyway cutting tool b drawn downwards 
through the bore, with several resulting practical advantages. 
Many planing machines are portable so that they may be fixed 
upon very massive work. Several gear-wheel cutting madiiocs 
embody the redpcocating tooL 

The strict distinction between the operations of drilling and 
boring is that the first initbtes a hole, while the second enlarges one 
already exbting. But the terms are used with some latitude. ^ A 
combined drilling and boring machine b one which has provision 
for both functions. But when holes are of Urge dimensions the 
drilling machine b useless because the proportions and eears are 
unsuitable. A 6-in. drill b unusually large, but holes are Dored up 
to 30 ft. or more in dbmeter. 

T-fPes of Machines. — ^The distinctbn between machines with 
vertical and horizontal spindles b not vital, but of convenience only. 
The principal controlling element in design b the mass of the work, 
which often determines whether it or the machine shall be adjusted 
relativdy to each other. Also the dimensions of a bole determine 

spindle being threaded b turned by an encirding spur-whed. operated 
very slowly by a pinbn and hand-whed by the right hancl of the 
attendant, the movement bdng made independent of the rotatioa 
of the spindle. A rack sleeve endrding the spindle b also common. 
In the power machines gears are also used, but a bdt on small cone 
pulleys drives from the main cone shaft at variable M)eeds. From 
three to four drilling and feeding speeds are provicfed for by the 
respective cone pulleys. Work b hdd on or bolted to a circular 
table, which may have provbion for vertical adjustment to suit 
pieces of work 01 different depths, and which can usually be swung 
aside out of the way to permit of deep pieces of work bdng introducea. 
restine on the floor or on blocking. 

WaU Machines. — One group of these machines resembles the bench 
machines in general design, but they are made to bolt to a wall 
instead of on a bench. Thdr value lies in the facilities which they 
afford for drillinjg large pieces of work lying on the floor or on block- 
ing, which coula not go on the tables ot the bench machines. Some- 
times a compound work-table is fastened to the floor beneath; 
and several machines also are ranged in line, by means of which long 
ings may be brought under the simul- 

plates, angles, boilers or castings may \ 

taneous action of the eroup of machines. Another type 

radial arm machine, with or without a tabic beneath. In each 





an advantage gained m that a KipportinE pOlar or standard is not 
reoaired, its puce being taken b)r the wall. 

SdJ-C4mlained Pillar Jiackints include a large number having the 
above-oamed feature in common. In the older and leas valuable 
types the framework b rwid, and the driving and feeding are by belt 
cones. But the machines oeing mostly of larser capacities than those 
just noted, back-gears similar to those crflsthes are generally in- 
troduced. The spindles also are usually counterbalanced. The 
machine framing is bolted to a bed-pUte. A circular work-table 
may or may not be included. When it is, provision is made for 
elevating the table by gears, and also for swinging it aside when deep 
work has to be put on the base-plate. 

Radial Arm Mackines; — In these (fi^:. 46) the drilling mechanism 
is carried on a radial arm which is pvoted to the ptUar with the 
cbject of moving the drill over the work, when the latter b too massive 
to permit of convenient adjustment under the drilL The driving 
takes place through shafts at right angles, from a horizontal shaft 
carrying tbt cones and back-|;eared to a vertical one, thence to a 
horiaratal one ak>ng the radial arm, whence the vertical drilling 

makers and platers. In others the spindles are adjusuble in circles 
of varying radii, as in those employed for drilling the bolt holes in 
pipe flanges. In many of these the spindles are norizontal. Some 
very special multiple-spindle machines have the spindles at different 
aneles, horizontal and vertical, or at angles. 

Universal Mackints are a particular form of the pillar type in 
which the spindle b horizontal, moving with its carria^ on a pillar 
capable of traversing horizontally along a bed ; the carnage has ver- 
tical adjustment on its pillar and so commands the whole of the face 
of a large piece of work bolted to a low bed-plate adjacent to the 
machine. The term " universal " signifies that the machine com- 
bines provision for drilling, boring, tapping screws and insertina 
screw studs, facing and in some cases milling. The power requirea 
for boring is obtained by double and treble gears. These machined 
are used largely in marine engine works, where very massive 
castings and forgings must be operated on with their faces set 

Boring Mackines. — Many machines are classified as suitable for 
drilling and boring. That simply means that provision b made on 

Fig. 4?.— Lincoln Milling Machine^ 

if. Bed. 

B. B. Len. 

C. Upright. 

D. Stnndle or arbor. 

E. Headstock. carrying bearings for spindle D. 

F. TaHstock. carrying point centre for tail end of spindle. 

G. Hand-wheel for dTccting adjustment in height of headstock, 

through bevel-gears H and screw /. 
K. Croflft-bar connecting head- and tail-stocks, and ensuring 
equal vertical adjustment of the spindle bearings from the 
r /. 

^Midle is driven. The latter has its bearings in a carriage which 
can be traversed along the arm for adjustment of radius. The 
^aodk b counterbalanced. Hand as well as power adjustments 
are included. In the work-tables of radial and rigid machines 
there b a great diversity, so that work can be set on top. or at the 
siifes, or at an angle, or on compound tables, so covering all the 
remitrements of practice. 

Senxitive Mackines have developed greatly and have superseded 
many of the older, slower designs. The occasion for their use lies 
in the drilling of small holes, ranging up to about an inch in diameter. 
They are belt-driven, without back-gears, and usually without 
brvd-gears to change the dircctbn of motion. The feed is by lever 
moviog a rack sleeve. A slender pillar with a foot supports the 
entire mechanism, and the work-table, with a range of vertical 

M^UipU Spindle Machines. — Many of the sensitive machines 
are fitted with two, three or more spindles operated in unison with 
a belt common to all. In other machines the multiple spindles are 
capable of adjustment for centres, as in the machines used by boiler 

(John Htilroyd & Co., Ltd , M;]nmw.) 
L, Speed cones for driving spindle, through pinion M and wheef 

0, Frame, carrying the bearings for the cone pultev L, and pivoted 
to the bed at o. and to the headstock £. This device keeps 
the gears M and N in engagement in all variations in the 
heignt of the spindle D. 

P, Q, Cones for driving the table R through worm-gears 5, T, and 
spurs U, V, to the table screw. 

W, Stop for automatic knock-off to feed. 

X, Hand-wheel for turning the same screw through worm-gears 

a drilling machine for boring holes of moderate size, say up to 8 or 
10 in., by double and treble iMck-gears. But the real bonng machine 
is of a different tvpe. In the norizontal machines a splincd bar 
actuated by suitable gears carries a boring head which holds the 
cutters, which head is both rotated with, and traversed or fed along 
the bar. The work to be bored is fixed on a table which has pro- 
vision for vertical adjustment to suit work of different dimensions. 
The boring-bar b supported at both ends. In the case of the 
largest work the boring-bar is preferably set with its axis vertically, 
and the framing of the machine is arch-like. The bar is carried in 
a bearing at the crown of the arch and driven and fed there by suit- 
able gears, while the other end of the bar rotates in the table which 
forms the base of the machine. Some boring machines for small 
engine cylinders and pump barrels have no bar {proper, but a long 
boring spindle carryins; cutters at the further end is supported along 
its entire length in a long stiff boss projecting from the headstock 
of the machine — the snout machine. The work is bolted on a carriage 
which slides along a bed similar to a lathe bed. ^ Many of these 
nuirhines have two bars f(»- boring two cyUn4ers simultaneously. 


IV.— Milling Machines 

In milling machines rotary taw-like cutten are employed. To A 
certain extent these and some gear-cutting machines overlap because 
they have points in common. Many gear-whed teeth are produced 
by rotary cutters on milling machines. In many machines designed 
for gear cutting only, rotary cutters alone are used. For thu reason 
the two classes of machines are conveniently and naturally grouped 
together, notwithsunding that a large and mcceasing group cd gear- 
cutting machines operate with reciprocating tools. 

The French engineer, Jacques de Vaucanson (1709-1783). b 
credited with having made the first milling cutter. The first very 
crude milling machine was nude ini8i8 at a gun factory in Connecu- 
cut. To-day the practice of milling ranks as of equal economic value 
with that ca any other department of the machine shop, and the 
varieties of mOIing machines made are as highly differentiated as are 
those of any other group. An apparent incongruity which u rather 
striking is the relative disprofjortion between the mass of these 
machines and the small dimensions of the cutters. The failures of 
many of the early machines were 1j ' 

of the intensity of the stresses in . , 

cutting tool has generally a very narrow edge in operation. Mflling 
cutters are as a rule very wide oy comparison, and several teeth in 
deep cuts are often in simultaneous operation. The result is that 
the machine spindle and the arbor or tool mandrd are subjected to 
severe stress, the cutter tends to spring away from the surface being 
cut. and if the framings are of light proportions they vibrate, and in- 
accuracy and chatter result. Even with the very stiff machines now 
made it is not possible to produce such accurate results on wkle sur- 
faces as with the planer using a narrow-edged tool Because 
of this ereat resistance and stress, cutten of over about 
an inch m wklth are always made with the teeth arran^ 
scMrally, and wide cutten which are intended for rou^^mg 
down to compete with the planer always have either 
inserted cutten or staggered teeth. Hence the rotary cutter 
type of machine has not been able to duplace the planing 
machine in wkle work when great accuracy is essential. Its pbce 
lies in other spheres, in some of which its position b unassailable. 
Nearly all pieces of small and medium dimensrans are machined as 
wdl by milling as by single-edged tools. All pieces whkh have more 


a screw-cutting lathe and worm-^ear for turning the head, in com- 
bination with an index or divkling plate having several circles of 
holes, whkh by the insertion of an index pc^ permit of the work 
spindle being locked during a cut. The combinatk>ns possible with 
the divbion plate and worm-gear number hundreds. The head also 
has angular adjustments in the vertkral direction, so that taperod 
work can be done as well a^ parallel. The result b that there is 
nothing in the range of spiral or parallel milling, or tapered work or 
spur or bevel-gear cutting, or cutter making, that cannot be done 
on thb type 01 machine, and the accuracy of the results of equal 
divisions of pitch and angle of spiral do not depend on the human 
dement, but are embodied in the mechanbm. 

aimensions 01 xne cucicrv. j ne lauures 01 
es were largely due to a lack of appreciation 
:resses involved in milling. A single-edged 
f a very narrow edge in operation. Milling 

than one face to be operated on are done better in the milling machine 
All pieces which have profiled outlines involving 

than elsewhere. 

combinations of curves and plane faces can eenerally only be pro- 
duced economically by^ mOhng. Neariy all work that involves 
equal divisions, or pitcnin^s, as in the manufacture of the cutten 
them^ves, or spiral cutting, or the teeth of jgear-wheeb when pro- 
duced by rotary cutters, must be done in millins machines. Beyond 
these a large 9uantity of work lies on the border-Tine, where the choice 
between milling ana planing, shaping, slotting. &c., b a matter for 
indivklual judgment and experience. It b a matter for some sur^ 

Else that round the little milling cutter so many des^ins of machines 
ve been built, varying from each othtr in the position of the tool 
S indies, in theur number^ and in the means adopted for actuating 
em and the tables which carry the work. 

A very eariy type of milling machine, which remains extremdy 
popular, was the Lincoln. It was desi|:ned, as were all the eariy 
machines, for the small arms factories in the United States. The 
necessity for all the similar paru of pbtob and rifles being inter* 
changes^ble, has had the paramount influence in the devdopment 
of the milling machine. In the Lincoln machine as now made 
(fi^. 47) the work b attached to a table, or to a vke on the table, 
which nas horixontal and cross traverse movements on a bed, but 
no capacity for vertical adjustment. The cutter b held and rotated 
on an arbor driven from a beadstock pulley, and supported on a tail- 
stock centre at the other end, with capacity for a good range of ver> 
tical adjustment. Thb is necessary both to admit pieces of work 
oS different depths or thicknesses between the table and the cutter, 
and to regulate the depth of cutting (vertkal feed). Around |hb 
general design numerous machines small and huge, with many 
variations in detail, are buOt. But the essential feature b the ver- 
tical movement of the spindle and cutter, the support of the arbor 
(cutter spindle) at both ends, and the rigklity anorded by the bed 
whkh supports head- and tail-stock and ubie. 

The pillar and knee machines form another group which divides 
favour about equally with the Lincoln, the design bdng nearly of 
an opposite character. . The vertkal movements for setting and 
feed are imparted to tfie work, which in thb case b carried on a 
bracket or knee that slides on the face of the pillar whkh supports 
the headstock. Travelling and transverse movements are imparted 
to the table sUdes. The cutter arbor nuy or may not be supported 
away from the headstock by an arched overhanginff arm. None of 
these machines b of large dimensicms. They are made in two leading 
designs — the plain and the universal. The firat embodies rectangular 
rdations only, the second b a marvdlous instrument both in 
its range of movements and fine degree of precisbn. The first 
machine of thb kind was exhibited at Paris m 1867. The design 
permits the cutting of spiral grooves, the angle of which b embodied 
in the adjustment of a swivelling table and of a headstock thereon 
(univenaJ or ^>ifal head). The latter embodies change-gean like 

Fic. 48.— Vertkal Spindle Milling Machine. (James 
AichdaleftCo., Ltd.) 

A, Main framing. 
JB. Knee. 

C, Spindle, bavins its vertkal podtkn capable of adjustment by 
the sUding ctD on A. 

B, Driving cone, bdt driving over guide pulleys F to spindle 

pulley G. 
ff, Enckised gean for driving spindle by back gear. 
J, Hand-whed for adjustin|( spindle vertkally. 
A, K, Pulleys over whkh spindle b counterbalanced. 
JL Fe«f pufley, driven from counter shaft. 
if, Ven:J4.^S ic&i &h^^ driven from L through mitre-gears. 

iV, Ch.irii;,^i;e.lf hi>X. 

O, H<^ iiii I ! :, operatinE longitudinal and tnnsvcrM 

f ' • ' li spiral and spur-gears. 

P, P. \^ .■■'\'i-- \ ■■ ■ ng changes in feed speeds, nine in number. 

g, mnl!*: TcT rr%.Tnirij; <lirectk>n of motkn of table R. 
, Hal^4^whe«I for iongiiudinal movement of table. 
Tf Hna^J ' iwIimI Tor cdrct trig cross adjustments. 
V, Spiral scan indicaiod for effecting sdf-acting rotatioa of 

circuW lablc W, 
X, Henri whfrl far rotatTrm of table. 
K, Hu . : : . al movements of knee B on screw Z. 

Machines with vertical n>indle8 (fig. 48) form another great group, 
the general constructk>n of whkh resembles that dther of the com- 
mon drilling machine or of the dotting machine. In many cases the 
horizontal position b preferable for tooling, in othen the vertical, 
but often the matter b mdifferent. For general purposes, the heavier 
class of work excepted, the vertkal b more convenient. But apart 
from the fitting of a special brace to the lower end of the ^ndle 
whkh carries the cutter, the spindle b unsupported there and is 
thus Ibble to spring. But a brace can only be used with a millinff 
cutter that operates by its edges, while one advantage of the vertical 

8>indle machine b that it permits of the use of end or face cutters, 
ne of the ereatest advanta^ incklental to the vertical podtkMi 
of the spindle b that it permits of profile milling bdng done. One 
of the most tedk>us operatbns in the machine shop b the production 
of outlines whkh are not those of the regular geomefric figures, 
as rectangles and aides, or combinations of the same There ft 




only one way in which irregular formt can be produoed dieaply 
aod interchangeably,- and that is by controlling the movements cm 
the tool with an object of similar diape termed a "form 

* as in the well-known copying lathes, in the en * ling 

machine, and in the forming adjunctt fitted to vertical spi ■ , r.'Ainf 
machinea, so converting those into profiling machines, i h^ prin> 
dple and its application are alike simple. An object (the torfn ) It 
nade in hardened sted, having the same outlines as the obj^t to be 
auDed, aad the slide which carries the cutter spindle has a h:^njrncd 
former pin or xoUer. which u pulled hard against the c^lgci gI 
the lona by a suspended weight, so causing the tool to mcve and cut 
in the same ^ath and in the same plane around the edges of the work. 
Here the milling machine hokls a paramount place. No matter 
bow many cinvea and straight portions may be combined in a piece, 
the marhine reproduces them all faultlessly, and a hundred^ or a 
Thonsand others all pcedsdy alike without any tentative correctiona. 

Plano-millerB, also termed slabbing machines, form a group that 
crowa in value and in mass and capaaty. They are a comparatively 
ate devdopment, becoming the chief nvals to the planing machines. 
for all the earW miUixw was of a very light character. In gen«al 
oothnea the pano-millers cknely resemble the planing madiines, 
having bed, table, housings and cross-rail. The latter in the plano- 
msDcr cairiea the hearings for the cutter qxndle or spindles under 
whidi the work travds and redprocatea. These qnndles are ver- 
tical, bttt in aome madiines honaontal ones are fitted alao, aa in 
planera. ao that three faces at ri^t or other an^es can be operated 
on simaltaneou^. The slabbing operations of the plano-miUers do 
not indicate the full or even the prindpalutHities of these machines. 
To undentand these it must be remembered that the cross sections 
of very many parts which have to be tooled do not lie in sbgle planes 
iBcrdy, but in combinations of plane surfaces, horiaontal, vertical 
or angular. In working these on the planing machine separate 
aettingB of toola are required, and often successive settings. But 
milfing cutters are built up in " gangs '* to deal with such cases, and 
in this way the entire width of profile u milled at once. Horiaontal 
faces, and vertical and angular edges and grooves, are tooled simul- 
tancoualy, with much economy in time, a«d the cutter profile will 
be accurately reproduced on numbers of seoarate pieces. Allied 
to the plano-ini]]ers are the rotary pUners. They derive their name 
from the design of the cutters. An iron disk is pierced with holes 
for tiae insertion of a laige number of separate cutters, which by the 
rotatioa of the disk produce plane surfaces. These are nulling 
CBttcra, though the tools are single-edged ones, hence termed 
* i i is ri t ed tooth mills." These are used on other machines borides 
the rotary planers, but the latter are massive machines buHt on 
the plaaer modd, with but one hounng or upright to carry the 
caxnafe of the cutter spindle. These machines, varied considerably 
b design, do good service on a class of work in which a very hign 
degree of accuracy b not essential, aa column flanges, ends of 
giiden, feet of castings, and such like. 

v.— GBAE-arrmro Machxhbs 

The practice of cutting the teeth of gear^wheeb has grown but 
dowly. In the gean used by engineers, those of large dimensipns 

though it b 

uid the cost of cutting these b often prohibitive, 
unnecessary in numbers of mechanisms for which 

fe as suitatMe as the more accurately cut ones. The 

f^iii.** gean for machines of precision have long been produoed 
by cutting, but of bte yeara the practice has been extoiding to 
iadode those of medium and large dimensions, a movement which 
has been brgely favoured by the growth of electric driving, the 
hidi speeds of which make great demands on reduction and trans- 
miwion gears. Several new types of gear-cutting machines have 
been de si gned, and spedalixation b still growine, until the older 
■»«^s«»**, vdkkh woukl, after a fashion, cut au forms of gears, 
are bdag ousted from modem establishments. 

The teeth of gear-wheeb are produced dther by rotary milling 
cnttera or bv single-edged toob (fig. 49). The advantage of the 
first b that toe cutter used has the same sectional form as the inter- 
tooth apace, so that the act of tooth cutting imparu the shapes 
without assists nre from external mechanism. But thb hokb good 
ooly in regard to spur-wheel teeth, that b, those in which the teeth 
Ee paraOd with the ads of the wheeL The teeth of bevd-wheeb. 
tboo^ often produced by rotary cutters, can never be fonned 
absolutely correcdy, simply because a cutter of unalterable section 
ii employed to form the shapes which are constantly changing 
b dimensiona ak>ng the length of the teeth (the bevd-wheel being 
a frustum of a cone). Hence, though fair working teeth are ob- 
tained in thb way. they result from the practice of varying the 
lebtrve anglea of t^ cutten and whed and removing the material 
b several s uccessive operations or travcrees, often followed by a 
fittb correction with the fib. Although thb practice b still commonly 
ioOowed in bevel-wheeb of small dimensions, and was at one time 
the only method avaibbb, the practice has been changing in favour 
of shaping the teeth bv a process of pbning with a sinde-edged 
redprocatma tooL As, oowever. sudi a tool embodies no lormauve 
section aa do the milling cutters, dther it or the whed bbnk, or 
both, have to be coerced and controlled by mechanism outside the 
tod itadf. Around thb method a number of very ingenious 

macKinei have been dnfftriod, which may be broadly clawed under 
two Bf^^t Efoups — the farm and the generating types. 

Tn the fonti machmn a. pattern tooth or form-tooth b prepared 
In hardened steel, uaiuLly chree times as brge aa the ^actual teeth 
to be cue, an4J the mov^i^ent of the mechanism which carries the 
whtel blank U coemd by chb form, so that the tool, redprocated 
tnf iu bar, produces the i^me shape on the reduced dimensions of 
the wheel t»th. Th« ge^ntfrating machines use no pattern tooth, 
bm tht: pKncmtei qI the t';nih formation are embodied m the median- 
um iivii. These are vx-ry bteresting designs, because they not 
onl/ iK^fic the tct^h wiihnut a pattern tooth, but thdr movements 
are iutDcnatioLlly contn^ilc^i. A brge number of these have been 
brought cut in recent ye.if^, thdr growth bdng due to the demand 
for Acrufijte gt^r^ for motor can, for dectric driving, and for 
gertcT^I hlgh^Ius cngincvrs' work. These are so spedaliaed that 
they ran only cut the ore diss of gear for which they are deugned— 
the bevel -vfticcb, And thv^^ in only a moderate range of dimenskms 
oa a Kuigle madiiAc ot a given siae. The prindpal b^vd-gear 
cutting madiines using forms or formen, are the Greenwood & 
Batlev, Le Progrte Industriel, the Bouhey (cuts hdbal teeth), 
the (Jeriikon, whkh bdudes two types, the single and double 
cutting tools, the Gleason and the Rbe. Generating madiinea 
tndude the Bilgrara (the oMest). the Robey-Smith, the MonnereC, 
the Warren, the Beab and the Dubosc. 

Fio. 49.— Gear Cutting. 

if, Rot^ milling cutter pro* P, Action of 
ducing tooth space. 

B, Planer tool operating on tooth 


C, Planer form-tod finishing 

tooth space. 


planing teeth. 
£, Shape of" Felbwi " cutter, 
f, Hobbing cutter. 
G, Taperea hob beginning 

H, Ditto finishing. 

As the difficulties of cutting bevel-wheels with rotary cutters, 
consequent on change of ejection of the teeth, do not occur in spur- 
gears, there are no examples of form machines for spur-wheel 
cutting, and only one |;enerating pbning type of machine, the 
Fdlows, whbh produces mvolute teeth by a hardened steel<utting 
piiuon, which shapes wheeb having any number of teeth of the 
same pitch, the cutter and blank being partly rotated between each 
cut as they roll when in en^gement. 

The worm-geare appropnate a different group of machines, the 
demands on which have become more exacting since the growth 
of electric driving has brought these geara into a pc^tion of greater 
importance than they ever opcupied bdore. With thb growth 
the demand for nothing less than perfect geara has devebped. 
A perfect gear b one in which the teeth 01 the worm- whed are 
envelopes 01 the worm or screw, and thb form can only be produced 
in practbe in one way— bv using a cutter that b practically a 
serrated worm (a hob), which cuts its way into the wheel just as 
an actual worm might be supposed to mould the teeth of a whed 
made of a plastic substance. To accomplish this the rebtlve move- 
ments of tne hob and the wheel bbnk are arran^ied to be precisely 
those of the working worm and whed. Very tew such machines 
are made. A practicd compromise b effected by caudng the he ' 


both to drive and cut the blank in an ocdinaiy machine: When 
worms are not produced by these methods the envelope cannot be 
obtained, but each tooth space is cut by an involute milling cutter 
set at the angle of thread m a universal machine, or else in one of 
the general gear<utting machines used for spur, bevel and worm 
gears, and only capable of yielding really accurate results in the 
case of spur-wheels. 

The previous remarks relate only to the sectional forms of the 
teeth. But their pitch or distance from centre to centre requires 
dividing mechanism. ,This^ includes a main dividing or worm- 
wheel, a worm in conjunction with change gears, and a division 
(>late for setting and locking the mechanism. The plate may have 
our divisions only to receive the locking lever or it may be drilled 
with a large number of holes in circles for an index peg. The 
first b adopted in the regular gear-cutters, the second on the 
universal milling machines which are used also for gear<utting. 
In the largest number of niachines this pitching has to be done by 
an attendant as often as one tooth is completed. But in a good 
number of recent machines the pitching is effected by the move- 
ments of the machine itself without human intervention. With 
spur-wheels the cutting proceeds until the wheel u complete, when 
the machine is often made to ring a bell to call attention to the 
fact. But in bevel-wheels onlv one ride of the teeth all the way 
round can be done; the attendant must then effect the necessary 
settings for the other ride, after which the pitchings are automatic 

As a general rule only one tooth b being operated on at one time. 
But economy b studied in spur-gears by settins several similar 
wheeb in line on a mandrel and cutting through a ringte tooth 
of the series at one traverse of the tooL In toothed rscks the 
same device b adopted. Again, there are cases in which cutters 
are made to operate simultaneously on two. three or more adjacent 

Recently a generating machine of novel derien has been manu- 
factured, the spur-wh^ bobbing machine. In appearance the 
hob resembles that employed for cutting worm-gears, but it also 
generates the teeth of spur and spiral gears. The hob b a worm 
cut to form teeth, backied off ana hardened. The section of the 
worm thread b that of a rack. Though it will cut worm-wheeb, 
spiral-wheeb or spur-wheeb equally correctly, the method of pre- 
senution varies. When cutting worm-wheels it b fed inwards per- 
pendicuUriy to the blank : when cutdng spirab it b set at a suitable < 
angle and fed across the face of the blank. The ansle of the worm 
thread in the hob being about a\*. it has to be set by that amount 
out of parallel with the plane of the gear to be cut. It b then fed 
down the face of the wheel blank, which b rotated so as to syn- 
chronize with the rotation of the worm. This b effected through 
diange gears, which are altered for wheeb having different numboa 
of teeth. The advantage is that of the hob over single cutters: 
one hob serves for all wheeb of the same pitch, and each wheel 
b cut absolutely correct. While uring a set of ringle cutten many 
Wb^eb must have their teeth only appnudnutely correct. 


The pracrioe of finishing metallic surfaces by grinding, though 
very old, b nevertheless with regard to its rivalry with the work 
of the ordinary machine tools a devebpment of the last part of the 
19th century. From being a non-precision method, gnnding has 
become the most perfect device for producing accurate results 
measured precisely within thousandths of an inch, k would be 
rather difficult to mention any class of machine-shop work which 
b not now done by the grinding wheel. The most recent develop- 
ments are ninding out engine cylinden and grinding the lipa of 
twbt drilb By automatic movements, the drills rotating constantly. 

There are five very broad diviuons under which grinding machines 
may be classified, but the individual, well-defined groups or types 
might number a hundred. The main divirions are: (i) Machines 
for dealing with plane surfaces; (a) machines for plain cylindrical 
work, external and internal; (3) the universab, which embody 
movements rendering them capable of ansular setung; U) the 
tool grinders: and (5) the specialised machines. Most of these 
might be agun classed under two heads, the non-precbion and the 
precision types. The difference between these two classes b that 
the first does not embody provirion for measuring the amount of 
material removed, while the second does. Thb distinction b a 
most important one. 

The underlying resemblances and the differences in the main 
designs of the groups of machines just now noted wilt be better 
understood if the essential conditions . of grinding as a correc- 
rive process are grasped. The cardinal point b that accurate 
results are produced by wheeb that are themselves being abraded 
consuntly. That b not the case in steel cutting toob, or at least 
in but an infinitesimal degree. A steel tool will retain its edge for 
several hours (often for days) without the need for regrinding. 
but the particles of abrarive in an emery or other grinding wheel 
are being incessantly torn out and removed. A wheel in traverring 
a}on^ a shaft say of t ft. in length is smaller in dbmeter at the 
termwation than at the beginning of the traverse, and therefore 
the tthaft must be theoretically larger at one end than the other. 
Shafts^ nevertheless, are ground parallel. The explanation is, and 


it lies at the basb of emery grindiitt* that the feed or amount 
removed at a ringle traverse is extreai«y minute, say a thousandth 
or half a thousandth of an inch. Tne minuteness of the feed 
receives compensation in the repetition and rapidity of the traverse. 
The wear 01 the wheel b reduced to a minimum and true work 
b Moduoed. 

From thb fact of the wear of grinding wheeb two important 
results follow. One b that a traverse or lateral movement must 
always take place between the wheel and the piece of work being 
ground. This b necessary in order to prevent a mutual grooving 
action between the wheel and work. The other is that it b essential 
to provide a Urge range in quality of wheels, graded according to 
coarseness and fineness, of hardness and softness of emery to suit 
all the different metab and alloys. Actually about sixty grades 
are manufactured, but about a dozen will generally cover average 
shop practice. With such a choice of wheeb the softest brass as 
well as the hardest tempered steel or case-hardened gbss-Uke 
surfaces that could not ptMwbly be cut in bthe or planer, can be 
ground with extreme accuracy. 

Fic. 50. — ^Univenal Grindine Machine, 7 in. centres; 3 ft. 6 ia. 
between centres., (H. W. Ward & Co., Ltd., Birmingham ■> 

/, Headstock for carrying and 
driving work, used for 
chuck work or dead centre 
work ; the base b graduated 
into degrees. 
o. Dogs, which regulate auto- 
fTfff •'• — "— N. An internal 
p.r. , . .not shown, 

_. „ IS hitk-ii tr> n^htel head. 

F, Wheel headstock swivelling L, Counrcrsh^rt puUey driving to 

i4, Base or body, with 

water tray round top edge, 
and interior fitted as cup- 
boards, with shelves and 

B, Slidine table. 

C, Swivdf table. 

D, Grinding whed. 
£, Wheel guard. 

wheel ffulky* 
Mt Pulley driving to cones. 
Nt PiiUey driving to work bead- 

«tock pulley- 
0, BeTt frtim ILnt ihaft. 

in a horizontal plane, and 

having the base graduated 

into degrees for angular 

(?, Slide carrying headstock. v, crcit ^rurti ^m^ «u«ii. 

H, Hand-wheel for traversing P, Wati^r p[p<^ tram pump. 

table. Q, Wat^r guirdi above table. 

Pbne surfacing machines in many cases resemble in general 
outlines the well-known pUning machine and the vertical oorine 
mill. The wheels traverse across the work, and they are fed 
vertically to precise fractional dimensions. They fill a large place 
in finiriiing plane surfaces, broad and' narrow alike, and have be- 
come rivals to the planing and milling machines doing a similar 
dass of work. For hardened surfaces they have no rival. 

Cylindrical grinders include many subdivirions to embrace 
external and internal surfaces, either parallel or tapered, small or 





In tiwir HtiJhCTt dcvdopnuit tbcjr iiilfil wMt siB tcnoMo 
enal " (unctions (fig. 50), that is, they are capable of grindine 
both eztemal and internal crylindert, plane faces, tapers, DOth m 
knr and hwh ang^, and the teeth of various kinds of tools and 
cutteriL These machines occur in two broad types. In one the 
axis of tike revolving wheel is traversed past the work, which 
revolves bqt is not traversed. In the otber the reverse occurs, 
the work traversing and the axis of the wheel with its bearings 
mnaining stationary. Equally satisfactory resulu are obtained 
by each. 

In all rstrmal cylindrical grinding, when the work can be rotated, 
the ^icce being ground rotates in an opposite directwn to the 

roution of the wheel (I 
iatemally the 

51, A). In all snuU pieces ground 
is adopted (fig. 51, B). Incidentally, 

Fig. 51. 

A, Eacteraal cylindrical grinding. B, Internal ditto. C, External 
grinding when the work is fixed. X>, Internal ditto. 

nentkm should be made of the fineness of the fitting required and 
attained in the oonstructkm of the spindles which carry the wheels 
for internal grinding. The perfection of fitting and cl the means 
of adjostment for diminating the effects of wear in the ordinary 
spindles for external and internal grinding is remarkable. The 
spindles for internal work have to revolve at rates ranging from about 
6000 to 30,000 times in a minute, vet run so truly that the holes 
ground do not depart from accuracy by more than say tAi to ts In 
of an inch. Yet so long as the work can be revolved no speoal 
cflmpttcatkm of medianism is required to ensure cood results. 
The revolution of the wheel and the work is mutually helpful. The 
real difBcalties arise when the work, on account of iu mass or awk- 
nrdaeas of shape, cannot be revolved. The principle embodied 
in machirtea designed to deal satisfactorily with such cases, though 
mach diversified ra detail, is the application of the planet device to 
the ninding wfaeela. That is, the wheel spindle rotating at a high 
speed. 6000 or 7000 revolutknis per minute, is simultaneously 
carried nmnd in a circular path, so that iU axis makes about as 
or y> ffevohitkms per minute (fig. 51, C and D). The diameter of 
the path ia capable of adjustment with minute jprectsk>n within 
vide Umita to suit bores of different diameters. The periphery of 
the grinding wheel which lies farthest from its axb of revolution 
sweeps round in a path the diameter of which equals that of the 
bore to be ground. These machines are now used largely for 
friadtng oat the cylinders of gas and petrol enjrines, valve seatinn, 
the bashed holes of coupling rods, and simflar classes of work. 
Many of them have their spindles set horizontally, othere vertically. 
Aued to theK are a relatively small but important group of 
-.^h.-— oaed for grinding the slot links of the slide-valve gear 
of locooMtive and other engines. The sk>t is mounted on a pivoted 
bar adjoaled to the aame radius as the sk>t to be ground, and^the 
Alt b BOfved idativdy to the wheel, so producing the required 

In anodwr direction much development has Uken place in the 
pTKtace of gHndtng. The increasing uae of the milling cutter has 

r. Grindinc ai^ 
Grinding face < 

A, Gria£ag front odges of 
edges of nulling cotter; a, a, 
totmtd taSL 

been the occasion for the growth and high apecialiatton of the cutter 
grinding machines. It is essential to the efficiency of such cutters 
that rwiodinf shall be done without drawing the temper, and this 
can only be effected by the use of an abrasive. In the early days 
of their use the temper had to be drawn to permit of filing and 
rehardeaing effected with ita inevitable distortion. 

Cotter griiKling machines must poiseis universality of movements 
to deal wfth the numerous shapes m which milling cutters are made : 
hence they often resemble in general outlines the universal grinding 
■achines. But as a rule they are buih on li|;hter models, and with 
a smaller raqge of joovnnrnta, became the dunepcions of cutters are 

generally much tnaOer than those of thr ordinary mn of engineenT 
work which has to be ground. Frequently a sin^ pilhr or sundard 
sufl&ces to carry the mechanism. In an ordinary universal to(4 
grinder all the teeth of any form of cutter can be ground predaely 
alike (fig. 53) excepting those having irregular prohled outUnes, for 
which a special machine, or an extra attachment to an ordinary 
machine, is necessary. But little of this is done, because in sucn 
cases, and in many others, the faces of the teeth are ground instead 
of the ed^ This idea, due to the firm of Brown & Sharpe. may 
seem a tnfle. but nevertheless to it the credit is largely due for the 
economies 01 cutter grinding. The prindfrfe b that in the " formed 
cutter," as it is termed, the profiles of the teeth are not struck from 
the axb of revolution, but from another centre (fig. ao) ; grinding 
the tooth faces, therefore, has no effect on the shapes of the profiles, 
but only lessens the tooth thicknesses. Designed originally for 
the cutters for the teeth of gear-wheels, it has long been applied 
to profiles which involve combinations of curves. The pitching 
of the teeth b effected by a strip of metal, or tooth rest a (fig. 52), 
on which each successive tooth rests and b coerced during the 
grinding. If teeth are of special form the traverse movement of 
a apiral tooth along the rest ensures the reauired movement. 

Besides the cutter grinders used for milling cutters, reamers and 
screwing; Upa, there are two other groups oltool grinders, one for 
twist drills onlv and the other for the single-edged tools used in 
lathe, planer, shaper and other machines. Both these in their best 
forms are of recent development. The machines used for grinding 
twist drills embody numerous dengns. Hand ^nding is practically 
abandoned, the reason being that a very mmute departure from 
^mmetry on the two cutting lips of the drill resulu inevitably in 
the production of inaccurate hdes. It b essential that the two 
lips oe alike in regard to length, an^ and clearance, and these are 
embodied in the mechanism of the grinding machines. But formerly 
in all these the drill holder had to be moved by hand around its 
pivot, and one lip ground at a time There are now some very 
beautiful machines of (German manufacture in which the necessary 
movements are all automatk, derived from the continuous rotation 
of a belt pulley The drill rotates constantly, and small amounts 
are ground off each lip in turn until the grinding b finished. The 
other group for grinding^ single-edged toob b a very small one. 
The correct angles for grinding are embodied in the setting of the 
machine, with the great advantaee that any number of similar toob 
can be ground all alike without skilled attendance. 

Lying outside these broad types of machines there is a Ur^ and 
growing number designed for special service. The knife-gnnding 
group lor sharpening the pbner knives used in wood-working 
machinery b a larse one. Another b that for gulleting or deepening 
the teeth of circular saws as they wear. Another b designed for 
grinding the cups and cones for the ball races of cycle wheels, and 
another for grinding the hardened steel balb employed in ball 


FiC. S3.— Typkal Grinding Wheels. 

A, Common dbk held on spindle with wmahen and nuts. 

B, Thin disk. 

C, Flanged disk for grinding to shoulders. 

D, Bevelled disk for cutter grinding. 

£, Ft Cupped and dished wheeb for cutter grinding. 

C, Cup wheel for grinding on face a ; diameter remains constant. 

Emery grinding b dependent for much of iu success on a plentiful 
supply of water. Dry grinding, which was the original practke, 
b nardly employed now. The eariy difficulties of wet erinding were 
due to the want of a cementiiq; material which would not soften 
under the action of water. Now wheels will run constantly without 
damage by water, and they are so porous that water will filter through 
them. Improvements in the manufacture of wheels, and the 
increased use of water, have concurred to render possible heavier 
and more rapid grinding without risk of distortion due to heating 
effects. In the oest modem machines the provisions for water 
supply are a study in themselves, including a centrifugal pump, a 
tank, jointed piping, spraying tube, guards to protect the bearings 
and slides from damage, and trays to receive the waste water and 
conduct it back to the unk. 

There are two points of view from which the modem practice 
of grinding b now regarded— one as a oonective, the other as a 




formative proccM. The fint Is the older «nd is still by far the most 
important. The second is a later ideal towards which design and 
practice have been extending. As yet 
grinding cannot compete with the work 
of the smgle-edged toob and milling cut- 
ters when large quantities of matetial 
have to be removed. Just as some 
leading firms have been designing 
atiffer machines having fuller lubri- 
cation with a view to increase the duty 
of grinding wheels, the advent of the 
high-speea steds has given a new lease 
of life to the single-ec^ed cutting tools. 
The.rivalry now lies not with the tools 
of carbon temper steel, but with high- 
speed varieties. But as a corrective 
process grinding never occupied so im- 
portant a position as it does to-day, 
and its utlhty continues to extend. 

The commoner forms in which grind- 
ing wheeb are made are shown in n^. 53. 
These are varied largely in dimensions, 
from tiny cylindricu rollers a fraction 
of an inch m diameter foe hole grind- 
ing, to big ^eeb of 3 ft. or more 
in diameter. Safety mountings, two 
examples of which are shown in fig. 54, 
embody means of retaining the brokoi 
pieces of a wheel in case it oursts. 

Sand-blasi.— The well-known erosive 
action of sand Wriien driven a^inst 
rocks and stones by the wind is utilised 

action is ytsy gentle, and may be modified 
by varying the class of sand and its velocity. 
Other materials, such as emery, chilted iron 
globules, ftc, are employed for certain cUsses 
of work. In some Instances the powder is 
used dry, in others it is mixed with water, 
being then in the condition of fluid mud. The 
plant includes an air-oompressing engine, an 

air reservdr and the blast noszle through which the air passes and 
DFopeb the sand in the form of a jet. The pressures range from 
B lb up to about 60 lb per sq. in., depending on the class of work 
which IS done. 

The peculiar advantage of the sandblast lies in its adaptability to 
the working of irregular surfaces, which could not be touoied by any 
other class of grinding. The blast penetrates hollows and recesses. 
and acts over an entire surface. There are many dasaes oi 
operation done with the sand-blast, including deanmg, froatiiw. 
ornamentation, engraving and sharpening. In engineers works 
a large amount of deaning is effected upon castings, foiginga. sheets 


sbaipraed by dbectingVstr^ of ssnd" and wAter against their 
backs, with the result that the burr thrown up by the chisel when 
cutting M obliterated, and a strong form of tooth b produced. Worn 
files may abo be sharpened up to equal new ones by sand-blasting 
them. Frosting glass is another useful application of the sand-blast, 
and by attsuiiittg suitable patterns or designs to the surface the sand 
may be caused to work ornamental figurings. It b a peculiar circum- 
stance that the sand has little effect upon soft and yielding substances 
in comparison with the abrasbn it prckluces on hard surfaces, so 
that the pattern will remain undamaged, while the glass or other 
object beneath b froited where the sand reaches it, through the 
openings. Not only can designs be worked on glass, or cut in stone, 
but perforations may be made in glass, Ac, by the oontmued action 
of the sand, without any risk oifracture occurring. Much sand- 
blasting b performed inside closed chambera, havmg panes through 
whkh the workman watches the progress of the operation. But 
when the blast must be used in the opai, protection u necessary and 
b afforded to the operator by a special hdmet, which keeps out the 
flying dust and gives a supply of pure air through a tube m a 
similar fashxMi to the diver's hdmet. 

VII.— Sawing Machines 
Metal-sawing machines are employed extensivdy In enginecrinff 
works for cutting off bars, shafts, raHs, girders and nsers on sted 
castings, and for getting out curved pieces which would be dimcult 
and expensive to 8k)t.There are three cbsses of these saws, circular, 
band and reciprocating. The first named are used for straight- 
forward work, operating at 
right or other angles, the 
second for stia^ht cuts and 
^so for curves whidi can- 
not be treated with drcubr 
saws, and the third for small 
pieces. Thedrcubrsawscm- 
body a stiff spindle, carrying 
the saw disk and driven by 
gearing. Thb spindle may 
be mounted in a sliding 
to carry it past the 

jld on a fixed table, 

or the spindle may be sta- 
tionary and the work be 
moved along past the saw. 
The method of feeding should 
be sensitive, so that it will 
'' and prevent damage 

il. Saw blade. 

Bt Spindle. 

C, ShdinjK spindk carriaffe. 

Z>, Driving; pulleys. 

B, First puuoo, connecting tliitMigh train of gears to whedF,driving^ 

MUined shaft G. 
ff. Wheel driven from slidins pinion on (7. 
A Bevet-ffears, oonimunk:atInff the motion to qmuUe B. 
f. Screw 101' feeding carriage C along. 

IPlo, 55.r-Cokl-sawing Machine. (Isaac Hill ft Son, Derby.) 

L, Three-step cone on shaft G. bdted to M, connected by bevd-gean 
N and worm-gear 0, to the screw^. 

P, Clutt^ for throwing in to drive K, 

^ " shaft of L direct to /C, also through dutch P. 

Gean connecting 


S, Tappet rod, having dogs st 

T, Work-Uble, with damp to hold objects. 
Ut H-Girder being sawn 00. 

Handle for operating clutch P, which thus rives slow feed when 
clutch b in mesh with 0, and quick return when engaring with P. 
Tappet rod, having dogs struck by carriage to stop feedinf. 



to the teeth, diould undue stress come upon the saw. This is usually 
effected by the use <A weights or springs, which «lbw a certain free- 
dom or Latitude to the driving gears. The woric is held by screw 
damps, V-blocks being required in the case of circular objects. A 
oumbcr of pieces, such as shafts, rails or girders, can be fastened down 
dose tof^etner in a pile and cut through in one opetation. 

There is a very useful class of drcuUr saw, the flush-side (6g. m). 
that b valuable lor. cutting close up to a surface. The disk is bolted 
to a flang^ oo the end of tne spindle with countersunk bolts, so that 
the face ts auite flat. Another dass of saw used for dealing with 
girders and bars is carried in bearings upon a pivoted arm, which 
u jwlled downwards by a wdght to pve the feed. The work is 
bolted to a table below the saw. Ample lubrication, by oil or soapy 
water, b essential in cutting wrought iron and steel; it b pumped 
on the blade, keeping it cooland washing away the cuttings. 

Band-saw machines resemble in outline the familiar types employed 
for sawing wood, but they are necessarily stronger and stifTer, and 
the savs run at a much lower speed. Tne tables, moreover, differ 
io po ss es si ng compound slides for moving the work and in the provi- 
sion of a aenes of slots on the top table, whereby the object to be sawn 
ts secured with bolu and damps. The tables are moved automatic- 
ally or by hand. The rate o(^ cutting must be varied according to 
the thickness of metaL Lubrication b effected by running the kmer 
saw pullev in a bath of oil or soapy water, which b catried up, so 
keeping the blade oool and " casing " the cut. 

The lecipiocating class of saw has until recently been con6ncd to 
small types for workshop use, termed hack saws, which have a 
small blade ran^ng from i a to 1 8 in. long. Thb is strained between 
a couple of beanngs in a frame which b reciprocated above the work 
clamped in a vice. An arrangement of weights feeds the saw 
downwards. The larger hack saws cut off bars and girders up 
to 12 in. across, and in some there b a proviuon introduced for giving 
intermittent rotation to the bar, thus presenting fresh faces to 
the saw. The hack saw b of great utility for comparatively l^ht 
wcrk, and, as the smallest blades are cheap enough to be thrown away 
when worn out, there b no trouble and expense connected with their 
sharpening, as in the circular and band saws. An adaptation of the 
re d procatmg saw b that of the jig type, which has a small bUde 
set vcrticalnr and passing up through a table on which the work is 
hid. It b handy lor cutting out dies and various curved outlines, 
B the aaoM manner that fret-sawing in wood b done. 


These have much in common as regards thdr mode of operation. 
They are actuated dther by belt and spur gearing, bjr steam-engine, 
by metric motor, or hydraulically. Tne first named b only suitable 
where arrangements can be made for driving from a Ime shaft. 
Io view of the great convenience of the other methods of driving, 
tbcy are coming into |peater use, especblly for ship-yards and other 
works where shafting is undesirable or inconvenient. 

For boiler makers and platers* use the function of punching, and 
•hearing are usually combmed in one machine, the rams bdng placed 
at opposite ends and actuated from the same source of power. The 
lut naft in the train of gearing b set to bring its endfs within the 
boxes containing the rams, and eccentrics on the shaft are moved 
wiihin die bk)dcs fitted to the rams, so that as the shaft revolves it 
s the rams to move up and down and operate the shear blade and 

Fig. 57. — ^Steam Hammer, small Overhanging Type. 
(B. A S. Massey, Manchester). 

A, Standard. B, Base-plate. 

C, Anvil block (independent of standards). 

D, Tup or hammer head. 

E, E, Talleu, or forging blocks, attached to anvil and tup. 

F, Steam cylinder. 

C, Pbton, solid trith pbton rod H. 

y. Piston valve, regulating period of admission of steam, operated 

by lumd by lever K or lever N. 
L, Stop or throttle valve for controlling admission of steam to 

valve chest, operated by hand lever M. 
N, Lever in contact with roller on tup D, which moves the valve 

J automatically as the tup rises and falls. 
0» Lever for pre^djusting the range of movement of N and 7, 
according to its setting in the notches of the quadrant from 

a to 6. 
P, Steam supply pipe from boiler. Q, Exhaust steam pipe. 

the punch attached to the bottom 
end. Another class of machines is 
worked by means of massive levers, 
pivoted in the framing, and actuated 
by cams on the drivmg shaft which 
cause the levers to rock and move 
the punches or shears up and down 
by the opposite ends. The punch 
sTides are constructed to " dwdl " 
for a short period at the top of the 
stroke at each revolution, thus giving 
the attendant time to place and ad- 
just the plate accurately beneath the 
punch. The same effect b obtained 
in the eccentric types of machines 

mentioned above, oy a disengaging 
motion.which b thrown in by touching 
a lever, thus stopping the punch untu 

Fig. 56. — Hydraulic Punchii^ and Shearing Machine. (Musgrave Brothers, Leeds.) 
A, Frame. £, Punch. /, JC, Main and return rams for 

B Shear blades, set angularly. FAG, Main and return rams ditto. 

C Ram for operating blade. for punch. L, AT. N, Attendant's control* 

D, SoaaOram tor returning ditto. H, Angle shear. ling handles. 

the operator b ready for its descent. 
The more complete machines have an 
angle shear situated centrally, with 
V-bUdes for severing angle iron. The 
largest forms of shears, for massive 
plates, usually have the blade redpro- 
cated by crank or eccentrics on the 
driving shaft, coupled by connecting- 
rods to the slide. 

Hydraulic punching and shearing 
machines are used largely on account 
of their convenience, since they dis- 
pense with all belts, engines or motore 
m the vicinity.and givca very powerful 

38 TOOL 

stroke. The hydraulic cylinder is generally direct-connected to 
the slides, and the operator turns on the pressure water by a lever. 
The machine shown in fig. 56 is a very complete example of the 
hydraulic type, combining punching and shearing with ang!e<utting. 
Circular shears are used for the thinner plates and for tdieet-mctal 
work; they embody two circular blades placed with their axes 
parallel, and the sharp bevelled ed^es nearly in contact. The blades 
Being rotated sever the plate as it is fed between them. Either 
straight or circular cuts may be made; true circles or disks are pro- 
duct by mounting the plate on a fixed stud and rotating it through 
a complete revolution past the cutters. 

IX.— Hammers and Presses 
The growth in the use of hammers actuated by steam and com- 
pressed air, and of presses worked by water power, has been remark- 
able. The precursors of the power hammers were the helve and 
the Oliver; the first named was operated by gravity, being lifted 
by a circle of cams, while the second was lifted bv a spring pole 
overhead and pulled down by the foot of the workman, actine on 
a lever — the hammer shaft. The first was used by the ironworkers 
and the second by the smiths, until displaced by the Nasmyth hammer 
and its extensive progeny. Even now the old helve and Oliver 
survive in some unprogressive shops. 

Steam Hammers.— The original hammer as invented by James 
Nasmyth was single acting, operating simply by gravity, the function 
of the steam being to lift the hammer for each succeeding fall. The 
first improvement was made by Rigby, who took the waste steam 
exhausted from the lower side of the piston to the upper side and 
so imparted some slight pressure in the descent. It was a stage 
between the early and the present hammers. In these, high-pressure 
steam is admitted above the piston to impart a more powerful blow, 
compounded of vetocityXmass, than is obuinable by gravity: 
hence they are termed double-acting hammers (fie. 57}. The 
principal difficulties which have to be surmounted in their construc- 
tion are those due to the severe concussion of the blows, which 
very sensibly shake the ground over an area of many yards. Fram- 
ings are made very rigid, and in the larger hammers double, enclosing 
the hammer head between them. The foundations are by far the 
heaviest used in any machine tools. Deep piling is often resorted 
to. supporting crossing timber balks; or concrete is laid in mass on 
which the iron anvil block is bedded. This block weighs anywhere 
between 100 and 1000 tons. The piston and its rod and the 
hammer head are generally a solid steel forging, for the piston rod 
4s a weak element and cottered or screwed fittings are not trust- 
worthy. Piston valves are gener- 
ally used in preference to ordinary 
D-valves, combining simplicity 
of fitting with good balance. 
The periods of steam admission 
are under the control of the 
attendant, so that the length of 
stroke and the force of the blow 
are instantly responsive to his 
manipulation of the operating 
lever. Many hammcra can be 
set to run automatically for any 
given length of stroke. 

Pneumatic Hammers. — ^A suc- 
cessful type of hammer for the 
ordinary operations of the smithy 
is that which is actuated by com- 
pressed air. Though designs 
vary the principle is the ume, 
namely, air compressed in a 
controlling cylinder (fig. 58), and 
brought mto an operating or 
hammer cylinder above the piston. 
Cu8hioning,or releascof the air be- 
low the piston, is under control, as 
< is the pressure of the air above it. 
Drop Hammers. — The require- 
ments of forged work have, be- 
^ ^ .... sides the power hammers ope- 

Fic. 58.— Pneumatic Forging ^tcd by a positive down stroke. 

(W. & J. Player. Birmingham.) 

A, Standards. 

B, Base-plate. 

C, Anvil block. 

D, Tup. 
£. £, Pallets. 

been the cause of the develop- 
ment of an equally large group 
which are gravity hammers only 
— the drop hammers. They are 
put into operation by a belt or 
belts, but the funaion of the 
belt is simply to lift the hammer 

C» liammer cylinder, the piston to the height desired, at which 
rod of which is attached point it is released and falls. 
♦ to D. The place of the drop hammer 

H, Air compressing cylinder. is in the lighter class of smith's 

H, Belt pulleys which reciprocate work, as that of the steam 
by means of the crank 0» hammer lies in the heavier, but 
the piston in H. there is much overlapping, since 

R, Handle controlling the valve small steam hammers are rivals 
between if and C7. to the others in light forging. 


But, speaking senerally, the largest volume of repetitive die forging 
or stamping oT light articles is done under drop hammers, ihe 
small arms factories and the regular stamping shops scarcely use 

any other type. They may be roughly divided into three great 

f roups; the belt, the board and the latest form — the Brett Ufter. 
n each the hammer head or tup is lifted to any height within the 

range of lift, the height being controlled by the attendant at each 
blow. In most machines setting can be done at any constant 
height and the blows delivered automatically. Control is effected 
by hand or foot or both. Drop hammers generally have the 
advantage of working with greater rapidity than steam hammers. 
The original drop hammers, which are believed to have originated 
with the locksmiths of Birmingham and district, consisted of a 
hammer head attached to a rope, one end of which ran up over 
a loose pulley suspended in the roof, and the other was pulled by a 
man or two men, so lifting the hammer, whkh was then alk>wed to 
drop. The principle is embodied in many belt hammers to-day, 
but the pulley is driven consuntly by shafting, and when the 
attendant pulls at the free end of the belt the friction of the pulley 
draws the belt over and lifts the hammer until the attendant lets 
it go. The weight lifted is greater than in the old type, but the 
lalx>ur is nevertheless very severe, and the blows are not rapid 
enough for quick forging. A far better machine is the board hammer. 
In this (fig. 59) the place of the belt is taken by an ordinary strip 
of board vt-nich passes between two rollers at the top of the hammer, 
which rollcre are belt driven. • The rollers are fitted on eccentric 

Fig. 59.— Drop Hammer— board type. (B. & S. Massey, 

A, A, Standards. 

B, Anvil, or baseblock. 

C, Tup. 

D, Board, fitting in slot in tup. 

E, P, Rollere gripping and lifting board. 

G, H, Pulleys actuating rollers tlirough eccentrics /, K. 

L, Rod by which the amount of lift is regulated. 

a. Dog and lever adjustable on L, which strikes the edge b of the 

tup, releasing eccentrics and roller and allowing tup to fall. 
c. Catch on which tup rests previous to release, fitted into cither 

one of the row of holes beneath, to suit various heights of drop. 
J/, Mechanism struck by the edge d of the tup. which either keeps 

the roller P clear of the board D, allowing the tup to fall, or 

brings the rollers £ and P into conua, and lifts the board 

and tup. 
A^, Hand-lever for operating hammer. 
O, Foot-lever for ditto, connected by chain e. 
f. Spring for lifting levers. 
P, Rod with nuts g, to compensate for wear on the rollers by the 

adjustment of roller £. 


pixks, ao that the movement of levers causes them to ^p the board 
lor the lift, or rdease it for the fall, these le\-ere being under the 
control of the attendant. They can alio be set to operate automically 
for any height of lift. 

These types are all subject to much cf)ncussion and vibration, 
because the machines are self-contained: anvil, standards and heads 
being rigidly bolted together, the concussion of every blow is trans- 
mitted through the entire mechanism. The Brett hammers (fig. 60) 
are designed to lessen this, in some cases by making the anvil distinct 
from the superstructure, and in all by connecting the lifting ropes 
to the ends of long levers which act something like elastic si>rings, 
absorbing vibration. The driving mechanism is also original, 
comprisinK a cylinder with a wing piston, which is rotated by steam 
pressure through an arc of a circle only, sufficiently to operate the 
lifting levers. Another advantage is that the lifter cylinder need 
K» be immediately over the hammer, but may be situated elsewhere. 
The hammer can be operated by hand directly for each stroke, or 
be set to work automatically. 









E. Lifter cyKnder. 



Valve casing. 







Rock abaft. 


Fic. 60.— 5 cwt. Belt Drop Hammer with Brett's Lifter. 
(Brett's Patent Lifter Co., Ltd., Coventry.) 

Buffer blocks which arrest 
motion of lever c. 

Lever for automatic regula- 
tion of valve. 

Lever for regulating amount 
of opening of valve by hand. 
Kt Foot lever Tor holding tup in 
either of the stops L, 

Spring for foot lever. 

Sprini Hammers are a rather smaller group than the others. 
In these a belt-driven pulley actuates the tup through the medium 
of elastic leaf springs. The leneth of stroke is aojustable across 
ti« face of a slotted disk on the driving shaft. 

Forpmg Machines. — ^The Ryder forging machine is fitted with 
km or five pairs of swage tools, the lower halves being fixed and 
the upper ones driven by a rotating eccentric shaft. The operations 
imiute those on the anvil by hand forging, but from 800 to 1200 
bk>ws are delivered in a minute. The swages are arranged in succes- 
Boe. so that an operation is begun at one end and finished at the 
<Kher. the attendant moving the bar rapklly through the successive 
sv^es or dies. 

toting Presses. — ^These are rivals to the hammers, especially 
for bavy lonpngs. from which hammers are being rapidly dis- 
I (flg. 61). It is now well understood that a hammer will not 


effect the consolidation of a massive forging right to the centre as a 
press will. The force of the hammer blow is not transmitted to the 
centre as is that of a press, nor is the 
hammer so useful in work of large 
dimensions but of no great weight. 
In railway and wagon shops the 
presses are used far more frequently 
than the hammers. A great advan- 
tage of the press is tl^t two and 
three rams can be brought into 
operation so that a forging may be 
pressed from above, from below and 
to one side, which is of great value 
in complicated forms and m welding, 
but is not practicable in the hammers. 
Hence the forging presses have be- 
come developed for work of average 
dimensions as well as for the most 
massive. Many are of horizontal type, 
termed bull-dozers. 1 

Power presses for working sheet- 
metal articles include those Tor cut- 
ting out the blanks, termed cutting- 
out or blanking presses, and those 
for cupping or drawing the flat blank 
into shape if desired (fig. 62). The 
lower dies are held upon a bed, and 
the upper in a sliding ram, moved Fig. 61. — Hydraulic Forg- 
up and down by a cam or crank- ing Press. (Fielding & Piatt, 
shaft. A clutch mechanism is fitted, Ltd., Gloucester.) 
by means of which this shaft Is y| j^\y\^ 
connected with or disconnected from g Vertical ram 
the heavy driving-wheel at will to C.' Drawback ram for return, 
give a single stroke or a scries of !„- 5 

strokes to the ram. In the normal p, HoSzontal ram. 
state the ram renuins stationary at £ Controlling valves, 
the top position. The lightest presses * 

are dnven direct by belt on the crank-shaft pulley, but in the heavier 
classes spur-gearing must be interposed between the pulley shaft 
and the nnal shaft. The operation of drawing requires an encircling 
die which presses on the blank as it lies on its die. the cupping 
of the blank being effected by the downward motion of the plunger. 

Sectional Elevation. Front Elevation. 

FiG. 6a.— Power Press. 

A, Main frame. 

B, Bed for attaching dies. 

C, Central slide. 

D, Outer slide. 

£, Belt pulleys on shaft, geared to wheel F thrown in by clutch 
to drive its shaft, which has two crank pins to reciprocate D 
and a cam disk actuating C. 

G Extractor rocked downwards as slide rises to raise lever H and 
work an ejector rod, forcing finished article out of die. 

This is why the machine shown in fig. 62 has an outer slide D, which 
is made to " dwell " with an even pressure, while the middle ram 
is moving down and drawing out the article. Blanking and cupping 
may be done as one continuous operation if the work is shallow. 

inclinable presses are employed for certain classes of work, the 
object being to let the stamped anicles slide down the slope of the 
bed as rapidly as they are produced, instead of having to be removed 
by the operator. Ktuch work can be placed on the dies by hand, 
but for producing large quantities of small articles automatic fccda 


are employed whenever pomble. A good deal of work is produced 
from flat Meet, supplied m the form ot a roll and fed through rollers 
by intermittent movemenu to the dies. Circular turn-Ubles are 
also used, operated by ratchet devices, which turn the tables round 
to bring a ring of pockets, canying the pieces, successively under 
the dies; the attendant keeps the pockeu supplied, but his hands 
do not come nejir the dies. 

X.— Portable Tools 

The growth of portable machine tools is one ot the remarkable 
movemenu of the present day. To some extent they have always 
been used, noubly in the drilling and tapping operations of k)co- 
motive 6re-boxes, but not until recently to any imporunt extent 
in the ordinary fitting and erecting shops. The main reason lay 
in the difficulties due to transmission of power by ropes or shafts. 
The employment of compressed air, water, electricity and flexible 
shafu. by which long distances can be covered, has given new life 
to the portable system, which is destined to occupy a place of even 
greater imporunce than it does at present. The reason for the grow- 
mg desirability of these tools is to be seen in the massive charaaer 
of much engine and machine constructk>n of the present time. 
Although firms that undertake the largest woric can generally arranee 
to tool the individual parts on machines of massive sizes, that only 
meeu a part of the difficulty. Very big work cannot be treated 
like that of small or even medium dimensions, done repetitively: 
that is, it is not practicable to drill and bore and ream and provide 
for the fitting of every piece by the aid of templets and jigs, while 
the work lies on the machine, but a great deal of adjustment and 
mutual fitting has to be accomplished in the course of erection. 
Therein lies tne opportunity for the portable machine. If this is 
not used the alternatives are partial dismantling of the work and 
the transference of certain portions to machines or hand work. 
Aitoihrr rauM^ Im b«f^n the suMtUutiofi of machining for much hand 
Work formerly done on mast^ivc t oust ruot ions. 

The pfindp^l operdiionfi bf whic :h jx^rtible tools are designed are 
the folWinii: Drill ingr Kfrwing, cuttui; the searings for keys, 
ptaning $hoa portions of work, taciTig^i l^^r the attachment of other 
(KKCK i* btiiCKCti and bcairing^ hiirnmrrini operations, as in making 
weldedl joints, oullun^ the edges o[ lx>;rer plates, chipping with 
hammer and chtH^I. nveting^ tnmmiTig nand in foundry moulds, 
pbnifig tSipt' dccki, and tome opvraEion!^ of lesser magnitude. 

Poitdble tooU ate u*ed in various w^iys. The first and roost 
obviout ia to attach thctn dirrctly to the cisting. forging or machine 
which is bcin| built up. Thui a drill inji; macnine will be clamped 
jaKt where it is required to operate. Or if it has to be used on a 
Ui^e plAne surface u a fthip'a. deck, an electrical machine is suitable, 
m which mj luetic attraction ii stt up brt w.jcn the foot of the machine 
and the deck »iif!i<:i«nt to hold it dawn. A key-seating machine 
will be cUmped on the fKift in which a key^roove has to be cut. 
A driilitig machine may be fa attuned to a pipe with a chain embracing 
the pipe- Very m^ny of the fjrilts^, ami ^11 the caulking and chipping 


pneumatic hose. Is armoured with wire to protect it from damage. 
The smallest drills are simply gripped in the operator's hand and 

The tuiptfim ofvirew holn \% Tin[:^ily d<"ne in thb way, a common 
example being the boles for ihc ^tay boli^ in the fire-boxes of steam 

Anoiher Utcr tnethoct which has been introduced and practised 
in a few shops connsts in instalhng a cast-iron floor-pbte of lar^e 
area, planed truly and provided with bolt holes and slots. On this 
a massive casting, forging or piece of woiic undergoing erection will 
be bolted. Then the portable tools — planere, drills, &c., as required — 
will be bolted to the table and brought into operation on the various 
sections of the work, several sometimes operating simultaneously. 
This method is to a certain extent coming into rivalry with the 
abnormal growth of machine tools, the devielopment of which has 
been greatly accelerated by the massive dimensions of productions 
which only became possible by the substitution of steel made by 
the Bessemer and Siemens processes for iron. 

The reciprocating motion necessaiy to effect hammering, chipfMng 
or caulking operations is produced D)r the action of a solid piston, 
sliding in a cylinder (fig. 63) and driven sharply against tne end 
of the tool by the inrush 01 compressed air, Deing then returned 
for another stroke. The strokes range in number up^ to as many 
as aooo per minute in some cases. For heavy rivetine a "bng- 
stroke " nammer is employed, having a kmeer barrel than the 
chipping hammer shown m hg. 63, in order to obtain a greater force 
of blow. The operator grasps the hammer by the handle, with his 
fingen or thumb on the controlling lever, andTas k>nff as this is held 
down the blows continue. The air-supply pipe is flexible, so that 
it does not impede the movements of the workman. The tools at 
the end of the cylinder are simply held in a socket, so that they can 
be changed rapidly. 

Routive motion can be produced either by electric or pneumatic 
motors, and both systems are in wide use. Pneumaric motors are 
very suitable when an air-compres«ng plant is already laid down 
for other tools, while if electricity is used in the works portable tools 
operated by this agent may be empbyed instead of the pneumatic 
ones. In the electric drills (fig. 64) a small motor is fitted within 
the body and connected by spur-gears to the spindle to effect suitable 
speed reduction. A switch provides for stopping and starting the 
motor; the current b brought through • flexible cable which, like 

Fig. 63. — Tierney Pneumatic Chipping Hammer. (The Globe 
Pneumatic Engineering Co., Ltd.) 
i4. Cylinder. 
B, Tool socket, carrying chisel C. 

D, Piston, which strikes the back of C. 

E, Handle, screwed and clamped to A . 

F, Trigger or lever clasped by operator's hand and opening valve G, 

admitting compreMed air through connexion H. up passage J, 
through valve-Dox K, past valve L, and so against end oil D, 
moving it towards C. As soon as the groove in the piston D 
registen with the hole M, air is admitted from a small hole 
(not shown), passes round the groove through hole ii and 
passage A^ to the rear of the valve. This acting on the back of 
the valve throws it forward, thus shutting off the supply to the 
rear of the piston and permitting a small quantity of^air to flow 
to the forward end of the piston for driving it in a backward 
direction. As soon as the air pressure is relieved on the 
back of the valve by the uncovering of exhaust holes (not 
seen) by the piston 2>. the valve is returned to the original 
position, owing to the air constantly presmng on the small area 
of the valve. 

pushed up to the work: larger ones are supported by a pillar and 
arm, against which the thrust is uken, and tne feed given by turning 
a screw at intervals. 

Fig. 64.— Electrically-driven Hand Drill. (Kramos Ltd., Bath.) 

A , Body, cast in aluminium, with handles a, a. 

B, Motor, with revolving armature C, connected by ^r-gears D, 

to the drill spindle £, fitted with ball thrust bttrmgs. ' 
F, Switch, operated by attendant pushing in a plug; tne current 
is brought by flexible wires through the right-hajod handle o. 

Pneumatic drills are usually worked by little motors having 
oscillating cylinders, by whkh tne air and euiaust ports are covered 
and uncovered. They run at a high speed and are geared down 
to the spindle. In some cases two cyundera are usra, but often 
four are fitted to give a powerful and equable turning moment. 
Grinding machines are also built with air motore directly coupled 
to the wheel s|»ndle. the machines being moved about over the work 
by handles. 

Another class of portable tools is driven, not by self-contained 
motors, but from an outside source of power, which is conveyed to 
the tools through flexible shafts built up of a series of spiral springs, 
or through flexible joints which form a connexbn that permiu the 
shaft to bend round comers and accommodate itself to any position 
in which the tool may be placed. The advantage of this is that the 
tool itself is much lightened, since there is no motor, and it can 
therefore be easily handled. Thus a drill simply contains the 
spindle, running in a frame which carries bevel-gears lor transmitting 
the motion of the flexible shaft. Portable grinoen also have nothing 
but the spindle, wheel and frame. 

XI.— Appliancbs 

Appliances are vastly more numerous in a modern shop than in 

the older works, largely on account of the more repetitive character 




'"'^re to eliminate huimn labour. 

-'"*v in the finished pro- 

which the fixing 

I in Die packing 

A iheir higher 

h are operated 

I r. some caaes the 

' graduations on 

-. . which occur in 

<. clampt and bolts 

I ly to enable it to 

. '.tc highest develop- 

ji<s. which ate now 

> increase in number 

rnes more specialixed. 

'c shape, wnich being 

".king the same shape 

r..x;r, and by which the 

: ne without the labour 

-ty. in such a case the 

h on the machine hand, 

• ly. to these lines. Hence 

. may be defined generally 

ic work, or a box m which 

.:ng off is done, but the jig 

• Mtion of the cutting tools. 

ucd in iigs is drilling. Then 

o the drills, so that the holes 

' from those already in the jig. 

1 < or thousands of similar pieces 

MT. holes in jigs are ^nerally 

:i is capable of endunng veiy 

c renewed when worn. This is 

•ss are of an extremely elaborate 

c cost of a jig. though it may run 

:..cre trifle when spreid over some 


\.irious classes of tools for performing 

. the rough log to the finished product. 

, planing and finishing to outlines by 

Aucers and smoothing by sandpaper. 

>t oT tree-felling, which is often effected 

. reciprocating blade, working horizontally 

I steam cylinder. The boiler is separate. 

' -c transported about and set to work over 

:n being conveyed to it by a flexible dpe. 

lu into the saw-mills in the form of logs, 

,'ped off. they are often crosa-cut to reduce 

This operation is effected either by a 

. i ted by a pulley and crank, or by an electric 

. circular saw, travelling on a carriage which 

.-h the log laid in front of it. The next opera- 

\ or breaking-down into smaller portions, b 

■js types, according to the class of work. The 

.ine u the frame-saw, which b still used very 

>«:s a framing within which a saw*gate or saw- 

.;ed up and down by a crank; the frame holds a 

r webs of flat form, stnined up tightly with wedges 

n the top and bottom of the frame, the distance 

• * being capable of variatk>n to suit boards of all 

: ' e log is fed longitudinally to the crang of saws upQu 

1 are of two types. In the roHer-Teed. which is 

Tiparattvely even and straight logs, ribbed rollers 

•(hmd the saws obtain a bite on the top and bottom 

' ind feed it forward by their rotation. In the rack-feed 

.unted bodily upon a long carnage that runs by rollers 

t rails, and the carriage is travelled along by pinions and 

h ^ve a positive feed regardless of the shape of the log. 

ige m the roller-feed machines is only represented by a 

plain trolleys supporting the timber at back and front. 

: IS obtained through a friction wheel of V-shape. with a 

pawl, called the silent feed: the wheel is given a partial 

- at each down stroke of the sawnnte to turn the rollers or 
^ns for carrying forward the log. The division of the timber 

- either into deals or flitches, or planks or boards. In the 
i-ned caee as many as fifty saw-blades are sometimes hekl in 

" the more valuable hardwoods a single blade reciprocating 

. operated horisontally. is used very largely, the machine being 

" e j a board-cutter. The kw' is clamped to a travelling table. 

.ng underneath the saw. which is strained in a frame sliding 

4 c r oss rail that can be adjusted up or down on a couple of up- 

, rts like a planing machine. The saw is worked from a crank and 

" nrtecting-rod. As only one board is sawn at a time the attendant 

IS able to see the figuring of the timber and to avoid waste when bad 

peaces are encountered. 

A nMhiw much roor? rapid in operatioQ if the horii^ntal bfind- 

saw, modelled on the tines'of the above machine, but with a band- 
saw blade running over two pulleys, at a high vpeed, of about 7000 ft. 
per minute. The saws are very thin, so that a minimum of wood is 
wasted in the cut or " kerf,' a very important consideration in 
dealing with costly woods. Vertical band-saws, having one pulley 
above the other so that the blade runs vertically, are very popular 
in America: the^ occupy less floor space than tne horixonul types. 
It is necessary to present the k)g from the side, and it is therefore 
clamped by dogs upon a carriage running on rails, with provision 
for feeding the lo^ laterally to the saw by sliding ways on the carriage. 

The use of cucular saws for breaking-down is confined chiefly 
to squaring up heavy balks, which need only a cut on each ude, or 
for cutting thick slabs. The thickness of the saw entails considerate 
waste of wood, and a large amount of power is required for driving.. 
The machines are termed rack-benches, and comprise a long divided 
table built up of thin plates and travelling past the fixed saw upon 
rollers^ the movement being effected by a rack and pinion. 

Re-sawing machines are those designed for further cuttin^-up 
deals, flitches, planks, Ac., already broken out from the lo^, mto 
boards and other scantlings. The deal and flitch frames are built 
on the model of the frame-saws first described, but with the differ- 
ences that roller feed is always used, because the stuff is smooth and 
easily fed, and that the back of the timber is run acainst fences to 
keep it moving in a straight line. In the double equilibrium frames, 
which are much favoured, there are two sets of saws in separate 
frames connected by rods to opposite crank-shafts, so that as one 
frame is rising the other is going down ; the forces are thus balanced 
and vibratbn is diminished, so that the machines can be speeded 
rather higher. Re-sawing is also done on circular and band saws 
of various types, fitted with fences for guiding the timber and 

controlling the thickn 
The croes<ut saws constitute another Ian 

They are 

The croes<ut saws constitute another large group. They 1 
employed for cutting-off various classes of stuff, after breaking-do' 
or re-sawina, and are of circular saw type. The pendulum saw is 
a suspended form, comprising a circular saw at the bottom of a hang- 
ing arm, which can be pulled* over by the attendant to draw the 
saw through a piece of wood laid on a bench beneath. Circular 
saws are also mounted in tables or benches and made to part off 
stuff moved laterally upon a sliding-uble. When there is sufficient 
repetition work machines with two or more saws are used to cut 
one or more pieces to accurate length without the necessity for 

The lighter classes of circular and band-saws, employed for sawing 
up comparatively small pieces of timber, embody numerous provisions 
for quickening output. The plain saw benches, with circular saws, 
are tne simplert class, consisting merely of a framed table or bench 
carrying bearings for the saw spindle and a fence on the top to guide 
the wood. A mechanical feed is incorporated in the heavier machines 
to push the timber along. The rope-feed mechanism includes a 
drum driven at varying retes and giving motion to a rope, which is 
connected with a hook to the timber, to dng it along past the saw, 
roller supports on rails taking the weight at each end of the bench. 
Roller-feed saws propel the stuff by the contact of vertical fluted 
rollers placed opposite the fence. Other classes of saws for joinery 
work, oc., are constructed with rising and falling spindles, so that 
the saw may be made to project more or less from the table, this 
provision being necessary in grooving and tonguine with special 
types of saws. The same effect is obuined by making the table 
instead of the spindle rise and fall. 

As it is necessary to use different saws for ripping (with the grain) 
and croes<utting. some machines embody two saws so that work 
can be cut to shape on the same machine. These " dimension saws " 
have two spindln at the opposite ends of a pivoted arm that can 
be turned on a central pin to bring one or the other saw above as 
required. In caaes where, much angular and intricate sawing is 
done universal benches ari empk>ycd. havine in addition to the 
double saws a tilting motion td the table, which in conjunction with 
various special fittings enables the sawyer to produce a large range 
of pieces for any class of constructk>n. 

Band-saws, which have a thin narrow blade, are adapted especi- 
ally for curved sawing and cutting-out work which the circular saw 
cannot manage. The usual design of machine (fig. 65) comprises a stiff 
standard supporting a lower pulley in fixed bearing, and an upper 
one in a sliding bearing, which by means of a weight or spring is 
caused to rise and nuintatn an even tension on the saw blade as it 
is driven by the lower pulley, and runs the upper one. India-rubber 
tires are placed around the pulley rims to prevent damage to the 
saw teeth. The uble, placed between the pulleys, may be angled 
for cutting bevel work. It is necessary, in order to do true work, 
to gukle the saw blade above and below the cut. and it is therefore 
run in guides consisting of flat strips, in combination with anti- 
friction rollere which take the backward thrust of the saw. Fret 
or jig saws are a small class with a vertical reciprocating blade, 
employed chiefly for cutting out Interior portions which necessitate 
threading the saw first through a hole. 

Planing machines, used for truing up the surfaces of wood after 
sawing, depend for their action upon rapidly revolving knives 
fastened to flat-sided cutter blocks. The simplest machines, the 
hand-planers, hfive a cutter cylinder revolving between two flat 




table slides adjustable for height to support the wood while it is 
pushed along over the knives by the hand. A fence guides it in a 
straight line. Exact thicknesstng is done on another type d 
machine, the panel planer or thicknesser. in which the cutter cylinder 
revolves above the uble and the stuff is fed through by rollers abo\-e 

Fig. 65. — Band-sawing Machine with 30 in. pulleys. 
(Thomas White & Sons. Paisley.) 

A, Cast-iron cored frame. 

B, Fast and loose pulleys driving pulley C. 
D, Belt shipper operated by handle £. 

F, Upper saw pulley, with iis shaft carried in swivel bearing. 

C, Screw for raising or lou-ering F to suit saw. 

H, Spring to maintain tvtn tension on saw. by raising £. 

J, Counterbalanced guide bar. hax-ing a Jackson guide K at bottom : 
K has wooden strips embracing tne saw and a ball-bearing 
roller against which the back runs, while J is adjusted up or 
down to bring K as near to the work as convenient. 

L, Table. «-ith slit for saw; it may be canted for bevel sawing, by 
means of hand worm-gear M. 

N, Protective casing to saw. 

0, Guard to prevent saw flying over in case of breakage. 

and below By alterine the height of the table the thickness of 
wood can be vaned Double machines include a cutter cylinder 
above and below the timber, so that the upper and under sides are 
planed simultaneously. A combination of the hand-planer and 
the thicknesser is useful in cases where space or expenditure must 
be limited. 

When large quantities of planed stuff are wanted, such as for 
flooring-boards. Ac. other types of machines are emplovTd.^ The 
four-cutter planers are the most rapid in output, and tne timber 
is pasccd through them at a high rate, ranging up to 150 ft. per 
minute. There is first a revolving cutter cylinder, which roughs 
off the underside of the stuff, whence it passes (being propelled by 
rollers) to a fixed knife which imparts a very smooth face. A little 
farther on in the machine two vertical cutter blocks are encountered 
which carry cutters to plane or tongue or mould the edj^es. after 
which another cylinder above finishes the top face. Similar types 
of machines are made to produce mouldings, using four cutters 
shaped to suit the pattern rrauired. 

Moulding is also done on the vertical spindle shapers. which carry 
a cutter or cutters at the top of a spindle projectine through a flat 
table. The work is slid over the table and controlled by touching 
a collar below the cutter Any form may be given to the cutters 
to produce different profiles. Some special moulding machines 

use a cutter at the end of a spindle projecting downwards from an 
arm overhanging a table, an arrangement which enables recessing 
and car\'ing to be peH^ormcd. 

Bonng machines comprise rotating spindles and feeding mechanism 
to actuate aueers. The single spindle machines are satisfactory 
enough for ordinary work, but when a number of differently sized 
holes nave to be bored in a single piece of work, or in rapid succession, 
it is the practice to employ a machine with a number of spindles, so 
that a succession of augers of graduated diameters may be ready 
to use at will. 

Mortising or cutting slots is done in venical machines with a 
reciprocating spindle, operated either by hand or bv crank disk 
and pulleys. The tool that cuts the mortise resembles a wood* 
worker's chisel, but is of stouter form and has a suitable shank to 
fit in the spindle. The latter can be reversed to turn round and let 
the chisel face in the opposite direction for cutting at each end oi a 

Fig. 66. — Mortising and Boring Machine with graduated stroke. 
(John McDowail & Sons, Johnstone.) 

A, Frame. 

B. Auger head, driven by belt C. 

D, Mortising chisel reciprocated up and down by crank-disk E. 

F. C. Levers connecting crank-pin to spindle of D. 

H, Treadle connected to F; a eradually increasing stroke is 
imparted to the chisel by depressing H, which brings F, C 
into play and continuallv lengthens the stroke of D, cutting 
the mortise without shock. 

/. Fast and loose pulleys driving £. 

K, Cord actuated from shaft of 7. which reverses the chisel when 
the handle L is moved and makes it cut in the re\-erse 

M, Knee raised or lowered by hand-wheel and screw. 

N. Cross-slide, adjusted by hand-wheel and screw. 

O, Longitudinal slide, moved by rack and pinion aud hand- 

P, Timber vice. 

mortise. A boring spindle is often incorporated with the machine 
to make holes for the mortising chisel to start in (fig. 66). Another 
class of mortiser employs a square hollow chisel, inside of which an 
auger rotates and first bores a hole leaving to the chisel the duty 
of finishing out the corners. The chain mortiser is another type: 
it has an endless chain of flat links, sharpened to make cutting teeth, 
and is run around a bar and a roller at a high speed, so that when 
fed into the wood a recess or mortise is cut out. 

Tenoning machines, designed to cut the reduced ends or tenons 
to fit in mortises, perform their work by the aid of cutter blocks, 
revolved on horizontal sp'ndles above and below the timber, which 
is fed laterally upon a sliding carria^. 

Dovetailing is effected by revolving cutters in machines having 
mechanism /or pitching out the cuts, or if the work warrants it an 
entire row of dovetails it made at one traverse, by fitting a row of 





ina; asRiultancously. Corner-locldng, or cutting 

- ^ in^oo\-es m the edges of boxes. &., » a rather 

'han dovetailing, and is done with suiuble 

' ropriate thickness and pitching apart. 

<- implies, will do a large variety of 

' ! on estates where a complete 

'lestion. It usually lias a 

together with planine 

Coring spindle ana 

hand types 

' . (Jeal with 

r Blanc hard 

' . .itjsed by the 

■^ rest in a corre- 

ij until it exactly 

urface of wood to a 

J faces. Flat boards, 

. Kt revolving drums or 

.:.'n^ over them by hand 

r machine a revolving disk is 

. arms, by which the disk can 

.(, on a table underneath. 


•■ importance made in mechanical 

'^nt. Since the beginning of the l^th 

-.-en going on in this direction until it 

.Iter refinement can now be looked for. 

. ^ to be expected will lie in the general 

I ' ice of the knowledge already acquired. 

. -.i::on of higher degrees of refinement. 

.cnt adopted in woodworking have but little 

; >3 engineers' work. They are adopted, how- 

' '. '.c extent in the metal trades which are allied 

<> i,hcei metal working, girder work, Ac. When a 

rr sets about constructing a door, window sash, 

'. .ikes a two-foot rule, a flat lead pencil, and marks off 

. .- and lines by which he intends to work. If he has to 

:irefuny. then instead of using a pencil he cuualine 

24c of a keen scrlber or chisel-like tool, by which to saw, 

' chi^I. If outlines are curved, the compasses are brought 

, jisition. and these cut a fine line or lines on the surface of 

yj. But in any case the eye alone judges of the coincidence 

>^ cutting with the lims marked. Whether the tool used be saw. 

-:. gouge or plane, the woodworker estimates by sight alone 

.. ;htfr or not the lines marked are worked by. 

The broad difference between his method'and that of theenffineer's 

Tschinist lies in this, that while the first tests his work by tne eye, 

iU second judges of its accuracy or otherwise by the sense of touch. 

It noay se e m that there cannot be very much difference in thett two 

-nethods. but there is. To the first, the sixty-fourth part of an inch 

u a fine dtmensnn. to the second one-thousandth of an inch is rather 

ccane. Now the thkkncss of tissue paper is about one-thousandth 

of an inch, and no one could possibly work so closely as that by the 

eye alone. Engineers' steel rules usually have one inch which is 

di\'^ed into one hundred parts. Tolerably keen sight is required 

to distinguish those divisions, and few could work by them by ocular 

cwasureotent alone, that is, by placing them in direct juxuposition 

«ith the work. A thousandth part of an inch seems by com* 

panson a fine dimension. But it is very coarse when considered 

in relation to modem methods of measurement. In what are called 

" limit gauges ** the plu^ and rings are made of slightly different 

dimennons. If a plug is made a thousandth of an inch less than 

tis ring it w31 slip tnrough it easily with very perceptible slop. 

The common rule is therefore scarcely seen in modem machine 

shop, while the common calipers fill but a secondary place, their 

function having been invaded by the gauges. A minute dimension 

cannot be tested by lines of divisbn on a rule, neither can a dimen- 

sem which should be fixed be tested with high precision with a 

movable caliper of ordinary type. Yet it must not be supposed 

that the adoptk>n of the system of gauging instead of the older 

mnhods of rule measurement relieves men of responsibility. The 

futruments of precision require delicate handling. Rough forcing 

d gauges will not yiekl correct results. A clumsy workman is as 

xajch out of place tn a modem machine shop as he would be in a 

vatch factory. Without correctness of measurement mechanical 

constructions would be impossible, and the older device of mutual 

fitting of parts is of lessening value in face of the growth of the inter- 

chang^ble system, of international standards, and of automatic 

nvachine tools which are run with no intervention save that of feeding 


The two broad divisbns of measurement by sight and by contact 
are represented in a vast number of instruments. To the first- 
aamed belong the numerous rules in wood and metal and with 
English and metric divisions, and the scales whkh are used for 
setting out dimensions on drawings smaller than those of the real 
objects, but strictly proportioaal thereta The second include all 

the i^uges. These are either fixed or movable, an important sub- 
division. The first embrace two groups— one for daily workshop 
service, the other for testing and correcting the wear of these, hence 
termed " reference gauges. They are either made to exact standard 
siies. or they embody limits of tolerance," that i», allowances for 
certain classes of fits, and for the minute degrees of inaccuracy 
which are permissible in an interchangeable system of manufacture. 
The movable group includes a movable portion, either correspond- 
ing with one leg of a caliper or I ' 

The movable group in ^_ 

ing with one leg of a caliper or having an adjustable rod, with pro- 
vision for precise measurement in the form of a vernier or of a screw 

thread divided micrometrically. lliese may be oif general character 
for testing internal or external diameters, or for special functions 
as screw threads. Subtitles indkate some particular aspect or 
design of the gauges, as " plug and ring." " caliper," " horseshoe," 
" depth," " rod," " end measure," Ac. So severe are the require- 
ments demanded of instruments of measurement that the manu- 
facture of the finer kinds remains a speciality in the hands of a very 
few firms. The cost and experience necessary are so great that 
prices rule high for the best instruments. As these, however, are 
not required for ordinary workshop use, two or three grades are 
manufactured, the limits of inaccuracy beiqg usually stated and a 
guarantee given that these are not exceeded. 

Measuremtnt by Sight. Rules and ScaUs. — ^The rules are used 
for marking off distances and dimensions in conjunctk>n with other 
instruments, as scribers. compasses, divkJers. squares: and for test- 
ing and checking dimensions when marked, and work in course of 
reduction or erection, directly or from calipers. They are made in 
boxwood and in steel, the latter being either rigid or flexible, as 
ules are fitted in combination 

when required to go round curves. Rule 

with other instruments, as sliding calipers, squares, depth gauges, 
&c. The scales are of boxwood, of ivory, the value of which isdis- 
counted by its shrinkage, and of paper. They are of flat section 
with bevelled edges, and of oval and of triangular sections, each 
giving a thin edge to facilitate readings. They are fully divided, 
or dpen divided ; in the first case each division is alike subdivided, 
in the second only the end ones are thus treated. 

The Gauges. Fixed Gauges. — These now embrace several kinds, 
the typical forms being represented by the cylindrical or plug and 
ring gauges and by the caliper form or snap gauges. The principle 
in each is that a definite dimension being embodied in the gauge, 
the workman has not to refer to the rule, either directly or through 
the medium of a caliper. This distinction, though slight, is of 
immense importance in modern manufacturing. Broadly it corre- 
sponds with the difference between the older heterogeneous and the 
present interchangeable systems. 

Piug and Ring Gauges. — The principal ones and the originals of 
all the rest, termed Whitworth gauges after the inventor, are the 
plug and ring gauecs (fig. 67. A and 
J9). The pnnciple on which they 
depend is that if the two gauges are 
made to fit with perfect accuracy, 
without tightness on the one hand 
or slop on the other, then any 
work which is measured or turned 
and bored or ground by them will 
also fit with equal accuracy. Bored 
holes are tested by the plug gauge, 
and spindles are tested by the 
ring gauge, and such spindles and 
holes make a close fit if the work 
is done carefully. Of course, in prac- 
tice, there is very much variation in 
the character of the work done, 
and the finest gauges are too fine 
for a large propor ion of engineers' 
work. It is possible to make these 
gauges within c nisi of ^n inch. 
Uut they arc seldom required so 
fine as that for shop use; vAc is 
generally fine enough. For general 


Fic. 67. 
A , B, Plug and ring gauges. 

C, Difference gauge. 

D, Stepped reference gauge, 
shop work the gauges- are"irade to within about y^ of an 
inch. Standard gauges in whkh the plug and ring are of the 
same diameter will only fit by the application of a thin film of oil 
and by keeping the plug in slight movement within the ring. 
Without these prccautu)ns the two would " seize " so hard that they 
could not be separated without force and injury. 

Plug and Ring v. Horseshoe Gauges. — The horseshoe, snap or 
caliper gauges (fig. 68) are often usedln preference to the plug and 
ring types. They are preferred because the surfaces in contact 
are narrow. These occur in various designs, with and without 
handles, separately and in combination and in a much larger range 
of dimensions than the plug and ring. Ring gauges are not quite 
such delkate instruments as the fixed caliper gauges. But since 
they measure diameter only, and turned work is not always quite 
circular, the caliper gauges are not so convenient for measurement 
as the round gauges, which fit in the same manner as the parts have 
to fit to one another. 

Fixed Gauges. Limit Gauges. — Some fits have to be what 
is termed in the shops " driving fits." that is, so tightthat they 


have to be effected by driving with a hammer or a press, while 
others have to be " working fits." suiuble. say, for the revolution of 
a loose pulley on its shaft or of an axle in iu bearings. The " Umit " 



fourths and the vernier into twenty-five parts, or the beam is divided 
into fiftieths of an inch (fig. 70) and the vernier has 20 divisions to 
19 on the rule. The caliper jaws are adapted to take both external 
and internal dimensions. These " beam calipers " are also made 
for metric divisions. Minor variations in design by different 
manufacturers are numerous. 

i4. Separate caliper or snap 

B, Combmed internal and ex- 

Fig. 68. 

C Difference gauge. 
D, Newall adjustable limit 
temal gauges. a, b, Plugs, 

the work turned. These are variously sub-classified. The ^v^tem 
which is generally accepted is embodied in the nuges by tK<> Scu-all 
Engineering Co. These tmbnce force fits, whicn requirr 1 ^c :i ppl ica- 
tion of a screw or hydraulic press; drinng fits, that r.?qi;ife less 
power, as that of a hammer; push fits, in which a spindle c^rr be 
thrust into its hole by hand; and running fits, such as oi shafts 
in bearings. Fixed gauges are made for each 6f these, bur a*, this 
involves a heavy outlay the Newall firm have adjuualle Limit 
gauges (fig. 68, i)) for external dimensions, the standard plug being 
used for holes. The setting is done by screwed plu^a or ai^vils 
adjusted by reference bars. In all these gauges the " go cm " and 
" not eo on " ends respectively are sumped on the gauge, or ihe 
equivalents of -I- and — . 

Fixed Reference Gauges. Reference Disks and End Measuring 
Rods'. — Shop working gauges become in time so damaged by service 
that they fail to measure so accurately as when new. To correct 
these errors reference gauges are provided, by which the inaccuracy of 
the worn ones is brought to the test. These are never used in the 
shops for actual measurement of work, but are only kept for checking 
the truth of the working gauges. They include disk, stepped and 
end measurement gauges. The disk and the stepped are used for 
testing^ the ring gauges, the stepped kind compnsmg essentially a 
collection of disks in one piece (ng. 67, D). The end measure pieces 
test the external gauses. The end measure standard lengths 
made by the Pratt & Whitnev Co. are so accurate that any sixes 
taken at random in anv numbers from \ in. to 4 in., varying by 
sixteenths of an inch. will, when placed end to end. make up an exact 
length; this is a difficult test, since slight variations in the lengths of 
the components would add up materially when multiplied by the 
number of pieces. The ends are ground off with diamond dust or 
emery in a special machine under water, and are so true that one 
piece will support another by cohesive force, and this though the 
surfaces are less than J; in. square. 

Movable Gauges. — This extensive group may be regarded as 
compounded of the common caliper and the Whitworth measuring 
machine. They are required when precise dimensions have to be 
ascertained in whole numbers and minute fractional parts. They 
combine the sense of touch by contact, as in the calipers, with the 
exact dimensions obtained by inspection of graduated scales, either 
the vernier or the micrometer screw. If gauges must not vary by 
more than T^fv of an inch, which is the limit imposed by 
modem shop ideals, then instruments must be capable of measuring 
to finer dimensions than this. Hence, while the coarser classes of 
micrometers read directly to ^In P&rt of an inch, the finest 
measure up to loiAm of an inch, about 200 times as fine as the 
diameter c» a human hair. They range in price correspondingly 
from about a sovereign to £100. 

The Calipers.— Cx>ttimoTi calipers (ficr. 69) are adjusted over lor 
within work, and the dimensions are taken therefrom by a rule or a 

luge. They usually have no provision for minute adjustment 

syond the gentle Upping of one of the legs when setting. In some 
forms screw adjustment is provided, and in a few instances a vernier 
attachment on the side of the pivot opposite to the legs. 

Vernier Calipers, — The vernier fitting, so nained after its inventor, 
Pierre Vernier, in 1631, is fitted to numerous calipers and caliper 
rules. It is applied to calipers for engineers* use to read loyhn 
oi an inch without requiring a magnifier. The be^m of the caliper 
is divided into inches and tenths of the inch, and each tenth into 


Flo. 69.— Calipers. 

A, Ordinary external type, adjusted by tapping the legs. 

B, Type adjusted by screw in auxiliary leg. 

C, Screw calipers, opened by contraction 01 curved spring and closed 

by nut. 

D, Self-registering caliper, with pointer moving over quadrant. 

E, Common internal type. 

F, Screw type with spring. 

C, Combined internal and external for measuring chambered holes. 

H, Compass caliper for finding centres. 

Jt Keyhole caliper for measuring from hole to outside of boss. 













Fic. 70.— Vernier Caliper. 
A, Beam: B, vernier; C. fixed jaw; D, movable jaw; £, 
clamping head; F, abutment head, with adjusting screw o. for 
fine adjustment of D. 

O O O o 

Fic. 71. — Measuring Machine. (The Newall Engineering Co.) 

A , Hollow base or bed, mounted on three points. 

B, Measuring or fast headstock. 

C, Movable head, or tailstock. 

D, Spirit-level to indicate alterations in length of piece beinf 
measured due to changes in temperature, termed the indi- 
cator or comparator. 

E, Measuring screw. 

F, >Iut for rapid adjustment of ditto. 

G, Knob of speed screw for slow movement of ditto. 
H, Dividing and measuring wheel. 

J, Vernier or reading bar. 

a, a. Points between which contact is made. 


Micrometrr Calipen are the direct offspring of the Whttvorth 
measuring machine. In the origual form of tnis machine a ecrew 
d ao thjeada to the inch, turned by a worm-wheel of 300 teeth 
^ad sin^e-threadcd worm, had a wheel on th^ axis of the worm with 
2SD divisions on its drcurafcrenocso that an adjustment of rsiUciof 
an inch was possible. The costly measuring machines made to-day 
have a dividing wheel on the screw, but they combine roodiScations 
to ensure freedom from error, the fruits of prolonged experience. 
Good machines are made by the Whitworth, the Pratt & Whitney, 
the NewalJ (fig. 71), and the Brown & Sharpe ilnna. These are 
used far testing purposes. But there are immense numbcn of small 
iftttraments. the micrometer calipers (f^. 72), made for general 
shop use, measuring directly to j^ of an inch, and m the 


Fic. 72. — Micrometer Calipers. (Brown & Sharpe Mfg. Co.) 

A, Frames. a, Adjusting nuu for taking up 

B. Anvil or abutment. wear. 

C Hub divided longitudinally. ft, Clamping nut. 

D, Sf»ndle with micrometer f , Ratchet stop, which slips under 
screw. undue pressure to ensure 
£, Thimble, divided circularly uniform measurement. 

hands of careful men casiljr to half and ouarter thousandths; these 

tne subdivision of the turns 
fected by circular graduations. Usually the screw 

cost from £1 to £r. los. only. In these 
o( the screw b efle 

Fig. 73.— Beam Micrometer Calipers. 
A, Beam. C. Abutment block with screw 

0. Head, adjustable by equal c f^ fine adjustment 

inch divisions, by hnes a. a, d. Clamping screws. 

or holes ft, ft, and plug V 1), Micrometer. 

* ' " "^ ^ «, AnviL 

pitch is 40 to the indi, and the circular divisbns number 2%, so that 
a movement of one division indicates that the screw has oeen »d- 
vanced A of A or i,^k of an inch. Provision for correcting or 
taking up the effects of wear u included in these desiens («.£. at 
a in 6f. 72). and varies with different manufacturers. A vernier b 

vancea A 01 4^ or igfbk 01 an men. rrovtsion lor correctmg or 
taking up the effects of wear b included in these desiens («.£. at 
a in 6f. 72). and varies with different manufacturers. A vernier b 
sometimes fitted in addition, in very high class instruments; to the- 
circular divuions, so that readings of ten thousandths of an inch can 
be taken. Beam micrometer calipers (fig. 7^) take several inches 
in length, the micrometer being reserved Tor fractional paru of the 
inch only. 

Depih GawMT.— It b often necessary to measure the depth of 
one portk>n <» a piece of work beJow another part, or the hetght of 
one portbn relatively to a lower one. To hold a rule perpendiculaily 
and take a sight b*not an accurate method, becsuae the same 
objections applv to thb as to rule measurement in genersL There 
are many depth gauges made with rule divisions simply, and then 
these have the advantage of a shouldered face which rests upon the 
upper portion of the work and from which the rule measurement b 


Fic 74.— Depth Gauges. 

i4. Plain round rod a. sikiing in head ft. and pinched with screw c 

B, Rule a, graduated into inches or metric divisions, sliding on head 

ft. in erooved head of damping screw c. 

C, SlocomB depth ^uge, fitted with micrometer, a. Rod marked in 

half inches, sliding in head ft; c, hub; d, thimble corresponding 
with similar divided paru in the micrometer calipen; e, clamp- 
ing screw. 

taken (fig. 74). These generally have a clamping arrangement. 
But for very accurate work either the vernier or the micrometer 
fitting b applied, so that depths can be measured in thousandths 
of an inch, or sometimes in sixty-fourths, or in metric subdivisions. 




xxvn % 

Fic. 75.— Rod Gauges. 

>(, Pratt & Whitney gauge, a. Tube split at ends; ft, ft. chucks 
clamping tube on plain rod c, and screwed end d. Rpugh 
adjustment b made on rod c, of which several are provided; 
fine adjustment b by screwed end d. 

£, Sawyer gauge, a. Body; ft, extensbn rods for rough adjust- 
ment, several being supplied and pinched with screw c\ 
d, screwed end with graduated head; e, reading arm extending 
from body over graduations; /, clamping screw. 

Rod Gsafff.— When internal dbroeters have to be taken, too 
large for plug gauges or calipers to span, the usual custom b to set 
a rod of iron or steel across, file it till it fiu the bore, and then 
measure its length with a rule. More accurate as well as adjust- 
able are the rod gauges (fig. 75) to which the vernier or the nucro- 
meter are fitted. These occur in a few varied designs. 

Screw Thread Gauges.— The Uking of linear dimensions, though 
provided for so admirably by the systems of gauging just dis- 
cussed, does not cover the imporunt section of screw measurement. 
This b a department of the hishest importance. In most English 
shops the only test to-day of the size of a screw or nut b the use 
of a standard screw or nut That there is variation in these is 
evidenced by the necessity for fitting nuu to bolu when huge 




numben of thcM are being aaeembled. after they liave been used 
in temporary erections or when nut* are brought from the stores 
to fit studs or bolts cut in the shop. Thu method may suffice in 
many classes of work, but it is utterly unsuited to an interchange- 
able system; and when there is a fair amount of the latter firms 
sometimes make thread gauges of their own, in general form like 
the plug and ring gauges, using a hard quality of steel for small 
•laes or a tough quality of cast iron for the larger. These, though 
not hardened, will endure for a long time if treated carefully. But 

They are used in some kinds of lathe diock 

of an inch (fig. 77). , 

work, but their principal value is in fitting and erecting the i 

<=J^^^^L^ ^Q 

Fic. 76.— Screw Thread Gauges. (Piatt & Whitney Ca) 

A, Plug gauge; a. size of Upping hole; b, thread. 

B, Ring gauge; a, pins to prevent lateral movement; b^ adjusting 
■crew for opening gauge; c, screw for closing ditto. 

though very useful and far better than none at all they lack two 
essentials. Thev are simply accommodation gauges, made to an 
existing up or die, and do not therefore embody any precise ab«>- 
lute measurement, nor do they include 
any means for measuring variations from 
standard, nor are they hardened. To 
produce gauges to fulfil these require- 
ments demands an original standard to 
work by, micrometric measurements, and 
the motns of grinding after the harden- 
ing process. These requiremenu are 
fulfilled in the screw thread gauges and 
calipers of the Pratt & Whitney and the 
Brown & Sharpe companies. The essen- 
tial feature of a screw gauge is that it 
measures the sides of the threads with- 
out risk of a possible false reading due 
to contact on the bottom or top o( the 
V. This is fulfilled by fiatting the top 
and making the bottom of tne gauge 
keen. The Pratt & Whitney gauges are 
made as a plus and ring (fig. 76), the 
plug beinff solia and the ring capable of p,c ^g 

obliterated in the threaded end because of the bottoms of the 
an^es being made keen for clearance. There are three kinds of 
this class 01 gauge made; the first and most expensive is hardened 
and ground in the angle, while the second is hardened but not 
ground. The first is intended for use when a very perfect gauge 
IS required, the second for ordinary shop usage. The third is 
made unhardened for purposes of reference simply, and it b 
not brought into contact with the work to be tested at all, 
but measurements are taken by calipers; in every detail it repre- 
sents the standard threads. The Brown & Sharpe appliance b 
of quite a different character. It is a micrometer caliper having 
a' fixed V and a movable point between which the screw to be 
measured is embraced. By the reading of the micrometer and 
the use of a constant the diameter of any thread in the nuddle 
of the thread can be estimated. 
Miscellantous.^The foresoing do not exhaust the gauges. There 

Fic. 77.— Indicator. 
A, Base; B. stem; C. arm; D, pointer or feeler, pivoted at 
a, and magnifying movement of the work E upon the scale b; 
Ft spring to return 2> to zero. 

Surface Plates and Cogmtte Forms. — ^Allied to the gauges are the 
instruments for testing the truth of plane surfaces:' tne surface 
' u The origination of plane 
coincidence of three plates 
le surface plates (fig. 78, A) 
fill an important place in workshop practice, since in the best 
work plane surfaces are tested on them and corrected by scraping. 
To a large extent the precision grinding machines have lessened 
the value of scraping, but it is still retained for machine slides 
and other work of a similar dass. In the shops there are two 
classes of surface plates: those employed daily about the shops, 
the accuracy of which becomes impaired in tinoe, and the standard 

are gauees for the sectional shapes of screw threads of all pitches. 

Ssuges for drilled holes that have to be screwed, gauges for the 
epth and thickness of the teeth of gear-wheels, gauges for the tapers 
of machine spindles, gauges for key-grooves. &c. There are also 
the woodworker's gauges— the marbng and cutting, the panel, 
the mortise and the long-tooth. 

Indicators are a smallgroup of measuring instruments of a rather 
peculiar character. They magnify the most minute error by adapta- 
tions of k>nff and short lever arms. The Bath, the Starrett and the 
Brown & ^larpe are familiar in high-class shops. Some nmply 
magnify inaccuracy, but in one type an index reads to thousandths 

C, Common square. 

D, Square with adjustable blade. 

plate or plates employed for test and correction. Straight-edges 
are derived from the surface plates, or may be originated tike them. 
The largest are made of cast-iron, ribbed and curved on one edge, 
to prex-ent flexure, and provided /> ^r - y , 

with feet (fig. 78. B). _, 
smaller straight-edges are gener* 
ally parallel, and a similar pair 
constitutes " winding strips," by 
which any twist or departure 
fiom a plane surface is detected. 
Squares, of which there are numer- 
ous designs (fig. 78, C and X>), are 
straight-edges set at right angles. 
Bevels or oevel-squares (fig. 79), 
are straight-edges comprising a 
stock and a blade, whicn are ad- 
justable for angle in relation to 
each other. Shop protractors often 
include a blade adjustable for 

Fio. 70. 
, Common bevel. 

angle, forming a bevel with gradua- ^; Universal bevd for tcstioe 
tions. Spirit-levels test the hon- ' Uw^ieT^ «■"«« 

zontal truth of surfaces. Many •" * K 

levels have two bubble tubes at right angles with each other, one 
of which tests the truth of vertical faces. Generally levels have 
flat feet, but some are made of V-section to fit over shafting. The 
common plumb-tx>b b in frequent use for locating the vertical 
of centres not in the same horizontal plane. When • 



phimb-fmb is combined with a paialkl straight-edge the tenn plumb- 
rule is applied. It tests the truth oC vertical surface mora accurately 
than a spirit-leveL (J- G. U.) 

TOOLB, JOHH LAWRENCE (1832-1906), English actor, son 
<tf an old employ^ of the East India Company who for many years 
acted as toast-master in the City of London, was bom in London 
OQ the X3th of March 1833. He was educated at the City of 
London School, and started life in a wine merchant's office; but 
his natural propensity for comic acting was not to be denied, and 
after some practice as an amateur with the City Histrionic Club, 
be definitely took to the stage in 1852, appearing in Dublin as 
Simmons in Tbe SpUclfidds Weaver. He gained experience in 
tbe provinces, and in 1854 made his first professional appearance 
in Loodon at the St James's theatre, acting Samuel Pepys in 
The Kini*s Rival and Weazel in My Friend the Major. In 1857, 
having just had a great success as Paul Pry, hie met Henry 
Irving in Edinburgh, and recommended him to go to London; 
and theii friendship remained thenceforth of the closest kind. 
In 1858 Toole joined Webster at the Adelphi, and esublished 
ha popolarity as a comedian, among other parts creating Joe 
Spriggins in Id on parle franfais. In x868 he was engaged at 
the Gaiety; appearing among other pieces in Tkespis, the first 
Gilbert and Sullivan collaboration. His fame was at its height 
in 1874, when he went on tour to the United States, but he failed 
to veprodace there the success he had in En^and. In 1879 he 
took the " FoUy '* theatre in London, which he renamed " Toole's " 
in 1882. He was constantly away in the provinces, but he pro- 
duced here a number of plays: H. J. Byron's Upper Crusi and 
AwmUe; Pinero's Hester*s Mystery and CiHs and Boys\ burlesques 
such as Paw Qoudtan, and, later, J. M. Barrie's Walker^ London. 
But his appearances gradually became fewer, and after 1893 he 
wan seen no more on. the London stage, while hh theatre was 
polled down shortly afterwards for an extension of Charing Cross 
HospitaL He published his reminiscences in 1888. Toole 
married in 1854; and the death of his only son in 1879, and later 
of his wife and daughter, had distressing effects on his health; 
attacks of gout, from 1886 onwards, cripp&d him, and ultimately 
he retired to Brighton, where after a long illness he died on the 
joth of July 1906. In his prime he was immensely popular, 
and also immensely funny in a way which depended a good deal 
on his tricks and delivery of words. He excelled in what may 
be called Dickens partsr--combining humour and pathos. He 
was a gpod man of business, and left a considerable fortune, 
out of which he made a number of bequests to charity and to 
hs friends. His genial and sympathetic nature was no less 
compicuous off the stage than on it. 

TOOMBS. ROBERT (1810-1885)^ American political leader, 
W2S bom near Washington, Will^ county, Georgia, on the 
2nd of July 1810. He was educated at Franklin College (univer- 
sity of Georgia), at Union College, Schenectady, New York, 
from which he graduated in 1828, and at the law school of the 
■nivefsity of Virginia. He was admitted to the bar in 1830, 
and aerwed in the Georgia House of Representatives (1838, 
1840-1841 and 1843-1844), in the Federal House of Represen- 
utivcs (1845-1853), and in the United States Senate (1853- 
i86x). He opposed the annexation of Texas, the Mexican^War, 
President Polk's Oregon policy, and the Walker Tariff of 1846. 
Is common with Alexander H. Stephens and Howell Cobb, he 
scpported the Compromise Measures of 1850, denounced the 
Nashville Convention, opposed the secessionists in Georgia, and 
helped to frame the famous Georgia platform (1850). His 
position and that of Southern Unionists during the decade 1850- 
s86o has often been misunderstood. They disapproved of 
secession, not because they considered it wrong in principle, 
but because they considered it inexpedient. . On the dissolution 
of the Whig party Toombs went over to the Democrats. He 
Exvouied the Kansas-NebYaska Bill, the admission of Kansas 
Boder theLecompton Constitution, and the English Bill (1858), 
snd 00 the 24th of June 1856 introduced in the Senate the 
Toombs Bill, which proposed a constitutional convention in 
Kansas undo: conditions which were acknowledged by various 
•ati-slavcry leaders as fair, and wbich mark the greatest con- 

cessions made by the pro-slavery senators during the Kansas 
struggle. The bin did not provide for the sujbmission of the 
constitution to popular vote, and the silence on this point of the 
territorial law under which the Lecompton Constitution of 
Kansas was framed in 1857 was the crux of the Lecompton 
struggle (see Kansas). In the presidential campaign of x86o 
he supported John C. Breckinridge, and on the 22nd of December, 
soon after the election of Lincoln, sent a ♦^i*y«tti to Georgia 
which asserted that " secession by the 4th of March next should 
be thundered forth from the ballot-box by the united voice of 
Georgia." He delivered a farewell address in the Senate 
(Jan. 7, x86x), returned to Georgia, and with Governor Joseph 
E. Brown led the fight for secession against Stephen and 
Herschel V. Johnson (1812-1880). His influence was a most 
powerful factor in inducing the *' old-line Whigs " to support 
immediate secession. After a short term as secretary of state in 
■President Davis's cabinet, he entered the army Quly 21, x86x), 
and served first as a brigadier-genial in the Army of Northern 
Virginia and after 1863 as adjutant and inspector>general of 
General G.W. Smith's divisk>n of Georgia mDitia. He then spent 
two years in exile in Cuba, France and England, but returned to 
Georgia in X867, and resumed the practice of law. Owing to his 
refusal to take the oath of allegiance, he was never restored to the 
full rights of citizenship. He died at his home in Washington, 
Georgia, on the x 5th of December x 885. 

See Pleasant A. Stovall, Rtheri Toombs, Slaiesman, Speaker, 
Soldier, Sagfi (New York. 1892). 

^ TOOTHWORT, the popular name for a small British plant of 
curious form and growth, known botanically as Latkraea squa- 
maria. It grows parasitically on roots, chiefly of haad, in shady 
places such as hedge sides. It consists of a branched whitish 
underground stem closely covered with thick fleshy colourless 
leaves, which are bent over so as to hide the under surface; 
irregular cavities communicating with the exterior axe formed 
in the thickness of the leaf. On the inner wall of these chambers 
are stalked hairs, which when stimulated by the touch of an 
insect send out delicate filaments by means of which the insect 
is killed and digested. The only portions that appear above 
ground are the short flower-bearing shoots, which bear a spike of 
two-lipped dull puiple flowers. The scales which represent the 
leaves also secrete water, which escapes and softens the ground 
around the plant. Laikraea is dosdy allied to another British 
parasitic plant, broomrape {Orobbnche). 

TOOWOOMBA, a town of Aubigny county, Queensland, 
Australia, 76 m. by rail W. by N. of Ipswich, and xoi m. from 
Brisbane. It is situated on the summit of the Great Dividing 
Range, aiid is the centre of the rich pastoral and agricultural 
district of Darling Downs. The chief buildings are the town-hall, 
a large theatre, a school of arts and a library; the Christian 
Brothers College and several handsome churches. The industries 
are brewing, tanning, soap-boiling, ^ur-milling, malting, iron- 
founding, saw-milling and jam-making. Vineyards are culti- 
vated by a German colony and large quantities of wine are made. 
The town received a municipal charter in x86o, and dxiring the 
governorship of Lord Lamington (1896-X897) became the summer 
residence of the governor and* his ataff. Pop. (1901), 9137; 
within the five-mile radius, X4,o87. 

TOP <cf, Dan. top, Ger. Topf, also meaning pot), a toy consist- 
ing of a body of conical, circular or oval shape with a point or 
peg on which it turns or is made to whirl. The twisting or whirl- 
ing motion is applied by whipping or lashing when it is a " whip- 
ping top" or " peg-top," or by the rapid unwinding of a string 
tightly wound round a head or handle. When the body is 
hollow this results in a whirring noise, whence the name " hum- 
ming top." Other kinds of tops are made as supports for coloured 
disks which on revolving show a kaleidoscopic variation of 
patterns. The top is also used in certain games of chance, when 
it is generally known as a " teetotum." There are many references 
to it in ancient classical literature. The Greek terms for the 
toy are pifji0i^, which was evidently the whipping or peg top 
(Arist. Birds, 1461), and oTp6fiikot, a humming top, spun by a 
string (Plato, Rep. iv. 436 ]$.). In Homer (//. xiv. 413) the word 



vtfibiifiot seems to point to the humming top. The Latin name 
for the top was turbo. This word and the Greek ^iifion are 
•ometimes translated by "top" when they refer to the 
instrument used in the Dionysiac mysteries, which, when 
whirled in the air by a string, produced a booming noise. This 
was no doubt the equivalent of the " bull roarer " iq.v). Strutt 
{Games and Pastimes ^ 491) says that the top was known in 
England as early as the 14th century. For the scientific 
properties of the top see Gyeoscofz and Gyeostat. 

This word roust be distinguished from that signifying the highest 
or uppennoet port of anything. It appears to have meant oriein- 
ally a tuft or crest of hau*. cf. Ger. Zopf, Du. top, Icel. topj^s, &c.; 
it IS allied to Eng. " tap." a spike for a cask, and " tip. point. 
Some etymologists have identined the two words, the toy heing 
so called from spinning on its top or tip. but the two uerman 
forms seem to prove conclusively thJait the words are different. 

TOPAZ, a mineral usually fotmd in connexion with granitic 
rocks and used, when fine, as a gem-stone. It is believed that 
the topax of modem mineralogists was unknown to the andents,^ 
and that the stone described under thp name of Tovdftot, in 
allusion to its occurrence on an island in the Red Sea known as 
Tordf lot prjootf was the mineral which is now termed chrysolite 
or peridot (q.v.). The Hebrew pitdak^ translated " topaz " in 
the Old Testament, may also have been the chrysolite. 

Topaz crystallizes in the orthorhombic system, usually with a 
prismatic habit (6gs. i and a). Many of the crystals, like those 
from Saxony and Siberia, are rich m faces, and present with the 
prisms a complicated combination of pyramids and domes. The 
faces of the prism-zone are usually striated vertically. Doubly- 
terminated crystals are rare, and sometimes apparently hemi- 
moiphic. The mineral presents a perfect cleavage transverse 




1 u 

1 \ 





Fig. I. 

Fig. a. 

to the long axis of the prism, and the deavage-plane often has a 
pearly lustre. The chemical composition of the topaz has given 
rise to much discussion, but it is now generally regarded as an 
aluminium fluo-silicate having the formula Al»FsSt04. It was 
shown by Professor S. L. Penfield and Mr J. C. Minor that the 
fluorine may be partially replaced by hydroxyL When strongly 
heated topaz suffers considerable loss of weight. Sir D. Brewster 
found in topaz numerous microscopic cavities containing fluids, 
some of which have recdved the names of brewsterlinite and 
ciyptolinite. Possibly som^ of the liquid indusions may be 

The topaz, when pure, may he colourless, and if cut as a 
brilliant has been mistaken for diamond. It has, too, the 
same specific gravity, about 3*5. It is, however, greatly 
inferior in hardness, the hardness of topaz bdng only 8; and it 
has lower refractivity and dispersive powers: moreover, being an 
orthorhombic mineral, it possesses double refraction. From 
phenadte and from rock-<:rystaI, for which it may be mistaken, it 
is distinguished by being biaxial and by having a much higher 
spedfic gravity. The topaz becomes electric by heating, by 
friction or by pressure. Colourless limpid topazes are known in 
Brazil as pingos d*agoa, or " drops of water," whilst in England 
they pass in trade as " minas novas," from a locality in the 
state of Minas Geraes in Brazil. 

Coloured topazes usually present various shades of yellow, blue 
or brown. The pleochroism is fairly marked, the colour of the 
•berry-yellow crystals from Brazil being generally resolved by the 

dichroscope into a brownish-yellow and a xose-pink. The colour 
in many cases is unstable, and the brown topazes of Siberia are 
q>edally liable to suffer bleaching by exposure to sunlight. In 
1750 a Parisian jeweller named Dumelle discovered that the 
yellow Brazilian topaz becomes pink on exposure to a moderate 
heat, and this treatment has since been extensivdy applied, so 
that nearly all the pink topaz occurring in jewelry has been 
artifidally heated. Such " burnt topaz " is often known as 
" Brazilian ruby," a name applied also to the natural red topaz, 
which, however, is excessively rare. " Brazilian sapphire " is 
the term sometimes given to blue topaz, but the colour is usually 
pale. The ddicate green topaz has been incorrealy called 
aquamarine, which is a name applicable only to the sea-green 
beryl iq.t.). According to A. R. Coom&rasw&my, yellow sapphire 
is often sold as topaz in Ceylon, where yellow topaz is unknown, 
whilst pink corundum is frequently called there *' king topaz." 

The topaz is cut on a leaden wheel, and polished with tripoli. 
It is generally step-cut, or table-cut, but its beauty b best 
developed when in the form of a brillianL Cut topazes of 
large size are known, and it is said that the great " Braganza 
diamond " of Portugal is probably a topaz. 

Topaz usually occurs in granitic and gndssose rocks, often io 
greisen, and b commonly assodatcd with cassiterite, tourmaline and 
Dci^l. It seems to have been formed, in many cases, by pneumato- 
lyttc action. In the west of England it is found m Cornwall, 
notably at St Michad's Mount and at Cligga Head near St Agnes. 
It occurs also in Lundy Island. The finest British topaz b found 
in the Caimsprm group of mountains in the central Highlands, 
especially at Ben a Buird. Rolled pebbles occur in the bed of the 
Avon in Banffshire. Beautiful, though small, crystab occur ia 
the drusy cavities of the granite of the Moume Mountains in 
Irdand. The famous topaz-rock of the Schneckenstdn. near 
Aucrfoach, in Saxony, yidas pale yellow crystals, formerly cut for 
jewdry, and it b said that these do not become pink on beating, 
rine topazes occur in Russia, at several localities m the Urals and 
in the Adun-chalon Mounuins, near Nerchinsk, in Siberia. A very 
fine series from the Koksharov colleaion is in the Britii»h Museum. 
Beautiful crystals of topaz are found in Japan, especially at Taka- 
yama in the province of Mino. and at Tanokaimiyama in Omi 
province. Ceylon and Burma occasionally yield topazes. Brazil 
18 a famous locality, the well-known sherry-ydlow c^^ab coming 
from Ouro Preto, formeri^^ called VilU Rica, the capital of Minas 
Geraes. where they occur in a kaolinitic matrix, resulting from the 
alteration of a mtca-schist. which b regarded by Professor O. A. 
Derby as a metamorphosed igneous rock. Topaz occurs in the 
tin-drifts of New South Wales, especblly in the New Encland 
district; it has been discovered in the Coolgardie goldfidd. West 
Australia ; and it b found also in the tinfields of Tasmania and on 
Flinders Island in Bass's Strait. Fine topaz has been worked 
near Pike's Peak in Colorado, and in San Diego county, California. 
The mineral occurs in rhyolite at Nathrop in Chaffee county and 
Chalk Mountain in Summit county, Colorado, and in trach>te 
near Sevier Lake, Utah. The occurrence of topaz in these vokanic 
rocks is very notable, and contrasts with its common occurrence 
in granites. It b found in like manner in rhyolite at San Lub 
Potosi in Mexico; and beautiful little limpid crystab accompany 
stream-tin at Durango. Common topaz occurs m coarse crystals 
at many localities. A columnar vanety from the tin-districts of 
Saxony and Bohemia, and from Mt Bischoff in Tasmania, b 
known as pycnite (svicpAt, dense); whilst a coarse opaque topaz 
from granite near Falun, in Sweden, has been termed pyrophysa- 
lite (vvp, fire; #viM, to bk>w), in allusion to its behaviour when 

" Orienul topaz " is the name sometimes given to yelk)w corun- 
dum, a mineral readily distinguished from true topaz by superior 
hardness and density. Yellow and smoke-tinted quartz, or cairn- 
gorm, b often known as " Scotch topaz " or '" Spanish topaz." 
according to its locality; but these, on the contrary, are interior 
in hardness and density. The chid differences between the three 
minerals may be seen in the following table, in which they are 
arranged in order of hardness, density and refractivity : — 




Hardness .... 
Spedfic gravity . . 
Refractive indices 
Crysullization . . 
Chemical composition 



I -61. 1*63 




(F. W. R.») 
TOPEKA, a dty and the county-seat of Shawnee coimty, 
Kansas, U.S.A., the capital of the state, situated on both sides of 



the KuMu fiver, in the east part of the state, about 60 m. W. of 
Kansas City. Pop. (1900), 33,608, of whom 3201 were foreign- 
barn (including 703 Gennans, 575 Swedes, 513 English, 407 
Russians, 320 Irish, &c) and 4807 were negroes; (19x0, census), 
43>684. It is served by the Atchison, Topeka & SanU F£, the 
Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific, the Union Pacific and the 
Missouri Pacific railways. The dty is regukriy laid out on a 
fairly level prairie bench, considerably elevated above the river 
and about &90 ft. above sea-leveL ^ong its prominent build- 
ing are the United States government building, the Capitol 
(erected 1866-2903 at a cost of $3,200,589 and one of the best 
state buildings in the country), the county court house, the 
public library (1882), an auditorium (with a seating capacity 
of about 5000), the Y.M.C.A. building, a memorial building, 
housing historical relics of the state, and Grace Church Cathednd 
(Protestant Episcopal). The dty is the see of a Protestant 
Episcopal bishop. In the Capitol are the library (about 6000 
volumes) and natural history collections of the Kansas Academy 
of Sdenoe, and the library Cs^tooo books, 94,000 pamphlets and 
28, 500 manuscripts) and collections of the Kansas State Historical 
Society, which publishes Kansas Historical CoUectians (1875 
sqq.) and Biennial Reports (1879 sqq.). The dty is the seat of 
Washburn (formerly LJncdn) Colkge (1865), which took its 
present name in x868 in honour of Ichabod Washburn of Wor- 
cester, Massachusetts, who gave it $25,000; in 1909 it had 783 
stodents (424 bdng women). Other educational establishments 
are the College of the Sisters of Bethany (Protestant Episcopal, 
x86i), for women, and the Topeka Industrial and Educati^ial 
Institute (1895), for negroes. In Topeka are the state insane 
asylum, Christ's Hospital (1894), the Jane C. Stormont Hospital 
and Training School for nurses (1895), the Santa F€ Railway 
Hospital, the Betheada Hospital (1906) and the St Francis 
Hospital (1909). Topeka is an important manufacturing dty. 
Its factory product was valued in 1905 at $14,448,869. Natural 
gas is |»peid from southern Kansas for manufacturing and 
domestic use. 

The first white settlement on the site of Topeka was made in 
1852, but the dty really originated in 1854, when its site was 
chosen by a party from Lawrence. It was from the first a free- 
state stronghold. More than one convention was held here in 
Territorial days, induding that which framed the Topeka 
Constitution of 1855; and some of the meetings of the free-state 
legislature chosen under that document (see Kansas) were also 
held here. Topeka was made the temporary state capital under 
the Wyuidotte Constitution, and became the permanent capital 
in x86r. It was first chartered by the pro-slavery Territorial 
legolature in 1857, but did not organize its government until 
1858 (see Lawkence). In x88i it was chartered as a dty of the 
first daas. The first railway outlet, the Union Pacific, reached 
Eugene, now North Topeka, in 1865. The construction of the 
Atchison, Topeka & Santa F6 was begun here in x868, and its 
construction shops, of extreme importance to the dty, were built 
here in X878. In x88o, just after the great negro immigration to 
Kansas, the cobured population was 31 % of the total. 

See F. W. Giles, Thirty Years in Topeka (Topeka, 1886). 

TOFEUUS. ZAKRIS [Zacbauas] (X818-X898), Finnish 
author, was bom at Kuddnfis, near Nykarleby, on the 
X4th of January 18x8. He was the son of a doctor of 
the same name, who was distinguished as the earliest collector 
of Fiimish folk-songs. Topelius became a student at Hcl- 
singfofs in 1833, was made professor in 1863 and recdved 
in succession all the academic distinctions open to him. 
Quite early in his career he began to distinguish himself 
as a lyric poet, with the three successive volumes of his 
Heatker Blossoms (X845-X854). The earliest of his historical 
romanfrs was The Duchess ef Finland^ published in 185a 
He was also editor-in-chief of the Udsingfors Gazette from 
184X to i860. In X878 Topelius was allowed to withdraw from 
his professional duties, but this did not sever his connexion 
with the university; it gave him, however, mofe leisure for his 
abundant and various literary enterprises. Of all the multi- 
farious writings of Topelius, in prose and verse, that which has 

enjojred the greatest popularity is his Tales of a Barber-Surgeon, 
episodes of historical fiction from the days of Gustavus II. 
Adolphus to those of Gustavus III., treated in the manner of 
Sir Walter Scott; the five volimies of this work appeared at 
intervals between 1853 and X867. Topelius attempted the 
drama also, with most success in his tragedy of Regina ton 
Emmerits (1854). Topelius aimed, with eminent but perhaps 
pathetic success, at the cultivation of a strong passion of 
patriotism in Finland. He died on the X3th of March X898 
at Helsingfors. Topelius was an exceptionally happy writer 
for children, his best-known book being lAsning J9r ham. 
His abundant poetry is graceful and patriotic, but does not 
offer any features of gr eat or iginah'ty. (£. G.) 

TOPETB, JUAN BAUPTI8TA (1821-X885), Spanish naval 
commander and politician, was bom in Mexico on the 24th of 
May x82x. His father and grandfather were also Spanish 
admirals. He entered the navy at the age of seventeen, cut out 
a enlist vessel in X839, became a midshipman at twenty-two, 
obtained the cross of naval merit for saving the life of a sailor in 
1841 and became a lieutenant in 1845. He served on the West 
Indian station for three years, and was engaged in repressing the 
slave trade before he was promoted frigate captain in X857. He 
was chief of staff to the fleet during the Morocco War, X859, after 
which he got the crosses of San Fernando and San Hermenegildo. 
Having been appointed chief of the Carrara arsenal at Cadiz, he 
was elected deputy and joined the Union Liberal of O'Donnell 
and Serrano. He was sent out to the Pacific in conunand of the 
frigate "Bhinca," and was present at the bombardment of 
Valparaiso and Callao, where he was badly wounded, and in 
other engagements of the war between Chile and Pera. On his 
return to Spain, Topete was made port captain at (ladiz, which 
enabled him to take the lead of the conspiracy in the fleet against 
the Bourbon monarchy. He sent the steamer " Buenaventura " 
to the Canary Isle for Serrano and the other exiles; and when 
Prim and Sa^ta arrived from Gibraltar, the whole fleet under 
the influence of Topete took such an attitude that the people, 
garrison and authorities of Cadiz followed suit Topete took 
part in all the acts of the revolutionary govenmient, accepted the 
post of marine minister, was elected a member of the Cortes of 
x8^, supported the pretensions of Montpensier, opposed the 
election .9f Amadeus, sat in several cabinets of that king's reign, 
was prosecuted by the federal republic of 1873 and again took 
charge of the marine under Serrano in 1874. After the Restora- 
tion Topete for some years hdd aloof, but finally accepted the 
presidency of a naval board in 1877, and sat in the Senate as a 
life peer until his death on the a9th of October x885at Madrid. 

TOPFFER» RODOLPHE (1799-1846), the inventor of pedes- 
trian jourae3rs in Switzerland by schoolboys, was bom at Geneva 
on the 31st of January 1799. His grandfather, a tailor, came 
about X 760 from Schweinfurt (Bavaria) to settle in Geneva, while 
his father, Adam, was an artist. Rodolphe's literary education 
was rather desultory, as he intended to be an artist, like his father. 
But in x8i9 his weak eyesight put an end to that intention, so 
he studied in Paris, intending to devote himself to the profession 
of schoolmaster. After passing some time in a private school in 
Geneva (X822-X824), he founded (X824) one of his own, after his 
marriage. It was in 1823 that he made his first foot journey 
in the Alps with his pupils, though this became his regular 
practice only from X832 onwards. These Voyages en ng^g were 
described aimually (1832-1843) in a seriesof lithographed volumes, 
with sketches by the author— the first printed edition appeared 
at Paris in 1844, and a second series {Nouveaux voyages en zig- 
tag) also at Paris in X854. Both series have since passed through 
many editions. In 1832 he was named profe9sor of belles-lettres 
at the university of Geneva, and held that chair till his death, 
on the 8th of June X846. As early as X830 he published an article 
in the BiNiothique universeUe of (jeneva. It was followed by a 
number pf tales, commencing with the Bibliothbque de mon oncle 
(X832), many of which were later collected (1841) into the well- 
known volume which bears the title of Nouvelles ginevoises. 
He took some part (on the Conservative side) in local politics, 
and was (184X-X843) editor of the Courrier de Genhe. Amo* 



his other "works are an edition of Demosthenes (1834), and a 
volume of artistic studies, the RfflexioMS et menus propos d'un 
peintre gi newts (1848). 

Lives by A. Blondel and the ahb6 Relave (both published at 
Paris, 1886). and shorter notices in E. Rambert's Ecrivatns nalianaux 
(Geneva, 1874) ; and E. Javelle's Souvenirs d'un alpiniste (Lausanne, 
1886; Enff. trans., 1899, under the title of Alpine Memories), and 
several chapters in Ste Bcuve's Causeries du lundi, Demiers 
portraits liuiraires and Porlrails contemporains. (W. A. B. C.) 

TOPHETt or Topheth ( n^ivi), the name given in a Kings 
xxiii. 10; Jer. vii. 31, to a spot in the valley of Ben Hinnom near 
Jerusalem where the Hebrews in the time of Ahab and Manasseh 
offered children to Molech and other heathen gods. Josiah 
" defiled" it as part of his reforming activity, and it became a 
place for the bestowal and destruction of refuse, and a synonym 
for Gehenna (Isa. xxx. 33; Jer. vii. 32). 

The uncertain etymology of the word is discussed in ihitEncy. 
Bjb., S.P. " Molech," { 3, " Topheth." 

TOPIARY.a term in gardenmg or horticulture for the cutting 
and trimming of shrubs, such as cypress, box or yew, into regular 
and ornamental shapes. It is usually applied to the cutting of 
trees into urns, vases, birds and other fantastic shapes, which 
were common at the end of the 17th century and through 
the i8th, but it also embraces the more restrained art necessary 
for the laying out of a formal garden. Yew and holly trees cut 
into fantastic objects may still be seen in old-fashioned cottage 
or farmhouse gardens in England. The Lat. topiarius meant an 
ornamental or landscape gardener, and was formed from topia 
(Gr. rbvoit place), a term specially employed for a formal kind of, 
Landscape painting used as a mural decoration in Roman houses. 

TOPUDY. AUGUSTUS MONTAGUE (1740-X778), Anglican 
divine, was bom at Farnham, Surrey, and educated at AVest- 
minster and Trinity College, Dublin. Although originally a 
follower of Wesley, he in 1758 adbpted extreme Calvinist opinions. 
He was ordained in 1762 and became vicar of Harpford with 
Fenn-Ottery, Devonshire, in 1766. In 1768 he exchanged to the 
living of Broadhenibury, Devonshire. He is chiefly known as a 
writer of hymns and poems, including " Rock of Ages," and the 
collections entitled Poems on Sacred Subjects (Dublin, 1759) and 
Psalms and Hymns for Public and Private Worship (London, 
1776). His best prose work is the Historic Proof of the Doctrinal 
Calvinism of the Church of England (London, X774)* Some 
comments by Wesley upon Toplady's presenUtion of (Calvinism 
led to a controversy which was carried on with much bitter- 
ness on both sides. Toplady wrote a venomous Letter to 
Mr Wesley (1770), and Wesley repeated his comments in The 
Consequence Proved (i 771), whereupon Toplady replied with 
increased acridity in More Work for Mr Wesley (1772). From 
1775 to 1.778, having obtained leave of non-residence at 
Broadhembury, be lived in London, and ministered at a 
Calvinist church in Orange Street. 

TOPOGRAPHY (Gr. r&roi, place, Ypi^cty, to write), a 
description of a town, district or locality, giving details of its 
geographical and architectural features. The term is also applied 
in anatomy to the mapping out of the surface of the human 
body, either according to a divisioti based on the organs or parts 
lying below certain regions, or on a superficial plotting out of 
the body by anatomical boundaries and landmarics. 

TORAN, the name in Hindustani (Skr. torana, from tor, pass) 
of a sacred or honorific gateway in Buddhist architecture. Its 
typical form is a projecting cross-piece resting on two uprights 
or posts. It is made of wood or stone, and the cross-piece is 
generally of three bars placed one on the top of the other; both 
cross-piece and posts are usually sculptured. 
I lORBERNITE (or cupro-uranite), a mineral which is one of the 
" uranium micas "; a hydrous uranium and copper phosphate, 
Cu(U02)i(P04)3-|-i2H20. Crystals are tetragonal and have the 
form of square plates, which are often very thin. There is a 
perfect micaceous cleavage parallel to the basal plane, and on 
this face the lustre is pearly. The bright grass-green colour 
is a characteristic feature of the mineral. The hardness is 2I 
and the specific gravity 3-5. The radio-activity of the mineral 

IS greater than that of some specimens of pitchblende. It was 
first observed in 1772 at Johanngeorgenstadt in Saxony, but the 
best examples are from Gurmislake near Calstock and Redruth 
in Cornwall. The name torbenite is after Torbem Bergman: 
chalcolite is a synonym. (L. J. S.) 

TORCELLO, an island of Venetia, Italy, in the lagoons about 
6 m. to the N. W. of Venice, belonging to the commune of Burano. 
It was a flourishing city in the early middle ages, but now has 
only a few houses and two interesting churches. The former 
cathedral of S. Maria was founded in the 7th century. The 
present building, a basilica with columns, dates from 864; the 
nave was restored in 1008, in which year the now mined octagonal 
baptistery was built. It contains large mosaics of the X2th 
century, strongly under Byzantine influence; those on the west 
wall represent the Resurrection and Last Judgment. The 
seats for the priests are arranged round the semicircular apse, 
rising in steps with the bishop's throne in the centre— an arrange- 
ment unique in Italy. Close by is S. Fosca, a church of the i2th 
century, octagonal outside, with colonnades on five sides and a 
rectangular interior intended for a dome which was nevqr 
executed, beyond which is a three-apsed choir. In the local 
museum are four Mycenaean vases, one found in the island and 
another on the adjacent island of Mazzorbo, proving direct 
intercourse with the Aegean Sea in prehbtoric times. 

SeeR. M. Dawkins, in Journal of Hellenic Studies (1904)1 xxiv. 125. 

TORCH (0. Fr. torche, from Med. Lat. tortia, derived from 
tortus, twisted, torquere, to twist), a light or illuminant that can 
be carried in the hand, made of twisted tow, hemp or other 
inflammable substance. Torches or " links " were, till the general 
introduction of street lighting, necessary adjuncts for passengers 
on foot or in carriages in towns at night, and many of the older 
houses in London and dsewhere still retain the iron stands 
outside their doors, in which the torches might be placed. 

TORCHfiRE* a candelabrum mounted upon a tall stand of 
wood or metal, usually with two or three lights. When it 
was first introduced in France towards the end of the X7th 
century the torchere mounted one candle only, and when the 
number was doubled or tripled the improvement was regarded 
almost as a revolution in the lighting of large nxmis. 

TORDENSKJOLD, PEDBR (i69r-r72o), eminent Danish 
naval hero, the tenth child of alderman Jan Wessel of Bergen, in 
Norway, was bom at Trondhjem on the 28th of October 1691. 
Wessel was a wild unmly lad who gave his pious parents much 
trouble. Finally he ran away from them by hiding in a ship 
bound for Copenhagen, where the king's chaplain Dr Peder Jes- 
persen took pity on the friendless lad, gratified his love for the 
sea by sending him on a voyage to the West Indies, and finally 
procured him a vacant cadetship. After further voyages, 
this time to the East Indies, Wessiel was, on the 7th of July 
X7rx, appointed 2nd lieutenant in the royal marine and shortly 
afterwards became the captain of a little 4-gun sloop " Ormen" 
(The Serpent), in which he cmised about the Swedish coast 
and picked up much useful information about the enemy. 
In. June 171 2 he was promoted to a 20-gun frigate, against 
the advice of the Danish admiralty, which pronounced him to 
be too flighty and unstable for such a command. His dis- 
criminating patron was the Norwegian admiral LOvendal, 
who was the first to recognize the young man's ability as a 
naval officer. At this period Wessel was already renowned for 
two things: the audacity with which he attacked any Swedish 
vessels he came across regardless of odds, and his unique seaman- 
ship, which always enabled him to escape capture. The Great 
Northern War had now entered upon its later stage, when Sweden, 
beset on every side by foes, employed her fleet principally to 
transport troops and stores to her distressed German provinces. 
The audacity of Wessel impeded her at every point. He was 
continually snapping up transports, dashing into the fjords where 
her vessels lay concealed, and holding up her detached frigates. 
In July 17x4 he* encountered a frigate which had been equipped 
in England for the Swedes and was on its way to Gothenburg 
under the command of an English captain. Weiad instantly 



attacked Iier Vnt in tlie En^uh captain be met hit match. 
The combat lasted all day, was interrupted by nightfall, and 
le ae w ed again indecisively the following morning. Weasel's 
free and ea^ ways procured him many enemies in the Danish 
navy. He was accused of unnecessarily endangering his 
majesty's war-shipa in the affairs with the frigate and he was 
brought before a court-martiaL But the spirit with which 
he defended himself and the contempt he poured on his less 
courageous comrades took the fancy of King Frederick IV., 
who cancelled the proceedings and raLed Wessd to the rank of 
captain. When in the course of 1 71 s the return of Charles XII. 
from Turkey to Stralsund put a new life into the jaded and 
dispirited Swedish forces, Wessel distinguished himself in 
numerous engagements off the Pomeranian coast and did the 
eaemy infinite damage by cutting out their frigates and destroy- 
ing their transports. On returning to Denmark in the beginning 
of 17 16 he was ennobled under the title of " Tordenskjold " 
(Thundershield). When in the course of 17 16 Charles XII. 
invaded Norway and sat down before the fortress of Fredrik- 
shald, Tordenskjold compelled him to raise the siege and 
retire to Sweden by pouncing upon the Swedish transport 
fieet laden with ammunition and other military stores which 
rode at anchor in the narrow and dangerous strait of Dynekil, 
utteriy destroying the Swedish fleet with little damage to him- 
self. For this, his greatest exploit, he was promoted to the rank 
of commander, but at the same time incurred the enmity of 
his siqierior officer Admiral Gabel, whom he had omitted to 
take into his confidence on the occasion. Tordenskjold's first 
important command was the sqiutdron with which he was 
entrusted in the beginning of 1717 for the purpose of destroying 
the Swedish Gothenburg squadron which interrupted the com- 
munications between Denmark and Norway. Owing to the 
disloyalty of ceruin of his bfficerSs.who resented serving under 
the young adventurer, Tordenskjold failed to do all that was 
expected of him. His enemies were not slow to take advantage 
of his partial failure. The old charge of criminal recklessness 
was revived against him at a second court-martial before which 
he was sommoned in 17x8; but his old patron Admiral U. C. 
GyldenlOve again intervened energetically in his behalf and 
the charge was quashed. In December 17x8 Tordenskjold 
brought to Frederick IV. the welcome news of the death of 
Charles XH. and was made a rear-admiral for his pains. Tor- 
dcnskjold's last feat of arms was his capture of the Swedish 
fortress of Marstrand, when he partially destroyed and partially 
captured the Gothenburg squadron which had so long eluded him. 
He was rewarded with the rank of vice-admiraL Tordenskjold 
did not long survive the termination of the war. On the 20th 
of November 1720 he was killed in a duel with a Livonian 
cokmel, Jakob Axd Stad von Holstein. Although, Dynekil 
excepted, Tordenskjold's victories were of far less importance 
than Schested's at Stralsund and Gyldenl5ve's at ROgen, he is 
ceitainly, after Charles XII., the most heroic figure of the Great 
Northern War. His courage was ftdly equal to the courage 
of *' The Lion of the North," but he lacked that absolute self- 
command which gives to the bravery of Charles XU. its peculiar, 
almost siq>erhuman, character. 
See Cantenaen and Llktken, Tordenskjold (Copenhagen, 1887). 

TOREADOtt* a Spanish word derived from toreoft to engage 
in a bttll-fig^t, toro, a bull, Latin laurus, for one of the principal 
performers in the national sport of bull-fighting {q.v.), 

TORELU OTTO IIABTIN (x8a8-x9oo), Swedish geologist, 
was bom in Varberg on the 5th of June 1828. He was edu- 
cated at Lund for the medical profession, but became interested 
in xoological and geological studies, and being of independent 
means he devoted hixoself to science. He gave his attention 
first especially to the invertebrate fauna and the physical 
changes of pleistocene and recent times. He studied the 
^adal phenomena of SwitaerUnd, SpiUbergen and Green- 
land, making two Arctic expeditions in company with A. E. 
Nordenskidld. In 1866 he became professor of soology and 
Wtohfy in the University at Lund, and in 1871 he was appointed 

chief of the Swedish Geological Survey. ^ In the latter capacity 
he laboured until 1897. His published contributions, though of 
much interest and importance, were not large, but his influence 
in promoting a knowledge of geology in Sweden was of great 
service. His Arctic experiences enabled him to interpret 
the method of origin of the drift deposits in northern Europe, 
and to show that they were largely of glacial or fluvio-glacial 
origin. In the English drifts he recognized many boulders of 
Scandinavian origin. He died on the 11 th of September 190a 

His publications include: Bidrag till Spitzbergens moUuskfauna 
(1859); and memdn to accompany several sheets of the Geological 
Survey map of Sweden. 

Obituary with portrait, in Ceei, Mag (May 1903); reproduced in 
abridged form from mem<Hr by L. HolmstrOm, in Ce<4oguka foremn- 
g/en i Stockholm's forhandlingart xxiii. 

SARAVLA, Count or (i 786-1843), Spanish politician and his- 
torian, was bom at Oviedo on the 25th of November X786. His 
family was wealthy and belonged to the most ancient nobility 
of Asturias.' His mother, Dominga Ruiz, de Saravia, had 
property in the province of Cuenca. The son received a better 
educatioii in dassics, mathematics and modem languages 
than was usual at that time. The young viscount of Matarrosa, 
the title he bore in his father's lifetime, was introduced 
to the writings of Voltaire and Rousseau by the abbot 
of the Benedictine house of Monserrat in Madrid. He was 
present at Madrid when the dty rose against Murat on the 2nd 
of May x8o8, and took part in the struggle which was the 
beginning of the Peninsular War. From Madrid he escaped 
to Asturias, and on the 30th of May he embarked in a Jersey 
privateer at Gijon, with other delegates, in order to ask for the 
help of England against the French. The deputation was 
enthusiastically received in London. By the 30th of December 
he was back in Asturias, his father having died in the interval. 
During the Peninsular War he saw some service in the first 
occupation of Asturias by the French, but he was mainly occu- 
pied by his duties as a member of the Cortes. In X809 he was at 
Seville, where one of his imdes was a member of Uie central 
Jimta. In the following year he was a leader of the party which 
compelled the Regency to summon the Cortes — to which he was 
elected by Asturias early in x8ix though he wanted some months 
of the legal age of twenty-five. His dection was opposed by 
some of hfs own relatives who did not share his advanced opinions, 
but it was ratified by the Cortes. Toreno was conspicuous 
among the well-meaning men who framed tlie constitution of 
x8i2, which was made as if it was meant for some imaginary 
republic and not for Catholic and monarchical Spain. When 
Ferdinand VU. returned from prison in France in 1814 Toreno 
foresaw a reaction, and put himself out of reach of the king. 
He was the more an object of suspidon because his brother- 
in-law, Porlier, perished in a wild attempt to support the con- 
stitution by force. Toreno remained in exile till the outbreak 
of the revolution of 1820. Between that year and 1823 he was 
in Spain serving in the restored Cortes, and experience had 
abated his radic^ ardour. When the French intervened in 1823 
Toreno had again to go into exile, and remained abroad till the 
king published the amnesty of the xsth of October 1832. He 
returned home in July 1833, but remained on his estates till 
the king's death On the 29th of September. As hereditary 
standard bearer of Asturias (Alferez Mayor) it fell to him to 
proclaim the young queen, Isabella II. In 1834 his now 
moderate opinions pointed him out to the queen regent, Maria 
Christina, as a useful man for office. In June 1834 he was 
minister of finance, and became prime minister on the 7th of 
June. His tenure of the premiership lasted only till the 14th o( 
September of the same year, when the regent's attempt to retain 
a practically despotic government under a thin constitutional 
veil broke down. The greater part of the remainder of his 
life was spent in voluntary exile, and he died in Paris on the 
i6th of September 1843. As a politician he felt the need for a 
revision of the worn out despotism which ruled till 1808, but he 
was destitute of any real political capadty. Toreno is chiefly 
Ecmembered as the author of the History of the Rising, War 



and Revolution ^ Spain, which he began between 1823 and 
183 a and published in 1 836-1838 in Paris. As a work of military 
criticism it is not of high value, and Toreno was prejudiced in 
favour of his colleagues of the Cortes, whose errors and ex- 
cesses he shared in and excused. The book is, however, written 
in excellent Castilian, and was compile^ with industry. It is 
worth consulting as an illustration of the time in which the author 
lived, as a patriotic Spanish view of the war, and for the pro- 
minence it gives to the political side of the Peninsular War, 
which he justly treated as a revolution. 

A bioffraphy by Don Antonio de Cueto is prefixed to the reprint 
of the Levantamtento guerra y revolucidn de EspaHa, in vol. Ixiv. 
of the Biblioteca de auiores espaHoles of Rivadeneyra (Madrid 

(1840-1890), Spanish politician, son of the preceding, was 
bom in Madrid in 1840. He was educated at the Madrid 
Institute and University, entered parliament in 1864 as a 
Moderado, and sat in all the Cortes of Queen Isabella's reign 
as a deputy for his ancestral province, Asturias. Loyal to the 
Bourbons all through the revolution, he nevertheless became a 
deputy in the Cortes of 1871-1873, and founded an Alphonsist 
paper, El Tiemfo, in 1873. When the Restoration took place, 
its first cabinet made Count de Toreno mayor of the capital, 
and in 1875 minister of public works, in which capacity he im- 
proved the public libraries, museums, academies and archives, 
and caused many important works to be published, includ- 
ing the Cartas de Indias. In 1879 he became minister for 
foreign affairs, in z88o president of the House of Deputies, in 
1884 again governor of Madrid, and in 1885 again president 
of the House of Deputies. During the reign of Alphonso XII. 
and the first years of the regency of Queen Christina Count de 
Toreno was one of the most prominent Conservative leaders, 
and was often consulted by the Crown. He died on the 3xst 
of January 1890. He was a patron of the turf, and established 
a race-course in Madrid, where the first races took place in the 
reign of Alphonso XII. 

TOROAU* a town of Germany, in the Prussian province of 
Saxony, situated on the left bank of the Elbe, 30 m. N.E. of 
Leipzig and 26 m. S.E. of Wittenberg by rail. Pop. (1905), 
X 2,299. Its most conspicuous building is the Schloss Hartenfels, 
on an island in the Elbe, which was built, or at least was finished, 
by the elector of Saxony, -John Frederick the Magnanimous. 
This castle, which is now used as a barracks, is one of the largest 
Renaissance buildings in Germany. It was for some time the 
residence of the electors of Saxony and contains a chapel con- 
secrated by Martin Luther. The town hall, a x6th-centuzy 
building, houses a collection of Saxon antiquities. Torgau 
has two Evangelical churches and a Roman Catholid church. 
One of the former, the Stadt Kirche, contains paintings by 
Lucas Cranach and the tomb of Catherine von Bora, the wife of 
Luther. The chief industries of the. town are the manufacture 
of gloves, carriages, agricultural machinery, beer and bricks; 
there is a trade in grain both on the Elbe and by rail. The 
fortifications, begun in 1807 by order of Napoleon, were dis- 
mantled in 1889-189X. In the vicinity is the xoyal stud farm of 

Torgau is said to have existed as the capital of a distinct 
principality in the time of the German king Henry I., but early 
in the X4th century it was in the possession of the margraves 
of Meissen and later of the electors of Saxony, who frequently 
resided here. The town came into prominence at the time of 
the Reformation. In X526 John, elector of Saxony, Philip, 
landgrave of Hesse, and other Protestant princes formed a 
league against the Roman Catholics, and the Torgau articles, 
drawn up here by Luther and his friends in X530, were the 
basis of the confession of Augsburg. Torgau is particularly 
celebrated as the scene of a battle fou^t on the 3rd of November 
1760, when Frederick the Great defeated the Austrians (see 
Seven Years' Was). In January 1814 Torgau was taken by 
the Germans after a siege of three months and it was formally 
^eded to Prussia in 18x5. 

See Grulich and BOrser, DenkwOrdigkeiten der altsdcksieehen 
Resident Torgau aus der Zeit der Reformaiion (Toisau. 1855) : Knabe. 
Ceschickte der Stadt Torgau 6m tur Reformation (Torgau. 1880); 
and the publications of the AUertumverein tu Torgau (Torsau. 
1884 sqq.). 

TORNADO (Span., Urmada, a turning about, cf. *"tura"j, 
a local whirlwind of extreme violence, usually formed within a 
thunderstorm. In appearance it consists of a funnel-shaped 
cloud, depending from the mass of storm-cloud above, and when 
fully developed tapering downwards to the earth. Besides its 
whirling motion, a tornado has an advancing movement of 
from 20 to 40 m. an hour — ^and along its oym narrow path it 
carries destruction. Its duration is usually from half an hour 
to an hour. Tornadoes are most common in America, espe- 
cially in the Mississippi Valley and the Southern sUtes, in Europe 
and elsewhere they are comparatively rare. Owing to their 
association with thunderstorms they generally occur in warm 
weather. A tornado is the result of a condition of local in- 
stability in the atmosphere, originating high above the earth. 
A current of air is induced to ascend with a rapid spiral motion 
round a central core of low pressure. The moisture in the 
ascending air is condensed by cooling both as it ascends and as 
it expands into the low-pressure core. The doud-funnel appears 
to grow downwards because the moisture in the air is condensed 
more rapidly than the air itself, following a spiral course, ascends. 

TORO, a town of Spain, in the province of Zamora, on the 
right bank of the river Duero (Douro), and on the Zamora.* 
Medina del Campo railway. Pop. (1900), 8379. Toro is an 
ancient fortified town, with picturesque narrow streets, among 
which are many medieval churches, convents and palaces, 
besides modem schools and public buildingB. A fine bridge 
of twenty-two arches spans the river. The cathedral chur^ 
is Romanesque; it dates from the X2th century but has been 
partially restored. The palace of the marquesses of Santa 
Crux was the meeting place of the Cortes of X37X, X442 and 
XS05, which made Toro and its code of laws celebrated. Toro 
is first mentioned in documents of the xoth century. It played 
an important part in the development of the kingdoms of Leon 
and Castile and in the reconquest of Spain from the Moors. 

TORONTO, the capital of the province of Ontario, and the 
second largest city in the Dominion of Canada, situated on 
the northern shore of Lake Ontario, almost due north from the 
mouth of the Niagara river. It lies on a plateau gradually 
ascending from the lake shore to an altitude of 220 ft., and 
covers an area of nearly 20 aq. m. The river Don flows 
throiigh the eastern part of the dty, and the river Humber 
forms its western limit. The fine bay in front of the city, 
affording a safe and commodious harbour, is formed by an 
island stretching along the south of it The city is well laid 
out for the most part, the streeU crossing each other at right 
angles; Yonge Street, the chief artery, running north from the 
bay, was constructed as a military road in 1796, and extends 
under the same name for upwards of 30 m. to Lake Simcoe. It 
constitutes the dividing line of the dty, the cross streets bdng 
called east or west according to the side of it they are on. ' 

Toronto is the seat of government for the province, and 
contains the parliament buildings, the lieutenant-governor's 
residence, the courts of law and the edtuational departmental 
buildings. The parliament buildings are situated in (Queen's 
Park, almost in the centre of the dty, and are an imposing 
structure of red sandstone in the neo-Greek style built at great 
cost. They are shortly to be enlarged, as the needs of the 
province have outgrown them. A little distance to the west 
stand the university buildings, the central one being a splendid 
piece of architecture in the Norman style. Stretching in a semi- 
drcle round the broad campus are the library, the medical 
building, the biology building and museum, the school of practical 
science, the geology and chemistry buildings .and the convoca> 
tion hall, their architecture varying very grc&tly, beauty having 
been sacrificed to more practical considerations; the magnetic 
observatory is also in the grounds, but is overshadowed by some 
of the more recent erections. _ It of the meteofological 



stttloDS established by the British govemment on the ncom- 
mendation of the Ro^ Society in 1840 and is now maintained 
by the Dominion government. Ihe univexsity of Toronto, 
for the support of which the province is responsible, includes 
faculties of arts, sdence and medidne, in the trarhing of which 
it is strictly secular. But near at hand and in full affiliation 
with the university are Victoria College (Methodist), Wydiffe 
College (Anglican), Knox College (Presbyterian) and St Michael's 
College (Roman Catholic), wherein courses in divinity are given 
and (kgrces conferred. Victoria College, likewise, provides a 
course in arts, but none in sdence. Trinity College (Anglican), 
though some diirfanre away, is also affiliated with Uxe uxuver- 
sity, and her students enjoy its full advantages. Besides the 
oniversity, Toronto is remarkably rich in educational institu- 
tioos. Upper Canada College, founded in iSag, in many respects 
resembles one of the English public schools. It has over 300 
students. St Andrew's College, also for boys, is a more recent 
^cfahKAwwTif^ and has about the same number of pupils. 
There are thrae large coUegiate institutes, having some 300 to 
6oo pupils each, and in addition a number of schools for girls, 
such as Haver;^ College and Westminster College. Osc^oode 
Hall, a stately structure in' the heart of the dty, houses the 
higher courts of law and appeal, and also a flourishing law school 
The dty hall and court-house is. one of the finest dvic build- 
ings in North America. It is in the Romanesque style, and 
accommodates all the dvic offices, the board of education, the 
paUce and county courts, &c. Many of the churches are worthy 
examples of good aichitecture. 

Toronto is essentially a residential dty. The houses of the 
better dass stand separate, not in long rows, and have about 
them ample lawns and abundant trees. It is Qo n se q uently a 
widespread dty, the length from east to west approximating 
ten iniles. An electric railway system provides means of com- 
munication. There are many parks, ranging in size from 
Cuiton Park of oiie acre to High Park (375 acres) and Island 
Park (389), the latter being across the harbour and constitut- 
ing the favourite resort of the people during the summer. In 
Exhibition Park there is hdd annually an industrial and agri- 
cultural exhibition that has grown to great magnitude. It Usts 
a fortnight in late summer. It is a munidpal enterprise and 
the profiU belong to the dty. 

Tike population in 1907, as shown by the police census, 
exceeded 300,000. The govenunent of the dty is vested in a 
council consisting of the mayor and four controllers dected 
annually and eighteen aldermen (three from each of the six wards 
into which the dty is divided). The council as a whole is the 
legislative body, while the board of control is the executive 
body, and as such is responsible for the supervision of all matters 
of finance, the appointment of officials, the carrying on of 
public works, and the general administration of the affairs of 
the dty, except the departments of education and of police, 
the first being under the control of the board of education, 
elected annually by the dtixens, and the Utter under the 
board of police commiwdoners, consisting of the mayor, the 
county judge and the police magistrate. 

Toronto is one of the chief manufacturing centres of the 
dominion-, agricultural machinery, automobiles, bicycles, cotton 
goods, engines, furniture, foundry products, flour, smoked meats, 
tobacco, jewelry, ftc, are flour^hing industries, and the list is 
constantly extending. The situation of the dty is favourable 
to commerce, and the largest vessels on the lakes can use iu 
harbour. It is the outlet of a rich and extensive agricultural 
district, and throu^^iout the season of navigation lines of steamers 
ply between Toronto and the other lake ports on both the 
r»n»AUn and American sides, the route of some of them 
extending from Montreal to Port Arthur on Lake Superior. 
Railway conununication is complete, three great trunk lines 
making the dty a terminal point, viz. the Grand Ttunk, the 
Canadian Padfic and the Canadisn Northern. 

As a fiM««*i centre Toronto has made remarkable advance. 
The transactions on the stock exchange rival those of Montreal. 
The Bank U Commerce has iU headquarters here, as have also 

the Bank of Nova Scotia, the Bank of Toronto, the Standard 
Traders, Imperial, Sovereign, Dominion, Crown, ITnited Empire, 
Sterling and other banks. 

The name of the dty is of Indian origin, mfaning "a place of 
meeting," the site in the days before the coming of the white 
man bdng an established rendezvous among the neighbouring 
Indian tribes. It first appears in history in 1749 as a centre of 
trade when the French built a small fort and started a trading 
establishment called Fort Rouille. Before long, however, 
British traders came up from the south and entered into active 
rivalry with the French, and in 1793 the fort was burned by 
the latter to prevent its occupation by their foes. A year later 
Governor Simcoe transferred the scat of govenunent of the new 
province of Upper Canada from the town of Newark at the 
mouth of the Niagara River to Toronto, giving the new capital 
the name of York, in honour of the second son of George III. 
Under its new name it made slow progress as the surrounding 
country was deared and settled. The entrance to the harbour 
was guarded by two blockhouses; provision was made for 
barracks and garrison stores; buildings were erected for the 
legislature; and there the members of parliament, summoned 
by royal proclamation to "meet us in our provindal parliament 
in our town of York," assembled on the xst of June 1797, 
Sixteen years later the population numbered only 456. The 
town was twice sacked in the war of 181 a. General Dearborn 
captured it at the head of a force of upwards of aooow On their 
advance to the outworks of the garrison the magazine of the 
fort exploded, whether by acddent or design, killing many of 
the invaders. The halls of legislature and other buildings were 
burnt and the town pillaged. On the restoration of peace the 
work of creating a capital for Upper Canada had wellnigh to 
begin anew. The organization of Upper Canada College in 
1830, with a staff of teachers nearly all graduates of Cambridge, 
gave a great impetus to the city and province. In 1834 the 
population of York numbered fully 10,000; and an act of the 
provincial legislature conferred on it a charter of incorporation, 
with a mayor, aldermen and coundlmen. Under this chuter 
it was constituted a dty with the name of Toronto. Since 
that time the progress of the dty has been rapid and substantial, 
the population doubling every twenty years. In 1885 the 
total assessment was $69,000,000; in 1895 $146,000,000 and in 
1906 $167,411,000, the rate of taxation being i8|miUs. 

TORPBM). In 1805 Robert Fulton demonstrated a new 
method of destroying, ships by exploding a large charge of 
gxmpowder against the hull \mder water. No doubt then 
remained as to the effectiveness of this form of attack when 
successfully applied; it was the difficulty of getting the torpedo, 
as it was called, to the required position which for many years 
retarded its progress as a practical weapon of naval warfare. 
Attempts were first made to bring the explosive in contact with 
the vessel by allowing it to drift down to her by the action of 
tide or current, and afterwards to fix it against her from some 
form of diving boat, but successive failures led to its restriction 
for a conside^ble period to the submarine rnine (g.v.) in which 
the explosive is stationary and takes effect only when the ship 
itself moves over or strikes the charge. Used in this way, it 
is an excellent deterrent to hostile warships fordng a harbour. 

Spar or Outrigger Torpedo. — ^The limitations attached to the 
employment of submarine mines, except for coast defence, 
revived the idea of taking the torpedo to the ship instead of 
waiting for the latter to gain some exact point which she might 
vcty possibly avoid. This first took practical shape in the spar 
or outrigger torpedo. This consisted of a charge of explosive 
at the end of a long pole projecting from the bow of a boat, 
the pole being run out and immersed on arriving near the object. 
Directly the charge came in contact with the hull of the ship it 
was exploded by an electric battery in the boat. If the boat 
was not discovered and disabled while approaching, the chances 
were favourable to success and escape afterwards. Against a 
vigilant enemy it was doubtless a forlorn hope, but to brave 
men the venture offered considerable attractions. 

Frequent use of this spar o^ outrigger torpedo was made dur' 



the Amoican Civil War. A noUble inslanoe was the destraction 
of the Confederate irondad " Albemarle " at the end of October 
1864. On this mission Ueut. Gushing took a steam launch 
equipped with an outrigger torpedo up the Roanoke River, in 
which lay the " Albemarle." On arriving near the ship Gushing 
foimd her surrounded by logs, but pushing his boat over them, 
he immersed the spar and exploded his duirge in contact with 
the " Albemarle " under a heavy fire. Ship and latmch sank 
together, but the gallant officer jumped overboard, swam away 
and escaped. Submerged boats were also used for similar 
service, but usually went to the bottom with their crews. 
During the war between France and Ghina in 1884 the " Yang 
Woo " was attacked and destroyed by an outrigger torpedo. 

Locomotive Torpedoes.— Tho\ii^ the spar torpedo had scored 
some successes, it was mainly because the means of defence 
against it at that time were inefficient. The ship trusted solely 
to her heavy gun and rifle fire to repel the attack. The noise, 
smoke, and difficulty 0! hitting a sniaU object at night with a 
piece that could probably be discharged but once before the boat 
arrived, while rifle btillets would not stop its advance, favoured 
the attack. When a number of small guns and electric lights 
were aHded to a ship's equipment, success with an outrigger 
torpedo became nearly, if not entirely, impossible. Attention 
was then turned in the direction of giving motion to the torpedo 
and steering it to the required point by electric wires worked 
from the shore or from another vessel; or, dispensing with any 
such connection, of devising a torpedo which would travel imder 
water in a given direction by means of self-contained motive 
power and machinery. Of the former type are the Lay, Sims- 
Edison and Brennan torpedoes. The first twor-dectrically 
steered by a wire which trails behind the torpedo— hive in- 
sufficient speed to be of practical value, and are no longer used. 
The Breiman torpedo, carrying a charge of explosive, travels 
under water and is propelled by unwinding two drums or 
reels of fine sted wire within the torpedo. The rotation of 
these reels is communicated to the propellers, causing the 
torpedo to advance. The ends of the wires are connected 
to an engine on shore to give rapid unwinding and 
increased speed to the torpedo. It is steered by vary- 
ing the speed of unwinding the two wires. Tliis tor- 
pedo was adopted by the British war office fw harbour 
defence and the protection of narrow chaimels. 

Unconirotted Torpedoes. — ^The objection of naval 
officers to have any form of torpedo connected by wire 
to their ship during an action, impeding her free move- 
ment, liable to get entangled in her propellers and 
perhaps exploding where not desired---disadvantages 
which led them to discard the Harvey towing torpedo 
many years ago — has hitherto prevented any navy from 
adopting a controlled torpedo for its sea-going fleet The 
last quarter of the xgth century saw, however, great 
advances in the equipment of ships with locomotive torpedoes of 
the uncontrolled type. The Howell may be briefly described, 
as it has a special feature of some interest. Motive power is 
provided by causing a heavy steel fly-wheel inside the torpedo 
to revolve with great velocity. This is effected by a small special 
engine outside operating on the axle. When sufficiently spun 
up, the axle of the flywheel is connected with the propeller 
shafts and screws whidi drive the torpedo, so that on entering 
the water it is driven ahead and continues its course until the 
power stored up in the flywheel is exhausted. Now when a 
torpedo is discharged into the sea from a ship in motion, it has 
a tendency to deflect owing to the action of the passing water. 
The angle of deflexion will vary according to the speed of the 
ship, and is also affected by other causes, such as the position 
in the ship from which the torpedo is discharged, and its own 
angle with the line of keel. Hence arise inaccuracies of shooting; 
but these do not occur with this torpedo, for the motion of the 
flywheel, acting as a gyroscope — ^the principle of which applied 
to the Whitehead torpedo is described later— keeps this torpedo 
on a straight course. This advantage, combined with simplicity 
in const^QCtion, induced, the American naval authorities ft one 

time to contemplate equipping their fleet with this toipedo, for 
they had not, up to within a few years ago, adopted any loco- 
motive torpedo. A great improvement in the torpedo devised 
by Mr Whitehead loA. them, however, definitely to prefer the 
latter and to discontinue the further development of the Howell 

, The Whitehead torpedo is a sted fish-shaped body which 
travels under water at a high rate of speed, bdng propdled by 
two screws driven by compressed air. It carries a large charge 
of expk>sive which is ignited on the torpedo striking any hanl 
substance, such as the hull of a ship. The body is divided into 
three parts. The foremost portion or head contains the explo- 
sive— iisually wet gun-cotton— with dry primer and mechanical 
ignitmg arrangement; the centre portion is the air chamber 
or reservoir, while the remaining part or tail carries the engines, 
rudders, and propellers besides the apparatus for controlling 
depth and direction. This portion also gives buoyancy to the 

When the torpedo is projected from a ship or boat into the 
water a lever is thrown back, admitting air into the engines 
causing the propellers to revolve and drive the torpedo ahead. 
It is desirable that a certain depth under water should be main« 
tained. An explosion on the surface would be deprived of the 
greater part of its effect, for most of the gas generated would 
escape into the air. Immersed, the water above confines the 
liberated gas and compels it to exert all its energy agamst the 
bottom of the ship. It is also necessary to correct the tendency 
to rise that is due to the torpedo getting lighter as the air is 
used up, for compressed air has an appreciable weight This 
is effected by an ingenious apparatus long maintained secret. 
The general prindple is to utilize the pressures due to different 
depths of water to actuate horiaontal rudders, so that the 
torpedo is automatically directed upwards or downwards as 
its tendency is to sink or rise. 

The efficiency of such a torpedo compaitd with all previous types 
was deariy manifest when it was brought before the maritime 
states by the inventor, Whitehead, and $ was almost univenally 
adopted. The prindpal ddect was want of qseed-^whicfa at fint 

Sfme — »«Mf3wSMM 


Spwtf ^»lb«M H UO Ut. 



For acme years a torpedo 14 ft. long and 14 in. in 
iras considered large enough, though it had a very limited 

Fig. I.— Diagrams; of 14- and iS-in. Toipedoea. 
dk! not exceed 10 knots an houf— but by the application of Brothcfw 
hood's 3-cylinder engine the speed was increased to 18 knotf 
a great advance. From that tune continuous improvements have 
resulted in speeds of 30 knots and upwards for a short range being 
obtained. For " - -. . . . 

dikmeterwasc. , «. „ . 

effective range. For a longer range a larger weapon must be 
employed capable of carrying a greater supply of air. To obtain 
thu, torpedoes of 18 in. diameter, involving increased lensth and 
wdght, nave for some time been constructed, and have tsucen the 
plaoe oi the smaller torpedo in the equipment of warships. This 
advance In dimenaons nas not only given a faster ana steadier 
torpedo, but enabled such k heavy diarge of gun-ootton to be 
carried that its explonon against any portion of a ship would inevit- 
ably dther nnk or disable her. The aimensions, shape, &c., of the 14- 
and 18-in. torpedoes are shown in fig. i. A limited range was 
still imposed by the uncertainty of its course under water. The 
speed oc the ship from which it was discharged, the ai^le with her 
weel at which it entered the water, and the varying vclodty of 
impulse, tended to errmr ol flight, such error bdns magnified the 
farther the path of the torpedo was prolonged. Hence 800 yds. 
was formeriy considered the limit of distance within which the 
torpedo diould be discharged at sea against an object from .a ship 
in motion. 

In these circumstances, though improvements in the manufacture 
of steel and engines allowed of torpedoes of far longer range bciny 



nade (tbe Csstest torpedo op to 1898 having a speed of 39 knots 
for too yds.), it was of no advantage to make them, as they couU 
not be aepeadtd upon to run in a straight line from a stationary 
point for more thaji 800 yds., while from a ship In motion good 
practice could onljr be ensured at a reduced range. It was obvious, 
therefore, that to incrpase the effective range of the toqwdo, these 
errors of direction must be overcome by some automatic steering 
a r raogement. Several inventors turned their attention to the 
subject, nearly all of whom proposed to utilise the principle of the 
gyrD9cof>e for the purpose. The firrt which gave any satisfactory 
results was an apparatus devised by Ludwig Obry---an ei^iineer 
in Aostria— «nd tried by the Itahan government about 1896. 
These trials demoostrated the feasibility of accurately and auto- 
matScaHy steering a torpedo in a direct line by this means. Messrs 
^lutebcMul & Co., of Hume, then acouired the invention, and after 
exhaustive experi m ents produced the apparatus which is now 
fitted to evoy torpedo made. It is based on the principle that 
a body revolvim; on a free axis tends to preserve its plane of rotation. 
A gyroscope with plane of rotation parallel to the vertical axis of 
the torpedo will have an angular motion if the torpedo is diverted 
from its or^pnal course. This angular motion is employed to actuate 
the steering mechanism by operating an air motor connected 
with the rudders, and keepiiw the torpedo in the line of discharge. 
The apparatua consists of a flywhed caused to rotate by a spring, 
the bim on which the latter is wound having a segmental wheel 
which gears into a toothed innion spindle of the flywheel. Owing 
to the diameter of the sesment being much greater than the i^nion, 
a ra|»d rotatoiv motion ts impartedT The spring is wound up by a 
key from outside the torpedo, and kept in tension until the pro- 
ioqtile is discharged, when the spring is released by the air lever 
being thrown back, which admits air to the engine; the gyroscope 
b tl^ freed and set in motion with its plane in the plane of the 
vertical axis of the torpedo as it was in the launching tube. 

Assuming now that the coune of the torpedo u diverted by any 
cause, its axis wiU move or perform a certain angular motion with 
regard to the plane of the flywhed, which will have the same 
result 9s if we consider the conditions reve rs ed, i^. as if the {dane 
of rotation of the flvwheel were altered and that of the axis of the 
torpedo remained the same. The axb of the flywhed performs 
a r^tive angular motion which it imparts to a crank actuating 
a servo-motor worked by compressed air, and connected with the 
rudders of the torpedo, moving them in the opposite direction 
to that in which the torpedo was diverted from its original course. 
Tbm aO inaccuracies 01 flight due po errors of adjustment, mis- 
cafarulatSon of deflexion, or even damage to some part, are dimin- 
atKL As long as the gyroscope is in good order the torpedo is 
boand to ran in the line it was pointing when the flywheel was 
Marted. It is placed in the after-body of the torpedo, as indicated 

in fig. a. 

id by the strength of the engines and other parts. Improve- 
I in sted manufacture have permitted the use of much higher 

limited 1 

meats i ^ _^ 

pressures of air and the construction of air<hambers able to with- 
stand the pressure of 2000 lb to the sq. in. with the same weight of 
aur-chamber. This has enabled increased range without reduction 
in speed to be attained, or conversdy, increased speed at shorter 
ranges. By improvement in' the engines which are now of the 
Brotherhood 4-cylinder central csaiuc type further gains have 
been effected. 

Having reached the limit of pressure and endurance of air- 
chambers with present materials without undue increase of weight, 
the designer had to seek additional energy in another direction. 
Now the energy obtainable from a given wdght of compressed air 
is dependent upon the volume of air available at the working 
priessure of the engines. At a constant pressure this vcrfume of 
air a proportionate to its absolute temperature. If then the air 
be stored cold and highly heated before delivery to the engine 
the available energy from a raven weight will be greatly increased. 
By this means we obtain the equivalent of a lareer and heavier 
air-chamber without the increased wdght such would involve. 

As originally used a quantity of hydrocarbon fud was placed in 
the air-vosd. Upon discharging the torpedo this fueh was auto- 
matically ignited and the contents of the aur-chamber were heated. 
Unless, however, the combustion could be regulated there were 
serious risks of abnormal pressures, of overheating and weakening 
the air-vesseL' Devices have been applied to overcome this liability, 
and other methods devised to obtain the same result. 

By the use of heating and thereby increasing the volume of air 
in proportion to the nse of temperature the extra volume will 
allow of an increased speed for a g^ven range or a greater ran^ 
without increase of speed. The limit to the development of this 
system seems to be toe temperature the materials will stand, but 
even at this early stage it has added several knots to the speed of 
this wonderful weapon. 

Torpedo Carriages and Discharge. — ^As no gun which is ineffi- 
ciently mounted can give good results, so the best torpedo is valueless 
without a good carriage or system of discharge. In the early days 
of the Whitehead, discredit came upon it because the importance 
of this was not sufl&dently realizea; and an erratic course under 
water was in nine cases out of ten due to a crude method of dis- 
charge. A delicate piece of mechanism was dropped into the water 
from a height <^ several feet, and naturally suffered internal derange- 
ment. Gun-ports were then used for the purpose, but now a special 
orifice is made, to which the torpedo carriage is fitted with a ball- 
and-socket joint— forming a water-tight aperture — so that this 
carriage or tube may be only a or 3 ft. above the water-line. The 
ball-and-socket joint enables it also to have a considerable angle 
of training. Originally the torpedo was pushed out by a rod 
acted upon by compressed air, in which case the carriage was a 

Fig. 2. — ^Arrangement 

TheeAdency of the Whitehead torpedo has thus been enormously 
btcreased, and more accurate practice can now be made at 
aooo yds. than was formeriy possible at 800 yds. This adds con- 
sidoaMy to the chances of torpedo-boats attacking ships, even in 
day-time, at sea or at anchor, and will render further protectbn 
necessary against this weapoiu Against a ship in motion there is 
still, however, the cakulation as to her speed and the distance she 
will travd bdore tbe torpedo reaches her. Should this be mis- 
calculated, an increased range for torpedoes will magnify the error. 
For instance, a lO-knot torpedo will travd 1000 yds. in a minute. 
If aimed at a ship on the beam assumed to be steaming 15 knots 
an hour, to rcsch her when 1000 yds. disUnt the torpedo must 
be discharged at a point 500 yds. ahead of her. But if the ship 
is actually steaming 13 Imots, she will have travdled only 400 yds. 
in the minute, and the torpedo will be too yds. in advance of 
her. If discharged at a range of 500 yds., such a- miscalculation 
caines an error of only 50 yds. or 150 ft. But if the object is 
too ft. k>ng. and her centre was taken as the target, her bow would 
be just at the spot the torpedo would reach in thirty seconds. It 
would seem, therefore, that uicreased vek)dty of torpedo is necessary 
before the full advantages of the gyroscope can be realised. Now 
tbe range of the torpedo is entirely dependent upon the store of 
energy which can be carried; upon, therefore, the capacity of the 
air reservoir, tbe ma^mum pressure it can stand, and on the eflfici- 
eocy of the propdling engines. The speed over a given range is 
■ - ^•^- - factors; the maximum speed bdng 

of Gyroscope in Torpedo, 
simple frame. The rod, pressing against the tail with some force, 
was apt to dama^ or disarrange the rudders, so the air-gun took 
the puce of rod impulse. Here the torpedo fits dosdy in a tube 
or cylinder with an opening at the rear made air-tight when closed. 
At the desired moment compressed air is admitted to the rear 
part <^ the cylinder and blows the torpedo out. Gunpowder then 
superseded air for this operation; and now this has given place to 
a small charge of cordite, which does not leave any deposit on the 
inside of the cylinder. There is a double risk in the use 01 locomotive 
torpedoes from above water, (i) The charge may be exploded 
by hostile fire. Though mainly conusting-of damp gun<otton, 
which b not readily isnited, the dry primer and detonator may be 
struck, which would lead to a disastrous explosion. (3) The air- 
chamber b also a source of dango-. As it contains air compressed 
to a high degree of tension, experiments have shown that if struck 
by a small shell it may burst with ereat violence; and as it offers 
a considerable mark, thb b not an bnprobable event in an action. 
An instance of the danger <^ above-water torpedo tubes occurred 
in the Spanish-American War at tbe battle of Santiago. A shdl 
entered the " Almirante Oquendo " and struck a 14-in. torpedo 
in the tube. The charge detonated, causing a feaiiul explosion 
and practically wrecking that part of the vessd. The develop- 
ment of nKxlerate-sized ouick-firing guns has increased this risk. 
Hence we find the use of above- water torpedo tubes now mainly 
confined to torpedo and other craft too small for submerged 



Submerged DucAarfe.— The risk attached to having 
torpedoes above the water-line — independently <^ the fact that to 
set the best result they should sUrt tn the element to which they 
belong — has given great impetus to the system of submerged 

Gmi mtt T »n U» rm»f l» Ara 

and tube into the diip again, to that practically the idiple operatioa 

b one motion. 
Fig. 3 will further explain this apparatus. i4 is the outer tube; 

B the mner tube; C the shield; D torpedo; £ explosion chamber 
for cordite charge placed at K\ P pipe for gas to pass 
into outer tube; G and Y doors of inner and outer tube : 
J the valve which opens automatically when inner tube 
arrives at position shown in fig. a ; T and P appliance 
for running the tube in and out bv hand when cfesired ; 
O arran^;ement for bringing whole apparatus back 
for repair, &c; M and N sluic^valve and handle; 
R, r^t r, f*. for draining tubes before torpedo is put in; 
X indicator showing position of inner tube. 

Torpedoes have been discharged from this apparatus 
with successful result from a ship steaming at 17I 

The advanta^ of cordite over compressed air for 
impulse is that it requires 00 attention: when a chaise 

Fig. 3.— Broadside Submerged l8-in. Torpedo Tube. 

discharge. From the earliest days of the weajpon this has been 
employed to some extent. But it was principaUy in the direction 
of right-ahead fire, by having an orifice in the stem of the ship under 
water, to which a torpedo tube was connected. The tactical 
idea was thus to supplement attack with the ram, so that if the 
vessel endeavouring to ram saw that the obiect wouW f — '^ this 
attack, she could project a torpedo ^!il lJ, \sliii:h, ir ter 

than the vessel, might as effectually ;l' . r^mpll^h the n. :e. 

The stem orifice had a water-tigm luvi^r, whtch %.i on 

the torpedo being placed in the U\\vy ^nd tht innir d; 

then, sufficient impulse bein^ impartihJ to ejex^ i^t ( > <: : its 

machinery b^g set in motion at the Kinte time, it > rd 

towards the enemy. There is, howcrver. some risk p[ t ns 

a torpedo in this manner striking it before the miuiSe ha^ rn : - ned 
the necessary impetus from its propellers to take it clear ^A the 
vessd. The system, moreover, has the dtsad^vcjntaT^ of wci^ r; ng 
the ram, the construction of which ' ■ m ' - th. 

There is the further liability <^ ranuuiiiM w.^u • ^^^^^y, ^ ^^ wOW 
tube, which would be as disastrous to friend as foe. Thb method 
of submerged discharge has therefore given place to ejecting the 
torpedo from the brradside. Considerable difficulty attached to 
getting the torpedo clear of the ship from this position without 
injury, especially when the vessel was proceeding at speed. The 
natural tendency of the passing water acting on the head <^ 
the torpedo as it emerged was to give a violent wrench and crush 
the rear end before that portion could clear the aperture. To prevent 
this the torpedo must oe held rigid in the line of projection until 
the tail is clear dL the ship. This is thus effected. Besides the 
tube with the aperture in side of the ship under water, fitted with 
sluice-valve, all broadude submerged discharge apparatus possess 
the following features: A shield is pushed out from the ship's 
side. In this shield there are grooves of some form. Guides on 
the torpedoes fit and run in these grooves. When discharged the 
torpedo is thus supported against the streams of passing water, 
ana guided so that its axis continues in the line of projection until 
the tail is clear of the side, the shield being of suoh length that this 
occurs at the same time that the guides on the torpedo leave the 
grooves in the shield. An apparatus on this principle has been 
fitted to a number of ships ot the British navy, and gi\'es good 
results at high rates of speed. It has the defect that the shield 
must be run out previous to the torpedo being discharged, and 
brought back afterwards, thus involving three separate operations, 
each performed by compressed air. 

In the broadside submerged discharge, designed, constructed 
and supplied to many foreign navies by Messn Armstrongc^ the 
Elswick works, the three operations are combined in one. There is 
an outer tube as before, but it contains an inner tube carrying the 
torpedo. Fixed to thb tube, and prolonging it, b the shield fitted 
with grooves. Both tubes have a door at the rear — made air- 
tight when closed — by which the torpedo b entered. A charge of 
cordite b used for ejection instead of^ compressed air, the gas from 
which entering the outer cvlinder first forces the inner tube out, 
and then by means of a valve in the door <^ the inner tube passes 
in and blows out water and torpedo together, the shield supporting 
the latter until the tail b clear of the ship. By thb time the cordite 
gas has expanded and cooled so as to relieve the pressure in rear: 
thb. causes the pressure of the water outside to push the shield 

b placed in the expUision chamber, and a torpedo b in the tube, 
all b in readiness for firing when desired, without further attention 
in the torpedo-room. The cordite b fired by dectridty from the 
conning-tower; the officer, therefore, having ascertained that all is 
ready belowj has only to press^ a button when the object b in tl^ 
required position. Automatic indicatbns are given in the conning- 
tower when the sluice-valve b opened and wten all b in readiness 
for firing. 

Thb method of dischai]ging torpedoes from the broadside under 
water eliminates the prinapaidanger of the system, which reouired 
the shield to be put into position beforehand. It was then liable 
to be struck and distorted by passing wreckage without the fact 
being apparent to those in the snip. On the discharge of a torpedo 
its course misht thus be arrested, or possibly the charge bepre- 
maturely exploded in danoerous proximity to its own sJiip. There 

, _ . . ipment , ^ _.., 

readjustment which makes for simplk:ity cannot be otherwise 
than benefidal, and thb feature b espedally desirable in all mattera 
connected with the use of tcnpedoes. 

The compartment containing the broadside submerged apparatus 
usually extends across the ship, so as to contain a tube for each 

Use in War. — ^Thb has been mainly confined to attacks upon 
squadrons and single ships by torpedo craft of variotis types. 
At the battle of Yalu, between the Chinese and Japanese fleets, 
torpedoes were discharged by the former, but none took effect. 
The Japanese trusted solely to gun-fire. After the defeat of 
the Chinese at sea, their remaining ships took refuge in the 
harbour of Wei-hai-WeL Here they were blockaded by the 
Japanese fleet, which, having a number of torpedo-boats, made 
several determined attacks upon the ships inside. After one 
or two attempts, foiled by the obstructions placed by the 
Chinese to bar the passage, the Japanese boats succeeded in 
torpedoing several ships, and thus expedited the reduction of the 
place. In the war between Spain and the United States the 
inferiority of Admiral Cervera's squadron to that under Admiral 
Sampson might at the battle of Santbgo have been to some 
extent counterbalanced by a skilful and vigorous use of torpedoes. 
If, instead of striving only to escape, a bold dash had been made 
for the American ships, the Spani^ cruisers rapidly approaching 
end on to the foe, enveloped in the smoke of their own guns, 
should — some at least — ^have got within torpedo range without 
fatal injury. Qosing each other at a speed of 10 knots only 
they would cover an interval of 6000 yds. in 9 minutes — a 
short time in which to disable a ship by gun-fire under such 
conditions. But Cervera elected to offer a passive resbtance 
only, and while suffering destruction wrought no material injury 
upon hb opponents. On the other hand, there have been 



aevoml iiwHtnfrii of large wushipa being sunk by locomotive 
torpedoes diachaxged from small craft. During the Chilean 
Tcvolutioiiazy war of 1891, a battleship, the " Blanco Encalada/' 
of 3 SOD tons, was attacked in Caldera Bay by two torpedo vessels 
—the *' Lynch " and " Condell " -of 750 tons. They entered the 
bay at dawn, the '* Condell " leading. This vessel fired three 
torpedoes which missed the ironclad; then the " Lynch," after 
one ixkeffective shot, discharged a second torpedo, which struck 
the " Blanco " on the side nearly amidships. The latter had 
opened fire with little result, and sank soon afterwards. A 
similar incident occurred in 1894, when the Brazilian ironclad 
" Aquidaban " was sunk in Cathexina Bay by the " Sampaio " — 
a torpedo vessel of 500 tons. She enUred the bay at m'ght, 
and first discharged her bow torpedo at the ironclad, which 
missed; she then fired a broadside torpedo, which struck and 
exploded against the bow of the " Aquidaban." It caused a 
great shock on board, throwing an officer on the bridge into the 
water. The vessel sank soon afterwards, and the " Sampaio "* 
escaped uninjured. 

In the war (1904-5) between Russia and Japan the Whitehead 
torpedo did not exercise an important influence upon the naval 
operations. It scored a success at the beginning of the struggle 
when a Japanese torpedo-flotilla made an attack upon the 
Russian fleet lying at anchor outside Port Arthur. For some 
unaccountable reason, though war was imminent, little or no 
precautions seemed to have been taken for effectually guarding 
the vessels. They had no nets in position nor boats patrolling 
outside them. Thus taken by surprise when the Japanese 
torpedo-boats suddenly appeared about midnight on the 8th of 
February 1904, several Russian ships were struck by torpedoes 
before they couM offer any rcsbtance. The most damaged 
were the " Retvisan " and "Tsarevitch" (battleships) and 
" Pallada " (cruiser), but all managed to get into Port Arthur 
and were eventually repaired. With three ships hors de 
combat the Russian fleet was considerably weakened at an 
early sta^e. The loss of the " Petropavlovsk " in April from a 
mine explosion was a further discouragement, especially as 
with this ship went down the gaUant and energetic Admiral 
Makarov. In these circumstances the Russian fleet could not 
a^-sume the offensive nor prevent the Japanese troops being 
sent by sea to invest Port Arthur. In June when the injured 
vessels were fit for service again the fleet put to sea but returned 
the same evening. The incident is noteworthy only because it 
led to an attack by the Japanese torpedo craft on tht retiring 
squadron after sunset. As illustrating the uncertainty of hit- 
ting a moving object at sea with the Whitehead torpedo, already 
mentioned, no vessels were struck on this occasion and they 
reached the anchorage uninjured. In the battle of Tsushima 
the Japanese torpedo-boats attacked the Russian fleet after its 
disablement by gun-fire and gave the coup de grdce to some 
of the ships, which had little power of resistance owing to the 
destruction of their light armament. This war, therefore, did 
not increase to any extent our knowledge of the actual capability 
of this weapon. 

Effect upon Naval Tactics: Blockade.— It has often been 
assumed that steam and the torpedo will m future render 
blockade impossible as it was carried out in the old wars; that, 
no fenger dependent upon the wind to allow egress from the 
blockaded port, a vessel using steam can emerge when she 
chooses, while the fear of torpedo attack will deter a blockading 
squadron from keeping such watch as to foil the attempt. As 
regards the power conferred by steam, it wiU be no less advan- 
tageous to a blockading squadron, enabling it to maintain its 
pontion, whereas saiUng ships were often driven by gales to leave 
their station and seek a port. This gave opportunities for the 
blockaded vessck to escape. As regards torpedo-boats, they 
would no doubt be a danger to a blockading squadron unpro- 
vided with a means of defence against these craft. Such defence 
consists in an adequate number of nnall vessels interposing an 
tn-shore squadron between the port and the main body outside. 
Thus they perform the twofold service of watching the enemy's 
movements within and frustrating a torpedo attack. As an 

insUnce of blockade under modem conditions, we have that 
of Admiral Sampson upon Santiago— a guard more rigidly 
maintained than any in the old wars. So little was he deterred 
by the knowledge that Admiral Cervera had two torpedo 
vessels in his force, that he drew his squadron closer in at ni^t 
when an attack might be expected, actually illuminating the 
entrance of the harbour with his electric searchli^ts, so that 
no craft could come out unperceived. No attempt was made to 
dislodge him from that position, and we may assume that 
blockade, if required in any scheme of naval strategy, will be 
carried out, whatever the weapons of warfare. 

As regards the effect of torpedoes upon tactics at sea, and m 
general, as well as single ship, actions, they must operate against 
dose range and employment of the ram. If it is recognized hat 
a vessel within xooo yds. is liable to a fatal blow, she will 
endeavour in ordinary circumstances to keep outside that 
distance and rely upon gun-fire. The exception would be where 
she is overmatched in that respect, and hence might endeavour 
to restore the balance by the use of torpedoes. I^ a fleet action 
the danger of missing a foe and hitting a friend would restria 
the discharge of torpedoes; and this risk increases as formations 
disappear. But the torpedo must be conceded a tactical 
superiority over the ram for the following reasons: A vessel 
to use the latter must come within torpedo range, while her 
adversary may successfully apply torpedoes without placing 
henelf in any danger of being rammed. The ram can only be 
used in one direction, and a small miscalculation may cause 
disaster. If a vessel has more than one position from which 
torpedoes can be discharged, she is not confined as regards 
attack to a single bearing or direction. 

In action we may consider the speed of the torpedo as double 
that of the ship, and since against a moving object allowance 
must be made for the space traversed while ram or torpedo is 
travelling towards it, the faster weapon is less affected in its 
chance of successful impact by change of direction and speed 
of the object at the last moment. Lastly, with machinery 
disabled a ship is powerless to use the ram, but can avert a ram 
attack with her torpedoes. The movements of squadrons or 
single ships on entering an action are not likely to be influenced 
by any contemplated immediate use of torpedoes, for the gun 
must remain the primary weapon, at any rate at the first 
onset. Commanders would hardly risk being crushed by 
gun-fire before getting within torpedo range. Having faith 
in the efficiency of their ordnance and the gunnery skill of their 
crew, they would first manoeuvre to bring these into play. 
Tactics for torpedo attack in such circumstances have not 
therefore been laid down, and it is only necessary to consider 
the positions which are advantageous for the use of this weapon, 
and, conversely, what should be avoided when a vessel, finding 
herself overmatched in gunnery, seeks to redress the balance 
with torpedoes. 

Size of Target. — ^Thia, with a ship, varies in length as the torpedo 
approaches end on to the vessel, or at angle to the line of keel; 
the greatest being when the path of both forms a right angle. 
Hence the object is to place your ship where it presents the former 
condition to the enemy, whOe he affords the larger target. It 
must be remembered that, owing to the comparatively slow velocity 
of the torpedo, it must be aimed not directly at a ship in motion- 
like a shot from a gun — but at a point ahead whkh the ship will 
reach after the torpedo has traversed the intervening distance. 
Thus speed of object has to be estimated, and hence the importance 
of adding to the velocity of the torpedo and getting a broadside 
shot so as to reduce as much as possible errors of cakulatton. 
The great increase ci the dimensions of warships, especially in 
length, whkh now has reached 500 ft., adds to the chances of a 
successful hit with torpedoes, and will doubtless tend to diminish 
a desire in future naval tactics to dose inskle torpedo tange for the 
purpose of ramming. 

/csiictf.— Though the effective range of a torpedo diacharaed 
from a ship or torpedo veasd against a nngle object moving 
at high speed may be considered as approximately within 1000 
yds. this fimit of distance is considerably augmented where the 
target consisu of several vessels at sea m dose order, or is that 
afforded by a fleet at anchor. In the first case it may be worth 
while to discharge torpedoes from a distance of two or three thou- 
sand yafds at the centre of the line for the chance of hitting one of 
the vessels composing it. As regards a mass of ships at ^^ 



unfeH pro te c t ed by sn {mpeaeCiable guard rach as a breakwater 
or some invulnerable defence carried by the sKipe tbemtelves, the 
tncreaaed range and accuracy ol the torpedo imparted bv recent 
devdopxnents would give it a chance of succeia if diachaiged againit 
such a tareet at even greater distance. 

Finally, by improvements in construction and methods of dis- 
chacge the torpedo has recovered the place it was rapidly losing a 
few years aga As armour receives uicreased resisting power to 
above-water projectiles, and gets on a levd again with the gun, 
more attention will be given to under-water attack, against whicn 
no adequate protection has yet been devised. Thus we shall 
probably find the torpedo talang a very prominent place in any 
future war between the great maritime powers. (S.M E.-W.) 

TORQUAY, a municipal borough, seaport and watering place, 
in the Torquay parliamentary division of Devonshire, En^nd, 
on Tor Bay of the English Qhannel, 26 m. S. of Exeter, by the 
Great Western railway. Pop. (1901), 33,625. Owing to the 
beauty of its site and the equability of its climate, and to its 
being screened by lofty hills on the north, east and west, and 
open to the sea-breezes of the south, it has a high reputation 
as a winter residence. The temperature seldom rises as high 
as 70" F. in summer or falls bdow freezing-point in winter. 
To the north lies the populous suburb of St Mary Church. 
There are some remains of Tor or Torre Abbey, foimded 
for Praemonstratensians by William, Lord Brewer, in X196. 
They stand north of the modem mansion, but, with the 
exception of a beautiful pointed arch portal, are of small 
importance. On the south of the gateway is a X3th-century 
building, known as the Spanish bain. On Chapel Hill are 
the remains of a chapel of the X2th century, dedicated to 
St Michael, and supposed to have formerly belonged to the 
abbey. St Saviour's parish church of Tor-Mohun, or Tor- 
moham, an ancient stone structure, was restored in 1874. 
The old church at St Mary Church, north of Torquay, was 
rebuilt in Eariy Decorated style; and in 1871 a -tower was 
erected as a memorial to Dr Phillpotts, bishop of Exeter, who 
with his wife is buried in the churchyard. St John's Church, 
by G. E. Street, is a fine ezapiple of modem Gothic. Among 
the principal buildings and institutions are the town-hall, 
musetmi of the natural history society, theatre and opera-house 
(1880), market, schoob of ait and science, the Torbay infirmary 
and dispensary, the Westem hospital for consumption. Crypt 
House institution for invalid ladies and the Mildmay home for 
incurable consumptives. The control of the harbour, piers, 
pleasure grounds, &c, was acquired from the lord of the manor 
by the local board in z886. The harbour has a depth of over 
90 ft. at tow water. The principal imports are coal, timber 
and slates, and the principal export stone of the Transition 
limestone or Devonshire marble. In the town are a number of 
marble-polishing works. Terra-cotta ware of fine quality is 
also manufactured from a deposit of day at Watcombe and 
at Hele. The town is governed by a mayor, 9 aldermen and 
27 councillors. Area, 3588 acres. 

There was a village at Torre even before the foundation of the 
abbey, and in the neighbourhood of Torre evidence has been 
found of Roman occupation. The manor was granted by 
William the Conqueror to Richard de Bmvere or de Brewere, and 
was subsequently known as Tor Brewer. After the defeat of the 
Spanish Armada, Don Pedro's gaOey was brought into Torbay; 
and William, prince of Orange, Jandied at Torbay on the 5th of 
November x688. Until the middle of the xgth century it was 
an insignificant fishing village. It was incorporated in 1892. 

TORQUE, or Toac (Lat. 4orquis, torques, a twisted collar, 
torquere, to twist), the term given by ardiaeologists to the 
twisted collars or armlets of gdd or other metal worn particu- 
larly by the ancient Gauls and other allied Celtic races. The 
typical torque is a dtdet with twisted rope-Ilke strands, the ends 
not joined together; the torque was usually worn with the 
opening in the front as seen in a figtire of a Gaul in a sculptiired 
sarcophagus in the Capitoline Museum at Rome. In mechanics, 
the term " torque." is used of the turning-moment of a system- 
force, as in a series dynamo. 

TORQUEMADA, JUAN DE (1388-1468), or rather Jorannzs 
pB TuBKECSEMATA, Spanish ecclesiastic, was bom at Valladolid, 

in X388, and was educated in that dty. At an caily a^e he 
Jbined the Dominican order, and soon dis tin g u ished himself 
for Irsming and devotion. In 141 5 he accompanied the general 
of his order to the CouncQ of Constance, whence he proceeded 
to Paris for study, and took his doctor's degree in X423. After 
teaching for some time in Paris he became prior of the Dominican 
house first in Valladolid and then in Toledo. In 1431 Pope 
Eugenius IV. called him to Rome and made him ** magister 
sancti palatii." At the Council of Basd he was one of ihe ablest 
supporters of the view of the Roman curia, and he was rewarded 
with a cardinal's hat in 1439. He died at Rome on the 26th of 
September 1468. 
His principal works are In Crdtumi Deeretum commmtttrU 

i£ vols., Venice, 1578); ExposUio brms tt uiilis super Mo psaittrio 
Mainz, 1474); Quaesiiones spirituals super eoangdia lottus aum 
Brixen, 140^): Summa eccUsiasHca (Salamanca, 15^). The last- 
named work has the following topKs: (1) De universa ecclesia; 
(2) De Ecclesia romana et pontificis primatu; {%) De univcrsali- 
bu8 conciliis; (4) De schismatids et haereticis. His De coucepiiouo 
dtiparae Mariae, libri viit. (Rome, 1547). was edited with preface 
and notes by E. B. Pusey (London, 1869 aeq.). 

TORQUEMADA, THOMAS (X420-X498), inquisitor-general of 
Spain, son of Don Pedro Ferdinando, lord of Torquemada, a small 
town in Old Castile, was bom in 1420 at Valladolid during the 
reign of John II. Being nephew to the well-known cardinal of the 
same name, he early displayed an attraction for the Dominican 
order; and, as soon as allowed, he joined the Friars Preachers 
in their convent at Valladolid. His biographers state that he 
showed himself from the beginning very earnest in austere life 
and humility; and he became a recognized example of the 
virtues of a Dominican. Valladolid was then the capital, and in 
due course eminent dignities were offered to him, but he gave 
signs of a determination to lead the simple life of a Friar Preacher, 
In the convent, his modesty was so great that he refused to 
accept the doctor's degree in theology, which is the highest 
prized honour in the order. His superiors, however, obliged 
him to take the priorship of the convent of Santa Cruz in 
Segovia, where he ruled for twenty-two years. The royal family, 
especially the queen and the infanta Isabella, often stayed at 
Segovia, and Torquemada became confessor to the infanta, 
who was then very young. He trained her to look on her 
future sovereignty as an engagement to make religion respected. 
Esprit Flechier, bishop of Nlmes, in this Histoire d% cardinal 
Jimenes (Paris, X693), says that Torquemada made her promise 
that when she became queen she would make it her principal 
business to chastise and destroy heretics. He then began to 
teach her the political advantages of religion and to prepare the 
way for that tremendous engine in the hands of the state, the 

Isabella succeeded to the throne (1474) on the death of 
Henry IV. Torquemada had always been strong in his advice 
that she should marry Ferdinand of Aragon and thus consolidate 
the kingdoms of Spain. Hitherto he had rardy appeared at 
court; but now the queen entrusted him not only with the care of 
her consdence, but also with the benefices in the royal patronage. 
He also helped her in quieting Ferdinand, who was chafing utider 
the privileges of the Castilian grandees, and succeeded so 
well that the king also took him as confessor. Refusing the rich 
see of Seville and many other preferments he accepted that 
of councillor of state. For a long time he had pondered over 
the confusion in which Spain was, which he attributed to the 
intimate relations allowed between Christians and infidels for 
the sake of commerce. He saw Jews, Saracens, heretics and 
apostates roaming through Spain unmolested; and in this lax 
toleration of religious differences he thought he saw the main 
obstade to the political union of the Spains, which was the 
necessity of the hour. He represented to Ferdinand and 
Isabdia that it was essential to their safety to reorganize the 
Inquisition, which had since the X3th century (1236) been 
established in Spain. The bishops, who were ex ojicio inquisitors 
in their own dioceses, had not succeeded in putting a stop to 
the evils, nor had the friars, by whom they had been practically 
superseded. By the middle of the 15th century there was 



hardly an active iDqukitor left in the kingdom. In 1473 
Torquemada and Gonzalez de Mendoza, archbishop of Toledo, 
approached the sovereigns. Isabella had been for many years 
prepartd, and she and Ferdinand, now that the proposal for 
this new tribunal came before them, saw in it a means of over- 
coming the independence of the nobih'ty and clergy by which 
the royal power had been obstructed. With the royal sanction 
a petition was addressed to Sixtus IV. for the establishment of 
this new form of Inquisition; and as the result of a long intrigue, 
in 1479 a papal bull authorized the appointment by the Spanish 
sovereigns of two inquisitors at Seville, under whom the 
Dominican inquisitions already established elsewhere might serve. 
In the persecuting activity that ensued the Dominicans, " the 
Dogs of the Lord " {Domini canes), took the lead. - Commissaries 
of the Holy Office were sent into different provinces, and ministers 
oC the faith were established in the various cities to take cogni- 
sance of the crimes of heresy, apostasy, sorcery, sodomy and 
polygamy, these three last being considered to be implicit 
heresy. The royal Inquisition thus started was subversive of 
the regular tribunals of the bishops, who much resented the 
iniwvation, which, however, had the power of the state at its 

In 1481, three years after the Sixtine commission, a tribunal 
was inaugurated at Seville, where freedom of speech and licence 
of manner were rife. The inquisitors at once began to detect 
errors^ In order not to confound the innocent with the guilty, 
Torquemada published a declaration offering grace and pardon 
to all who presented themselves before the tribunal and avowed 
their fault. Some fled the country, but many (Mariana says 
17,000) offered themselves for reconciliation. The first seat of 
the Holy Office was in the convent of San Pablo, where the friars, 
however, resented the orders, on the pretext that they were not 
dcle^tes of the inquisitor-general. Soon the gk)omy fortress of 
Triana, on the opposite bank of the Guadalquivir, was prepared 
as the palace of the Holy Office; and the terror-stricken Sevil- 
lianos read with dismay over the portals the motto of the 
Inqoisition: " Ex^urge, Domine, Judica causam tuam, Capite 
nobis vulpes." Other tribunals, like that of Seville and under 
La Suprema, were speedily established in G>rdova, Jaen and 
Toledo. The sovereigns saw that wealth was beginning to flow 
in to the new tribunals by means of fines and confiscations; 
and they obliged Torquemada to take as assessors five persons 
who would represent them in all matters affecting the royal 
prerogatives. These assessors were allowed a definite vote in 
temporal matters but not in spiritual, and the final decision 
was reserved to Torquemada himself, who in 1483 was appointed 
the sole inquisitor-general over all the Spanish possessions. In 
the next year he ceded to Diego Deza, a Dominican, his office of 
confessor to the sovereigns, and gave himself up to the congenial 
work of reducing heretics. A general assembly of his inquisitors 
was convoked at Seville for the 29th of November 1484; and 
there he promulgated a code of twenty-eight articles for the 
guidance of the ministers of the faith. Among these rules are 
the following, which will give some idea of the procedure. 
Heretics were allowed thirty days to declare themselves. Those 
who availed themselves of this grace were only fined, and their 
goods escaped confiscation. Absolution in foro externa was 
forbidden to be given secretly to those who made voluntary 
confession; they had to submit to the ignominy of the public 
CMbf-de-fi. The result of this harsh law was that numerous 
applications were made to Rome for secret absolution; and thus 
much money escaped the Inquisition in Spain. Iliose who 
were reconciled were deprived of all honourable employment, 
and were forbidden to use gold, silver, jewelry, silk or fine wool. 
Against this law, too, many petitions went to Rome for rehabili- 
tation, until in 1498 the Spanish pope Alexander VI. granted 
leave to Torquemada to rehabilitate the condemned, and with- 
drew practically all concessions hitherto made and paid for at 
Rome. Fines were imposed by way of penance on those 
cmfi-^ng willingly. If a heretic in the Inquisition asked for 
abiohition, he could receive it, but subject to a life imprisonment; 
bat if his repentance were but feigned he could be at once 

condemned and handed over to the dvH power for executioD. 
Should the accused, after the testimony against him had been 
made public, continue to deny the charge, he was to be con- 
demned as impenitent. When serious proof existed against one 
who denied his crime, he could be submitted to the question by 
torture; and if under torture he avowed his fault and confirmed 
his guilt by subsequent confession he was punished as one con- 
victed, but should he retract he was again to be submitted to 
the tortures or condemned to extraordinary punishment. This 
second questioning was afterwards forbidden; but the prohibi- 
tion was got over by merely suspending and then renewing the 
sessions for questioning. It was forbidden to communicate to 
the accused the entire copy of the declaration 6f the witnesses. 
The dead even were not free from the. Holy Office; but processes 
could be instituted against them and their remains subjected 
to punishment. But along with these cruel and unjust measures 
there must be put down to Torquemada's credit some advanced 
ideas as to prison life. The cells of the InqutHtion were, as a rule, 
large, airy, clean and with good windows admitting the sun. 
They were, in those respects, far superior to the dvil prisons of 
that day. The use of irons was in Torquemada's time not 
allowed in the Holy Office; the use of torture was in accordance 
with the practice of the other royal tribunals; and when these 
gave it up the Holy Office did so also. 

Such were some of the methods that Torquemada introduced 
into the Spanish Inquisition, which was to have s6 baneful an 
effect upon the whole country. During the eighteen years that 
he was inquisitor-general it is said that he burnt 10,330 persons, 
condemned 6860 others to be burnt in effigy, and reconciled 
97*33 If thus making an average of some 6000 convictions a year. 
These figures are given by Llorente, who was secretary of the 
Holy Office from 1790 to 1793 and had access to the arehives; 
but modem research reduces the list of those burnt by Torque- 
mada to 3O0O, in itself an awful holocaust to the principle of 
intolerance. The constant stream of petitions to Rome opened 
the eyes ot the pope to the effects of Torquemada's severity. 
On three separate occasions he had to send Fray Alfonso Badaja 
to defend his acts before the Holy See. The sovereigns, too, 
saw the stream of money, which they had hoped for, diverted 
to the coffers of the Holy Office, and in 1493 they made com- 
plaint to the pope; but Torquemada was powerful enough to 
secure most of the money for the expenses of the Inquisition. 
But in X496, when the sovereigns again complained that the 
inquisitors were, without royal knowledge or consent, disposing 
of the property of the condemned and thus depriving the public 
revenues of considerable sums, Alexander VI. appointed Jimenes 
to examine into the case and make the Holy Office disgorge the 

For many years Torquemada had been persuading the sove- 
reigns to make an attempt once for all to rid the country of the 
hated Moors. Mariana holds that the founding of the Inquisi- 
tion, by giving a new impetus to the idea of a united kingdom, 
made the country more capable of carrying to a satisfactory 
ending the traditional wars against the Moors. The taking of 
Zahaia in 1481 by the enemy gave occasion to reprisals. Troops 
were summoned to Seville and the war began by the siege of 
Alhama, a town eight leagues from Granada, the Moorish 
capital. Torquemada went with the sovereigns to Cordova, to 
Madrid or wherever the sUtes-general were held, to urge on 
the war; and he obtained from the Holy See the same spiritual 
favours that had been enjoyed by the Crusaders. But he did 
not forget his favourite work of ferreting out heretics; and his 
ministers of the faith made great progress over all the kingdom, 
especially at Toledo, where merciless severity was shown to the 
Jews who had lapsed from Christianity. The. Inquisition, 
although as a body the clergy did not mishlLe it, sometimes 
met with furious opposition from the nobles and common people. 
At Valentia and Lerida there were serious conflicts. At 
Saragossa Peter Arbui, a canon and an ardent inquisitor, 
was slain in 1485 whilst praying in a church; and the threats 
against the hated Torquemada made him' go jn fear of his life, 
and he never went abroad without an escort of forty fr-""*— 



of the Holy Office on horseback and two hundred more on 
foot. In 1487 he went with Ferdinand to Malaga and thence to 
Valladolid, where in the October of 1488 he held another general 
congregation of the Inquisition and promulgated new laws 
based on the experience already gained. He then hurried 
back to Andalusia where he joined the sovereigns, who 
were now besieging Granada, which he . entered with the 
conquering army in January 149a and built there a convent 
of his order. 

The Moors being vanquished, now came the turn of the 
Jews. In Z490 had happened the case of £1 Santo niflo de 
la Guardia— a child supposed to have beeu killed by the Jews. 
His existence had never been proved; and in the district of 
Guarxiia no child was reported as missing. The whole story 
was most probably the creation of imaginations stimulated by 
torture and despair, unless it was a deliberate fiction set forth 
for the purpose of provoking hostility against the Jews. For 
a long time Torquemada had tried to get the royal consent to 
a general expulsion; but the sovereigns hesitated, and, as the 
victims were the backbone of the commerce of the country, 
proposed a ransom of 300,000 ducats instead. The indignant 
friar would hear of no compromise: " Judas," he cried, " sold 
Christ for 30 pence; and your highnesses wish to sell Him again 
for 300,000 ducats." Unable to bear up against the Domini- 
can's fiery denunciations, the sovereigns, three months after 
the fall of Granada, issued a decree ordering every Jew either 
to embrace Christianity or to leave the country, four months 
being given to make up their minds; and those who refused to 
become Christians to order had leave to sell their property and 
carry off their effects. But this was not enough for the in- 
quisitor-general, who in the following month (April) issued orders 
to forbid Christians, under severe penalties, having any communi- 
cation with the Jews or, after the period of grace, to supply 
them even with the necessaries of life. The former prohibition 
made it impossible for the unfortunate people to sell their 
goods which hence fell to the Inquisition. The numbers 
of Jewish families driven out of the country by Torquemada 
is variously stated from Mariana's 1,700,000 to the more 
probable 800,000 of later historians. The loss to Spain was 
enormous, and from this act of the Dominican the commercial 
decay of Spain dates. 

Age was now creeping on Torquemada, who, however, never 
would allow his miidirected zeal to rest. At another general 
assembly, his fourth, he gave new and more stringent rules, which 
are |ound in the CompUacidn de las instruuiones del officio de la 
Santa Inquisicidn. He took up his residence in AvUa, where 
he had built a convent; and here he resumed the common life 
of a friar, leaving his cell in October 1497 to visit, at Salamanca, 
the dying infante, Don Juan, and to comfort the sovereigns 
in thdr parental distress. They often used to visit him at 
Avila, where in 1498, still in office as inquisitor-general, he 
held his last general assembly to complete his life's work. 
Soon afterwards he died, on the i6th of September X49S, 
" full of years and merit " says his biographer. He was buried 
in the chapel of the convent of St Thomas in Avila. 

The name of Torquemada stands for all that is intolerant 
and narrow, despotic and cruel. He was no real statesman 
or minister of the Gospel, but a blind fanatic, who failed to 
see that faith, which is the gift of God, caimot be imposed on 
any conscience by force. (E. Tn.) 

TORRE ANNUNZIATA, a seaport of Campania, Italy, in 
the province of Naples, on the east of the Bay of Naples, and 
at the south foot of Mt Vesuvius, 14 m. S.£. of Naples by rail. 
Pop. (1901), 35,070 (town) ; 38,084 (commune). It is oA the main 
line to Battipaglia, at the point of junction of a branch line 
from Cancello round the east of Vesuvius, and of the branch to 
Castellammare di Stabia and Gragnano. It has a royal arms 
factory established by Charles IV., and other ironworks, 
considerable manufacture of macaroni, paper, breeding of 
silkworms, and some fishing and shipping. Tlie harbour is 
protected by moles. Remains attributed to the Roman post- 
Station of Oplontis were discovered in making the railway 

between Torre del Greco and Torre Annunziata, a little wctt of 
the latter, in 1842. 

TORRE DEL GRECO, t seaport of Campania, Italy, in the 
province of Naples, 7) m. S.E. of that city by rail. Pop. 
(1901), 35,338. It lies at the south-west foot of Vesuviiis, on the 
shore of the Bay of Naples. It is built chiefly of lava, and stands 
on the lava stream of 163 1, which destroyed two-thirds of the 
older town. Great damage was done by the eruptions of 
X737 and 1794; the earthquake of 1857 and the eruption of the 
8th of December 1 861 were even more destructive. After each dis- 
aster the people returned, the advantage of the rich volcanic land 
overcoming apprehensions of danger. In the outskirts are 
many beautiful villas and gardens. The town has shipbuilding 
yards and lava quarries. The inhabitants take part in the 
coral and sponge fishing off the African and Sicilian coasts, and 
coral is worked in the town. There is also fishing for tunny, 
sardines and oysters; hemp is woven, and the neighbourhood 
is famed for jts fruit and wine. In June the great popular 
festival " Dei Quattro Altari " is annually celebrated here in 
commemoration of the abolition of the feudal dominion in 
1700. Remains of ancient villas and baths have been found 

TORRENS. ROBERT (i 780-1864), English soldier and econo- 
mist, was born in Ireland in r78o. He entered the Marines 
in 1797, became a captain in 1806, and major in 1811 for 
bravery in Anhalt during the Waleheren expedition. He 
fought in the Peninsula, becoming lieu tenant -colonel in 1835 
and retiring as colonel in 1837. After abortive attempts to 
enter parliament in x8i8 and 1826, he was returned in 1831 as 
member for Ashburton. He was a prolific writer, principally on 
financial and commercial policy. Almost the whole of the pro- 
gramme which was carried out in legislation by Sir Robert Peel 
had been laid down in his economic writings. He was an 
early and earnest advocate of the repeal of the com laws, 
but was not in favour of a general system of absolute free trade, 
maintaining that it is expedient to impose retaliatory duties 
to countervail similar duties imposed by foreign countries, 
and a lowering of import duties on the productions of countries 
retaifiing their hostile tariffs would occasion a decline in 
prices, profits and wages. 

His principal writinn of a general character were: 7V Economist 
[t.e. Physiocrat] refuUd (180S); Essay on the Production of Wealth 

i83i); Essay on the External Corn-trade (eulogized by Ricardo) 
(1827); The Budget, a Series 0/ Letters on Financial, Commercial 
and Colonial Policy (i 841 -1843): The Principles and Practical 
Operations oj Sir Robert Peel's Act of 1844 Explained and D^ended 

TORRENS, SIR ROBERT RICHARD (1814-1884), British 
colonial sUtesman, was bom at Cork, Ireland, in 18 14, and 
educated at Trinity College, Dublin. He went to South Aus- 
tralia in 1840, and was appointed collector of customs. He was 
an official member of the first legislative council and in 1852 
was treasurer and registrar-general. When responsible govern- 
ment was established he was elected as a representative for 
Adelaide and became a member of the first ministry. In 1857 
he introduced his famous Real Property Act, the principle of 
which consists of conveyance by registration and certificate 
instead of deeds. The system was rapidly adopted in the other 
colonies and elsewhere, and was expounded by the (iuthor during 
a visit to the Um'ted Kingdom in 1862-1864. After leaving 
South Australia, Sir R. R. Torrens represented Cambridge 
in the House of Commons from 1868 to 1874; in 1872 he waa 
knighted. He was the author of works on the effect of the 
gold discoveries on the currency, and other subjects. He died 
on the 31st of August 1884. 

English politician and social reformer, son of James M CuUagh 
(whose wife's maiden name, Torrens, he assumed in 1863), 
was bom near Dublin on the 13th of October 1813. He was 
called to the bar, and in 1835 became assistant commissioner 
on the special commission on Irish poor-relief, which resulted 
in the extension of the workhouse system in Ireland in 
1838. In the 'forties he joined the Anti-Com Law League, 



mnd in 1846 published his Industrial History of Fret Nations. 
In 1847 he was elected to parliameDt for DundaUc, and sat 
till 1852. In 1857 he was elected as a Liberal for Yarmouth 
and from 1865 to 1885 he represented Finsbury. Torrens 
was a wen known man in political life, and devoted himself 
mainly to social questions in parliament. It was an amend- 
ment ol hts to the Education Bill of 1870 which established 
the London School Board, and his Artisans' Dwellings Bill in 
x868 facilitated the clearing away of slums by local authorities. 
He publohed several books, and his Twenty Years in Farlta^ 
memt (1893) and History of Cabinets (1894) contain useful 
materiaL He died in London on the 26th of April 1894. 

Spanish dramatist, was bom towards, the end of the xsth centuiy 
at Torres, near Badajoz. After some years of soldiering and of 
captivity in Algiers, Torres Naharro took orders, settled in 
Rome about 1511, and there devoted himself chiefly to writing 
plays. Though he alludes to the future pope, Qement VII. as 
his protector, he left Rome to enter the household of Fabrizio 
Colonna at Naples where his works were printed under the title 
of Propaladia (1517). He is conjectured to have returned to his 
native place, and to have died there shortly after 1529. His 
DiSogo dd nacimiento is written in tmavowed, though obvious, 
imitation of Encina, but in his subsequent plays he shows a 
much larger conception of dramatic possibilities. He classifies his 
pieces as comedias d noticia and comedias d fantasia', the former, 
of which the Soldatesca and TineUaria are examples, present 
in dramatic form incidents within his personal experience; the 
latter, which include such plays as Serafina, Himenea, Calamita 
and AquHanaf present imaginary episodes with adroitness and 
persuasiveness. Torres Nahano is much less dexterous in stage- 
craft than many inferior successors, his humour is rude and 
boisterous and his diction is unequal; but to a varied knowledge 
of human nature he adds knowledge of dramatic effect, and his 
rapid dialogue, his fearless realism and vivacious fancy prepared 
the way for the romantic drama in Spain. 

TORRES NOVAS» a town of Portugal, in the district of San- 
tarem, 19 m. N.N.E. of Santarem on the Lisbon-Entroncamento 
railway. Pop. (1900), 20,746. It manufactures cottons, linens, 
jute, paper, leather and spirits. It was probably fotmded by 
Greeks, and was held by the Romans, Goths and Moors, from 
whom it was conquered in 1 148 by Alphonso I. of Portugal. 

TORRES VEDRA8, a town of Portugal, in the district of 
Lisbon, 43 m. N. by W. of Lisbon, on the Lisbon-Figucira da 
Foz railway. Pop. (1900), 6900. Torres Vedras is built on 
the left bank of the river Sizandro; it has a Moorish citadel 
and hot sulphur baths. Roman inscriptions and other remains 
have been found here, but the Latin name of the town, Turres 
VtiereSt is probably medieval. Here were the noted fortifica- 
tions known as the " lines of Torres Vedras," constructed by 
Wellington in x8io (see Peninsulak Was). Here also in 1846 
the troops of General Saldanha defeated those of the count 
de Bomfin lad seized the castle and town (see Pobtugal: 

TORRES T VILLAROEU DIEGO DE (i696-x7S9?)> Spanish 
miscellaneous writer, was born in 1696 at Salamanca, where his 
father was bookseller to the university. In his teens Tones 
escaped to Portugal where he enlisted under a false name; he 
next moved to Madrid, living from hand to mouth as a hawker; 
in 17x7 he was ordained subdeacon, resumed his studies at 
Salamanca, and in 1726 became professor of mathematics at 
the university. A friend of his having stabbed a priest, Torres 
was suspected of complicity, and once more fled to Portugal, 
where he remained till his innocence was proved. He then 
returned to his chair, which he resigned in i75r to act a^ steward 
to two noblemen; he was certainly alive in 1758, but the date 
of his death is not known. Torres had so slight a smattering 
of mathematics that his appointment as professor was thought 
scandalous even in his own scandalous age; yet he quickly 
acquired a store of knowledge which he displayed with serene 
assurance. His almanacs, his verses, his farces, his devotional 
and pseudo-scientific writings show that he possessed the alert 

adaptiveness of the bom adventurer; but all that remains of 
his fourteen volumes (1745-1752) is his autobiography, an 
amusing record of cynical effrontery and successful imposture. 

TORREVIEJA, a seaport of south-eastern Spain, in the pro- 
vince of Alicante, 3 m. S.W. of Cape Cervera, and at the 
terminus of a railway to Albatera on the Alicante-Murcia line. 
Pop. (1900), 7706. The district is famous for its salt beds, which 
are owned and worked by the sUte, the Laguna Grande alone 
yielding more than xoo,ooo tons a year. The other industries 
are chiefly fishing, shipbuilding and the manufacture of ropes 
and sails. The roadstead affords safe anchorage. There is an 
active trade in fruit ahd agricultural products. 

TORREY, JOHN (1796-1873), American botanist, was bom 
at New York on the 15th of August 1796. When he was 1$ 
or 16 years of age his father received a .prison appointment at 
Greenwich, and there he made the acquaintance of Amos Eaton 
(i 776-X842), a pioneer of natural history studies in America. He 
thus learned the elements of botany, as well as something of 
muieralogy and chemistry. In 1815 he began the study of 
medicine, qualifying in 18 18. In the following year he issued 
his Catalogue of Plants growing spontaneously within Thirty Miles 
of the City of New York, and in 1824 he issued the first and only 
volume of his Flora of the Northern and Middle States. In the 
same year he obtained the chair of chemistry and geology at 
West Point military academy, and three years later the pro- 
fessorship of chemistry and botany in the College of Physicians 
and Surgeons, New York. In 1836 he was appointed botanist 
to the state of New York and produced his Flora of that state in 
X843; while from 1838 to 1843 be carried on the publication of 
the earlier portions of Flora of North America, with the assistance 
of his pupO, Asa Gray. From 1853 he was chief assayer to the 
United States assay office, but he continued to take an interest 
in botanical teaching until his death at New York on the xoth 
of March 1873. He made over his valuable herbarium and 
botanical library to Columbia College in i860, and he was the 
first president of the Torrey Botanical Club in 1873. His name 
is commemorated in the small coniferous genus Torreya, found 
in North America and in China and Japan. T. taxifolia, a 
native of Florida, is known as the Torrey tree or savin, and also 
as the stinking cedar. 

TORREY, REUBEN ARCHER (1856- ), American evange- 
list, was bom in Hoboken, New Jersey, on the 28th of January 
1856. He graduated at Yale University in 1875 and at the Yale 
Divinity School in 1878. He became a Congregational minister 
in 1878, studied theology at Leipzig and Erianger in 1882-18S3, 
joined D. L. Moody in his evangelistic work in Chicago in 1889, 
and became pastor of the Chicago Avenue Church in 1894 and 
afterwards superintendent of the Moody Bible Institute of 
Chicago. In X902-X903 he preached in nearly every part of the 
English-speaking world, and .with Charles McCallon Alexander 
(b. 1867) conducted revival services in Great Britain in 1903- 
1905; Torrey tonducted a similar campaign in American and 
Canadian cities in 1906-1907. 

TORRICELU, EVANGEUSTA (1608-1647), Italian physicist 
and mathematician, was bom at Facnza on the 15th of October 
x6o8. Left fatheriess at an early age, he was educated under 
the care of his uncle, a Camaldolese monk, who in 1627 sent him 
to Rome to study science under the Benedictine Benedetto 
Castelli (i577-'x644), professor of mathematics at the Collegio 
di Sapienza. The perusal of Galileo's Dialoghi delle nuove 
scienze (1638) inspired him with many developments of the 
mechanical principles there set forth, which he embodied in a 
treatise De motu (printed amongst his Opera geometrica, 1644). 
Its communication by Castelli to Galileo in 164 1, with a proposal 
that Torricelli should reside with him, led to TorricelH repairing 
to Florence, where he met Galileo, and acted as his amanuensis 
during the three remaining months of his life. After Galileo's 
death Torricelli was nominated grand-ducal mathematician 
and professor of mathematics in the Florentine academy. The 
discovery of the principle of the barometer {q.v.) which has 
perpetuated his fame ("Torricellian tube" "Torricellian 
vacuum ") was made in 1643. 



The publication amongst Torricelli'a Opera gamelnca 
(Florence, 1644) of a tract on the properties of the cycloid 
involved him in a controversy with G. P. de Roberval, who 
acoised him of plagiarizing his earlier solution of the problem of 
its quadrature. There seems, howevei, no room for doubt that 
Torricelli's was arrived at independently. The matter was 
still in debate when he was seized with pleurisy, and died at 
Florence on the 2sth of October 1647. He was buried in San 
Lorenzo, and a commemorative statue of him erected at Faenza 
in 1864. 

Among the new truths detected by him was the valuable 
mechanical principle that if any number of bodies be so con- 
nected that, by their motion, their centre of gravity can neither 
ascend nor descend, then those bodies are in equilibriimi. He 
also discovered the remarkable fact that the parabolas described 
(in a vacuum) by indefinitely numerous projectiles discharged 
from the same point with equal velocities, but in all directions 
have a paraboloid of revolution for their envelope. His theorem 
that a fluid issues from a small orifice with the same velocity 
(friction and atmospheric resistance being neglected) which it 
would have acquired in falling through the depth from its sur- 
face is of fundamental importance in hydraulics. He greatly 
improved both the telescope and microsrope. Several large 
object lenses, engraven with his name, are preserved at Florence. 
He used and developed B. Cavalieri's method of indivisibles. 

A aelection from Torricelli's manuscripts was published by 
Tommaao Bonaventura in 1715. with the title Lemom actademicke 
(Florence). They include an address of acknowledgment on his 
admission to the Accademia ddla Crusca. His essay on the inun- 
dations of the Val di Chtana was printed in Raccdta d'atdori 
eke trtUUmo del molo deff ocmu, iv. 1 15 (Florence, 1768), and amongst 
O^useuli idraulki, iii. 347 (Bologna, 1823). For his life see Fabroni, 
Viiae Italomm. i. 345; Ghinassi, Lettere fin 91M inediUdi Eoan- 
teUsta TorHcem (Faenza. 1864); Tiraboschi. SUiria detla letL it. 
viii. 302 (ed. 1824): Montucla, aist. des math., vol. U.; Marie, Hist, 
des sciencest iv. 133. 

• TORRIDONIAN, in geology, a series of pre-Cambrian are- 
naceous sediments extensively developed in the north-west high- 
lands of Scotland and particularly in the neighbourhood of upper 
Loch Torridon, a circumstance which suggested the name 
Torridon Sandstone, first applied to these rocks by J. Nicol. 
Tlie rocks are mainly red and chocolate sandstones, arkoses, 
flagstones and shales with coarse conglomerates locally at the 
base. Some of the materials of these rocks were' derived from 
the underlying Lewisian gneiss, upon the uneven surface of 
which they rest; but the bulk of the material was obuined 
from rocks that are nowhere now exposed. Upon this andent 
denuded land surface the Torridonian straU rest horizontally 
or with gentle inclination. Their outcrop extends in a belt of 
variable breadth from Cape Wrath to the Point of Sleet in Skye, 
running in a N.N.E.-^.S.W. direction through Ross-shire and 
Sutherlandshire. They form the isolated mountain peaks of 
Canisp, (^nag and Suilven in the neighbourhood of Loch 
Assynt, of SKoch near Loch Maree and other hills. They attain 
their maximum development in the Applecross, Gairloch and 
Torridon districts, form the greater part of Scalpay, and occur 
also in Rum, Raasay, Soay and the Crowlin Islands. The 
Torridonian rocks have been subdivided into three groups: an 
upper Aultbea group, 3000-5000 ft.; a middle or Applecross 
group, 6000-8000 ft.; and a lower or Diabeg group, 500 ft. in 
Gairloch but reaching a thirkne« of 7200 ft. in Skye. 

See "The Geological Structure of the North-West Highlands 
of Scotland." Mem. Ged. Survey (Glasgow. 1907). Q- A. H.) 

TORRIOIANO, PIETRO (1472-1533)* Florentine sculptor, 
was, according to Vaaari, one of the group of talented youths 
who studied art under the patronage of Lorenzo the Magnificent 
in Ftorence. Benvenuto Cellini, reporting a conversation with 
Torrigiano, relates that he and Michelangelo, while both young, 
were copying the frescoes in the Carmine chapel, when some 
slighting remark made by Michelangelo so enraged Torrigiano 
that he struck him on the nose, and thus caused that disfigure- 
.ment which is so conspicuous In all the portraits of Michelangelo. 
Soon after this Torrigiano visited Rome, and helped Pintu- 
ricchio in modelling the elaborate stucco decorations in the 

Apartamenti Borgia for Alexander VI. After some time spent as a 
hired soldier in the service of different states, Torrigiano was 
invited to Engbmd to execute the magnificent tomb for Henry 
VII. and his queen, which still exists in the lady chapel of West- 
minster Abbey. This appears to have been begun before the 
death of Henry VII. in 1509, but was not finished till 151 7. 
The two efiigies are well modelled, and have lifelike but not 
too realistic portraits. After this Torrigiano received the com- 
mission for the altar, retable and baldacchino which stood at 
the west, outside the screen of Henry VII.'s tomb. The altar 
had marble piksters at the angles, two of which still exist, and 
below the mensa was a life-sized figure of the dead Christ in 
painted terra-cotta. The retable consisted of a large relief of 
the Resurrection. The baldacchino was of marble, with enrich- 
ments of gilt bronze; part of its frieze still exists, as do also a 
large number of fragments of the terra-cotta angels which sur- 
mounted the baldacchino and parts of the brge figure of Christ. 
The whole of this work was destroyed by the Puritans in the X7th 
century.^ Henry VUI. also commissioned Torrigiano to make 
him a magnificent tomb, somewhat similar to that of Henry 
VII., but one-fourth larger, to be placed in a chapel at Windsor; 
it was, however, never completed, and its rich bronze was melted 
by the Commonwealth, together with that of Wolsey's tomb, 
llie indentures for these various works still exist, and are printed 
by Neale, Westminster Abbey ^ i. 54-59 (London, x8i8). These 
interesting documents are written in English, and in them 
the Florentme is called *' Peter Torrysany." For Henry VII.'s 
tomb he contracted to receive £1500, for the altar and its fit- 
tings £1000, and £2000 for Henry VlU.'a tomb. Other works 
attributed from internal evidence to Torrigiano are the tomb 
of Margaret of Richmond, mother of Henry VII., in the south 
aisle of his chapel, and a terra-cotu efllgy in the chapel of the 

While these royal works were going on Torrigiano visited 
Florence in order to get skilled assistants. He tried to induce 
Benvenuto Cellini to come to England to help him, but Cellini 
refused partly from his dislike to the brutal and swaggering 
manners of Torrigiano, and also because he did not wish to 
live among "such beasts as the English." The latter part 
of Torrigiano's life was spent in Spain, especially at Seville, 
where, besides the painted figure of St Hieronymus in the 
museum, some terra-cotta sculpture by him still exists. His 
violent temper got him into difficulties with the authorities, 
and he ended his life in 1522 in the prisons of the Inquisitioii. 

See Wilhdm Bode, Die italieHische Ptastik (Berlin. 1902). 

1716),. British admiral, was the son of a judge. Sir Edward 
Herbert (c. X59X-1657). He entered the navy in X663, and served 
in the Dutch wars of the reign of Charles II., as well as against 
the Barbary pirates. From x68o to X683 he commanded in 
the Mediterranean. His career had been honourable, and he 
had been wounded in action. The known Royalist sentiments 
of his family combined with his reputation as a naval officer to 
point him out to the favour of the king, and James II. appointed 
him rear-admiral of England and master of the robes. The 
king no doubt counted on his support of the repeal of the Test 
Acts, as the admiral was member for Dover. Herbert refused, 
and was dismissed from his pUces. He now entered into com- 
munication with the agents of the prince of Orange, and promised 
to use his influence with the fleet to forward a revolution. 
After the acquittal of the seven bishops m x688 he carried the 
inviution to William of Orange. The Revolution brought him 
ample amends for his losses. He was named first lord, and took 
the command of the fleet at home. In X689 he was at sea 
attempting to prevent the French admiral Ch&teau-Renault 
(q.9.) from landing the troops sent by the king of France to the 
aid of King James in Ireland. Though he fought an action with 

* An old drawing still exists showing this elaborate work: it is 
engraved in the Hterurgia andicana, p. 267 (London, 1848). Many 
hundreds of fragments of this terra<otta sculpture were found a 
few yeare ago hidden under the floor of the triiorium in the abbey: 
they are umortunately too much broken and imperf^ect fitted 



the French in Bantry Bay on the xoth of May he failed to baffle 
Chitcan-Renault, who had a stronger force. Being discontented 
with the amount of force provided at sea, he resigned his place 
at the admiralty, but retained his command at sea. In May 
1689 he was created earl of Toirington. In 1690 he was in the 
Channel with a fleet of English and Dutch vessels, which did 
Dot rise above $6 in all, and found himself in front of the much 
more powerful French fleet. In his report to the council of 
regency he indicated his intention of retiring to the Thames, and 
losing sight of the enemy,- saying that they would not do any 
harm to the coast while they knew his fleet to be " in being." 
The council, which knew that the Jacobites were preparing for 
a rising, and only waited for the support of a body of French 
troops, ordered him not to lose sight of the enemy, but rather 
than do that to give battle " upon any advantage of the wind." 
On the xoth of July Torrington, after consulting with his Dutch 
colleagues, made a half-hearted attack on the French off Beachy 
Head in which his own ship was kept out of fire, and severe 
toss fell on his allies. Then he retired to the Thames. The 
French pursuit was fortunately feeble (see Toukvxlle, Comte 
de) and the loss of the allies was comparatively slight. The 
indignation of the country was at first great, and Torrington 
was brought to a court martial in December. He was acquitted, 
but never again employed. Although twice married, he was 
childless whoi he died on the 14th of April 1716, his earldom 
becoming extinct. The unfavourable account of his moral 
character given by Dartmouth to Pcpys is confirmed by Bishop 
Bumet, who had seen much of him during his exile in Holland. 
An attempt has been made in recent years to rehabilitate the 
character of Torrington, and his phrase " a fleet in being " has 
been widely used (see Naval Warfare^ by Vice-Admiral P. H. 

See Chamock's Btoe. Nov., I 258. The best account of the battle 
of Beachy Head is to be found in " The Account given by Sir John 
Aahby Vice-Adniira] and Rear-Admiial Rooke, to the Lords Com- 
maaaotrs " (1691). 

TORRINOTOH, OEOROB BYNO, Viscount (1663-7733), 
English admiral, was bom at Wrotham, Kent. His father, 
John Byng, was compelled by peamiary losses to sell his property 
and his son entered the navy as a king's letter boy (see Navy) 
in X67S. He served in a ^p stationed at Tangier, and for a 
time left the navy to enter one of the regiments of the garrison, 
but in X683 he returned to the navy as lieutenant, and went to 
the East Indies in the following year. During the year x688, 
he had an active share in bringing the fleet over to the prince 
of Orange, and by the success of the revolution his forttme was 
made. In 1702 he was appointed to the command of the 
** Nassau," and was at the taking and burning of the French 
fleet at Vigo, and the next year he was made rear-admiral of 
the red. In. 1704 he served in the Mediterranean under Sir 
Cloudesley Shovel, and reduced Gibraltar. He was in the battle 
cl Malaga, and for his gallantry received the honour of knight- 
hood. In* 1708 as admiral of the blue he commanded the 
squadron which baffled the attempt of the Old Pretender to land 
in Scotland. In x 718 he commanded the fleet which defeated the 
Spaniards off Cape Passaro and compelled them to withdraw from 
their invasion of Sicily. This commission he executed so well 
that the king made him a handsome present and sent him full 
powers to negotiate with the princes and states of Italy. Byng 
procured for the emperor's troops free access into the fortresses 
which still held out in Sicily, sailed afterwards to Malta, and 
brought out the Sicilian galleys and a ship belonging to the 
Turkey Company. By his advice and assistance the Germans 
retook the dty of Messina in x 7x9, and destroyed the ships which 
lay in the basin--an achievement which completed the ruin 
of the naval power of Spain. To his conduct it was entirely 
owing that Sldiy was subdued and the king of Spain forced to 
accept the terms prescribed him by the quadruple alliance. 
On his return to England in X7ax he was made rear-admiral 
of Great Britain, a member of the privy council, Baron Byng 
of Southill, in the county of Bedford and Viscount Torrington 
in Devonshire. He was also made one of the Knights Com- 

panions of the Bath upon the revival of that order in 1725, 
In X 7 37 George II. on his accession made him first lord of the 
admiralty, and his administration was distinguished by the 
establishment of the Royal Naval College at Portsmouth. He 
died on the X7th of January 1733, and was buried at Southill, 
in BedfordsJiire. Two of his eleven sons, Pattee (1699-X747) 
and George (x70X'i75o), became respectively the 2nd and 3rd 
viscounts. The title is still hdd by the descendants of the 

See Memoin retaitHg to Lord Torrington, Camden Sec., new series 
46, and A True Account of Uu Expedition of the British Fleet to Sicily 

gtS-1720, published anonymously, but known to be by Thomas 
vbett cf the admiralty in 1739. Forbin's Memoirs contain 
the French side of the expedition to Scotland in 1708. 

TORRIKOTON* a borough of litchfidd county, Connecticut, 
U.S.A., in the township of Torrington, on the Naugatuck river, 
about as m. W. of Haitford. Pop. (xgoo), 8360, of whom 9565 
were foreign-bom; (xgxo) X5483; of the township, including the 
borough (xQOo) 12,453; (xqxo) 16,840. It is served by the New 
York, New Haven & Hartford railway and by an electric lixie con- 
necting with Winsted. It has a public library (X865) with x 5,000 
volumes in 1909. There is a state armoury in the borough. 
Torrington is a prosperous manufacturing centre. In X905 the 
value of the factory product was $9,674,124. The township 
of Torrington, originally a part of the towiiship of Windsor, 
was first settled in X734, and was separately incorporated in 
X740. The site was covered by pine trees, which were much 
used for ship-building, and for this reason it was known as 
Mast Swamp. In 1751 a mill was erected, but there were few, 
if any, residences until 1800. In x8o6 the settlement was known 
as New Orleans village. In 18x3 members of the Wolcott family 
of Litchfield, impressed with the water-power, bought land and 
built a woollen mill, and the ^village that soon developed was 
called Wolcottville. Its growth was slow until X864. In x88x 
its name was changed to Torrington, and in 1887 the borough 
was incorporated. 

See S. Orcutt's History of Torrington (Albany, 1878), and an 
article. " The Growth of Torrington,''^ in the ConnecticuS Magatine, 
vol. ix., No. I. 

TORRINGTON (Great Torrington), a market town and 
municipal borough in the South Molton parliamentary division 
of Devonshire, England, on the Torridge, 225 m. W. by S. of 
London by the London & South-Westem railway. Pop. 
(x90x), 3241. It stands on a hill overlooking the richly wooded 
valley (rf the Torridge, here crossed by three bridges. Glove 
manufactures on a large scale, with flour and butter making 
and leather dressing, are the staple industries. The town is 
governed by a mayor, 4 aldermen and 12 councillors. Area, 
3592 acres. 

Torrington {Toritone) was the sTte of very early settlement, 
and possessed a market in Saxon times. The manor was held 
by Brictric in the reign of Edward the Confessor, and in xo86 
formed part of the Domesday fief of Odo Fitz Gamelin, which 
later constituted an honour with Torrington as its caput. In 
I22X it appears as a mesne borough under William de Toritone, 
a descendant of Odo and the supposed founder of the castle, 
which in X228 was ordered to be raxed to the ground, but is 
said to have been rebuilt in X340 by Richard de Merton. The 
borough had a fair in 1221, and returned two members to parlia- 
ment from 1295 until exempted from representation at its own 
request in X368. The government was vested in bailiffs and 
a commonalty, and no charter of incorporation was granted 
till that of Qnttn Mary in X554, wliich instituted a governing 
body of a mayor, 7 aldermen and 18 chief burgesses, with 
authority to hold a court of record every three wedcs on 
Monday; law-days and view of frankpledge at Michaelmas and 
Easter; a weekly market on Saturday, and fairs at the feasts 
of St Michael and St George. This charter was confirmed by 
Elizabeth in 1568 and by James I. in X617. A charter from 
James II. in 1686 changed the style of the corporation to a 
mayor, 8 aldermen and X2 chief burgesses. In the x6th century 
Torrington was an important centre of the clothing trade, and 
in 1605 the town is described as very prosperous, with t^- 



fairs, and a great market " furnished from far on every quarter, 
being the most convenient place for occasbns of king or county 
in those parts." The Saturday market is still maintained, but 
the fain have been altered to the third Saturday in March and 
the first Thursday in May. In 1643 Colonel Digby took up 
his position at Torrington and put to flight a contingent of 
parliamentary troops; but in 1646 the town was besieged by Sir 
Thomas Fairfax and finally forced to surrender. The borough 
records were destroyed by fire in 1724. 

See Victoria County History: Devonshire; F. T. OJby, History 
of Great Torringfon (1878) 

TORSTENSSON. LENNART, Comtr (X603-X65X), Swedish 
soldier, son of Torsten Lennartsson, commandant of Elfsborg, 
was bom at Forstena in Vestergdtland. At the age of fifteen 
he became .one ol the pages of the young Gustavus Adolphus 
and served during the Prussian campaigns of i628r-39. In 
1629 he was set over the Swedish artillery, which under his 
guidance materially contributed to the victories of Breitenfdd 
(1631) and Lech (1633). The same year he was taken prisoner 
at Alte Veste and shut up for nearly a year at Ingolstadt. 
Under Ban^r he rendered distinguished service at the* battle of 
Wittstock (1636) and during the energetic defence of Pomerania 
in 1637-38, as well as at the battle of Chemnitz (1638) and in 
the raid into Bohemia in 1639. Illness compelled him to return 
to Sweden in 1641, when he was made a senator. The sudden 
death of Ban£r in May 164 1 recalled Torstensson to Germany 
as generalissimo of the Swedish forces and governor-general of 
Pomerania. He was at the same time promoted to the rank 
of field marshal. The period of his Command (1641-1645) 
forms one of the most brilliant chapters in the military history 
of Sweden. In 1642 he marched through Brandenburg and 
Silesia into Moravia, taking all the principal fortresses on his 
way. On returning through Saxony he well nigh annihilated 
the Imperialist army , at the- second battle of Breitenfeld 
(Oct. 23, 1642). In 1643 he invaded Moravia for the second 
time, but was suddenly recalled to invade Denmark, when his 
rapid and unexpected intervention paralysed the Danish 
defence on the land side, though Torstensson'i own position in 
Jutland was for a time precarious owing to the skilful handling 
of the Danish fleet by Christian IV. In 1644 he led his army 
for the third time into the heart of Germany and routed 
the imperialists at jUterbog (Nov. 33). At the beginning 
of November 1645 he broke into Bohemia, and the brilliant 
victory of Jankow (Feb. 24, 1645) ^^ op^ before him the 
road to Vienna. Yet, though one end' of the Danube bridge 
actually fell into his hands, his exhausted army was unable to 
penetrate any farther and, in December the same year, Tor- 
stensson, crippled by gout, was forced to resign his command 
and return to Sweden. In 1647 he was created a cotmt. From 
1648 to 1651 he nded ill the western provinces of Sweden, as 
govemor-generaL On his death at Stockholm (April 7, 
165 1 ) he was buried solemnly in the Riddarholmskyrka, the 
Pantheon of Sweden. Torstensson was remarkable for the 
extraordinary and incalculable rapidity of his movements, 
though very frequently he had to lead the army in a litter, as 
. his bodily infirmities would not permit him to mount his horse. 
He was also the most scientific artillery officer and the best and 
most successful engineer in the Swedish army. 

His son. Senator Count Anders Torstensson (1641-1686), 
was from 1674 to x68i governor-general of Esthoiiia. The 
family became extinct on the sword-side in 17 27. 

See J. W. de Peystcr, History of the Life ofL. Torstensson (Pough- 
keepsie, 1855); J. Feil, Tor^ensson before Vienna (trans, by de 
Peyster, New York. 1885); Gustavus III., Eulogy of Torstensson 
(trans, by de Peystcr, New York, 1872). (R. N. B.) 

TORT (Fr. for wrong, from Lat. toriiu, twisted, participle 
of torquere)f the technical term, in the Uw of England, of these 
dominions and possessions of the British Empire where tfie 
common law has been received or practically aidopted in dvil 
affairs, and of the United States, for a dvil wrong, i^. the 
breach of a duty imposed by law, by which breach some person 
* -romcs entitled to sue for damages. A tort must, on the 

one hand, be an act which violates a general duty. Tlie rule 
which it breaks must be one made by the law, not, as in the 
case of a mere breach of contract, a rule which the law protects 
because the parties have made it for themselves. On the other 
hand, a tort is essentially the source of a private right of action. 
An offence which is punishable, but for which no one can bring 
a dvil aaion, is not a tort. It is quite possible for one and the 
same att to be a tort and a breach of contract, or a tort and a 
crime; it is even possible in one dass of cases for the plaintiff 
to have the option — for purposes of procedural advantage — of 
treating a real tort as a fictitious contract; but there is no 
necessary -or general connexion. Again, it is not the case that 
pecuniary damages are always or necessarily the only remedy 
for a tort; but the right to bring an action in common law juris- 
diction, as distinct from equity, matrimonial or admiralty 
jurisdiction, with the consequent right to damages, is invariably 
present where a tort has been committed. 

This technical use of the French word tori (which at one 
time was near becoming a synonym of wrong in literary 
English) is not very andent, and anything like systematic 
treatment of the subject as a whole is very modem. Since 
about the middle of the X9th century there has been a current 
assumption that all dvil causes of action must be founded on 
either contract or tort; but there is no historical foundation for 
this doctrine, though modified forms of the action of trespass — 
actions in comimili casu, or ** on the case " in the accustomed 
English phrase — did in practice largely supplant other more 
archaic forms of action by reason of their greater convenience. 
The old forms were designed as penal remedies for manifest 
breach of the peace or corruption of justice; and traces of the 
penal element remained in them long after the substance of the 
procedure had become private and merely dvil. The transition 
bdongs to the general history of English law. 

In England the general scope of the law of torts has never 
been formulated by authority,, the law having in fact been 
devdoped by a aeries of discoxmected experiments with the 
various forms of action which seemed from time to time to 
promise the widest and most useful remedies. But there is 
no doubt that the duties enforced by the English law of torts 
are broadly those which the Roman institutional writers summed 
up in the precept AUerum non iaedere. Every member of a 
dvilized conunonwealth is entitled to require of others a certain 
amount of respect for his person, reputation and property, 
and a certain amount of care and caution when they go about 
undertakings attended with risk to their ndghbouts. Under 
the modem law, it is submitted, the question arising when one 
man wilfully or recklessly harms another Js not whether some 
technical form of action can be found in which he is liable, but 
whether he can justify or excuse himself. This view, at any rate, 
is countenanced by a judgment of the Supreme Court of the 
United States delivered in X904. If it be ri^t, the controverted 
question whether conspiracy is or is not a substantive cause 
of action seems to lose most of its importance. Instead of the 
doubtful proposition of law that some injuries become unlawful 
only when inflicted by concerted action, we shall have the plain 
proposition of fact that some kinds of injury caimot, as a mle, 
be inflicted by one person with such effect as to produce any 
damage worth suing for. 

The precise amount of responsibility can be determined oiJy 
by full consideration in each class of cases. It is important to 
observe, however, that a law of responsibility confined to a man's 
own personal acts and defaults would be of next to no practical 
use under the conditions of modem sodety. What makes the 
law of torts really effective, espedally with regard to redress 
for harm suffered by n^ligence, is the universal mle of law that 
every one is answerable for the acts and defaults of his servants 
(that is, all persons acting under his direcu'on and taking their 
orders from him or some one representing him) in the course of 
their employment. The person actually in fault is not the less 
answerable, but the remedy against him is very commonly not 
worth pursuing. But for this mle corporations could not be 
liable for any negligence of their servants, however disastrous 



to izmooent pezBons, except ao far as it might happen to constitute 
a breach of some express undertaking. We have spoken of the 
rule as universal, but, in the case of one servant of the same 
employer being injured by the default of another, an unfortunate 
aberration of the courts, which started about two generations 
ago from small beginnings, was pushed- to extreme results, 
and led to great hardship. A partial remedy was applied in 
i8So by the Employers' Liability Act; and in 1897 a much bolder 
step was taken by the Workmen's Compensation Act (super- 
seded by a more comprehensive act in 1906). But, as the 
common law and the two acu (which proceed on entirdy 
difiezent principles) cover different fields, with a good deal of 
overlapping, and the acts are full of complicated provisos and 
excepdona, and contain very special provisions as to procedure, 
the inquovement in substantial justice has been bought, so 
far, at the price of great confusion in the form of the law, and 
considerable difficulty in ascertaining what it is in any but 
the most obvious cases. The Workmen's Compensation Act 
indudcs cases of pure acddent, where there is no fault at all, 
or none that can be proved, and therefore goes beyond the 
reasons of liability with which the law of torts has to do. In 
fact, it establishes a kind of compulsory insurance, which can 
be justified only on wider grounds of policy. A. novel and 
extiaordinary exception to the rule of responsibility for 
agents was made in the case of trade combinations by the 
Trade Disputes Act 1906. This has no interest for law as 
a science. 

There are kinds of cases, on the other hand, in which the law, 
without aid from legislation, has imposed on occupiers and other 
persons in analogous positions a duty stricter than that of 
beini^ answerable for themselves and their servants. Duties 
of this kind have been called " duties of insuring safety/.' Gene- 
rally they extend to having the building, structure, or works in 
such order, having regard to the nature of the case, as not 
to create any danger to persons lawfully frequenting, using, or 
passing by them, whidi the exercise of reasonable care and skill 
cooid have avoided; but in some cases of " extra-hazardous " 
risk, even proof of all possible diligence — according to English 
authority, which is not unanimously accepted in America— will 
not suffice. There has lately been a notable tendency to extend 
these principles to the duties incurred towards the public by 
local authorities who undertake public works. Positive duties 
created by statute are on a similar footing, so far as the breach 
of them is capable of giving rise to any private right of 

The classification of 'actionable, wrongs is perplexing, not 
because it is difficult to find a scheme of division, but because it is 
easier to find many than to adhere to any one of them. We may 
start either from the character of the defendant's act or omission, 
with r^ard to his knowledge, intention and otherwise; or from 
the character of the harm suffered by the plaintiff. Whichever 
of these we take as the primary line of distinction, the results can 
seldom be worked out without calling in the other. Taking 
fint the defendant's position, the widest governing principle is 
that, apart from various recognized grounds of immunity, a 
man is answerable for the " natural and probable " consequences 
of his acts; «'.«. such consequences as a reasonable man in his 
place should have foreseen as probable. Still more is he answer- 
able for what he did actually foresee and intend. Knowledge 
of particular facts may be necessary to make particular kinds 
of c<mduct wrongful. Such is the rule in the case of fraud and 
other allied wrongs, including what is rather unhappily called 
" slander of title," and what is now known as " unfair com- 
petition " in the matter of trade names and descriptions, short 
of actual piracy of trade-marks. But where an absolute right 
to security for a man's person, reputation or goods is interfered 
with, neither knowledge nor specific intention need be proved. 
In these cases we trespass altogether at our periL It is in 
general the habit of the law to judge acts by their apparent 
tendency, and not by the actor's feelings or desires. I cannot 
excuse myself by good motives for infringing another man's 
rights, whatever other grounds of excuse may be available; 

and it is now settled conversely, though after much doubt; 
that an act not otherwise unlawful is not, as a rule, made 
unlawful by being done from an evil motive.' This rule was 
known some time ago to apply to the exercise of rights of 
property, and' such speculative doubt as remained was removed 
by the .decision of the House of Lords in the leading case of 
AUen V' Flood (1898, A.C. x). We now know that it applies to 
the exercise of all common rights. The exceptions are very 
few, and must be explained by exceptional reasons. Indeed, 
only two are icnown to the present writer — malicious prose- 
cution, and the misuse of a" privileged occasion " which would 
justify the communication of defamatory matter if made in good 
faith. In each case the wrong lies in the deliberate perversion 
of a right or privilege allowed for the public good, though the 
predse extent of the analogy is not certain at present.^ It 
mxist be remembered, however, that the presence or absence 
of personal ill will, and the behaviour of the parties generally, 
may have an important effect, when liability is proved or 
admitted, in mitigating or aggravating the amount of 
damages awarded by juries and allowed by the court to be 
reasonable. It may likewise be noted, by way of caution, that 
some problems of criminal law, with which we are not here 
concerned, require more subtle consideration. However, it is 
hardly ever safe to assume that the bounds of dvil and criminal 
liability will be found coextensive. Perhaps we may go so far 
as to say that a man is neither civilly nor criminally liable for a 
mere omission (not being disobedience to a lawful command 
which he was bound to obey), unless he has in some way assumed 
a special duty of doing the act omitted. 

We have already had to mention the existence of grounds 
of immunity for acts that would otherwise be wrongful. Such 
grounds there must be if the law is to be enforced and justice 
administered at all, and if the business of life is to be carried 
on with any freedom. Roughly speaking, we find in these 
cases one of the following conditions: Either the defendant 
was executing a lawful authority; or he was justified by 
extraordinary necessity; or he was doing something permitted 
by legislation for reasons of superior utility, though it may 
produce damage to others, and either with or without special 
provisions for compensating damage; or he was exercising a 
common right in matters open to free use and competition; 
or the plaintiff had, by consent or otherwise, disabled himself 
from having any grievance. Pure acddent will hardly seem to 
any one who is not to be a special ground of exemption, 
the question being rather how it could ever be supposed to be a 
ground of liability. But it was supposed so by many lawyers 
down to recent times; the reason lying in a history of archaic 
ideas too long to be traced here. Exerdse of common rights 
is the categpry inhere roost difficulty arises. Here, in fact, 
the point at which a man's freedom is limited by his neighbour's 
has to be fixed by a sense of policy not capable of formal 

As Justice Holmes of the Supreme Court of the United States 
has said, we allow unlimited trade competition (so long as it is 
without fraud) though we know that many traders must suffer, 
and some may be ruined by it, because we hold that free com- 
petition is worth more to sodety than its costs. A state with 
different economic foundations might have a different law on this, 
as on many other points. This freedom extends not only to the 
exercise of one's calling, but to choosing with whom and under 
what conditions one will exerdse it. Also the law will not inquire 
with what motives a common right is exercised; and this applies 
to the ordinary rights of an owner in the use of his property 

^ It was formerly supposed that an action by a party to a con- 
tract against a third person for procuring the other party to break 
his contract was witnin the same class, «'.«. that loalice must be 
proved. But since AUen v. Flood, and the later dedston of the 
House of Lords in Quinn v. Leathern (1901, A.C. 495), this view 
■eems untenable. The {[round of action is the intentional violation 
of an existing legal right; which, however, since 1906. may 
be practised with impunity in the United Kingdom "in 
contemplation or furtherance of a trade dispute": Trade 
Disputes Act, f 3. 



as well as to the right of every man to carry on his business.^ 
Owners and occupiers of immovable property are bound, indeed, 
to respect one another's convenience within certain limits. 
The maxim or precept Sic tUere tu^mi alienum nan kudos does 
not mean that I must not use my land in any way which can 
possibly diminish the profit or amenity of my neighbour's. 
That would be false. It is a warning that both his rights and 
mine extend beyond being free from actual unlawful zniry, 
and that if either of us takes too literally the more popular but 
even less accurate maxim, " Every man may do as he will with his 
own," he will find that there is such a head of the law as nuisance. 

From the point of view of the plaintiff, as regards the kind of 
damage suffered by him, actionable wrongs may be divided 
into four groups. We have some of a strictly personal kind; 
some which affect ownership and rights analogous to owner- 
ship; some which extend to the safety, convenience and profit of 
life generally— in short, to a man's estate in the widest sense; 
and some which may, according to circumstances, result in 
damage to person, property or estate, any or all of them. Per- 
sonal wrongs touchhig a man's body or honour are assault, false 
imprisonment, seduction or " enticing away " of members of 
his family. Wrongs to property are trespass to land or goods, 
" conversion " of goods {ijt. wrongful assumption of dominion 
over them), disturbance of easements and other individual 
rights in property not amounting to exclusive possession. Tres- 
pass is essentially a wrong to possession; but with the aid of 
actions" on the case " the ground has been practically covered. 
Then there are infringements of incorporeal rights which, though 
not the subject of trespass proper, are exclusive rights of 
enjoyment and have many incidents of ownership. Actions, 
in some cases expressly given by statute, lie for the piracy of 
copyright, patents and trade marks. Wrongs to a man's estate 
in the larger sense above noted are defamation (not a strictly 
personal wrong, because according to English common law the 
temporal damage, not the insult, is, rightly or wrongly, made 
the ground of action); deceit, so-called "slander of title" 
and fraudulent trade competition, which are really varieties 
of deceit; malicious prosecution; and nuisance, which, though 
most important as affecting the enjoyment of property, is not 
considered in that relation only. Finally, we have the results of 
negligence and omission to perform 'special duties regarding 
the safety of one's neighbours or customers, or of the public, 
^hich may affect person, property, or esUte generally. 

The law of wrongs is made to do a great deal of work which, 
in a system less dependent on historical conditions, we should 
expect to find done by the law of property. We can claim or 
reclaim our movable goods only by complaining of a wrong 
done to our possession or our right to possess. There is no 
direct assertion of ownership like the Roman vindicatio. The 
law of negligence, with the refined discxissions of the test and 
measure of liability which it has introduced, is wholly modem; 
and the same may be said of the present working law of nuisance, 

^The rule that a man's motives for cxerciung his common 
rights are not examinable involves the consequence that advising 
or procuring another, who is a free agent, to do an act of this kind 
can. a fortiori, not be an actionable wrong at the suit of a thml 
person who is damnified by the act, and that whatever the adviser's 
motives may be. This appears to be included in the decision of 
the House of Lords in AUat v. Flood. That decision, though not 
binding in any American court, is approved and followed in most 
American jurisdictions. It is otherwise where a system of coercion 
is exercised on a man's workmen or customers in order to injure 
him in his business. The extension of immunity to such conduct 
would destroy the value of the common right which the law pro- 
tects: Quinn v. Leathern. The coercion need not be ohysical, and 
the wrong as a whole may be made up of acts none of which taken 
alone would be a cause of action. In this point there is nothing 
novel, for it is so in almost every case of nuisance. Conspiracy is 
naturally a frequent element in such cases, but it does not appear 
to be necessary; if it were, millionaires and corporations might 
exceed the bounds of lawful competition with inipunity whenex-er 
they were strong enough. The reasons given in Quinn y. Leathern 
are many and various, but the dcciMon is quite consistent with 
Alien v. Flood. However, the Trade Disputes Act will probably have 
its intended effect of reducing the law on this head to relative 
insignificance in England. 

though the term is of respectable antiquity. Most recent of aJt 
is the rubric of *' unfair competition," which is fast acquiring 
great importance. 

It will be observed that the English law of torts answers 
approximately in its purpose and contents to the Roman law 
of obligations ex delicto and quasi ear delicto. When we have 
allowed for the peculiar treatment of rights of property in the 
common law, and remembered that, according to one plausible 
theory, the Roman law of possession itself is closely connected 
in its origin with the law of delicts, we shall find the corre- 
spondence at least as close as might be expected a priori. Nor 
is the correspondence to be explained by borrowing, for this 
branch of the common law seems to owe less to the classical 
Roman or medieval canon law than any other. Some few 
misunderstood Roman maxims have done considerable harm in 
detail, but the principles have been worked out in all but 
complete independence. 

A list of modt-m books and monographs will be found at the 
end of the article oti *' Tom " by the pre«iit writer in the Encyclo- 
paedia of the LoL'i of Eniland (2nd ecL.). Among recent editions 
of works on the law of torti and new publicac l> 'iis the following may 
be mentioned here: Addison, by W. E. Gor<1'ia and W. H. Griffith 
(8th ed., 1906); Clert and Lindscll, by Wvratt Paine (4th ed., 
1906}; Pollock (8th ed.. 190*); Satmond. Thr Law of Torts (2nd ed., 
loio). In America t Burdickn The Law of To-ts (190O; Street. Tha 
Foundations of Legal Liabiiiiy (19106), 5 vuk. of which vol. L is 
on Tort. (F. Po.) 

TORTOISE. Of the three names generally used for this order 
of reptiles, viz. tortoise, turtle and terrapin, the first is derived 
from the Old French word tortis, ijt. twisted, and was probably 
applied first to the common European species on account of 
its curiously bent forelegs. Turtle is believed to be a corruption 
of the same word, but the origin of the name terrapin is un- 
known: since the time of the navigators of the x6th century it 
has been in general use for fresh-water species of the trofncs, 
and especially for those of the New World. The name tortoise 
is now generally applied to the terrestrial members of this group 
of animals, and that of turtle to those which live in the sea or 
pass a great part of their existence in fresh water. They consti- 
tute one of the orders of reptiles, the Chelonia: toothless reptiles, 
with well developed limbs, with a dorsal and a ventral shell 
composed of numerous bony plates, iarge firmly fixed quadrates, 
a longitudinal anal opening and an unpaired copulatory organ. 

The whole diell connsts <^ the dorsal, more or less convex.carapaoe 
and the ventral plastron, both portions being joined laterally by 
the so-called bndfe. The carapace is (with the exception oiF 
Sphargis) formed By dermal ossificarions which are arranged in 
regular series, viz. a median row (i nuchal, moctlv 8 neurals and 
1-3 supracaudal or pygal plates), a right and left row of costal 
plates which surround ard partly replace the ribs, and a consider- 
able number (about 11 pairs) of marginal plates. The {plas- 
tron conMsts oif usually 9, rarely xi, dermal bones, viz. paired 
epi-, hyo-, hypo- and xiphi-plastral plates and the unpaired 
endo-plastral; the latter is homologous with the interdavicle, the 
epi-plastra with the clavicles, the rest with so<:alled abdominal 
nbs of other reptiles. 

In most Chelonians the bony shell b covered with a hard epi- 
dermal coat, whkh is divided mto large shiekis, commonly calked 
" tortoiseshell." These homy shields or scutes do not correspond 
in numbers and extent with the underljjng bones, although there 
is a general, vague resemblance in their arrangement : for mstance, 
there U a nrund, a paired costal and a paired marginal series. 
The It^rnunok^^ mav be learned from the accompanying illns- 
traiLonA (figs. I and 7). 

The inte:giLTii£nu of the head, neck, tail and limbs are cither 
soft 4nd smcuth or scaly or tuberoilar, frequently with small osseous 

All the bones of the skull are suturally united. The dentary 
portion of the mandible consisu of one piece only, both halves 
being completely fused toother. The pectoral arch remains 
separate in the median line; it connsts of the coracoids, which slope 
backwards, and the scapulae, which stand upright and <^ten abut 
against the inside of the first pair of costal plates. Near the glenoid 
cavity for the humerus arises from the scapula a long process which 
is directed transversely towards its fellow; it represents the acromial 
process of other vertebrates, although so much enlarged, and is 
neither the precoracoid, nor the clavicle, as stated by the thought- 
less. The tail is still best developed in the Chelydridae. shortest m 
the Trionychoidea. Since it contains the large copulatory ocgan, 
it is less reduced in the males. No Chelonians possess the slightest 



t of teeth, but tbeir jaws are provided idtiilioray sheaths, with 

hanl and sharp edges, f ormiag a beak. 

The number of Chdonians known at present may be estimated 
at about aoo, the fresh-water species being far the most numerous, 
and are abundant in well-watered districts of the tropical and 
sub-tropical zones. Their number and variety decrease beyond 
the tropics, and in the north they jdisappear entirely about the 
Soih parallel in the western and about the 56th in the eastern 
beznisphere, whilst in the southern hemisphere the terrestrial 
forms seem to advance to 36** S. only. The marine turtles, 
which are spread over the whole of the equatorial and sub-tropical 
( stray beyond those liznits. As in other orders 

Tigs, i, 3.— Shell ci Testvdo pardalis, to show the divtsiona of 
the integument, which are marked by entire Hoes, and of the 
oaaeoaa carapace, these being marked by dotted lines. Hg, 1, 
Upper or donoi aspect. F^. a, Lower or ventral aspect. 

Epidermal shidds> 

C0, Costals.' 

9, Vertebrals. 

m. Marginals. 

g, Golars. 

pg, Poatgularsorhumenls. 

p. Pectorals. 

cb. Abdominals, 

pa, Preaoalsorfemorals. 

Bones of the Carapace >— 
eo^, Costals. 
fw, Neurals. 
fin. Nuchal. 

m^ Marginals. 

ent, Entoplastron 

ePf Epiplastron. ' 

kyo, Hyoplastron. 

kyp, Hypoplastron.. 

acypt Xiphiplastron, 

of . reptiles, the most specialized, and the krgest forms are 
restricted to the tropics (with the exception of Macrodemmys)\ 
but, unlike lizards or snakes, Chelonians are unable to exist in 
sterile districU or at great altitudes. 

They show a great divergence in their mode of life— some 
living constantly on land, others having partly terrestrial 
partly aquatic habiu, others again rarely leaving the water 
or the sea. The first-mentioned, the land tortoises proper, have 
short dub-shaped feet with blunt claws, and a very convex, 
heavy, completely ossified shelL In the fresh-water forms 
the joiots of the limb bones are much more mobile, the digits 
distinct, anned with fhazp dawi,.and nnited by a mernhnpe 

or web; their shell is lew oonvez, and is flattened, and more 
or less extensive areas may remain unossified, or transparent 
windows are formed with age, for instance in Batagur. As a 
rule, the degree of development of the interdigital web and of 
convexity of the shell indicates the prevalence of aquatic or 
terrestrial habits of a species of terrapin. Finally, the marine 
turtles have paddle-shaped lim^s resembling those of Cetaceans. 

Land tortoises are sufficiently protected by their carapace, 
and therefore have no need of any special modification of 
structure by means of which their appearance wo\iId be assimi- 
lated to the surroundings and thus give them additional 
security from their enemies. These, however, are few in number. 
On the other hand, among the carnivorous terrapins and fresh- 
water turtles insUnces of protective resemblance are not 
scarce, and may even attain to a high degree of specialization, 
as in Chdys, the matamata. The colours of land tortoises are 
generally plain, or in yellow and brown patterns, whilst 
those of many terrapins are singiilarly varied,- bright and 
beautiftil, especially in the very young, but all this beauty is 
lost in the adult of many spedes. 

Chelonians are diurnal animals; only a few are active during 
the night, habitually or on special occasions, as, for instance, 
during oviposition. Land tortoises are slow in all their move- 
ments, but all kinds living in water can execute rapid motions, 
either to seize their prey or to escape from danger. All 
Chelonians are stationary, residing throughout the year in 
the same locality, with the exception of the marine turtles, 
which periodically migrate to their breeding-stations. Spedes 
inhabiting temperate regions hibernate. 

Land tortoises, a few terrapins, and some of the marine 
turtles are herbivorous, the others carnivorous, their prey con- 
sisting chiefly of fish, frogs, molluscs, and other small aquatic 
animals; some, e.;. CUmntys insculpta and Cistttdo Carolina, 
have a mixed vegetable and animal diet. 

All Chelonians are oviparous, and the eggs are generally covered 
with a hard shell, mosthr elliptical, rarely quite round, at in the 
case of the marine turtles. The various modifications, and also 
the not uncommon individual variations, in the composition of 
the carapace plates and the number and disposition of the shields, 
are very significant. They show an unmistakable tendency 
towards reduction in numbers, a concentration and simplification 
<A tluB. shell and its covering shields. We can to a certain extent 
reconstruct a ^neralised ancestral tortoise and thereby narrow 
the wide gnp which separates the Chelonia from every other reptilian 
order. The eariy Chelonians possessed most likely more than 
five longitudinal dorsal rows of plates. The presence of several 
small supramarginal shields in MacrocUmmys may be an indication 
that the total number of longitudinal rows was originall^r at least 
seven. The number of transverse rows, both of plates and shields, was 
also greater. We can account for at least twelve median plates and 
as many pairs of marginals, but for only eight median and eight pairs 
of cosul shields (individual variations ob&erved in Thaicssockelys)^ 
It stands to reason that orisinally each trunk metamere had its full 
complement of plates and shields; consequently that about twelve 
trunk metameres partook in the formation of the shell, which, 

auction, a process which 

le considerable concentration and 

lught , 

the majority of recent Chelonians. In several species of Testudo 

gone , 

has reduced the costal plates to seven pairs in the American species 
of Trumyx, has completely abolished the neural plates of some 
Chelydidae, and has brought down the costal shields to four pairs in 

with subse<^uent shortening and broadening of the trunk, has under- 


the majority of recent cneionians. in several species ot lestuao 
the little nuchal shield is suppressed, thereby redudng the unpaired 
median shields to five. The complete absence of shields in the Trumv- 
ckidae and in Carettockdys is also due to a secondary process, which, 
however, has proceeded tn a different way. 

Classification of Ckelonia. 
H. Stannius in 2854 clearly separated the Trionychoidea 
from the rest. E. D. Cope, in 1870, distinguished between 
Pleurodira and Cryptodira according to whether the neck, 
Bkpri or Sapfi, is. bent sidewards, or hidden by being withdrawn 
in an S-shaped cur\'e in a vertical plane; he also separated 
Spkargis as Athecae from all the other Chelonians, for which 
L. Dollo; in 1886, proposed the term Thecophora. These terms 
are most unfortunate, misleading. Athecae (from O^icrff 
shell) has reference to the absence of a homy shdi-covering in 
the leathery turtle; but since the same character applies to 
Trionychoidea and to Carettochdys,^ nobodv^ can ^ 



the tenn Atkecae in Dollo's aenae itfen to the fact that the 
shell of the leathery turtle is not homologous with the typical 
shell or 81^ of the other Chelonians. The grouping of the 
latter into families recognizable by chiefly internal, skeletal 
chaniaers has been effected by G. A. Boulenger. For practical 
purposes the following " key " is preferable to those taxonomic 
characters which are mentioned in the descriptions of the 
different families. The relationships between them may be 
indicated as follows: — 







• Chelydidae 

'Chelydridae — Derma- 

• Platysternidae 

iTrionychoidea'' Chelonidae 
Key to the FamQies of Ckdonia. 
Shell covered with horny shields. 

Diffits distinct, with bve or four daws. 
Pectoral shields separated from the mar- 
ffinals by inframarginals. 
Tail long and crested. Plastron small 

and cruciform • Chelydridae 

Tail long, covered with rings of shields. 

' Plastron large Platysternidae 

— ., . _^ S Dermatemydidae 

Tail short ' ' 

Pectoral shields in contact with the mar- 

Plastral shields 1 1 or 13, without an inter- 

Neck retractile in an S-shaped vertical 

Plastral shields 13, an intergular being 

Neck bending sideways under the shell 

Limbs paddle-shaped, with one or two 

claws Chelonidae 

Shell without homy shields, covered with soft 
leathery skin. 
Digits disrinct, broadly Webbed, but with 

only three claws • . Trionychoidea 

Limbs paddle-shaped. 
Shell composed of regular aeries of bony 

plates. Two claws Carettochdydidae 

Shell composed of very many small pbtes 
arranged like mosaic No claws . . Sphargidae. 

I Cinostcrnidae 


5 Chelydidae 
( Pelomedusidae 

palatines, and these do not at all ventraHy roof over the rhoanae. 
The position of Spkargis in the system u still a moot question. 
G. A. Boulenger looks upon it as the sole remnant of a primitive 
group in opposition to all the other recent Chelonia; G. Uaui con- 
sidered it toe most specialized descendant of the Chdonidae, a 

Fig. 3. — ^A portion of the Osseous Plates of the Carapace of 
Spkargu coriaua, showing three large keeled plates of one of the 
longitudinal ridges of the carapace, with a number of the small 
irr^;ular plates on either side of them. 

view which has been supported by W. Dames, E. C. Case, and to 
a certain extent by J. F. van Bemmelen. For literature, &c^ 
see L. Dollo, BuU. S. k. BruxeUes (F^vrier 4, 1901). 

Sub-order IL Thecophora. — ^The bony shdl is composed of 
several longitudinal series of plates (on the dorsal side a median 
or neural, a paired lateral or costal series, and marginal plates). 
With few exceptions this shell is covered with large nomy scutes 
or shields. . 

Super-family I. Cryptodira.— The neck, if retractile, bends in 
an S-shaped curve in a vertical plane. The pdvis b not fused 
with the shell, and this is covered with large homv shidds, except 
in CareUochdys. 

Family I. Chdydridae. — The plastron is rather narrow, and cross- 
shaped; the bridge is very narrow and is covered by a pair of shields, 
the displaced abdominals, which are separated from the marginals 
by a few inframarginals. The limbs, neck and head are so stout 
that they cannot completdy be wiitidrawn into the shell. The 

tail is very lonff. Only two genera with three species, confined to 
America. Chaydra serpentina^ the " snapping turtle," ranging 
from the Canadian lakes through the Umted States east of the 

rossipioni of Central America and 
Ummtncki, th 

Sub-order L Athecae. — The shdl consists of a mosaic of numerous 

small polygonal osseous plates and b covered "tnth leathery skin . . 

without any homy shidds. The limbs are transformed into paddles, Rockies; closely allied is C _ 

without daws. Marine. Sole represenUtive Sphargis or Derma- Ecuador. Macroclemmys temmincki, the " alligator turtle, _ 
tockdys coriaua, the leathery turtle or luth ; it b the largest of living I the largest known fresh-water Chdonian, ia shell growing to a length 
Chebmans, surpassing 6 ft. in length, has a wide 
dbtribution over all the intertropical seas, but 
b very rare everywhere; a few stragglers have 
appeal as far north as the coasu of Long 
Island, and thoae of Great Britain. Holland and 
France. It b a curious fact that only adults 
and young, tmt none of intermediate size, happen 
to be known. Thb creature shows many un- 
portant features. The vertebrae and ribs are 
not fiued with, but remain free from, the cara- 
pace, and this b fundamentally different from 
and not homok^ous with that of other Chelon- 
uns. O. P. Hay has suggested that the mosak: 
polygonal components of the shell Of Sphargis 
are, so to speak, an earlier generation of osteo- 
dermal plates than the fewer and larger plates 

of the Thecophora, which in them fuse with the p.. . _tw. c...wU^ t..^u tr%j^^ ,*,*^t:m^\ 

neural arches and the ribs. Sf>liargis has. how- "^- 4-— The Snapping Turtle {Ckdydra serpentina). 

ever, the later category in the plastron and in iu first neural or nuchal 
plate. If thb suggestion b correct, thb turtle has dther k)st or 
perhaps never haodeveloped the homy shidds. The many mosaic 
plates comprise larger plates which form an unpaired medbn, 
two pairs of other dorsal, a lateral and three pairs of ventral series 
or ridges ; thirteen, or when the inner ventral pair fuses, twdve pairs 

The skull, excdlently studied by J. F. van Bemmelen, much 
tesembles that of Chelone, but so-cdled einpterygoids are absent; 
further, the pterygoids, instead of sending lateral arms to the jugals 
and maxillaries, are widdy separated fiom.thcse bones by the 

of 3 ft. It is characterized by the three series of strong prominent 
keels along the back; it inhabits the whole basin of the Mississippi 
and Missouri rivers. 

Family a. Dermatemydidae. — The pectoral shields are widely 
separated from the marginaU by inframarginals, the gulars are 
snull or absent, and the tail b extremely short. Only a few species, 
in Central America. The plastron is composed of nine plates. 
The nuchal plate has a pair of rib-like processes like those of the 
Chelydridae. One or more of the posterior costal plates meet in 
the middle line. The shell of these aquatic, broadly «-eb- fingered 
tortoises, b very flat and the covering shields are thin. They feed 



n^on laves, giaas and etpecmlly fniit. SamroMns, e.i. sahini 
With 2^. DermatemySt c.^. mow*, with 25 marginal shieldi. 

Fanuly 3. Cinostemidaeu — Cloaely allied to the two previous 
families from which Cinosiemum, the only genus, differs chiefly 
by the absence <^ the endo-plastxal plate. InframazYinals are 
present. The nuchal plate has a pair of rib-like processes. The 
neural plates are interrupted by the meetlnr of several pairs of the 
costal plates. Twenty-tnree marginal shields. In some species the 
skin oc the l«n and neck is so baggy that these parts sup in, the 
skin rollii^ co, when such a turtle withdraws into its shelL In 
some the plastron is hinsed and the creature can shut itself up tightly, 
cf. C UucoUoma of Mexico; in others the plastron leaves gaps^ 
or it is narrow and without hinges, t.g. C. odoratum, the mud turtle 
or stinkpot terrapin of the eastern half of North America. About 
a dosen qjedes, mostly Central American. 

Family 4. Flatystemidae. — Flatyaemiun nutflcephdum, the only 
necies, from Burma to southern China. The total length of these 
thiclc-headed, very long-tafled turtles is about I ft., only 5 in. 
befongins to the shell. The plastron is larve, oblong, not cruci- 
form, composed of nine plates. The nuchal b (kvoid of rib-like 
pro c es s e s . A unique arrangement b that the jugals are completely 
shut off from the orbits owing to the meeting of the post-f rontau 
with the maxillaries. 

Family 5. Testudinidae.— The shell is alwavs covered with well- 
devcfeped shields^ those which cover the plastral bridge are in 
direct contact with the maxginals. The plastron is composed 
of nine bones. The digits have four, or five daws. The beck is 
comi^etely retActile. 

This fajnily contains the majority of tortoises, divided into as 
many as 20 genera. These, starting with Emys as the least special- 
ised, can be arranged in two main diverging lines, one culmmating 
in the thoroughly aquatic Bataguft the other in the exclusively 
tcTTestxia] forms. Em/r, with the plastron movably united to the 
carapace; with well-webbed limbs, amphibious. E. orbicularis or 
evopaea was, towards the end of the Pleistocene period, distributed 
over a great part of middle Europe, remains occurring in the peat 
of England, Bielgittm, Denmark and Sweden; it b now withdrawing 
eastwards, being restricted in Germany to isoUted localities east 
of Beriin, but it reoccurs in Poland and Russia, whence it extends 
into wmmn Asia ; it b common in south Europe. The other species, 
E. Utaidinp, lives in Canada and the north-eastern states of the 
Union. CUmmys with the plastron immovably united to the cara- 
pace; temperate holarctic region, e.f. C. caspica, C. leprosa in 
Spain and Morocco; C. inscul^. in north-east America. Maia- 
codemmys with a few species m North America, e.g. M. terrapin, 
the much prised " diamond-back. " Ckrysemys with many American 
species, e-g. Ck. piciOt the " painted terrapin " and C. condnnOj 
most of them very handsomely coloured and marked when still 
young. Baiaptr and Kackut/a in the Indian sub-region. 

dstudo Carolina, the box tortoise of North Ajtnerica, with the 
plastron divided into an anterior and a posterior movable lobe, so 
that the creature can shut itself up completely. Although essen- 
tially by its internal structure a water tortoise, it has become 
absolntay terrestrial in habits, and herewith agree the kig^h- 
faacked instead of depressed shell, the short webless fingers and its 
general coloration. It has a mixed dieL The eyes of the males 
are red, those oi the females are brown. From Long Island to 
Mexicot. Cinixys, e.g. belliana of tropKal Africa, has the posterior 
portion of the carapace movably lunged. P^fins aracknoides of 
Madagascar has the front-lobe of the plastron hinged. 

Tatudo, the main genus, with about 40 species, b cosmopolitan 
in tropical and sub-tropical countries, with the exception of the whole 
of the Australian and Malay countries; most of the mcdes are 
African. T. graeca, in Mediterranean countries and islands. T. 
marginaia in Greece with the posterior marpn of the carapace 
miicn flanged or serrated, and T. ibera or maurttanica from Morocco 

to Persia; both differ from T. g^aeca by an unpaired supracaudal, 
marginal shidd, and by the possession of a strong, conical, homy 
tubercle on the hinder surface of the thigh. With age the posterior 
portion of the plastron develops a transverse ligamentous hinge. 
7*. palrj^umus, the " gopher " of southern United States, lives in 
pairs m self-dug burrows. T. U^ulata b one of the few South 
American terresmal tortoises 

Of great interest are the so^aOed eigantic land tortoises. In 
former epochs truly gigantic species of the genus Testudo had a wide 
and probably more continuous dbtributun. There was T. alias, 
of the Pliocene of the Sivalik hilb with a skull nearly 8 in. long, 
but the shell probably measured not more than 6 ft. in length, 
the restored specimen in the Natural Hbtory Museum at South 
Kensington being exaggerated. T. perpigniana of Plk)cene France 
was also large. Large land tortoises, with a length of shell of 
more than 3 ft., became restricted to two widely separated regions 
of the world, viz. the Galapagos Islands (called thus after the Spanbh 
galapago, ue, tortoise), and islands in the western Indian Otean 
viz. the Mascarenes (Bourbon, Mauritiusand Rodr^ez)and Aldabra. 
Ulien they became extinct in Madagascar is not known, but 
r. ^andidieri was a very laige kind, of apparentiy very recent date. 
At the time of their dbcovery those smaller islands were un- 
inhabited by man or any predaceous mammal. It was on these 
peaceful islands that land tortoises lived in great numbers; with 

plenty of food there was nothing for them to do but to feed, to 
propa^te, to grow and to vary. Most of the islands were or are 

inhabited by one or more typical, local forms. As they provided, 
like the equally iU-fated dodo and solitaire, a wekome provbion 
of excellent moit. ships carried them about, to be slaughtered as 

occasion required, and soon almost exterminated them; some 
were occasionally liberated on other islands, for instance, on the 
Seychelles and on the Chagos, or they were left as presents, in 
C^lon, Java or on Rotuma near the Fijis. Thus it nas come to 
pass that the few survivon have been very much scattered. The 
small genuine stock at Aldabra b now under government protection, 
in a way. A large male of T, gigantea or dothanUna or kololissa 
or ponderosa, was brought to London and weighed 870 lb; another 
specimen had in 1908 been living at St Helena for more than one 
hundred years. A specimen of T. dandini, native of the South 
Island of Aldabra, was known for many years on Egmont Island, 
one of the Chagos group, then it was taken to Mauritius and then 
to England, where of course it soon died; its shell measures 55 in. 
in a straight line, and it weighed 560 lb. The type specimen of 
r. sumeirei, supposed to have come originally from the Seychelles, 
was in IQ08 still kept in the barrack grounds at Port Loub, Mauri- 
tius, and had been known as a large tortoise for about 150 years, 
r. nosmaeri was a very thin-shelled species in Rodriguez. Of the 
Galapagos species T, epkippinm still survives on Duncan Island; 
r. ahintdoni lived on Abingdon Island; of T. eUphantopus or 
vidua. G. Baur still collected 31 specimens in 1893 on Albemarle 
Island. One monster of thb kind u said to have measured 56 in. 
over the curve of the carapace, with a skull a little more than 7 in. 
in length. All the Galapagos species are remarkable for their 
comparatively small head ami the very long nec^ which b much 
Uiger and more slender than that of the eastern species. 

Family^ 6. Chelonidae. Marine turUes, with only two recent 
genera, with three widely distributed species. The limbs are paddle- 
shapea, with onlyone or two claws, and the shell b covered with 
homy shblds. The neck b short and incompletely retractile. 
The parietals, post-frontals, squamosals, quadrato-jugals, and jugab 
are much expainded and form an additional or false roof over the 
temporal region of the skulL 

The Chebnklae are a hiriily specialized offshoot of the Cryptodlra, 
adapted to marine life. Fundamentally they agree most with the 
Testudinidae. and there b nothing; primitive about thsm except 
that they still po ssess complete series of inf ramari^nal shblds. 

CheUmo, with only 4 pairs of costal shblds, with 5 neurals and 
a broad nuchal. ^C. mydas s. viridis, the " green or edible turtb,'* 

Fig. 5.— Green Turtie {Chdone mydas), 

has, when adult, a neariy smooth shell. It- attains a length of 
nearly 4 ft, and may then weigh more than three hundredweight. 
Th^ food consbtt of algae, and of ZosUra marina. Their capture 
forms a regular pursuit wherever they occur in any numbers. 
Comparatively few are caught in the open sea, othen in staked 
nets, but the majority are mtercepted at well-known periods and 
localities where they go ashore to deposit their eggs. These are 
round, with a parchment-like shell and buried in the sand, above 
the high-tide mark, as many as 100 to 250 bdngjaid by one female. 
They are eagerly searched for and eaten. The famous turtle- 
soup b made not only of the meat and the fat, but also from the 
thkk and gelatinous layer of subcutaneous tissue which lines the 
inside of the shell. Only the females are eaten; the males, recogniz- 
able by the tonger tail, are rejected at the London market. This 
species inhabitt the Atlantic, Indian and Pacific Oceans. 

C. imbricata, the " hawksbill turtie. " The shields are thick, 
strongly overlapping each other from before backwai:ds, but m 
old specimens the shblds lose their keel, flatten and become juxta- 
posed. The homy cover of the upper jaw forms a hooked bwk. 
Thb species lives upon fish and molluscs and b not eaten; but 
b much persecuted for the homy shields which yield th» 



" tortoiae-thell, '* mt far as thb b not a fraudulent imiution. When 
heated in oil, or boiledj the shields (which singly are not thick enough 
to be manufactured into larger articles) can be welded together 
under pressure and be given aby desired shape. The " hawksbill " 

Fig. 6.— Hawksbill Turtle {Ckdone mbricala), 

ranges over all the tropical and sub-tropical seas and scarcely reaches 
3 ft. in lenffth, but such a shell yields up to 8 lb of tortoiseshell. 

Tkalassochelys caretUh the *' loggerhead, " has normally five pairs 
of costal shields, but whilst the number of shields in the genus 
Ckdofu is vmr constant, that oi the loggerhead varies individually 
to an astonishing extent. The greatest number of ncurals ob- 
served, and counting the nuchal as the first, b 8, and 8 pairs of 
costal; in all 24; the lowest numbers are 6 neurals with 5 pairs of 
costals; odd costals are frequent. The most interesting facu are 
that some of the supernumerary shields are much smaller than the 
others, sometimes mere vestiges in all stages of gradual suppression, 
and that the abnormalities are much more common in babies and 
snuU specimens than in adults. The importance of these ortho- 
pnetic variations has been discussed by H. Gadow in A. Willey's 
Zockt, RumUs, pL iiL p. 207-422, pis. 24, 25 (Cambridge 1899). 

Fig. 7. — ^Loggerhead {Tkalassochelys caretta). 

The " loggerhead " is carnivorous, feeding on fish, molluscs and 
crustaceans, and is not esteemed as food. A great part of the 
turtle-oil which finds its way into the market b obtained from it ; 
its tortoiseshell is of an inferior quality. Besides all the inter- 
tropical seas it inhabits the Mediterranean, and is an accidental 
visitor of the western coasts of Europe. The old specimen captured 
on the Dutch toast in 1894 contained the enormous numoer of 
1150 eggs. 

Super-family 2. Plcurodira. — ^The lon| neck bends laterally and 
U tucked away between the anterior portion of the carapace and the 

plastron. The dorsal and ventral ends ol the pdvb are anchylosed 
to the shell. Fresh-water tortoises of South America. Australim. 
Africa and Madagascar. 

Fig. 8.— The MatamaU (Chelys fimhnata) with tide view of 
head, and separate view of plastron. 

Family I. Pelomedusidae. — ^Neck completely retractile. Carapace 
covered with homy shields, of which the nuchal is wanting. Plastron 
composed of 11 plates. With 24 marginal and 13 plasttal shields. 

Fig. 9.— Lower view of Trionyx eupkraiUa, 
inclusive of a conspicuous intergular. Slematkaems in Africa and 
Madagascar. Pelonudusa gaUata in Madagascar and from the Cape 
to the Sinaitic peninsula. Podocnemis is common in tropical 
South America, €.g. P. exp<tiua of Brazilian rivers, noteworthy few 



the millions of ecgs which are, or were, annually collected for the 
sake of their oil/ Bates (The Naturalist on the Rwer Anuuon) 
sives a most interestii^ account of these turtles, which are entirely 

Family a. Chdydidae. — ^The neck, when bent, remains partly 
exposed. SbeQ covered with shields. Plastron composed of 9 
i^tes but covered with 13 shields. This (MaUyr, stfll represented 
by nearly 36 species, with 8 genera, is found in South America 
and in Australia. Chdys ^mbritUa, the " matamata " in the rivers of 
Guiana and North Brazil; total length about 3 ft; with animal 
diiet. Hydrome^ua, e.g. tectifera. with very long neck, in Brazil, 
much resembling Ckdodina, e.g. lonpcMis oi the Australian region. 

FamHy 3. Carettochelydtdae. — Carettockdys inscttlMa, the only 
species, in the FIv river of New Guinea; still imperfectly known. 
This peculiar turtle seems to stand in the same relation to the Chely- 
didae and to the Trionychidae as do the Chebnidae to the Tcstu- 
dimdae by the tmnsformation of the limbs into paddles with only two 
claws, and the complete reduction of the homy shields upon the 
Bhdn, which is covered with soft skin. The plastron is composed 
o£ 9 plates; the 6 neural plates are all separated from one another 
by tne costals. The premaxilla is single, as elsewhere only in 

FiC xa — ^Upper view of the Turtle of the Euphrates {Triony» 

Ckdys and in the Trionychidae. The neck is short and non-retractile. 
Length of shell about 18 in. 

Saper-family 3. Trionychoklea.— The shell is very flat and much 
atnaller than the body, and covered with soft leathery skin, but 
traces of homy structures are still represented, especially in the 
yoang of some species, by numerous scattered little spikes on the 
back ct the shell and even on the soft parts of the back. The limbs 
arc short, broadly webbed and only the three inner di^ts are pro- 
vided with claws. Head and neck are retractile, bending in a sig- 
moid curve in a vertical plane. The jaws are concealed by soft 
Hp-like flaps and the nose forms a short soft proboscis. ^ The tem- 
poral region is not covered in by any arches; the quadrate is trumpet- 
shaped as in the Chelydidae, but the jugular arch is complete. 
The pelvis is not anchylosed to the shefl. The carapace is much 
reduced in size, the ribs extending bevond the costal plates, and 
there are no marginals; except m tne African Cyctanorbts the 
neural plates form a continuous series. All the nine elements of 
the (rfastron are deficient and but very loosely connected with each 
other. Most of these reductions in the skeletal and tegumentary 
armature are the result of life in muddy waters, in the bottom of 
whkh these creatures bury themselves with only the head exposed. 
They feed upon aquatic animals; those which are partial to hard- 
■faeded molluscs soon wear down the sharp homy edges of the jaws, 
and tbkk homy crushing pads are developed in their stead. They 

only crawl upon land in order to lay their round brittle eggs. 
Trionyxes inhabit the rivers <A Asia, Africa and North America. 
Trionvx ^erox, the " soft-shelled turtle," in the whole of the Missis- 
sippi basin and in the chain of the ^reat northern lakes. T. triunguis 
in Africa, the largest species, with a length of shell of 3 ft. T. 
kurum and T, gangeticus are the commonest Indian species. The 
young are ornamented with two or three pairs of large, round, 
ocellated spots on the back. (H. F. G.) 

TORTOISESHELL The tortoiseshell of commerce consists 
of the epidermic plates covering the bony carapace of the 
hawksbill turtle, Chelonia itnbricaiat the smallest of the sea 
turtles. The plates of the back or carapace, technically called 
the head, are 13 in number, 5 occupying the centre, flanked 
by 4 on each side. These overlap each other to the extent of 
one-third of their whole size, and hence they attain a large size, 
reaching in the largest to 8 in. by 13 in., and weighing as 
much as 9 oz. The carapace has also 24 marginal pieces, 
called hoofs or claws, forming a serrated edge round it; but these, 
with the plates of the plastron, or belly, are of inferior value. The 
plates of tortoiseshell consist of homy matter, but they are 
harder, more brittle, and less fibrous than ordinary horn. 
Their value depends on the rich mottled colours they display — a 
warm translucent yellow, dashed and spotted with rich brown 
tints— and on the high polish they take and retain. The finest 
tortoiseshell is obtained from the Eastern Archipelago, par- 
ticularly from the east coast of Celebes to New Guinea; but the 
creature is found and tortoiseshell obtained from all tropical 
coasts, large supplies coming from the West Indian Islands and 

Tortoiseshell is worked precisely as hora; but. owing to the high 
value of the material, care is taken to prevent any waste in its 
working. The plates, as separated by heat from the. bony skeleton, 
are keeled, curved, and irregular in form. They are first flattened 
by heat and pressure, and superficial inequalities are rasped away. 
Eieing harder and more brittle than hom, tortoiseshell requires 
careful treatment in moulding it into anv form, and as high heat 
tends to darken and obscure the material it is treated at as low a 
heat as practkable. For many purposes it is necessary to increase 
the thickness or to add to the superficial size of tortoiseshell, and 
this is readily done by careful cleaning and rasping of the surfaces 
to be united, softening the plates in boiling water or sometimes by 
dry heat, and then pressing them tightly together by means of heated 
pincers or a vice. The heat softens and liquefies a superficial film 
of the homy material, and that with the pressure eflecu a perfect 
union of the surfaces brought together. Heat and pressure are 
also employed to mould the substance into boxes and the numerous 
artificial forms into which it is made up. 

Tortoiseshell has been a prized ornamental material from very 
early times. It was one of the highly esteemed treasures of the 
Far East brought to ancient Rome by way of Egypt, and it was 
eageriy sought by wealthy Romans as a veneer for their rich furniture. 
In modem times it is most characteristkally used in the elaborate 
inlaying of cabinet-work known as buhl fumiture, and in com- 
bination with silver for toilet articles. It is also employed as a 
veneer for small boxes and frames. It b cut into combs, moulded 
into snuff-boxes and other small boxes,, formed into knife-handles, 
and worked up into many other similar minor articles. The plates 
from certain other tortoises, known commercially as turtle-shell, 
possess a certain industrial value, but they are either opaque or 
soft and leathery, and cannot be mistaken for tortoiseshell. A 
close imitation of tortoiseshell can be made by staining translucent 
horn or by varieties of celluloid. 

TORTOLI, a town and episcopal see of Sardinia, on the east 
coast, Z40 m. N.N.E. of Cagliari by rail (55 m. direct). Pop. 
(1901), 2105. It lies 60 ft. above sea-level to the south-west of a 
Large lagoon, which renders it imhealthy. The harbour is 2) m. to 
the east, and serves for the export of the wine and agricultural 
produce of the Ogliastra. A little to the south of Tortoli was 
the station of Sulci on the Roman coast road, known to us only 
from the itineraries. 

TORTONA (anc. Dtrtona), a town and episcopal see of Pied- 
mont, Italy, in the. province of Alessandria, from which it is 
14 m. E. by rail, on the right bank of the Scrivia, at the northern 
foot of the Apennines, 394 ft. above sca-Ievel. Pop. (1901), 
11,308 (town); 17,419 (commune). Tortona is on the main line 
from Milan to Genoa; from it a main line runs to Alessandria, 
a branch to Castelnuovo Scrivia, and a steam tramway to 
Sale. Its fortifications were destroyed by the French after 
Marengo (1799); the ramparts are now turned into sh^**" 



promenades. Tbe cathedral, erected by Philip II., contains a 
remarkably fine Roman sarcophagus of the Christian period. 
Silk-weaving, tanning and hat-making are the chief industries; 
and there is some trade in wine and grain. 

Djcrtona, which may have become a Roman colony as early 
as the and century B.C. and certainly did so under Augustus, 
is spoken of by Strabo as one of the most important towns of 
Liguria. It stood at the point of divergence of the Via 
Postumia (see Liguua) and the Via Aemilia, while a branch 
road ran hence to PoUentia. A number of andent inscriptions 
and other objects have been found here. In the middle ages 
Tortona was zealously attached to the Guelphs, on which 
account it was twice laid waste by Frederick Barbarossa, in 
1 1 55 and 1163. (T. As.) 

TORTOSA, a fortified dty of north-east Spain, in the province 
of Tarragona; 40 m. by rail W.S.W. of the dty of Tarragona, 
i>n the river Ebro 22 m. above its mouth. Pop. (1900), 24452. 
•Tortosa is for the most part an old walled town on the left bank 
of the river, with narrow, crooked and ill-paved streets, in which 
the houses are lofty and massivdy built of granite. But some 
parts of the old town have been rebuilt, and there is a modem 
suburb on the opposite side of the Ebro. The slope on which 
old Tortosa stands is crowned with an andent castle, which 
has been restored and converted into barracks and a hospital. 
All the fortifications are obsolete. The cathedral occupies the 
site of a Moorish mosque built in 914. The present structure, 
which dates from 1347, has its Gothic character disguised 
by a daasiral facade with Ionic pillars and much tasteless 
modernization. The stalls in the choir, carved by Cristobal de 
Salamanca in 1588-1593, and the sculpture of the pulpits, as well 
as the iron-work of the choir-railing and some of the predous 
marbles with which the chapels are adorned, deserve notice. 
Tbe other public buildings indude an episcopal palace, a town- 
hall and numerous churches. There are manufactures of 
paper, hats, leather, ropes, porcelain, majolica, soap, spirits, 
and ornaments made of palm leaves and grasses. There is an 
important fishery in the river, and the harbour is accessible to 
vessels of 100 tons burden. Com, wine, oil, wool, silk, fruits 
and liquorice (a speciality of the district) are exported.. Hie 
dty is connected with Barcelona and Valencia by the coast 
railway, and with Saragossa by the Ebro valley line; it is also 
the terminus of a raflway to San Carlos de la Ripita on the 
Mediterranean. Near Tortosa are rich quarries of marble and 

Tortosa, the Dertosa of Strabo and the Colonia Julia Augusta 
Dertosa of nimierous coins, was a dty of the Ilercaones in 
Hispania Tarraconensis. Under the Moors it was of great im- 
portance as the key of the Ebro valley. It was taken by Louis 
the Pious in 8zz (after an unsuccessful siege two years before), 
but was soon recaptured. Having become a haunt of pirates, 
and exceedingly injurious to Italian commerce, it was made the 
object of a criisade proclaimed by Pope Etigenius III. in 1x48, 
and was captured by Ramon Berenguer IV., count of Barcdona, 
assisted by Templars, Pisans and Genoese. An attempt to 
recapture the dty in 1x49 was defeated by the heroism of the 
women, who were thenceforth empowered by the count to wear 
the red sash of the Order of La Hacha (The Axe), to import 
their dothes free of duty, and to precede their bridegrooms at 
weddings. Tortosa fell into the hands of the duke of Orleans 
in 1708; during the Peninsular War it surrendered in 181 x to 
the Fr ench under.Suchet, who hdd it till 18x4. 

TORTURE (from Lat. Icrquerej to twist), the general name for 
innumerable modes of inflicting pain which have been from time 
to time devised by the pervertMl ingenuity of man, and espedally 
for those employed in a legal aspect by the dvilized natbns of 
antiquity and of modem Europe. From this point of view 
torture was always inflicted for one of two purposes: (i) As a 
means of elidting evidence from a witness or from an accused 
person either before or after condemnation; (a) as a part of the 
punishment. The second was the earlier use, its function as a 
means of evidence arising when rules were gradually formulated 
by the experience of legal experts. 

Torture as a part of the punishment may be regarded as 
induding every kind of bodily or mental pain beyond what is 
necessary for the safe custody of the offender (with or without 
enforced labour) or the destmcUon of his life — in the language 
of Bentham, an " afflictive " as opposed to a " simple " punish- 
ment. Thus the unnecessary sufferings endured in English 
prisons before the reforms of John Howard, the peine forte 
et dure, and the drawing and quartering in executions for 
treason, fall without any straining of terms under the category 
of torture. 

The whole subject is now one of only historical interest as far 
as Europe is concerned. It was, however, up to a comparativdy 
recent date an integral part of the law of most countries 
(to which England, Aragon and Sweden^ formed honourable 
exct;ptions) — as much a commonplace of law as trial by jury 
in England.' The prevailing view, no doubt, was that tiuth was 
best obtained by confession, the regina probationum. Where 
confession was not voluntary, it must be extorted. Speaking 
generally, torture may be said to have succeeded the ordeal 
and trial by battle. Where these are found in full vigour, 
as in the capitularies of Charlemagne, there is no provision for 
torture. It was no doubt accepted reluctantly as bdng a 
quasi judicium Dei^ but tolerated in the absence of any better 
means of elidting truth, especially in cases of great gravity, on 
the illogical assumption that extraordinary offences must be 
met by extraordinary remedies. Popular feeling too, says 
Verri, preferred, as causes of evil, human beings who could be 
forced to confess, rather than natural causes which must be 
accepted with resignation. Cojifession, as probaiio probatissima 
and vox vera, was the best of all evidence, and all the machinery 
of law was moved to obtain it. The trials for witchcraft 
remain on record as a refutation of the theory. 

The opinions of the best lay authorities have been almost 
unanimously against the use of torture, even in a system where 
it was as completely established as it was in Roman law. " Tor- 
menta," says Cicero,' in words which it is almost impossible to 
translate satisfactorily, " gubemat dolor, regit quaesitor, flectit. 
libido, corrumpit spes, infirmat metus, ut in tot rerum angustiia 
nihil veritati lod relinquatur." Seneca says bitterly, " it forces 
even the innocent to lie." St Augustine* recognizes the fallacy 
of torture. **If," says he, " the accused be innocent, be will 
undergo for an uncertain crime a certain punishment, and that 
not for having committed a crime, but biecause it is unknown 
whether he committed it." At the same time he regards it as 
excused by its necessity. Hie words of Ulpian, in the Digest 
of Justinian,' are no less impressive: " The torture (quaestio) 
is not to be regarded as wholly deserving or wholly undeserving 
of confidence; indeed, it is untrustworthy, perilous and decep- 
tive. For most men, by patience or the severity of the torture, 
come so to despise the torture that the truth cannot be elidicd 
from them; others are so impatient that they will lie in any 
direction rather than suffer the torture; so it happens that they 
depose to contradictions and accuse not only themselves but 
others." Montaigne's* view of torture as a part of the punish- 
ment is a most just one: "All that exceeds a simple death 
appears to me absolute oruelty; neither can our justice expect 
that he whom the fear of being executed by being beheaded or 
hanged will not restrain should be any more awed by the imagina- 
tion of a languishing fire, burning pincers, or the wheel." 
He continues with the curious phrase: " He whom the judge 
has tortured (gehenni) that he may not die innocent, dies inno> 
cent and tortured." Montesquieu' speaks of torture in a most 
guarded manner, condemm'ng it, but without giving reasons, 
and eulogizing England for doing without it. llie system was 
condemned by Bayle and Voltaire. with less reserve. Among 

^Biit even in these countries, whatever the law was, torture 
certainly existed in fact. 

' Primitive systems varied. There is rio trace of it in Babylonian 
or Mosaic law, but Egyptian and Assyrian provided (or it; and the 
story of Regulus seems to show that it was in use at Cartlnge. 

." Pro SuUtt, c. 28. « De civ. Dei, bk. xix. c 6, 

' Dig. xlviii. 18, 33. • Essay Ixv. (Cotton's txana.> 

^Esprit des lots, bk. vi. c. 17. 



the Germans, Sonnenfds (1766), and, among the Italians, 
Beccaria,* Vcrri *aiid Manxoni' will be found to contain most that 
caii be said on the subject. The influence of Beccaria in rendering 
the use of torture obsolete was undoubtedly greater than that of 
any other legal reformer. The great point that he makes is 
the unfair incidence of torture, as minds and bodies differ in 
strength. Moreover, it b, says he, to confound all relations to 
expect that a man should be both accuser and accused, and that 
pain should be the test of truth, as though truth resided in the 
mttsdes and fibres of a wretch under torture. The result of the 
torture is simply a matter of calculation. Given the force of the 
muscles and Uie sensibility of the nerves of an innocent person, 
it is required to find the degree of pain necessary to make him 
confess himself guilty of a given crime. Bentham's* objection 
to torture is that the effect is exactly the revexse of the intention. 
" Upon the face of it, and probably enough in the intention of 
the frmmen, the object of this institution was the protection 
of innocence; the protection of guilt and the aggravation of the 
pressure upon innocence was the real fruit of it." The apologists 
of torture are chiefly among jurists. But theoretical objections 
to it are often urged by the authors of books of pnictice, as by 
Damhouder, von Rosbach, von Boden, Voet, and others named 
below under the head of The Netherlands, It is worthy 
of note as illustrative of the feeling of the time that even Bacon* 
compares experiment in nature to torture in dvil matters as the 
best means of eliciting truth. Muyart de Vouglans* derives 
the origin of torture from the law of God. Other apologists 
are Simancas, bishop of Badajoz,^ Engel,* Pedro de Castro,* 
and in England Sir R. Wiseman." 

Grc«cff.~The opinion of Aristotle was in favour of torture as a 
mode of proof. " It is," he lays, " a kind of evidence, and appears 
to carry with it absolute credibility because a kind of constraint 
is apptied." It is classed as one of the "artless persuasions'* 
iSnt^m wirrm).*^ " It was the surest means of obtaining evidence, 
says Deroosthenes.1* At Athens slaves, and probably at times 
resident aliens, were tortured," in the former case generally with 
the master's consent, but torture was seldom applied to free citisens,** 
soch application being forbidden by a psephism passed in the 
arehonwip of Scamandrius. After the mutilation cm the Hermae 
in 415 B.C. a proposition was made, but not carried, that it diould 
be applied to two senators named by an informer. In this particular 
case Aadoddes gave up all his slaves to be tortured." Torture was 
aometimes inflicted in open court. The rack was used as a punish- 
ment even for free citizens. Antiphon was put to death by this 
means.* The torture of Nkias by the Syracusans is alluded to by 
Thncydtdes^'as an event likely to happen, and it was only in order 
to avoid the possibility of inconvenient disckmires that he was put 
to death without torture. Isocrates and Lyrias refer to torture 
under the generic name of ^rptfikt^a, but it was generally called 
fi^mfot, in the plural, .like tormenta. As might be expected, 
tortiuc was frequently inflicted by the Greek despots, and both 
Zeno and Anaxarchus are said to have been put to it by such irre- 
spoosihle authorities. At Sparta the despot Nabis was accustomed, 
as tre learn from Potybius.'* to put persons to death by an instrument 
of torture in the form of his wife Apega. a mode of torture no doubt 
reaembUttg the Jungfemkuss once used in Germany. At Argos, as 
Diodorus informs us (xv. 57), certain conspirators were put to the 
torture in 371 B.C.'* 

* Dei DeUlU e deUe pene, c jcvi. * Osservasiotn sutta tortura. 

* Staria ddta Cdcnna infame. * Works, vii. 525. 

* ATov. Org., bk. i. aph. 98. In the Advatuement of Leamint, 
bk. iv. cb. 4, Baoon collects many instinccs of constancy under 

* lustitmts du droU crimind (Paris, I7;}7). 
' De catkclkis mstituiiomibus liber, aa praecatendas et exHrpamdas 

ete$ admodum neceuarius (Rome, 1575). 

• De tortmra ex forts chnstianis nan proscnbenda (Leipzig, 1733). 

• D^ensa de la lortmra (Madrid, 1778). 
" Lam ef Lams, p. 123 (London, 1666). 

■> RheL t. t& 36. " /n Onetum, i. 874. 

<* Usually by the diaetetae in the Hephaestaeum, Isocratet, 
rra^es. 561. 

** The opinion oC Cicero (De parlitionibta oratoriis, | 34), that It 
wassoapiMied at Athens and Rhodes, seems, as far as reg^ras Athens, 
not to be justified by existing evidence. 

" The demand for, or the giving up of, a slave for torture was called 
Vjp&iX^vif sis A&^flvof* 

" In the Kinae of Aristophanes, v. 617, there is a list of kinds of 
torture, and the wheel is alluded to in LysisinUa, v. 846. 

" vii. 86. » xiii. 7. 

* For the whole subject, see Diet. AnL, m.v, Tormenta. 

who ^ 

Rome, — ^The Roman system was the baas of all subsequent 
European systems which recognised torture as a part of their pro- 
cedure, and the rules attained a refinsment beyond anything 
approached at Athens. The law of torture was said by Cicero to rest 
originally on custom {mores majorum), but there is no allusion to it 
in the Twelve Tables. There are frequent allusions to it in the 
classical writers," both of the republic and the empire. The law, 
as it existed under the later empire, is contained mainly in the titles 
De ynaestumtbus^ of the Digest and the Code^ — the former consisting 
lar]gely of opinions from the Senteniiae reupuu of Paulus," the latter 
being for the most part merely a repetition of constitutions contained 
in the Thcodosian Code.** Both subsuntive law and procedure 
were dealt with by these texts of Roman law, the latter, however, 
not as full^ as in medieval codes, a large discretion being left to the 
judges Torture was used both in dvil and criminal tnab, but in 
the lormer only upon slaves and freedmen or infamous persons (after 
Noo. xc I, I, upon ivtoti and obscuri if they showed signs of corrup- 
tion)— such as gladiators— and in the aSsence of alia mumijesta 
indicta^ as in cases affecting the inheritance (jes kereditariae). Its 
place in the case of free dtiiens was taken by the reference to the 
cath of the party. During the republic torture appears to have 
been confined to sbves in all cases, out with the empire a free man 
became liable to it if accused of a crime, though in most cases not as 
a witness. On an accusation of treason every one, whatever his 
rank, was liable to torture, for in treason the condition of aU was 

Jual.* The same was the case of those accused of sorcery {magi), 
10 were regarded as kumani fjtneris inimici.' A wife might be 
tortured (but only after her slaves had been put to the torture) if 
accused 01 poisomng her husband. In accusations of crimes other 
than treason or sorcery, certain persons were protected by the dignity 
of their position or their tender age. The main exemptions were 
contained in a constitution of Diocletian and Maximian, snd included 
soldiers, nobles of a particular rank, i^e. eminentissimi and perfectis- 
simi, and their descendants to the third generation, and aecnriones 
and their children to a limited extent {tormenta mMf^ols)— that is 
to say, they were subject to the torture of the flumbatae in certain 
cases, such as fraud on the revenue and extortion. In addition to 
these, priests (but not clergy of a lower rank), children under fourteen 
and pregnant women were exempt. A free man could be tortured 
only where he had been inconsistent in his depositions, or where 
thoe was a suspicion that be was lyii^." The rules as to the torture 
ol slaves were numerous and precise. It was a maxim of Roman 
law that torture of slaves was the most efficacious means of obtaining 
truth.** They could be tortured either as accused or as witnesses 
for their mastera in all cases, but against their masten imly in 
accusations of treason, adultery, frauds 00 the revenue, coining, and 
similar offences (which were regarded as a species of treason), 
attempts by a husband or wife on the life of the other, and in cases 
where a master had bought a slave for the special reason that he 
should not give evidence against him. The privilege from accusa- 
tkms by the slave extendea to the master's father, mother, wife, or 
tutor, and also to a former master. On the same principle a ireedman 
could not be tortured against his patron. The privilege dkl not 
apply where the slave was joint property, and one of his masten had 
been murdered by the otnet. or where he was the property of a 
corporation, for in such a case he could be tortured in a ch^ge against 
a member of the corporation. Slaves belonjging to the inheritance 
could be tortured in actions concerning the inheritance. The adult 
slaves of a deceased person could be tortured where the deceased had 
been murdered. In a charge of adultery against a wife, her husband's, 
her own and her father's slaves could be put to the torture. A 
slave manumitted for the express purpose of escaping torture was 
regarded as still liable to it. Before putting a slave to torture 
without the consent of his master, security roust be given to the 
master for his value and the oath of calumny must be uken.** The 
master of a slave tortured on a false accusation could recover double 
hb value from the accuser. The undergoing of torture had at one 
time a serious effect upon the after-life of the slave, for in the time of 
Gaius a slave who had been tortured could on manumissk>n obtain 
no hieher civil rights than those of a dedilicius.'^ The rules of 
procedure were conceived in a spirit of as much fairness as such rules 
could be. Some of the most important were these: The amount 
of torture was at the discretion of the judge, but it was to be so 

* An instance is Pliny's letter to Trajan {Ejnsl. x. 97), where he 
mentions having put to the torture two Christian deaconesses 
{ministrae). The words are confitenUs iUrum ac tertio interropwi. 
Thb supports Tertullian's objection to the torture of Christians, 
tormumnr confitentes {ApeL c. 2). 

" Qnaestio included the whole process of which torture was a part. 
In the words of Cu jacius, Qtiaestio est interrogatio quae fit per temuntOt 
wd de reis, vel de testtbus oui facto intervenisse dicuntur, 

" Dig. xlviii. 18; Cod. u. 41. 

»> V. 14. 15, 16. " ix. 35. 

'» Cod. ix. 8, 3. " Ibid. ix. 8, 4- . 

w.lbid. he 18, 7. " IbiH. iv. 20, 13. 

«• Ibid. i. 3, 8. 

* Ibid. ii. 59, 1, 1. The demand of another man's slave for torture 
was postulare. 

M Gains i. 13. 



applied as not to injure life or lim1>. If to applied the judge was 
injamis. The examination was not to begin by torture; other 
proofs must be exhausted first. The evidence' must have advanced 
so far that nothing but the confession of the slave was wanting to 
complete it. Those of weakest frame and tendercst age were to be 
tortured first. Except in treason, the unsupported testimony of a 
single witness was not a sufficient ground lor torture. The voice 
and manner of the accused were to be carefully observed. A spon- 
taneous confession, or the evidence of a oemnal enemy, was to be 
jeceived with caution. Repetition of the torture could only be 
ordered in case of inconsistent depositions or denial in the face of 
strong evidence. There was no rule limiting the number of repeti- 
tions. Leading questions were not to be asked. A judge was not 
liable to an action for anything done during the course of the examina- 
tion. An appeal from an oirder to torture was competent to the 
accused, except in the case of slaves, when an appeal could be made 
only by the master.* The appellant was not to be tortured pending 
the appeal, but was to remain in prison.* The 


juestions, the iorlores applied tKe instruments. The principal 
Jorms of torture in use were the egantfiu, or rack (mentioned as far 
back as Cicero).* the plumbatae, or leaden balls, the tmgulae, or 
barbed hooks, the tamtna^ or hot plate, the mala maiuw,* and the 
fiduvlaie, or cord comproaing the arm. Other allusions in the 
Diifst and Code, in addition to those already dted, may be shortly 
noticed. The testimony of a gladiator or infamous person (such as 
an accomplice) was not valid without torture.* This was no doubt 
the origin of the medieval maxims (which were, however, by no 

means universally recognised) — VUitas persoHat esi justa causa 
iorquendi leslem, and Tortun purt/almr imfamia. Torture could not 
be inflicted during the forty days of Lent.' Robbers and {Urates 

might be tortured even on Easter day, the divine pardon being hoped 
for where the safety of society was thus assured.* Capital punish- 
ment was not to be suffered until after conviction or confession under 
torture.* Withdrawal from prosecution {abeUiio) was not to be 
allowed as a rule after the accused had undergone the torture.** In 
charges of treason the accuser was liable to torture if he did not 
prove his case." The infliction of torture, not judicial, but at the 
same time countenanced by law, was at one time allowed to creditors. 
They were allowed to keep their debtors in private prisons, and most 
cruelly ill-use them, in order to extort payment." Under the empire 
private prisons were forbidden." In the time of Juvenal the Roman 
ladies actually hired the public torturen to torture their domestic 
slaves.** As a part of the punishment torture was in frequent use. 
Crucifixion, mutilation, exposure to wild beasts in the arena and 
other cruel modes of d^roying life were common, especially in the 
time of the persecution of the Christians under Nero.^ Crucifixion 
as a punishment was abolished by Constantine in ^i^, in veneration 
of the memory of Him who was crucified for mankind. On the other 

hand, where the interests <^ the Church were concerned the tendency 
was in favour of greater severitjr. Thus, by the Theodosian Code, 
a heretic was to be flc^sged with lead ifontusus plwmbo) before 
banishment,** and Justinian made liable to torture and exile any one 
insulting a bishop or priest in a church, or saying liuny, if a Uyman." 

*The evidence on which the accused might be tortured was 
expressed in Roman law by the terms arpimtntum and indicium 
(used technically as early as Cicero, VerreSt L lo and 17). The 
latter term, as will be seen, afterwards became one of the most 
important in the law of torture, but the analysis of indicium is bter 
than Roman law. Indicium was not quite the same thing as semi- 
plena probatio, though the terms appear to be occasionally used as 
synonyms. Indicium was rather the foundation or cause of 
probatiot whether plena or semiplena. An imdidum or a concurrence 
of indicia might, according to circumstances, constitute a plena or 
semiplena pr^atio. The phrase Uiitima indicia was sometimes used. 
In Sir T. Smith's work, c 24 (see below), index means a prisoner 
acting as an approver under torture. Tifrmentum, Uniura and 
moeifio appear to be equivalent terms. The medieval jurists 
derived the first of these from torquere menUm, an etymok)gy as false 
as Ustamentum from ItstaUo mentis {JnU. ii. 10 pr.). 

■ Dit. xlix. L 15. ' Cod, vu. 62, 13. 

« MUo, IviL 

* Of doubtful meaning, but periiapa like the " Little Eaae^ of the 
Tower of London. 

* Dit. xxii. 5t 21, a. * Cod. ill 13, 6. 

* Ibid. iii. 13, 10. * Ibid. ix. 47, ih. 
>• Ibid. ix. 43. 3. u Ibid. ix. 8, 3. 

" See, for instance, Livy vi. 36. >* Cod. i. 4, 33; ix. 5. 

" Ibid. vi. 4«o. 

I* As an example of such punishments, cf. the well-known tines 
of Juvenal {SaL 1. 155):— 

" Taeda lucebis in ilia. 
Qua stantes ardent qui fixo gutture fumant." 
For other poetical allusions, sec vi. 480, xiv. 3i ; Lucr. iii. 1030; 
Propcrt. iv. 7, 35. 

•• xvi, 53. 

" Npe. cxxiii. 31. On the subject of torture in Roman law 
reference may be made to Wasscrschcbcn, Historia quaestionum 
per lormenla apud Romanos (Berlin, 1836): H. Wallon. Histoire de 
fesdarngs dams Fanli^Ui (Paris, 1879); Mommsen, Rihnisckes 

The Leges barSarorum are interesting as forming the Gnk of connexkm 
between the Roman and the medieval systems. Through them the 
Roman doctrines were transmitted into the Roman law countries. 
The barbarian codes were based chiefly on the Theodosian Code. 
As compared with Roman law there seems to be a leaning towards 
humanity, e.g. the provision for redemption of a slave after confession 
by s. 40 of the Lex salua. After the edict of Cundobald in 501 
the combat rather than the torture became the expressoo of the 
judicium Dei. 

The Ckurdk-^AB far as it could the Church adopted the Roman 
la^ir. The Church generally secured the almost entire immunity of 
its derzy, at any rate of the higher ranks, from torture by civil 
tribunali;** but in general, where laymen were concerned all persona 
were equaL In man^ insunccs councils of the Church pronounced 
against torture, e.g. in a synod at Rome in 384.'* Torture even of 
heretics seems to nave been originally left to the ordinary tribunals. 
Thusabullof Innocent IV., in 1383, directed the torture of heretics by 
the civil power, as bein^ robbera and murderen of souls, and thieves 
of the sacraments of God.** The Church also enjoined torture for 
usury ."^ A characteristic division of torture, accepted by the Church, 
but not generally acknowledged by lay authorities, was into spiritual 
and corporal, the latter being amply the imposition of the oath of 
purgation, the only form originally in use in the eodenastical courts. 
The canon law contains little on the subject of torture, and that little 
of a comparatively humane nature. It laid down that it was no sin in 
the faithful to inflict torture." but a priest might not do so with hia 
own hands,** and charity was to be used in all punishments.** No 
confession was to be extracted by torture** and it was not to be 
ordered indiciis nou praecedentHms.* The principal ecclesiastical 
tribunal by whkh torture was inflkrted in more recent times was the 
Inquisition. The code of instructions issued by Torquemada in 
Spain in 1484 provided that an accused person might be put to the 
torture if semipUna probatio existed against the accusrd-'that is. 
so much evidence as to raise a grave and not merely a light presump- 
tion of guilt, often used for the evidence of one eye or ear witness of 
a fact. If the accused confessed during torture, and afterwards 
confirmed the confession, be was punished as convicted; if he 
retracted, be was tortured a^in, or subjected to extraordinary 
punishment. One or two inquisitors, or a commissioner of the Holy 
Oflke, were bound to be present at every examination. Owing to the 
occurrence of certain cases of abuse of torture, a decree of Philip II. 
was issued, in 1558, forbidding the administration of torture 
without an order from the couWil. But this decree does not appear 
to have been fully observed. By the edict of the inquisitor-general 
Vald^ in 1561, torture was to be left to the prudence and equity of 
the judges. They must consider motives and dreumstances before 
decreeing torture, and must declare whether it is to be employed in 
caput i>roprium, «.«. to extort a confession, or in catut alienum, i.e. 
to incriminate an accomplice. Torture was not to be decreed until 
the termination of the prooeaa and after defence heard, and the 
decree was subject to appeal, but only in doubtful cases, to the Council 
of the Supreme. It was also only in doubtful cases that the inquisitora 
were bound to consult the council; where the law was clor (and 
of this they were the judges) there need be no consulution, and no 

appeal was alktwed. On ratification twenty-four houra afterwanls 
ot a confession made under torture, the accused might be reconciled, 
if the inquisitors believed him to be sincerely repentant. If 
convicted of bad faith he might be relaxed, i.e. delivered to the 
secular power to be burned. The inquisitora had a discretion to 
the aoci 

purntion by oath 
he rule whkJi allows 

albw the accused to make the canonical ^_ 
instead of undergoing corporal torture, but the 1 
this to be done at the same time discountenances it as fallaci«Nis. 
It is remarkable that the rules do not allow much greater efficacy 
to torture. They speak of it almost in the terms of Roman law 
as dangerous and uncertain, and depending for its effects on 
physical strength." Torture had ceased to be inflicted before the 
suppressbn ot the Inquisition, and in 1816 a papal bull decreed 
that torture should cease, that proceedings should be public, and 
that the accuser should be confronted with the accused. The 
rules in themselves were not so cruel as the construction put upon 
them by the inquisitors. For instance, by Torquemada'a instruc- 
tions torture could not be repeated unless in case of retractation. 
This led to the subtlety of calling a renewed torture a continuation. 

Sirafrecki, iii. 5 (Leipzig. 1899); Creenidge, Legal Procedure of 
Cicero's Time, p. 479 (OxTord, 1901). 

** See Escobar, tneel. Mor. tract, vi. c. 3. They were to be tor- 
tured only by the clergy, where possible, and only on indicia pf 
special gravity. 

** Lea, Superstition and Force, p. 419 (3rd ed., Philadelphia. 

** Leges el constituliones contra kaeretices, | 36. 

** Lccky, Rationalism in Europe, ii. 34. 

«» Decretum, pt. ii. 33. 4, 45. ** Ibid. pt. i. 86, 35. 

** Ibid. pt. iL 13, 3, 11. ** Ibid. pt. iL 15, 6, I. 

*• Decretals, V. 41.6. 

** The rules will be found in H. C. Lea. Hist, of tke Inquisition of 
Spain (iqo6). See also Hist, of the Inquisition of the Middle Ages 
(New York, 1888) by the same writer; R. Schmidt, DieHerhunfi 
des Inquisitionsprocosses (Beriin, 1902). 



and not a repetitioii. The rules of Torqaemada and d Vald^ are 
tboae of the greatest historical importance, the latter forming the 
code of the Holy Office until its suppression, not only in Spain, but 
in other countries where the Inquisition was established. But 
•evcral other manuals of procedure existed before the final perfec- 
tion of the s^em bv Vaid6(. The earliest is perhaps the instruc- 
tions for inquisitors (Directorittm inpiisiUfrum) compiled a century 
earlier than Torquemada by Nicholas Eymerico, grand inquisitor 
of An^oa about 1^68.^ Rules of practice were also framed two 
centuries later by Simancas, whose position as an apologist has been 
already Aated. The textbook of procedure of the Italian Inquisi- 
tion was the Sacro arsenaU.* In 1^15 and 1550 instructions for the 
guidance of inquisitors were issuea by Charles V. The liability of 
a jud^ for exceeding the law was not always recognized by the 
Inquisition to the same extent as by the lay tribuiuds. Llorcntc 
^ves an instance of a warrant by an inquisitor to a licentiate order- 
ing the torture of an accused person, and protesting that, in case 
of death or fracture of limbs, the fact is not to be unputed to the 

Thitt far of the law. In practice all the insenuity of cruelty was 
ezeiriaed to find new modes of torment.* These cruelties led at 
times to remonstrance from the civil power. One example is the 
edict of Philip II. Just mentioned. Another and an earlier one is 
an ordcMmamct of rhilip the Fair, in 1302, bidding the Inquisition 
confine itself within the limits of the law.* At Venice the senate 

lecreed that three senators should be present as inquisitors. 
As the practice of torture became more systematized, it grew to 
be the subject of casuistical inquiiy by churchmen to an extent far 
exceeding the scanty discussion 01 the ciuestion in the text of the 
canon law. It will be sufficient here to cite as an example the treat- 
ment of it bjr Liguori, who incorporates the opinions 01^ many of the 
Spanish casuists. On the whole, nis views appear to be morv h u ni jne 
than the prevailing practice. The object of torture 1)<: do fines 
"very neatly as being to turn semipUna into plena proimuiy. For 
this proper indicia are necessary. He then proceeds uj d'-r ide 
certain questions which had arisen, the most interesting of u. ]i ich 
deal with the nature of the sin of which the accused and tKi- iu.lge 
are (uilty in particular instances. A judge sins eravely iF U'- il':>es 
not attempt all milder means of discovenng trutn before 1^ s :rtJng 
to torture. He sins in a criminal cause, or in one of notabl : i n f. l n ly, 
if he lands the accused by oath to tell the truth before there m^ ;. j joi 
against him. It is the same if without oath he uses threats, terror 
or exhibition of torments to confound the witness.* If any one, to 
avoid grave torments, charges himself with a capital crime, he does 
not sin mortallv.' It was a doubtful question whether he sinned 
gravely in sucn a case. Escobar at an earlier date supported the 
morally dangerous view that an inquisitor may follow a probable 
cqptnion in oraerii^ torture, relinquisning a more probable.* 

En^amd. — It is the boast of the common law of England that it 
never recognized torture as lesal. One, perhaps the chief, reason 
for this position taken by the law is the difference of the nature of 
the procedure in criminal cases from that in general use in European 
countries. To use words more familiar in foreign jurisprudence, 
the English system is accusaioriai as distinguibshed from inquisitorial. 
In tlw former the accuser has to prove guilt, in the latter the accused 
has to prove innocence. The common law of England has always 
shown Itself averse from the inquisitorial system, and so (at least 
in theory) to the torture which may be regarded as an outcome of 
the system whose one end was to obtain a confession from the accused. 
The tendency of the small amount of statute law Ibearing on the 
subject is in the same direction. It was provided by Magna Carta, 
I 39. *' that no free man . . . should be destroyed in any way unless 
by. le^ Judgment of his equals or by the law of the land." On 
this Sir b. Coke comments. No man destroyed, &c., that is, fore- 
judged of life or Umb, disinherited, or put to torture or death."* 
The act of 27 Hen. VIII. c. 4 enacted that, owing to the frequent 
escape of pirates in trials by the civil law, " the nature whereof 
is t&st before any judgment of death can be given against the 
otfenders tlKy must pliunly confess their offence (which they will 
never do without torture or pains)," such persons should be tried 
by jury before commissioners under the Great Seal. Finally, the 
Bill of R^hts provided that cruel and unusual punishments ought 
not to be infUcted. The opim'ons of the iudges have been invariably 
against torture in theory, however mucn some of them may have 

* An edition was published at Rome in 1558, and a compendium at 
Lisbon in 1762, and by Marchena at Montpdlier in 182 1. 

* It was by Father Masini, and went through numerous editions 
(complete or compeixlia) from 1558 to 1730. Among other manuals 
of practice were those of Clarenas Caesar (1655), Morellet (1762). 

' Uorente c. xiv. 

* Amom: others were the gradual pouring of water drop by drop 
on a particular spot of the txidy, the tormerUo de Icca, or pouring of 
water into a gauze bag in the throat, which gradually forced the 
gauae into thie stomach, and the pSndoia, or swinging pendulum, 
so graphically described in one of Edgar Poe's tales. 

•Ordommanees des rois, L 346. 

* TJied. mar. bk. tx. | ao2. ' Ibid. | 374. 
•Ibid. T. 3 and 7. * 2 InsL 48 b. 

been led to countenance it m practice. The strongest authority 
is the resolution of the judges in Felton's case (1628), ''^that he ought 
not by the law to be tortured by the rack, for no such punishment 
is known or allowed by our law."" In accordance with this are 
the opinions of Sir John Fortescue," Sir Thomas Smith ^ and Sir 
E. Coke. The latter says, " As there is no law to warrant tortures 
in this land, nor can they be justified by any prescription, being 
so lately brought in."" In spite of all this, torture in criminal 

f>roceedings was inflicted in England with more or less frequency 
or some centuries, both as a means of obtaining evidence and as 
a part of the punishment. But it should be remarked that torture 
of the former kind was invariably ordered by the Crown or council, 
or by some tribunal of extraordinary authority, such as the Star 
Chamber, not professing to be bound by the rules of the common 
law. In only two instances was a warrant to torture issued to a 
common law judge.** 

A lx:ence to torture is found as early as the Pipe Roll of 34 Hen. II.** 
The Templars were tortured in 1310 by royal warrant addressed 
to the mayor and sheriffs of London.'** In this case it is recorded that 
torture was unknown In England^ and that no torturer was to be 
found in the realm.** A commission was issued concerning the 
tortures at Newgate in I334-" The rack in the Tower is said to 
have been introduced by the duke of Exeter in the reign of Henry VI., 
and to have been thence called "the duke of Exeter's daughter."** 
In this reign torture seems to have taken its place as a part of 
whatmay be called extraordinary criminal procedure, claimed, and 
it may be said tacitly reco^nind, as exercisable by virtue of the 
prerogative, and continued in use down to 1640.** The infliction 
of torture gradually became more common under the Tudor monarchs. 
Under Henry VI 1 1, it appears to have been in frequent use. Only 
two ra«^ are recorded under Edward VI., and eight under Mary.** 
The fi: ti^n of Elizabeth was its culminating point. In the words 
of HaMim, " the rack seldom stood idle in the Tower for all the 
latuT ]Ktrt of Elizabeth's reign."" The varieties of torture used at 
thi-i jirrlod are fully described by Dr Lingard,** and consisted of 
the r.LC k, the scavenger's daughter,** the iron gauntlets or bilboes, 
ari' 3 I h'- cell called Little £ase." The registers of the courK:il 
dL he Tudor and eariy Stuart reigns are full of entries aa to 

thw ».«. of torture, both for state and for ordinary offences.'* Among 
notable prisoners put to the torture were Anne Askew, the Jesuit 
Campion, Guy Fawkes" and Peacham (who was examined by Bacon 
" before torture, in torture and after torture ").*' The prevalence 
of torture in Elizabeth's reign led to the well-known defence at- 
tributed to Lord Burghley, " A declaration of the favourable dealing 
of Her Majesty's commissioners appointed for the examination of 
certain traitors, and of tortures unjustly reported to be done upon 
them for matter of religion," 1583." The use of torture in England 
being always of an extraordinary and extra-judicial nature, it is 

»• 3 State Trials, 371. 

** De lamditnu lepim Angliae, c 22. 

** CommonveaUh of EnMand, bk. ii. c. 27 (1^3; ed. by L. Alston, 
1906). It is curious that Sir T. Smith, with all his hatrnl of torture, 
was directed by a warrant under the queen's seal alone (not throueh 
the council) to torture the duke of Norfolk's servants in 1571. In 
a letter to Lord Burghley he pleaded for exemption from so hateful 
a task. 

**^ Ina. 35. Nevertheless, in the trials of Lord Essex and 
Southampton, Coke is found extolling the queen's mercy for not 
racking or torturing the accused (i State Trials, IA38). (See further 
authontics in Pollock and Maitland, HiU. of English Law, ii. 656.) 

** Jardine, Reading on the Use of Torture in Uu Criminal Law of 
England {iBx7), p. $2. 

** L. O. Pike, Hist, of Crime in EngjUind, I 427. 

** Rymer, Foedera, iu. 228, 232. 

*' Walter of Hemingford, p. 256. 

*• Pike i. 481. » 3 Jnst. ^4. 

** This is the date of the latest warrant in Jardine*8 work, but it 
was used on three Portuguese at Plymouth during the Common- 
wealth (Thurioe iii. 298). 

** It is to be noticed, as Jardine observes, that all these are cases 
of an ordinary nature, and afford no ground for the assertions made 
by Strutt and Bishop Burnet that torture was used to heretics as 

« ConsL HisL I 201. 

** Hist. ofEn^and, vol. viii. app. note v. 

** These two were exactly opposite in principle. The rack stretched 
the limbs ci the sufferer; the scavenger's daughter compressed him 
into a ball. 

** Fifty-five of these will be found in the appendix to Mr Jardine's 
work. An ordinary robber of plate was threatened with torture 
in 1567.— Froude, Hist, of England, viii. 386. 

"It is not certain whether he was racked, but probably he was, 
in accordance with the king's letter: " If he will not otherwise confess 
the gentlest tortures are to bc^ first used to him, and so on, step by 
step, to the most severe, and so God speed the good work." 

^ Dalrymple, Memoirs and Letters of James /. p. 85; Macaulay's 
essay on the works of Bacon. 

**Lord Somers't TrotU^ i. 1891 



comparatively certain that it could hardly have been applied with 
that observation of forms which existed in countries where it was 
regulated by law. There were no rules and no responsibility beyond 
the will of the Crown or council. This irresponsibility is urged by 
Selden ^ as a strong objection to the use of torture. The main 
differences between the mfliction of torture in England and on the 
continent of Europe seem to be that English lawyers made no dis- 
tinction of those liable to it, never allowed torture of witnesses, and 
elaborated no subtle rules as to pUtia and semipUna ^obatio. 

So far of what may be called torture proper, to which the common 
law professed itself a stranger. There were, however, cases fully 
recognized by the common law which differed from torture only 
in name. The peine forte et dure was a notable example of this. 
If a prisoner stood mute of malice instead of pleading, he was 
condemned to the peine, that is, to be stretched ujwn his back and 
to have iron laid upon him as much as he could bear, and more, 
and so to continue, ted upon bad bread and stagnant water through 
ahemate days until he pleaded or died.' It was abolished by 12 
Geo. III. c. 20. 7 and 8 Geo. IV. c. 28 enacted that a plea of ^ not 
guilty " should be entered for a prisoner so standins mute. A case 
of teine occurred as lately as 1726. At times tying the thumbs 
with whip-cord was used instead of the peirie. This was said to be 
a common practice at the Old Bailey up to the 18th century.' In 
trials for witchcraft the legal proceedings often partook of the 
nature of torture, as in the throwing of the reputed witch into a 
pond to see whether she would sink or swim, in drawing her blood,' 
and in thrusting pins into the body to try to find the insensible spot. 
Confessions, too, appear to have been often extorted by actual 
torture, and torture of an unusual nature, as the devil was supposed 
to protect his votaries from the effects of ordinary torture. 

Torture as a part of the punishment existed in fact, if not in 
name, down to a very recent period. Mutilation as a punishment 
appears in some of the pre-Conquest codes, such as those of Alfred, 
/bthelstan and Canute» in the laws attributed to William the 
Conqueror and in the asttze of Northampton (i 176). ^ Bracton. who 
does not notice torture as a means of obtaining evidence, divides 
corporal punishment into that inflicted with and without torture.' 
Later instances are the punishment of burning to death inflicted 
on heretk» under the Six Articles (31 Hen. Vlll. c. 14) and other 
acts, and on women for petit treason (abolished by 30 Geo. III. 
c. 48), the mutilation inflicted for violence in a royal palace by 
33 Hen. VIII. c 12, the punishment for high treason, whicn 
existed nominally until 1870, the pillory (abolished by 7 Will. IV. 
arid I Vict. c. 23), the stocks, branks and cucking-stool, and the 
burning in the hand for felony (abolished by 19 Geo. III. c. 74). 
Corporal punishment now exists only in the case of juvenile 
offenders and of robbery with violence. It was abolished in the 
army by the Army Act i88i.' Cruelty in punbhment did not 
entirely cease in prisons even after the Bill of Rights. See such 
cases as R. v. Hugzins, 17 SiaU Trials, 298; CasteU v. Bambridie, 
2 Strange' s Rep. 856. 

Scottand.—Tanun was long a recognized part of Scottish criminal 
procedure, and was acknowledged as such by many acts and warrants 
of the Scottish parliament and warrants of the Crown and the privy 
council. Numerous instances occur in the Register of the Trioj 
Council.^ Two acts in 1649 dealt with torture; one took the form 
of a warrant to examine witnesses against William Barton by any 
form of probation.* the other of a warrant to a committee to inquire 
as to the use of torture against persons suspected of witchcraft.* 
The judges in 1680 were empowered by the estates to torture Chiesly 
dL Dalrye. charged with the murder 01 the lord president Lockhart. 
in order to discover accomplices. In the same year the use of torture 
without evidence or in ordinary cases was decbred illegal in the 
Claim of Right. The careful wording of this will be noticed: it 
does not object to torture altoKCthcr, but reserves it for cases where 
a basis of evidence had already been laid, and for crimes of great 
cravity, thus aulmttting the dangerous principle, founded on Roman 
law, that the importance of tlie crime is a reason for departing from 
the ordinary rules of justice. However great the crime, it is no 
more certain than in the case of a crime of less gravity that the 
person accused was the person who committed it. A warrant issued 
in the same year to put to the torture certain persons accused of 
conspirine against the government, and also certain dragoons 
suspected of corresponding with Lord Dundee. In 1690 an act 
passed reciting the torture of William Carstares, a minister, in 1683, 
and re-establishing his competency as a witness." The last warrant 
appears to be one in 1690 for torturing a man accused of rape and 
murder. In 1708 torture in Scotland was finally abolished by 7 

' TabU Talk, " Trial." 

' Stephen, Hist, of the Criminal Law, L 297. 

' Stephen i. 3100; Kelyng, Reports, p. 27. 

' The superstition was that any one drawinc a witch's blood was 
free from her power. This is alluded to in //ffiry VI. pt. i. act i. 
sc. 5: " Blood will I draw on thee; thou art a witch." 

• 104*. • 44 Vict. c. 9, s 7. 
» E.g. i. 52s, iv. 680, vi. 156. • c. 333- 

• c. 370- 

''The thumbscrew with which Carstares had been tortured was 
afterwards presented to him as a remembrance by the privy council. 

Anne c. 21 , ■ 5. Many deUtIs of the tortures inflicted will be found 
in Pitcaim's Criminal Trials, the introductk>n to J. Maclaurins' 
R. Criminal Cases and J. H. Burton's Narralioes from Criminal 
Trials. Among other varieties— ihe nature of some of them can 
only be guessed — were the rack, the pilniewinkis, the boot,^ the 

caschie-laws, the lang imis, the narrow-bore, the pynebankis, and 
worst of all, the waking, or artificial prevention of sleep.*' The 
ingenuity of torture was exercised in a special degree on charges 
of witchcraft, notably in the reign of James VI., an expert both in 
witchcraft and in torture. The act of 1649 already cited shows 
that the principle survived him. Under the government of the dukes 
of Lauderdale and York torture as a practice in charges of religious 
and politkal offences reached its height. " The privy council was 
accustomed to extort confessions by torture; that grim divan of 
bishops, lawyers and peen sucking in the groans of each undaunted 
enthusiast, in hope that some imperfect avowal might lead to the 
sacrifice of other victims, or at least warrant the execution of the 
present." ** With such examples before them in the law, it b scarcdy 
to be wondered at that persons in positions of authority, especially 
the nobility, sometimes exceeded the law and inflicted torture at 
their own will and for their own purposes. There are se^'eral 
instances in the Register of the Privy Council of wits against such 
persons, e.t. aninst the earl of Orkney, in 1605, for putting a ton 
of Sir PatrKk Bellenden in the boots. 

Irdand seems to have enjoyed comparative immunity from torture. 
It was not recosnized by the common or statute law, and the cases 
of its infliction do not appear to be numerous. In 1 566 the president 
and council of Munstcr, or any three of them, were empowered to 
inflict torture, " in cases necessary, upon vehement presumption 
of any great offence in any party committed against the Queen's 
Majesty." *' In 1583 Hurley, an Irish priest, was tortured in Dublin 
by • toasting hb feet against the fire with hot boots." " In 1627 the 
lord deputy doubted whether he had authority to put a priest 
named O'CuUenan to the rack. An answer was returned by Lord 
Killultagh to the effect that " you ought to rack him if you saw cause 
and hang him if you found reason." ^ The latest case of peine forte 
et dure seems to nave been in 1740.' 

British Colonies and Dependencies. — The infliction of torture in 

while governor of Trinidad, a woman named Luisa Calderpn to the 
torture of the picquet,'' one of the grounds of defence was that such 
torture was authorized by the Spanish law of the island, but the 
accused was convicted in spite of this defence, and the final decision 
of the court of king's bench, in 1812, decreeing a respite of the 
defendant's recognizances till further order, was perhaps not so 
much an affirmation of the legality in the i^rticular instance as 
the practkal expresaon of a wish to spare an eminent public servant.** 
As to India, the second charge against Warren Hastings was extortion 
from the begums of (Xide by means of the torture of their servants." 
In the present Indian Penal Code and Evidence Acts there are 
proviuons intended, as Sir James Stephen says,"" to prevent the 
practke of torture by^the polke for the purpose of extracting con- 
fessions from persons in their custody.'^ In Ceylon torture, which 
had been allowed under the Dutch government, was expressly 
abolished by royal proclamation in 1799. 

In the Cnannel Isbnds confesnons of persons accused of witch- 
craft in the 17th century were freouently obtained by torture." 

United States.— One instance m the peine forte el dure is known. 
It was inflkrted in 1692 on Giles Cory of Salem, who refuted to 
plead when arraigned for witchcraft.** The constitution of the 
United Sutes provides, in the words of the Bill of Rights, that 
cruel and unusual punbhments are not to be inflicted." This b 
repeated in the constitutions of most states. The inflktion of cruel 
and unusual punishment by the master or officer of an American 
vessel on the high seas, or within the maritime jurisdiction of the 
United States, is punishable with fine or imprisonment, or both." 
There have been a good many decisions on the question of cruel 

There have oeen a good many decisions on the question of < 
and unusual punishments; e.g. Wilhersom v. Utah, 99 US. Rep. 


" Persons subjected to more than usual torture from the boot 
were said to be extremely booted." 

" Thb seems to have been used in one case in England. Lecky, 
Rationalism in Europe, i. 122. 

" Hallam, Const. Hist. m. 436. See Burnet. Hisi. of Own Time, 

1- 583; and Scotland. 

jroude. Hist, of En^nd, viiL 386. 
" Ibid xi. 263. " Jardine, p.. 54. 

" In the picquet the sufferer was supported only on the great toe 
(which rested on a sharp stake), and by a rope atuched to one arm. 
" 30 State Trials, 449, besides many pamphlets of the period. 
" See the Report ef the Proceedings, vol. i. 
" Stephen, Indian Endenee Act, p. 126. 

•» Sections 327-331 of code; ss. 25-27 of act. 
" J. L. Pitts, WUchcraft in the Chan ' ~ 


. L. Pitts, WUchcraft in the Channel Islastds, p. Q (Coenaey, 

'» Bouvier, Law Diet., s.v. " Peine forte et dure.* 
** Amendments, art. viii. (1789). 
" Retised Stat, 5347. 



Ttniterj tf Kern Mexico ▼; J&felanm 65 Fvifie Rcpw 169 (dwth 
penalty for train robbery hdd not unooaBthutional). 

Centimental Europea* States. — ^Thoe (all into four main groups, 
the Latia, Teutonic, Scandinavian and Slav states respectivdy. 
Tine principles of Roman law Irare genecally adopted in the first 
and tecooa groups. 

Lafi'n Stain.— In France torture does not seem to bave existed 
as a recognised practice before the lAth century. From that period 
antiltbe lytb century it «as regulated by a series of royal ordamumces 
at fint of local oblnpLtion, afterwards applying to the whole kingdom. 
Torture was used only by the ro^ courts, its place in the semieurial 
coortabcittg supplied by the judicial combat. The earliest oroofiiiaHce 
on the subiect was that of Louis IX. in 1254 for the reformation of 
the law in ijngiMidor. It enacted that persons of good fame, though 
poor, were not to be put to the <)uestioo on the evidence of one 
witncsBL^ Numerous other provuions 'were made between 1354 
and 1670. when an ordonmamce was passed under Louis XIV., which 
regulated the infliction of torture for more than a century. Two 
lands were recognind, the question prtpantoire and the fuestym 
pritttabU. The first was used where strong ewdenoe of a capital 
dime — strong, but of itself insufficient for convictbo — was produced 
asunst the accused. The second was used to obtain a confessbn 
oraccomplices after conviction. There was also a mitigated form 
cAlled the presentment, in which the accused was simply bound 
upon the rack m lerrortm and there interrogated. No person was 
caempt on the ground of dignity, but exemption was alkiwed to 
youths, old men, sick persons and others. Counsel for the accused 
were usially not allowed. The question priparatoire was abolished 
by royal decree in 1780, but in 1788 the jBarliaments refused to 
regiiter a decree abofishing the pnalaUe, But torture of all lands 
was abolished by an ordomiance m 1789. The Declaration of Right 
in I7Q1 (art. viii.) afi&rmed that the law ought not to establish any 
punishments other than such as are strictly and evidently neoessai^. 
In modem law the eodo ptnal enacts tnat all criminals shall be 
punished as guilty d assassination who for the execution of their 
crimes employ torture.* The code also makes it punishable to 
subject a person under arrest to torture.' The theory of semiplema 
pnbaiio was worked out with more refinement than in other systems. 
In some parts oi France not only were half-proofs admitted, but 
quarters and e^hths of proofs.* Among the numerous cases of 
historical interest were those of the Templars in lyyj, ViUon about 
1457, Dolet in 1546, the marqdse de BnnviUierB m 1676 and Jean 
Calas in 1763.* 

The law as it existed in Italy Is contained in a k>ng line of authorities 
chiefly supplied by the school of Bologna, beginning with the 
^sMlores and coming down through the post-gUusatores, until the 
system attained its perfection in the vast work of Farinacdus, 
written early in the 17th century, where every possible question 
that could arise is treated with a revolting completeness. One 
of the eariicst jurists to treat it was Cino da Pistoia, the friend of 
Dante.* He treaU it at no great length. With him the theory of 
imdicia exists only in embryo, as they cannot be determined by law 
but must be at the discretion of the judge. Differing from Bartolus, 
be affirms that torture caimot be repeated without fresh indicia. 
The writings of jurists were supplemented by a large body of legis- 
lative enactments in most of tne Italian states, extending from the 
constitutions of the emperor Frederick II. down tothe z8th century. 
It is not until Bartolus (1314-1357) that the law begins to assume 
a definite and complete form. In his commentary on book xlviii. 
of the Digest he follows Roman law closely, but introduces some 
further rcfiflinnents: e.g. though leading questions may not be 
asked in the main inquiry they are admisable as subsidiary. There 
b a beginning of clamfication of indicia, A very full discussion 
<tf the bw is contained in the work on practice m Hiopolytus de 
Marsiliis,* a jurist of Bologna, notorious, on his own aomiasion, as 
the inventor of the torture of keeping without sleep. He defines 
the question as inqnisitio veritatis per tormeuta et cordis dtdorem, 
thus rccogniring the mental as well as the phyrical elements in 
torture, ft was to be used only in capital cases and atrocious crimes. 
The works of Farinacdus and of Julius Claras neariy a centory later 
were of great authority from the high ofiidal positions filled by the 
writers. Fariiuuxius was procurator-general to Pope Paul V., 
and hb discusskm of torture is one of the roost complete of any.* 
It occupies 251 closely printed folio pages with double columns. 
The length at which the subject is treated is one of the best proofs 

* Ordonnancos des rois, L 73. * s. 303. * s. 344. 

* See Polkxk and MaitUnd, u. 6^8, note. 

*On the French system generally see Imbertus, InstOnUones 
forenses gaUicae (Utrecht, 1649): N. Weiss, La Ckambre ardente, 
1540-1550 (Paris, 1889). A lam number of authorities deal 
mainly with the erdonnance of 1070; Muyart de Voudans, InsL 
crim. (Paris, 1767), and Jousse, Traitide la justice crim. (Paris, 1771)1 
are esamples. F. Siegneux de Correvon, Etsai snr Fusage, Vahus^ 
et les inconohuens de la torture (Geneva, 1768), is one of the 
oppone n ts of the mtem. 

* (Hnus Pistoretuis, Super codice, de tormentis (Venice, 1493). 

' FracSica criminaUs quae Avendda nuncupatur (Venice, 1532). 

* Praxis et theorica criminaU*, bk. iL tit. v. quaest. 36-51 
CFcankfort, 1633). 

XX VII 2* 

of the sdeooe to whkh it bad been reduced. The chief feature of 
the week b the minute and skilful analysis of indicia^ S^"^ pno- 
eumptio, and other technical terms. Many definitions of indtdunt 
are suggested, the best perhaps being comjedura ex probabUibus et non 
nocessofOs orta, a quSms Potest abesse Veritas sod non veristmilitudo. 
For every infliction of torture a distinct indicium is required. 
A single witnem or an aocom|dioe constitutes an indicium. 
But this rule does not apf^y whoe it is inflirtrri for discovering 
accomplices or for discovering a crime other than that for which 
it was originally inflicted. Torture may be ordered in all 
criminal cases, except small offences, and in certain dvil 
cases, such as dental of a dopositum, bankruptcy, usury, 
treasure trove, and fiscal cases. It may be inflicted on all 
persons, unless specially exempted (clergy, minors, Ac), and 
even those exempted may be tortured Vy command of the 
sovere^n. There are three kinds of torture, imr, grasir and 

graoissima, the first and second corre spo nding to the ordinary 
torture of French writers, the last to the extraordinaiy. The 
extraordinary or graoissima was as much as could possibly fie borne 

without destroying life. The judge could not begin with torture; 
it was only a subsidiutn. If inflicted without due course of law, 
it was void as a proof. The judge was liable to peiulties if he 
tortured without proper indiciot iC a privileged person, or if to the 
extent that death or permanent illness was the result. An immense 
variety of tortures b mentioned, and the list tended to grow, for. as 
Farinacdus says, judges continually invented new modes of torture 
to please theinsdvcs. Numerous casuistical questions are treated 
at length, such as, what kinds of reports or how much beamy 
evidence constituted fame? Were tnere three or five grades in 
torture? Julius Clarus of Alessandria was a member of the council 
of Philip il. To a great extent he follows Farinacdus. He puts 
the questions for the conrideration of the judge with great clearness. 
They are — whether (i) a crime has been committed, (3) the charge 
b one in which torture is admissible, (3) the fabt can be proved other- 
wue, U) the crime was secret or open, (5) the object of the torture 
b to elidt confession of crime or discovery of accomplices. The 
clergy can be tortured only in charges of treason, poisoning and 
violation of tombs. On the great question whether there are three 

purposes of thb article. The burden of their writings b practically 
the same, but they have not attained the systematic perfection of 
Farinacdus. Citations from many of them are made oy Manxoni 

S below). AiQong others are Cuido de Suxara, Paris de Puteo, 
IdiusBosdus of MUan, Casonus of Venice, Dedanus, Follerius 
Tranouillus Ambrosianus, whose works cover the period from the 
13th to toe end of the 17th century. The law depended mainly 
on the writings of the Jurists as interpreters of custom. At the 
same time in all or neanv all the Italian states and colonies'* the 
customary bw was limitea, supplemented, or amended by legislation. 
That a cneck by legisbtive authority was necessaiv appears from 
the Klimpscs afforded by the writings of the jurists tnat the letter oi 
the Tajr was by no means always followed. The earliest legisUtion 
after the Roman bw seems to be the constitutions of the e mp er o r 
Frederick II. for Sidly promulgated in 1331. Torture was abolished 
in Tuscany in 1786, lugely owing to the influence of Beccaria, whose 
work fint appesred in 1 764, and other states f olkmed, but the punkdo 
or inquet seems to have existed in practice at Naplei up to 1859. 

Several instances of the torture 01 eminent persons occur in lulian 
histoiy, such as Savonarob, Machbvelli,. Giordano Bruno. Cam- 
panelu. Galileo appears to have only been threatened with the 
esame rigoroso. The historical case of the greatest literary interest 
b that of the posons accused of bringinfl[ the plague into Mflan 
in 1630 by smcariiug the walb of houses with poison. An analysb 
of the case was undertaken by Verri ^ and Manzont,** and puts in a 
clear light some qf the abuses to which the system led in times of 
popular panic Convincing arguments are urged by Manxoni, 
after an exhaustive review m the authorities, to prove the ground- 
lessness of the charge on wluch two innocent penons underwent 
the torture of the canapct or hempen cord (the effect of which was 
partbl or complete dislocation of the wrist), and aftenirards suffered 
death by breaking on the wheeL The main arguments, shortly 
stated, are these, all based upon the evidence as recorded, and the 
bw as laid down by jurists, (i) The unsupported evulence of an 
accomplice was treated as an indicium in a case not one of those 

exceptional ones in which such an indicium was sufficient. The 
evidence of two witnesses or a confession by the accused was neces- 
sary to establish a remote Muficttim, such as lying. (3). Hearsay 
evidence was recdved when primary evidence was obtainable. (3) 
The confesdon made under torture was not ratified afterward 
(4) It was made in consequence of a promise of impunity. (5) It 
was of an imposdble crime. 

* Practica criminalis finalis (Lyons, 1637). . 

* It b obvious from the allusion at the end of (Xhdlo that Shake- 
qieare regarded torture as posdbb in Cyprus when it was a Venetian 

^ Osservaaioni suUa tortura. 

^ Storia deUa Colonna infame. Ndther writer alludes to Beccaria, 




In Spain, u In Italy, the law depended partly on tlic writings of 
jurists, partly on legislation. Roman law was carried through the 
Visigoth»c Code and the Fuero patp^ (which repeats it almost 
word for word) down to the SiO^ fartidas.* This treatise, com- 
piled by Alphonso the Wise about 1243, but not promulgated till 
1356. amended the previously existing law in the direction oif greater 
preduon. Torment is defined as a manner of punishment which 
lovers of justice use, to scrutinize by it the truth ol o^mes comnutted 
secretly and not movable in any other manner. Repetition was 
allowed in case ol grave crimes. There were the usual |»ovisions 
for the infliction of torture only by a judge having jurisdiction, and 
for the liability of the judge for exceeding l^al limits. Subsequent 
codes did little more than amend the Parttdas in matters of pro- 
cedure. Torture is not named in the Ordenatuas reales of Ferdinand 
and Isabella (1485). The Nueva recopUacion of Philip II. enacted 
that torture was to be applied by the a lc ald e s on due sentence 
of the court — even on hdalgos in grave crimes — ^without regsud 
to alleged privilege or custom. In the Novinma recopUacion 
of 177s the only proviaons on the- subject are that the alcald es 
are not to condemn to torment without preceding sentence 
according to law, and that kidaltos are not to be tormented 
or suffer infamous punishment. In Aragon, while it was an inde- 
pendent state, torture was not in use to tne s^e extent as in other 
mits of Spain. It was abolished in the 13th century by the General 
Privil«;e of 1283 except in the case of vagabonds charaed with coin- 
ing. A statute of 1335 made it unlawfufto put any freeman to the 
torture.* On the oxhar hand, the Aragonese nobility had a | 

similar to the peine forte et dure, of putting a criminal to death by 
cold, hunger and thirst.* The jurists deahng with the subject arc 
not as numerous as in Italy, no doubt because Itadian opinions were 
received as law in all countries whose systems were based on Roman 
law.* Some of the Italian jurists too, like Claras, were at that 
same time Spanish officials. The earliest Spanish secular jurist 
appears to be Juarez de Paz.* According to him the most usual 
tortures in Spam were the water and cord, the pulley or strapf>ado, 
the hot brick, and the UMiUas, or thumbscrew and boot combined. 
Three was the greatest number of times that any torture could be 
applied. It misht be decreed either on demancfof the accuser or 
at will of the judge. The Roman rale of beginning with the weakest 
was amplified into a aeries of regulations that a son was to be put 
to the question before a father, a woman before a man, &c. The 
fullest statement of Spanish law is to be found in the work of Antonio 
Gomez, a professor at Salamanca.' With him no exceptions apply 
in charges ol laesa majesku ditina or humana. A judge is liable 
to different punishment according as he orders torture dolose or 
ddpabilUer. Differing from Hippolytua de Marsiliis, Gomez holds 
that the dying accusation of a muniercd man is not an indieium, 
A confession on insuflkient indicia is void. His divinon of torture 
into toriura actualis and terror propinquus is the same as that of 
the French jurists into torture and presentment. The conclurions 
of the ecclesiastical writers of Spain, such as Eymerico and Simancas, 
were accepted wholly or partially by the secular writer^, such as 
Alvarez de Vdasco,* and the Peruvian, Juan de Hevia BolaSos.' 
who points out differences in the ecclesiastical and secular systems, 
«.g. the former brought up the accused for ratification in three days, 
tM latter in twenty-four hours. A good deal of the Spanish law 
will be found in the proceedings against Sir Thomas Picton (see 
above). Torture in Spain seems to nave been inflicted on Jews to 
an extraordinary extent, as it was also in Portugal, where the latest 
legislation as to torture seems to be (tf the year 1678. In 1790 it 
had become obsolete,^ and in a work on criminal procedure four 
years later It is only referred to for the purpose of stating that when 
it did exist it was realis or verbalis.^ 

Teutonic States. — Germany (including Austria) is distin^ished 
by the possession of the most extenave literature and legislation 

•vi.4, 5. 

*ParUdat vii. 3a It was one of the earliest books printed in 
Spain, the earliest edition appearing in 1491. 

* Cited Hallam, MiddU Ages, iil 76. 

* Du Cange, s.v. Fame necare. 

* In ^ the Latin countries the idea of torture had become a 
commonplace. The dramatists contain frequent allusions to it. 
In Lope de Vega's El Perro del hortdano (" The Dog in the Manger "), 
one 01 the characters says, " Here's a pretty inquisition I" to which 
the answer is, " The torture will be next applied." Moli&re and 
Racine both make use of it. In VAvare, act iv. sc. 7, Harpagon 
threatens to put his whole household to the question. In Les 
PUudeun Dandin invites Isabelle to see A> question as a mode of 
pasong an hour or two. In England Bacon (Essav Ivi.) says, 
'* There is no worse torture than the torture of laws.'^ The same 
idea occurs again in the Adoancement of Learning, viu. 3, 13, " It 
b a cruel thing to torture the laws that they may torture men." 

* Praxis tcdesiasHca el saecularis, voL L pL v. {.3 (Salamanca, 

' KoriM resolutiones, p. 413 (Antwerp, 1593). 

'Judex perfectus (Lausanne, 1740). 

* Curia fUi^ (Madrid, 1825). 

I* Repertono geral das lets extrmagantes, p. 381 (Coimbra. 181 5). 

^ Fuchal FreiniSi ImsU Jur. crim. lusilasu, p. 203 (Lisbon, 1794). 

on the subject The principal writers are Langer. von Rosbach 
and von Boden. In addition may be cited the curious Layenspiegd 
of Ulrich Tengler (i^), and the works of Remus, Casonus and 
Carpzow.** Legidation was partly for the empire, partly for its 
component states. Imperial l»islation dealt with the matter in 
the (x>lden Bull (1356), the Ordinance of Bamberg (1507), the 
Carolina (1532)" and the ConstituHo criminalis therestana (i768).>« 
The Carolina foUowed the usual lines, the main difference being 
that the infliction must be in the presence of two scabini and a 
notary, who was to make a detailed record of the proceedings. The 
code c^ Maria Theresa defines torture as " a subsidiary means of 
eliciting trath." It could be ai>plied only in cases whore condemna- 
tion would have involved capital or severe corporal punishment. 
The illustrated edition was suppressed by Prince Kauniu a few 
days after its appearance. Torture was formally abolished in the 
empire in 1776. In Prasua it was practically aboUshed by Frederick 
the Great m 1740, formally in 1805. Even before iu abolition it 
was in use only to discover accomplices after conviction.^ In 
some other states it existed longer, in Baden as late as 1831. It 
was carried toexcess in Germany, as in the Netherlands and Scotland 
in charges of witchcraft. 

The lidkerlands. — ^The principal l^islative enaament was the 
code of criminal procedure promulgated by Philip II. in 1^70 and 
generally known as the OrionnasKe sur le style.^ One of its main 
objects was to assimilate the varieties of local custom, as the Nmeva 
recoptlacton had done in Spain three years earlier. The French 
ordonnance of 1670 is prol»bIy largely based on it. In spite of 
the attempt of the ordinance to introduce uniformity, certain cities 
of Brabtmt, it u said, still claimed the privil^e of torturing in 
certain cases not permitted by -the ordinance, e.g. where there was 
only one witness." 

The law of 1670 continued to be the basis of criminal procedure 
in the Austrian Netherlands until 1787. In the United Provinces 
It was not repealed until 1798. The principal text-writcrt are 
Damhouder,^ van Leeuwen^ and Voet. Van Leeuwen lays down 
as a fundamental principle that no one was to be condemned to 
death without confesuon, and such confession, if attainable in no 
other way, ought to be elicited by torture. Witnesses could be 
tortured only if they varied on confrontation. One of the indieia 
not always recognized by jurists was previous conviction for a stnilar 
crime. Voet's commentary ad Pandectas'* is interesting for its 
Uking the same view as St Augustine as to the uselessness ot torture, 
and compares its effect with that of the trial by battle. At the 
same time he allows it to be of some value in the case of very grave 
crimes. The value of torture was doubted by others as well as 
Voet, e.g. by A. Nicholas*^ and by van Essen." At the same time a 
writer was found to compose a work on the unpromising subject 
of the rack.* 

Scandinavian Counirtes. — ^There is a notice of torture in the Ice- 
landk Code known as the Gr&g&s (about 11 19). Judicial torture 
is said to have been introduced into Denmark by Valdemar I. in 
1 157.*^ In the code of Christian V. (1683) it was limited to cases of 
treason.** It was abolished by the influence of Straensee in 177 1, 
but notwithstanding this he was threatened with it, though it was 
not actually inflkted, before his execution in 1772. In Sweden 
torture never existed as a system, and in the code of 17x4 it was 
expressly forbidden." It was however occasionally inflicted, as 
in England, by extrajudicial authorities, called secret committees. 

" Extracts fpom tbcae and other writers will be found in Lea, 
SufMrr^Ulian and Faife, and in R. Quanter, Die Poller in der 
deuiuhf ff EjccUiipjUgt soHst und jetst (Berlin, 1900). 

" Clii 33-44- 

^* Art, 3a (Vienna, 1769). 

^'' Thu AtatMnent k made on the authority of a work attributed 
to Frcdprkk hinuclf , Dissertation sur les raisons d^itablir on d^abrog^r 
lei tvii (J748). 

" A list o\ the numerous commentaries on this code will be 
founri in Nybcle, Lts Ordonnances criminelles de Philippe 11, de 1570, 
p. J J (BnjMclx iSst). 

" Nybeli. pp. 31. \y 

" Praligi*^ itiduisire en causes crinrineUes (Antwerp, 1564). 

" CcTuiiTA jorcKiiit nt.ii.bk.iL chs. 8, 9 (Leiden, 1677). 
^ ■°0n Dii. xlviii. iS. There are numerous editions 01 Voet, the 
nxLh (genu trolly found in libraries) b the Hague (1734). 

" Si U icTtwe tU un moyen s4r d virifier Us cnmes (Amsterdam, 
i6€[l. Alio by an anonymous writer thirty yean cariier. Da 
PijKhank vx4eripr&kcn en oematigt (Rotterdam, 1651). 

" Jus eccles i asticum unioersum (Louvain, 


liber poslumus (Amster- 

^Hieronymi MagU An^larenis ae equuleo lil^. , ^ 

dam, 1664). There are several works dealing with torture 
witchcraft proceeding A large number of cases will be found in 
J. Scheltema, Ceschtedenis der Hexen^trocessen (Haailem, 1828). 
For torture m the i8th oenturv see E. Hubert, La Torture amx Pays 
Bas autrickdens pendant la xviti* sihcle (Brassels, 1807). 

** Baden, Dansk juridisk Ordbog, «.v. " Tortur *^ (Copenhagen, 

** Koldenip-RoaenvinM, Udoalg of gamle Dansko-Domme, bk. L 
c 30 (Copenhagen. 1848). 

"■ Cod. leg. sveciearuM, pp. 333, 370 (Stockholm, 1743). 



Tile " CBve of roKs* where reptiles were kept for the pwpoie of 
toctore, was dosed bv Gustavus III. In 177a. 

Sam CemUries. — ^Tne earliest mention of torture seems to be that 
of the'motilatioa provided for certain offences by the code c^ Stephen 
Dushan in 1349. In Russia torture does not occur in the recensions 
of the earlier law. It was possibly of Tatar origin, and the earliest 
mentkm of it in an official document is probably in the ^ide^itik 
ai Ivan the Terrible (i4p7)« la the ordinance of 1556 there are 
dabocate regulations, wluch one learns from history were not always 
obs er ved in periods of political disturbance, and torture seems to 
have been used even as a means of enfordng payment of debts. 
The reaction begins with Peter the Great and culminates with 
Catharine II., who was largdy influenced by the opinions oi Beocaria 
and Voltaire. In the instructions to the commission for fruning 
acriniina]co<fe(i766), it is dedared that ail punishments by which 
the body is maimed ought to be abolished,^ and that the torture 
of the rack violares the rules of equity and does not produce the end 
pro po oe d by the laws.* It was formally abolished by Alexander I. 
la 1801, arid in 1833 the Sood Zaiunun subjected to penalties any 
jndge "mho presumed to order it. But even as late as 1847 it seems 
to have been inflicted in one or two exceptional cases.* 

AOTBOEITIBS.— For England Jardine's b still the standard work. 
Moch general information and numerous authorities will be found 
in Lmosus, Bibli^tluca realis Juridica. s.9, " Torture " fFrenkfort, 
1679). and in the more modem work of J. Hdbing, Die Toriur 
(Bmin, looa). For those who can obtain access to it the catalogue 
issued at the sale of M. G. Libri (i86x)is valuable. He had collected 
most of the books on the subject. There are several publications 
dessEng with cases of individuals in addition to the numerous ones 
on witchcraft trials, e.t. those of William Lithgow, the Amboyna 
esse, DcUon and Van Halen. Lithgow* s stoiy has been republiued 
<qiasgow,X907). O-W.) 

TORUi» a Latin word, meaning a round swelling or pro- 
tnbefBncc, applied to a convex moulding in ardiitecture, which 
in section is generally a semidrde. The earliest examples 
are foand in Egyp^i where it was carried up the angles of the 
pyk>n and temple walls and horizontally aooss the same. Its 
most frequent employment is in the bases of columns; in the 
Roman Doric order being the lowest moulding; in the Ionic 
orders there are gcneraDy two torus mouldings separated by a 
acotia with fillets. Both in Greek and Roman bases sometimes 
the toras is daboratdy carved. (See MouimNa) 

TORZHOK, a town of Russia, in the government of Tver, 
on the river Tvertsa, sx ul by rail S.W. of the Likhoslavl, 
station of the St Petersburg & Moscow railway Pop. (1900), 
X5,i 19. It dates from the x ith centuxy, and thename (market- 
place) shows that this dependency of Novgorod was a commercial 
centre. It was fortified with a stone waH, which only partially 
protected it from the attacks of Mongols, Lithuanians and 
Poles. Torzhok is cdebrated in Russia for its embroidered 
vdvct and embroidered leather-work, for the manufacture of 
travdiing bags, and for its trade in com and flour. 

TOSCAIfELLA (anc. Tnscana, g.v.), a town of the pxovince of 
Romie, Italy, 15 m. N.E. of Cometo by road, 545 ft. above sea- 
kvcL Pop. (1901), 4839. The medieval walls with their toweis 
are still presoved. On the ancient dtadd hill is the Romanesque 
church of S. Pietro, bebnging to four different periods — 739, 
1093 (the date of the reconstruction of the crypt), the middle of 
the X3th and the end of the xath century. It has the shape of a 
Roman basilica, with a nave and two aisles and one apse. The 
elaborate fapade with iu rose window also bdongs to the x 2th 
centuxy. S. Maria in the valley bdow dates from X050 to x2o6, 
and has a similar facade and a xnassive sqiuxe campanile. In 
the town are two other Romanesque churches. 

See G. T. Rivoira, Origan deU ankiUUara Lombarda 1. X46 
(Roixie 1901). 

tome (d. X066), eari of Northnmbria, was a son, probably 
the third, of Eari (jodwine, and in X05X married Judith, sister 
or daughter of Baldwin V., count of Flandeis. In the year of 
his maixlage he shared the short exile of his father, returning 
with him to England in xoS2, and became earl of Northumbria 
after the death of Eari Siiwd in X055. He was vexy intimate 
with his brother-in-law, Edward the Confessor, and in xo6i he 
visited Pope Nicholas II. at Rome in the company of Aldred, 
archbish!^ of Yoik. By stem and crud measures Tostig 

•Ibtd. X9>-t97. 
* See the various histories of Russian law. such as Maceiovski, 
Lange and Zagoskin. under the heads of pmtka or 

•Art. 96. 
the 1 

hitroduced a certam amount of order into the wild northern 
distria under his rule; this severity made him exceedingly 
unpopular, and in X065 Northumbria broke into open revolt 
Declaring Tostig an outlaw and choosing Moxkere in his stead, 
the rebeb marched southwards and were met at Oxford by 
Eari Harold, wlio, rather against the will of the king, granted 
their demands. Tostig safled to Flanders and thence to Nor- 
mandy, where he offered his services to Duke William, who 
was related to his wife and wlio was preparing for his invasion of 
England. He then haxried the Isle of Wight and the Kentidi 
and linoohishire coasts, and, after a stay in Scotland and possibly 
a visit to Norway, joined another mvader, Harald HI. Hardrada, 
king of Norway, m the Tyne. Together they sailed up the Hum- 
ber and at Gate Fulford, near York, defeated Earis Moxkere 
and Edwine and entered York. But Harold, now king, was 
hurrying to the north. Takmg the Norwegians by surprise 
at Stamford Bridge he destroyed their army on the 35th of 
September 1066, and hi this batUe both Tost^ and the king of 
Norway were slain. Tostig's two sons appear to have taken refuge 
in Norway, and his widow Judith married Welf, duke of Bavaria. 
See E. A. Freeman, The Norman Conquest^ vols. iL and iii. 

TOTANA, a town of eastern Spab, in the province of Muicia, 
on the Lorca-Mtuda railway. Pop. (1900), 13,703. The 
town, which consists of two parts, the Barrio de Sevffla and 
Barrio de Triana, contains several handsome public buildings, 
among them the diurch of Santiago, with its three naves. Water 
is conveyed to Totana from the Sierra de Espufla by an aqueduct 
7 m. long. Saltpetre is obtained among the hflls, and there 
is a thriving trade in wheat, oranges, olives, almonds, and wine 
from the Sangonexa valley. Other industries are the manufac- 
ture of linen, leather and the earthenware jaxs called Hnajas, 
which are used for the storage of oil and wine. 

TOTEMISM. The word " totem " is used in too many varying 
senses by students of early sodety and rdigion. The term 
came into the English language in the form of " totam," through 
a work of 179X, by J. Long, an mtexpreter between the whites 
and the Red Indians of North America.^ Long himself 
seems to have used the word to denote the protective famQiar, 
usually an anunal, which each Indian sdected for himself, 
generally through the monitk>n of a dream during the long 
fast of lads at their mitiation. Such sdected (or, when bestowed 
by medidne-men or friends, "given") totems are styled 
" pexaonal totems " and have no effect in savage law, nor are 
they hereditary, with any legal consequences. 

In stricter terminology " totem " denotes the object, gene- 
rally of a natural spedes, animal or vegetable, but occasionally 
rain, doud, star, wind, which gives its name to a kindred 
actual or supposed, among many savages and barbaric races in 
America, Africa, Australia and Asia and the isles. Each 
chUd, inale or female, inherits this name, dther from its 
mother (" female descent ") or from its father (" male descent "). 
Between each person and his or her name-giving object, a 
certain mystic rapport is supposed to exist. Where descent 
wavers, persons occasionally have, in varying degrees, the 
totems of both parents. 

Religious Asped of the Totem. — ^As a rule, by no means in- 
variable, the individual may not kill or eat the xiame-giving 
object of his kin, except under dire necessity; while less i^ually 
it is supposed to protect him and to send him monitoiy dreams. 
This is the " reUgious " or semi-religious aspect of the toteni, 
or this aspect is, by some students, called " rdigious." 

We also hear of customs of burying and lamenting dead ani« 
mals which are regarded with reverence by this or that " famfly," 
or " dan." This custom is reported among the Samoans, and 
one " dan " was said to offer first-fruits to its sacred animal, 
the ed; while the " dan " that revered the pigeon kept and fed 
a tame specimen.* But in Samoa, though the sacred animals 
of "dans " or " families " are, in all probability, survivals of 
totemism, they are now regarded by the people as the veEides 

* Long, Voyages and Travels of an Indian Interpreter (1791), p. 861 
*Tunier, Sanua, p. 71. 



of ''dan" or "family" gods, and therefore receive honoun 
not paid to the hereditary totems of Australia and North 
America, which have nothing godlike. It is to be presumed that 
" totem dances " in which some Australian tribes exhibit, in 
baUels d^aciUm, the incidents of a myth concerning the totem, 
are, in a certain sense, " religious "; when they are not magical, 
and intended to foster and fertilize the species, animal or 
vegetable or other to which the totem belongs. 

The magical performances for the behoof -of the totem crea- 
tures may be studied in the chapters on " Intichiuma " in Messrs 
Spencer and Gillen's Native Tribes of Cental Australia^ and 
Native Tribes of NorUiem Australia. Among the many guesses 
at the original purpose of totemism, one has been that the 
primal intention of totem sets of human beings was to act as 
magical co-operative stores for supplying increased quantities 
of food to the tribe. But this opinion has gone the way of 
other conjectures. The "religious" status of the totem is 
lowest among peoples where its influence on social regulations 
is greatest, and vice versa, a topic to which we recur. 

There are also various rites, in various tribes, connecting the 
dead man with his totem at his funeral; perhaps at bis initia- 
tion, when a boy, into the esoteric knowledge and rules of his 
tribe. Men may identify themselves with their totems, or, 
mark themselves as of this or that totem by wearing the hide 
or the plumage of the bird or beast, or by putting on a mask 
resembling its face. The degree of " religious '* regard for the 
revered object increases in proportion as it is taken to contain 
the spirit of an ancestor or to be the embodiment of a god: 
ideas not found among the most backward savages. 

The supreme or superior being of low savage religion or 
mythology is never a totem. He may be able, like Zeus in 
Greek mythology, to assume any shape he pleases; and in the 
myths of some Australian tribes he ordained the institution of 
totemism. Byamee, among the Euahlayi tribe of north-west New 
South Wales, had all the totems in him, and when he went to 
his paradise, Bullimah, he distributed them, with the mar- 
riage rules, among his people.^ In other l^nds, especially 
those of central and northern Australia, the original totem 
creatures, animal in form, with bestial aspect, were developed in a 
marine or lacustrine environment, and from them were evolved 
the human beings of each totem kin. The rule of non-inter- 
marriage within the totem was, in some myths, of divine institu- 
tion; in others, was invented by the primitive wandering totemic 
beings; or was laid down by the wisdom of mere men who saw 
some unknown evfl in consanguine unions. The strict regard, 
paid to the rule may be called " religious "; in so far as totemists 
are aware of no secular and social raison d' Hre of the rule it 
has a mysterious character. But whereas to eat the totem is 
sometimes thought to be automatically punished by sickness or 
death, this dangef does not attach to marriage within the totem 
save in a single known case. The secular penalty alone is 
dreaded; so there seems to be no religious fear of offending a 
superior being, or the totem himself: no tabu of a mystic sort. 

Social Asput of the Totem.— Thit totem has almost always a 
strong influence on or is associated with marriage law, and 
except in the centre of Australia, and perhaps in the little-known 
West, men and women of the same totem may not intermarry, 
" however far apart their hunting grounds,'* and though there is 
no objection on the score of consanguinity. 

This is the result, in Australia, of the custom, there almost 
universal, which causes each individual to belong, by birth, to 
one or other of the two main exogamous and intermarrying 
divisions of the tribe (usually called " phratries "). The phra- 
tries (often known by names of animals, as Eagle Hawk and 
Crow, Crow and White Cockatoo) contain each a number of 
totem kins, as Dog, Wild Cherry, Wombat, Frog, Owl, Emu. 
Kangaroo, and so on, and (except among the Arunta " nation '* 
of five tribes in Central Australia) the same totem kin never 
occurs in both phratries. Thus as all persons except in the 
Arunta nation, marry out of their own phratry, none can many 
into his or her totem Idn. 

' Mrs Langloh Parker, The EmUayi Tribe, 

In some parts of North America the same rule prevails, with 
this peculiarity that the phratries, or main exogamous divisions, 
are not always two, as in Australia, but, for example, amon^ 
the Mohegans three— Wolf, Turde, and Turkey.* In Wolf 
all the totems are quadrupeds; under Turtle they are various 
species of turtles and the yellow ed; and under Turkey all 
the totems are birds. 

Qearly this ranking of the totems in the phratries is the result 
of purposeful design, not of acddent. Design may also be 
observed in such phratries of Australian tribes as are named after 
animals of contrasted colours, such as White Cockatoo and 
Crow, Light Eagle Hawk and Crow. It has been supposed by 
Mr J. Mathew, P^re Schmidt and others that these Australian 
phratries arose in an alliance with cotmuhium between a darker 
and a lighter race.* But another hjrpothesis is not less prob- 
able; and as we can translate only about a third of Australian 
phratry names, conjecture on this subject is premature. 

Both in Australia and America the animals, as Ea^eHawk and 
Crow, which give their names to t^e phratries, are admost always 
totem kins within their own phratries.* 

Hie Moquis of Arizona are said to have ten phratries, by 
Captain Ulick Bourke in his Snake Dance of the Moquis, but 
possibly he did not use the term " phratry " in the sense which 
we attach to it. 

Among the Urabunna of Southern Central Australia, and 
among the tribes towards the Darling River, a very peculiar rule 
is said to prevaiL There are two phratries, and in each are many 
totem kins, but each totem kin may intermarry with only one 
totem kin which must be in the opposite phratry.' Thus there 
are as many exogamoiis divisions as there are totems in the 
tribes, whidi reckon descent in the female line; children in- 
heriting the mother's totem only. Corroboration of these 
statements is desirable, as the tribes implicated are peculiarly 
" primitive," and theirs may be the oldest extant set of 
marriage rules. 

The existence of two or more main exogamous divisions, 
named or unnamed, is found among peoples where there are 
either no totem kins, or where they have' fallen into the back- 
ground, as in parts of Melanesia, among the Todas and Meitchis 
of India and the AVanika in East Africa.* 

An extraordinary case is reported from South Australia where 
people must marry in thdr own phratry, while thdr children 
bek)ng to the opposite phratry.' This awaits corroboration. 

We now see some of the numerous varieties which prevail 
in the marriage rules connected with the totems. Even among 
a tribe whose members, it is reported, may many into thdr 
own phratries, it appears that they must not many within their 
own totem kins. This is, inde^, the rule wherever totemic 
sodeties are found in anything approaching to what we deem 
their most archaic constitution as in south-east Australia and 
some tribes of North America. 

Exogamy: The Arunta Abnormality. — ^Meanwhile, in Centnd 
Australia, in the Arunta " nation," the rule forbidding marriage 
within the totem kin does not exist. Totems here are not, as 
everywhere else, inherited from dther parent, but a child is of 
what we may call " the local totem " of the place where its 
mother first became conscious of its life within her. The idea 
is that the spirits of a primal race, in groups each of one totem 
only (" Alcheringa folk "), haunt various localities; or spirits 
{ratapa) emanating from these primal bdngs do so; they enter 
into passing married women, and are incarnated and bom again.* 

* Moraan, Ancient Society, p. 174. 

* Mathew. Eagle Hawk and Crow; Schmidt, AnAropos (1909). 
«See Lang. The Secret of the Totem, pp. 154, 170: and N. W. 

Thomas, Kinship and Marriaee in Australta, pp. 9. 31. 

* Howitt, Nattve Tribes of South-East Australia, pp. 93, 181. 188; 
Speifcer and Gillen, Native Tribes of Central A ustralia, pp. 60, 61 , 
Northern Tribes, p. 71; Lang, Anthropological Essays; Tylor's Fest- 

hrift, pp. 203- 
* Thomas, ut 

supra, p. la See, for numerous examples, T. G. 
Frazer, Totemism (1910). 

V ^5. of Mrs Bates. 

*It is necessary to state here the sources of our information 
about the central, north, north-western and south-eastern forms of 



Thva if a woman, whatever her own totem, and whatever her 
hu^iand's may be, becomes conscious of her child's life in a 
known centre of Wild Cat spirits, her child's totem is Wild Cat, 
and so with all the rest. 

As a consequence, a totem sometimes here appears in what 
the people c^ the *' wrong '* (i.e. not the original) ezogamous 
division; and persons may marry within their own totem name, 
if that totem be in the ** right " ezogamous division, which is not 
theirs. Each totem q>irit is among the Arunta associated with 
an amulet or ckuringa of stone; these are of various shapes, and 
ue decorated with concentric circles, spirals, cupuUs^ and other 
archaic patterns. These amulets are only used in this sense by 
the Arunta nation and their neighbours the Kaitish, " and it b 
this idea of spirit individuab associated with churinga and 
resident in certain definite spots that lies at the root of the present 

totenusm. About the cefittal Arunta tribe with its neighboun, the 
Utafaunna. we have the evidence very carefully collected by Mr 
Gilleti, ajprotector of the aborigines, and Professor Baldwin Spencer 
{NatiM Tribes of Central Australia). Concerning the peoples north 
frocn the centre to the Gulf of Carpenuria, the same scnolan furnish 
a copious account in their Northern Tribes. These two explorers had 
Ae confidence of the blacks; witnessed their most secret ceremonies, 
nagical and initiatory; and collected their Iq^nds. Their books, 
hawrver, contain no philological information as to the structure 
and itttenvlation of the dialects, information which is rarely to be 
found in the works of English observers in Australia. As far as 
appeaiv, the observers conversed with the tribes only in " pidgin 
Ei^liah.'* If this be the case that lingua franca is current among 
some eighteen central-northern trib«» speaking various native 
dialects. We are told nothing about the languages used in each 
case; perhaps the Arunta men who accompanied the expedition 
a r ra n ged a system of interpreters. 

For the Dieri tribe, neighbours of the Urabunna, we have copious 
evidence in Natioe Tribes of South-East Australia by the late Mr 
A W. Howitt. who studiecf the peoples for fortv years; was made 
free of their initiatory ceremonies; and obtained intelligence from 
settlers in regions which he did not visit. We have abo Iq^ends 
vith I>ieri texts and transbtions from the Rev. Mr Siebert, a mis- 
skmary among the Dieri. That tribe appears now to exist in a very 
dwindled condition under miasionary supervision. The accounts 
of tribes from the centre to the south-east by Mr R. E. Mathew. 
are scattered in many English, Australbn and American learned 
periodicab. Mr Mathew nas given a good deal of information 
about some of the dialects. Hb statements as to the line of descent 
and on other points amoiu certain tribes are at variance with those 
of Mosrs SpeoctT and GiTlen (see an article by Mr A. R. Brown in 
Man, March 1910). Mr Mathew. however, does not enabb us to 
test the accuracy ol his informants among the northern tribes, which 
u unfortunate. For the Aranda (or Arunta) of a region apparently 
not exfrfored by Messrs Spencer and CHIlen, and for the neighbouring 
Lorit ja tribe, we have Dte A randa und Loritja Stdmme, two volumes 

S' the Rev. C Streblow (Baer, Frankfurt am Main, 1907, 1908). 
r Strehlow b a German misnonary who, after workmg among 
the Dieri and acquiring their language, served for many years among 
a brauich of the Arunta (the Aranda), differing considerably in 
dialect, myths and usages from the Arunta of Messrs Spencer and 
Gillcn. In some points, for exampb as to the prinuil ancestors 
and the spirits diffused by them for incarnation in human bodies, 
the Aramis and Loritja are more akin to the northern tribes than 
to Mr Spencer's Arunta. In other myths they resemble some 
south-eastern tribes reported on by Mr Howitt. unlike the Arunta 
of Messn Spencer and Gtllen, but like the ArunU described by 
Mr Gtllep eariier in The Horn Expedition, they believe in " a 
magnified non-natural man," Altjira, with a goose-foot, dwelling 
in the heavens. Unlike the self<reated Atnatu of the Kaitish of 
Messrs Spencer and Gillen, he is not saud to have created thin|^. 
or to tan any concern about human beings, as Atnatu does in 
matters of cercmonbl. Mr Strehlow gives Aranda and Lortija 
texts in the original, with transbtbns and philolcmcal remarks. 

Mr Fraaer, in hb Totemism, makes no use of Mr Strehlow's 
information (save in a singb instance). To us it seems worthy of 
study. Hb reason for this abstention b that, in a letter to him 
(Meiboome, March 10. i^). Mr Spencer says that for at least twenty 
ycar^ the Lutheran Missions have taught the natives " that altjira 
means ' god '; have taught that their sacred ceremonies and secubr 
damxs are ' wicked ' ; have prohibited them, and have never seen 
them. Flour and tobacco. &c., are only given to natives who attend 
church and school. Natives have been married who, according 
to native customary bw, belong to groups to which marriage u 
forbiddea. For these reasons Mr Fraaer cannot attempt " to 
filter the native liquor clear of its alien sediment," {Totemism, 
I 186, note 2). . . . , . , 

Against this we may urge that, as re^rds the goose-footed sky- 
dweller. Mr Strehlow reports less of his active interest in human 
affaire than Mr GiUen does concerning hb " Great Ulthaana of the 

totemic system of the Arunta," says Messrs Spencer and Gillen.' 
Every Arunta bom incarnates a pre-exbtent primal spirit 
attached to one of the stone ckuringa dropped by primal totemic 
beings, all of one totem in each case, at a place called an 
oknanikiUa. Each child belongs to the totem of the primal 
beings of the place, where the mother became aware of the 
child's life. 

Thus the peculiar causes which have produced the unique 
Arunta Ucence of marrying within the totem are con^icuously 

Contradictory Theories about Ike Arunta Abnormal Totemism. — 
At this point theories concerning the origin of totemism begin 
to differ irreconcilably. Mr Frazer, Mr Spencer, and, apparently 
Dr Rivers, hold that, in Australb at least, totembm was 
originally ** cbnceptional." It began in the belief by the women 
that pregnancy was caused by the entrance into them of some 
spirit associated with a visible object, usually animal or vegetable; 
while the child bom. in each case, was that object. Hence that 
class of objects was tabued to the child j was its totem, but such 
totems were not hereditary 

Next, for some unknown reason, the tribes were divided into 
two bodies or segments. The members of segment A may not 
intermarry; they must marry persons of segment B, and vice 
versa. Thus were evolved the primal forms of totembm and 
exogamy now represented in the law of the Arunta nation alone. 
Here, and here alone, marriage within the totem is permitted. 
The theory is, apparently, that, in all other exogamous and totemic 
peoples, totems had been, for various reasons, made hereditary, 
before exogamy was enforced by the legislator in his wisdom. 
Thus, all over the totemic world, except in the Arunta nation, 
the method of the legbUtor was simply to place one set of 
totem kins in tribal segment A, and the other in segment B, and 
make the segments exogamous and intermarrying. Thus it 
was impossible for any person to marry another of the same 
totem. This is- the theory of Mr Frazer. 

Upholders of the contradictory system maintain that the 
Arunta nation has passed through and out of the universal and 
normal system of hereditary and exogamous totemism into its 
present condition, by reason of the belief that children are 
incarnations of pre-existing animal or vegetable spirits, plus the 
unique Arunta idea of the connexion of such spirits with their 
stone ckuringa. Where thb combination of the two beliefs does 
not occur, there the Aranta non-hereditary and non-exogamous 
totembm does not occur. It would necessarily arise in any 
normal tribe which adopted the two Arunta beliefs, which are not 
" primitive." 

Arguments against Mr Fraxa^s Theory. — There was obviously 
a time, it b urged, when all totems were, as everywhere else, 

heavens " among the Arunta. Mr Strehlow's being, Altjira, has 
a name apparently meaning " mystic " or sacred, which is applied 
to other things, for exampb to the inherited maternal totem of 
each native. His names for Altjira (god) and for the totemic 
ancestort (totem gods), are inappropriate, but may be discounted. 
Many other tribes who are discussed by Mr Frazer have been long 
under missionaiy influence as well as the Aranda. According to 
Mr Frazer the Dieri tribe had enjoyed a German Lutheran mission 

station (since 1866) for forty-four years up to iQio. About 1^0 
Dieri were alive in looo {Totemism, iii. 34^). Nevertheless the 
Dteri myths published by Mr Siebert in the decadence of the 

tribe, and when the remnant was under missionaries, show no 
" alien sediment." Nor do the traditions of Mr Strehlow's Aranda. 
Their traditions are closely akin, now to those of the Arunta, now 
to those of the northern tnbcs, now to those of the Euahlayi of Mrs 
Langloh Parker {Tke Euahlayi Tribe) in New South Wales, and once 
more to those of Mr Howitt's south-eastern tribes. There is no trace 
of Christbn influence in the Aranda and Loritja matter, no vestige 
of " alien " (that is, of European) " sediment." but the account of 
Atnatu among the Kaitish reported on by Messrs Spencer and Gillen 
reads like a savage version of Milton's " Fall of the Angels " in Paradise 
Lost. For these reasons we do not reject the information of Mr 
Strehlow, who is master of several tribal languages, and, of course, 
does not encourage wicked native rites by providing supplies of 
flour, tobacco, &c., during the performances, as Mr Howitt and 
others say that they found it necessary to do. Sceptical colonists 
have been heard to aver that natives will go on periorroing rites as 
long as white men will provide supplies. 
^ Natm Tribes of Central Australia, p. 123. 



in what the Arunta call "the right" divisions; Arunta, that is, 
were so arrayed that no totem existed in more than one division. 
Obliged, as now, to marry out of their own exogamous division 
(one of four sub-classes among the Amnta) into one of the four 
sub-classes of the opposite side, no man could then find in it a 
woman of his own totem to marry. But when Arunta ceased to 
be hereditary, and came to be acquired, as now, by the local 
accident of the totem spirits — ^all, in each case, of one totem 
name, which haunt the supposed place of a child's conception — 
some totems inevitably would often get out of their original 
sub-class into another, and thus the same totems are in 
several divisions. But granting that a man of division 
A may legally marry a woman of division B, he is not 
now prevented from doing so because his totem (say Wild 
Cat) is also hers. His .or hers has strayed, by accident 
of supposed place of conception, out of its " right " 
into its " wrong " division. The words " right " and " wrong " 
as h(re used by the Arunta make it certain that they still 
perceive the distinction, and that, before the Arunta evolved 
the spiritual view of conception, they had, like other people, 
their totems in each case confined to a single main exogamous 
division of their tribe, and therefore no persons could then 
marry into their own totems. 

But when the theory of spiritual conception arose, and was 
combined, in the Arunta set of tribes alone (it is common enough 
elsewhere in northern and western Australia), with the churinga 
doctrine, which gave totems by accident, these two factors, as 
Messrs Spencer and Gillen say, became the causes^" lie at the 
root " — of the present Amnta system by which persons may marry 
others of " the right " division, but of " the wrong " totem. 
That system is strictly confined to the group of tribes (Upirra, 
Loritja, Unmaterja, Kaitish, Arunta) which constitute "the 
Arunta nation." Elsewhere the belief in spiritual conception 
widely prevails, but not the belief in the connexion of spirits of 
individuals with the stone churinga of individuals. Consequently 
the Arunta system of marriage within the totem exists nowhere, 
and the non-exogamous non-hereditary totem exists nowhere, 
except in the Arunta region. Everywhere else hereditary totems 
are exogamous.^ 

Thus the practice of acquiring the totem by local accident 
is absolutely confined to five tribes where the churinga doctrine 
coexists with it. That the churinga belief, coexistent with the 
spiritual theory of conception, is of relatively recent origin Is a 
demonstrable fact. Had it always been present among the 
Arunta the inevitable result, in the course of ages, would be the 
scattering of the totems almost equally, as chance would scatter 
them among the eight exogamous divisions. 

This can be tested by experiment. Take eight men, to 
represent the eight exogamous divisions, and set them apart in 
two groups of four. Take four packs of cards, 208 cards, to 
represent the Arunta totems, which are over 200 in number. 
Deal the cards round in the usual way to each of the eight men; 
each will receive 26 cards. It will not be found that group A has 
" the great majority " of spades and clubs, while group B has 
" the great majority " of diamonds and hearts, and neither group 
will have " the great majority " of court cards. Accident does 
not work in that way. But while accident alone now determines 
the totem to which an Arunta shall belong, nevertheless " in the 
Arunta, as a general rule, the great majority of the members of 
any one totemic group belong to one moiety of the tribe; but this 
is by no means universal . . . " — that is, of the totems the great 
majority in each case, as a rule, belongs to one or the other set of 
four exogamous sub-classes.' 

The inference is obvious. While chance has now placed only 
the small minority of each totem in all or several of the eight 
exogamous divisions, the great majority of totems is in one or 
another of the divisions. This great majority cannot come by 
chance, as Arunta totems new come; consequently it is but lately 
that chance has determined the totem of each individual. Had 
chance from the first been the determining cause, each totem 

* N.T.CA.p. 257; cf. Frazer, Totemism, i. 200-301. 

* Northern Tribes, pp. 151 tqq. 

would not be fairly equally present in each of the two sets of fow 
exogamous divisions. But determination by accident has only 
existed long enough to affect " as a general rule " a small minority 
of cases. " The great majority " of totems remain in what is 
recognized as " the right," the original divisions, as elsewhere 
universally. Arunta myth sometimes supports, sometimes 
contradicts, the belief that the totems were originally limited, 
in each case, to one or other division only, and, being self- 
contradictory, has no historic value. 

A further proof of our point is that the northern neighbours 
of the Arunta, the Kaitish, have only partially accepted Arunta 
ideas, religious and social. Unlike the Arunta they have a 
creative being, Atnatu, from whom half of the population 
descend; the other half were evolved out of totemic forms.' In 
the same way the Kaitish totems " are more strictly divided 
between the two moieties " (main exogamous divisions) " of the 
tribe."* Consequently a man may marry a woman of his own 
totem if she be in the right exogamous division. " She is not 
actually forbidden to him, as a wife becomes of this identity and 
totem, as she would be in the Warramunga neighbouring 
tribe . . ." " It is a very rare thing for a man to marry a 
woman of the same totem as himself,"' naturally, for the old 
rule holds, in sentiment, and a totem is still very rarely in the 
wrong division. The Arunta system of accidental determination 
of the totem has as yet scarcely produced among the Kaitish 
any of its natural and important effects. 

This view of the case seems logical: Arunta non-exogamous 
non-hereditary totemism is the result, as Messrs Spencer and 
Gillen show, of the theory of spiritual conception and the theory 
of the relation of the spirit part of each individual to his churinga. 
These two beliefs have already caused a minority of Arunta 
totems to get out of the original and into the wrong exogamous 
Arunta divisions. The process is not of old standing; if it were, 
all totems would now be fairly distributed among the divisions 
by the laws of chance. In the Kaitish tribe, on the other hand, 
the processes must be of very recent operation, for they have only 
begun to produce their necessary effects. The totemism of the 
Arunta is thus the reverse of " primitive," and has but slightly 
affected the Kaitish. 

Precisely the opposite view of the facts is taken by Mr Frazer 
in his erudite and exhaustive work Totemism. In the Kaitish, 
he writes, " we may detect the first stage in the transition from 
promiscuous marriage and fortuitous descent of the totem to 
strict exogamy of the totem clans and strict heredity of the 
totems in the paternal line."* By " promiscuous marriage," 
marriage within or without the totem, at pleasure, is obviously 
intended, for the Arunta do not marry " promiscuously " — do 
not marry their nearest kin. 

How, on Mr Frazer's theory, was the transition from the 
condition of the Arunta to that of the Kaitish made? If the 
Kaitish were once in the actual Arunta stage of totemism, how 
did their totems come now to be much more strictly divided 
between the two moieties, though " the division is not so 
absolute as amongst the Urabunna in the south and the tribes 
farther north . . ."? How did this occur? The Kaitish have 
not made totems hereditary by law; they are acquired by local 
accident. They have not made a rule that all totems should, 
as among the more northern neighbours of the Arunta, be 
regimented so that no totem occurs in more than one division: 
to this rule there arc exceptions. A man "is not actually 
forbidden " to marry a woman of his own totem provided she 
be of " the right division," but it is clear that he " does not 
usually do so." This we can explain as the result of a survival 
in manners of the old absolute universal prohibition. 

Aleanwhile our view of the facts makes all the phenomena 
seem natural and intelligible in accordance with the statement 
of the observers, Messrs Spencer and Gillen, that the cause of 
the unique non-hereditary non-exogamous totems of the Arunta 
is the combination of the churinga spiritual belief with the belief 
in spiritual conception. This cause, though now present among 

■ Northern Tribes, pp. 153, 154, 175. • Ibid. p. 15a. 
» Ibid. p. 175. • Totemism, i. 244. 



the Kaitish, has, so far, operated but faintly. We hayie been 
explicit on these points b«:ause on them the whole problem of 
the original form of totemism hinges. In our view, for the reasons 
stated, the Arunta system of non-ezogamous non-hereditary 
totemism is a peculiarity of comparatively recent institution. 
But Mr Fxazer, and the chief observer of the phenomena, Mr 
Spencer, consider the Arunta system, non-ezogamous and non- 
hereditary, to be the most archaic form of totemism eztant. 

As to non-hereditary, we find another report of the facts in 
Die Aranda und Loriija Stdmmtf by the Rev. Mr Strehlow, who 
bos a colloquial and philological knowledge of the Uinguage of 
th::se tribes. As he reports, among other things, that the 
Aranda (Arunta) in his district inkerit their mother's totems, in 
addition to their "local totems," they appear to retain an 
archaic feature from which theiif local totem system and marriage 
rules are a dqnrture.^ 

The hereditary maternal totem is, in Mr Strchlow's region, the 
protective being {altjira) of each Arunta individuxd. 

Art the Arunta " Primitive " or not /—In the whole totemic 
controversy the question as to whether the non-ezogamous 
non-bereditary totemism of the Arunta or the hereditary and 
csogamous totemism of the rest of Australia and of totemic 
mankind, be the earlier, is crucial. 

That Arunta totemism is a freak or " sport," it b argued, 
is made probable first by the fact that the Arunta inherit all 
things bereditable in the male line, whereas inheritance in the 
female descent is earlier. (To this question we return ; see below, 
Male and Female Lines of Descent.) M. Van Gennep argues 
that tribes in contact, one set having female, the other male, 
descent, *' like the Arunta have combined the systems."* But 
several northern tribes with male descent of the totem which are 
net in contact with tribes of female descent show much stronger 
traces of the " combination " than the Arunta, who intermarry 
freely with a tribe of female descent, the Urabunna; while the 
Urabiinna, though intermarrying with the Arunta who inherit 
property and tribal office in the male line, show no traces of 
** combination." Thus the effects occur where the alleged 
causes are not present; and the alleged causes, in the case of 
the Urabunna and Arunta, do not produce the effects. 

Next the Arunta have no names for their main ezogamous 
divisions, these names being a very archaic feature which in many 
tribes with sub-classes tend to disappear. In absence of phratry 
names the Arunta are remote from the primitive. M. Van 
Gennep replies that perhaps the Arunta have not yet made the 
names, or have not yet borrowed them. This is also the view 
of Mr Frazer. As he says, the Southern Arunta lived under the 
rule of eight classes, but of these four were anonymous, till the 
names for them were borrowed from the north. The people 
can thus have anonymous ezogamous divisions; the two main 
divisions, or phratries, of the Arunta may, therefore, from the 
first, have been anonymous. 

To this the reply is that people borrow, if they can, what they 
need. The Arunta found names for their four hitherto anony- 
ixx>os classes to be convenient, so they borrowed them. But 
when once class-names did, as they do, all that is necessary, the 
.\n2nta had no longer any use for the names of the two primary 
main divisions: these were forgotten; there is nothing to be got 
by borrowing that; while four Arunta " sub-classes " are gaining 
their names, the " classes " (phratries or main divisions) have 
lost them. It is perfectly logical to hold that while things 
useful, but hitherto anonymous, are gaining names, other things, 
now totally useless, are losing theur names. One process is as 
natural as the other. In all Australia tribes with two main 
divisions and no sub-classes, the names of the two main divisions 
are found, because the names are useful. In several tribes with 
named sub-classes, which now do the work previously thrown on 
the main divisions, the names of the main divisions are unknown: 
the main divisions being now useless, and superseded by the sub- 
classes. The absence of names of the two main divisions in the 
Arunta is merely a result, often found, of the rise of the sub- 

1 StreUow, 0. S7 (1908). 

> iiyUiet et Ugjmdes ffAustrolie, p. xxxii. 

classes, which, as Mr Frazer declares, are not primitive, but the 
result of successive later legislative acts of division.* 

Manifestly on this point the Arunta are at the farthest point 
from the earliest organization: their loss of phratry names is 
the consequence of this great advance from the " primitive." 

All Arunta society rests on a theory of reincarnated spirits, 
a theory minutely elaborated. M Van Gennep asks " why 
should this belief not be primitive? " Surely neither the 
belief in spirits, nor the elaborate working out of the belief 
connecting spirits with manufactured stone amulets, can have 
been primitive. Nobody will say that peculiar stone amulets 
and the Arunta belief about spirits associated with them are 
primitive. To this M Van Gennep makes no reply.* 

The Arunta belief that children are spirit-children {ralapa) 
incarnated is very common in the other central and northern 
tribes, and, according to Mrs Bates, in Western Australia; Dr 
Roth reports the same for parts of (Queensland. It is alleged by 
Messrs Spencer and Gillen that the tribes holding this belief 
deny any connexion between sczual unions and procreation. 
Mr Strehlow, on the other hand, says that in his region the 
older Arunta men understand the part of the male in procreation; 
and that even the children of the Loritja and Arunta understand, 
in the case of animals.* (Here corroboration is desirable and 
European influence may be asserted.) Dr Roth says that the 
Tully River blacks of (^eensUnd admit procreation for all 
other animals, which have no Koi or soul, but not for men, who 
have souls. (Their theory of human birth, therefore, merely 
ainis primarily at accounting for the spiritual part of man.)* 

According to Mis Bates, some tribes in the north of South 
Australia, tribes with the same " class " names as the Arunta, 
hold that to have children a man must possess two spirits 
{ranee). If he has but one, he remains childless. If he has two, 
he can dream of an animal, or other object, which then passes 
into his wife, and is bom as a child, the animal thus becoming the 
child's totem. This belief does not appear to apply to reproduc- 
tion in the lower animals. It is a spiritual theory of the begetting 
of a soul incarnated. If a man has but one spirit, he cannot give 
one to a child, therefore he is childless. 

It is dear that this, and all other systems in which reproduction 
is czplained in spiritual terms, can only arise among peoples 
whose whole mode of thinking is intensely " animistic." It is 
also plain that all such myths answer two questions — (i) How 
does a being of flesh and spirit acquire its spiritual part?— (2) 
How is it that every human being is in mystical rapport 
with an animal, plant, or other object, the totem? Manifestly 
the second question could not arise and need answer before 
mankind were actually totemists. It may be added that in 
the south of Western Australia the name for the mythical 
" Father of All " (a being not there worshipped, though 
images of him are made and receive some cult at certain 
licentious festivals) and the name for " father-stock " is 
maman, which Mrs Bates finds to be the native term for 
membrum virile. All this appears to be proof of understand- 
ing of the male part in reproduction, though that understanding 
is now obscured by speculation about spirits. 

The question arises then, is the ignorance of procreation, where 
that ignorance exists, " primitive," and is the Arunta totemism 
also " primitive," being conditioned, as we are told it is, by the 
unique belief in some churinga? (>r is the ignorance due to 
attempts of native thinkers to account for the spirit in man as a 
pre-ezisting entity that has been from the begiiming? The 
former view is that of Messrs Spencer and Gillen, and Mr Frazer. 
For the latter see Lang, Anthropological Essays presented to 
E. B. Tylor, pp. 210-318. We can hardly call people primitive 
because they have struggled with the problem " how has material 
man an indwelling spirit?" 

Theories of the Origin of Totemic Exogamy.— Svact the word 
" ezogamy " as a name for the marriage systems connected (as 
a rule) with totemism was used by J. F. McLennan in his 

* Totemism, i. 282, 283. * Van Gennep, pp. 

* Loritja Stdmmej p. 53, note 7. 

* Roth, Bulletin, No. 5, pp. 17, 23, 65, 81. 



Primilive Marriage (x866), theories of the origin of exogamy 
have been rife and multifarious. All, without exception, are 
purely conjectural. One set of disputants bold that man 
(whatever his original condition may have been) was, when he 
first passed an Act of Exogamy, a member of a Iribe. Howitt's 
term for this tribe was " the undivided commune." It had, 
according to him, its inspired medicine-man, believed to be in 
communication with some superior being. It had its pro- 
bouleutic coundl of elders or "headmen" and its general 
assembly. Such was man's political condition.^ It is not dis- 
tinguishable from that of many modem Australian tribes. Other 
tribes, said by some to be the moat primitive, the Arunta and 
their neighbours, pay no attention to the dictates of a superior 
being, and the Arunta of Spencer and Gillen seem to know no 
such entity, though as Atnatu, Tukura, Altjira, and " the Great 
Ulthaana of the heavens," he exists in a dwindled form among 
the Kaitish, Loritja and outlying portions of the Arunta tribe. 
In religion Howitt's early men were already in advance of Mr 
Spencer's Arunta. Socially, man, at this date, according to 
Howitt, at first left the relations of the sexes wholly unregulated; 
the nearest kinsfolk by blood coupled at will, though perfectly 
aware that they were, at least on the maternal side, actual 
brothers and sisters, parents and children. 

Upholders of the first theory, that man lived promiscuously 
in a tribal state with legislative assemblies and then suddenly 
reformed promiscuity away, must necessarily differ in their 
opinion as to the origins of totems and exogamy from the friends 
of the second theory, who believe that man never was "pro- 
miscuous," and given to sexual union with near kin. Why man, 
on the first theory — familiar as he was with unions of the nearest 
kin— suddenly abolished them is explained in four or five different 
ways. Perhaps the most notable view is Mr Frazer's; he easily 
confutes, in thirty-five pages, the other hypotheses.* Man saw, 
or thouc^t he saw, injurious consequences to the wedded near- 
related couples, and therefore he prohibited, first, unions between 
mothers and sons, and brothers and sisters.* But, in his fourth 
volume, Mr Frazer sees conclusive objections to this view and 
prefers another. Some peoples, far above the estate of savagery, 
believe that human incest Uigbts and sterilizes the crops, 
women and animals. " If any such belief were entertained by 
the founders of exogamy, they would clearly have been perfectly 
sufficient motives for instituting the system, for they would 
perfectly explain the horror with which incest has been regarded 
and the extreme severity with which it has been punished."* 
That is to say, people had a horror and hatred of incest because 
they supposed that it blighted the crops and other things. Mr 
Frazer had previously written (iv. io8) ** It is important to bear 
steadily in mind that the dislike of certain marriages must always 
have existed in the minds of the people, or at least of their leaders, 
before that dislike, so to say, received legal sanction by being 
embodied in an exogamous rule." 

Again (iv. 112) " There had, for some reason unknom^ to us, 
been long growing up a strong .aversion to consanguineous 
unions " — ^before any legislative bar was raised against them. 
This is insisted OA* The prohibition ** must have answered to 
certain general sentiments of what was right and proper" 
(iv. 121). But here the theorist hss to explain the origin of 
the strong aversion, the general sentiment that unions of near 
kin are wrong and improper. But Mr Frazer does not seem to 
explain the point that most needs explanation. That " strong 
aversion," that " general sentiment," cannot have arisen from 
a growing belief that unions of close kin spoiled the crops or 
the natural resources of the country. That superstition could 
only arise as a consequence of the horror and aversion with 
which "incest" was regarded. Now no idea corresponding 
to " incest " could arise before unions of near kin were deemed 
abominable. When once such unions were thought hateful to 
gods and men, and an upsetting of the cosmic balance, then, 
but not till then, they might be regarded as injurious to the 
crops. All such beliefs are sanctions of ideas already in strong 

» N.T.S.B,A. pp. 89, 90. • Ibid. L 165. 

* ToUmismt iv. 7&-X2a * Ibid. iv. 155, 15^ 

• lUd. iv. X58. 

force. The idea that such or sucfa a thing b wrong begets 
the prohibition, followed by the sanction— the belief that 
the practice of the thing is injurious in a supernormal way: 
where that belief exists. We do not know it in Australia, for 

A belief that dose sexual unions were maleficent cosmic 
influences could not possibly arise previous to, and could not 
then cause, "the dislike of certain marriages"; "the strong 
aversion to consanguineous tmions "—which existed already. 
This Uitest guess of Mr Frazer at the origin of the idea of 
" incest " — of the abomination of certain unions — is untenable. 
What he has to explain is the origin of the dislike, the aversion, 
the horror. Once that has arisen, as he himself observes, the 
prohibition follows, and then comes the supernormal sanction. 
Thus no theory of exogamous rules as the result of legislation 
to prevent the unions of persons closely akin, can produce, or 
has produced, any reason for the aversion to such unions arising 
among people to whom, on the theory, they were familiar. 
Mr Frazer has confuted the guesses of MacLennan, Morgan, 
Durkheim and others; but his own idea is untenable. 

Tlu Supposed Method of Reform.—On Mr Frazer's theory 
the reformers first placed half of the mothers of the tribe, 
with their children, in division A; and the rest of the mothers, 
with their children, in division B. The members of each division 
(phratry) must many out of it into the other, and thus no man 
could marry his sister or mother. (The father could marry his 
daughter, but in tribes with no exogamous explicit rule against 
the union, he never does.) Later the two divisions were bisected 
each into a couple of pairs (classes) preventing marriage 
between father and daughter; and another resegmentation 
prohibited the unions of more distant relations. These systems, 
from the simplest division into two phratries, to the more 
complex with two "sub-classes" in each phratry, and the 
most elaborate of all with four sub-classes in each phratry, 
exist in various tribes. Enviroimient and climate have 
nothing to do with the matter. The Urabunna and the 
Arunta live in the same climate and environment, and inter- 
marry. The Urabunna hayt the most primitive, the Arunta 
luMw the most advanced of these organizations. Whfle the 
rules are intended to prevent consanguineous marriages, Ihe 
names of the " sub-classes " (when translauble, the names of 
animals) cannot perhaps be explained. They have a totemic 

Totemi in Rdation to Exogamy.-So far, in this theory nothing 
has been said of totems, thou|^ it is an all but universal rule 
that people of the same totem noay not intermarry, even if the 
lovers bdong to tribes separated by the breadth of the continent. 
In fact, according to the hypothesis which has been set forth, 
totems, though now exogamous, played no original part in 
the evolution of exogamy. They came in by accident, not by 
design, and dropped into their place in a system carefully 

Originally, on this theory, a totem came to a child, not as is 
usual now, by inheritance, but by pure acddent; the mother 
supposing that any object which caught her attention at the 
moment when she first fdt the life of her child, or any article 
of food which she had recently eaten, became incarnate in her, 
so that the emu (say) which she saw, or had eaten of, was her 
child. He or she was an Emu man or woman, by totem was an 

Certain localities, later, were somehow assodated each with 
one given object— <:at, kangaroo, grub, or anything else, and 
now " heal totems " (if the phrase may be ^sed) took the place 
of " oonceptional totems," as among the Arunta. The child 
inevitably was of the local totem and its suppos^ place of 

Finally all tribes except the Arunta " nation." made the totem 
hereditary, dther from mother or father; and as the mother or 
father, an Emu, was in division A, so was the child, and he 
or she must many out of that division into the other, B.* 

The objections taken to this theory are now to be sUted: 

* Frazer, TotemisMt I 157-1^. 



CL) Tlie theory can by no possibQity apply to tribes with three 
or more main ezogamous divisions cr phratries, such as we find 
in North America. In a three-phratiy tribe we are reduced to 
suppose that there were three sexes, or resor* to some other 
sofaition not perhaps compatible with the theory, (ii.) We have 
no evidence that any totemic people, except the Navajocs, 
think the closest sexual unions injurious to the parties or their 
offspring. The theory is thus merely extracted from the facts- 
certain unions are forbidden, therefore they must have been 
deemed injurious. Now, even if they were generally thought 
injurious, the belief wotUd be a mere inference from the fact 
tluu they were forbidden, (iii.) The supposed original legisla- 
tive ezogamous division produced a very different effect than 
that said to be aimed at, namely, the prohibition of marriage 
between brothers and sisters. It forbade to every man marriage 
with half the women of his tribe, most of whom were not, even 
in the wide native use of the term, his " tribal " sisters, that 
is, women in a man's phratiy of the same status as his own 
sisters. Such relationships, of course, could not exist before 
they were created by the supposed Act of Division. It would 
have been easy to prohibit marriages of brothers with sisters 
directly, just as, though no exogamous rule forbids, the father, 
in tribes of feinale descent, is directly forbidden to marry his 
danghteis. The natives can take a simple instead of a bewilder- 
ing path. To this natural objection Mr Frazer replies:^ " If we 
assume, as we have every right to do, that the founders of exo- 
gamy in Australia recognized the dassificatory system of rela- 
ticmshxp, and the dassificatory system of relationship only, we 
shall at once percrive that what they intended to prevent was 
not merely the marriage of a man with his sister, his mother, 
or his daughter in the physical sense in which we use these 
terms; their aim was to prevent his marriage with his sister, 
his mother and his daughter in the dassificatory sense of 
these terms; that is, they intended to place bars to marriage 
j»l between individuals merely but between the whole groups 
<rf persons who designated their group, not their individual 
relationships, thdr social, not their consanguineous ties, by the 
names of father and mother, brother and sister, son and daughter. 
And in this intention the founders of exogamy succeeded per- 
fectly." Mr Frazer's theory of the origin of exogamy appears 
now to waver. It was' that the primal bisection of the 
tribe was " defiberatdy devised and adopted as a means of 
preventing the marriage, at first, of brother with sisters. . . ." 
Here was the place to say, if it was then intended to say, that 
the Australians " recognized the dassificatory system of rela- 
tionships only." As a matter of fact they recognize both the 
consanguine and the dassificatory !^tenis. It is not the 
case that " the savage Australian, it may be said with truth, 
has no idea of relationships as we understand them, and does 
not discriminate between his actual father and mother and 
the men and women who belong to the group, each member of 
which ndght have lawfuUy been dther his father or his mother, 
as the case may be." 

This sutement is made inadvertently and unfortunately by 
Menrs ^>encer and Gillen,' but it is contradicted by their 
own observations. An Arunta can tell you, if asked, which of 
all the men whom he calls " father " is his very own father/ 
The Dieri have terms for " great " (actual) and " little " (tribal) 
father, and so for other relationships. In Anmta orgies 
a woman's " tribal " " fathers " and " brothers " and " sons " 
are admitted to her embraces; her actual father and brothers 
and sons are cxduded.* Thus, if the prohibition be based on 
avnskm to unions of persons closely akm by blood, as the 
actual lather is ezduded, the actual father, among the Arunta, 
is, or has been, amongst that people, regarded as near of blood to 
fai» daughters. The Arunta are ignorant, we are told, of the 
part of the male in procreation. Be it so, but there has been 
a time when they were not ignorant, and when the father was 
noog^ztd as of the nearest kin by blood to his daughters. If 

< Tatemism, I 388. * Ibid. i. 163. 

* Sortkem Tribes^ pp. 95 aeq.; Totemism, i. 289. 
« Cpfirn/ Tribet, p. 57. • Ibid. p. 97. 

not, and if the prohibition is based on hatred of unions of 
dose kin, why is the father exduded? Nothing, in short, can 
be more certain than that Australian tribes distingubh between 
" social " or " tribal *' relations on the one hand, and close 
consanguine relations on the other. Among the Arunta office 
is inherited by a man from his mother's husband, his father quern 
nuptiae denumstraiU; not from any " tribal " father.* 

Mr Frazer' apparently meant in his earlier statement that 
brothers and sisters consanguine, and these only, were to 
be exduded from intermarriage, because he went on to say that 
science cannot dedde as to whether the dosest interbreeding 
is injurious to the offspring of healthy parents, however near 
in blood; and that very low savages could not discover what is 
hidden from modem sdence. * He had therefore marriages of 
consanguine brothers and sisters present to his mind: " the 
dosest interbreeding." Brothers and sisters were finally for- 
bidden, on thb theory, to intermarry, not because of any dread 
of injury to the offspring. " The only alternative open to us 
seems to be to infer that these unions were forbidden because 
they were believed to be injurious to the persons engaged in 
them, even when they were both in perfect health."* These 
" incestuous tmions " are between brothers and sistets, mothers 
and sons. Here brothers and sisters consanguine, children of the 
same mother in each case, certainly appear to be intended. Who 
else, indeed, can be intended? But presently* we are to assume 
that the Australians, before they made the first exogamous 
division of the tribe " recognized the dassificatory system of 
relationship, and the dassificatory system only." They meant, 
fftfw, to bar marriage between " whole groups of persons," 
related by " social, not consanguineous ties." But this seems 
to be physically impossible. These " whole groups " never 
existed, and never could exist, as far as we can see, till they 
were called into being by the legisktive division of the tribe 
into two exogamous phratries— which had not yet been made. 
How could a man call a whole group of women " nupa," as at 
present (the word being applied to his wife and to all women 
of the opposite phratry to his whom he might legally marry) 
before the new Uiw had constituted such a group? In what 
sense, again, were all women of a certain status called my 
" sisters " (like my actual sisters) before the new law made a 
new group of them — ^in regard to marriage as sacred as my own 
sisters now were to me? It caxmot be said that all women 
of my status were called, collectively, my " sisters " before the 
new division of the tribe and new rule arose, because previously, 
all women of my status in the tribe have been my " sisters." 
Who else could be coUectivdy my " sisters "? If to marry a 
" sister " were reckoned dangerous to her and to me, I must have 
been forbidden to marry aU the women of my status in the 
tribe. How could a law which merely halved the number of my 
" sisters " remove the unknown danger from half of them? If 
any women except my actual sisters were, before the new rule, 
reckoned as socially my sisters, all women in the tribe of a certain 
status must have been so reckoned. If all dangerous, I must 
marry none of them. But by the new rule, I may marry half 
of themi Why have they cea^ to be dangerous? 

If the theory be that originally only brothers and usters con- 
sanguine were thought dangerous to each other in sexual rda- 
tions, and the superstition was later extended so as to include 
all "dassificatory" brothers and sisters, who were in these 
days (before the exogamous division) dassificatory brothers and 
sisters? How and for what 'reason were some marriageable 
girls in the tribe dassificatory sisters of a young man while 
others, equally young and marriageable, were not? The dassi- 
ficatory brothers and sisters must have been all the marriageable 
youth of both sexes in a generation, in the tribe. 

But then if all the youth of a generation, of both sexes, 
were dassificatory brothers and sbters, and if therefore their 
unions were dangerous to themsdves, or to the crops, the danger 
could not be prevented by dividing them into two sets, and 

*See Proceedings of British Academy, iii. 4. Lang, "Origin 

of Terms of Human Relationships." 
' Tolemism, 1 163. • Ibid. i. 165. 

* Ibid. i. a88. 



allowing each set of brothers to marry each set of sisters. The 
only way to parry the danger was to force all these brothers and 
sisters to marry out of the local tribe into another local tribe 
with the same superstition. When that was done, the two local 
tribes, exogamous and intermarrying, were constituted into the 
two phratries of one local tribe. But that is not the theory of 
observers on the spot: their hypothesis is that a promiscuous 
and communistic local tribe, for no known or conceivable 
reason, bisected itself into two exogamous and intermarrying 
" moieties." 

On the face of it, it is a fatal objection to the theory that wnen 
men dwelt in an undivided commune they recognized no system 
of relationships but the classificatory, yet were well aware of 
consanguineous relationships; were determined to prohibit 
the marriages of people in such relationships; and included in 
the new prohibition people in no way consanguineous, but 
merely of classificatory kin. The reformers, by the theory, 
were perfectly able to distinguish consanguineous kinsfolk, so 
that they might easily have forbidden them to intermarry; 
while if all the members of the tribe were not in the classificatory 
degrees of relationship, who were? How were persons in classifi- 
catory relationships with each other discriminated from other 
members of the tribe who were not? They were easily discrim- 
inated as soon as the phratries were instituted, but, we think, not 

Term of Classificatory Relationships. — Here it is necessary to 
say a few words about " classificatory " terms of relationship. 
Among many peoples the terms or names which with us denote 
relationships of consanguinity or affinity, such as Father, 
Mother, Brother, Sister, Son, Daughter, Husband, Wife, are 
applied both to the individuals actually consanguineous in 
these degrees, and also to all the other persons in the speaker's 
own main exogamous division or phratry who are of the same 
" age-grade " and social status as the Father, Mother, Brother, 
Sister, Son, Daughter, Husband, Wife, and so forth. As a 
man thus calls all the women whom he might legally have married 
by the same term as he calls his wife, and calls all children of 
persons of his own " age-grade," class and sUtus by the same 
name as he calls his own children, many theorists hold this to 
be a proof of the origin of the nomenclature ** in a system of 
group marriage in which groups of men exercised marital rights 
over groups of women, and the limitation of one wife to one 
husband was unknown. Such a system would explain very 
simply why every man gives the name of wife to a whole group 
of women, and every woman gives the name of husband to a 
whole group of men," and so on with all such collective terms 
of relationship.* 

Certainly this is a very simple explanation. But if we wished 
to explain why every Frenchman applies the name which he 
gives to his " wife " (Jemnu) to every " woman " in the world, 
it would be rather simpler than satisfactory to say that this 
nomenclature arose when the French people lived in absolute 
sexual promiscuity. The same reasoning applies to English 
" wife," German fF«t6, meam'ng " woman," ard so on in many 
languages. Moreover the explanation, though certainly very 
pimple, is not '* the only reasonable and probable explanation." 
Suppose that early man, as in a hypothesis of Darwin's, lived, 
not in large local tribes with the present polity of such tribes 
in Australia, but in " cydopean families," where the sire con- 
trolled his female mates and offspring; and suppose that he, 
from motives of sexual jealousy, and love of a quiet life, forbade 
amours between his sons and daughters. Suppose such a society 
to reach the dimensions of a tribe. The rules that applied to 
brothers and sisters, mothers and sons, would persist, and the 
original names for persons in such relationships in the family 
would be extended, in the tribe, to all persons of the same 
status: new terms being adopted, or old terms extended, to 
cover new social relationships created by social laws in a wider 

Another Theory of the Origin of Totemism and £xogamy.— How 
this would happen may be seen in studying the other hypothesis 
* Tottmisn^, i. 304. 

of exogamy and totemism.* Man was at first, as Darwin sap- 
posed, a jealous brute who expelled his sons from the neighbour- 
hood of his women; he thus secured the internal peace of his 
fire circle; there were no domestic love-feuds. The sons there- 
fore of necessity married out — were exogamous. As man 
became more human, a son was permitted to abide among his 
kin, but he had to capture a mate from another herd (exogamy). 

The groups received sobriquets from each other, as Emu, 
Frog, and so forth, a fact illustrated copiously in the practice 
of modern and English and ancient Hebrew villages.' 

The rule was now that marriage must be outside of the local 
group-name. Frog may not marry Frog, or Emu, Emu. The 
usual savage superstition which places all folk in m>rstic 
rapport with the object fro^ which their names -zrt derived 
gradually gave a degree of sanctity to Emu, Frog and the rest. 
They became totems. 

Perhaps the captured women in group Emu retained and 
bequeathed to their children their own group-names; the 
children were Grubs, Ants, Snakes, &c. in Emu group. Let 
two such groups, Emu and Kangaroo, tired of fighting for 
women, make peace with connuhium^ then we have two phra- 
tries, exogamous and intermarrying. Emu and Kangaroo, with 
totem kins within them. (Another hypothesis is necessary 
if the original rule of all was, as among the Urabunna and other 
tribes, that each totem kin mustmarryout of itself into only one 
other totem kin.* But we are not sure of the fact of one 
totem to one totem marriage.) In short, the existence of the 
two main exogamous divisions in a tribe is the result of an alliance 
of two groups, already exogamous and intermarrying, not of a 
deliberate dissection of a promiscuous horde.* 

The first objection to this system is that it is iK>t held by' 
observers on the spot, such as Mr Howctt and Mr Spencer. 
But while all the observed facts of these observers are accepted 
(when they do not contradict their own statements, or are not 
corrected by fresh observations), theorists are not bound to 
accept the hypotheses of the observers. Every possible re^>ect 
is. paid to faas of observation. Hypotheses as to a suge of 
society which no man living has observed may be accepted as 
freely from Darwin as from Howitt, Spencer and L. Morgan. 

It is next objected that " the only ground for denying that the 
elaborate marriage-system" (systems?) "of the Australian 
aborigines has been devised by them for the purpose which 
it actually serves, appears to be a preconceived idea that these 
savages are incapable of thinking out and putting in practice 
a scries of checks on marriage so intricate that many civilized 
persons lack either the patience or the ability to understand 
them . . . The truth is that all attempts to trace the origin and 
growth of human institutions without the intervention of human 
intelligence and will are radicaUy vicious and foredoomed to 
failure."* But nobody is denying that the whole set of 
Australian systems of marriage is the result o( human emotions, 
intelligence and wiU. Nobody is denying that, in course of 
time, the aborigines have thought out and by successive steps 
have elaborated their systems. The only questions are, what 
were the human motives and needs which, in the first instance, 
set human intelligence and will to work in these directions; and 
how, in the first instance, did they work? The answers given 
to these questions are purely and inevitably hypothetical, 
whether given by observers or by cloistered students. 

It is objected, as to the origin of totemism, that too much 
influence is given to accident, too little to design. The answer 
is that " accident " plays a great part in all evolution, and that, 

'L^ng and Atkinson, Social Origins and Primal Law: Lang. 
Secret of Ike Totem. 

* Lan?, Social Origins and Secret of the Totem. 

* Anthropological Essays, pp. 206-200. 

» This theory, already sureested by the Rev. J. Mathcw. and Mr 
Daniel McLennan, occurred independently to M. Van Gcnncp, who, 
in Mythes et Ugptdes d'Australie, suppressed his chapter on it. after 
reading TTte Secret of the Totem, The conclusions were almost 
identical with thoae of that ^"ork (Op. cit. pp. vi. xxxiv.). The 
details of the evolution, which are many, may be found in Soctat 
OrigiHs and Primal Lav, and revised in The Secret of the Totem. 

* Totemism, I 380, a8i. 



in the opposed theory, the existence and actual exogamous 
fuBctbn of totems is also accidental, arising from ignorance 
and a peculiar superstition. It is urged that no men would 
accept a nickname given from without by hostile groups. This 
b answered by many examples of cases in which tribes, clans, 
political parties, and, of course, individuals, have accepted 
sobriquets from without, and even when these were hostile and 
derisive.' It is asked. Why, on this theory, are there but two 
exogamous divisions in the tribe? The reply is that in America 
there may be three or more: that in the Urabunna there are as 
many exogamous 'divisions (dual) as there are totems, and that 
these, like the main exogamoiis divisions, go in pairs, because 
marriage is between two contraaing parties.* 

It is maintained in this theory that Australian blacks, who are 
reflective and by no means illogical men, have long ago observed 
that certain marriages are rigorously barred by their social 
system, for do obvious reason. Thus a man learns that he 
must not marry in his own main exogamous division, say 
Eagle Hawk. He must choose a wife from the opposite division. 
Crow. She must belong to a certain set of women in Crow, 
whose tribal status is precisely that, in Crow, of his own sislers, 
and his " little sisters " (the women of his sister's status) in 
Eagle Hawk. The reflective tribesman does not know toky these 
rales exist. But he perceives that the marriageable women in 
his own main division bear the same title as his sisters by 
blood. He therefore comes to the conclusion that they are 
all what his own sisters manifestly are, " too near flesh," as the 
natives say in English; and that the purpose of the rule is to 
bar marriage to him with all the women who bear the name 
** sisters " that detwtes close consanguinity. Presently he 
thinks that other kinsfolk, actual, or bearing the same collective 
title as actual kinsfolk of bis, are also " too near flesh," and he 
goes on to bar tkem till he reaches the eight class model; or. 
Eke some south-eastern tribes, drops the whole cumbrous 
scheme in favour of one much like our own. 

The reflective savage, in short, acts exactly as the Church 
did when she extended to cousins the pre-existing Greek and 
Roman prohibitions against the marriages of very near kin; 
and, again, extended them still further, to exclude persons not 
consanguineous at all but called by the same title as real 
consanguines, " father," " mother " and " child " in " gossipred " 
— gcxlfather, godmother, godchild. 

The savage and ecclesiastical processes are parallel and 
iUostrate each other. Probably when a tribe with two main 
exc^mousand intermarrying divisions came into existence in 
the way which we have indicated, the names used in families for 
father, mother, daughter, son, husband, wife, brother^ sister, 
were simply extended so as to include, in each case, all persons in 
the tribe who were now of the same status, socially, with the 
same rights, restrictions and duties, as had been theirs in the 
fire-drde before the tribe was made a tribe by the union of two 
exogantous and previously hostile intermarrying local groups; 
or two sets of such groups. The process is natural; the wide 
extension now given to old names of relationships saved the 
trouble of making new names. Thus we have found a reasonable 
and probable way of accounting for classificatory terminology 
without adopting the hypothesis that it arose out of " group- 
marriage " and asking " But how did group-marriage arise?" 

There is no accident here, all is deliberate and reflective 
design, beginning with the purely selfish and peace-loving 
design of the jealous sire. Meanwhile the totemic prohibition, 
** no marriage in the same totem name," has been retained and 
expanded even beyond the tribe, and " however remote the 
bunting grounds " of two persons, they may not intermarry if 
their totem name be the same. 

Such are the two chief opposed theories of the origins of 
exo^my, and of the connexions of exogamy with totemism. 
The second docs not enjoy the benefit of norice and criticism 
IS Mr Frazer's Totemism, 

■ The Seerei cfthe Totem, pp. 128, 134. 

*For other arguments explaining the duality of the divinons 
•ee Van Genaep, ni suprat p. xxxiv. and note i. 

Relations of the Social and Religious Aspects of Totemism.— It 
is a curious fact (if it be accepted as a fact) that the social 
aspect of totemism— the prohibition to marry a person of the 
same hereditary totem name — is sometimes strongest where 
the " religious " prohibition against killing or eating the totem 
is weakest; while the highest regard is paid to the totem, or 
to the god which is supposed to inhabit the totem spedes, where 
there is no prohibition on marrying within the totem name. 
Thus in Australia, where (except in the centre, among the 
Arunta) almost all tribes prohibit marriages within the totem 
name, it is scarcely possible to find an instance in which irreUgious 
treatment of the totem, killing or eating it, is (as among many 
other totemic peoples) thought to be automatically or " reli- 
giously " punished by illness, death or miscarriage. Religion, 
in these cases, does not hold that the injured majesty of the 
totem avenges itself on the malefactor. On the other hand the 
Samoans, who pay no regard to the sacred animal of each 
community in the matter of not marrying within his name, 
believe that he will inflia death if one of his species be eaten-^ 
and if no expiatory rite be performed.* In Samoa, we saw, 
the so<alled totem is the vehicle of a God; m Australia no such 
idea is found. 

• Meanwhile the offence of marrying within the totem name is 
nowhere automatically punished in any way except among the 
American Navajos, where, to make certain, the totem kin also 
inflicts secular penalties;* and it is part of the magic of the 
Jntickiuma rites for the behoof of the totem that his kin should 
eat of him sparingly, as on all occasions they may do. In all 
other quarters, where marriage within the totem kin is forbidden, 
the penalty of a breach of law has been death or tribal excom- 
munication. The offence is secular. The Euahlayi, who never 
marry within the totem name, " may and do eat their hereditary 
totems with no ill effects to themselves."* This is very 
common in South Australia. As a rule, however, in Australia 
some respect is paid to the actual plant or animal, and some 
Northern tribes who inherit the paternal totem respect it almost 
as much as the maternal totem. As they also inherit property 
in the maternal line, it seems clear that they have passed from 
female to male descent, as regards the totem, but not as regards 

}iale and Female Descent of the Totem.— It was the almost 
universal opinion of anthropologists that, in the earUest totemic 
societies, the totem was inherited from the mother, and that 
inheritance from the father was a later development. But when 
the peculiar totemism of the Arunta was discovered, and it was 
desired to prove that this non-exogamous totemism was the 
most primitive extant, it was felt to be a difliculty that the Arunta 
reckon descent of everything hereditable in the male, not the 
female line. If then, the Arunta were not primitive but advanced, 
in this matter as well as in their eight sub-classes and ceremonies, 
how could their totemism be primitive? It would have been 
easy to reply that a people ought be " primitive " in some details 
though advanced in others—the fact is notorious. But to escape 
from the dilemma the idea was proposed that neither male nor 
female descent was more primitive than the other. One tribe 
might begin with male, one with female descent. Nobody can 
prove that it was not so, but " whereas evidence of the passage 
from female to male reckoning may be observed, there is virtually 
none of a change in the opposite direction." ' 

Thus the Worgaia and Northern neighbours of the Arunta, 
with male descent, have certainly passed through a system of 
female descent of the totem, and actually inherit property in the 
female line, while Strehlow's Aranda or Arunta inherit their 
mothers* totems. Moreover Howitt shows us at least one tribe 

■Turner, Samoa, p. 31, sqq. 

* Bourke. Snake Dance of the Montis, p. 379. 

* Mrs Laneloh Parker. The Euahlayi Tribe, p. 379. 

*See for Worgaia and Warramunga reverence of the mothcr'a 
totem, though theyinherit the father's, Spencer and Gillen, Northern 
Tribes, p. 166. That these tribes, though reckoning descent in 
the paternal line, inherit property in the maternal u certain, see 
PP,\5?3. 524 


lomas, rd supra, p. 15. 



with female descent, the Dieri, actually in the process of diverging 
from female to male descent of the totem. " A step further is 
when a man gives his totem name to his son, who then has those 
of both father and mother. This has been done even in the 
Dieri tribe," which appears to mean that it is also done in other 

A difficult case in marriage law is explained by saying that 
" possibly some man, as is sometimes the case, gave his Murdu 
(totem) to his son, who was then of two Murdus^ and so could not 
marry a girl of one of his two totems." * We thus see how the 
change from female to male descent of the totem is " directly 
led to," as Mr Howitt says,' by a man's mere fatherly desire to 
have his son made a member of his own totem kin. On the other 
hand, we never read that with male descent of the totem a mother 
gives hers to son or daughter. All these facts make it hard to 
doubt (though absolute proof is necessarily impossible) that 
female everywhere preceded male descent of the totem. 

Proof of transition from female to male descent of the totem 
appears to be positive in some tribes of the south of South 
Australia. Among them each person inherits his mother's 
totem, and may not marry a woman of the same. But he also 
inherits his father's totem, which " takes precedence," and gives 
its name to the local group. No person, as apparently among 
the Dieri when a father has " given his totem " to a son, may 
marry into either his father's or his mother's totem kin (Mrs 

Thus we have a consecutive series of evolutions: (a) All 
inherit the maternal totem orJy, and must not marry within it. 
This is the nile in tribes of south-east Australia with female 
descent. (6) Some fathers in this society give their totems to 
sons, who already inherit their maternal totems. Such sons can 
marry into neither the paternal nor maternal totems. This was 
a nascent rule among the Dieri. (c) All inherit both the paternal 
and the maternal totem, and may marry into neither (southern 
South Australia), ((f) All inherit the religious regard for the 
maternal totem, but may marry within it, while they may not 
marry within the paternal totem (Worgaia and Warramunga of 
north central Australia), (e) llie paternal totem alone is 
religiously regarded, and alone is exogamous (tribes of south- 
east Australia with male descent). (/) The totem is neither 
hereditary on either side nor exogamous (Spencer's Arunta). 
{£) The maternal totem is hereditary and sacred, but not 
exogamous (Strehbw's Arunta). 

In this scheme we give the degrees by which inheritance of the 
totem from the mother shades into inheritance of the totem from 
both parents (Dieri), thence to inheritance of both the maternal 
and paternal totem while the paternal alone regulates marriage 
(Worgaia and Warramunga), thence to exclusive inheritance of 
the paternal, without any regard paid to the maternal totem 
(some tribes of South Australia), and so on.. 

Meanwhile we hear of no tribe with paternal descent of the 
totem in which mothers are giving their own totems also to their 
children. We cannot expect to find more powerful presumptions 
in favour of the opinion that tribes having originally only 
maternal have advanced by degrees to only paternal descent of 
the totem. Mr Frazer says, " So far as I am aware, there is no 
evidence that any Australian tribe has exchanged maternal for 
paternal descent, and until such evidence is forthcoming we are 
justified in assuming that those tribes which now trace descent 
from the father formerly traced it from the mother."* 

We have now provided, however, the evidence for various 
transitional stages from maternal to paternal descent, but have 
found no traces of the contrary process, nor more than one way of 
interpreting the facts. It is admitted by Mr Frazer that in several 
North American tribes the change from female to male descent 
has to ail appearance been made.* Among the Delawares the 
im'tial process was much akin to that of the Dieri, who, in a tribe 
of female descent, " gives " his own totem to his sons. " The 
Delawares had a practice of sometimes naming a child into its 
father's clan," and a son thus became a member of his father's 

« N.T.S.E.A. p. 284. • Ibid. p. 167. 

^- ^^ - • Ibid. iiL 4a. 58, 72. 80. 

> Ibid. p. 384. * totmism, u 317. 

clan. This " may very well have served to initiate a change of 
descent from the female to the male line."* Howitt says pre- 
cisely the same thing about the paternal practice of the Dieru 
Thus there is no reason for denying that the change from female 
to male descent can be made by Australian as readily as by 
American tribes. We have given evidence for every step in the 
transition. The opposite opinion arose merely in an attempt 
to save the primitiveness of the Arunta, some of whom actually 
still make the maternal totem hereditary. 

The change to male descent is socially very important. The 
totem kin of a man , for example, takes up his blood feud. Where 
the descent is female a " man may probably have some (totemic) 
kinsmen in the same group, but equally a considerable number 
of members of other totem kins." But it is clear that the rule 
of male descent gives far greater security to the members of a 
local group; for they are surrounded by kinsmen, local totem 
groups only occurring where male descent of the totem prevails, 
or is predominant.' The change from female to male descent of 
the totem, or the adoption of male descent from the first (if it 
ever occurred) is thus a great social advantage. 

The Ways out of Tatemwrn.— While Howitt believed (though 
later he wavered in his opinion) that female had always preceded 
male descent of the totem, he also observed that with male 
descent came in abnormal developments. One of these is that 
the people of a distria with male descent are often known by 
the name of the region, or of some noted object therein (say wild 
cherries).* They may even regard (or white observers suppose 
that they regard) some object as their " local totem," yet they 
marry within that so-called totem. But they take to marrying, 
not out of the hereditary totem kin, which becomes obsolescent, 
but out of their own repon into some other given locality. Thus 
in the Kumai tribe there were no inevitable herediury totems, 
•but tkundung were given by the fathers to lads*' when about ten 
years old or at initiation.'* * The animal (Aim^fin;(elder brot her) 
was to protect the boy, or girl (the girl's thundung was called 
banung). The names of the creatures, in each case, appear to 
have been given to their human brothers and sisters; the 
thundung name descended to a man's sons. "The names 
are perpetuated" (under nude descent) "from generation to 
generation in the same locality."** 

Thus it appears that when a Kumai wishes to marry he 
goes to a locality where he finds girls of banung names into 
which he may lawfully wed. So far he seems, in fact, to practise 
totemic exogamy; that he has to travel to a particular locality 
is merely an accident. Though the thundung and banung 
names are not inherited at birth by the children, they are given 
by the father when the child is old enough to need them." 

On the whole, we seem to see, in tribes where male descent 
is of old standing, that the exogamous function of the totem 
becomes obsolete, but a shadow of him, as thundung^ retains a 
sort of " religious " aspea and even an unappreciated influence 
in marriage law. 

In Fiji and Samoa, in Melanesia** and British New Guinea, 
many types of contaminated and variegated survivals of totem- 
ism may be studied. In the Torres Islands" hero-worship blends 
with totemic survivals. As in parts of South Africa, where a 
tribe, not a kin, has a sacred animal, as in Fiji, he seems to be the 
one survivor of many totems, the totem of some dominant local 

* Totemism, iii. 4a. 

'Except among the Arunta, where, though ^totems come by 
change, local fiproups are usual. See Spencer and Gillen. Centrai 
Tribes^ p. o. How this occurs we can only guess. See Folh Lore, 
vol. XX., No. a, pp. aao-aji. Here it is Conjectured that adults 
of the totem congregate for the purpose of convenience in performing 
Intichiuma, or magical services for the propagation oS the totem 
as an article of food. For the nature of these rites, common in 
the central and northern but unknown to the south-eastern tribes, 
see Central Tribes^ pp. i67-ai2, and Northern Tribes, pp. a83-3a<x 
The Arunta totem aggregates art magical local societies. 

• Central Tribes, pprs, 9. • N.T.S.E.A. p. 146. 

•• Ibid. p. 146. " Cf. Howitt. ibid. pp. 370-379^ 

" Rivers, " Totembm in Polynesia and Melanesia," Joum. Antl^o^ 
Inst, vol. xxxix. 

" Haddon, Cambridge Expedition, vol. v. 



totem group, before which the other totems have fled, or but 
dimly appear, or are vehicles of gods, or, in Africa, of ancestral 
spirits. (These African tribal sacred animals are called Siboko*.) 
Some tribes explain that the Siboko originated in an animal 
sobrique, as ape, crocodile, given from without.' Sibokoism, the 
presence of a sacred animal in a local tribes can hardly be called 
totemism, though it is probable that the totem of the leading 
totem kin, among several such totem kins in a tribe, has become 
dominant, while the others have become obsolete. On the Gold 
Coast of Africa as long ago as 1819, Bowdich * found twelve 
" families," as he called them, of which most were called by the 
name of an animal, plant or other object, more or less sacred 
to them. They might not marry a person of the same kindred 
name, and there can be little doubt that totemism, with exogamy, 
bad been the rule. But now the rules are broken down, especially 
in the peoples of the coast. The survivals and other informa- 
tion may be found in the Journal of ike Anthropological Institule 
(1906) zxxvL 178, x88. 

There are fainter traces of totemism in the Awemba between 
Lake Tanganyika and Lake Bangweolo«* A somewhat vague 
account of Bantu totems in British East Africa, by Mr C. W. 
Hobley, indicates that among exogamous "dans" a certain 
animal is forbidden as food to each "clan."* The largest 
collection of facts about African totemism, from fresh and 
original sources, is to be found in Mr Fraier's book. For 
totemism in British Columbia the writings of Mr Hill Tout may 
be consulted.* The Thlinkit tribes have the institution -in 
what appears to be its earliest known form, with two exogamous 
phratries and female descent. Ampng the Salish tribes " per- 
sonal " totems are much more prominenL Mr Hill Tout, with 
Profcsor F. Boas, considers the hereditary exogamous totem 
to have its origin in the non-exogamous personal totem, which is 
acquired in a variety of ways. The Salish are not exogamous, 
and have considerable property and marked distinctions of rank. 
It does not, therefore, appear probable that their system of 
badges or crests and personal totems is more primitive than the 
totexnic niles of the less civilized Thlinkits, who follow the form 
of the south-east Australian tribes.' 

Other very curious examples of wfiat we take to be aberrant 
and decadant totemism in New Guinea are given by Mr Selig- 
mann (i/ox, 1908, No. 89), and by Dr Rivers for Fiji (J/an, 
1 90S, No. 75). Mr Seligmann (Man, 1908, No. xoo) added to 
the information and elucidated his previous statements. The 
** clans " in British south-east New Guinea usually bear geo- 
graphical names, but some are named after one of the totems 
in the " dan." " Evefy individual in the cUn has the same 
linked totems," of which a bird, in each case, and a fish seem 
to be predominant and may not be eaten. "The dans are 
exogamous . . . and descent is in the female line." It appears, 
then, that a man, having several totems, all the totems in his 
" dan," must marry a woman of another " dan " who has all 
the totems of her " dan." 

Simil2tf multiplidty of totems, eadi bidividual having a 
number of totems, is described in Western Australia (Mrs 
Bates). In this case the word " totem " seems to be used rather 
vaguely and the facts require eluddation and verification. 
In this part of Australia, as in Fiji* " pour la naissance . . . 
rapparition du totem-animal avait toujotus lieu." In Fiji 
the mother sees the animal, which does not affect conception, 
and " is merdy an omen for the child already conceived." But 
in Western Australia, as we have seen, the husband dreams 
of an animal, which is supposed to follow him home, and to be 
the next child borne by his wife If it is correctly stated that 
when the husband has dreamed of no animal, while nevertheless 
his wife has a baby, the husband spean the man whom he 
suspects of having dreamed of an animal, the marital jealousy 

« Frazer, " Totemism, South Africa," Man (1901), No. Hi. 
> See Secret of the Totem^ pp. 2«, 26. > Mission to AshanlL 

* Jottm. Anikrop. Inst. (1906}, xxxvi. 154. 

» Ibid- (1903). wotiii. 34^34*. * Ibid. (1003-1904). 

* See diacuMion in Secret of the Totem lot details and references. 

* Pire Schmidt, Man (1908), No. 84, quoting Pire de Maixan, 
AmOvpas, ia. 400-405. 

takes an unusual form and human life becomes precarious. But 
probably the husband has some reason for the direction of his 
suspicions. He never suspects a woman. 

" The Banks' Islanders," says Mr Frazer, " have retained the 
primitive system of conceptional totemism." * On the other hand 
Dr Rivers, who is here our authority, writes " totemism is absent " 
from " the northern New Hebrides, the Banks' and the Terrcs 
groups." ^ In a place where totemism is absent it docs not prima 
fade seem likdy that we shall discover " the primitive system 
of conceptional totemism." The Banks' Islanders have no 
totemism at alL But they have a certain superstition applying 
to certain cases, and that superstition resembles Arunta and 
Loritja bdids, in which 'Mr Frazer finds the germs of totemism. 
The superstition, however, has not produced any kind of 
totemism in the Banks' group of isles, at least, no totemism is 
foimd. " There fire," writes Dr Rivers, " beliefs which would seem 
to furnish the most natural starting-point for totemism, beliefs 
which Dr Frazer has been led by the Australian evidence" 
Tby part of the Australian evidence, we must say) " to regard 
as the origin of the institution." Thus, in Banks' Islands we 
have the starting-point of the institution, without the institution 
itself, and in many Australian tribes we have the institution — 
without the facts which are " the most natural starting-point." 
As far as they go these circumstances look as if "the most 
natural" were not the actual starting-point. The facts are 
these: in the Isle of Mota, Banks' group, " many individuals " 
are under a tabu not to eat, in each case, a certain animal 
or fruit, or to touch certain trees, because, in each case, " the 
person is believed to be the animal or fruit in question." 

This tabu does not, as in totemism, apply to every individual; 
but only to those whose mothers, before the birth of the indivi- 
duals, "find an animal or fruit in their loin-cloths." This, 
at least, "is usually" the case. No other cases are given. 
The women, in each case, are informed that their child " will 
have the qualities of the animal " (or fruit) " or even, it appeared 
would be himself or herself the animal " (or fruit). A coco-nut 
or a crocodile, a fl3ring fox or a brush turkey, could not get 
inside a loin-doth; the animal and fruits must be of exiguous 
dimensions. When the animal (or fruit) disappears "it is 
believed that it is because the animal has at the time of its dis- 
appearance entered into the woman. It seemed quite dear that 
there was no belief in physical impregnation on the part 
of the animal nor of the entry of a material object in the form 
of the animal . . , but, so far as I could gather, an animal 
found in this way was regarded as more or less supernatural, a 
spirit animal and not one material, from the beginning." 

" There was no ignorance of the physical r61e of the human 
father, and the father played the same part in conception as 
in cases unaccompanied by an animal appearance." The part 
played by the animal or fruit is limited to producing a tabu 
against the child eating it, in each case, and some community 
of nature with the animal or fruiL Nothing here is hereditary. 
The superstition resembles some of those of the Arunta, Loritja 
and Euahlayi. Among the Euahlayi the superstition has no 
influence; normal totemism prevails; among the Arunta nation 
it is considered to be, and Dr Rivers seems to think that it is, 
likely to have been the origin of totemism. In Mota, however, 
it dther did not produce totemism, or it did; and, where the 
germ has survived in certain cases, the institution has disappeared 
— while the germinal facts have vanished in the great majority 
of totemic sodetiea. Dr Rivers docs not explain how a brush 
turkey, a sea snake or a flying fox can get into a woman's 
loin-doth, yet these animals, also crabs, are among those tabued 
in this way. Perhaps they have struck the woman's fancy 
without getting into her loin-doth. 

It is scarcely correct to say that "the Banks' Islanders 
have retained the primitive system of conceptional totemism." 
They only present, in certain instances, features like those which 
are supposed to be the germs of a system of conceptional 

• Man, Iv. 128. 

>' " Totemism in Polynesia and Melanesia," Joum, Anthrop. Inst, 
xxxix. 173. sqq. 



totemism. In the case of the Aninta we have demonstrated 
that hereditary and ezogamous totemism of the normal type 
preceded the actual conceptional method of acquiring, by local 
accident, "personal totems." If the Banks' Islanders were 
ever totemists they have ceased to be so, and merely retain, in 
cases, a superstition analogous to that which, among the Arunta, 
with the aid of the stone ckuringaf has produced the present 
unique and abnormal state of affairs totemic 

For totemism in India, see Dalton. Ducripiive Elknclogy of Bengal; 
for the north of Asia, Strahlenberg's Z>excrtpfiaii, &c. (1738): and in 
all instances Mr Fraier'a book. 

Myths of Totem Origins. — ^The myths of savages about the 
origin of totemism are of no historical value. Not worshipping 
ancestral spirits, an Australian will not, like an ancestor- 
worshipping African, explain his totem as an ancestral spirit. 
But where, as in the north and centre, he has an elaborate 
philosophy of spirits, there the primal totems exude spirits 
which are incarnated in women. 

In their myths as to the origin of totemism, savages vary 
as much as the civilized makers of modem hypotheses. Some 
claim descent from the totem object; others believe that an 
original race of animals peopled the world; animals human in 
character, but bestial, vegetable, astral or what not, in form. 
These became men, while retaining the rapport with their 
original species; or their spirits are continually reincarnated in 
women and are bom again (Amnta of Messrs Spencer and 
Gillen); or spirits emanating from the primal forms, or from 
objects in nature, as trees or rocks, connected with them, enter 
women and are reincarnated (Arunta of Mr Strehlow and some 
Australian north- wcstem tribes, studied by Mrs Bates). 
Other Australians believe that the All-Father, Baiame, gave 
totems and totemic laws to men.* There are many other explana^ 
tory myths wherever totemism, or vestiges thereof, is fotmd in 
Australia, Africa, America and Asia. 

All the myths of savages, except mere romantic MUrchen, and 
most of the myths of peoples who, like the Greeks, later became 
dvilized, are " aetiological," that is, are fanciful hypotheses 
made to account for everything, from the universe, the skies, 
the sun, the moon, the stars, fire, rites and ceremonies, to the 
habits and markings of animals. It is granted that almost all of 
theso fables are historically valueless, but an exception has been 
made, by scholars who believe that society was deliberately 
reformed by an act bisecting a tribe into two exogamous divisions, 
for savage myths which hit on the same explanation. We might 
as well accept the savage myths which hit on other explanations, 
for example the theory that Sibokoism arose from animal 
sobriquets. Exceptions are also made for Amnta myths in 
which the primal ancestors are said to feed habitually if not 
exclusively on their own totems. But as many totems, fruit, 
lowers, gmbs, and so on are only procurable for no longer than 
the season of the May-fly or the March-brown, these myths are 
manifestly fabulous. 

Again the Arunta primal ancestors are said to have cohabited 
habitually with women of their own totem, though without 
prejudice against women of other totems whom they encountered 
in their wanderings. These myths are determined by the 
belief in oknanikUla^ or spots haunted by spirits all of one totem, 
which, again, determine the totem of every Arunta. The 
idea being that the fabled primal ancestors male and female 
in each wandering group of mirade-workcrs weve always all of 
one totem, it follows that, if not celibate, which these savages 
never are, they must have cohabited with women of their own 
totem, and, by the existing Amnta system, there is no reason 
why they shotdd not have done so. In no other field of research 
is historical value attributed to savage legends about the 
inscrutable past that lies behind existing institutions. 

We are thus confronted by an institution of great importance 
socially where it regulates marriages and the blood-feud, 
or where it is a bond of social union between kinsmen in the 
totem or members of a society which does magic for the behoof 

' Mrs Langloh Parker. Tht EuaUayi Tribe. 

of its totem (central and north-western Australia), and is ol 
some " reUgious " and mythical imporunce when, as in Samoa, 
the sacred animal is regarded as the vehicle of a god. Of the 
origin of these beliefs, which have practical effects in the evolution 
of society and religion, much, we saw, is conjectured, but as we 
know no race in the act of becoming totemic— as in all peoples 
which we can study totemism is an old institution, and in most 
is manifestly decaying or being transmuted — ^we can only form 
the guesses of which examples have been given. Others may 
be found in the works of Herbert Spencer and Lord Avcbury, 
and criticisms of all of them may be rc^d in A. Lang's Social 

Whether or not survivals of totems are to be found in the 
animal worship of ancient Egypt, in the animal attendants of 
Greek gods, in Greek post-Homeric legends of descent from gods 
in various bestial disguises, and in certain ancient Irish legends, it 
is impossible to be certain, especially as so many gods are now 
explained as spirits of vegetation, to which folk-lore assigns 
carnal forms of birds and beasts. 

Other Things called Totems— Ai has been said, the name 
" totem " is applied by scholars to many things in nature which 
are not hereditary and exogamous totems. The " local totem " 
(so called) has been mentioned, also " linked totems." 

Personal Totems. — ^This is the phrase for any animal or other 
object which has been " given " to a person as a protective 
familiar, whether by a sorcerer * or by a father, or by a congress 
of spoe wives at birth j or whether the person selects it for him- 
self, by the monition of a dream or by caprice. The Euahlayi 
call the personal totem Yunbeai, the tme totem they style Dhe 
They may eat their real but not their personal totems, whidi 
answer to the hares and black cats of our witches. 

Three or four other examples of tribes in which " personal 
totems" are "given" to lads at initiation are recorded by 
Howitt.* The custom appears to be less common in Australia 
than in America and Africa (except in South Australia, where 
people may have a number of " personal totems "). In one case 
the " personal totem " came to a man in a dream, as in North 
America.* Here it may be noted that the simplest and appar- 
ently the easiest theory of the origin of totemism is merely 
to suppose that a man, or with female descent a woman, 
made his or her personal totem hereditary for ever in his or her 
descendants. But nobody has explained how it happened 
that while all had evanescent personal totems those of a few 
individuals only become stereotyped and hereditary for ever. 

Sex-Totems.— Tht so-called " sex totem " is only reported in 
Australia. Each sex is supposed by some tribes to have its 
patron animal, usually a bird, and to injure the creature is to 
injure the sex. When lovers are backward the women occasion- 
ally kill the animal patron of the men, which produces horse- 
play, and " a sort of jolly fight," like sky-larking and flirtation.* 
The old English " jolly kind of fight," between girls as partisans 
of ivy, and men as of the holly " sex-totem," is a near analogue. 
It need not be added that "sex-totems" are exogamous, in 
the nature of things. 

Sub-Totems.— Tha is the name of what are also styled " multi- 
plex totems," that is, numerous objects claimed for their own 
by totem kins in various Australian regions. The Emu totem 
kin, among the Euahlayi tribe, claims as its own twenty-three 
animals and the noith-west wind.* The whole universe, 
including mankind, was apparently divided between the totem 
kins. Therefore the list of sut^totenu might be extended 
indefinitely.' These "sub-totems" are a savage effort at 
universal classification. 

Conclusion. — ^We have now covered the whole field of con- 
troversy as to the causes and origins of totemic institutions. 
AustraUa, with North America, provides the examples of those 
institutions which seem to be "nearest to the beginning," 
and in Australia the phenomena have been most carefully and 

* T%e Euahlayi Tribe, p. 21. 

* Ibid._p. IM. 

* The EuaUayi Tribe, p. 15. 
' N.T^£ji. p. 454- 

*N.T.S.E.A. pp. 144- 1 
* Ibid. pp. 148*151. 



elabofatdy observed among peoples the least sophisticated. In 
North America most that we know of many great tribes, 
Iroquois, Huxons, Delawares and others, was collected long ago, 
and when precision was less esteemed, while the tribes have 
been much contaminated by our civilization. It has been 
unavoidably necessary to criticize, at almost every stage, the 
conclusions and hypotheses of the one monumental collection 
of facts and theories, Mr Fcazer's Tolemism (19x0). Persons 
who would pursue the subject further may consult the books 
mentioned in the text, and they will find a copious, perhaps an 
exhaustive bibliography in the references of Mr Frazer's most 
erudite volumes, with their minute descriptive accotmt not 
only ol the totemism, but of the environment and general 
culture of hundreds of human races, in Savagery and in the 
Lower and Higher Barbarism. (A. L.) 

TOmA (d. 552), king of the Ostrogoths, was chosen king 
after the death of his uncle Ildibad in 541, his real name being, 
as is seen from the coinage issued by him, Baduila. The work 
of his life was the restoration of the Gothic kingdom in Italy and 
he entered upon the task at the very beginning of his reign, 
coQccting together and inspiring the Goths and winning a victory 
over the troops of the emperor Justinian, near Faenza. Having 
gained another victory in 543, this time in the valley of Mugello, 
he left Tuscany for Naples, captured that city and then received 
the submission of the provinces of Lucania, Apulia and Calabria. 
Totila's conquest of Italy was marked not only by celerity but also 
by mercy, and Gibbon says *' none were deceived, either friends 
or enemies, who depended on his fa ith or his clemency." Towards 
the end of S45 the Gothic king took up his station at Tivoli and 
prepared to starve Rome into surrender, making at the same 
time elaborate preparations for checking the progress of Beli- 
sarius who was advancing to its relief. The Imperial fleet, moving 
op the Tiber and led by the great general, only just failed to 
succour the dty, which must then, perforce, open its gates to 
the Goths. It was plundered, although Totila did not carry 
oat his threat to make it a pasture for -cattle, and when the 
Gothic army withdrew into Apulia it was from a scene of desola- 
tion. But its walls and other fortifications were soon restored, 
and Totila again marching against it was defeated by Belisarius, 
who, however, did not follow up his advantage. Several 
cities were taken by the Goths, while Belisarius remained 
ioactive and then left Italy, and in 549 Totila advanced a third 
time against Rome, which he captured through the treachery 
of some of its defenders. His next exploit was the conquest 
and plunder of Sicily, after which he subdued Corsica and Sar- 
dinia and sent a Gothic fleet against the coasts of Greece. By 
this time the emperor Justinian was taking energetic measures 
to check the Goths. The conduct of a new campaign was 
entrusted to the eunuch Narses; Totila marched against him 
and was defeated and killed at the battle of Tagina in July 


See E. Gibbon. Decline and Fall, edited by J. B. Bury (1898). 
^-oL iv; T. Hodgkin. Italy and her Invaders (1896), vol. iv. and 
Kampfner. Totila. Kdnig der OUgolen (1889). 

TOTVES, GEORGE CAREW, or Casey, Earl of (i 555-1629), 
English politician and writer, son of Dr George Carew, dean of 
WizKlsor.amemberof a well-known Devonshire family, and Anne, 
daughter of Sir Nicholas Harvey, was bom on the 29th of May 
iS55>* and was educated at Broadgates Hall, Oxford, where he 
took the degree of M.A. in 1588. He distinguished himself 
on the field on several occasions and filled important military 
commands in Ireland. In 1584 he was appointed gentleman- 
pensioner to Queen Elizabeth, whose favour he gained. In 1586 
be was knighted in Ireland. Refusing the embassy to France, 
>Sir George Carew was made master of the ordnance in Ireland 
in 1588, in 1590 Irish privy councillor; and in 1592 lieutenant- 
general of the ordnance in England, in which capadty he 
accompanied Essex in the expedition to Cadiz in 1596 and to 

1 According to his own statement, Archaeolotia, xii. 401. In the 
tatroduction. however, to the Calendar of Carew MSB. the date of 
his birth is given as 1558, and his admission into Broadgates Hall in 
1572. aged 15. In the pxeface to Carew's Letters to Roelt is given 
as 1557- 

the Azores in 1597. In 1598 he attended Sir Robert Cecil, the 
ambassador, to France. He was appointed treasurer at war to 
Essex in Ireland in March 1599, and on the latter's sudden 
departure in September of the same year, leaving the island 
in disorder, Carew was appointed a lord justice, and in 1600 
president of Munster, where his vigorous measures enabled the 
new lord deputy. Lord Mountjoy, to suppress the rebellion. He 
returned to England in 1603 and was well received by James I., 
who appointed him vice-chamberlain to the queen the same 
year, master oC the ordnance in x6o8, and privy councillor in 
1616; and on the accession of Charles L he became treasurer 
to Queen Henrietta Maria in 1626. He sat for Hastings in the 
parliament of 1604, and on the 4th of June 1605 was created 
Baron Carew of Clopton, being advanced to the earldom of 
Totnes on the 5th of February 1626. In 16x0 he revisited 
Ireland to report on the state of the country; and ini6i8 pleaded 
in vain for his friend Sir Walter Raleigh. He died on the a 7th 
of March 1629, leaving no issue. He married Joyce, daughter of 
William Clopton, of Clopton in Warwickshire. 

Beddes his fame as president of Munster. where his administration 
forms an important chapter in Irish history, Carew had a consider- 
able reputation as an antiquary. He was the friend of Camden, of 
Cotton and of Bodley. He made large collections of materials 
relating to Irish history and pedigrees, which he left to his secretary. 
Sir Thomas Stafford, reputed on scanty evidence to be his natural 
son: while some portion has disappeared, V) volumes after coming 
into Laud's possession are now at Lambeth, and 4 volumes in the 
Bodleian Library. A calendar of the former is included in the 
State Papers series edited by J. S. Brewer and W. Bullen. His 
corresponded Ht * Toaster with Sir Robert Cecil was edited in 
1864 Iw Sir John Maclean, for the Camden Society, and bis letters 
to Sir Thomas Roc (ifir.v[6i7) in i860. Other letters or papers are 

ni C3F5cc; aniong the MSS. at the British Museum and 
'. the lli^;. MSS. ( 

to 5 
in ->- 

Com. Serifs, Marquess of Salisbury's 
M rrl pubii^htE after Carew's death Pacata Hibemia, or 

tki ^ 4^/ ih£ Liiu V'^^ars in Ireland (1633), the authorship of 

which he jurfrribcs in hin preface to Carew, but which has been 
attributed to StafTard himself. This was reprinted in 1810 and re- 
edit cd in 1S96. A Fmiment of the History of Ireland, a translation 
from a. French vcrtior^ of an Irish original, and King Richard II..,, 
in Iteiand Jrom tht Fn?nch, both by Carew, are printed in Walter 
Harri4'4 Ilibe-rniCA (1757}. According to Wood, Carew contributal 
to i^t: histocy of the rci^n of Henry V. in Speied's Chronicle. His 
opinJa[i on the nUrm ul the Spanish invasion in 1596 has also been 
See also the Life of Sir P. Carew, ed. by Sir J. Maclean (1857). 

TOTNES} a market town and mum'cipal borough in the Totnes 
parliamentary division of Devonshire, England, on the Dart, 
29 m. S.S.W. of Exeter, by the Great Western railway. Pop. 
(1901), 4035. It stands on the west bank of the river, and is 
joined by a bridge to the suburb of Bridgetown. It was formerly 
a walled town, and two of the four gates remain. Many old 
houses are also preserved, and in High Street their overhanging 
upper stories, supported on pillars, form a covered way for 
foot-passengers. The castle, founded by the Breton Juhel, 
lord of the manor after the Conquest, was already dismantled 
under Henry VIII.; but its ivy-clad keep and upper walls 
remain. The grounds form a public garden. Close by are the 
remains of St Mary's Priory, which comprise a large Perpen- 
dicular gatehouse, refectory, precinct wall, abbot's gate and 
still-house. A grammar school, founded 1554, occupied part 
of the Priory, but was removed in 1874 to new buildings. The 
Perpendicular church of St Mary contains a number of interest- 
ing tombs and effigies dating from the isth century onwards, 
and much excellent carved work. The guildhall is formed from 
part of the Priory. Vessels of 200 tons can lie at the wharves 
near the bridge. The industries include brewing, flour mill- 
ing, and the export of agricultural produce, chiefly com and 
cider. Trout and salmon are plentiful in the river. The town is 
governed by a mayor, 4 aldermen and 12 councillors. Area 
1423 acres. 

Totnes ( Toteneis, ToUon) was a place of considerable importance 
in Saxon times; it possessed a mint in the reign of iEthelred, 
and was governed by a portreeve. In the Domesday Survey 
it appears as a mesne borough under Juhel of Totnes, founder 
of the castle and priory; it had 95 burgesses within and 15 
without the borough, a^d rendered military service according 



to the custom of Exeter. In x ax s a charter from John instituted 
a gild merchant with freedom from toll throughout the land. A 
mayor is mentioned in the court roll of 1386-1387, and a charter 
from Henry VII. in 1505 ordered that the mayor should be 
elected on St Matthew's day, and should be derk of the market. 
The present governing charter was granted by Elizabeth in 
XS96, and instituted a governing body of a mayor, fourteen 
masters or councillors, and an indefinite number of burgesses, 
including a select body called " the Twenty-men." A fresh 
charter of incorporation from James II. in 1689 made no altera- 
tions of importance. The borough was represented in parlia- 
ment by one member in 1295, and by two members from 1298 
until disfranchised by the act of 1867. A market on Saturday 
existed at least as early as 1255, and in x6o8 is described as well 
stocked with provisions. The charter of Elizabeth granted a 
three days' fair at the feast of SS Simon and Jude (Oct. 28), 
and in x6o8 fairs were also held on May day and at the feast of 
St James (July 25). The market day has been transferred to 
Friday, but the May and October fairs are continued. The 
town was formerly noted for serges, and in 1641 the inhabitants 
represented their distress owing to the decline of the woollen 
trade. The industry is now extinct. During the Civil War 
General Goring quartered his troops at Totnes, and Fairfax 
also made it his temporary station. 

See Victoria County History; Devonshire; The History of Tofnex, 
iU neighbourhood and Berry Pomeroy Castle fTotnes, 1825); William 
Cotton. A Graphic and Historical SheUh of the Antiquities of Totnes 
(London, 1858). 

TOTONICAPAM, or Totonicapan, the capital of the depart- 
ment of Totonicapam, Guatemala, on the same high plateau as 
Quezaltenango, the nearest railway station, from which it is 
12 m. E.N.E. Pop. (1905) about 38,000. Totonicapam is 
inhabited mainly by Quich6 Indians, employed in the making 
of cloth, furniture, pottery and wooden musical instruments. 
There are hot mineral springs in the neighbourhood. In 1838 
Totonicapam was declared an independent republic, in which 
the adjoining departments of Solold and (^ezaltenango were 
included. This state existed for two years, and was then again 
merged in the republic of Guatemala. Totonicapam suffered 
grea tly in the earthquake of the x8th of April 190a. 

TOTTENHAM, an urban district in the Tottenham parlia- 
mentary division of Middlesex, England, forming a north 
suburb of London, 6) m. north of London Bridge, adjoining 
Edmonton on the south. Pop. (1901), 102,541. Its full 
name, not now in use, was Tottenham High C^ross, from the 
cross near the centre of the township. The origin and 
significance of this cross are doubtful. The present structure 
was erected c. x6oo, and ornamented with stucco in 1809. In 
the time of Isaak Walton there stood by it a shady 
arbour to which the angler was wont to resort. Formerly 
Tottenham was noted for its " greens," in the centre of one 
of which stood the famous old elm trees called the " Seven 
Sisters"; these were removed in X840, but the name is pre- 
served in the Seven Sisters Road. Bruce castle, on the site 
of the old mansion of the Braces, but built probably by Sir 
William Compton in the beginning of the i6th century, was 
occupied by a boarding-school founded by Mr (afterwards Sir) 
Rowland Hill in 1827 on the system instituted by him at Hazle- 
wood, Birmingham. It became public property in 1892. 
The church of All Hallows, Tottenham, Was given by David, 
king of Scotland (C.X126), to the canons of the church of Holy 
Trinity, London. It retains Perpendicular portions, a south 
porch of brick of the x6th century and numerous ancient monu- 
ments and brasses. The grammar school was enlarged and 
endowed in 1686 by Sarah, dowager duchess of Somerset. The 
urban district formerly included Wood Green to the west, but 
this became a separate urban district in 1888 (pop. 34t>33)« 

In the reign of Edward the Confessor the manor of Tottenham 
was possessed by Eari Waltheof. It was inherited by his daughter 
Maud, who was married first to Simon de St Liz and after- 
wards to David, son of Malcolm III., king of Scotland, who was 
created by Hcmy I. earl of Huntingdon, and received 

of all the lands formerly held by Earl Waltheof. The manor 
thus descended to William the Lion, king of Scotland, and was 
granted by him in X184 to his brother David, carl of Angus 
and Galloway, the grant being confirmed in 1x99 by King 
John of England, who created him earl of Huntingdon. He 
married Maud, heiress of Hugh, earl of Chester, and his son 
John inherited both earldoms. The son married Helen, daughter 
of Llewelyn, prince of Wales, by whom he was poisoned in 
1237, dying without issue. She retained possession till 1254, 
when the manor was divided between his coheirs Robert de 
Bras, John de Baliol and Henry de Hastings, each division 
forming a distinct manor bearing the name of its owner. In 
1429 they were reunited in the possession of John Gedeoey, 
alderman of London. 

William Bcdwell, the Arabic scholar, was vicar of Tottenham, and 
published in 1632 a Brief e Description of the Towne of Tottenham, in 
which he printed for the first time the burlesque poem, the TumO' 
nunt of Tottenham. 

TOTTENVILUv a former village of Richmond county. New 
York, U.S.A., and since 1898 a part of New York City. It is 
on the southern shore of Suten Island in New York Bay and on 
Staten Island Sound, about 30 m. S.W. of the south extremity 
of Manhattan Island, and is the terminxis of the Staten Island 
Rapid Transit railway. Marine engines, terra-cotta and boats 
are manufactured here, and there are oyster fisheries. The 
" Billopp House " here (still standing) was the scene of the con- 
ference, on the ixth of September 1776, between Lord Howe, 
representing Lord North, and Benjamin Franklin, John Adams 
and Edward Rutledge, representing the Continental Congress, 
with regard to Lord North's offer of conciliation. This house, 
originally called the " Manor of Bentley," was built by Captain 
Christopher Billopp (1638-17 26), who sailed from England in an 
armed vessel, the " Bentley,^' in 1667, and, by circumnavigating 
Staten Island in 24 hours, made it, under the raling of the 
d\ike of York, a part of New York. From the duke of York 
he received 11 63 acres of land, including the present site of 
Tottenville. The village was long known as Bentley, but in 
1869 was incorporated (under a faulty charter, revised in 1894) 
as Tottenville, apparently in honour of Gilbert Totten, a soldier 
in the War of Independence. 

TOUCAN, the Brazilian name of a bird,' long since adopted 
into nearly all European languages, and apparently first given 
currency in Engbnd (though not then used as an English word) 
in 1668* by W. Charleton {Onomasticon, p. 115); but the bird, 
with its enormous beak and feather-like tongue, was described 
by Oviedo in his Sumario de la historia natural de las Jndtas, 
first published at Toledo in XS27 (ch. 42),' and, to quote 
the translation of part of the passage in F. Willughby's Ornith- 
ology (p. 1 29) , " there is no bird secures her young ones better from 
the Monkeys^ which are very noisom to the young of most Birds. 
For when she perceives the approach of those Enemies, she so 
settles her self in her Nest as to put her Bill out at the hole, 
and gives the Monkeys such a welcome therewith, that they 
presently pack away, and glad they scape so." Indeed, so 
remarkable a bird must have attracted the notice of the earliest 
European invaders of America, the more so since its gaudy 
plumage was used by the natives in the decoration of their per- 
sons and weapons. In 1555 P. Bclon {Hist. nat. oyseaux, p. 184) 
gave a characteristic figure of its beak, and in 1558 Thevet 
{Singularitet de la France antarctigue, pp. 88-90) a long descrip> 
tion, together with a woodcut (in some respects inaccurate, 
but quite unmistakable) of the whole bird, under the name 
of "Toucan," which he was the first to publish. In 1560 
C. Gesncr {Icones avium, p. 130) gave a far better figure (though 

* Commonly believed to be so called from its cry ; but Skeat 
{Proc. Phuolog. Society, May 15, 1885) adduces evidence to prove 
that the Guarani Tuca is from tl, nose, and cdng, bone, i^. nose of 

" In 1656 the beak of an " Aracari of Brazil," which was a toucan 
of some sort, was contained in the Musaeum tradescantiannm (p. 2). 
but the word toucan does not appear there. 

' The writer has only been able to consult the reprint of this rare 
woHc contained in the Biblioteca de autores espaHcUs (xxiL 473-515)^ 
published at Madrid in 1852, 



sfOI incorrect) from a drawing received from Ferrerius, and 
suggested that from the size of its beak the bird should be cabled 
Burhynckus or RampkesUs. This figure, with a copy of Thevet's 
and a detailed description, was repeated in the posthumous 
edition (1585) of his larger work (pp. 800, 801). By 1579 
Ambroise PanS (CEvvrej, ed: Malgaigne, iii. 783) had dissected a 
toucan that belonged to Charles IX. of France, and about the 
same time L^ry {Voyage fait en la tare du Bristly ch. xl.)t 
whose chief object seems to have been to confute Thevet, con- 
firmed that writer's account of this bird in most respects. In 
1599 Aldrovandus (Ornilhologia, i. 801-803), always ready to 
profit by Gesner's information, and generally without acknow- 
ledgment, again described and repeated the former figures of 
the bird; but be corrupted his predecessor's Ramphtstes into 
RampkoiUfs, and in this incorrect form the name, which should 
certainly be RkamphaUs or RkampkasUu, was subsequently 
vlopted by Linnaeus and has since been recognized by systcm- 
atists. Into the rest of the early history of the toucan's discovery 
it is needless to go.^ Additional particulars were supplied by 
many succeeding writers, until in 1834 J. Gould completed his 
Monograph of the family' (with an anatomical appendix by 
R. Owen), to which, in 1835, he added some supplementary 
pbtes; and in 1854 he finished a second and much improved 
edition. The most complete compendium on toucans is 'J* 
Cassin's '* Study of the Ramphastidae," in the Proceedings 
of the Philadelphia Academy for 1867 (pp. 100-124). 

By recent systematists 5 genera and from 50 to 60 species of the 
family are neco^nized ; but the characters of the former have never 
been aatislactorily defined, much lets those of numerous tubdiviaions 
which it has pleased some writers to invent. There can be little 
doubt that the bird first figured and described by the earliest 
authors above named b the R. loco of nearly all ormthotogists, and 
as such is properly regarded as the type of the ^us and therefore 
of the family. It u one of the lanpe»t, measuring 3 ft. in length, 
and has a wide range throughout Guiana and a great part of Brazil. 
The huge beak, looking like the great claw of a lobster, more than 
8 in. long and 3 high at the base, is of a deep oranae colour, with a 
large Mack oval spot near the tip. The eye, wiui its double iris 
of gxecn and yellow, has a broad blue orbit, and is surrounded by a 
bare space of deep orange skin. The plumage generally is black. 
but the throat is white, tinged with yellow and commonly edged 
beneath with red ; the upper tail-coverts are white, and the lower 
scarlet. In other species of the genus, 14 to 17 in number, the bill 
is mostly particoloured — green, yellow, red, chestnut, blue and black 

variously combining so as often to form a ready diagnosis; but some 
of these tinu are very flcetins; and often leave little or no trace after 
death. Alternations of the brighter colours are also displayed in 

the feathers of the throat, breast and tail-coverts, so a^ to oe m like 
manner characteristk: of the species, and in several the bare space 
round the eye is yellow, ^reen, blue or lilac. The sexes are alike in 
coloration, the males being largest. The tail is neariy square or 
moderately rounded. In the genus Pterogfossus, the Aracaris " 
(pronounced Arassari), the sexes more or less diner in appearance, 
and the Uil is graduated. The species are smaller in size, and 
nearly all are banded on the belly, which is generally yellow, with 
black and scarlet, while except m two the throat of the males at 
least is black. One of the most remarkable and beautiful is P. 
beaukamaisi, by some authors placed in a distinct genus and called 
Beanhamaisius ulocomus. In this the feathers of the top of the 
bead are very singular, looking like glossy curled shavings of black 
bom or whalebone, the effect being due to the dilatation 01 tlie shaft 
and its coalescence with the consolidated barbs. Some of the 
feathefs of the strawnroloured throat and cheeks partake of the same 
Mructure. but in a less degree, while the subterminal part of the 
lamtina is ojf a lustrous pevly-white.' The beak is richly coloured. 

> One point of some interest may. however, be notkxd. In 1705 
Plot {N.H. Oxfordshire, p. 1 8a) recorded a toucan found within two 
mUes of Oxford in 1644. the bodjr of which was given to the repository 
in the medical school of that univernty, where, be said. " it is still to 
be seen.** Already in 1700 Leigh in his Lancashire (i. 195. Birds, 
tab. I. fig. a) had figured another whk:h had been found d«M on the 
coast of that county about two years before. The bird b easily kept 
in captivity, and no doubt from eariy times many were brought alive 
to Earope. Besides the one dissected by Par^ as above mentioned. 
loh. Faoer, in hb additions to Hernandez's work on the Natural 
History of MexKo (1651). figures (p. 697) one seen and described by 
Puteus (Dal Pozzo) at Fontainebleau. 

> Of thb the brothers Sturm in 1841 publbhed at Nuremberg a 
German version. 

> Thb curious peculbrity naturally attracted the notice of the first 
discoverer of the species, Poeppig. who briefly described it in a letter 
published ia Froriep's Noliaen (xxxiL 146) for December 1831. 

being giTCd and crimson above and lemon below. The upper 
ptyntage general Ey b dark gnen, but the mantle and rump are 
cnctison. a-» am a bincNul abdominal belt, the flanks and many 
cn-?iceiiik: markirtEs cm the other* t>e yellow lower parts.* The 
group wr B^itus Sftmedrra^ projwjistij by J. Gould in 1837 (Icones 
aviwm, pt. I), contains some 6 or 7 ^|:>ecics, having the beak, which 
is mo5\\Y tran&vcrKly nEiippd, and t^il shorter than in Pterogbssus. 
Hen? the sexes alxt differ in coloration, the males having the head 
and breast bljckn and the lemalc^ tli^ same parts chestnut; but all 
have a yeElow nuchial crescrnt (v^' hence the name of the group). The 
so-called hilt-taLicans have been «ep>^ rated as another genus. Andi- 
gfna, and canai&t of some 5 or 6 ipecies chiefly frequenting the slopes 
of the Anrk-j and teajching an eJevaEion of 10,000 ft., though one. 
cfTi'ji rljcL-d. amone them, hut prhaps belonging rather to PUro- 
gloisui. the A. baiitsni. rt^ma^kable tor its yellow-orange head, neck 
ami Uy#vf ftan^. inhabit* I he lowland* of southern Brazil. Another 
\ir> fiin^ular (^rtn b A, hmitttro^tris, which has a^ixed on either 
«iiJi: q\ Vie: mahil]^ near theba^, a quadrangular ivory-like plate, 
li.rmjng a ft-aiure uniqut? In this or almost in any family of birds. 
1 lit' f^toup Auijicorkiamphiii, or " eroove-bills," with a considerable 
I'ut rathi.'^r unceruiei nymbcr of sp^xies, contains the rest of the 

The iii£>nstrons serrated bill that «o many toucans possess was 
by G. L. L. BufTon accounted a sjiw defect of nature, and it must 
be ct^nfcssed that no one has sWen what seems to be a satisfactory 
e:<pl a nation ol Its precisf use, tnoiiKh on evolutionary principles none 
wih now doubt its 5tness to the Dird'a requirements. Solid as it 
looks, its weight in inconsiderable, and the perfect hinge by which 
the maxilla is articulated adds to its efficiency as an instrument 
ol prrrbenaioa. W. Swainson (du^iif. Birds, u, 1 38) imagined it 
merely " to contain an infinity of nerves, dbposed like net- work, all 
ot^ which lead immediately to the no&trils," and add to the olfactory 
faculty. This notion lecms to be liorrowed from I. W. H. TraU 
(Tropif. linn. Sxieiy., id. 2Sg\ who admittedly had it from Watertoo. 
and stated that it was " an adminible contrivance of nature to 
increase the delicacy of the organ of smell;" but R. Owen's descrip- 
tion showed this view to be groundless, and he attributed tne 
extraordinary development of the toucan's beak to the need of corn- 
pen tat Eng, by the aduiEional power cf mastication thus given, for the 
absence of any of the grinding struc cures that are so characteristic 
of the intestinal tract of ve^frtablt'-cadng birds — its digestive organs 
possessing a general simplicity of formation. The nostrils are placed 
GO as to be in most forms invi^il^k' until sought, being obscured by 
the fnontal feathers or the backw.ird prolongation of the homy 
sheath of the beak Th« wing« arc^ somewhat feeble, and the legs 
have the toes placed in pairs, two Ix^fore and two behind. The tail 
is capable of free vertical motion, and controlled by strong muscles, 
■0 that, at least in the true toucans, when the biitl b preparing to 
sleep it is reverted and lies almost E!at on the back, on which also 
the huge bill reposes, pointing in the opposite direction. 

The toucans are limited to the new worid, and by far the greater 
number Inhabit the north of South America, especially Gubna and 
thevalleyof the Amazons. Some three species occur in Mexico, and 
several in Central America. One, K, vtUUinus, which has its head- 
quarters on the mainland^ La said to liecommon in Trinidad, but none 
are found in the Antilles proper. They compose the family Rham- 
phaa[L[|ae of Coraeiiifbrm birds, and are associated with tfie wood- 
peckers {Pkidiu?) and puff-birds and Jacamars (Galbulidae) ; their 
nearesiT allied perhaps ffxiat among th<: Capitonidae. but none of these 
is belii^vc'tl 10 have the long feather -like tongue which b so charac- 
teristic uf the toucans, and is, so far as known, possessed besides 
ottly by th« Momotidae (^^ee MoTUor). But of these last there is no 
rea.^n to deem the loucana close relatives, and according to W. 
Sw:iin»on, who had c^pportunities of observing both, the alleged 
ruM'nlblancc^ in their habits has no exbtence. loucans in confine- 
ment fiN^ mainly on fruit, but little seems amiss to them, and they 
»wnUow grubs, reptllct and t^mall birds with avidity. They nest in 
hollow trees, and lay white pgE4» (A. N.) 

TOUCH (derived through Fr. toucher from a common Teu- 
tonk and Indo-Gcmaak root, cf. "tug," "tuck," O. H. Gcr. 
tucdien, iQ L witch or draw), ia pliysiology, a sense of pressure, 
referred usually Lo the surface of the body. It b often understood 
as a sensatioti of contact as distinguished from pressure, but it 
is evident I hat, however gentle be the contact, a certain amount 
of pressure alws^ys ej^ists between the sensitive surface and the 
body touched, J^fere contact in such circumstances is gentle 
pressure; a greater amount of force causes a feeh'ng of resbtance 
or of pressure referred to ihe skin ; a still greater amount causes a 
feeling of muscular resistance, a? when a weight b supported 
on the palm of the hand; whilst, finally, the pressure may be so 
great as to cause a feeUng of pain. The force may not be exerted 

* Readers of F. Eite^'s Naiurtiiist on the Rioer Amaums will 
recollect the account (ii. ^44} and illustration there given of hb 
encounter with a flixk of this &pect(» of toucan. Hb remarks oa 
the other species with which he xnct are also excellent 



vertically on the sensory surface, but in the opposite direction, 
as when a hair on a sensory surface is pulled or twisted. Touch 
Is therefore the sense by which mechanical force is appreciated, 
and it presents a strong resemblance to hearing, in which the 
sensation is excited by intermittent pressures on the auditory 
organ. In addition to feelings of contact or pressure referred 
to the sensory surface, contact may give rise to a sensation of 
temperature, according as the thing touched feels hot or cold. 
These sensations of contact, pressure or temperature are usually 
referred to the skin or integument covering the body, but they 
are experienced to a greater or less extent when any serous or 
mucous surface is touched. The skin being the chief sensory 
surface of touch, it is there that the sense is most highly 
developed both as to delicacy in detecting minute pressures and 
as to the character of the surface touched. Tactile impressions, 
properly so called, are absent from internal mucous surfaces, as 
has been proved in men having gastric, intestinal and urinary 
fistulae. In these cases, touching the mucous surface caused 
pain, and not a true sensation of touch. 

In the article Nervb (S^nal) the cutaneous distribution of the 
oranins of touch is dealt with. 

The Amphibia and Rcptilia do not show any special organs of 
touch. The tips of tadpoles have tactile papillae. Some snakes 
have a pair of tentacles on the snout, but the tongue is probably 
the chief orvan of touch in most serpenu and lizards. All reptiles 
possessing cumbing powers have the sense of touch highly developed 
m the feet. 

Birds have ecnthelial papillae on the soles of the toes that are no 
doubt tactile. These are of great length in the capercailzie {Tetrax 
^=— ^ uroiaUus), " enabling it to 

grasp with more security the 
frosted branches of the Nor- 
wegian pine trees '* (Owen). 
Around the root of the bill 
in many birds there arc 

b|^n.T, 1^1 1 t JL 1 ! L- uj n J n ? , .L ■.. ■ 1 8t- 

ing the bird to uwit a^-j. 1^ind 
oC sensitive jtrobc for tht ile- 
iKtlon in ioU ground o\ ihe 
worm^r grub* ^nd aXu^^ [hat 
con^tixute iti iocni. Sf<i.ial 
bodit'iof this kind havt trt-cn 
dcuvt<^ in lilt btak And 
tongue of the duck and goose, called tht (^ailt corcgMrti^ oi F S. 
Merkel, or the corpuscles of Grandry {^^, i }. SimiW hcH^iL» hjvc 
been found in the epidermis of nua tnAmTn4U» in the smrer 
root-sheath of tactile hairs or feetcrv They CDn^isx of *miii\ I ^^ lies 
composed of a capsule enclosing two at more (lat^eni.'>d oui(:Il ned 
cells, piled in a row. Each corpuick li srparat^ Uom tht ri^htrs 
by a transparent protoplasmic disk. Nerve fibre* tcrminaii* m licr 
in the cells (Merkel) or in the protupUs<mic intercdlubr ni<iicr 
fRanvier. Hesse, Izquicrdo). Another farm of i^nd-or^jn h^^ >".cn 
described by Herbst asexisttne in the mucoiif mi-mLmnc of the tl U' It's 
tongue. These corpuscles of Herbst srv 1 1ke »mal I Piici tviA n cor; i q v. les 
with thinandvL-ry'clo«bmdUc, De^ 1 1 up- 
ments of Inti-gumcnt devoid of fc-^thtrrs, 
such as th^ " wattTer? " of the ttxk. the 
•*caninck>" -.'T ih^.- vjlinre cw.l • .'■y, 
are not tactile in their function. 

In the great majority of Mammalia the 
general surface of the skin shows senntive- 
ness, and this is developed to a high degree 
on certain parts, such as the lips, the end 
of a teat and the cenerative organs. 
Where touch is highly developed, the skin, 
more especially the epidermis, is thin and 
devoid of hair. In the monkeys tactile 
papillae are found in the skin of tne fingers 
and palms, and in the skin of the prehen- 
sile tails of various H)ecies (Atdes). Such 
papillae also abound in the naked skin of 
the nose or snout, as in the shrew, mole. pig. tapir and elephant. 
In the OrniikorkyHchus the skin covering the mandibles is tactile 
(Owen). In many animals certain hairs acquire great size, length 
and stiffness. These constitute the vibrisaae or whiskers. Each 
large hair ^ws from a firm capsule sunk deep In the true skin, 
and the hiur bulb is supplied with sensory nerve filaments. In 
the walrus the capsule is cartilaginous in texture. The marine 
Carnivora have strong vibrissae which " act as a staff, in a way 
analogous to that held and applied by the hand of a blind man 
(Owen). Each species has hairs of this kind developed on the 
eyebrows, lips or checks, to suit a particular mode of existence, 
as. for example, the long fine whiskers of the night-prowling 
felines, and in th« aye-aye, a monkey having noaurnal habits. 

Fic. I.— Tactile Corpuscles from 
duck's tongue. 
», Nerve. 

Fio. 2.— Tactile Cor- 
puscle from the hand. 

In the l^n^ulita the hoofs need no delicacy of touch as lecarda 

th e rri ->- r t n M 1 1 a - ion of minute points. Such animals, however, nave 
bri.'Hi'L rti.Lv^i.i sensations of touch, enabling them to 
arir>rL<ia(o Kh%- firmness of the soil on which they tread, 
and und^r the hoof we find highly vascular and sen> 
sitive bmelUe or papillae, contributing 
no doubly not only to the growth of the 
hcHLif. but iklio to Its sensitiveness. The 
CcMC^ h^vo numerous sensory papillae 
in the ikm. Bats have the sense of i 
touch #trori^1y developed in the wings 
and cxitrrut cars, and in some species 
in the flan* of ^kin found near the nose. 
TKive it little doubt that many special 
for .lis of tactile organs will be found in 
aninuls using the nose or feet for bur- 
rowing. A peculiar end-organ has been 
found in the nose of the mole, while there 
are " end<apsules " in the tongue of the 
elephant and " nerve rings " in the ears 
of the mouse. F1C.3.— Tactile Corpuadea 

End-Organs of Touch in Man.-Jn from cUtori^^rabbit. 
man three special forms of Uctilc ' 

end-organs have been described, and can be readOy demon- 

I. The End- Bulbs of XraMe.— These are oval or rounded 
bodies, from j\j to ^^ oi an inch long. Each consists of a 
delicate capside, composed of nucleated connective tissue 

_ .0. 4. — End-Bulb from 
human conjunctiva. 

a, Nucleated capsule. 

b, Core. 

c, Entering nerve-fibre 
'^ terminating in the 

core at d. 

Fic. 5.— End-Bulb from 

conjunctiva of calf. 

n. Nerve. 

enclosing numerous minute cells. On tracing the nerve fibre, 
it is found that the nerve sheath is continuous with the capsule, 
whilst the axis cylinder of the nerve divides into branches 
which lose themselves among the cells. W. Waldeyer and 
Longworth slate that the nerve fibrils terminate in the cells, 
thus making these bodies similar to the cells described by F. S. 
Merkel {ut supra). (See fig. 4) These bodies are found in the 
deeper layers of the conjunctiva, margins of the lips, nasal 
mucous membrane, epiglottis, fungiform and circumvallate 
papiUae of the tongue, glans penis and clitoris, mucous membrane 
of the rectum of man, and they have also been found on the 
under surface of the " toes of the guinea-pig, ear and body of 
the mouse, and in the wing of the bat " (Landois and Stirling). 
In the genital organs aggregations of end-bulbs occur, known 
as the " genital corpuscles of Krause " (fig. 3). In the synovial 
membrane of the joints of the fingers there are larger end-bulbs, 
each connected with three four nerve-filaments. 

(2) The Touch Corpuscles of Wagner and Meissner.— These 
are oval bodies, about j^ of an inch long by vi^ of an inch in 
breadth. Each consists of a series of layers of connective tissue 
arranged transversely, and containing in the centre granular 
matter with nuclei (figs, a, 3 and 6). One, two or three 
nerve fibres pass to the lower end of the corpuscle, wind 
transversely around it, lose the white substance of Schwann, 
penetrate into the corpuscle, where the axis cylinders, dividing, 
end in some way unknown. The corpuscles do not contain 
any soft core, but are apparently built up of irregular septae 
of connective tissue, in the meshes of which the nerve fibrils 
end in expansions similar to Merkel's cells. Thin describes 
simple and compound corpuscles according to the number of 
nerve fibres entering them. ThcH bodies are found abundantly 



in the palm of the hand and sole of the foot, where there 
may be as many as ax to every square millimetre (x mm. -■ 
^ inch). They are not so numerous on the back of the 
hand or foot, mamma, lips and tip of the tongue, and they 
are rare in the genital organs. 

3. Tlu Corpuscles of Voter or 
Pacini. — ^Thcse, first described by 
Vater so long ago as X741, are small 
oval bodies, quite visible to the naked 
eyv, from x^ to iV of an inch long and 

Fic. 7.— VaterVor Pacini** 

a. Stalk. 

6, Nerve-fibre entering it. 
c, d. Connective-tissue en- 

(Tnm laadoii ud StirG^. •!(« Bicsiadccki.) 

Fic. 6. — Vertical Section of the Skin of 
the Palm of the Hand. 

«, Bkxxl-veMel. 

b. Papula of the cutis vera. 

e, Capillarv. 

d, Nerve-fiDre passing to a touch- 

#. Wagner's touch-corpuscle. ^ 

/, Nerve-fibre, divided transversely. _._^. 

g. Cells of the Malpighian layer of the e. Axis cylinder, with its 
skin. eno divided at /. 

Vr to Vv of M inch in breadth, attached to the nerves of the 
hands and feet. They can be readily demonstrated in the 
mesentery of the cat (fig. 7). Each corpuscle consists of 40 to 
50 lamellae or coats, like the folds of an onion, thinner and 
doser together on approaching the centre. Each lamella is 
formed of an elastic material mixed with delicate connective- 
tissue fibres, and the inner surface of each is lined by a single 
continuous layer of endothelial cells. A double-contoured nerve 
fibre passes to each. The white substance of Schwann becomes 
continuous with the lamellae, whilst the axis cylinder passes into 
the body, and ends in a small knob or in a plexus. Some- 
times a blood-vessel also penetrates the Pacinian body, entering 
along with the nerve. Such bodies are found in the sub- 
cutaneous tissue on the nerves of the fingers and toes, near 
joints, attached to the nerves of the abdominal plexuses of 
the sympathetic, on the coccygeal gland, on the dorsum 
ci the penis and clitoris, in the meso-colon, in the course 
of the intercostal and periosteal nerves, and in the capsules of 
lymphatic glands. 

Physidogy of Touch in Man, — Such are the special end-organs 
of touch. It has also been ascertained that many sensory 
nerves end in a i^exus or network, the ultimate fibrils being 
connected with the cells of the particxilar tissue in which they 
are found. Thus they exist in the cornea of the eye, and at 
the junctions of tendons with muscles. In the latter situation 
** flattened end-ilakes or plates " and " elongated oval end- 
bulbs" have also been found. A consideration of these 
various types of structure show that they facilitate intermittent 
pressure being made on the nerve endings. They are all, as it 
were, elastic cushions into which the nerve endings penetrate, 
90 that the sh'ght variation of pressure will be transmitted to 
the nerve. Probably also they serve to break the force of a 
sadden shock on the nerve endings. 

SemsiHmneu and Sense of Locality.— The degree of sensitiveness 
of the skin is determined t^ finding the smallest distance at which 

the two points of a pair of compasses can be feh. Thb method 
first followed by Weber, u empbyed by physicians in the diagnosis 

Fic. 8.— Aestheswmeter of Sieveking. 

, of nervous affectbns involvin^^ the sensitiveness of the skin. The 
following table shows the sensitiveness in millimetres for an adult. 


Tip of tongue i-i 

Third phaunx of finger, volar surface 3-3>3 

Rod part of the lip 4.5 

Second phalanx 01 finger, volar surface 4-4*5 

First phalanx of finger, volar surface 5~5'5 

Third phalanx of finger, dorsal surface 6'8 

Tip of nose 6-8 

Head of metacarpal bone, volar 5-6-8 

Ball of thumb 6-5-7 

Ball of littk finger 5.C-6 

Centre of palm 8-9 

Dorsum and side of tongue; white of the lips; metacarpal 

part of the thumb 9 

Third phalanx of the great toe, plantar surface. . . . 11-3 

Second phalanx of the fingers, dorsal surface . . . . 11-3 

Back 11.3 

Eyelid 11.3 

Centre of hard palate 13*5 

Lower third of the forearm, volar surface 15 

In front of the zygoma 158 

Planur surface of the great toe 15-8 

Inner surface of the lip ao-^ 

Behind the zygoma 22-6 

Forehead 22*6 

Occiput 27-1 

Back of the hand 31-6 

Under the chin 33-8 

Vertex 3^8 

Knee 36-1 

Sacrum (gluteal region) 44*6 

Forearm and leg 45-1 

Neck 54-1 

Back of.Xhe fifth dorsal vertebra; lower dorsal and lumbar 

rogbn 54-1 

Middle of the neck 67-7 

Upper arm; thigh; centre of the back 677 

These investigations show not only that the skin b sensitive, 
but that one is able with great preci»k>n to distinguish the part 
touched. This latter power is usually called the sense of locality, 
and it is influenced by various conditions. The greater the number 
of sensory nerves in a given area of skin the greater is the degree 
of accuracy in distinguishing different points. Contrast in this 
way the tip of the finger and the back 01 the hand. Sensitiveness 
increases from the Joints towards the extremities, and sensitiveness 
is great in parts of tne body that are actively moved. The sensibility 
of the limos is finer in the transverse axis than in the long axis <h 
the limb, to the extent of | on the flexor surface of the upper limb 
and I on the extensor surface. It is doubtful if exercise improves 
sensitiveness, as Francis Gallon found that the performances of 
blind bojrs were not superior to those of other boys, and he says that 
" the guidance of the blind depends mainly on the multitude of 
collateral indicatwns, to which thev give much heed, and not their 
superiority to any one of them."^ [When the skin is moistened 
with indinerent fluids sensibility is increased. Suslowa made the 
curious discovery that, if the area between two points distinctly 
felt be tickled or be stimulated by a weak electric current, the 
impressions are fused. Stretching the skin, and baths in water 
containing carbonic acid or common salt, increase the power of 
localizing tactile impressions. In experimenting with the com- 
passes, it will be found that a smaller distance can be distinguished 
if one proceeds from greater to smaller distances than in the reverse 
direction. A smaller disunce can also be detected when the points 
of the compasses are placed one after the other on the skin than 
when they are pbced simultaneously. If the points of the com- 
passes are unequally heated, the sensatwn of two conucts becomes 
confused. An anaemic condition, o- a state of venous congestion, 
or the application of cold, or violent stretching of the skin, or the 
use of such substances as atropine, daturin. morphia, stnrchnine. 
alcohol, bromide ofpotassium, cannabin and hydrate ^01 chloral 
blunt sensibility. Toe only active substance saud to increase u 



Absolute sensUhentss, at indicated by a sense &f pressure, hak 
been tletermined by various methods. Two different weights are 
placed on the part, and the smallest difference in weight that can 
be perceived is noted. Weber placed small weights directly on the 
skin: Aubert and Kammler loaded small plates: Dohm made use 
of a balance, having a blunt point at one end of the beam, resting on 
the skin, whilst weights were placed on the other end of the beam 
to equalize the pressure: H. Eulenbera invented an instrument like 
a spiral spring paper-clip or balance (tne baraesthesiometer), bavins 
an index showing the pressure in grammes; F. Colts employee! 
an India-rubber tube filled with water, and this, to ensure a constant 
surface of contact, bent at one spot over a piece .of cork, is touched 
at that spot by the cutaneous part to be examined, and, by rhyth- 
mically exerted pressure, waves analoffous to those of the arterial 
pulse are produced in the tube; and L. Landois invented a mercurial 
balance, enabling him to make rapid variations in the weight without 
giving rise to any shock. These methods have given the following 
general results, (i) The greatest acuteness is on the forehead, 
temples and back of the hand and forearm, which detect a pressure 
of O'Ooa gramme; fingers detect 0*005 to 0*015 gramme; the chin, 
abdomen and nose 0*04 to 0*05 gramme. (2) Golts's method gives 
the same general results as Weber's experiment with the compasses^ 
with the exception that the tip of the tongue has its sensation of 
pressure much lower in the scale than iu sensation of touch. (3) 
Eulenberg found the following gradations in the fineness of the 
pressure sense: the forehead, lips, back of the cheeks, aiid temples 
appreciate differences of A to ^ (aoo: ao5 to 300: aio grammes). 
The back of the last phalanx of the fineers, the forearm, band, 
first and second ohalangcs, the palmar surface of the hand, forearm 
and upper arm distinguish differences of A to ^ (200: aao to aoo: 
a 10 grammes). The front of the leg and tnigh is similar to the fore- 
arm. Then follow the back of the toot and toes, the sole of the foot . 
and the back of the leg and thigh. Dohm phured a weight of 
1 gramme on the skin, and then determined the least additional weight 
that could be detected, with this result: third phalanx of filler 
0-499 gramme; back of the foot, 0-5 gramme; second phalanx, 0-771 
gramme; first phalanx, o*8a gramme; leg, i sramme; back of hand, 
I •156 grammes; palm, i*io8 grammes; pateUa. i*5 grammes; fore- 
arm, I '99 grammes ; umbilicus, 3' ^ grammes ; and back, 3 >8 grammes. 
(4) In passing from light to heavier weights, the acuteness increases 
at once, a maximum b reached, and then with heavy weighu the 
power of distinguishing the differences diminishes. (5) A sensation 
of pressure after the weights have been removed may be noticed 
{after-pressure sensation), especially if the weight be considerable. 

(6) Valentine noticed that, if the bnger were held against a blunt- 
toothed wheel, and the wheel were routed with a ceruin rapidity, 
he felt a smooth margin. This was experienced when the intervals 
of time between the contacts of successive teeth were less than from 
«ls to A% of a second. The same experiment can be readily made 
by holding the finger over the holes in one of the outermost circles 
of a large syren routing quickly: the sensations of individual 
boles become fused, so as to give rise to a feeling of touching a slit. 

(7) Vibrations of strings are detected even when the number b 
about 1500 per second ; above this the sensation of vibration ceases. 
By attaching bristles to the prongs of tuning-forks and bringing 
these into conUct with the lip or tongue, sensations of a very acute 
character are experienced, which are most intense when the forks 
vibrate from 600 to 1500 per second. 

Information from TaUiie Impressions.— Theae enable ua to come 
to the following conclusions. (1) We note the existence of some- 
thing touching the sensory surface, (a) From the intensity of the 
sensation we determine the weight, tennon or intensity of the 
pressure. This sensation b in the first insunce referred to the skin, 
but after the pressure has reached a ceruin amount muscular 
sensations are also experienced — the so<alled muscular sense. 
(3) The locality oi the part touched b at once determined, and from 
this the probable position of the touching body. Like the vbual 
field, to which all retinal impressions are referred, point for point, 
there is a tactile field, to whicn all points on the skin surface may be 
referred. (4) By touching a body at various ooints. from the 
difference 01 pressure and from a comparison 01 the positions of 
various points in the Uctile field we judge of the configuration of 
the body. A number of " Uctile pictures^' are obuined oy passing 
the skin over the touched body, and the shape of the body is further 
determined by a knowledge of the muscular movements necessary 
to bring the cutaneous surface into contact with different portions 
of it. If there is abnormal displacement of position, a false con- 
ception may arise as to the shape of the body. Thus, if a small 
marble or a pea be placed between the index and middle fin^ so 
as to touch (with the palm downwards) the outer side of the index 
finger and the inner side of the middle hnger, a sensation of touching 
one round body is experienced : but if the fingers be crossed, so that 
the marble touches tne inner «de of the index finger and the outer 
side of the middle finger, there will be a feeling of two round bodies, 
because in these circumstances there is added to the feelings of 
conuct a feeling of distortion (or of muscular action) such as would 
take place if the fingers, for purposes of touch, were placed in that 
abnormal position. Aeain, as showina that our knowledge of the 
tactile field b precise, there b the wdl-known fact that when a {neoe 

of skin b transplanted from the forehead to the nose, in the operation 
for removing a deformity of the nose arising from lupus or other 
ulcerative disease, the patient feels the new nasal part as if it were 
his forehead, and he may have the curious sensation of a nasal 
instead of a frontal heaoache. (5) From the number of points 
touched we judge aa to the smoothness or roushness of a booy. A 
body having a uniformly level surface, like a billiard ball, b smooth . 
a body bavin^^ points frregular in size and number in a given area 
is rou^h; and if the points are very close together it gives rise to a 
sensation, like that of the pile of velvet almost intolerable to some 
individuals. Again, if the pressure is so uniform as not to be felt, 
as when the body is immersed in water (paradoxical as ihb may seem, 
it is the case that the sensation of conuct is felt only at the limit 
of the fluid), we experience the sensation of being in conuct with a 
fluid. (6) Lastly, it would appear that touch is always the result 
of variation of pressure. No portion of the body when touching 
anything can be regarded as absolutely motionless, and the slight 
oscillations of the sens(Hy surface, and in many cases of the body 
touched, produce those variations of pressure on which toucn 

To explain the phenomenon of the taaile field, and more specblly 
the remarkable variations of tactile sensibility above described, 
various theories have been advanced, but none are satisfactory. 
(See article "Cutaneous Sensations'* by C. S. Sherrington in 
Schafei^s Physiology, ii. 920). Research shows that the sensation 
of touch may be referred to parts of the skin which do not comain 
the special end organs assocbted with this sense, and that filaments 
in the Malpighbn layer (the layer immediately above the papUlae 
of the true skin) may form the anatomical basis of the sense. The 
skin may be regarded, also, as an extensive surface conuining 
nervous arrangements by which we are brought into relation with 
the outer world. Accordingly, touch is not the only sensation 
referred to the sldn, but we also refer sensations of temperature 
(heat and cold), and often those peculiar sensations which ire call 

Sensations of Temperature.— Thtat depend on thermic trriution 
of the terminal organs, as proved by the following experiment of 
E. H. Weber: *' If the elbow be dipped into a veiy cold fluid, the 
cold is only felt at the immersed pah. of the body (where the fibres 
terminate) ; pain, however, b felt in the terminal organs of the ulnar 
nerve, namely > in the finger points: this pain, at the same time, 
deadens the local sensation of cold. " If the sensation of cold were 
due to the irriution of a specific-ilirve fibre, the sensation of cold 
would be referred to the tips of the fingers. When any part of the 
skin ii above its normal mean temperature, warmth is felt; in the 
oppoMte case, cold. The normal mean temperature of a given area 
varies according^ to the distribution of hot blood in it and to the 
activity of nutriuve chanma occurring in it. When the skin bbrought 
into conuct with a good conductor of heat there is a sensation of 
cold. A sensation 01 heat is experienced when heat is carried to 
the skin in any way. The following are the chief facts that have 
been asceruined regarding the temperature sense: (1) E. H. 
Weber found that, with a skin temperature of from 1 5-5* C. to 35* C, 

thermal sense varies in different regions as follows: tip of tongue, 
eyelids, cheeks, lips, neck, belly. The ** perceptible mimmum " was 
found to be, in degrees C: breast 0*4*: back,o-9*: backof hand. 0-3*; 
palm, 0-4* ; arm, o-a* ; back of foot , 0-4* ; thigh. 0-5* ; leg. 0*6* to o-a * : 
cheek, o*^*: temple, o*3*. (3) If twoditferenttemperaturesareapplied 
side by side and simuluncously, the impressionsofienfuse.espccially 
if the areas are close together. (4) Practice is said to improve the 
thermal sense. (5) Sensations of heat and cold may curiously 
alternate; thus when the skin is dipped first into water at 10* C. 
we feel cold, and if it be then dipped into water at 16* C. we have at 
first a feeling of warmth, but soon ^ain of cold. (6) The same 
temperature applied to a large area b not apprecbted in the same 
way as vhen applied to a small one; thus *^ the whole hand when 
pUced in water at 29-^ C. feels warmer than when a finger b 
dipped into water at 3a'C. " 

There is every reason to hold that there are different nerve fibses 
and different central organs for the tactile and thermal sensations, 
but nothing definite b known. The one sensation undoubtedly 
affects the other. Thus the minimum distance at which two com- 
pass points are felt b diminished when one point b warmer than 
the other. Again, a colder weight is felt as neavier, " so that the 
apparent difference of pressure becomes greater when the heavier 
weight is at the same time colder, and less when the liahter weight 
is colder, and difference of pressure is felt with equal weights of 
unequal temperature " (E. n. Weber). Creat sensibility to differ- 
ences of temperature is noticed after removal, alteration by vesicants, 
or destruction of the epidermis, and in the skin affection called 
herpes zoster. The same occurs in some cases of locomotor ataxy. 
Removal of the epidermis, as a rule, increases tactile sennbility 
and the sense of locality. Increased tactile sensibility is termed 
hyper pidapkesia, and is a rare phenomenon in nervous diseases. 
Paralysis of the tactile sense is called hypopsdaphesia, whilst its 
entire loss b apsdaphesia, Brown-Siquard mentions a case in 



which contitet of two points gave rise to a sense of a third point of 
caozact. Certain conditions of the nerve centres affect the senses 
both of touch and temperature. Under the influence of morphia 
the person may feel abnormally enlarged or diminished in size. As 
a rule the senses are affected simultaneously, but cases occur where 
ooe may be affected more than the other. 

Sensations of heat and cold are chiefly referred to the skin, and 
only partially to some mucous membranes, such as those of the 
aSmentary canal. Direct irritation of a nerve does not give rise 
to these sensarions. The exposed pulp of a diseased tooth, when 
inritated by hot or cold fluids, gives rise to pain, not to sensations 
of temperature. It has now been ascertained that there are minute 
areas on the sldn in which sensations of heat and cold may be more 
acutely feh than in adjoining areas; and. further, that there are 
points stimulated by addition of heat, hot spots, while others are 
sdmttlated by withdrawal of heat, cold spots. 

A ample method of demonstrating this phenomenon is to 
ose a 8(4id cylinder of copper, 8 in. in length by } in. in thick- 
ness, and sharpened at one end to a fine pencil-like point. Dip 
the pointed end into very hot water, close the eyes, and touch 
parts of the skin. When a hot spot is touched, there is an acute 
sensation of burning. Such a spot is often near a hair. Again, 
in another set of experiments, dip the copper pencil into ice-cold 
water and search for ccAd spots. When one of these is touched, a 
sensation of cold, as if concentrated on a point, is experienced. Thus 
it may be demonstrated that in a given area of skin there may be 
hot spots, cold spots and touch spots. 

Cotd s(»ts are more abundant than hot spots. The spots are 
arranged in curved lines, but the curve uniting a number of cold 
nots does not coincide with the curve forming a chain of hot spots. 
By Weber's method it will be found that we can discriminate cold 
spots at a shorter distance from each other than hot spots. Thus 
on the forehead cold spots have a minimum distance of 8 mm., and 
hot spots 4 mm.; on the skin of the breast, cold spots a mm., and 
hot spots 5 mm.; on the back, cold spots 1-5 mm., and hot spots 
4 to 6 mm.; on the back of the hand, cold spots 3 mm., and hot 
spots 4 mm.; on the palm, cold spots 8 mm., and hot spots .a mm.; 
and on the thigh and leg, cold spots 3 mm., and hot spots 3-5 mm. 
Electrical and mechanical stimulation of the hot or cold spots call 
(orth the corresponding sensation. No terminal organ for dis- 
crimination of temperature has yet been found. It will be observed 
that the sensation of heat or cold is excited by cAan^c of temperature, 
and that it is more acute and definite the more sudden the change. 
Thus <fiscrimination of temperature is nmilar to discrimination of 
touch, which depends on more or less sudden change of pressure. 
The term cold means, physiologically, the sensation we experience 
when heat is abstracteo, and the term heat, the sensation felt when 
heat is added to the part. Thus we are led to consider that the skin 
contains at least two kinds of specific terminal organs for sensations 
of touch and temperature, and two sets of nerve fibres which carry 
the nervous impulses to the brain. In all probability, also, these 
fibres have different central endings, and in their course to the brain 
run in different tracts in the spinal cord. This will explain cases 
of disease of the central nervous system in which, over certain areas 
of skin, sensations of touch have been lost while sensations of tem- 
perature and pain remain, or vice versa. Tactile and thermal 
impressions may influence each other. Thus a leg sent to "sleep" 
by pressure on the sciatic nerve will be found to be less sensitive 
to beat, but distinctly senutive to cold. In some cases of disease 
it has been noticed that the skin is sensitive to a temperature above 
that of the limb, but insensitive to cold. It is highly probable that 
pxst as we found in the case of touch (pressure), the terminal organs 
co nn ec t ed with the sense of temperature are the fine nerve filaments 
that have been detected in the deeper strata of the Malpighian region 
of the epidermis, immediately above the true skin, and it is also 
probable that certain epidermic (epithelial) cells in that region 
play their part in the mechanism. Sensations of a painful character 
may also, m certain circumstances, be referred to the viscera, and 
to mucous and serous surfaces. Pain is not a sensation excited by 
irritating the end organs either of touch or of temperature, nor 
even by irritating directly the filaments of a sensory nerve. Even 
if sensory nerves are cut or bruised, as in surgical operations, there 
may be no sensations of pain; and it has been found that muscles, 
vessels and even the viscera, such as the heart, stomach, liver or 
kidneys, may be freely handled without giving rise to any feeling 
of pain, or indeed to any kind of sensation. These parts, in ordinary 
dnrumatances appear to be insensitive, and yet they contain afferent 
nerves. If the sensibility of these nerves b heightened, or possibly 
if the sensitiveness of the central terminations of the nerves is raised, 
then we may have sensations to which we give the name of pain. 
In Uke manner the sldn is endowed with afferent nerves, distinct 
from those ministering to touch and to temperature, along which 
nervous impulses are constantly flowing. When these nervous 
impulses reach the central nervous system m ordinary circumstances 
they do not give rise to changes that reach the level of consciousness, 
but they form, as it were, the warp and woof of our mental life, and 
they also affect metabolisms, that is to say, nutritive changes in 
many parts of the body. They may also, as is well known, affect 
vncoiUKiously snch mechanisms as those of the action of the heart, 
the calibre of the blood-vessels and the moveroenu of respiration. 

If. however, this plane of activity is raised, as by intermittent 
pressure, or by inflammatory action, or by sudden changes of 
temperature, as in burning, scalding, &c.. such nervous impulses give 
rise to pain. Sometimes pain is distinctly located, and in other 
cases it may be irradiated in the nerve centres, and referred to areas 
of skin or to regions of the body which are not really the seat of 
the irritation. Thus irritation of the liver may cause pain in the 
shoulder; disease of the hip- joint often gives rise to pain in the knee; 
and renal colic, due to the passage of a calculus down the ureter, 
to severe pain even in the abdominal walls. These are often 
termed renex pdins and their intetpretation is of great importance 
to physicians in the diagnosis of disease. Their frequent occurrence 
has also directed attention to the distribution in the skin and 
termination in the brain of the sensory nerves. It is also notice- 
able that a sensation of pain ^ves us no information as to its 
cause; we amply have an agonizing sensation in a part to which, 
hitherto, we probably referred no sensations. The acuteness or 
intensity of pain depends partly on the intensity of the irritation, 
and partly on the degree of excitability of the sensory nerves at 
the time. 

Pain. — In addition to sensations of touch and of temperature 
referred to the skin, there is still a third kind of sensation, unlike 
either, namely, pain. This sensation cannot be supposed to be 
excited by imtations of the end oraans of touch, or of specific 
thermal end organs (if there be such), but rather to irritation of 
ordinary sensory nerves, and there is every reason to believe that 
painful impressions make their way to the brain along special tracks 
iirthe spinal cord. If we consider our mental condition as regards 
sensation at any moment, we notice numerous sensations more or 
less definite, not referred directly to the surface, nor to external 
objects, such as a feeliiu" of general comfort, free or impeded breath- 
ing, hunger, thirst, malaise, horror, fatigue and pain. These are 
allcausra by the irritation of ordinary sensory nerves in different 
localities, and if the irritation of such nerves, by chemical, thermal, 
mechaiucal or nutritional stimuli, paisses beyona a certain maximum 
point of intensity the result is pain. Irritation of a nerve, in accord- 
ance with the law of " peripheral reference of sensation," will cause 
pain. Sometimes the irritation applied to the trunk of a sensory 
nerve may be so intense as to destroy its normal function, and loss 
of sensation or anaestheaa results. It then the stimulus be increased 
further, pain b excited which is referred to the end of the ner\'c, with 
the result of produdng what has been called anaesthesia dolorosa. 
Pains freouently cannot be distinctly located, probably owing to 
the fact ot irradiation in the nerve centres and subsequent reference 
to areas of the body which are not really the seat of irritations. 
The intensity of pain depends on the degree of excitability of the 
sensory nerves, whilst its massiveness depends on the number of 
nerve fibres affected. The quality of the pain is probably produced' 
by the kind of irritation of the nerve, as affected by the structure 
of the part and the greater or less continuance of severe pressure. 
Thus there are piercing, cutting, boring, burning, throbbing, pressing, 
gnawing, dull and acute varieties of pain. Sometimes the excitability 
of the cutaneous nerves is so great that a breath of air or a delicate 
touch may give rise to suffering. This hyperalgia is found in 
inflammatory affections of the skin. In neuralgia the pain is charac- 
terized by its character of shooting along the course of the nerve 
and by sevefe exacerbations. In many nervous diseases there 
are disordered sensations referred to the skin, such as alterna- 
tions of heat and cold, burning, creeping, itching and a feeling as 
if insects were crawline on the surface (formication). This con- 
dition is termed parafgia. The term hypalgia is applied to a 
diminution and analgia to paralysis of pain, as is produced by 

Muscular Sense. — ^The sensory impressions considered in this 
article are closely related to the so-called muscular sense, or that 
sense or feeling by which we are aware of the state of the muscles of 
a limb as regards contraction or relaxation. Some have held that 
the muscular sense is really due to greater or less stretching of the 
skin and therefore to irritation of the nerves of that organ. That 
this is not the case is evident from the fact that disordered move- 
ments indicating perversion or loss of this sense are not affected by 
removal of the sbn (Claude Bernard). Further, cases in the human 
being have been noticed where there was an entire loss of cutaneous 
sensibility whilst the muscular sense was unimpaired. It is also 
known that muscles possess sensory nerves, giving rise, in certain 
circumstances, to fatigue, and. when strongly irritated, to the pain 
of cramp. Muscular sensations are really excited by irritation of 
sensory nerves passing from the muscles themselves. There are 
specialized spindle-like bodies in many muscles, and there are organs 
connected with tendons which are regarded as sensory organs by 
which pressures are communicated to sensory nerve-filaments. 
We are thus made conscious of whether or not the muscles are 
contracted, and of the amount of contraction necessary to overcome 
resistance, and this knowledge enables us to judge of the amount 
of voluntary impulse. Loss or diminution of the muscular sense 
is seen in chorea and especially in locomotor ataxy. Increase of 
it is rare, but it is seen in the curious affection called anxietas 
tibiarum, a painful condition of unrest, which leads to a continual 
change in the position of the limbs (see Equiubrium). 

(J. C. M.} 



TOUL, a garrison town of north-eastern France, capital of an 
arrondissementin the department of Meurthe-et-Moselle, 21 m. 
W. of Nancy on the Eastern railway Pop. (1906), town 9523; 
commune, 13,663. Toul is situated in a plain on the left bank 
of the Moselle, which skirts the town on the S. and S. E., while 
on the N. it is bordered by the Mame-Rhine canal. It is princi- 
pally important as being the centre of a great entrenched camp 
close to the German frontier. Immediately after the Franco- 
German War the whole system of frontier defence was revised, 
and of all the new fortresses of the Meuse and Moselle Toul is 
perhaps the most formidable. The works were begun in 1874 
by the construction of four outlying forts north, north-east 
and south of the town, but these soon became merely 
an inner line of defence. The principaf defences now lie 
much farther out on all sides. The west front of the 
new line of forts occupies a long line of high ground (the 
watershed of the Meuse and the Moselle), the north front, 
about 4 m. from Toul, is in undulating country, while facing 
towards Nancy and forming the chord of the arc which 
the Moselle describes from Fontenay below to Villey-le-Sec 
above, is the strong east front, the outlying works of which 
extend far to the east (Fort Frouard and other works 
about Nancy) and to the south-east (Pont St Vincent). 
The south front extends from the Moselle at Villey-le- 
Sec south-westwards till it meets the southern end of the 
west front on the high ground overlooking the Meuse 
valley. The fort at Pagny on the Meuse to the south-west 
may be considered an outwork of this line of defence. The 
perimeter of the Toul defences proper is nearly 30 m., and 
their mean distance from the town about 6 m. Northward, 
along the Meuse, Toul is connected with the fortress of Verdun 
by the " Meuse line " of barrier forts, the best known of which 
are Gironville, Liouville and Troyon. South of Toul the country 
was purposely left imfortified as far as £pinal {q.v.) and this 
region is known as the Troupe d'£pinal. 

The town itself forms an oval within a bastioned enceinte 
pierced by three gateways. It has two important churches. 
That of St £tienne (formerly a cathedral) has a choir and 
transept of the 13th century; the nave and aisles are of the 14th, 
and the facade, the finest part of the building, of the last half of 
the 15th. The two western towers, which have no spires, reach 
a height of 246 ft. The two large lateral chapels of the nave are 
in the Renaissance style. The chief features of the interior 
are its stained i^^ss and oigan loft. South of the church there 
is a fine cloister of the end of the X3th century which was 
much damaged at the Revolution. The church of St 
Gengoult, which dates chiefly from the late X3th or early X4th 
century, has a facade of the 15th century and a cloister in the 
Flamboyant Gothic style of the i6th century. The h6tel- 
de-viUe occupies a building of the xSth century, once the epis- 
copal palace, and contains the library and museum. Toul 
is the seat o{ a sub-prefect and has a tribunal of commerce 
and a communal college among its public institutions. The 
industries include the manufacture of porcelain; trade is in 
wine and brandy. 

Toul (TuUum) is one of the oldest towns of France; originally 
capital of the Leuci, in the Belgic Confederation, it acquired 
great importance under the Romans. It was evangelized by 
St Mansuy in the latter half of the 4th century, and became 
one of the leading sees of north-east Gaid. After being sacked 
successively by Goths, Burgundians, Vandals and Huns, Toul 
was conquered by the Franks in 450. Under the Merovingians 
it was governed by counts, assisted by elective officers. The 
bishops became sovereign counts in the xoth century, holding 
only of the emperor, and for a period of 300 years (13th to x6th 
centuries) the citizens maintained a long struggle against 
them. Together with Verdun and Metz the town and its 
domain formed the territory of the Trois-£v£ch£s. Toul was 
forced to yield for a time to the count of Vaudimont in the X2tb 
century, and twice to the duke of Lorraine in the 15th, and was 
thrice devastated by the plague in the x6lh century. Charies V. 
made a solemn entry into the town in 1544, but in the following 

year, at the instance of the cardinal of Lorraine, it placed 
itself under the perpetual protection of the kings of France. 
Henry II. took possession of the Trois-Ev£ch£s in 1552, but the 
territory was not officially incorporated with France till X64S. 
Henry IV. was received in state in 1603, and in 1637 the 
parlement of Metz was transferred to Toul. In 1700 Vauban 
reconstructed the fortifications of the town. In 1790 the 
bishopric was suppressed and the diocese united to that of 
Nancy. Toid, which had then no modem defences, capitulated 
in 1870 after a bombardment of twelve days. 

TOULON, a seaport and first-class fortress and naval station 
of France, department of Var, capital of the arrondissement 
of Toulon, on the Mediterranean, 42 m. E.S.E. of Marseilles. 
Pop. (1886), 53,941; (190X), xox,6o2. The bay, which 
opens to the east, has two divisions, the Grande Rade 
and the Petite Rade; it is sheltered on the north and 
west by high hills, closed on the south by the peninsula of 
capes Sici6 and C6pet, and protected on the east by a huge 
breakwater, the entrance, 1300 ft. wide, being defensible by 
torpedoes. A ship coming from the open sea must first 
pass the forts of St Marguerite, of Cap Brun, of Lamalgue 
and of St Louis to the north, and the battery of the signal 
sution to the south; before reaching the Petite Rade it must 
further pass under the guns of the battery of Le Salut to the 
east, and of the forts of Balaguier and L'Aiguillette to the west. 
The Bay of La Seyne lies west of the Petite Rade, and is 
defended by the forts of Six-Fours, Napol£on (formeriy Fort 
Caire), and Malbousquet, and the batteries of Les Ar&ies and 
Les Gaus. To the north of Toulon rise the defensive works 
of Mont Faion and Fort Rouge, to the east the forts of Artigues 
and St Catherine, to the north-east the formidable fort of 
Coudon, and to the south-east that of CoUe Noire, respectively 
dominating ^e highway into Italy and the valley of Hyires 
with the Bay of Carqueiranne. The town, enlarged to the 
north under the Second Empire, has on that side a fine modem 
quarter; but in the old town the streets are for the most part 
narrow, crooked and dirty, and to their insanitary state the 
cholera epidemic of X884 was attributed. The chief buildings 
are the former cathedral of St Marie Majeure (from the sth 
century Toulon was a bishop's see till x8oi, when it was annexed 
to that of Fr^jus), the church of St Louis, the naval and military 
hospital, with a natural history collection and an anatomical 
museum attached, a naval school of medicine, a school of 
hydrography, and large barracks. In 1883-1887 a handsome 
Renaissance building was erected to accommodate the picture 
gallery and the town library. The monument in com* 
memoration of the centenary of the French Revolution was 
erected in X890 in the Place de la Libert6, the finest in the 
new town. The imports are wine, com, wood, coal, hemp, iron, 
sugar, coffee and fresh fish; the exports are salt, copper ore, 
barks for taiming and oils. The principal industries, apart 
from the arsenal, are shipbuilding, fishing, lace-making and 
wine-growing. Toulon possesses an observatory and a 
botanical garden. The interesting buildings and gardens of 
the hospital of St Mandrier stand on the peninsula of Cape 
C£pet, and near them is the lazaretlo. 

Toulon is the most important of the French dockyards, and is 
the headquarters of the Mediterranean fleet. The arsenal, which 
was created by Louis XIV. — Vauban being the engineer of the 
work»— lies on the north side of the Petite Rade. This is ap- 
proached from the Grande Rade by passages at the north and 
south ends of a long breakwater whKh extends from the direction 
of Le Mourillon towards the C6pet Peninsula. The water space 
within the moles amounts to about 150 acres, while the quays 
approach 4 m. in leneth. Outside in the Petite Rade is a splendid 
protected anchorage for a great fleet, the whole being commanded 
by many forts and batteries. There are four great basins ap. 
proached from the Petite Rade— the Vielle Darse, to the cast, 
on the side of Le Mourillon; the Darse Vauban. next to it; and the 
Darse de Castigneau and the Darse Missiessy, farther to the west. 
In the Darse Vauban are three dry docks, two of them 246 ft. long, 
with a depth of water on the sill of about 20 ft. ; while the third 
IS 283 ft. long, with a depth of over 2a ft. Three other dr^ docks are 
in the Darse de Castigneau, of which one is in two sec'tiona The 
largest of the docks is 385 ft. long, and the depth of water on the 
sill in all these docks averages 30 ft. In the Darse Missiessy are 



tWD dry docks, 426 ft. long, with a depth on the till of over 32 ft. 
There are leveral buflding ilipe, ana the yard is supplied with 
a gun foundry and wharf, fitting-shops, boiler worlcs, victualling 
and other establishments, rolling mills and ma^iaxineft. Le Mourillon 
is a subsidiary yard at Toulon, devoted chiefly to ship-building, 
I large facilities, including five covered slips. 

The Roman Tdo Martius is supposed to have stood near 
the lazaretto. The town was successively sacked by 
Goths, Buigundians, Franks and Saracens. During the 
eai)y middle ages, and till conquered by Charles of Anjou 
in 1359, it was under lords of iu own, and entered into ^• 
ance with the republics of Marseilles and Aries. St Louis, 
and especially Louis XII. and Francis I. strengthensd 
its fortiJ&cations. It was seized by the emperor Charles V. 
in 1524 and 1536. Henry IV. founded a naval arsenal at 
Toulon, which was further strengthened by Richelieu, and 
Vauban made the new dock, a new enceinte, and several 
forts and batteries. In 1707 the town was unsuccessfully 
besieged by the duke of Savoy, Prince Eugene and an English 
fieet. In 1720 there was an outbreak of the plague. In 1792 
after great and sanguinary disorder, the royalists of the town 
sought the support of the English and Spanish fleets cruising 
in the neighbourhood. The Convention having replied by 
putting the town " hors la loi/' the inhabitants opened their 
harbour to the English. The army of the republic now (1793) 
laid siege to the town, and on this occasion Napoleon Bonaparte 
first made his name as a soldier. The forts commanding the 
town having been taken, the Englbh ships retired after setting 
fire to the arsenaL The conflagration was extinguished by 
the prisoners, but not before 38 out of a total of 56 vessels had 
been destroyed. Under the Directory Toulon became the 
most important French military fort on the Mediterranean; 
here Napoleon organized the Egyptian campaign, and the 
expedition against Algiers set out from Toulon in 1830. The 
fortifications have been strengthened by Napoleon I., Louis 
Philippe, Napoleon III., and since 1870. 

BattU ef Toulcn.—TYus naval battle took place on the nth of 
February 1744, near the port of Toulon.. A British fleet of thirty 
sail of the line under command of Thomas Mathews, who combined 
ibe oflkxa of naval commander-in-chief in the Mediterranean and 
envoy to the courts of Sardinia and the Italian princes, engaged 
a combined force of S^niards under Don Jos6 Navarro and French 
under M. de Court. They were in all twenty-seven sail. The allies 
left Toulon on the Qth 01 February. Mathews was at anchor in 
Hy^res Bav to watch them, for though Fiance and Great Britain 
«ere already engaged as allies on opposite sides in the War of the 
.Austrian Succession, there had been no declaration of war between 
them. It was known that the allies meant to transfer Spanish 
troops to Italy to serve against the Austrians, and Mathews had no 
besitation in attacking them, Great Britain being at war with 
Spain. He left Hy^res in very light wind with a heavy westerly 
rtrell, and with his fleet in confusion. The British ships were strag- 
gling over a distance of ten miles, but he put himseli between the 
enemy and Toulon. Mathews was on bad terms with his second 
in command, Lestock, who commanded the rear division and showed 
little disposition to support his superior. By the morning of the 
nth the interval between the van and centre of the British fleet 
and its rear had increased in the light breezes, and also through 
the voluntary or involuntary misapprehension of Mathews's orders 
by Lestock. The allies were in a lairly well-formed line, headine 
to the south, and southward of the British. Mathews pursued, 
and at 1.30 p.m., when his leading ship was abreast of the centre 
ship of the allies, he attacked. Some hot fighting took place 
between Mathews and the Spaniards who formed the allied rear. 
The action was nouble as the last occasion on whkh an attempt 
was made to use a fireship on the open sea. One was sent against 
the " Real " (i 14), the Spanish flagship, but she was reduced to a 
sinking state by the fire of the Spaniards, and blew up prematurely, 
with the loss of all on board. At about five o'clock, the French 
in the van turned back to support the Spaniards, and Mathews drew 
off. One Spanish ship, the *' Poder " (60). whkh had surrendered 
was recaptured, and then set on fire by the allies. Mathews made 
only a fceUe attempt to renew the battle on the following days, 
aad on the 13th returned towards the coast of Italv, whkh he said 
he had to daend. The British rear division had not come into 
action at alL 

The battle, though a miserable affair in itself, is of great impor- 
tance in naval history because of the pronouncement of doctrine 
to whkh it led. Mathews, who was dissatisfied with his subordinate. 
Lestock, suspended him from command and sent him home for 
trial. Several of the captains had behaved ill. and the failure of 

a superior British fleet to gam a raccets over the alDes caused 
extreme discontent at home. A parliamentary inquiry was opened 
on the 12th of March 1745, which on the i8th of April, after a 
confused investigation, ended in a petition to the king to order 
trials by court-martial of all the officers accused of misconduct. 
A long series 'of courts-martial began on the nth of September 
1745, and did not end till the 32nd of October 1746. Several 
captains were sentenced to be dismissed the servke. Lestock was 
aoquitted, but Mathews was condemned and sentenced to dis- 
missal. The finding of the court, whkh blamed the ofiker who 
actually fought, and acquitted the other who did not. puzzled and 
angered publk opinion. The technkal points were not apprecio 
ated by Uymen. The real evil done by the condemnation of 
Mathews was not understood even in the navy. Mathews was 
.blamed on the ground that he had not waited to engage till his 
' van ship was abreast of the van ship of the enemy. By this declara- 
tion of principle the court confirmed the formal system of naval 
tactks whkh rendered all sea-fighting between equal or neariy 
equal forces so ineffective for two generations. 

See Beataon, Naval and MilUory Memoirs^ i. 197 seq. (London. 
1804). a full and fair narrative. (D. H.) 

(1678-X737), third son of Louis XIV. and Mme de Montespan 
was bom on the 6th of June 1678. At the age of five he was 
created admiral of France. He distinguished himself during 
the War of the Spanish Succession, and inflicted a severe 
defeat on Admiral Rooke near Malaga in 1704. He kept 
aloof from the intrigues of his sister-in-law, the duchess of 
Maine, and died on the xst of December 1737. His son, Louis 
Jean Marie de Bourbon, due de Penthiivre (i 735-1 793), succeeded 
hb father in his posts, among others in that of grand admiral. 
He served under Marshal de NoaiUes, and fought brilliantly 
at Dettingen (1743) and Fontcnoy (1745). He then lived in 
retreat at Rambouillet and Sceauz, protecting men of letters, 
and particularly the poet Florian, and dispensing charity. 
He lost his son, the prince of Lamballe, in 1768, and survived 
his daughter-in-law, Louise Marie Thir^ of Savoy-Carignan, 
the friend of Marie Antoinette, who was killed by the populace 
on the 3rd of September 1792. He died on the 4th of March 
1793^ his daughter and heiress, Louise Marie Addiilde, married 
Philippe (£galit£), duke of Orleans. 

TOULOUSE, a city of south-western France, capital of the 
department of Haute-Garonne, 443 m. S. by W. of Paris by 
the Orleans railway, and 159 m. S.E. of Bordeaux by the 
Southern railway. Pop. (1906), town, 135,856; commune, 
149*438. Totilouse is situated on the right bank of the Garonne, 
which here changes a north-easterly for a north-westerly 
direction, describing a curve round which the city .extends in the 
form of a crescent. On the left bank is the suburb of St Cyprien, 
which is exposed to the inundations of the river owing to its 
low situation. The river is spanned by three bridges — that- 
of St Pierre to the north, that of St Michel to the south, and 
the Pont Neuf in the centre; the last, a fine structure of seven 
arches was begun in 1543 by Nicolas Bachclier, the sculptor, 
whose work is to be seen in many of the churches and mansions 
of the city. East and north of the city runs the Canal du 
Midi, which here joins the lateral canal of the Garonne. Between 
the Canal du Midi and the city proper extends a long line of 
boulevards leading southwards by the AU£*e St £tienne to the 
Grand Rond, a promenade whence a series of allies branch out 
in all directions. South-west the Alice St Michel leads towards 
the Garonne, and south the Grande Alice towards the Faubourg 
St Michel. These boulevards lake the place of the old city 
walls. Between them and the canal lie the more modem 
faubourgs of St Pierre, Arnaud-Bernard, Matabiau, &c. The 
Place du Capitole, to which streets converge from every side, 
occupies the centre of the city. Two broad straight thorough- 
fares of modern construction, the Rue de Mctz and the Rue 
d'AIsace- Lorraine, intersect one another to the south of this 
point, the first running cast from the Pont Neuf, the other 
running north and south. The other streets are for the most 
part narrow and irregular. 

The most interesting building in Toulouse is the church of St 
Semin or Satumin, whom leccnd represents as the first preacher 
of the gospel in Toulouse, where he was perhaps martyred about 
jt-- _! J.- .r ,.|^^ ^ century. The choir, the oldest part of the 


present bttildin;, was consecrated by Urban II. in 1096. The 
chuRJi M the brgest Romanesque basilica in existence, being 

?75 ft. from east to west and 210 ft. in extreme breadth. The nave 
1 2th and 13th centuries) has double aisles. Four pillars, suppMt- 
ing the central tower, are surrounded by heavy masonry, which 
somewhat spoils the general harmony of the interior. In the 
southern transept is the " portail des comtes," so named because 
near it lie the tombs of William Taillefer, Pons, and other eariy 
counts of Toulouse. The little chapel in which these tombs (as- 
cribed to the I ith century) are found was restored by the capitols 
of Toulouse in 1648. Another chapel contains a Byzantine Christ 
of late 11th-century workmanship. The choir (nth and 12th 
centuries) ends in an apse, or rather chevet, surrounded by a range 
of columns, marking off an aisle, which in its turn opens into five 
chapels. The stalls are of 16th-century work and erotesquely 
carved. Against the northern wall is- an ancient table d'autd, 
which an itth-century inscription declares to have belonged to 
St Sernln. In the crypts are many relics, which, however, were 
robbed of their gold and silver shrines during the Revolution. 
On the south there is a fine outer porch in the Renaissance style; 
it is surmounted by a representation of the Ascension in Byzantine 
style. The central tower (13th century) consists of five storeys, 
of whkh the two highest are of later date, but harmonize with the 
three lower ones. A restoration of St Sernin was carried out in 
the 19th century by Viollet-le-Duc. 

The cathedral, dedicated to St Stephen, dates from three different 
epochs. The walls of the nave belong to a Romanesque cathedral 
of the nth century^ but its roof dates from the first half of the 
13th century. ' The choir was begun by Bisho(> Bertrand de I'lle 
(c. 1272). wiio wished to build another church in place of the old 
one. This wish was unfulfilled and the original luive. the axis of 
which is to the south of that of the choir^ remains. The choir was 
burned in 1690 but restored soon after. It is surrounded by seven- 
teen chapels, finished by the cardinal d'0rl6ans, nephew of Louis XI., 
about the beginning 01 the i6th century, and aaorned with gla» 
dating from the 15th to the 17th century. The western gate, 
flanked by a huge square tower, was constructed by Peter du 
Moulin, archbishop of Toulouse, from 1439 to 1451. it has been 
greatly battered, and presents but a poor approximation to its 
ancient beauty. Over this gate, which was once ornamented with 
the statues 01 St Sernin, St Exuperius and the twelve apostles, 
as well as those of the two brother archbishops of Toulouse, Denis 
(1423-14^9) and Peter du Moulin, there is a beautiful 13th-century 
rose-window, whose centre, however, is not in a perpendk:uUur 
line with the point of the Gothic arch below. 

Among other remarkable churches may be noticed Notrfr-Dame 
de la Daurade, near the Pont Neuf, built on the site of a 9th<£ntury 
Benedictine abbey and reconstructed towards the end of the i8th 
century; and Notre- Dame de la Dalbade; perhaps existing in the 
nth. out in its present form dating from the 10th century, with 
a fine Renaissance portal. The church of the Jacobins, held by 
Viollet-le-Duc to be " one of the most beautiful brick churches 
constructed in the middle ages," was built towards the end of 
the 13th century, and consists of a nave divided into two aisles 
by a range of columns. The chief exterior feature is a beautiful 
octagonal belfry. The church belonged to a Dominx:an monastery, 
of which part of the cloister, the refectory, the chapter-hall and the 
chapel also remain and are utilized by the lycw. Of the other 
secular buildings the most noteworthy are the capitole and the 
museum. The capitole has a long Ionic facade built from 1750 
to 1760. The theatre is situated in the left wing. Running along 
almost the whole length of the first floor is the saUt des tUustres 
adorned with modem paintings and sculptures relating to the history 
of the town. The museum (opened in 1795) occupies, besides a 
Urge modem buikling, the church, cloisters and other building 
of an old Augustinian convent. It contains pictures and a splendid 
collection of antiquities, notably a series of statues and busts of 
Roman emperors and others and much Romanesque sculpture. 
There is an auxiliary museum in the old college of St Raymond. 
The natural history museum is in the Jardin des Plantes. The 
law courts sund on the site of the old Ch&teau Narbonais. once 
the residence of the counts of Toulouse and later the seat of the 
parlement of Toulouse. Near by is a statue of the jurist Jacques 
Cuias. born at Toulouse. 

Toulouse is singulariy rich In mansions of the 16th and 17th 
centuries. Among these may be mentioned the Hdtel Bernuy» 
a fine Renaissance building now used by the Iyc6e and the Hdtel 
d'Ass^zat of the same period, now the property of the Acadimie 
des Jeux Fhranx fsee below), and of the learned societies of the city. 
In the court of the latter there is a statue of CI6mence Isaure, a 
lady of Toulouse, traditionally supposed to have enriched the 
Acad6mie by a bequest in the i^th century. The Maison de Pierre 
has an elaborate stone facade of 1612. 

Toulouse is the seat of an archbishopric, of a court of appeal, 
a court of assizes and of a prefect. It is also the headquarters 
of the XVII. army corps and centre of an educational circum- 
scription {acaditme). There are tribunals of first instance and of 
commerce, a board of trade-arbitration, a chamber of commerce 
and a branch of the Bank of France. The educational institutions 
include faculties of law, medicine and pharmacy, adeoce and 


letters, a Catholic institute with faculties of theology and letters, 
higher and lower ecclesiastical seminaries. Iyc6cs and training colleges 
for both sexes, and schools of veterinary science, fine arts and 
industrial sciences and music. 

Toulouse, the principal commercial and industrial centre of 
Languedoc. has important markets for horses, wine, grain, flowers, 
leather, oil and farm produce. Its pastry and other delk:acies 
are highly esteemed. Its industrial establishments include the 
national tobacco factory, flour-mills, saw-mills, engineering work- 
shops and factories for farming implements, bicycles, vehicles, 
artificial manures, paper, boots and shoes, and flour pastes. 

ToLOSA, chief town of the Volcae Tectosages, does not 
seem to have been a place of great importance during the early 
centuries of the Roman rule in Gaul, though in 106 B.C. the 
pillage of iu temple by Q. S. Cepio, afterwards routed by the 
Cimbri, gave rise to the famous Latin proverb kahet aurum 
Tohsanum, in allusion to ill-gotten gains. It possessed a 
circus and an amphitheatre, but its most remarkable remains 
are to be found on the heights of Old Toulouse (vetus Tolosa) 
some 6 or 7 m. to the east, where huge accumulations of 
broken pottery and fragments of an old earthen wall mark 
the site of an ancient settlement. The numerous coins that 
have been discovered on the same spot do not date back farther 
than the and century B.C., and seem to indicate the position 
of a Roman manufacturing centre then beginning to occupy 
the Gallic hill-fortress that, in earlier days, had in times of 
peril been the stronghold of the native tribes dwelling on the 
river bank. Tolosa does not seem to have been a Roman 
colony; but its importance must have increased greatly towards 
the middle of the 4th century. It is to be found entered in 
more than one itinerary dating from about this time; and 
Ausonius, in his Ordo nobUium urbium, alludes to it in terms 
implying that it then had a large population. In 4x9 it was 
made the capital of his kingdom by Wallia, king of the Visigoths, 
under whom or whose successors it became the scat of the 
great Teutonic kingdom of the West-Goths— a kingdom that 
within fifty years had extended itself from the Loire to Gibraltar 
and from the Rhone to the Atlantic. On the defeat of Alaric 
II. (507) Toulouse fell into the hands of Clovis, who carried 
away the royal treasures to Angoul£me. Under the Merovingian 
kings it seems to have remained the greatest city of southern 
Gaul, and is said to have been governed by dukes or counts 
dependent on one or other of the rival kings descended from 
the great founder of the Prankish monarchy. It figures pro- 
minently in the pages of Gregory of Tours and Sidonius 
Apollinaris. About 628 Dagobert erected South Aquitaine 
into a kingdom for his brother Charibert, who chose Toulouse 
as his capital. For the next eighty years its history is obscure, 
till we reach the days of Charles Martel, when it was besieged 
by Sema, the leader of the Saracens from Spain (c. 7^5-720), 
but delivered by Eudes, " princeps Aquitaniae," in whom 
later writen discovered the ancestor of all the later counts of 
Toulouse. Modem criticism, however, has discredited this 
genealogy; and the real history of Toulouse recommences in 
780 or 781, when Charlemagne appointed his little son Louis 
king of Aquitaine, with Toulouse for his chief city. 

During the minority of the young king his tutor Chorson 
ruled at Toulouse with the title of duke or count. Being 
deposed at the Council of Worms (790), he was succeeded by 
William Courtnez, the traditional hero of southern France, 
who in 806 retired to his newly founded monastery at Gellone, 
where he died in 81 a. In the unhappy days of the emperor 
Louis the Pious and his children Toulouse suffered in common 
with the rest of western Europe. It was besieged by Charies 
the Bald in 844, and taken four years later by the Normans, who 
in 843 had sailed up the Garonne as far as its walls. About 852 
Raymond I., count of (^ercy, succeeded his brother Fridolo as 
count of Rouergue and Toidouse; it is from this noble that all 
the later counts of Toulouse trace their descent. Raymond I.'s 
grandchildren divided their parents* estates; of these Ray- 
mond II. (d. 924) became count of Toulouse, and Ermengaud. 
count of Rouergue, while the hereditary titles of Gothia, Qucrcy 
and Albi were shared between them. Raymond II.'s grandson, 
William Taillefer (d. e. 1037), married Emma of Provence, and 



banded down part of that lordship to his younger son Bertrand.^ 
William's elder son Pons left two children, of whom William IV. 
succeeded his father in Toolouse, AIbi, Quercy, &c.; while 
the younger, Raymond IV. of St Gilles {c. to66), made him- 
self master of the vast possessions of the counts of Rouergue, 
married his cousin the heiress of Provence, and about X085 began 
to rule the immense estates of his elder brother, who was still 

From this time th^ counU of Toulouse were the greatest 
lords in southern France. Raymond IV., the hdto of Uie first 
crusade, assumed the formal titles of marquis of Provence, 
duke of Narbonne and count of Toulouse. While Raymond 
was awmy in the Holy Land, Toulouse was seized by William 
IX., duke of Aquitaine, who claimed the city in right of his 
wife Philippa, the daughter of William IV., but was imable 
to bold it k>ng (1098-xxoo). Raymond's son aiul successor 
Bcrtjnand foUowed his father's example and set out for the 
Holy Land in 1x09, leaving his great estates at his death to 
his brother Alphonse Jourdain. The rule of this prince was 
disturbed by the ambition of William IX. and his grand-daughter 
Eleanor, who urged her husband Louis VII. to support her 
daims to Toulouse by war. On her divorce from Louis and 
her marriage with Henry II., Eleanor's claims passed on to this 
monarch, who at last forced Raymond V. to do him homage for 
Toukmse in 1x73. Raymond V., the patron of the troubadours, 
died in 1x94, and was succeeded by his son Raymond VI., 
under whose rule Languedoc was desolated by the crusaders of 
Simon de Montfort, who occupied Toubuse in 12x5, but k>st 
his life in besieging it in xaxS. Raymond VII., the son of 
Raynwnd VI. and Princess Joan of England, succeeded his 
father in xsaa, and died in X349i leaving an only daughter 
Joan, married to Alfonso the brother of Louis IX. On the 
death of Alfonso and Joan in 127 x the vast inheritance of the 
counts of Toulouse lapsed to the Crown.* From the middle 
years of the xsth century the people of Toubuse seem to have 
begun to free themselves fitom the most oppressive feudal 
dues. An act of Alphonse Jourdain (xi4x) exempts them from 
the tax on salt and wine; and in 1x52 we have traces of a 
" commune consilium Tolosae " mnWing police ordinances in 
its own name "with the advice of Lord Raymond, count of 
Toulouse, duke of Narbonne, and marquis of Provence." This 
act is witnessed by six ** capitularii," four duly appointed 
judges (judices constiitOi)* and two advocates. Twenty-three 
years Later there are twelve capitularii or consuls, sir for the 
dty and six for its suburbs, all of them elected and sworn to do 
justice in whatever municipal matters were brought before 
ihexn. In 1223 their number was increased to twenty-four; 
but they were forbidden to touch the dty property, which 
was to remain in the charge of certain " communarii " chosen 
by themsdves. Eariy in the X4th century the consuls took 
the name of " domini de capitub," or, a little later, that of 
"capituham nobilium." From the X3th century the consuls 
met in their own house, the " palatium communitatis Tolosae " 
or D6tel-de-ville. In the i6th century a false derivation 
changed the andent consuls (domini de capitulo) into the modern 
" capitouls " {domini capiiolii tolosani)t a barbarous etymology 
which in its turn has, in the present century, transformed 
the old assembly house of Toulouse into the capitole. The 

> About 975 there was a partition of the esUtes which Wniiam 
Taillefer and his counn Raymond II. of Auvergne held in common, 
— Albi. Quercy, ftc, falluig to William, and Cothia, &c, to 
Raymond. . ,^ , 

* List of the ccmnts of TouIouk 

77&-790 Raymond III., . . 9'A-C' 95° 

William 1 790-806 

Raymond Rafind . c. 812-818 
Berenger .... 818-835 

Beraardl 835-^44 

Warin 844-«45 

William IL . . . . 845-850 

Frkfefa* 850-853 

Raymond L . . . 852-864 

Bernard 864-875 

Eudo 875-918 

Raymawin. . . 9(9-^.924 

Ra>'mond III. . 
William Taillefer 

Pons 1037- 

William IV. . . io6o-<:. 1093 

c. 950-c. 1037 

Raymond IV. 
Bertrand . . . 
Alphonse Jourdaua 
Raymond V. . . 
Raymond VI. . 
Raymond VII. . 
Alfonso and Joan 

X 148-1194 



parlement of Toulouse was established as a pennaoeot court 
in X443. Louis XI. transferred it to MontpeUier in X4i67, but 
restored it to Toulouse before the dose of the next year. This 
parlement was for Languedoc and southern France what the 
parlement of Paris was for the north. During the religious 
wars of the x6th century the Protestants of the town made 
two unsuccessful attempts to hand it over to the prince de 
Cond£. After St Bartholomew's Day (X572) 300 of the party 
were massacre Towards the end of the x6th century, during 
the wars of the League, the parlement was split up into 
three different sections, sitting respectivdy at Carcassonne or 
B6ziers, at Castle Sarraain, and at Toulouse. The three were 
reunited in x 596. Under Frauds I. it began to persecute heretics, 
and in 16x9 rendered itself notorious by burning the philosopher 
Vanini. In X762 Jean Calas, an old man fidsely accused of 
murdering his ddest son to prevent him becoming a Roman 
Catholic, was broken on the wheeL By the exertions of Voltaire 
his character was afterwards rehabilitated. The university 
of Toulouse owes its origin to the action of Gregory IX., who 
in 1229 bound Rasrmond VH. to mainfain four masters to 
teach theology and eight others for canon law, grammar, and 
the liberal arts. Civil law and medicine were taught only a 
few years later. The famous ** Floral Games " of Toulouse, 
in which the poets of Languedoc contended (May 1-3) for the 
prixe of the golden amaranth and other gold or silver flowers, 
given at the expense of the dty, were instituted in X323-1324. 
The Acadimie da Joux Floraux still awards these prizes for 
compositions in poetry and prose. In 18x4 the duke of 
Wellington defeated Marshal Soult to the north-east of the 

See L. Ariste and L. Brand, SistoinpoptdairtdoTotdousedepuis 
Us origines jusqu*d a jow (Toubuse, 1898}. This work contains 
an exhaustive bibliography. 

TOUNGOO, or Taung-ngu, a town and district in the Tenaa- 
serim division of Lower Burma. The town is situated on the 
right bank of the river Sittang, x66 m. by nil N. from Rangoon. 
Pop. (190X), X5,837. From the 14th to the x6th century it was 
the capital of an independent kingdom. After the second 
Burmese War it was an important frontier station, but the 
troops were withdrawn in 1893. The district of Toungoo 
has an area of 6x72 sq. m.; pop. (x90x), 279,3x5, showing an 
increase of 33% in the preceding decade. Three mountain 
ranges traverse the district — the Pegu Yomas, the Karen, 
and the Nat-Uung or " Great Watershed "—all of which have 
a north and south direction, and are covered for the most 
part with dense forest. The Pegu Yomas hav^ a general 
devation of from 800 to X3oo ft., while the central range averages 
from 3000 to 30Q0 ft. The rest of Toungoo forms the upper 
portion of the valley of the Sittang, the only large river in the 
district, the chief tributaries of which are the Shwa, Hkabaung, 
Hpyu Thank-ye-Kat and Yaxik-thua-wa, all navigable for a 
great portion of their course. Limestone appears in various 
places, and in the north-east a light grey marble is quarried for 
Ume. The rivers form the diief means of communication during 
the rainy season. The rainfall in X905 was 80*30 In. There 
are X4 railway stations in the district. Rice is the staple 
crop; there are promising plantations of coffee and rubber. 
Forests cover more than 5000 sq. m., of which X337 sq. m. 
have been reserved, yielding a large revenue. 

TOUP, JONATHAN [Joannes Tounus] (17X3-X785), English 
classical schoUr and critic, was bom at St Ives in Cornwall, 
and was educated at a private school and Exeter College, 
Oxford. Having taken orders, he became rector of St Martin's 
Exeter, where he died on the X9th of January 1785. Toup 
established his reputation by his Emendationes. in Suidam 
(X760-X766, followed 'm 1775 by a supplement) and his edition 
of Longinus (X778), including notes and emendations by 
Ruhnken. The excellence of Toup's scholarship was " known 
to the learned throughout Europe " (so epitaph on the Ublet 
in the church of East Looe set up by the ddegates of the 
Clarendon Press), but his overbearing maimer and extreme 
g^jlf-gonfirf^nr^ marie b»TH many encmies. 



TOURAOOn, the name, evidently already in use, under 
which in 1743 G. Edwards figuxed a pretty African bird/ and 
presumably that applied to it in Guinea, whence it ha<l been 
brought alive. It is the Cuculus persa of Linnaeus, and Turacus 

(After Schlcfd.) 

^Iiite-Crested Touracou (Turacus albicristatus). 
or Corytkaix persa of later authors. Cuvier in 1799 or x8oo 
Latinized its native name (adopted in the meanwhile by both 
French and German writers) as above, for which barbarous 
term J. K. W. Tlliger, in 181 1, substituted a more classical 
word. In 1788 Isert described and figured {BeohackL CcseUsck. 
naSurf, Freunde, iii. x6-20, pL x) a bird, also from Guinea, 
which he called Musopkaga violacea. Its affinity to the original 
Touracou was soon recognized, and both forms have been 
joined by modem systematists in the family Musophagidae, 
commonly Englished Plantain-eaters or Totiracous. 

To take first the Plantain-eaters proper, or the genus Musopkata, 
of which only two species are known. One, about the uxe of a 
crow, is comparatively common in mtueums, and has the homy 
base of its )reIlow bill prolonged backwards over the forehead in 
a kind of shield. The top 01 the head and the primaries, except 
their outer edge and tip, are deep crimson; a white streak extends 
behind the eye; and the rest of the plumaee is glossy purple. The 
second species, M. rossae, which is rare, chiefly differs by wanting 
the white eye-streak. Then of the Touraoous— the speaes origin- 
ally described is about the size of a jay. and has the head, crest 
(which is vertically compressed and tipped with red), neck and breast 
of grass-green, varied by two white streaks— one, from the gape 
to tne upper part of the crimson orbit, separated by a black patch 
from the other, which runs beneath and behind the eye. The 
wing-coverts, lower part of the back, and tail are of steel-purple, 
the primaries deep crimson, edged and tipped with bluish black. 
Over a dozen other congeneric species, more or less resembling 
this, have been described, and all inhabit some district of Africa. 
One, found in the Cape Colony and Natal, where it is known as 
the " Lory " (cf. xv. 7, note 1), though figured by I^iubenton and 
others, was first differentiated in 1841 by Strickland (Ann. Nat. 
History, vii. 33) as Turacus albicristatus — its crest having a con- 
spicuous white border, while the steel-purple of T. persa is replaced 
by a rich and glossy bluish green of no less beauty. In nearly all 
the species of this genus the nostrils are almost completely hidden 
by the frontal feathers; but there are two others in which, though 
closely allied, this is not the case, and some systematists would 
place them in a separate senus Gallirex; while another species, 
the giant of the family, has been moved into a third genus as Cory- 
tkaeola cristata. This differs from any of the foregoing by the 
absence of the crimson coloration of tne primaries, and seems to 
lead to another group, Sekizorrkis, in which the plumage is of a 
still plainer type, and, moreover, the nostrils here are not only 
exposed but in the form of a slit, instead of being oval as in all the 

^ Apparently the first ornithologist to make the bird known was 
Albin, who fisured it in 17a8 from the life, yet badly, as " The 
Crown-bird of Mexico." He had doubtless been misinformed as 
to its proper country; but Touraoous were called " Crown-birds " 
by the Europeans in West Africa, as witness Bosnian's Description 
of the Coast of Guinea (and cd., 1721), p. 251, and W. Smith's Voyat/e 
to Guinea (1745). p. I49> though the name was also given to the 
Clowned cranes, "' 

rest. This genus contains about half -a-doaen spedes, one of wUdi, 
S. concolor, is the Grey Touracou of the cok>nisU in Natal, and is 
of an almost uniform slaty brown. A good deal has been written 
about these birds, which form the subject of a beautiful monograph 
— De Teerako's afgebeld en besckreven — by Schlegel and Westerman, 
brought out at Amsterdam in i860; while further information is 
contained in an elaborate essay by Schalow (Joum. f. omitkologie, 
l886j pp. 1-77). Still, much remains to be made known as to their 
distribution Uiroughout Africa and their habits. They seem to 
be all fruit-eaters, and to frequent the highest trees, seldom comis^ 
to the ground. Very little can be confidently asserted as to their 
nidification, but at least one species of Sckiaorrkis is said to make 
a rough nest and therein lay three eegs of a pale blue colour. Aa 
extraordinary peculiarity attends the crimson coloration which 
adorns the primaries of so many of the Musophagidae. So loog 
ago as 1818, Jules Verreaux observed (Proc.ZooL Society, 187 1. 
p. 40) that in the case of T. albicristatus this beautiful hue vanishes 
on exposure to heavy rain and reappears only after some interval 
of time and when the feathen are dry.' 

The Musophaffidae form a distinct family, of which the Cuculid^e 
are the nearest allies, the two being associated to form the Cuculine 
as compared with the Psittadne diviaon of Cuculiform birda 
(see Bird and Parrot). T. C. Eyton pointed out (Ann. NaL 
History, 3rd series, voL ii. jp. 458) a feature possessed m common by 
the latter and the Musophagidae, in the " process attached to the 
anterior edge of the ischium," whk:h he hkened to the so-called 
" marsupial " bones of Diddphian mammals. J. T. Reinhardt 
has also noticed (Vidensk. meddds. naturkist. forening, 1871, 
pp. 326-341) another Cuculine character offered by the os uncina- 
turn affixed to the loWer side of the ethmoid in the Plantain-eaters 
and Touraoous; but too mudi dependence must nut be placed on 
that, since a similar structure b presented by the frigate-oiid (f-s.) 
and the petrels (q.v.). A corresponding process seems also to be 
found in Trogon (q v.). The bill of neariy all the species of M uso- 
phagidae is curiously serrated or denticulated along the margin 
and the feet have the outer toe reversible, but umally directed 
backwards. No member of the family is found outside of the 
continental portbn of the Ethiopian region. (A. N.) 

TOURAINE, an old province in France, which stretched 
along both banks of the Loire in the neighbourhood of Tours, 
the river dividing it into Upper and Lower Touraine. It 
was bounded on the N. by Orl^anais, W. by Anjou and 
Maine, S. by Poitou and E. by Berry, and it corresponded 
approximatdy to the modem department of Indre et Loire. 
Touraine took its name from the "Turones, the tribe by which it 
was inhabited at the time of Caesar's conquest of GauL They 
were unwarlike, and offered practically no resistance to the 
invader, though they joined in the revolt of Verdngetorix 
in A.D. 52. The capital dty, Caesarodunum, which was built 
on the site of the eastern part of the present dty of Tours, 
was made by Valentinian the metropolis of the 3rd Lyon- 
naise, which induded roughly the later provinces of Touraine, 
Brittany, Maine and Anjou. Christianity seems to have been 
introduced into Touraine not much earlier than the beginning 
of the 4th century, although tradition assigns St Gatien, the 
first bishop of Tours, to the 3rd. The most famous of its 
apostles was St Martin (fi. 375-400), who founded the 
abbey of Marmoutier, near Tours, and whose tomb in the 
city became a cdebrated shrine. 'Tours was besieged by the 
Visigoths in 428, and though it offered a successful resistance 
on this occasion it was induded fifty years later in the territory 
of the Visigoths. The Tourangeans refused to adopt the 
Arian heresy of thdr conquerors, and this difference in religion 
materially assisted in 507 the conquest of the province by 
Clovis, whose orthodoxy was guaranteed by the miractilous 
intervention of St Martin. St Clotilda, wife of Ck>vis, spent 
the last years of her life in retreat at Tours. The posses^n 
of Touraine was constantly the subject of dispute between 
the Merovingian princes, and the province enjoyed no settled 
peace until the reign of Charlemagne. He established Alcuin 
as abbot of St Martin of Tours, and under his auspices the 
school of Tours became one of the chief aeata of kaming in 

' The fact of this colouring matter bdng soluble in water was 
incidentally mentioned at a meeting of the Zoologicai Sodety oi 
London by W. B. Tegetmeier, and brought to the notice of Professor 
A. H. Church, who, after experiment, published in t868 (Student 
and Intellectual Observer, i. 161-168) an account of it as " Tursdn. 
a new animal pigment containing copper." Further information 
on the subject was given by Monteiro (Ckem. News, locviii. 201 ; 
Quart. Joum. Science, 2nd series, vol. iv. p. i^). The proper t y b 
possessed by the crimson feathers of all the tnrds of the family. 



tlie middle ages. In the 9th century Tours also became the 
ecdesiasticai metropolis of Brittany, Maine and Anjou, and 
when the empire was divided by Louis the Pious into various 
districts or nUssalka, Tours was the centre of one of these, 
the boundaries of which corresponded roughly with those of 
the ecclesiastical jurisdiction of the city. Touraine suffered 
from the invasions of the Northmen, who massacred the 
monks of Marmoutier in 853, but never pillaged Tours. The 
administration of Touraine was entrusted, from Merovingian 
times onward, to counts appointed by the crown. The office 
became hereditary in 940 or 941 with Thibault the Old or the 
*' Txicheur." His son Odo I. was attacked by Fulk the Black, 
count of Anjou, and despoiled of part of his territor>*. His 
grandson Thibault HI., who refused homage to Henry I., 
king of France, in X044, was entirely dispossessed by Geoffrey 
of Anjou, called the Hammer (d. 1060). The 7th count, 
Fulk (d. X109), ruled both Anjou and Touraine, and the county 
of Touraine remained under the domination of the counts of 
Anjou (q.9.) until Henry U. of England deprived his brother 
Geoffrey of Touraine by force of arms. Henry U. carried out 
many improvements, but peace was dcstroy«i by the revolt 
of his sons. Richard Coeur de Lion, in league with Philip 
Augustus, had seized Totiraine, and after his death Arthur of 
Brittany was recognized as count. In 1204 it was united to 
the French crown, and its cession was formally acknowledged 
by King John at Chinon in 1214. Philip appointed Guillaume 
dcs Roidies herediury seneschal in 1204, but the dignity, was 
ceded to the crown in 131 2. Touraine was granted Iroin time 
to time to princes of the blood as an appanage of the crown of 
France. In 1328 it was held by Jeanne of Burgundy, queen 
of France; by PhiUp, duke of Orleans, in 1344; and in 1360, 
it was made a peerage duchy on behalf of Philip the Bold, 
afterwards duke of Burgundy. It was the scene of dispute 
between Charles, afterwards Charles VII., and his mother, 
Isabel of Bavaria, who was helped by the Burgundians. After 
his expulsion from Paris by the English Charles spent much 
of his time in the ch&teaux of Touraine, although his seat of 
f oremment was at Bourges. He bestowed the duchy successively 
on his wife Mary of Anjou, on Archibald Douglas and on Louis 
III. of Anjou. It was the dower of Mary Stuart as the widow of 
Frands II. The last duke of Touraine was Francis, duke of 
AJcncon, who died in 1584. Pleasis-les-Tours had been the 
favourite residence of Louis XI., who granted many privileges 
to the town of Tours, and increased its prosperity by the 
establishnient of the silk-weaving industry. The reformed 
religion numbered many adherents in Touraine, who suffered 
in the massacres following on the conspiracy of Amboise; 
and, though in 1 562 the army of Cond£ pillaged the dty of Tours, 
the marshal of St Andr( reconquer^ Touraine for the Catholic 
party. Many Huguenots emigrated after the massacre of 
St Bartholomew, and after the revocation of the Edict of Nantes 
the silk industry, which had been mainly in the hands of the 
Huguenots, was almost destroyed. This migration was one 
of the prime causes of the extreme poverty of the province 
in the next century. At the Revolution the nobles of 
Touraine madfr a declaration expressing their sympathy 
with the ideas of liberty and fraternity. Among the many 
famous men who were bom within its boundaries are Jean 
le Meingre Boudcaut, marshal of France, B^roaldc de Verville, 
author of the Moyen de paroenir, Rabelais, Cardinal Richelieu, 
C.J. Avisseau, the potter (1796-1S61), the novelist Balzac 
and the poet Alfred de Vigny. 

See the quarterly publication of the Mhnoires of the SociHi 
crckialofiqut de Touraine (18^2, &c.) which include a Dictumnaire 
i*ofrcpkiqtie, kisiorique el biographique {b vols.. 1878-1884), by 
J. A. Cam de Busserolle. There are histories of Touraine and its 
numumentt by Chalmel U vols. Paris, 1828), by S. Bcllanecr 
(Paris. 184s). by Boarrass6 (1858). See also Dupin de Saint Andrt. 
liist. du praiestanHsme en Touraine (Paris, 1885); T. A. Cook, 
Cid Towavu (a vols. London, 1892}. 

TOUBOOIMO, a manufacturing tihm of northern France 
in the department of Nord. less than a mile from the Belgian 
frontier, and 8 m« N.N.E. of Lille on the railway to 

Ghent. Pop. (1906), 62,694 (commune, 81,671), of whom 
about one-third are natives of Belgium. Tourcoing is prac- 
tically one with Roubaix to the south, being united thereto by 
a tramway and a branch of the Canal de Roubaix. The public 
institutions comprise a tribunal of commerce, a board of trade 
arbitrators, a chamber of commerce, an exchange and a condi- 
tioning house for textiles. Together with Roubaix, Tourcoing 
ranks as one of the chief textile centres of France. Its chief 
industry is the combing, ginning and twisting of wool 
carried on in some eighty factories employing between 
xo,ooo and 12,000 workpeople. The spinning and twisting 
of cotton is also important. The weaving establishments 
produce woollen and mixed woollen and cotton fabrics together 
with silk and satin drapery, swanskins, jerseys and other fancy 
goods. The making of velvet pile carpets and upholstering 
materials is a spedality of the town. To these industries 
must be added those of dydng, the manufacture of hosiery, 
of the machinery and other apparatus used in the textile factories 
and of soap. 

Famed since the 12th century for its woollen manufactures, 
Tourcoing was fortified by the Flemings in 1477, when Louis XI. 
of France disputed the inheritance of Charles the Bold 
with Mary of Burgundy, but in the same year was taken and 
pillaged by the French. In 1794 the Republican army, under 
Generals Moreau and Souham, gained a decisive victory over 
the Austrians, the event being conunemorated by a monument 
in the public garden. The inhabitants, 18,000 in 1789, were 
reduced by the French Revolution to 10,000. 

TOURMAUNB, a mineral of much interest to the physicist 
on account of its optical and dectrical properties; it is 
also of some geological importance as a rock-constituent 
(see Schorl), whilst certain transparent varieties have economic 
value as gem-stones. The name is probably a corruption 
of turmali, or toramaUif the native name applied to tourmaline 
and zircon in Ceylon, whence specimens of the former mineral 
were brought to Europe by the Dutch in 1703. The green 
tourmaline of Brazil had, however, been known here much 
earlier; and coarse varieties of the mineral had passed for cen- 
turies under the (}erman name of SckOrl^ an old mining word 
of uncertain origin, possibly connected with the old (jerman 
Sckor (refuse), in allusion to the occurrence of the mineral with 
the waste of the tin-mines. The German village of Schorlau 
may have taken its name from the mineral It has been 
suggested that the Swedish form HOrl has possible connexion 
with the word skGr^ brittle. 

Tourmaline crystallizes in the rhombohedral division of the 
hex^onal system. The crystals have generally a prismatic habit, the 
prisms bdng longitudinally striated or even channelled. Trigonal 
prisms aie characteristic, so that a transverse section becomes 
triangular or often nine-sided. By combination of several prisms 
the crystals may become sub-cylindrical. The crystals when aoubly 
terminated are often hemimorphic or present dissimilar forms at 
the opposite ends; thus the hexagonal ~ 

prisms m fig. i are terminated at one end 
by rhombohedral faces, 0, P, and at the 
other by the basal olane k'. Doubly- 
terminated crystate, however, are com- 
paratively rare; the crystals bein^ usually 
attached at one end to the matnx. It is 
notable that prismatic crystals of tour- 
maline have in some cases been curved 
and fractured transversely; the displaced 
fragments having been cemented together 
by deposition of fresh mineral matter. Tourmaline is not infre- 

fiuently columnar, acicular or fibrous; and the fibres may radiate 
rom a centre so as to form the so-called " tourmaline suns." 
Crystals of tourmaline present no distinct cleavage, but break with 
a sub-conchoidal fracture; and whilst the general lustre of the 
mineral is vitreous, that of the fractured surface is rather pitchy. 
The hardness is slightly above that of quartz (7). The specinc 
gravity varies according to chemical composition, that of the 
colourless varieties being about 3, whilst in schorl it may rise to 3-2. 
Tourmaline has a great range of colour, and in many cases the 
crystals are curiously parti-coloured. Occasionally, though rarely, 
the mineral is colourless, and is then known as achroite, a name 
proposed by R. Hermann in 1845, and derived from the Greek 
Axpooc (uncolourKl). Red tourmaline, which when of fine colour 
is the most valued of all varieties, is known as rubelUte (9.9.). Green 
tounnaline is by no means uncommon, but the blue la rather rare 



and is distinguiahed by the name indigolite, eeneiaUy written indi- 
ooUte. Brown is a common colour, and black still 

this betna the usual colour of schorl, or common coarse tourmaline. 
Thin spunters of schori may, however, be blue or brown by 
transmitted light. 

The doable refraction of tourmaline b strong. The mineral is 
optically negative, the ordinary index being about 1*64, and the 
extraorainary i*63. Coloured tourmalines are intensely pleochroic, 
the ordinary ray, which vibrates perpendicular to the principal axis, 
being much more strongly absorbed than the extraordinary; hence 
a slice cut in the direction of the principal or optic axis trans- 
mits sensibly only the extraordinary ray, .and may consequently be 
used as a polarizing medium. The brown tourmaline of Ceylon and 
Brazil is best adapted for this purpose, but the green is also used. 
Two plates properly mounted form the instrument used by opticians 
for testing spectacle-lenses, and are known as the " tourmahne tongs.^' 
In order to secure the best colour-effect when used as a gem-stone, 
the tourmaline should be cut with the table parallel to the optic 

It was in tourmaline that the phenomenon of pyroelectricity was 
first observed. On being heated in peat ashes its attractive power 
was observed by the Dutch, in the early part of the i8th century: 
and this curious character obtained for it the name of asdUrekker, 
or ash-drawer. J. R. Hafly first pointed out the relation of pyroelec- 
tricity with hemimorphtsm. Tourmaline is also piezoelectric, that 
is, it becomes electric by pressure. If a crystal be subjected to 
pressure akng the optic axis, it behaves as though it were contracting 
by reduction of temperature. The mineral may also be rendered 
eMctric by friction, and retains the charge for a long time. 

Tourmaline is a boro-siiicate of sin^Tariy complex composition. 
Indeed the word tourmaline is sometimes regarded as the name of 
a group of isomorphous minerals rather than that of a definite 
species. Numerous analyses have been made, and the results 
oiscussed by a lajve number of authorities. In the view of S. L. 
Penficld Aftd H. W. Foote all tourmaline may be derived from a 
boro-silicic acid of the formula H«BiSi40n- It is believed that 
the hydrogen is present as hydroxyl| and that this may be partially 
rnplaced by fluorine. The tourmahne acid has probably the con- 
•tttution Hia(B'OH)iSi^i*< Nine atoms of hydro^n are replaced 
by three of aluminium, and the remaining nine in part by other 
metab. Lithium b present in red tourmaline; magnesium dominates 
in brown; iron, manganese and sometimes chromium are found 
in green; and much iron occun in the black varieties. Four groups 
are sometimes recognized, characterized by the presence of (i) 
lithium, (^) ferrous iron, (3) ferric iron and (4) magnesium. 

Tourmaline occun commonly in granite, greisen, gneiss and 
crystalline schists. In many cases it appears to have been formed 
by pneumatolysb, or the action on the rocks of heated vapours 
containing boron and fluorine, as In many tin-bearing districts, 
where tourmaline b a characteristic mineral. Near the margin 
of a mass of granite the rock often becomes schorlaceous or tourma- 
liniferous, and may pus into " tourmaline-rock," which b usually 
an aggregate of tourmaline and quartz. Tourmaline b an essential 
consutuent of the west of England rocks called luxullianite (luxuly- 
anite) and trowlesworthite. It occun embedded in certain mcta- 
roorpluc limestones, where it b possibly due to fumarolic action. 
Microscopic crystals are common in clay-slate. By resistance to 
decompoMtlon, tourmaline often survives the disintegration of the 
matrix, and thus passes into 'sands, days, marls and other 
sedimentary deposits. 

Many of the finest crystaU of tourmaline occur m druses m 
granitic rocln, such as those of San Piero in Elba, where some of 
the pale pink and green prisms are tipped with black, and have 
consequently been called *^ nigger-heads." Lepidolite b a common 
assodate ot tourmaline, as at Roaena in Moravb. Tourmaline 
occun, with corundum, in the dok>mite ct Campolongo, in canton 
Ticino, Switzerland. Fine black ciysUb, associated with apatite 
and quartz, were formeriy found in granite at Chudleigh, near 
Bovey Tracey in Devonshire. The Russian localities for tourmaline 
are mentioned under Rubbllxtb. Most of the tourmaline cut for 
jewelry comes from the eem-gravels of Ceylon. The green tour- 
maline has generally a yellowish or olive-green colour, and b known 
as " Ceylon chrysolite.^' Fine green crysuls are found in Brazil, 
notably in the topaz-locality of Miiias Novas; and when of vivid 
colour they have been called " Brazilbn emeralds.'* Green tour- 
maline b a favourite ecclesbstical stone in South America Blue 
tourmaline occun with the green; thb variety b found also at Utd 
in Sweden (iu original loctuity) and notably near Hazaribagh in 
Bengal. Certain kinds of mica occasionally contain flat crystals 
of tourmaline between the cleavage-planes. 

Many kicalities in the United ^tes are famous for tourmaline. 
Ma^niftcent specimens have been obuincd from Mt Mica, near 
Pans, Maine, where the mineral was accidentally discovered in 1820 
by two students, E. L. Hamlin and E. Holmes. It occun in granite, 
with lepidolite, smoky quartz, spodumenc, &c.; and some of the 
prismatic crystab are notable for being red at one end and 
green at the other. Mt Rubrllite at Hebron, and Mt Apatite at 
Auburn, are other kicalities in Maine which hax'e yielded fine tour- 
maline. At Chesterfield, Massachusetts, remarkable crystals occur, 
•one of which show on transverse section a triangubr nucleus of 

red tourmaline surrounded fay a diell of green. Red and green 
tourmalines, with lepidolite and kunzite, are found in San Diego 
county, Califomb. Fine coloured tourmalines occur at Haddam 
Neck, Connecticut; and excellent crystab of black tourmaline are 
well known from Pierrepont, New York, whilst remarkable brown 
crystals occur in limestone at Gouvemeur in the same state. Canada 
b rich in tourmaline, notably at Burgess in Lanark county, Ontario, 
and at Grand Calumet Island in the Otuwa river. Heemskirk 
Mountain, Tasmanb, and Kangaroo Island, South Australb, ha\-e 
yielded fine coloured tourmalme fit for jewelry. Madagascar b 
a well-known locality for bbck tourmaline in brge crystals. 

Many varieties of tourmaline have received distinctive nanMS. 
some of which are notked above. Dravite b G. Tschermak's name 
for a brown tourmaline, rich in magnesb but with little iron, occur- 
ring near Unter Drauburg in the Dra ve district in Carinthb. Taltalite 
was a name given by I. Domeyko to a mixture of tourmaline and 
copper ore from Taftal in Chile. The colourless Elba tourmaline 
was called apyrite by T. F. L. Hausmann, in allusion to its rdf rectory 
behaviour before the blow-pipe; whilst a bbck iron-tourmaline from 
Norway was termed aphrazite by J. B. d'Andrada, in conseouenoe 
of iu intumescence when heated. (F. W. K. *) 

TOURNAI (Flemish Doomik), a dty of Belgium, in the 
province of Hainaut, situated on the Scheldt. Pop. (1904), 
36,744. Although in the course of its long hi&tory it has 
undergone many sieges and was sacked at various epochs by 
the Vandab, Normans, French and Spaniards, it preserves 
many monuments of its andent days. Among these is the 
cathedral of Notre-Dame, one of the finest and best preserved 
Romanesque and Gothic examples in Belgium (for plan, &c., 
see Axchitzctuxe: Romanesque and Gothic in Belgium). Its 
foundation dates from the year 1030, while the nave b Roman- 
esque of the middle of the 12th century, with much pointed 
work. The transept was added in the X3th century. The first 
choir was burned down in 12x3, but was rebuilt in 1243 at 
the same time as the transept, and b a superb ^lecimen 
of pointed Gothic. There are five towers with ^irea, which 
give the outside an impressive appearance, and much has been 
done towards removing the squalid buildings that formerly con- 
cealed the cathedral. There are several old pictures of merit, 
and the shrine of St Eleuthdre, the first bishop of Toumai 
in the 6th century, b a remarkable product of the silversmith's 
art. The belfry on the Grand Place was built in 1x87, 
partly reconstructed in 139X and finally restored and endowed 
with a steeple in X852. The best view of the cathedral can 
be obtained from its gallery. The church of St (^entin in 
the same square as the belfry is almost a» andent as Notre- 
Dame, and the people of Toumai call it the " little cathedral." 
In the church of St Brice b the tomb of Childeric discovered 
in 1655. Among the relics were three hundred small golden 
modeb of bees. These were removed to Paris, and when 
Napoleon was crowned emperor a century and a half later he 
chose Childeric's bees for the decoration of hb coronation 
mantle. In thb manner the bee became associated with the 
Napoleonic legend just as the lilies were with the Bourbons. 
The Pont des Trous over the Scheldt, with towers at each end, 
was built in 1290, and among many other interesting buildings 
there are some old houses still in occupation which date 
back to the 13th century. On the Grand PUce is the 
fine statue of Christine de Lalaing, princess d'Epinoy, who 
defended Toumai against Parma in X581. Toumai carries 
on a Urge trade in carpets (called Bmsseb), bonnet shapes, 
corsets and fancy goods generally. With re^^ird to the carpet 
manufactory, it b said locally to date from the time of the 
Crusades, and it b presumed that the Crusaders leant the 
art from the Saracens. 

The history of Toumai dates faom the time of Julius Caesar, 
when it was called cmtas Nerviorum or castrum Turnacum. In the 
reign of Augustus, Agrippa fixed the newly mixed colony of Suevi 
and Mens^ii at Toumai, which continued throughout the period 
of Roman occupation to be of importance. In the sth century 
the Franks seized Toumai, and Merovaeus made it the capital 
of his dynasty. Thb it remained until the subdivision of the 
Frank monarchy among the sons of Clovb. When feudal 
possessions, instead of being purely personal, were vested in the 
families of the holder after Che death of Charlemagne, Toumai 
was spedally assigned to Baldwin of the Iron Arm by Cbarict 


Plate I, 

Plate II. 


Knights Jousting with Cronells on their Lances. French MS. early XIV Centur>'. (Royal MS. 14 E. iii.) 

English Knights Riding into the Lists. From the Great Tournament Roll of 1511; 
by permissipn of the College of Arms. 



the Bald, whose daughter Judith he had abducted, on receiving 
the hereditary title of count of Flanders. During the Bur- 
gundlan period it was the residence of Margaret of York, widow 
of ChazJes the Bold; and the pretender Perkin Warbeck, whom 
she championed, if not bom there, was the reputed son of a 
Jew of ToumaL In the early x6th centuiy Toumai was. an 
English possession for a few years and Henzy VIII. sold it to 
Francis L It did not long remain French, for in xsax the 
count of Nassau, Charles V.'s general, took it and added it to 
the Spanish provinces. During the whole of the middle ages 
Touznat was styled the " seigneurxe de Toumaisis," and pos- 
sessed a charter and spedsl privileges of iu own. Near Toumai 
was fought, oa the xxth of May 1745, the famous battle 
of Fontenoy. (D. C. B.) 

TOUBMAlIBirr, or Toukney (Fr. toumemetUt tourtun, Med. 
Lat. tameawunium, from tounurj to tum), the name popularly 
given in the middle ages to a species of mock fi^t, so called 
owing to the rapid turning of the horses (Skeat). Of the several 
medieval definitions of the tounuunent given by Du Cange 
iCUssarium, s.v. " Toumeamentum ")> the best is that of Roger 
of Hoveden, who described tournaments as " military exercises 
carried out.iiot in the spirit of hostility {nnllo intenenienU 
€dio), but solely for practice and the display of pzowess {pro solo 
exercUio, atque ostenUUione virinm)." Men who carry weapons 
have in all ages played at the game of war in time of peace. 
But the tournament, properly so caUed, does not appear in 
Europe before the xxth century, in spite of those elaborate 
fictions of Ruezner's Thnmierbuck which detail the tournament 
laws of Henry the Fowler. More than one chronicler records 
the violent death, in xo66, of a French baron named Geoffroi de 
PreuUi, who, according to the testimony of hb contemporaries, 
"invented toumaments." In England, at least, the tourna- 
ment was counted a French fashion, Matthew Paris calling it 
coHfiicims gaUicus, 

By the xath century the tournament had grown so popular 
in gnglanH that Henry H. found it necessary to forbid the 
sport which gathered in one place so many barons and knights 
in arms. In that age we have the famous description by William 
FitxStephen oi the martial games of the Londoners in Smith- 
field. He tdb how on Sundays in Lent a noble train of young 
men would take the field well mounted, rushing out of the dty 
with spear and shield to ape the feats of war. Divided into parties, 
one body would retreat, while another pursued striving to un- 
horse thiem. The younger lads, he says, bore javelins disarmed 
oi their steel, by which we may know that the weapon of the 
elders was the headed lance. William of Newbury tells us how 
the young knights, balked of their favourite sport by the royal 
mandate; would pass over sea to win glory in foreign lists. 
Richard I. relaxed his father's order, granting licences for 
tournaments, and Jocelin of Brakelond has a long story of the< 
great company of cavaliers who held a tournament between 
Thetford and Bury St Edmunds in defiance of the abbot. From 
that tiixie onward unlicensed tourneying was treated as an 
offence against the Crown, which exacted heavy fees from all 
taking part in them even when a licence had been obtained. 
Often the licence was withheld, as in X355, when the king's son's 
grave peril in Gascony is alleged as a reason for forbidding a 
meeting. In X399 life and limb were declared to be forfeit in 
the case of those who should arrange a toumey without the royal 
licence, and offenders were to be seized with horse and harness. 
As the tournament became an occasion for pageantry and 
feasting, new reason was given for restraint: a simple knight 
might beggar hixnaelf over a sport which risked costly horses 
and carried him far afield. Jousters travelled from land to land, 
like modem cricketers on their tours, offering and accepting 
dialleages. Thus Edward I., before coming to the throne, led 
eighty knights to a tournament on the Continent. Before the 
jousts at Windsor on St George's Day in X344 heralds published 
in France, Scotland, Burgundy, Hainault, Flanders, Brabant 
and the donudna of the emperor the king's offer of safe conduct 
for competitors. At the weddings of princes and magnates and 
$t the oowoing of kings the kn^ts gathered t» the joustings, 

which had become as much a part of such high ceremonies 
as the banquet and the minstrelsy. The fabled glories of the 
Round Table were revived by princely hosts, who would assemble 
a gallant company to keep open house and hold the field against 
all comers, as did Mortimer, the queen's lover, when, on the eve 
of his fall, he brought all the chivalry of the land to the place 
where he held his Round Table. About xaga the " Statute of 
Arms for Toumaments " laid down, " at the request of the earls 
and barons and of the knighthood of England," new laws for 
the game. Swords with points were not to be used, nor pointed 
daggers, nor dub nor mace. None was to raise up a fallen 
knight but his own appointed squires, clad in his device. The 
squire who offended was to lose horse and .arms and lie three 
years in gapL A northem football crowd would understand 
the rule that forbade those coining to see the tournament to 
wear harness or arm themselves with weapons. Disputes were 
to be settled by a court of honour of princes and earls. That 
such rules were needful had been shown at Rochester in 1251, 
where the foreign knights were beaten by the English and so 
roughly handled that they fled to the dty for refuge. On their 
way the strangers were faced by another company of knights 
who handled them rou^y and spoiled them, thrashing them 
with staves in revenge for the doings at a Brackley tournament. 
Even as early as the 13th century some of these tounuunents 
were mere pageants of horseman. For the Jousts of Peace held 
at Windsor Park in 1278 the sword-blades are of whalebone and 
parchment, silvered; the helms are of boOed leather and the 
shidds of light timber. But the game could make rough sport. 
Many a tounuunent had its tale of killed and wounded in the 
chronide books. We read how Roger of Lembum struck 
Amold de Montigny dead with a lance thmst under the helm. 
The first of the Montagu earls of Salisbury died of hurts taken 
at a Windsor jousting, and in those same lists at Windsor the 
earl's grandson Sir William Montagu was killed by his own 
father. William Longfapee in x 2 56 was so bruised that he never 
recovered his strength, and he is among many of whom the like 
is written. Blunted or "rebated" lance-points came early 
into use, and by the X4th century the corox^ or cronell head 
was often fitted in place of the point. After X400 the armourers 
began to devise harness with defences specially wrought for ser- 
vice in the lists. But the joust lost its chief perik with the 
invention of the tilt, which, as its name imports, was at first a 
doth stretched along the length of the lists. The doth became 
a stout barrier of timber, and in the early x6th century the 
knight ran his course at little risk. Locked up in sted harness, 
reiiiforced with the grand-guard and the other jousting pieces, 
he charged along one side of this barrier, seeing little more through 
the pierced si^t-holes of the helm than the head and shoulders 
of his adversary. His bridle arm was on the tilt-side, and thus 
the blunted lance stmck at an angle upon the poUshed plates. 
Mishaps might bef aO. Henry H. of France died from the stroke 
of Gabrid de Montgomeri, whd failed to cast up in time the 
truncheon of his splintered lance. But the x6th-centuzy tourna- 
ment was, in the main, a bloodless meeting. 

The 15th century had seen the mingling of the tournament 
and the pageant. Adventurous k&ights would travd far afield 
in time of peace to gain worship in conflicts that perilled life 
and limb, as when the Bastard of Buigundy met the Lord Scales 
in 14M in West Smithfidd under the fair and costly galleries 
crowded with English dames. On the first day the two ran 
courses with sharp spears; on the second day Uiey tourneyed 
on horseback, sword in hand; on the third day they met on foot 
with heavy pole-axes. But the great tournament hdd in the 
market-place of Bruges, when the jousting of the Knights of the 
Fleece was part of the pageant of the Golden Tree, the Giant 
and the Dwarf, may stand as a magnificent example of many 
such gay gatherings. When Henry VIU. was scattering his 
father's treasure the pageant had become an elaborate masque. 
For two days after the crowning of the king at Westminster, 
Henry and his queen viewed from the galleries of a fantastic 
palace set up beside the tilt-yard a play in which deer were pulled 
down by greyhounds in a paled park, in which the Lady Plana 



and the Lady Pallas came forward, embowered ia moving castles, 
to present the champions. Such costly shows £ell out of fashion 
after the death of Henry VIII.; and in EngUnd the tournament 
remained, until the end, a martial sport. Sir Henry Lee rode 
as Queen Elizabeth's champion in the tilt-yard of Whitehall 
until his years forced him to surrender the gallant office to that 
earl of Cumberland who wore the Queen's glove pinned to the 
flap of his hat. But in France the tournament lingered on until 
it degenerated to the carrousel, which, originally a horseman's 
game in which cavaliers pelted each other with balls, became an 
unmartial display when the French king and his courtiers 
prancsd in such array as the wardrobe-master of the court 
ballets would devise for the lords of Ind and Africk. 
, The tournament was, from the first, held to be a sport for men 
of noble birth, and on the Continent, where nobility was more 
exactly defined than in England, the lists were jealously closed 
to all combatants but those of the privileged class. In the 
German lands, questions as to the purity of the strain of a candi- 
date for admission to a noble chapter are often settled by appeal 
to the fact that this or that ancestor had taken part in a tourna- 
ment. Konrad Grilnenberg's famous heraldic manuscript 
shows us the Helmsckau that came before the German tournament 
of the X5th century — ^the squires carrying each his master's 
crested hehn, and a little scutcheon of arms han^ng from it, 
to the hall where the king of arais stands among the ladies and, 
wand in hand, judges eadi blazon. In England several of those 
few rolls of arms which have come down to us from the middle 
ages record the shields displayed at certain tournaments. 
Among the illustrations of the article Heraldry will be 
seen a leaf of a roll of arms of French and English jousters at 
the Field of the Cloth of Gold, and this leaf is remarkable 
as illustrating also the system of " checques " for noting the 
points scored by the champions. (O. Ba.) 

botanist, was bom at Aix, in Provence, on the 5th of June 1656. 
He studied in the convent of the Jesuits at Aiz, and was destined 
for the Church, but the death of his father left him free to 
follow his botanical inclinations. After two years' collecting, 
he studied medicine at Montpellier, but was appointed pro- 
fessor of botany at the Jaidin des Pkntes in 1683. By the king's 
order he travelled through western Europe, where he made 
extensive collections, and subsequently spent three years in 
Greece and Asia Minor (1700-1702). Of this journey a de- 
scription in a series of letters was posthumously publLdied in 
3 vols. (Relation d*un voyage du Levant, Lyons, 1717)* His 
principal work is entitled InstUutiones rei kerbariae (3 vols. 
Paris, X700), and upon this rests chiefly his claims to remem- 
brance as one of the most eminent of the systematic botanists 
who prepared the way for T.innarus. He died on the 28th of 
December 1708. 

TOURNEUR, CYRIL (c. 1575-1626), English dramatist, was 
perhaps the son of Captain Richard Turner, water-bailiff and 
subsequently lieutenant-governor of Brill in the Netherlands. 
Cyril Toumeur also served in the Low Countries, for in 16x3 
there is a record made of payment to him for carrying letters 
to Brussels. He enjoyed a pension from the govenunent 
of the United Provinces, possibly by way of compensation 
for a post held before BriU was handed over to the Dutch 
in x6i6. In 1625 he was appointed by Sir Edward Cecil, whose 
father had been a former governor of Brill, to be secretary 
to the council of war. This appointment was cancelled by 
Buckingham, but Toumeur sailed in Cecil's company to Cadiz. 
On the return voyage from the disastrous expedition he was 
put ashore at Kinsale with other sick men, and died in Ireland 
on the 28th of Febmary X626. (M.Br.) 

An allegorical poem, worthless as art and incomprehensible 
as allegory, is his earliest extant work; an elegy on the death 
of Prince Henry, son of James I., is the latest. The two 
plays on which his fame rests, and on which it will rest for 
ever, were published respectively in 1607 and x6xx, but all 
students have agreed to accept the internal evidence which 
.assures us that the later in date of publication must be the 

earlier in date of composition. His only other known work 
is an epicede on Sir Francis Vere, of no great merit as poetry, 
but of some value as conveying in a strai^tforward and mascu- 
line style the poet's ideal conception of a perfect knight or 
" happy warrior," comparable by those who may think fit to 
compare it with the more nobly realized ideals of Chaucer 
and of Wordsworth. But if Toumeur had left on record no 
more memorable evidence of his powers than might be supplied 
by the survival of his elegies, he coidd certainly have claimed 
no higher place among English writers than is now occupied 
by the Rev. Charles Fit^eoffrey, whose voluminous and fer- 
vent elegy on Sir Francis Drake is indeed of more actual value, 
historic or poetic, than either or than both of Toumeur's elegiac 
rhapsodies. The singular power, the Singular originality and 
the singular limitation of his genius are all equally obvious 
in The Atheist's Tragedy, a dramatic poem no less cmde and 
puerile and violent in action and evolution than simple and noble 
and natural in expression and in style. The executive faculty of 
the author is in the metrical parts of his first play so imperfect 
as to suggest either incompetence or perversity in the workman; 
in The Revenger's Tragedy it is so magnificent, so simple, im- 
peccable and sublime that the finest passages of this play 
can be compared only with the noblest examples of tragic 
dialogue or monologue now extant in English or in Greek. 
There is no trace of imitation or derivation from an alien source 
in the genius of this poet. The first editor of Webster has observed 
how often he imitates Shakespeare; and, in fact, essentially 
and radically independent as is Webster's genius also, the 
sovereign influence of his master may be traced not only in the 
general tone of his style, the general scheme of his composition, 
but now and then in a direct and never an unworthy or imper- 
fect echo of Shakespeare's very phrase and accent. But the 
resemblance between the tragic verse of Toumeur and the 
tragic verse of Shakespeare is simply such as proves the natural 
aflSinity between two great dramatic poets, whose inspiration 
partakes now and then of the quality more proper to epic 
or to lyric poetry. The fiery impulse, the rolling music, the 
vivid illustration of thought by jets of insuppressible passion, 
the perpetual sustenance of passion by the implacable persist- 
ency of thought, which we recognise as the dominant and 
distinctive qualities of such poetry as finds vent in the utter- 
ances of Hamlet or of Timon, we recognise also in the scarcely 
less magnificent poetry, the scarcely less fiery sarcasm, with 
which Toumeur has informed the part of Vindice — ^a harder- 
headed Hamlet, a saner and more practically savage and serious 
Timon. He was a satirist as passionate as Juvenal or Swift, 
but with a finer faith in goodness, a purer hope in its ultimate 
security of triumph. This fervent constancy of spirit relieves 
the lurid gloom and widens the limited range of a tragic imagina- 
tion which otherwise might be felt as oppressive rather than 
inspiriting. His grim and trenchant humour is as peculiar in 
its sardonic passion as his eloquence is original in the strenuous 
music of its cadences, in the roU of its rhythmic thunder. 
As a play?njght, hb method was almost erode and rode in 
the headlong straightforwardness of its energetic simplicity; 
as an artist in character, his interest was intense but narrow, 
his power magnificent but confined; as a dramatic poet, the 
force of his genius is great enough to ensure him an enduring 
place among the foremost of the followers of Shaken)eare. 

BiBLiOGRAPRT.~The complete list of his extant works runs: 
The Atheists Tragedie; or, The Honest Man's Revenu (1611): A 
FuneraU Poeme Upon the Dedth of the Most Worthie and True Soldier, 
Sir Francis Vere, Knight . . . (1600): "A Grief e on the Death 
of Prince Henrie, Expressed in a Broken Elegie . . .,'* printed with 
two other poems by John Webster and Thomas Haywood as Three 
Ekgies on the most lamented Death of Prince Henry (1613); The 
Revengers Tragaedie (1607 and 1608); and an obscure satire. 
The Transformed Metamorphosis (1600). The only other play of 
Toomeur's of which we have any record is The NobUman, the MS. of 
which was destroyed by John Warfourton's cook. This was entered 
on the Stationers* Register (Feb. 15, 1612) as a " Tragecomcdye 
called The Nobleman written by Cyrill Toumeur." In 1613 a letter 
from Robert Daborae to Henslowe states that he has commissioned 
Cyril Toumeur to write one act of the promised Arraignment pf 



"The Chancter of Robert, eaii of Saltsburye, Lord 
HichTiemirerof Eagiand . . . written by MrSevillTumeur . . .," 
in a MS in poaKnion of Lofd Moityn (Hist. MSS. Commliaion, 
4th Report, appendixt p. 361) may reasonably be asngned to 
Toumcor. Altliough no external evidence u torthcoming, Mr R. 
Boyle names Toumeur as the collaborator of Maasinger in Tac SKond 
Maifs Traeedy Gicensed 161 1). 

The Raemt/er't Tragedy was printed in Dodslev's Old Plays (vol iv., 
1744, 1780 and iSasJ. and in AneiiHi British Drama (1810. vol. ii.). 
The best edition of Tourneur's works is The Plays and Poems 0/ 
CyrU Tommev, edited with Critical Introductiom and Notes, by J. 
Churton Collins (1878}. See also the two plays printed with the 
masterpieces of Webster, with an introduction by J A. Symonds, in 
the " Mennaad Series " (1888 and 1903). No partKulars of Toumeur'f 
life were available until the facts given above were abstracted bv 
Mr CofdoB Goodwin from the Calendar of State Papers (" DoroestK: 
Series," 1628-16^9, X639-1631, 16^1-1633) '^ printed in the 
Acadepsy (May 9, 1891}. A critical study of the relation of The 
Atheists TramsdyXo Hamlet and other revenge-plays is given in 
Professor A. H. Thomdike's " Hamlet and Contemporary Revenge 
Plays '* {PtM. of the Mod, Lang. Assoc., Baltimore, I5K»). For the 
influence of Manton on Toumeur see E. E. StoU, John Webster . . . 
(1905. Boston, MassachusetU); pp. 105-X16. (M. Br.) 

T0UBJIBU3E, JBAH MAURICE (1849- ), French man 
of letteis and bibliographer, son of the artist and author J. F £. 
Toonieuz, was bom in Paris on the xath of July 1849. 
He began his career as a bibliographer by coDaborattng in 
new editions of the Supercheries liUiraires of Joseph (^^id 
and the Didionnaire des anonymes of Antoine Barbier. His 
nM»t important bibliographical work was the BiUiograpkie de 
rhisUnrt de Paris pendant la rHolutum franqaise (3 vols. 189a- 
tgoi), which was crowned by the Aoulemy of Inscriptions. 
This valuable work serves as a guide for the histoiy of the 
dty beyond the limits of the Revolution, 

His other works include bibliographies of Prosper Mdrimfe (1876), 
of TMophile Gautier (1876), of the brothers deConcourt (1897) and 
others; also editions of F. M. Cmmm's Correspondance UtUraire, 
of Diderot's Neoen de Rameau (1884), of Montesquieu's Lettres 
persanes (1886). ac. 

TOURNOH, a town of south-western France, capital of an 
arrondtssement in the department of Ard^e, on the right bank 
of the Rhone, 58 m. S. of Lyons by rail. Pop. (1906}, town, 
3643; commune, 5003. Toumon preserves a gateway of the 
15th century and other remams of fortifications and aa old 
castle used as town hall, court-house and prison and con- 
Uinin^ & Gothic chapeL The church of St Julian dates chiefly 
fzom the X4th centuxy. The lycte occupies an old college 
founded in the x6th century by Cardinal Francois de Toumon. 
Of the two suspension bridges which unite the town with Tain 
on the left bank of the river, one was built in 1825 and is the 
oldest in France. A statue to General Rampon (d. 1843) 
stands in the Place CamoL Wood-sawing, silk-spinning, and 
the manufacture of chemical manures, silk goods and hosiery 
are carried on in the town, which has trade in the wine of 
the Rhone hills. Toumon had its own counts as eariy as 
the reign of Louis L In the middle of the xyth centuxy the title 
passed from them to the dukes of Ventadour. 

TOURIfUS, a town of east-central France, in the depart- 
ment <rf SaAne-et-Loire, on the right bank of the Sa6ne, ao m. 
K. by £. of M&con on the Paris-Lyons raflway. Pop. (1906), 
3787. The church of St Philibert (eariy nth century) once 
bebnging to the Benedictine abbey of Toumus, suppressed in 
1785, is in the Butgundian Romanesque style. The facade lacks 
one of the two flanking towers originally designed for it. The 
nave is loofed with barrel vaulting, supported on tall cylin- 
drical cohimiis. The choir beneath which is a crypt of the iith 
century has & dcambulatoxy and square chapels. In the Place 
de THAtel de Ville stands a statue of J. B. Greuze, bom in the 
town in 173$. There are yineyaxds in the surrounding dis- 
ttkt and the town and its port have considerable commerce in 
wine and in stone from the neighbouring quarries. Chair- 
making is an important industxy. 

TCnniS, a town of central France, capital of the department 
of Indre-et-Loire, X4S m- S.W. of Pftris by rail. Pop. (1906), 
town 61,507; commune, 67,601. Toun lies on the left bank of 
the Loire on a flat toiigue of land between that river and the 
Cher a little above thdr junctioo. The right bank of the 

Loire is bordered by hills at the foot of which lie the suburbs 
ot St Cyr and St Symphorien. The river is crossed by two 
suspension bridges, partly built on islands in the river, and by 
a stone bridge of the second half of the i8th century, the Pont 
de Tours. Many foreigners, especially English, live at or visit 
Tours, attracted by the town itself, iU mild climate and situa- 
tion in " the garden of France," and the historic chiteaux in 
the vicinity. The Boulevard B£ranger, with its continuation, 
the Boulevard Heurteloup, traverses Toun from west to east 
dividing it into two parts; the old town to the north, with its 
narrow streets and andcnt houses, contains the principal 
buildings, the shops and the business houses, while the new 
town to the south, centring round a fine public garden, is almost 
entirely residentiaL The Rue Natkmale, the widest and hand- 
somest street m Tours, is a profengation of the Pont de Toun 
and tuns at xight angles to the boulevards, continuing under the 
name of the Avenue de Grammont until it reaches Uie Cher. 

St Gatien, the cathedral of Tours, though haxdiy among the 
greatest churches of France, is neverthdess of considerable 
interest A cathedral of the first half of the lath century was 
bumt in xx66 during the quarrel between Louis VII. of France 
and Henry II. of England. A new cathedral was begun about 
XX 70 but not finished till 1547. The lower portions of the 
west towen belong to the xath centuxy, the choir to the X3th 
century; the transept and east bays of the xiave to the X4th; 
the remaining bays, a doister on the north, and the facade, 
profusdy decorated in the Flamboyant style, to the x 5th and 
x6th centuries, the upper part of the towen being in the 
Renaissance style of the x6th centuxy. In the interior there is 
fine stained glass, that of the choir (x3th centuxy) being espe- 
cially remarkable. The tomb of the children of Charles VIII., 
constracted in the fint yean of the x6th centuxy and attributed 
to the brothen Juste is also of artistic interest 

An example of Romanesque architecture survives in the great 
square tower of the church of St Julien, the rest of whkh is in the 
eariy Ck>thic style of the 13th century, with the exception of two 
apses added in the l6th century. Two towers and a Renaissance 
cloister are the chief remains of the cdebrated basilkra of St Martin 
bunt mainly during the 12th and I3tb centuries and demolished 
in 1803. It stood on the site of an eariier and very famous church 
built from 466 to 473 by bish<>p St Perpetuus and destroyed together 
with many other churches in a fire m qgA. Two other churches 
worthy of mention are Notre-Dame la Riche, originally built in 
the 13th century, rebuilt in the x6th, and magnificently restored 
in the loth century; and St Satumin of the I5tb century. The 
new basfica of St Martin and the church of St Etienne are modem. 
Of the okl houses of Tours the h6tcl Gouin and that wrongly 
known as the house of Tristan THermite (both of the i^th century) 
are the best known. Tours has several learned societies and a 
valuable library, including among its MSS. a gospel of the 8tb century 
on whk:h the km^ of France took oath as honorary canons of the 
church of St Martin. The museum contains a collection of pictures, 
and the museum of the Archae(Jogical Society of Touraine has 
valuable antiquities; there b also a natural history museum. 

* * ' "■ .. * . . '• Renaissance 


-- ^r^ and a 

monument to the three doctors Bretonneau, Trousseau and Vdpeau. 
Tours is the seat of an archbishop, a prefect, and a court of assizes, 
and headquarters of the IX. Army Corps and has tribunals of first 
instance and of commerce, a board of trade arbitration, a chamber 
of commerce and a branch of the Bank of France. Among its 
educational institutions are a preparatory school of medicine and 
pharmacy, Iyc6es for both sexes, a training college for giriaand schools 
of fine art and music. The industrial establishments of the town 
indude silk factories and numerous important printing>works, 
steel works, iron foundries and factories for automobiles, machinery, 
oil, lime and cement, biscuits, portable buildings, stained glass, 
boots and shoes and porcelain. A connderaUe trade is carried on 
in the wine of the district and in brandy and in dried fruits, sausages 
and confectionery, for wnich the town is wdl known. Three-quarten 
of a mile to the south-west of Tours lie unimporUnt remains of 
PIcytts-lcs-Tours, the chateau built bv Louis XI., whither he retired 
before his death in 1483* On the nght bank of the Loire 2 m. 
above the town are the ruins of the ancient and powerful abbey of 
Marmoutier. Five miles to the north-west is the btrge agricultural 
reformatory of Mettray founded in 1839. 

Toun (see Totnunix), under the Gaols the capital of the 
Turones or Toront, originally stood on the right bank of the 
Loire, a little above the present village of St Symphorien. At 



first callfid AUicnoSt the town was afterwards known as Caesaro- 
duttum. The Romans removed the town from the hill where it 
originally stood to the plain on the left bank of the river. 
Behind the present cathedral, remains of the amphitheatre 
(443 ft. in length by 394 in breadth) byOt towards the end of the 
2nd century might formeriy be seen. Tours became Christian 
about 350 through the preaching of Gatien, who founded the 
bishopric The first cathedral was built a hundred years later by 
St Litorius. The bishopric becamean archbishopric when Gralian 
made Tours the capital of Lugdunensis Tertia though the 
bishops did not adopt the title of archbishop till the 9th 
century. About the beginning of the 5th century the ofiidal 
name of Caesarodunum was changed for that of Civitas Turo- 
norum. St Martin, the great apostle of the Gauls, was bishop of 
Tours in. the 4th century, and he was buried in a suburb which 
soon became as important as the town itself from the number of 
pilgrims who flocked to his tomb. Towards the end of the 4th 
century, apprehensive of barbarian invasion, the inhabitants 
pulled down some of their earlier bufldings in order to raise a 
fortified wall, the course of which can still be traced in places. 
Their advanced fort of Larcay stUl overlooks the valley of the 
Cher. Affiliated to the Armorican confederation in 435, the 
town did not fall to the Vbigoths till 473, and the new masters 
were always hated. It became part of the Prankish dominions 
under Clovis, who, in consideration of the help afforded by St 
Martin, presented the church with rich gifts out of the spoils 
taken from Alaric, confirmed and extended its right of sane-, 
tuary, and accepted for himself and his successors the title of 
canon of St Martin. At the end of the 6th century the bishopric 
was held by St Gregory of Touzs. Tours grew rapidly in 
prosperity under the Merovingians, but abuse of the right of 
sanctuary led to great disorder, and the church itself became 
a hotbed of crime. Charlemagne re-established discipline in the 
disorgam'zed monastery and set over it the learned Alcuin, 
who established at Tours one of the oldest public schools of 
Christian philosophy and theology. The arts flourished at 
Tours in the middle ages and the town was the centre of the 
Poitevin Romanesque school of architecture. The abbey was 
made into a collegiate church in the xxth century, and was for a 
time affiliated to Quny, but soon came under the direct rule of 
Rome, and for long had bishops of its own. The suburb in 
which the monastery was situated became as important as Tours 
itself under the name of Martinopolis. The Normans, attracted 
by its riches, pillaged it in 853 and 903. Strong walls were 
erected from 906 to 9x0, and the name was changed to that of 
Ch&teauneuf. Philip Augustus sanctioned the communal 
privileges which the inhabitants forced fxom the canons of 
St Martin and the innumerable offerings of princes, lords and 
pilgrims maintained the prosperity of the town all through the 
middle ages. A X3th-century writer speaks with enthusiasm 
of the wealth and luxury of the inhabitants of Ch&teauneuf, 
of the beauty and chastity of the women and of the rich shrine 
of the samt. In the X4th century Tours was united to Ch&teau- 
neuf within a common wall, of which a round tower, the Tour 
de Guise, remains, and both towns were put under the same 
administration. The numerous and long-continued visits of 
Charles VII., Louis XI., who established the silk-industry, and 
Charles VIII. during the xsth century favoured the commerce 
and industry of the town, then peopled by 75,000 inhabitants. 
In the X5th and x6th centuries the presence of Jean Fouquet 
the painter of Michel Colomb and the brothers Juste the sculp- 
tors, enhanced the fame of the town in the sphere of art. In 
1562 Tours suffered from the violence of both Protestants and 
Catholics, and enjoyed no real security till after the pact entered 
into at Plessis-l^Tours between Henry III. and Henry of 
Navarre in X589. In the x7th and x8th centuries Tours was the 
capital of the government of Tounune. Its manufactures, 
of which silk weaving was the chief, suffered from the revocation 
of the Edict of Nantes (i68s). In 1772 its mint, whence were 
issued the " livres " of Tours (librae Tur&Henses) was suppressed. 
During the Revolution the town formed a base of operatbns of 
the Republicans against the Vendeans. In 1870 it was for a 

time the seat of the delegation of the government of natiooAl 
defence. In X87X it was occupied by the Germans fxom the 
xoth of January to the 8th of March. 

See P. Vitnr, Tours et les ckAUaux de Towaine (Paris, 1905): 
E. Giraudet, Histoire de la viUe de Tours (Tours, 1873); Les Artistes 
louramgeaux (Tours,. 1885). 

tantin), Comte de (1642-X70X), French admiral and marshal 
of France, was the son of Cfsar de Cotentln, or Costantin, who 
held offices in the household of the king and of the prince of 
Cond£. He is said to have been bom at Tourville m Normandy, 
but was baptized in Paris on the 24th of November X643, was 
commonly known as M. de Tourville, and was destined by his 
family to enter the Order of Malta. From the age of fourteen 
to the age of twenty-five, he served with the galleys of the Order. 
At that time the luiights were still fightmg the Barbary pirates 
of Algiers and Tunis. The young Anne-HiLarion is said to have 
been distinguished for courage. His life during these years, 
however, is little known. The supposed Memoirs bearing his 
name were published by the Abb6 de Magron in the x8th century 
and belong to the large dass of historical romances which pro- 
fessed to be biographies or autobiographies. In X667 he was 
back in France, and was incorporate in the corps of officers of 
the French Royal navy which Louis XIV. was then raising from 
the prostration into which it had fallen during his minority. 
The positions of French naval officer and km'ght of Malta were 
not incompatible. Many men held both. Tlie usual practice 
was th^t they did not take the full vows till they were in middle 
life, and had reached the age when they were entitled to hold 
one of the great offices. Until then they were free to marry, 
on condition of renouncing all claim to the chief places. As 
Anne-Hilarion de Cotentin married a wealthy widow, the 
marquise de PopeUni^, in X689 at which time he was made 
count of Tourville, he severed his connexion with the Order. 
Nor does he appear to have served with it at all after his returxi 
to France in X667. He was at first employed in cruising against 
the Barbary pirates and the Turics. In the expedition sent 
against Crete in 1668-^ under command of the Due de Beau- 
fort he had command of the " Croissant " (44). The Due de 
Beaufort was killed, and the expedition was a failure. When 
the war with Holland in which France and England acted as 
allies began in X670, Tourville commanded 'the " Page " (50), 
in the squadron of the comte d'Estr£es (X624-X707) sent to 
co-operate with the duke of York. He was present at the battle 
of Solebay (June 7, X672), and in the action on the cjoast oC 
Holland in the foUowing year, when Prince Rupert commanded 
the English fleet. When England withdrew from the alliance, 
the scene of the naval war was transferred to the Mediterranean, 
where Holland was co-operating with the Spaniards. Tourvillle 
served under Abraham Duquesne in his battles with De Ruyter. 
He particularly distinguished himself at the battle of Palermo 
on the 2nd of June X676. By this time he was known as one of 
the best officers in the service of King Louis XIV. Unlike many 
empk>yed by the king to conmiand his ships in the earlier part 
of his reign, Tourville was a seaman. He had the reputation 
of being able to do all the worix required in a ship, and he had 
made a study of naval warfare. The great treatise on naval 
tactics afterwards published under the name of his secretary, 
the Jesuit Hoste or I'Hoste, was understood to have been 
inspired by him. In 1683 he was chef d'cscadre— rear admiral — 
with Duquesne in operations against the Barbary pirates, and 
he continued on that service with D'Estries. By 1689 he bad 
been promoted lieutenant-g£n£ral des armies navales, and was 
named vice^dmiral du Levant or of the East. In June of 
that year he took up the commandership-in<hief of the French 
naval forces in the war against England and her continental allies 
which had begun in the previous year. From this time till 
the failure of his resources compelled King Louis XIV. to 
withdraw his fleets from the sea, Tourville continued to com- 
mand the naval war in the Channd and the Atlantic. His 
conduct and example during this period were the source of the 
system of manoeuvting to gain an advantage by some method 



otfaer than plain fighting. The personal character of TourvtUe 
must be held to account largely for the timidity of the principles 
he established. Tourville's peisonal valour was of the finest 
quality, but like many other brave men, he was nervous under 
the weight of responsibility. It is no less clear that anxiety 
to avoid risking a disaster to his reputation was of more weight 
with him than the wish to win a signal success. He belonged 
to the type of men in whose minds the evil which may happen is 
always more visible than the good. In 1690 he had an oppor- 
tunity which might well have tempted the most cautious, and 
he missed it out of sheer care to keep his fleet safe against all 
conceivable chances, aided perhaps by a pedantic taste for 
formal, orderly movement. He was opposed in the channel 
by the allies, who had only fifty-six ships^ while his own force, 
though it included some vessels of no serious value, was from 
seventy to eighty sail strong. He was feebly attacked by 
Admiral Arthur Herbert, the newly created earl of Torrington, 
off Beacfay Head on the zoth of July. The Dutch ships in the 
van were surrounded. The allies had to retreat in disorder, 
and Toorville followed in " line of battle " which limitfkl his 
speed to that of his slowest ship. So his enemy escaped with 
comparatively little loss. In the following year he performed 
his famous ** off shore cruise," in the Bay of Biscay. He moved 
to and fro in fine order avoiding being brought to battle, but 
also failing to inflict any harm on his opponent. In the mean- 
time the cause of King James U. was ruinfed in Ireland. In 
1693 the Mediterranean fleet having failed to Join him, he was 
faced by a vastly superior force of the allies. The French 
king had prepared a military force to invade England, and 
Tourville was expected to prepare the way. Having at least 
a clear indication that he was expected to act with vigour, 
if not precise orders to fight against any odds, he made a 
resolute attack on the centre of the allies on the 39th of May off 
Cape Barfleur, and drew off before he was surrounded. This 
action which with the pursuit of the following days made up what 
is called the battle of La Hogue, from the Bay where some of 
the fugitive French ships were destroyed, or Barfleur, proved 
his readiness to face danger. But his inability to take and act 
on a painful decision was no less proved in the retreat. He 
hesitated to sacrifice his crippled flagship, and thereby detained 
his whole fleet. The result was that the "Soleil Royale" 
herself and fifteen other ships were cut off and destroyed at 
La Hogue. In 1693 he was again at sea with a great fleet, and 
had a chance to' inflict extreme injury on the allies by the capture 
of the Smyrna convoy which included their whole Mediterranean 
trade for the year. He did it a great deal of harm outside the 
Straits of Gibraltar, but agam he kept his fleet in battle order, 
and a large part of the convoy escaped. King Louis XIV. 
who had a strong personal regard for him, continued to treat 
him with favour. Tourville was made Marshal of France in 
1693, but the growing exhaustion of the French treasury no 
longer allowed the maintenance of great fleets at sea. Tour- 
ville remained generally at Toulon, and had no more fighting. 
He died in Paris in 1701. His only son, a colonel in the 
army, was killed at Denain in 171 3. 

The English acc<Mjnt of the battles of Beachy Head and La Hogue 
will be found in Ledvard's Naval Historv. Troude's BataUks maales 
4e la Framct gives the French version 01 these and the other actions 
in which Tourville was concerned. Tourville is frequently mentioned 
in the Life tifPugues ne by M . JaL (D. H.) 

DOmiriQUB (c i74^iCiS3), one of the liberators of Haiti, 
daimed to be descended from an African chief, his father, a slave 
in Haiti* being the chief's second son. He was at first sumamed 
Breda, but this was afterwards changed to L'Ouverture in token of 
the r»ults of his vllour in causing a gap in the ranks of the 
enemy. From childhood he manifested unusual abilities 
and succeeded, by making the utmost use of every 
opportunity, in obtaining a remarkably good education. He 
obtained the q^edal confidence of his master, and was made 
superintendent of the other negroes on the plantation. After 
the insozrection of 1791 he joined the insurgents, and, having 
acquimi some knowledge of surgery and medicine, acted as 
XXVll 3 

lee ioussaint i uuvenure • own Mtmotres, wttn a ine ny aamt 
my; (Paris, 1850); Gragnon-Laconte, Toussaint Lowerturt 
ins, 1887); Schdlchcr, Vie de Toussaini I.M<wr<tif« (Paris, 1889); 
I J. R. Beard, Lift of Toussaint Louverhtrt (1853). 

physician to the forces. His rapid rise in influence aroused, 
however, the jealousy of Jean Francois, who caused his arrest 
on the ground of his partiality to the whites. He was liberated 
by the rival insurgent chief Baisson, and a partisan war ensued, 
but after the death of Baisson he placed himself under the orders 
of Jean Francois. Subsequently he joined the Spaniards, 
but, when the French government ratted the act declaring 
the freedom of the slaves, he came to the aid of the French. 
In 1796 he was named commander-in-chief of the armies of 
St Domingo, but, having raised and disciplined 'a powerful 
army of blacks, he made himself master of the whole country, 
renounced the authority of France, and announced himself 
" the Buonaparte of St Domingo." He was taken prisoner by 
treachery on the part of France, and died in the prison of Joux, 
near Besancon, on the a 7th of April 1803. 

See Toussaint I'Ouverture's own Mimoires, with a life by Saint 
Remy; "** — ^ ^ • — 

and J. I 

TOW, the term given in textile manufacture to the short 
fibres formed during the processes of scutching and hackling, 
and also to the yams which are made from these fibres. A 
special machine termed a carding engine or a tow card is used 
to form these fibres into a sliver, this sliver then passes to the 
drawing frames, and thereafter follows the same process as line 
yams in flax spinning. 

TOWANDA, a borough and the county-seat of Bradford 
county, Pennsylvania, U.S.A., on the west bank of the Susque- 
hanna river, about 50 m. N.W. of Wilkes-Barr^. Pop. (1890), 
4169; (1900), 4663 (333 foreign-bom); (1910) 4381. Towanda 
i^ served by the Lehigh VaUey and the Susquehanna & New 
York railways. It is situated about 730 ft. above the sea, and 
is surrounded by high hills. Towanda contains the museum 
of the Bradford County Historical Society. The borough is 
in a farming, dairying and stock-raismg region, and has various 
manufactures. The first settlement was made by William Means 
in 1786, the village was laid out fai 18x3, became the county- 
seat in the same year, was variously known for some yean 
as Meansville, Overton, Williamson, Monmouth and Towanda, 
and in 1838 was incorporated as the borough of Towanda. Its 
name is an Indian word said to mean "where we bury the 

TOWCESTER, a market town in the southem parliamentaiy 
division of Northamptonshire, England, 8 m. S.S.W. of North- 
ampton, on the East & West Junction and the Northampton 
& Banbury Jimction railways. Pop. (1901), 3371. It is 
pleasantly situated on the small river Tove, a left-bank affluent of 
the Ouse. The church of St Lawrence is a good Early English, 
Decorated and Perpendicular building, with a fine western 
Perpendicular tower. There are a considerable agrictdtural 
trade and a manufacture of boots and shoes. 

Here was a Roman town or village situated on Watling 
Street. The site has yielded a considerable number of relics. 
In the zoth century a fortress was maintained here sgainst the 
invading Danes. The site of both this and the Roman station 
is marked by an artificial mound known as Burg Hill, not far 
from the church, above the river. Towcester, with the whole 
of this district, witnessed a large part of the operations during 
the Civil War of the 17 th century. 

TOWEL, a doth used for the purpose of drying the hands, 
fice or body after bathing or washing. These cloths are made 
of different materials, known as " towellings," the two principal 
kinds are "huckaback," a slightly roughened material for 
chamber towels for face and hands, and Turkish towelling, 
with a much rougher surface, for bath towels; finer towellings 
are made of linen or damask. The term has a particular eccle- 
siastical usage as applied to a linen altar cloth or to a rich cloth 
of embroidered silk, velvet, &c., covering the altar at all " such 
periods when Mass is not bdng celebrated." 

The Mid. Eng. totoaiUe comes through the O. Fr. touailU 
from the Low Lat. toacula, represented in other Romank: languages 
by Sp. toalla, Ital. Unagliax this is to be referred to the Teutonic 
verb meaning " to wash, O. H. G. twahan, M. H, G. dtDahen, (X Enp 
\iwedn, and df. Ger. Zwekle, provincial Eng. dviU, a dish<loth. 




TOWER (Lat. tunis; Ft. hur, docker; Ital. lorre; Ger. 
Tkurm)f the term given to a lofty building originally designed for 
defence, and, as such, attached to and forming part of the 
fortifications of a dty or qistle. Towers do not seem to have 
existed in Egypt, but in Mesopotamia from the earliest times 
they form the most important feature in the dty walls, and are 
shown in the bas-reliefs of the Assyrian palaces at Nimroud 
and elsewhere. The earliest representation is perhaps that 
engraved on the tablet in the lap of Gudea the priest king of 
Lagash (2700 B.C.). whose statue, found at Tello, is now in the 
Louvre; the drawing is that of a large fortified endosure, with 
gates, bastions and towers, corresponding with remains of 
similar structures of the same and later periods. In the dis- 
coveries made here, at Susa and at Dom Sargoukin, the towers 
were about 40 ft. square, projecting from x6 to 20 ft. in front 
of the curtain walls which connected them, and standing about 
80 ft. apart. In Roman and Byzantine times this distance 
was increased, owing probably to the greater speed of pro- 
jectiles, and in the wall built by llieodosius at Constantinople 
the towers were 150 ft. apart (see also Castle and FoBTxn- 

From the architectural pdnt of view, the towers which are 
of chief interest are those of ecclesiastical and secular buildings, 
those in Italy being nearly always isolated and known as cam- 
panili (see Campanile). In England the earliest known are the 
Anglo-Saxon towers, the best examples of which are those at 
Earl's Barton,Monkwearmouth, Bamack, Barton-on-Humberand 
Sompting; they were nearly always square on plan and situated 
at the west end, in an axial line with the nave, their chief 
characteristics being the long-and-short work of the masonry 
at the quoins, the decoration of the wall with thin pilaster strips, 
and the slight setting back of the storeys as they rose. There 
are a few examples of central Anglo-Saxon towers, as at St 
.Mary's, Dover; Breamore, Hants; and Dunham Major, Nor- 
folk; and, combined with western towers, at Ramsay and Ely; 
twin western towers existed at Exeter. Contemporary with 
these Saxon towers are many examples in France, but they are 
invariably central towers, as at Germigny-des-Pres and at 
Querqueville in Normandy; in Germany the twin towers of 
Aix-la-Chapelle are the best known. As a rule the single 
western tower is almost confined to England, prior to the end 
of the xxth century, when there are many examples throughout 
Germany. In Norman times in England, central towers are 
more common, and the same obtains in France, where, however, 
they are sometimes carried to a great height, as at P^rigueux, 
where the wall decoration consists of pilasters in the lower 
storeys, and semi-detached columns above, probably based on 
that of the Roman amphitheatre there: otherwise the design 
of the Romanesque church towers is extremely simple, de- 
pending for its effect on the good masonry and the enrichment 
of the belfry windows. In later periods flat buttresses are 
introduced, and these gradually assume more importance and 
present many varieties of design; greater apparent height 
is given to the tower by the string courses dividing the second 
storeys, and by rich blank arcading on them, the upper storey 
with the belfry windows forming always the most important 
feature of the tower. In those towers which axe surmounted by 
spires (q.v.) the design of the latter possesses sometimes a greater 
interest both in England and France. A very large number 
of the towers of English cathedrals and churches have flat 
roofs enclosed with lofty battlemented parapets and nimierAa 
pinnacles and finials; in France such terminations are not 
found, and in Germany the high pitched roof is prevalent evexy 
where, so that the numerous examples in England have a specif 
interest; sometimes the angle buttresses are grouped to carry 
octagonal pinnades, and sometimes, as at Lincoln and Salis- 
bury, octagonal turrets rise from the base of the tower. 

Among the finest examples are those of Canterbury. Dv, York. 
Gloucester, Lincoln and Worcester cathedrals: among churches, 
those of the minster at Beveriey; St Marv's. St Neots (Huntingdon- 

shire) ; St Stephen's. Bristol, St Giles. Wrexham (Denbiehshirc — in 
many respects the most beautiful in England) : St Mary Magdalene, 
^Taunton; Magdalen College, Oxford, St Botolph, Boston, crowned 

with an octagonal tower, St Matv'a, Ilmlnstei^ (Somersetahire) and 
Malvern (Worcestershire); and the isolated towers at Chichester. 
Evesham and Bury St Edmund's. 

So far reference has been made only to central and western 
towers, the latter not always placed, like the Anglo-Saxon towers, 
in the axial line of the nave, but sometimes on the north or south 
side of the west end; and as a rule these are only found in Eng- 
land. In France and Germany, however, they are greatly 
increased in number; thus in Reims seven towers with spires 
were contemplated, according to Viollet-le-Duc, but never 
completed; at Chart res eight towers, and at Laon seven, of which 
six axe completed; in Germany the cathedrals of Mayence and 
Spires and two of the churches in Cologne have from four to 
seven towers; and at Toumai cathedral, in Belgium, are seven 
towers. In many of the churches in Norfolk and Suffolk the 
western tower is drcular, owing probably to the fact that, 
being built with stone of small dimensions, the angles of the 
quoins would have been difficult to construct. In some of the 
French towns, isolated towers were built to contain bells, and 
were looked upon as munidpal constructions; of these there 
are a few left, as at Bithune, £vreux, Amiens and Bordeaux, 
the latter being a double tower, with the bells placed in a roof 
between them. 

The towers of secular buildings are chiefly of the town halls, of 
which there are numerous examples throughout France and Belgium, 
such as those of the hdtcl de ville at St Antonin (13th century) 
and Compi^ne, both m France; at LQbeck, Danzig and Munster 
in Germany; and Brussels, Bruges and Oudenaide in Belgium. 

(fc P. S.) 

TOWER OF LONDON, THE, an andent fortress on the east 
side of the City of London, England, on the north bank of 
the river Thames. On a slight elevation now called the Tower 
Hill, well protected by the river and its marshes, and by woods 
to the north, there was a British stronghold. Tradition, 
however, pointed to Julius Caesar as the founder of the 
Tower (Shakespeare, Richard III., m., i; and elsewhere), 
and remains of Roman fortifications have been found beneath 
the present site. The Tower contains barracks, and is the 
repository of the regalia. It covers an irregular hexagonal area, 
and is surrounded by a ditch, formerly fed by the "Thames, but 
now dry. Gardens surround it on the north and west, and an 
embankment borders the river on the south. Two lines of 
fortifications endose the inner bail, in which is the magnificent 
White Tower or Keep, flanked by four turrets. This was built 
by Gundulf, bishop of Rochester, c. 1078. Its exterior was 
restored by Sir Christopher Wren, but within the Norman work 
is little altered. Here may be seen a collection of old armour 
and instruments of torture, the rooms said to have been Sir 
Walter Raleigh's prison, and the magnificent Norman chapel 
of St John. Among the surrounding buildings are the barracks, 
and the chapel of St Peter ad Vincula, dating from the early 
part of the X4th century, but much altered in Tudor times. 
The Ballium Wall, the inner of the two lines of fortification, 
is coeval with the keep. Twelve towers rise from it at 
intervak, in one of which, the Wakefield Tower, the Regalia or 
crown jewek are kept. The chief entry to the fortress is through 
the Middle Tower on the west, across the bridge over the moat, 
and through the Byward Tower. The Lion Gate under the Middle 
Tower took name from a menagerie kept here from Norman 
times until X834. On the south, giving entry from the river 
through St Thomas Tower and the Bloody Tower, b the famous 
Traitor's Gate, by which prisoners of high rank were admitted. 
The chief historical interest of the Tower lies in its association 
with such prisoners. The Beauchamp Tower was for long the 
place of confinement, but dungeons and other chambers in 
various parts of the building are also associated with prisoners 
of fame. - Executions took place both within the Tower and 
on Tower Hill. Many of those executed were buried in the chapd 
of St Peter ad Vincula, such as Sir Thomas More, Henry VIII.'s 
queens, Anne Boleyn and Katharine Howard, Lady Jane Grey 
and her husband Dudley, Sir Walter Raldgh, and the duke of 
Monmouth. The Tower was not only a prison from Norman 
times until the iglh century, but was a royal residence at 



intervals from the reign of Stephen, if not before. The royal 
palace was demolished by order of Cromwell. The tower is 
voder the governorship of a consUble. The attendant staff, 
caUed Yeomen of the Guard or familiarly " Beefeaters," still 
wear their picturesque Tudor costume. 

AuTBOarriBS.— W. Hepworth Dixon, Her Majestys Tewtr 
(Londoo, 1869); Lord Ronald Sutherland Gower, The Tower of 
Lomdem (London. 1901). 

TOmi, in its most general sense, a collection or aggregation of 
inhabited houses larger than a village. The O. Eng. tun (M. Eng. 
tffm) meant originally a fence or enclosure, cf . Ger. taun, hedge, 
hence an enclosed place. The Scottish and Northern English 
ose of the word for a farmhouse and its buildings, a farmstead, 
picserves this original meaning, and is paralleled by the Icel. /«iii, 
homestead, dwelling-house. A cognate Celtic form meaning a 
fastness, a strong place, appears in Gael, and Irish dun, Welsh, 
din, fortress, hill-fort (d. Welsh dinas, town). This is familiar 
irom the many Latinized names of places, e.g. LugdunuMf 
A ngust^MHUM, &c. In English hiw " town " is not a word defined 
by statute. For purposes of local government there are boroughs, 
urban districts and rural districts, but many urban districts are 
rural in character and the distinction is purely an administrative 
one (see Borough; City; Cohmune (Medieval) ; Muniopium; 
England: Local Gnemmcnt, and the sections on local adminis- 
tratKm und^ various country headings) . The meaning attached 
to the term " township " in the local administration of the 
Unit ed Sta tes is treated under United States: Local Gmernment. 

TOWXBLBT (or Townley), CHARLES (1737-1805), English 
archaeologist and collector of marbles, was born at Towneley, 
the family seat, near Burnley in Lancashire, on the xst of October 
1 737. He was educated at the college of Douai, and subsequently 
undier Jcrfm Turberville Needham, the physiologist and divine. 
In 17 5S he took up his residence at Towneley, where he lived the 
ordinary life of a country gentleman untfl about 1765, when he 
left England to study ancient art, chiefly at Rome. He also 
made several excursions to the south of Italy and Sicily. In 
conjunction with Gavin Hamilton, the artist, and Thomas 
Jenkins, a banker in Rome, he got together a splendid collection 
of antiquities, which was deposited in two houses bought 
by him for the purpose in Park Street, Westminster, where he 
died on the 3rd of January 1805. His solitary publication was 
an account of an ancient helmet found at Ribchester. His 
marbles, bronzes, coins, and gems were purchased by the British 
Museum for about £a8,ooo, and form part of the Graeco-Roman 

For an account of the antiquities see Sir Henry Ellis's The Townley 
Gallery (tS3^), and A. T. F. Mkhadu's Anctent Marbles m Great 
Briiam (Ml). 

TOWHLBT. JAMB (17x4-1778), English dramatist, second 
son of Charles Townley, merchant, was bom in London on the 
6th of May 17x4. Educated at Merchant Taylors' School and at 
St John's O^ege, Oxford, he took holy orders, being ordained 
priest 00 the 38th of May 1738. He was lecturer at St Dunstan's 
in the East, chaplain to the lord mayor, then under-master at 
Merchant Taylors' School until 1753, when he became grammar 
master at (Christ's Hospital. In 1760 he became head master 
of Merchant Taylors' School, where in 1762 and 1763 he revived 
the custom of dramatic performances. He retained his head- 
mastership until his death on the 5th of July 1778. He took a 
keen interest in the theatre, and it has been asserted that many 
of David Garrick's best productions and revivals owed much 
to his assistance. He was the author, although the fact was 
long concealed, of High Life below Stairs, a two-act farce pre- 
sented at Drury Lane on the 31st of October 1750; also of Faise 
Concord (Covent Garden, March 20, 1764) and The r«lof (Drury 
Lane, Fe b. 4, 17 65). 

TOWNSHBHD, CHARLES (1735-1767), English politician, 
was the second son of Charles, 3rd Viscount Townshend. who 
married Audrey (d. 1788), daughter and heiress of Edward 
Harrison of Ball's Park, near Hertford, a lady who rivalled her 
son in brilliancy of wit and frankness of expression. Charles was [ 
bom on the S9th of August 1735, and was sent for his education I 

to Leiden and Oxford. At th6 Dutch university, where he 
matriculated on the 27th of October 1745, he associated with a 
small knot of English youths, afterwards well known in various 
circles of life, among whom were Dowdeswell, his subsequent 
rival in politics, Wilkes, the witty and unprincipled reformer, and 
Alexander Carlyle, the genial Scotchman, who devotes some of 
the pages of his Autobiograpky to chronicling their sayings and 
their doings. He represented Great Yarmouth in pariiament 
from 1747 to 1761, when he found a seat for the treasury borough 
of Harwich. Public attention was first drawn to his abilities 
in i753f when he delivered a lively atUck, as a younger son 
who might hope to promote his advancement by allying himself 
in marriage to a wealthy heiress, against Lord Hardwicke's 
marriage bilL Although this measure passed into law, he 
attained this object in August 1755 by marrying Caroline (d. 
1794), the eldest daughter of the 2nd duke of Argyll and the 
widow of Francis, Lord Dalkeith, the eldest son of the 2nd duke 
of Bucdeuch. In April 1754 Townshend was transformed from 
the position of a member of the board of trade, which he had held 
from 1749, to that of a lord of the admiralty, but at the ctose of 
X 7 55 his passionate attack against the policy of the ministry, an 
attack which shared in popular estiination with the scathing 
denunciations of Pitt, the supreme success. of Single-Speech 
Hamilton, and the hopeless failure of Lord Chesterfield's illegiti- 
nute son, caused his resignation. In the administntion which 
was formied in November 1756, and which was ruled by Pitt, 
the lucrative office of treasurer of the chamber was given to 
Tovmshend, and in the following spring he was summoned to 
the privy coundL 

With the accession of the new monarch in 1760 this volatile 
politician transferred his attentions from Pitt to the young 
king's favourite, Bute, and when in 176 1, at the latter's instance, 
several changes were made in the ministry, Townshend was 
promoted to the post of secretary-at-war. In this place he 
remamed after the great commoner had withdrawn from the 
cabinet, but in December 1762 he threw it up. Bute, alarmed 
at the growth in numbers and in influence of his enemies, tried 
to buy back Townshend's co-operation by sundry tempting 
promises, and at last secured his object in March 1763 with the 
presidency of the board of trade. When Bute retired and George 
Grenville accepted the cares of official life, the higher post of 
first lord of the admiralty fell to Townshend's lot, but with 
his usual impetuosity he presumed to designate one of his 
satellites. Sir William Burrdl (1732-1796), to a place under him 
at the board, and the refusal to accept the nomination led 
to his exclusion from the new administration. Wlule i^ 
opposition his ndnd was swayed to and fro with conflicting 
emotions of dislike to the head of the ministry and of desire 
to share in the spoils of office. The latter feeling ultimately 
triumphed; he condescended to accept- in the dying days 
of Grenville's cabinet, and to retain through the " lutestring " 
administration of Lord Rockingham — "pretty summer 
wear," as Townshend styled it, "but it will never stand 
the winter"— the highly paid position of paymaster-general, 
refusing to identify himself more closely with its fortunes as 
chancellor of the exchequer. The position which he refused from 
the hands of Lord Rockingham he accepted from Pitt in August 
1 766, and a few weeks later his urgent appeals to the great minister 
for increased power were favourably answered, and he was 
admitted to the inner drcle of the cabinet. The new chancellor 
proposed the continuance of. the land tax at four shillings In the 
pound, while he held out hopes that it might be reduced next year 
to three shillings, whereupon his predecessor, William Dowdeswell, 
by the aid of the landed gentlemen, carried a motion that the 
reduction should take effect at once. This defeat proved a 
great mortification to Lord Chatham, and in his irritation 
against Townshend for this blow, as wcU as for some acts of in- 
subordination, he meditated the removal of his showy colleague. 
Before this could be accomplished Chatham's mind became 
impaired, and Townshend, who was the mos^ determined and 
influential of his colleagues, swayed the ministry as he lik^'' 
pledging himself to find a revenue in America with which to 1 


the deficiency caused by the reduction in the land tax. His wife 
was created (August 1767) baroness of Greenwich, and his elder 
brother George, the 4th viscount, was made lord-lieutenant of 
Ireland. He himself delivered in the House of Commons many 
speeches unrivalled in parliamentary history for wit and reckless- 
ness; and one of them still lives in history as the *' champagne 
speech." His last official act was to carry out his intention by 
passing through parliament resolutions, which even his colleagues 
deprecated in the cabinet, for taxing several articles, such as 
glass, paper and tea, on their importation into America, which he 
estimated would produce the insignificant sum of £40,000 for the 
English treasury, and which shrewder observers prophesied would 
lead to the loss of the American colonies. Soon after this event 
he died somewhat suddenly on the 4th of September 1767. 

The universal tribute of Townshend's colleagues allows him 
the possession of boundless wit and ready eloquence, set off by 
perfect melody of intonation, but marred by an unexampled lack 
of judgment and discretion. He shifted his ground in politics 
with every new moon, and the world fastened on him the nick- 
name, which he himself adopted in his " champagne " speech, of 
the weathercock. His official knowledge was considerable; and 
it would be unjust to his memory to ignore the praises of his 
contemporaries or his knowledge of his country's commercial 
interesu. The House of Commons recognized in him its spoilt 
child, and Burke happily said that " he never thought, did or 
said anything " without judging its effect on his fellow members. 

A Memoir by Percy Fitzgerald was published in 1866. See also 
W. E. H. Lecky. History of England (1892): and Horace Walpole, 
Memoirs of the Keign of George HI., edited by G. F. R. Barker (1894). 

(1674-1738), English statesman, was the eldest son of Sir 
Horatio Townshend, Bart. (c. 1630-1687), a zealous supporter 
of Charles II., who was created Baron Townshend in x66x and 
Viscount Townshend of Raynham in 1682. The old Norfolk 
family of Townshend, to which he belonged, is descended from 
Sir Roger Townshend (d. 1493) of Raynham, who acted as legal 
adviser to the Paston family, and was made a justice of the 
common pleas in 1484. His- descendant, another Sir Roger 
Townshend {c. 1 543-1 590), had a son Sir John Townshend 
(i 564-1603), a soldier, whose son, Sir Roger Townshend (1588- 
1637), was created a baronet in 1617. He was the father of Sir 
Horatio Townshend. 

Charles Townshend succeeded to the peerage in December 
J687, and was educated at Eton and King's College, Cambridge. 
He had Tory sympathies when he took his seat in the House of 
Lords, but his views changed, and he began to take an active 
part in politics as a Whig. For a few years after the accession 
of Queen Anne he remained without office, but in November 
1708 he was appointed captain of the yeomen of the guard, 
having m the previous year been summoned to the privy council. 
He was ambassador extraordinary and plenipotentiary to the 
states-general from 1709 to 17x1, taking part during these years 
in the negotiations which pceceded the conclusion of the treaty 
of Utrecht. After his recall to England he was busily occupied 
in attacking the proceedings of the new Tory ministry. Towns- 
hend quickly won the favour of George I., and in September 
17x4, the new king .selected him as secretary of state for the 
northern department. The policy of Townshend and his 
colleagues, after they had crushed the Jacobite rising of 1715, 
both at home and abroad, was one of peace. The secretar>' 
disliked the interference of England in the war between Sweden 
and Denmark, and he promoted the conclusion of defensive 
alliances between England and the emperor and England and 
France. In spite of these successes the influence of the Whigs 
was gradually undermined by the intrigues of Charles Spencer, 
earl of Sunderland, and by the discontent of the Hanoverian 
favourites. In Octobct 1716, Townshend's colleague, James 
Stanhope, afterwards ist Earl Stanhope, accompanied the king 
on his visit to Hanover, and while there he was seduced from his 
allegiance to his fellow ministers by Sunderland, George being 
led to believe that Townshend and his brother-in-law, Sir 
PriKort Walpole, were caballing with the prince of Wales, their 

intention being that the prince should supplant his father on 
the throne. Consequently in December 1716 the secretary was 
dismissed and was made lord-lieutenant of Ireland, but he only 
reUined this post until the following April. 

Early in 1730 a partial reconciliation took place between the 
parties of Stanhope and Townshend, and in June of this year 
the latter became president of the council, a post which he held 
until February 1721, when, after the death of Stanhope and the 
forced retirement of Sunderland, a result of the South Sea 
bubble, he was again appointed secretary of state for the 
northern department, with Walpole as first lord of the treasury 
and chancellor of the exchequer. The two remained in power 
during the remainder of the reign of George I., the chief domestic 
events of the time being the impeachment of Bishop Atterbury, 
the pardon and partial restoration of Lord BoUngbroke, and the 
troubles in Ireland caused by the patent permitting Wood to 
coin halfpence. Townshend secured the dismissal of his rival, 
John Carteret, afterwards Earl Granville, but soon differences 
arose between himself and Walpole, and he had some diflficulty 
in steering a course through the troubled sea of European politics. 
Although disliking him, George II. retained him in office, but 
the predominance in the ministry passed gradually but surely 
from him to Walpole. Townshend could not brook this. So 
long, to use Walpole's witty remark, as the firm was Townshend 
and Walpole all went well with it, but when the positions were 
reversed jealousies arose between the partners. Serious differ- 
ences of opinion concerning the policy to be adopted towards 
Prussia and in foreign politics generaUy led to a final rupture 
in 1730. Failing, owing to Walpole's interference, in his efforts 
to procure the dismissal of a colleague and his replacement by 
a personal friend, Townshend retired on the 15th of May 1730. 
His remaining years were passed at Raynham, where he inte- 
rested himself in agriculture and was responsible for introducing 
into England the cultivation of turnips on a large scale and for 
other improvements of the kind. He died at Raynham on the 
31 St of June 1738. 

Townshend was twice married — first to Elizabeth (d. 1711), 
daughter of Thomas Pelham, 1st Baron Pelham of Laughton, 
and secondly to Dorothy (d. 1726), sister of Sir Robert Walpole. 
He had eight sons. The eldest son, Charles, the 3rd viscount 
( 1 700-1 764), was called to the House of Lords in 1723. The 
second son, Thomas Townshend (1701-1780), was member of 
parliament for the university of Cambridge from 1727 to 1774; 
his only son, Thomas Townshend (i 733-1809), who was created 
Baron Sydney in 1783 and Viscount Sydney in 1789, was a 
secretary of state and leader of the House of Commons from July 
X782 to April 1783, and from December 1783 to June 1789 
again a secretary of state, Sydney in New South Wales being 
named after him; his grandson, John Robert Townshend (1805- 
1890), the 3rd viscount, was created Earl Sydney in 1874, the 
titles becoming extinct at his death. Charles Townshend's eldest 
son by his second wife was George Townshend (1715-1769), 
who after serving for many years in the navy, became an 
admiral in 1765. The third viscount had two sons, George, 
ist Marquess Townshend, and Charles Townshend, who are 
separately noticed. 

For the 2nd viscount sec W. Coxe, Memoirs of Sir Robert Wal- 
pole (1816): W. E. H. Lecky, Htslory of England In th* i8tk Century 
(1892) ; and Eari Stanhope. History of England. 

X807), eldest son of Charles, 3rd Viscount Townshend (1700- 
1764), and brother of the politician Charles Townshend (^r.), 
was bom on the 28th of February 1724, his godfather being 
George I. Joining Cope's dragoons as a captain, he saw some 
service in the Netherlands in 1745, and as a member of the duke 
of Cumberland's staff was present at CuUoden. Afterwards he 
accompanied the duke to the Netherlands, and was present at 
Lauffcld. By 1750 he had become lieutenant-colonel in the 
ist Foot Guards, but differences with the duke of Cumbcrlatnd 
led to his retirement in that year. This difference soon became 
hostility, and, coupled with his dread of permanent armies, 
caused him to give vehement support to the Militia Bill. la 



this matter his views and his methods of expressing them raised 
up a host of enemies. The retirement of the duke after the 
disastrous campaign in North Germany in 1757 brought Towns- 
hend back to active service as a colonel, and in 1758 he sailed 
for North America as one of Wolfe's three brigadien. In the 
k>og and painful operations against Quebec he showed himself 
a capable officer, but his almost open dissatisfaction with Wolfe's 
methods sensibly added to the difficulty of the enterprise. At 
the battle of the Heights of Abraham the command, on the death 
of Wolfe and the Wotmding of Monckton, devolved upon Towns- 
hend, whose over-caution for a time imperilled the success of 
the British arms. The loss of Montcalm, however, had similarly 
paralyzed the French, and the crisis passed. Townshend sent 
home a despatch, announcing the fall of Quebec, which at once 
became the butt of the wits and the object of criticism of a more 
serious kind; and when, Monckton having taken over the com- 
mand in Canada, Townshend returned to England to enjoy, as 
he hoped, the hero-worship of the public, he was soon involved 
in bitter controversies. He succeeded to the title in 1764 
on hb father's death, and in 1767, throu^ his brother's influence, 
was made lord-lieutenant of Ireland. The story of his vice- 
royalty may be read in the article on him in the Diet. Nat. Biog., 
axid in Lecky's History oj England in the iStk Century (voL iv.). 
With the best will in the world, and in spite of excellent capacity, 
he came into continual conflict with the Irish House of Commons 
in his attempt to form an English party in Ireland, and he 
exdted unmeasured abuse. In 177a he was recalled. In 1787 
he was created Marquess Townshend of Rainham. He died on 
the 14th of September 1807. 

Townshend was twice married—fiist to Charlotte, Baroness 
de Ferrars (d. 1770) and secondly to Anne Montgomery (d. 18x9). 
His eldest son George (1755-1811), who became the second 
marqoesa, had succeeded to the barony of de Ferrars in 1770 
and had been created earl of Leicester in 1784. Although he 
was in turn master of the mint, joint postmaster-general and 
lord steward of the royal household, he did not take much part 
in politics, but showed a great taste for antiquarian studies. 
His elder son, George Ferrars Townshend, the 3rd marquess 
(i 778-1855), was disinherited by his father for conduct which 
abo compelled him to reside outside England. When he died 
at Genoa in December 1855 the earldom of Leicester became 
extinct. The marquessate, however, passed to a cousin, John 
Townshend (1798-1863), who became the 4th marquess. John 
James Dudley Stuart Townshend (b. x866), who became the 6th 
marqoess in 1899, came prominently before the public in 1906 
in consequence of a judicial inquiry into his sanity, the decision 
being that he was not capable of managing his own affairs. 

TDWNSVlUiEfe a town of Elphinstone county, Queensland, 
Australia, 870 m. direct N.W. of Brisbane. Pop. (1901), 12,717. 
It is the scat of the Anglican bishop of North Queensland and has 
a cathedral and several handsome buildings, including the supreme 
court and the custom-house. It is picturesquely situated partly 
on the slopes of Castle Hill and Melton Hill, and partly on the 
banks of Ross Creek, which is spanned by the Victoria Bridge, a 
swing bridge 550 ft. in length, worked by hydraulic power. The 
tidal harbour is enclosed by stone breakwaters, and large vessels 
enter and load frozen meat direct from the refrigerator cars. 
The port is an outlet for a wide area of pastoral country and for 
several goldfields, and has regular communication with all ports 
north and south by lines of steamen. The immigration barracks 
on Ross Island have accommodation for five hundred persons. 
The railway station is the terminus of the Northern line, which 
extends 336 m. to Hughenden. Townsville was founded in 1864 
by John Medwin Black and named after his partner Captain 
Towns. A municipal charter was granted in x866. 

TOWTOIf, a village of Yorkshire, England, 7\ m. S. of Tad- 
caster, the scene of a battle fought on Palm Sunday, the 39th of 
March 1461, between the ai;mies of York and Lancaster. The 
party of Lancaster had lately won the battle of St Albans, but, 
unable to gain admission into London, and threatened by the 
approach of Edward the young duke of York from the west of 
Engbad, was compelkd to fall back northward. York, having 

been proclaimed as Edward IV. on the and, 3rd and 4th of March 
1460/1461, followed them up into Yorkshire, and on the 27th his 
leading troops surprised the passage of the Aire at Ferrybridge. 
The Lancastrians were encamped at Towton, some miles away, 
covenng Tadcaster and York; but a force under Lord Clifford 
was promptly sent out, recaptured Ferrybridge by surprise, and 
cut to pieces the Yorkist garrison. About the same time, how- 
ever, Edward's van, under Lord Fauconberg, an experienced 
soldier, crossed the Aire higher up, and Clifford was compelled 
to retire. He was closely pressed, and at Dintingdale, within a 
few f urk>ngs of his own camps, was cut off and killed with nearly 
all his men. Edward's main body was now close at hand, and the 
Lancastrians drew up on their chosen battlefield early on the 
29th. This field was an elevated plateau, with steep slopes, 
between the present Great North Road and the river Cock, cut 
in two by a depression called Towton Dale. On opposite sides 
of this depression stood the two armies, that of York facing north, 
their opponents southward. Both Unes of battle were very 
dense. On a front of little more than a thousand yards the 
Lancastrian party had nearly 60,000 men. Edward's force 
Oess than 50,000) was not all present, the rear " battle -'^ under 
Norfolk being still distant. Snow and sleet blew in the faces 
of the Lancastrians and covered the field of battle. The skilful 
Fauconberg used this advantage to the utmost. Aided by the 
wind, his archers discharged flights of arrows against the enemy, 
who replied blindly and feebly, hampered by snow and wind. 
The Yorkists withdrew until the enemy had exhausted their 
quiven, and then advanced afresh. Their arrows soon stung the 
Lancastrians into a wild and disorderly charge. Suffering severe 
losses the latter closed with Edward's line of battle. No quarter 
was given by either party, and on the luurow front the numerical 
superiority of the Lancastrians counted for little. The long, 
doubtful and sanguinary struggle was only decided by the arrival 
of Norfolk's corps, which charged the enemy in flank. Driven 
backwards and inwards, the Lancastrians were in a desperate 
position, for their only way of escape to Tadcaster crossed the 
swollen waters of the Cock by a single narrow and difficult ford, 
and when, after a stubborn struggle, they finally broke and fled, 
they were slaughtered in thousands as they tried to cross. At the 
close of the day the defeated army had ceased to exist. Twenty- 
five thousai\d Lancastrian and eight thousand Yorkist dead were 
buried in and about Towton. Tht neighbourhood of the battle- 
field contains many relics and memorials of this, the greatest 
battle hitherto fought on English soil. Particularly well pre- 
served is the tomb of Lord Dacre, a prominent Lancastrian, 
in Saxton churchyard. 

See R. Brooke, Visits to English Battlefields (London, 1857); 
C. R. B. Barrett, Batiies and BattUfields of England (London, 1896); 
H. B. George, Battles of English History (London, 1895). 

TOZICOLOGT, the imme of that branch of science which deals 
with poisons, their effects and antidotes, &c. For the general 
treatment of the subject and for the law relating to the sale 
thereof see Poisons, and for the criminal law see Medical 
JouspRUDENCE. The term "toxic," meaning poisonous, is 
derivMl from Gr. r6(f»t bow, owing to the custom of smearing 
arrows with poison. 

TOXODONTIA, a sub-order of extinct South American Tertiary 
ungulate mammals typified by the genus Toxodon^ so named 
from the bow-like curvature of the molar teeth. They all show 
signs of distant kinship to the Perissodactyla, as regards both 
limb-structure and dentition; while some exhibit resemblance 
to the Rodents and Hyraxes — resemblances which, however, 
are probably to be attributed to parallelism in development. 

Under the sub-order Toxodontia may be included not only the 
typical Toxodon, but the more aberrant Typotherium (fig. 1) of the 
Pleistocene of Buenos Aires and the smaller Pachyrucus and HegelO' 
therium of the Patagonian SanU Cruz beds. All the members 
of the sub-order have tall<rowned and curved cheek-teeth, some 
or all of which generally have persistent pulps, while at least one pair 
of incisors in each jaw is rootless. The bodies of the cervical 
vertebrae have flat articular surfaces, the bones of the two rows 
of the carpus alternate, and in the Ursus the navicular articulate 
with the calcaneum, which, as in the Artiodactyla, is articulated 
to the fibula, while the astragalus^ which b slightly grooved ab^" 



is formed on the Perinodactyle plan. The number of toes varies 
be t ween three and five, of which the middle one is the largest, and 
the femur may or may not have a third trochanter. The Typo- 
tberiidae and Pachyrucidae are remarkable among the Ungulates for 

(After Gcfvah.) 

Fig. I. — ^SkuU of Tybotherium eristatum^ from the Pampas 
Formation ol Buenos Aires. 

the retention of clavicles, and for their curious approximation in 
dentition and certain characters of the skeleton to the Rodentia. 
The dental formula of Typotkerium is i. \, c. %, p. f , m. | ; that of the 
smaller Patagonian forms differs by the larger number (i) of pre- 
molars. The toes were unguiculatc rather than ungulate in character, 
except the hind ones (four in number) of Ty^therium. Gnrtain 
allied PaUgonian forms, such as Argyrohyrax, have been supposed 
to be related to the Hyraxes. 

The Toxodontidae differ from the preceding families by the loss 
of the clavicles and the reduction of the digits to three in each foot. 
The typicad genus Toxodon is represented by animals the size of a 

(Pram Britkh ICuMum (N&t. Hk] Guide to the FouO Munmalia.) 

Fig. 2. — Skeleton of the Toxodon {Toxodon plalensis).- From the Pampean Formation of Argentina. 

(About ^ nat. size.) 

rhinoceros, of which the entire skeleton is now known (fig. 2). The 
teeth, of which the formula is t. i. c. f p. m, m. {, all grow from per- 
sistent pulps; those of the check-series are very tall, highly curved, 
and with a simplified crown-structure. In the older rfesodon, on 
the other hand, the cheek-teeth are shorter-crowned, and depart 
less widely from a generalized Pcrissodactylc type, the total number 
of teeth being forty-four, and there being scarcely any gap in the 
series. Very remarkable changes occur in the dentition as age 
advances, most of the teeth eventually developing roots, although 
the aecood pair of incisors in each jaw was rootless. The complete 

skeleton is not yet known, but it is ascertained that the femur 
differs from that of Toxodon in the retention of a third trochanter. 

Toxodon is typified by T. pUUensis from the Pampean formatioa 
of Buenos Aires. Toxodontolhenum and Xotodon are allied but 
rather older types. Nesodan is from the Santa Cruz beds of Patafonia, 
the typical N. imbricatus having a skull about a foot in length, but 
N. ovinus was a smaller animal, about the size of a sheep. 

TOT, CRAfTFORD HOWELL (1836- ), American Hebrew 
scholar, was born in Norfolk, Virginia, on the 33rd of March 1836. 
He graduated at the university of Virginia in 1856, and studied 
at the university of Berlin in 1866-1868. In 1869-1879 he was 
professor of Hebrew in the Southern Baptist Theological 
Seminary (first in Greenville, South Carolina, and after 1877 in 
Louisville, Kentucky), and in 1880 he became professor of 
Hebrew and Oriental language in Harvard University, where 
until 1903 he was also Dexter lecturer on biblical literature. 

He wrote The Religion oj Israel (1882); Quotations from the Old 
Testament in the New Testament (1884); Judaism ana Chrtshansty 
(1890); and the Book ef Proverbs (1899) in the " International 
Critical Commentary "; and edited a translation of Erdmann's 
commentary on Samuel (1877) in Lange's commentaries; Murray's 
Origin of the Psalms fi88o); and, in Haupt's Sacred Books of the 
OldTestameni, the Book of Ezekiel (Hebrew text and English version, 

TOT (an adaptation of Du. tuig, tools, implements, stu£F, 
speltuig, playthings, i.e. stuff to play with, spelen, to play), a 
child's plaything, also a trifle, a worthless, petty ornament, 
a gew-gaw, a bauble. Children's toys and playthings survive 
from the most remote periods of man's life on the earth, though 
many so-called diminutive objects made and used by primitive 
man, sometimes classified as playthings, may have been work- 
men's modek, votive offerings or sepulchral objects. A large 
number of wooden, earthenware, stone or metal dolls remain 
with which the children of ancient Egypt once played; thus 
in the British Museum collection there is a flat paint^ wooden 
doll with strings of mud-beads representing the hair, a bronze 
woman doll bearing a pot on her head, an earthenware doll 
carrying and nursing a child; some have movable jointed anns. 
There are also many toy animals, such as a painted wooden 

calf, a porcelain 
elephant with a 
rider; this once had 
movable legs,which 
have disappeared. 
Balls are found 
made of leather 
stuffed with hair, 
chopped straw and 
other material, and 
also of blue porce* 
hiin or pap3rrus. 
Jointed dolls, 
moved by strings, 
were evidently 
favourite play- 
things of the Greek 
and Roman chil- 
dren, and small 
modclsof furniture, 
chairs, tables, sets 
of jugs painted with 
scenes of children's 
life survive from 
both Greek and 
Roman times. 
Balls, tops, rattles 
and the implements of numerous games, still favourites in all 
countries and every age, remain to show how little the amuse> 
ments of children have changed. 

See also Doll; Top; Play; and for the history of toys, with their 
varying yet unchanging fashions, see H. R. d'Allemagne, Histoire des 
Jouets, and F. N. Jacloon, Toys of other Days (1908). 

TOYNBBB. ARNOLD (1852-1883), English social reformer 
and economist, second son of Joseph Toynbee (i8i5-*i866), 



a cfistingaiahed sunseon, was bora in London on the 33rd of 
August 185a. He had originally intended to enter the army, 
bat ill health and a growing love of books changed his plans, 
and he settled down to read for the bar. Here again the same 
causes produced a change of purpose, and he entered as a 
student at Pembroke College, Oxford. Finding himself by 
so means at ease in that college he migrated after two years 
to Balliol College. Continued ill health prevented his reading 
for honours, but he made so deep an impression on the authori- 
ties of his college that on taking his degree he was appointed 
lecturer and tutor to students preparing for the Indian civil 
service. He devoted himself to the study of economics and 
economic histoiy. He was active also as a practical social 
reformer, taking part in much public work and delivering 
lectures in the large industrial centres on economic problems. 
He overtaxed his strength, and after lecturing in London in 
January 18S3 he had a complete break-down, and died of 
inflammation of the brain at Wimbledon on the 9th of March. 

Toynbee had a striking influence on his contemporaries, not merely 
thnxjffb his inteUectuaT powers, but by his strength of character. 
He lot behind him a beautiful memory, filled as he was with the 
love of truth and an aident and active zeal for the public good. He 
was the author of some fragmentary pieces, published after his 
death by his widow, under the dtle of The Industrial Revolution. 
This volume deserves attention both for its intrinsic merit and as 
indicating the first drift of a changing method in the treatment of 
economic pfoblcms. He, however, fluctuated considerably in his 
opinton of the Rk:ardian political economy, in one place declaring 
it to be a detected "intellectual imposture." whilst elsewhere, 
apparently under the influence of Bagchot, he speaks of it as having 
been in recent times " only corrected, re-stated, and put into the 
m>per relation to the science of life." meaning apparently, by this 
Ust, general socblogy. He saw that the great help in the future 
for the acienoe of economics must come from the historical method, 
to which in his own researches he gave preponderant weight. Toyn- 
bee's interest in the |>oor and his anxiety to be personally acquainted 
with them led to his close association with the district of White- 
chapel in London, where the Rev. Canon S. A. Bamett iq.v.) was 
at that time vicar — an association which u'as commemorated after 
his death by the social settlement of Toynbee Hall, the first of many 
similar institutions erected in the East End of London for the purpose 
of upliftinjT and brightening the lives of the poorer classes. 

See F. C. Montague's Arnold Toynbee (Johns Hopkins University 
Studies, x88q); Lord Mtlner's Arnold Toynbee: a Reminiscence 
(1901); and L. L. Price's Short History of Political Economy in 
En^amd for a critkism of Toynbee as an economist. 

TRABEATED, the architectural term given to those styles 
in which the architrave or beam (Lat. trabs) is employed instead 
of the arch, in the latter case the term " arcuated " being used. 
The principal trabeatcd styles are the Egyptian, Persian, 
Greek, Lydan, nearly all the Indian styles, the Chinese; 
Japanese and South American styles, in all cases owing their 
origin to the timber construction, for which reason the term 
post-and-lintel architecture is sometimes implied to it. 

TRACERY, a late coined word from "trace," track, Lat. 
Uaken, to draw; the term given in architecture (French 
equivalents are riscau, remplissage) to the intersecting rib- 
work in the upper part of a Gothic window; applied also to 
the interlaced work of a vault, or on walb, in panels and in 
tabernacle work or screens. The tracery in windows is usually 
divided into two sections, plate tracery and rib or bar tracery, 
the Utter rising out of the former, and entirely superseding 
it in the geometrical, flowing and rectilineal designs. The 
windows of the Early English period were comparatively 
narrow slits, and were sometimes grouped together under a 
single enclosing arch; the piercing of the tympanum of this 
arch with a circular light produced what is known as plate 
tracery, which is found in windows of the late 12th century, 
as in St Maurice, York, but became more common in the first 
half of the 13th century. In England the opening pierced in 
the head was comparatively small, its diameter never exceeding 
the width of one of the windows below, but in France it 
occupied the full width of the enclosing arch and was filled 
with cusping, and sometimes, as in Chartres, with cusping in 
the centre and a series of small quatrefoils round, all pierced 
00 one plane face. In order further to enrich the mullions and 
arches of the window, they were moulded, as in Stowe church 

Kent; the other portions were pierced; and finally, to give 
more importance to the principal lights, additional depth was 
given to their mouldings, so that they gradually developed into 
bar or rib tracery, of which the eariiest examples in England 
are those in Westminster Abbey (c. 1250) and Netley Abbey 
near Southampton. Henceforth that which is described in 
architecture as the " element " ruled the design of the window, 
and led to the development of geometrical tracery, in which 
the bars or ribs are all about equidistant from one another. 
In windows of three lights the heads of the windows consisted 
of three circular openings, but with four lights they were grouped 
in two pairs, with a single circle over each and a laiger one at 
the top in the centre. This led to increased dimensions being 
given to the moulding of the enclosing arches and the upper 
circle, forming virtually two pknes in the tracery. In the 
great cast window at Lincoln, with eight lights, there was a 
double subdivision and three planes, and here the upper circle 
was filled with semicircles, so that the openings were all about 
the same width. In France the upper circle always maintained 
its predominance, its subdivisions only retaining the scale. 
The next development, which would seem to have taken place 
in Gloucester Cathedral, was the omission of portions of the 
enclosing circle, so as to allow the ribs to run one into the other, 
forming therefore lines of double curvature, and giving rise 
to what is known as flowing or flamboyant tracery, of which 
the great window in Carlisle Cathedral is the most important 
example. In this window there are nine lights, the four outer 
ones in each rib being grouped together; these were not sub- 
divided again, and consequently there are only two planes of 
tracery. The Perpendicular style which followed might per- 
haps be considered as a reaction against the abuse of the flowing 
lines in masonry, were it not that in the earlier examples it 
appears timidly. At Edington church in Wiltshire (136 1), 
in a five-light window, the centre light is wider than the others 
and its mullions run straight up into the arch mould. In New 
College chapel, Oxford (1386), the head of the window is sub- 
divided into narrow vertical lights, each half the width of those 
below, and this is followed in some counties, but not in all, in 
the east of England the flamboyant tracery being retained a 
century later. In St Mary's church, Oxford, with seven lights, 
all the mullions run straight up into the arch mould, and another 
feature is introduced, already found in New College chapel, 
and at a much earlier date in domestic work and in spire-lights, 
via. the transom. In the later Perpendicular work another 
change takes place; the pointed arch struck from two centres 
is replaced by one struck from four centres, and this eventually 
in domestic work is superseded by the fiat arch. 

So far reference has been made only to that which may be called 
the " element " of the window. The enrichment oS the lights with 
cusping gave additional beauty to them, took away the lurd wire- 
drawn encct of the mouldings, and formed openings of great variety ; 
in some of the windows <^ the Decorated period the ball flower and 
other foliage is introduced into the mouldings. In French work 
the geometrical style lasted till the 14th century, and then there 
was a lapse in building, so that the flamboyant style tvhkh followed, 
and from which at one time it was assumed that the Enj^lish mason 
had deri«red the style, was apparently taken up by the French after 
its abandonment in England in favour of Perpendicular work. 
Germany and Spain have always followed in the wake of the French ; 
and in Italy, where architects preferred to decorate their walls with 
frescoes, the light from stained glass interfered with their effect, 
so that there was no demand for huge unndows or their subdivision , 
with mullions. At the same time there are many beautiful examples 
of traceiy in Italy, generally in marble, such as those of Giotto's 
Campanile and the cathedral at Florence, in the Ducal and other 
palaces at Venke, and in the triforium arcades of Pisa and Siepa 
cathedrals; but they destroyed its effect by the insertion of smalt 
capitals to the mullions. which gave horizontal lines where they 
were not wanted, virtually dividing the window into two parts 
instead of emphasizing, as was done in the Perpendkrular period, 
the verticality of the mullions. 

Among the most glorious features in the Gothk: architecture of 
France, England and Spain are the immense rose windows which u-ere 
introduced, generally speaking, in the transepts of the cathedrals; 
the tracery of these follows on the lines of those of the windows, 
changing from geometrical to Decorated and afterwards to flam- 
boyant. In some respects perhaps the finest examples of plate- 
tracery were produced in the rose windows of the 13th centr*^' 



Thus in Prance in the roee window of Chartrcs in the west front 
(1225), and n England in those of Barfreston in Kent (1180) and 
Beverley Minster in Yorkshire (1220). plate-tracery of such ercat 
beauty is found that it is unfortunate it should have been entirely 
superseded by rib-tracery. The foae window of Lincoln Cathedral 
in the north transept is a compromise between the two, as all the 
lights are cut out mdcpendenUy and in one plane, but there are 
moulding round each connecteid with flowers; in its design and 
effect this window is far superior to the flamboyant circular window 
in the south transept. Sometimes a rose window is arranged in the 
upper portion of an ordinary window, as in the west front of Lichfield 
Cathearal, and this is constantly found in those of the transepts 
of the French cathedrab. In the south of Italy, at Ban, Bitonto 
and Troja, and at OrvietoandAssisi, farther north, thcreare examples 
of rose windows, but inferior in design to French and English work, 
though elaborated with carving, liie revival of the 16th century 
was fatal so far as tracery was concerned ; in the place of the flam- 
bo^nt work of the last phase of Gothi^-in France semicircular and 
elliptical curves with poor mouldings were introduced, and the 
elaboratecusping which gave such interest to the light was omitted 
altogether, as in St Eustache, Paris. There is, however, one remark- 
able example in the church of Le Grand Andcly, in Normandy, 
dating from the Henri II. period, in which a return was made to 
the tracery of the 13th century; but the introduction of Renaissance 
details in the place of the cusping b not altogether satisfactory, 
though the general design is fine. 

The tracery decorating the vault of Gothic work bc^n on the 
introduction of the fan vault at Gloucester (see Vault) ; it was only 
a surface decoration, both rib and web being cut out of the same 
block of stone, and it received further development in the various 
phases which followed. In the Utcr Perpendicular work the walls 
and buttresses were all panelled with blank tracery, the most com- 
plete example of whkh is found in Henry VII.''s chapel, Westminster 

In tabernacle work the tracery is purely of a decorative character, 
copied in miniature from the 'muUions, arch-moukls and crockets 
of Gothic work. 

Some of the most beautiful examples of tracery are those on the 
rood screens of churches, either in stone as in the Jub6 of the Made- 
leine at Troves, or in wood as in the ro